Today's Hours: 8:00am - 10:00pm

Books

all 829 "B" titles
  • Digital/Print
    Tomohiro Kurosaki, Jürgen Wienands, editors.
    Contents:
    Assembly and function of the precursor B-cell receptor
    Receptor Dissociation and B cell activation
    Molecular mechanisms of B cell antigen gathering and endocytosis
    BTK signaling in B cell differentiation and autoimmunity
    The memory function of the B cell antigen receptor
    PI3K signaling in normal B cells and chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL)
    Role of Calcium Signaling in B Cell Activation and Biolog
    Roles of the NF-kappaB pathway in B-lymphocyte biology
    MAP kinase cascades in antigen receptor signaling and physiology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Ji-Yang Wang.
    Summary: This book contains twelve chapters contributed by prestigious international experts who are at the forefront of B cell research, and aims to provide a cutting-edge and comprehensive overview of all aspects of B cells, including B cell development, maturation and activation, germinal center reaction, memory and plasma cell differentiation, and antibody-mediated positive and negative regulation of humoral immune responses. There are also three chapters describing human diseases caused by B cell abnormalities, including primary antibody deficiencies, autoimmune diseases, and B cell malignancies. We hope that this book will become a standard and routine reference for both basic researchers and clinicians.

    Contents:
    B cell development and maturation
    B cell receptor signalling
    Involvement of reactive oxygen species (ROS) in BCR signaling as a second messenger
    Germinal center reaction
    Memory B cells in local and systemic sites
    Regulation of plasma cell differentiation
    Regulation of humoral immune responses and B cell tolerance by the IgM Fc receptor
    Regulatory B cells
    Diversified IgA-bacteria interaction in gut homeostasis
    Primary antibody deficiencies
    B cell-mediated autoimmune diseases
    B cell lymphomas.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    by Tanya Altmann.
    Summary: This easy-to-use guide helps parents with evidence-based advice for dealing with the most common issues facing babies and toddlers, including breastfeeding, baby care, developmental stages, first aid and injuries, sleep, vaccines and more.

    Contents:
    Basic baby care
    Breastfeeding
    Formula feeding
    Beyond bottles and breastfeeding: starting solid foods
    Pooping
    Stomachaches and vomiting
    Fever
    Coughs, colds, and more
    Vaccines
    Skin
    Child care
    Ingestions, injuries, and first aid
    Growing up
    Sleep.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2018
  • Digital
    by Tanya Altmann
    Contents:
    Basic baby care
    Breastfeeding
    Formula feeding
    Beyond bottles and breastfeeding: starting solid foods
    Pooping
    Stomachaches and vomiting
    Fever
    Coughs, colds, and more
    Vaccines
    Skin
    Child care
    Ingestions, injuries, and first aid
    Growing up
    Sleep
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Digital
    M. Tofazzal Islam, M. Mahfuz Rahman, Piyush Pandey, Michael Henry Boehme, Geert Haesaert, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive resource for researchers and students involved with studying the roles of Bacilli in sustainable crop production technologies. Chapters included in the book not only elaborate on beneficial traits of Bacilli, but also highlight utilization of these microbes for producing industrially important antibiotics, enzymes, probiotics and other useful biochemicals. Feeding ever increasing world population from shrinking arable acreage led to a synthetic input (fertilizer, growth regulator, pesticide etc.) based crop production system, which has been creating both environmental and health hazards and may also make the whole production system unsustainable. Researchers, food producers and consumers alike, now realize that this world needs effective, environmentally smart agricultural technologies that are safe for people use less synthetic inputs and protect natural resources. To overcome the challenge of increasing food production with a significant reduction of agrochemicals use, a great deal of interest and research have been devoted to beneficial microorganisms/biostimulants in recent days with noteworthy positive results. Bacillus based biopesticide together with other bio-rational approaches may play a critical role in helping all the key drivers of sustainable, environmentally responsible food production with enhanced food quality. Although multiple strains of Bacillus spp. showed promise to contribute to the sustainable agriculture by making nutrients available to plants, providing additional defense to adverse abiotic and biotic stresses, research on Bacillus based product formulation, rate and crop selection, optimization of application timing are urgently needed. As crop plants are more vulnerable to abiotic and biotic stresses at the seedling stage, optimization of application timing should aid in alleviating those stresses for the successful completion of life cycle of a plant.

    Contents:
    1. Management of fungal diseases on cucumber (Cucumis sativus L.) and tomato (Solanum lycopersicum L.) crops in greenhouses using Bacillus subtilis
    2. Bacillus species: A potential plant growth regulator
    3. Bacilli in the Biocontrol of Mycotoxins
    4. Bacillus subtilis and its effect on the post-harvest of fruit and flowers
    5. Plant growth-promotion by ACC deaminase-producing Bacilli under salt stress conditions
    6. Bacillus subtilis-mediated Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Plant
    7. Exploring the Utility of Aneurinibacillus as a Bioinoculant for Sustainable Crop Production and Environmental Applications
    8. Phylogeny and Taxonomy of agriculturally important Bacillus species
    9. Endophytic Bacillus species induced systemic resistance to plant diseases
    10. Genomics and Post-genomics Approaches for Elucidating Molecular Mechanisms of Plant Growth Promoting Bacilli
    11. Tapping the Potential of Metabolomics in New Natural Products Discovery from Bacillus Species
    12. Genomic insights and comparative genomics of Bacillus species having diverse mechanisms of biocontrol against fungal phytopathogens
    13. Bacillus species as biocontrol agents for fungal plant pathogens
    14. Application Method and Efficacy of Bacillus spp in Mitigating Abiotic and Biotic Stresses and Enhancing Plant Performance
    15. Bacillus thuringiensis-based Gene Pyramiding a way Forward for a Combined Horizontal and Vertical Resistance in Plant
    16. Probiotic Bacilli in Sustainable Aquaculture.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Richard M. Schwend, William L. Hennrikus, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributor List
    Part I: Background
    Chapter 1: Epidemiology of Pediatric Back Pain
    Introduction
    Defining Back Pain
    Prevalence
    Back Pain
    Neck and Thoracic Pain
    Low Back Pain
    Incidence
    Pain Frequency, Duration, and Intensity
    Disability
    Medical Attention
    Natural History
    Risk Factors
    Physical Domain
    Trunk Muscles
    Trunk Mobility
    Posture
    Trunk Asymmetry
    Muscle and Joint Flexibility
    Trunk Stability
    Biological Domain
    Weight and Height
    Gender
    Family History
    Lifestyle Domain
    Activity Sedentary Activity
    Physical Activity
    Sport
    Occupational Activity
    Sleep
    Smoking and Alcohol
    Backpacks
    Psychosocial Domain
    Psychological, Behavioral, and Cognitive Factors
    Social Factors
    Approaching Back Pain from a Multidimensional Perspective
    Prevention
    Brief Summary
    Conclusion
    Editor Discussion
    References
    Chapter 2: Anatomy of the Pediatric Spine
    Cervical Spine (Fig. 2.5)
    Thoracic Spine (Fig. 2.3)
    Lumbar Spine (Fig. 2.6)
    Editor Discussion
    References Chapter 3: Medical and Non-surgical Conditions That Can Cause or Contribute to Back Pain in a Child or Adolescent
    Mechanical Back Pain (Non-specific or Muscular Back Pain)
    Scoliosis
    Back Pain in Children with Neuromuscular Disease
    Muscle Strain and Spasm
    Spondylolysis/Spondylolisthesis
    Scheuermann Disease
    Degenerative Disease
    Bertolotti Syndrome
    Spinal Dysraphism
    Benign but Locally Aggressive Tumors of the Spine
    Osteoid Osteoma/Osteoblastoma
    Histiocytosis
    Malignancy
    Leukemia
    Ewing Sarcoma
    Spinal Cord Tumor
    Infection
    Discitis
    Osteomyelitis Systemic Disease
    Osteoporosis/Metabolic Bone Disease
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Spondyloarthropathy
    Extra-skeletal Causes of Back Pain
    Editor Discussion
    References
    Chapter 4: History Evaluation of the Child or Adolescent with Back Pain Including Ten Red Flags
    Introduction
    Summary
    Editor Discussion
    References
    Chapter 5: Physical Examination of the Child or Adolescent with Back Pain
    Editor Discussion
    References
    Chapter 6: Radiologic Imaging and Laboratory Evaluation of Back Pain in Children and Adolescents
    Introduction
    Imaging
    Role of Plain Radiography Radiation Exposure
    Special Views
    Role of Computerized Tomography (CT Scan)
    Spinal Cord Injury Without Radiographic Abnormality (SCIWORA)
    Technetium Nuclear Bone Scan
    PET-CT
    Imaging Findings on Plain Radiography
    Initial Approach to Reading Plain Radiographs of the Spine
    Disc Disease and Schmorl's Nodes
    Fracture or Dislocation
    Scheuermann's Kyphosis
    Transitional Vertebra
    Spina Bifida Occulta
    Spondylolysis and Spondylolisthesis
    Spinal Deformity
    Vertebra Plana
    MRI
    Examples of Commonly Encountered Pediatric Variations and Abnormalities
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Richard H. Steckel, Ohio State University ; Clark Spencer Larsen, Ohio State University ; Charlotte A. Roberts, University of Durham ; Joerg Baten, Eberhard-Karls-Universität Tübingen, Germany
    Summary: Using human skeletal remains, this volume traces health, workload and violence in the European population over the past 2,000 years. Health was surprisingly good for people who lived during the early Medieval Period. The Plague of Justinian of the sixth century was ultimately beneficial for health because the smaller population had relatively more resources that contributed to better living conditions. Increasing population density and inequality in the following centuries imposed an unhealthy diet - poor in protein - on the European population. With the onset of the Little Ice Age in the late Middle Ages, a further health decline ensued, which was not reversed until the nineteenth century. While some aspects of health declined, other attributes improved. During the early modern period, interpersonal violence (outside of warfare) declined possibly because stronger states and institutions were able to enforce compromise and cooperation. European health over the past two millennia was hence multifaceted in nature.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital/Print
    A report by the Subcommittee on Problems of the Aged and Aging to the Committee on Labor and Public Welfare, United States Senate.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L966 .U57
    14
  • Print
    George Yancy ; foreword by Cornel West.
    Summary: "When George Yancy penned a New York Times op-ed entitled 'Dear White America' asking white Americans to confront the ways that they benefit from racism, he knew his article would be controversial. But he was unprepared for the flood of vitriol in response. The resulting blowback played out in the national media, with critics attacking Yancy in every form possible--including death threats--and supporters rallying to his side. Despite the rhetoric of a 'post-race' America, Yancy quickly discovered that racism is still alive, crude, and vicious in its expression. In Backlash, Yancy expands upon the original article and chronicles the ensuing controversy as he seeks to understand what it was about the op-ed that created so much rage among so many white readers. He challenges white Americans to rise above the vitriol and to develop a new empathy for the African American experience."--Jacket.

    Contents:
    Foreword: The end of white innocence / Cornel West
    Introduction: Talking about racism: when honesty feels like too much to bear
    The letter: Dear white America
    Dear nigger professor
    Risking the white self
    Accepting the gift.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E185.615 .Y36 2018
    1
  • Print
    edited by I.C. Gunsalus, Roger Y. Stanier.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Structure
    v. 2. Metabolism
    v. 3. Biosynthesis
    v. 4. The Physiology of growth
    v. 5. Heredity
    v. 6 Bacterial diversity
    v. 7 Mechanisms of adaptation
    v. 8 Archaebacteria
    v. 10. The Biology of pseudomonas.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    G41 .G97
    5
  • Digital
    editors, Pascale Cossart, Institut Pasteur, Paris, France, Craig R. Roy, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, Connecticut, Philippe Sansonetti, Institut Pasteur, Paris, France.
    Summary: "In launching this book, we wanted to cover many aspects and mechanisms of cellular microbiology, but more importantly, we intended to show that cellular microbiology as a field has reached maturity, extending beyond the strictly cellular level to infections of various organs and tissues. Many model organisms (Yersinia, Salmonella, Shigella, and Listeria, among others) are foodborne pathogens, and tremendous progress has been achieved in deciphering how, when, and where bacteria interact with the gut. However, intestinal cells and the intestine are not the only cells and organs discussed in this book. There are also chapters on infections of the urogenital tract, the endothelial barriers, the nervous system, and the lungs. Progress in the latter two concern important public health infections produced by Mycobacterium leprae and Mycobacterium tuberculosis. These two bacteria, which were at first much more difficult to manipulate than Escherichia coli, are now genetically tractable, and their study can now benefit from all the techniques and approaches established with less fastidious bacteria"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2019
  • Print
    edited by Edward R. Leadbetter and Jeanne S. Poindexter.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Bacterial activities in perspective.--
    v. 2. Methods and special applications in bacterial ecology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QR100 .B33
    2
  • Digital
    Santi M. Mandal, Debarati Paul, editors.
    Summary: The proposed book aims to understand the mechanism of survival of microorganisms in response to chemical stress in various ecological niches that suffer direct human intervention, more so the agricultural, domestic and hospital settings. Microbicides (e.g. disinfectants, antiseptics, fungicides, algaecides, insecticides and pesticides) are used rampantly to control undesirable microbes. Insecticides and pesticides are routinely used in agriculture which directly affect the microbial population in farms, orchards and fields. Health care environments are always stressed with disinfectants and antibiotics. It is always probable that microbicide-stressed microorganisms are in a dynamic state, displaced from one niche to the other. Some soil and water borne bacteria or their resistance determinants are also getting prominence in hospital settings after suffering selective pressure from agricides. In order to reveal the survival strategies of microbicidal-resistant microbes, it is of prime importance to know the mode of action of these complete range of microbicides (agricides to antibiotics). The present book intends to address these issues. There will be several chapters dealing with tolerance and cross resistance in microbes and bacteria in particular, dwelling in various niches. Till date, there is no consensus among scientists in theorizing molecular mechanisms to explain bacterial tolerance and their cross resistance to agricides and antibiotics.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Plasmids: The necessary Knowledge Wealth for Encountering Antibiotic-Resistance menace
    Chapter 2. Disinfectants amend the expression of membrane bound efflux transporters to augment antimicrobial resistance
    Chapter 3. Knowledge gaps and research needs in bacterial co-resistance in the environment
    Chapter 4. Microbial resistance to Antibiotics
    Chapter 5. Do non-medical uses of antibiotics develop cross-resistance in clinical pathogens?
    Chapter 6. Biofilms in antimicrobial activity and drug resistance
    Chapter 7. GAntimicrobial resistance in microbes: Mode of action of TolC like protein and their mechanism of regulating stress resistance and physiology
    Chapter 8. Efflux mediated co-resistance
    Chapter 9. Biofilm and Antibiotic resistance in Acinetobacter baumannii
    Chapter 10. Mechanism of bacterial co-resistance
    Chapter 11. Antibiotics and Microbial Antibiotic Resistance in Soil
    Chapter 12. Microbial adaptation and resistance to pesticides
    Chapter 13. Antimicrobial agents used in food preservation or as agricides and effect on microbes in developing antimicrobial resistance
    Chapter 14. Molecular Mechanisms of Action and Resistance of Antimalarial drugs
    Chapter 15. Management and control of antimalarial drug resistance.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Kumaran Narayanan, Monash University Malaysia, Bandar Sunway, Malaysia, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, USA.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Andreas Kuhn.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date overview of the architecture and biosynthesis of bacterial and archaeal cell walls, highlighting the evolution-based similarities in, but also the intriguing differences between the cell walls of Gram-negative bacteria, the Firmicutes and Actinobacteria, and the Archaea. The recent major advances in this field, which have brought to light many new structural and functional details, are presented and discussed. Over the past five years, a number of novel systems, e.g. for lipid, porin and lipopolysaccharide biosynthesis have been described. In addition, new structural achievements with periplasmic chaperones have been made, all of which have revealed amazing details on how bacterial cell walls are synthesized. These findings provide an essential basis for future research, e.g. the development of new antibiotics. The books content is the logical continuation of Volume 84 of SCBI (on Prokaryotic Cytoskeletons), and sets the stage for upcoming volumes on Protein Complexes.

    Contents:
    The bacterial cell wall and membrane
    a treasure chest for antibiotic targets
    Lipopolysaccharide biosynthesis and transport to the outer membrane of Gram-negative bacteria
    Lipoproteins: structure, function, biosynthesis
    Outer membrane porins
    Peptidoglycan
    The Periplasmic Chaperones Skp and SurA
    Bacterial signal peptidases
    Carbohydrate Transport by Group Translocation: The Bacterial Phosphoenolpyruvate : Sugar Phosphotransferase System
    Secondary active transporters
    Respiratory membrane protein complexes convert chemical energy
    Inner membrane translocases and insertases
    The biosynthesis and structures of bacterial pili
    Cell Walls and Membranes of Actinobacteria
    Archaeal cell walls.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Anjali A. Satoskar, Tibor Nadasdy, editors.
    Contents:
    Acute Poststreptococcal Glomerulonephritis
    Staphylococcus Infection-Associated Glomerulonephritis
    Glomerulonephritis Associated with Other Bacterial Infections
    Endocarditis-Associated Glomerulonephritis
    The Management of Bacterial Infection-Associated Glomerulonephritis
    Infection-Associated Thrombotic Microangiopathy
    Direct Bacterial Infection of the Renal Parenchyma: Pyelonephritis in Native Kidneys.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Maria Kaparakis-Liaskos, Thomas A. Kufer, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the multitude of functions bacterial membrane vesicles perform in bacterial ecology and pathogenesis as well as in emerging medical and biotechnological applications. Both Gram-negative and Gram-positive bacteria produce membrane-bound nanostructures, known as membrane vesicles, which have a range of functions that include serving as delivery vehicles, providing a means of communication over both spatial and temporal scales, and contributing to bacterial survival and evolution. Topics covered in this book range from the biogenesis and composition of bacterial membrane vesicles to their abundance and biological roles in microbial ecosystems, such as marine environments. In the individual chapters, the involvement of bacterial membrane vesicles in host-pathogen interactions, promoting virulence and in facilitating the establishment of infection is explained. In addition, current knowledge regarding membrane vesicles produced by commensal bacteria and their role in the maturation of the host immune system, as well as the therapeutic potential of bacterial membrane vesicles as delivery systems and innovative nanotechnology-based therapeutics are discussed. This work appeals to a wide readership of students and researchers interested in microbial ecology, mechanism underlying pathogenesis and new avenues in applied microbiology and nanotechnology.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    Chapter 1: Introduction, History, and Discovery of Bacterial Membrane Vesicles
    1.1 Introduction to Gram-Negative OMVs
    1.1.1 The First Observations of OMVs
    1.1.2 Advances in OMV Research
    1.1.3 Outer Membrane Vesicles Research in the Last Decade
    1.1.4 Biogenesis of OMVs
    1.1.5 Outer Membrane Vesicles in Bacterial Communication
    1.1.6 Outer Membrane Vesicles in Host-Pathogen Interactions
    1.1.7 Distribution of OMVs in the Environment
    1.2 Introduction to Gram-Positive MVs 1.2.1 Production and Biogenesis of Gram-Positive MVs
    1.2.2 Contents of Gram-Positive MVs
    1.2.3 Role of MVs in Inter-Bacterial Communication
    1.2.4 Role of MVs in Host-Pathogen Interactions
    1.3 Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 2: Biogenesis of Gram-Negative OMVs
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Modulation of Outer Membrane-Peptidoglycan Linkages
    2.2.1 Braunś Lipoprotein (Lpp)
    2.2.2 Outer Membrane Protein A (OmpA)
    2.2.3 Tol-Pal Complex
    2.3 Bacterial Stress Responses Affecting Vesiculation
    2.3.1 Envelope Stress Response
    2.3.2 Cell Wall-Directed Agents 2.3.3 SOS Response and Bacteriophages
    2.4 Filamentous or Tubular Surface Structures
    2.5 Modulation of Outer Membrane Components or Composition
    2.5.1 Pseudomonas Quinolone Signal (PQS)
    2.5.2 LPS Modifications
    2.5.2.1 Lipid A Modifications
    2.5.2.2 LPS Core Modifications
    2.5.2.3 O-Antigen Modifications
    2.5.3 Modulation of Phospholipid Composition
    2.6 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Biogenesis and Function of Extracellular Vesicles in Gram-Positive Bacteria, Mycobacteria, and Fungi
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Evidence for MVs in Cell-Walled Organisms 3.3 Methods for the Study of MVs in Organisms with a Thick Cell Wall
    3.3.1 Methods of Isolation
    3.3.2 Cargo Identification
    3.3.2.1 Identification of MV-Associated Proteins
    3.3.2.2 Identification of MV-Associated Lipids
    3.3.2.3 Identification of MV-Associated Nucleic Acids
    3.3.3 Quantification, Labeling, and Visualization of MVs
    3.4 Mechanisms of MV Biogenesis in Cell-Walled Microorganisms
    3.4.1 Fungi
    3.4.2 Gram-Positive Bacteria and Mycobacteria
    3.5 MV Cargo
    3.5.1 Fungi
    3.5.2 Gram-Positive Bacteria
    3.5.3 Mycobacteria 3.6 Cell-Walled Organisms-Derived MV Functions
    3.6.1 Fungi
    3.6.2 Gram-Positive Bacteria
    3.6.3 Mycobacteria
    3.7 MVs in Medicine
    3.7.1 Clinical Implications of MVs
    3.7.2 MVs as Vaccine
    3.7.3 MVs in Biofilm Production
    3.7.4 MVs in Diagnosis
    3.8 Unsolved Problems and Concluding Remarks
    3.8.1 Cell Wall Transport
    3.8.2 Mechanism of Vesicle Production and Sorting Contents
    3.8.3 Role of Vesicles in Pathogenesis and Vaccines
    3.9 Concluding Remarks
    References
    Chapter 4: Extracellular Vesicles in the Environment
    4.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Alessio Mengoni, Marco Galardini, Marco Fondi.
    Contents:
    Pulsed field gel electrophoresis and genome size estimates/ Rosa Alduina and Annalisa Pisciotta
    Comparative analyses of extrachromosomal bacterial replicons, identification of chromids, and experimental evaluation of their indispensability / Lukasz Dziewit and Dariusz Bartosik
    Choice of next-generation sequencing pipelines / F. Del Chierico ... [et al.]
    Pyrosequencing protocol for bacterial genomes / Ermanno Rizzi
    Bacterial metabarcoding by 16S rRNA gene ion torrent amplicon sequencing / Elio Fantini ... [et al.]
    Illumina-solexa sequencing protocol for bacterial genomes / Zhenfei Hu, Lei Cheng, and Hai Wang
    High-throughput phenomics / Carlo Viti ... [et al.]
    Comparative analysis of gene expression : uncovering expression conservation and divergence between Salmonella enterica serovar typhimurium strains LT2 and 14028S / Paolo Sonego ... [et al.]
    Raw sequence data and quality control / Giovanni Bacci
    Methods for assembling reads and producing contigs / Valerio Orlandini, Marco Fondi, and Renato Fani
    Mapping contigs using CONTIGuator / Marco Galardini, Alessio Mengoni, and Marco Bazzicalupo
    Gene calling and bacterial genome annotation with BG7 / Raquel Tobes ... [et al.]
    Defining orthologs and pangenome size metrics / Emanuele Bosi, Renato Fani, and Marco Fondi
    Robust identification of orthologues and paralogues for microbial pan-genomics using GET HOMOLOGUES : a case study of pIncA/C plasmids / Pablo Vinuesa and Bruno Contreras-Moreira
    Genome-scale metabolic network reconstruction / Marco Fondi and Pietro Liò
    From pangenome to panphenome and back / Marco Galardini, Alessio Mengoni, and Stefano Mocali
    Genome-wide detection of selection and other evolutionary forces / Zhuofei Xu and Rui Zhou
    Integrated microbial genome resource of analysis / Alice Checcucci and Alessio Mengoni.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Brenda A. Wilson, Malcolm E. Winkler, Brian T. Ho.
    Summary: "Completely revised and updated, and for the first time in stunning full-color, Bacterial Pathogenesis: A Molecular Approach, Fourth Edition, builds on the core principles and foundations of its predecessors while expanding into new concepts, key findings, and cutting-edge research, including new developments in the areas of the microbiome and CRISPR as well as the growing challenges of antimicrobial resistance. All-new detailed illustrations help students clearly understand important concepts and mechanisms of the complex interplay between bacterial pathogens and their hosts. Study questions at the end of each chapter challenge students to delve more deeply into the topics covered, and hone their skills in reading, interpreting, and analyzing data, as well as devising their own experiments. A detailed glossary defines and expands on key terms highlighted throughout the book. Written for advanced undergraduate, graduate, and professional students in microbiology, bacteriology, and pathogenesis, this text is a must-have for anyone looking for a greater understanding of virulence mechanisms across the breadth of bacterial pathogens."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The power of bacteria
    Skin and mucosa: the first lines of defense against bacterial infections
    The innate immune system: always on guard
    The adaptive defenses: antibodies and cytotoxic T cells
    The microbiota of the human body: microbiomes and beyond
    Microbes and disease: establishing a connection
    Mechanisms of genetic modification and exchange: role in pathogen evolution
    Identification of virulence factors: measuring infectivity and virulence
    Identification of virulence factors: molecular approaches for bacterial factors
    Identification of virulence factors: molecular approaches for host factors
    Bacterial strategies for colonization and survival in the host
    Toxins and other toxic virulence factors
    Delivery of virulence factors
    Virulence regulation
    Antimicrobial compounds and their targets
    Antibiotic resistance
    Vaccination: a critical component of the modern medical armamentarium
    The gram-positive opportunistic pathogens
    The gram-negative opportunistic pathogens
    The changing roles of microbiologists in an age of bioterrorism and emerging diseases
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    edited by Jan Michiels and Maarten Fauvart.
    Contents:
    Historical perspective on bacterial persistence / Natalie Verstraeten ... [et al.]
    Persisters : methods for isolation and identifying contributing factors-a review / Sarah E. Rowe ... [et al.]
    General method for measuring persister levels in Escherichia coli cultures / Niilo Kaldalu ... [et al.]
    Optimized method for measuring persistence in Escherichia coli with improved reproducibility / F. Goormaghtigh and L. Van Melderen
    Microplate-based system as in vitro model of biofilm growth and quantification / Ilse Vandecandelaere, Heleen Van Acker, and Tom Coenye
    Protocol for determination of the persister subpopulation in Candida Albicans biofilms / Katrijn De Brucker ... [et al.]
    Quantitative measurements of type I and type II persisters using ScanLag / Irit Levin-Reisman and Nathalie Q. Balaban
    Analyzing persister physiology with fluorescence-activated cell sorting / Mehmet A. Orman ... [et al.]
    Single-cell detection and collection of persister bacteria in a directly accessible femtoliter droplet array / Ryota Iino ... [et al.]
    Whole-cell-based high-throughput screening method to identify molecules targeting Pseudomonas Aeruginosa persister cells / Veerle Liebens, Valerie Defraine, and Maarten Fauvart
    Functional analysis of the role of toxin-antitoxin (TA) loci in bacterial persistence / Aaron T. Butt and Richard W. Titball
    Experimental evolution of Escherichia coli persister levels using cyclic antibiotic treatments / Bram Van den Bergh, Joran E. Michiels, and Jan Michiels
    In vitro models for the study of the intracellular activity of antibiotics / Julien M. Buyck ... [et al.]
    Murine model for Escherichia coli urinary tract infection / Thomas J. Hannan and David A. Hunstad
    Analysis of macrophage-induced Salmonella persisters / Robert A. Fisher, Angela M. Cheverton, and Sophie Helaine
    Population dynamics analysis of ciprofloxacin-persistent S. Typhimurium cells in a mouse model for Salmonella diarrhea / Patrick Kaiser, Roland R. Regoes, and Wolf-Dietrich Hardt
    Computational methods to model persistence / Alexandra Vandervelde ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Irina Artsimovitch, Thomas J. Santangelo.
    Contents:
    Mapping the Escherichia coli transcription elongation complex with exonuclease III / Zhaokun Liu and Irina Artsimovitch
    Purification of bacterial RNA polymerase : tools and protocols / Vladimir Svetlov and Irina Artsimovitch
    Monitoring translocation of multisubunit RNA polymerase along the DNA with fluorescent base analogues / Anssi M. Malinen, Matti Turtola, and Georgiy A. Belogurov
    In vitro and in vivo methodologies for studying the sigma-54-dependent transcription / Martin Buck [and nine others]
    Methods for the assembly and analysis of in vitro transcription-coupled-to-translation systems / Daniel Castro-Roa and Nikolay Zenkin
    Site-specific incorporation of probes into RNA polymerase by unnatural-amino-acid mutagenesis and Straudinger-Bertozzi ligation / Anirban Chakraborty [and seven others]
    Reconstruction of factor-dependent, promotor proximal pausing in Drosophila nuclear extracts / Jian Li and David S. Gilmour
    Direct competition assay for transcription fidelity / Lucyna Lubkowska and Maria L. Kireeva
    Single-stranded DNA aptamers for functional probing of bacterial RNA polymerase / Danil Pupov and Andrey Kulbachinskiy
    Biochemical analysis of transcription termination by RNA polymerase III from yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae / Aneeshkumar G. Arimbasseri and Richard J. Maraia
    Use of RNA polymerase molecular beacon assay to measure RNA polymerase interactions with model promotor fragments / Vladimir Mekler and Konstantin Severinov
    Preparation of cDNA libraries for high-throughput RNA sequencing analysis of RNA 5' ends / Irina O. Vvedenskaya, Seth R. Goldman, and Bryce E. Nickels
    In situ footprinting of E. coli transcription elongation complex with chloroacetaldehyde / A. Rachid Rahmouni and Christine Mosrin-Hauman
    Using solutes and kinetics to probe large conformational changes in the steps of transcription initiation / Emily F. Ruff, Wayne S. Kontur, and M. Thomas Record Jr.
    Manipulating archaeal systems to permit analyses of transcription elongation-termination decisions in vitro / Alexandra M. Gehring and Thomas J. Santangelo
    Purification of active RNA polymerase I from yeast / Francis Dean Appling and David Alan Schneider
    Transcription in archaea : preparation of Methanocaldococcus jannaschii transcription machinery / Katherine Smollet, Fabian Blombach, and Finn Werner
    Transcription in archaea ; in vitro transcription assays for mjRNAP / Katherine Smollet, Fabian Blombach, and Finn Werner
    Experimental analysis of hFACT action during pol II transcription in vitro / Fu-Kai Hsieh, Olga I. Kulaeva, and Vasily M. Studitsky
    ChIP-Seq for genome-scale analysis of bacterial DNA-binding proteins / Richard P. Bonocora and Joseph T. Wade.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Samuel Wagner, Jorge E. Galan, editors.
    Summary: One of the most exciting developments in the field of bacterial pathogenesis in recent years is the discovery that many pathogens utilize complex nanomachines to deliver bacterially encoded effector proteins into eukaryotic and prokaryotic target cells to modulate a variety of cellular functions for the pathogens benefit. These protein-delivery machines include the type III secretion system (T3SS), which is widespread in nature and encoded not only by bacteria pathogenic to vertebrates or plants, but also by bacteria that are symbiotic to plants or insects. Because they are essential virulence factors for many important human pathogens, these systems are emerging as a prime target for the development of new-generation, anti-infective drugs. This book reviews our current understanding of these intriguing injection machines as well as of the closely related T3SS that serves in flagella assembly. Individual chapters focus on regulation, assembly, structure, and function of the type III secretion machine and on the evolution of the secreted effector proteins. Given its scope, this book will appeal to a broad readership, including researchers and teachers in the fields of infectious diseases, host pathogen interactions, plant and animal pathogenesis, and symbiosis.
  • Digital
    Anthony William Maresso.
    Summary: This textbook introduces in an engaging way the fundamentals of how pathogenic bacteria interact with, and are virulent within, the human host. To inspire and educate the next generation of microbe hunters, the author, Microbiologist and Scientist Anthony William Maresso, integrates the major findings of the field into a single, easy-to-understand volume emphasizing a molecular appreciation of the concepts underlying bacterial infectious diseases. The work explores such themes as the history of Microbiology, bacterial structure and physiology, bacterial toxins, secretion systems, and adhesins, the host immune system and its battle with bacteria, biofilms, sepsis, and technologies/techniques to the present day. Fully illustrated in concept and packed with idea-provoking challenges highlighting "out-of-the-box" thinking, the work moves beyond being just a review of the scientific literature intent on equipping the next generation of Microbiologists and their teachers with the knowledge to confront, and hopefully one day defeat, the insidious microbes which undermine human health. This textbook is a resource for undergraduate, graduate, and medical students, as well as other health-oriented learners, postdoctoral scholars, basic scientists, and professors intent on expanding their knowledge of bacterial infection and virulence mechanisms.

    Contents:
    1. A Short History of Microbiology
    2. The Form and Function of a Bacterial Cell
    3. The Practice of the Microbe Hunter
    4. Innate Immunological Defenses against Bacterial Attack
    5. Adaptive Immunological Defenses against Bacterial Attack
    6. The Mutagenic Tetrasect7. Bacterial Bindance: Adhesins and their Engagement to Host
    8. Bacterial Invasion of the Host Cell
    9. Bacterial Secretion Systems
    10. Bacterial Protein Toxins and Effectors
    11. The Acquisition and Consumption of Host Nutrients.-12. Biofilms
    13. The Human Microbiome
    14. Sepsis
    15. Bacterial Vaccines and the Challenges Ahead
    16. Antibiotics ... and their destruction.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    David R. Harper, Stephen T. Abedon, Benjamin H. Burrowes, Malcolm L. McConville.
    Summary: This first major reference work dedicated to the mannifold industrial and medical applications of bacteriophages provides both theoretical and practical insights into the emerging field of bacteriophage biotechnology. The book introduces to bacteriophage biology, ecology and history and reviews the latest technologies and tools in bacteriophage detection, strain optimization and nanotechnology. Usage of bacteriophages in food safety, agriculture, and different therapeutic areas is discussed in detail. This book serves as essential guide for researchers in applied microbiology, biotechnology and medicine coming from both academia and industry.

    Contents:
    Bacteriophage Biology
    History of Bacteriophages
    Bacteriophage Technology
    Agriculture, Food and Environmental Use of Bacteriophages
    Therapeutic Use of Bacteriophages.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jonas T. Johnson, Clark A. Rosen; illustrations by Victoria J. Forber, Anthony Pazos, and Christine Gralapp.
    Contents:
    Basic science/general medicine
    Rhinology and allergy
    General otolaryngology
    Laryngology
    Trauma
    Pediatric otolaryngology
    Head and neck surgery
    Sleep medicine
    Otology
    Facial plastic and reconstructive surgery
    Contemporary issues in medical practice.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    Clark A. Rosen, Jonas T. Johnson.
    Contents:
    Basic science general medicine
    Rhinology and allergy
    General otolaryngology
    Laryngology
    Trauma
    Pediatric otolaryngology
    Head and neck surgery
    Sleep medicine
    Otology
    Facial plastic and reconstructive surgery
    Contemporary issues in medical practice.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    3
  • Digital
    edited by Brian L. Day, Stephen R. Lord.
    Summary: "Balance, Gait, and Falls, Volume 159 presents the latest information on sensorimotor anatomy, sensory integration, gravity and verticality, standing balance, balance perturbations, voluntary stepping and gait initiation, gait and gait adaptability, disorders of balance and gait that result from aging and neurological diseases. The book provides a brief overview of age-related changes in the structure and function of sensorimotor and central processes, with sections specifically devoted to Parkinson's disease, parkinsonism, cerebellar ataxia, stroke, corticobasal degeneration, multiple sclerosis, Huntington's disease, dystonia, tremor, Alzheimer's disease, frontotemporal dementia, cerebral palsy, polio, motor neuron disease, brainstem lesions, spinal lesions, peripheral nerve disease, and psychogenic conditions. Diseases covered have a common structure comprising background and epidemiology, pathology, balance disorders, gait disorders, falls, therapies (including fall prevention), and future directions"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section I. Basic aspects. Sensorimotor anatomy of gait, balance and falls
    Sensory integration for human balance control
    Gravity estimation and verticality perception
    Sensorimotor control of standing balance
    Balance Perturbations
    Voluntary steps and gait initiation
    Gait
    Gait adaptability
    Ecology of Falls
    Section II. Clinical aspects. Ageing
    Parkinson's disease
    Falls in frontotemporal dementia and related syndromes
    Stroke
    Dystonia
    Balance, gait and falls in multiple sclerosis
    Gait, balance and falls in Huntington disease
    Cerebellar ataxia
    Tremor
    Dementia
    Cerebral palsy
    Poliomyelitis
    Motor neurone disease
    Brainstem lesions and gait
    Balance, gait and falls in spinal cord injury
    Disorders of the inner ear balance organs and their pathways
    Peripheral nerve disease
    Functional (psychogenic) gait disorder: Diagnosis and management.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Amos Laar.
    Summary: Responding to public health challenges at the global and local levels can give rise to an array of tensions. To assure sustainable public health, these tensions need to be meaningfully balanced. Using empirical evidence and lived experiences relating to HIV from the global south, this book enunciates the many dimensions of national-level responses to HIV/AIDS including conceptual, philosophical, and methodological perspectives from public health, public policy, bioethics, and social sciences. Calling out glaring neglects, the book makes a bold recommendation for the destabilization of the naturalness with which national HIV/AIDS responses ignore the socio-political and medico-ethical dimensions of HIV. The case made is grounded in the philosophy of social public health. Such a critical perspective is not unique to Ghana's response to HIV/AIDS but serves as emblematic voice for similarly situated settings of the global south. The book is also timely. It is written at a time when public health actors are repositioning themselves to be competent users of not only pharmaceutic vaccines, but also social vaccines. Topics explored in the chapters include: Public health approaches to HIV and AIDS Access to life-saving public health goods by persons infected or affected by HIV "They are criminals" : AIDS, the law, harm reduction, and the socially excluded Developing socially and ethically responsive National AIDS policies Balancing the Socio-political and Medico-ethical Dimensions of HIV: A Social Public Health Approach is compelling reading for a broad spectrum of readers. The book will appeal to professionals, scholars, and students in public health, public policy, bioethics, and social sciences, as well as medical anthropologists, sociologists, and global health scholars. Public health economists, lay politicians, and civil society organizations advocating for health equity will find the book useful as well. .

    Contents:
    CHAPTER 1: The practice of public health
    CHAPTER 2: Public health approaches to HIV and AIDS
    CHAPTER 3: HIV interventions: which should count? which should not? And why not?
    CHAPTER 4: Access to life-saving public health goods by persons infected or affected by HIV
    CHAPTER 5: "They are criminals" : AIDS, the law, harm reduction, and the socially excluded
    CHAPTER 6: Developing socially and ethically responsive National AIDS policies
    CHAPTER 7: Making National HIV/AIDS response responsive to social public health: Lessons from Ghana.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    John Breeze, Jowan G. Penn-Barwell, Damian Keene, David O'Reilly, Jeyasankar Jeyanathan, Peter F. Mahoney, editors.
    Summary: This revised fourth edition provides a concise guide to the clinical and operational issues surrounding the management of the ballistic casualty. This book utilises the knowledge and experience acquired by those dealing with ballistic trauma on a regular basis to help those who manage these patients less regularly. This book is a valuable reference tool for all medical and paramedical personnel involved in the care of patients with ballistic injury. It is especially relevant for consultants and senior trainees in surgery, anesthesia, and emergency medicine who are likely to be involved in the management of these unique injuries.

    Contents:
    A personal experience / Benoît Vivien
    Firearms and bullets / Jowan G. Penn-Barwell, Aimee E. Helliker
    Fragmenting munitions / John Breeze, Arul Ramasamy
    Suicide bombs / Piers Page, Johno Breeze
    The effect of projectiles on tissues / Jowan G. Penn-Barwell, Tom Stevenson
    Personal armour used by uk armed forces and uk police forces / Eluned A. Lewis, Johno Breeze, Chris Malbon, Debra J. Carr
    Triage / Ed Barnard, Jamie Vassallo
    Prehospital management of ballistic injury / Ravi Chauhan, Damian Keene
    Emergency department management / Jason Smith
    Radiology and ballistic trauma / David Gay, Iain Gibb
    Damage control resuscitation / Damian Keene
    Anaesthesia and analgesia / Mark Davies, Jeyasankar Jeyanathan
    Damage control surgery and ballistic injury to the trunk / David O'Reilly
    Management of ballistic trauma to the head / Stuart A.G. Roberts
    Penetrating ballistic spinal injury / Stuart Harrisson
    Ophthalmic injury / Richard J. Blanch
    Ballistic maxillofacial trauma / Johno Breeze, Darryl Tong, Andrew Gibbons
    Penetrating neck injury / Johno Breeze, David Powers
    Management of vascular trauma / Claire Webster, Thomas C. K̲önig
    Angus campbell, davendra sharma
    Ballistic wound management and infection prevention / Jowan G. Penn-Barwell, C. Anton Fries, R.F. Rickard
    Human factors in ballistic trauma / Simon J. Mercer
    Management of paediatric trauma in an austere environment / William Tremlett, Johno Breeze, G. Suren Arul
    Ballistic trauma in pregnancy / Tracy-Louise Appleyard
    Managing ballistic injury in the ngo environment. A personal view / David Nott
    Forensic aspects of ballistic injury / Jeanine Vellema, Hendrik Scholtz
    Critical care for ballistic trauma / Andrew McDonald Johnston
    Transfer and evacuation / Ian Ewington
    Soft tissue reconstruction / C.A. Fries, M.R. Davis, R.F. Rickard
    Skeletal reconstruction / Daniel J. Stinner, David J. Tennent
    Amputation / Jowan G. Penn-Barwell, Jon Kendrew, Ian D. Sargeant
    Conflict rehabilitation / Alex Scott, John Etherington.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Francesco Saia, Nazzareno Galiè, Hiromi Matsubara, editors.
    Summary: The only curative treatment currently available for chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension (CTEPH) is surgical pulmonary endoarterectomy (PEA). However, several patients may have high risk factors for surgery, or a peripheral disease not amenable to surgical treatment; or else a residual pulmonary hypertension after PEA. Balloon pulmonary angioplasty (BPA) was recently developed to offer an alternative treatment for these patients. Extensive data has since confirmed the efficacy and relative safety of this procedure. However, there are several technical issues that have yet to be resolved. In addition, many cardiologists and pneumologists still know very little about the procedure itself and its potential. Exploring the clinical indications and technical aspects of BPA, this book offers a valuable reference guide for all those who would like to introduce or improve a BPA program, and for all those whose work involves treating this complex patient population.

    Contents:
    1 Epidemiology and pathophysiology of CTEPH
    2 Diagnosis of CTEPH
    3 Pulmonary Thromboendoaterectomy: the only cure for CTEPH
    4 Medical treatment of CTEPH
    5 Development of Balloon Pulmonary Angioplasty in CTEPH: an historical perspective
    6 Balloon pulmonary angioplasty in CTEPH: modern technique
    7 Balloon pulmonary angioplasty: clinical outcomes
    8 Lesion classification in CTEPH with an interventional perspective
    9 Advanced non-invasive imaging to guide BPA
    10 Use of intravascular imaging and pressure guide during BPA
    11 Balloon pulmonary angioplasty in proximal lesions
    12 Metrics for success of balloon pulmonary angioplasty in CTEPH
    13 Management of complications during balloon pulmonary angioplasty in CTEPH
    14 BPA in CTEPH: next steps?
    15 CTEPH and chronic thromboembolic disease (CTED): clinical and interventional perspective.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Susan K. Buchanan, Nicholas Noinaj.
    Contents:
    The [beta]-barrel assembly machinery complex / Denise L. Leyton, Matthew J. Belousoff, and Trevor Lithgow
    Yeast mitochondria as a model system to study the biogenesis of bacterial [beta]-barrel proteins / Thomas Ulrich [and three others]
    Experimental methods for studying the BAM complex in Neisseria meningitides / Martine P. Bos, Ria Tommassen-van Boxtel, and Jan Tommassen
    Heart modifiability of outer membrane proteins from gram-negative bacteria / Nicholas Noinaj, Adam J. Kuszak, and Susan K. Buchanan
    The role of a destabilized membrane of OMP insertion / Ashlee M. Plummer, Dennis Gessmann, and Karen G. Fleming
    Treponema pallidum in gel microdroplets: a method for topological analysis of BamA (TP0326) and localization of rare outer membrane proteins / Amit Luthra, Arvind Anand, and Justin D. Radolf
    Analyzing the role of periplasmic folding factors in the biogenesis of OMPs and members of the Type V secretion system / Gustavo Bodelón, Elvira Marín, and Luis Ángel Fernandez
    An in vitro assay for substrate translocation by FhaC in liposomes / Enguo Fan, Derrick Norell, and Matthias Müller
    Measuring cell-cell binding using flow-cytometry / Zachary C. Ruhe, Christopher S. Hayes, and David A. Low
    Methods to characterize folding and function of BamA cross-link mutants / Adam J. Kuszak, Nicholas Noinaj, and Susan K. Buchanan
    Small angle X-ray scattering (SAXS) characterization of the POTRA domains of BamA / Pamela Arden Doerner and Marcelo Carlos Sousa
    Assessing the outer membrane insertion and folding of multimeric transmembrane [beta]-barrel proteins / Jack C. Leo, Philipp Oberhettinger, and Dirk Linke
    The expression, purification, and structure determination of BamA from E. coli / Dongchun Ni and Yihua Huang
    Expression and purification of the individual Bam components BamB-E / Suraaj Aulakh, Kelly H. Kim, and Mark Paetzel
    Structure determination of the BAM complex accessory lipoproteins BamB-E / Kornelius Zeth
    An in vitro assay for outer membrane protein assembly by the BAM complex / Giselle Roman-Hernandez and Harris D. Bernstein
    Identification of BamC on the surface of E. coli / Chaille T. Webb and Trevor Lithgow
    Construction and characterization of an E. coli bamD depletion strain / Dante R. Ricci
    Expression, purification, and screening of BamE, a component of the BAM complex, for structural characterization / Mark Jeeves, Pooja Sridhar, and Timothy J. Knowles
    Purification and bicelle crystallization for structure determination of the E. coli outer membrane protein TamA / Fabian Gruss, Sebastian Hiller, and Timm Maier
    Strategies for the analysis of Bam recognition motifs in outer membrane proteins / Nagarajan Paramasivam and Dirk Linke
    Summary and future directions / Nicholas Noinaj and Susan K. Buchanan
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    S. Kim Suvarna, Christopher Layton, John D. Bancroft.
    Summary: "For 40 years, Bancroft's Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques has established itself as the standard reference for histotechnologists and laboratory scientists, as well as histopathologists. With coverage of the full range of histological techniques used in medical laboratories and pathology departments, it provides a strong foundation in all aspects of histological technology - from basic methods of section preparation and staining, to advanced diagnostic techniques such as immunocytochemistry and molecular testing. This revised and updated 8th Edition by Kim S. Suvarna, Christopher Layton, and John D. Bancroft is a one-stop reference for all those involved with histological preparations and applications, from student to highly advanced laboratory professional"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Pathology laboratory management
    Chemical safety in the laboratory
    Light microscopy
    Fixation of tissues
    The gross room
    Tissue processing
    Microtomy
    Resin techniques
    Theory of histological staining
    The hematoxylins and eosin
    Automation in the histology department
    Connective and other mesenchymal tissues with their stains
    Carbohydrates
    Pigments and minerals
    Amyloid
    Traditional stains and modern techniques for demonstrating micro-organisms in histology
    Bone
    Neuropathology and muscle biopsy techniques
    Immunohistochemical and immunofluorescent techniques
    Molecular pathology
    Transmission electron microscopy
    Digital pathology
    Appendices. Diagnostic appendices.
    Traditional methods
    Tissue microarray
    Applications of immunohistochemistry
    Technical appendices. Measurement units
    Preparation of solutions
    Buffer solutions
    Solubility of some common reagents and dyes
    Mounting media and slide coatings
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Claudio Vicini, Fabrizio Salamanca, Giannicola Iannella, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a detailed description of the main barbed pharyngoplasty techniques for the treatment of obstructive sleep apnea. These innovative techniques have spread in recent years and are considered as a validated alternative to the classic respective techniques. The book covers the barbed pharyngoplasty selection criteria, the surgical technique, and discusses the post-operative results. It also includes some chapters on the experience of surgical sleep centers in various parts of the world. Written by leading experts in the field of sleep surgery, this book will be interesting for ENT specialists, oral surgeons, maxillo-facial surgeons, plastic surgeons, sleep doctors, neurologists and pneumologists.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    The evolution of Palate Surgery for SDB
    The new generation of palatoplasties
    Barbed Sutures Technology
    Overview of Barbed Suture in non ENT Surgery
    Classification of Barbed Suture Palate Procedures
    Palate Anatomy Barbed Related
    Barbed Snore Surgery: new philosophy in Palate-Oropharynx Procedures
    Barbed Reposition Pharyngoplasty (BRP)
    Barbed Anterior Pharyngoplasty
    Barbed Functional expansion pharyngoplasty
    Barbed suspension pharyngoplasty
    Technical update of barbed pharyngoplasty for retropalatal obstruction
    Barbed pharyngoplasties: experiences in the world
    Future Perspectives. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Seung Ho Choi, Kazunori Kasama.
    Summary: Bariatric and metabolic surgery is recognized to be an important and effective option for the treatment of severe obesity and the various associated conditions and diseases, such as type II diabetes, hypertension, cardiovascular dysfunction, dyslipidemia, and obstructive sleep apnea. Despite its established value, however, there is scope for further improvement in safety and in the quality of the surgical techniques, and calls have therefore been made for the establishment of standard techniques and procedures. This book accordingly presents state of the art knowledge on bariatric and metabolic surgery with the aim of facilitating the sharing and exchange of knowledge, documenting effective techniques, and enhancing safety and outcomes. All technical aspects are covered in detail, and the text is complemented by many helpful illustrations. A further key feature is the provision of accompanying surgical videos, which will be of value to both novice and experienced surgeons. This textbook will be a great asset in clinical practice for all who are involved or interested in bariatric and metabolic surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Luigi Angrisani, editor ; in collaboration with Maurizio De Luca, Giampaolo Formisano, and Antonella Santonicola.
    Summary: This book describes the surgical bariatric procedures most frequently performed worldwide and examines their evolution in recent years both within Italy and internationally. For each operation, indications, the surgical technique, potential complications, and the outcomes with respect to weight and obesity-associated comorbidities are presented. In view of the significant failure rate revealed by studies on the long-term results of bariatric surgery, the problem of weight regain and revision surgery are also discussed in detail, covering the different types of revision, conversion to other procedures, and the main outcomes. In addition, individual chapters focus on selected topics of importance. The role of bariatric surgery in the cure of type 2 diabetes ("diabetes surgery") is discussed and the debate over the significance of gastroesophageal reflux disease and hiatal hernia for choice of procedure is summarized. Finally, the most common endoluminal procedures, which have been gaining in importance, are described and other bariatric operations, outlined.

    Contents:
    1 History of Obesity Surgery in Italy
    2 Current indications to Bariatric Surgery in adult and children
    3 Bariatric Surgery Worlwide
    4 Evolution of Bariatric Surgery in Italy
    TECHNIQUES AND COMPLICATIONS
    5 Gastric Banding
    6 Sleeve Gastrectomy
    7 Gastric Bypass
    8 One Anastomosis Gastric Bypass
    9 Standard Bilio-Pancreatic-Diversion
    10 Duodenal Switch
    11 Single Anastomosis Duodeno-Ileal Bypass with Sleeve Gastrectomy
    12 Ileal Interposition
    REVISIONAL SURGERY
    13 The problem of weight regain
    14 Band Revision and Conversion to other procedures
    15 Sleeve Revision and Conversion to other procedures
    16 RYGB Revision and Conversion to other procedures
    SELECTED TOPICS
    17 The problem of GERD and Hiatal Hernia
    18 Diabetes Surgery: current indications and techniques
    19 Endoluminal Procedures
    20 Other Bariatric Operations.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Alfonso Troisi.
    Summary: This book offers a step-by-step guide to mental health assessment for bariatric surgery patients. A general introduction explains the concepts of bariatric psychology and psychiatry, their relevance in contemporary bariatric surgery, and reasons to include psychologists and psychiatrists in multidisciplinary teams taking care of bariatric patients. The following four chapters address the aspects of mental health that are investigated by bariatric psychology. The psychological processes analyzed here play a major role in influencing patients' perception of the outcomes of bariatric surgery and in determining their commitment to lifestyle changes and follow-up programs. The second part of the book includes nine chapters addressing the clinical conditions relevant to bariatric psychiatry. For each condition, the major focus is on the impact of psychopathology on bariatric surgery outcomes (weight loss, weight regain, quality of life) and the impact of surgery on its course (remission, worsening, de novo onset). Each chapter in this part includes a discussion of the diagnostic instruments (i.e., structured interviews, clinician-rated tests, and patient-rated tests) that should be used to obtain a valid assessment of the patient's mental status. Separate chapters focus on psychiatric complications (e.g., suicide and addiction transfer) and psychological problems related to quality of life (e.g., body image dissatisfaction) that may emerge postoperatively. Data on these postsurgery conditions has been reported only recently and, therefore, no published book deals with them. The final chapter offers an overview of unsolved issues in bariatric psychology and psychiatry and reviews emerging research findings that are likely to change assessment and care of bariatric patients' mental health in the near future. Given its scope-and its wealth of tables, diagrams, mnemonics, and key fact boxes-the book will be an invaluable reference tool for clinicians.

    Contents:
    Bariatric surgery and mental health
    Patients' motivations, expectations, and experiences
    Personality traits
    Body image and body dissatisfaction
    Childhood trauma
    Eating disorders
    Depressive disorders
    Anxiety disorders, OCD, and PTSD
    Personality disorders
    Bipolar disorder
    Psychotic disorders
    Intellectual disability
    Substance and alcohol use disorders
    Suicide and self-harm
    Current problems and future directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Carlos Eduardo Domene, Keith C. Kim, Ramon Vilallonga Puy and Paula Volpe.
    Summary: The present book intends to provide a comprehensive guide on the field of robotic bariatric surgery. It covers all the stages to fulfill credentialing for performing robotic surgery, from an introduction to the robot device until comprehensive descriptions of surgical procedures. Also, robotic surgery is presented as an institutional program and we describe how to establish a robotic program in a hospital environment. The currently accepted and most common procedures – sleeve gastrectomy, gastric bypass and duodenal switch – are described in detail, with a step-by-step description of the techniques, followed by a wealth of photos and videos for each case. Special attention is given to the employment of robotic bariatric surgery in exceptional conditions, such as in super-obese patients, reoperations and revisional procedures. Critical issues, for the success of the robotic surgical interventions, such as anesthesia, are also addressed. Finally, the outcomes of robotic bariatric surgery are described, including long-term weight loss, improvement and resolution of comorbidities and improvement in quality of life. Bariatric Robotic Surgery is the first book specially devoted to this modality of surgical intervention. It is a fundamental tool for surgeons, residents and fellows who want to start a robotic bariatric surgery program. The book also helps experienced robotic surgeons to keep contact with the various available robotic surgical techniques. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction.- Robotics in bariatric surgery: historical perspective.- Role of Robotics in Bariatric Surgery in Developing World.- Team Training in Robotic Bariatric Surgery.- The Da Vinci robot system.- Training and credentialing in robotic bariatric surgery.- Establishing a robotic bariatric practice.- Anesthesia in robotic surgery.- Robotic sleeve gastrectomy.- Robotic roux in Y gastric bypass
    hand-sewn anastomosis.- Robotic roux in Y gastric bypass
    stapled anastomosis.- Robotic roux in Y gastric bypass in superobese patients.- Robotic duodenal switch.- Complications in robotic bariatric surgery.- Revisional robotic bariatric surgery
    weight regain.- Revisional robotic bariatric surgery.- Outcomes data for robotic surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Daniel M. Herron, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction and Overview of Current and Emerging Operations.-Anesthesia for the bariatric patient: optimizing safety and managing complications
    Optimizing perioperative management: Perioperative care & protocols to prevent & detect early complications
    Thromboembolic disease in the bariatric patient: Prevention, diagnosis and management
    Hemorrhage after bariatric surgery: evaluation and management
    Enteric Leaks after Gastric Bypass: Prevention and Management
    Enteric Leaks After Sleeve Gastrectomy: Prevention and Management
    Workup of abdominal pain in the gastric bypass and vertical sleeve gastrectomy patient
    Work-up of Abdominal Pain or Vomiting in the Gastric Band Patient
    Internal hernias: prevention, diagnosis & management
    Marginal and Peptic Ulcers: Prevention, Diagnosis, and Management
    Gastrointestinal Obstruction in the Bypass Patient
    Food intolerance in the sleeve patient: prevention, evaluation and management
    Gallstones and Common Bile Duct Stones in the Bariatric Surgery Patient: Surgical and Endoscopic Management
    Management of Abdominal Wall Hernias in the Bariatric Patient
    Band Prolapse: Diagnosis and Management
    Band erosion: surgical and endoscopic management
    Vertical Banded Gastroplasty: Evaluation and Management of Complications
    Inadequate Weight Loss after Bypass and Sleeve
    Failed weight loss after lap band surgery
    Post-Gastric Bypass Hypoglycemia: Diagnosis and Management
    Nutritional complications and emergencies
    Excessive Skin After Massive Weight Loss: Body Contouring and Bariatric Surgery
    The Psychological complications after bariatric surgery (eating disorders, substance abuse, depression, body image, etc.)
    Medical Malpractice in the 21st Century.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    David Haslam, Aseem Malhotra, Matthew S. Capehorn, editors.
    Summary: This book explores the clinical risks of obesity and how they can be prevented and resolved through vigorous treatment. The book covers the basic elements of bariatric surgery to ensure that non-specialist clinicians will be able to educate and advise patients on the treatment process. Corrections to current medical misconceptions surrounding bariatric surgery will give patients more realistic expectations of obesity treatment. This book aims to provide basic information to non-specialist general practitioners, nurses, and health care professionals, to aid in the management of obesity through lifestyle and behavioural therapy, as well as drugs and surgery. Diet, lifestyle treatments, drug therapy, dietary supplementation, and referral patterns are very different in post-operative individuals, and this book will allow patients to be given individualised treatment altered for each person's clinical needs. David Haslam is Chair of the National Obesity Forum (NOF) and a GP with a special interest in obesity and cardiometabolic disease, Physician in Obesity Medicine at the Centre for Obesity Research at Luton & Dunstable Hospital. Professor Haslam is Visiting Professor at the Robert Gordon University Aberdeen, and Visiting Professor at Chester University. He contributed to formulating the guidelines for adult obesity management in primary care and produced the first Primary Care guidelines for management of childhood obesity with the Royal College of Paediatrics and Child Health. Matt Capehorn founded and is a Clinical Manager and GPwSI at the Rotherham Institute for Obesity (RIO). RIO is a part of the award-winning NHS Rotherham Weight Management Strategy that won the 2009 NHS Health and Social Care Award for best commissioned service. Doctor Capehorn has been active on several local, regional and national advisory boards and regularly speaks at meetings to healthcare professionals, encouraging weight management services.

    Contents:
    1: Obesity in context; what is the need for assessment and management of obesity and related conditions
    2: The Global problem of obesity, and the nature of the epidemic
    3: Obesity; a recent epidemic? nothing new under the sun
    4: Obesity: dental and metabolic health
    5: Commercial Weight Loss Plans
    6: The Role of Formula Very Low and Low Energy Diets in Obesity and Type 2 Diabetes management
    7: The key role of the nurse practitioner in obesity management
    8: Pharmaceutical management of obesity and related conditions
    9: Physical activity and exercise: Challenging misconceptions and considerations for people with obesity
    10: Recognising and eradicating weight stigma and discrimination from healthcare
    11: setting up a tier 3 service and the barriers to it
    12: Commissioning of weight management services
    13: The staff roles and facilities in a tier 3 service
    14: . The role of the psychologist in weight management and bariatric surgery
    15: Health. Macronutrient digestion and the resulting impact on hormones and body weight
    16: Teaching Kitchens for nutritional education and cooking skills
    17: Intro to Luton
    18: The commissioning process
    19: Specialist dietitian
    20: Specialist bariatric nurse
    21: Bariatric psychologist, and extended team
    22: Bariatric anaesthetist
    23: Specialist bariatric nurse post-operative care
    24: Specialist bariatric nurse. The surgical process
    25: Education and continuous learning
    26: Case studies.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Praveen Raj Palanivelu ; Saravana Kumar, Rachel Maria Gomes, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Elisabeth M. H. Mathus-Vliegen, Jérôme Dargent.
    Summary: This book aims to deepen collaboration between gastroenterologists and surgeons by providing endoscopists and gastroenterologists with a clear understanding of the anatomic alterations likely to be observed after bariatric surgery and acquainting bariatric surgeons with the possibilities offered by endoscopic treatment of obesity itself and of the complications associated with bariatric surgery. The treatment approach in patients with obesity and morbid obesity is usually stepwise, starting with dietary measures, exercise, and behavioral therapy, followed by pharmaceutical therapies, endoscopic bariatric therapy, and, finally, bariatric surgery. Endoscopists and gastroenterologists are involved first because the gastrointestinal tract is affected by obesity-related co-morbidity and second because it provides access for a range of treatment modalities involving endoscopy. Bariatric surgeons may need the assistance of endoscopists and gastroenterologists in the preoperative work-up of patients, in the perioperative period, when acute complications may require an endoscopic intervention, or in the late follow-up period, when complications or insufficient weight loss may be present. This book will be of value for both groups of specialists, enabling them to optimize their cooperation to the benefit of patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Fritz H. Schweingruber, Peter Steiger, Annett Börner.
    Summary: This book presents the microscopic and macroscopic bark structure of more than 180 different tree and shrub species from Europe, Asia and North America. It is the first compendium to demonstrate the anatomical variability in bark since almost 70 years (Holdheide 1951). The introductory chapter explains with high-quality microphotographs the anatomical traits most important for identification and ecological interpretation of barks, and the monographic part demonstrates in text and pictures the species-specific patterns. The species treatments are grouped by their main biomes. Each species description first characterizes the macroscopic aspects with its main form, features and habitat with text and pictures of the whole plant and the barks in a young and old stage. This is followed by the microscopical description of each species. The microscopic photographs are based on double-stained slides, revealing the quality and distribution of unlignified and lignified tissues in low and high magnification. The book fills a scientific gap: Archeologists and soil scientists want to identify prehistoric and historical remnants. Ecophysiologists are interested in the distribution of conducting and non-conducting tissues in the phloem and xylem along the stem axis and the internal longevity of cells. Ecologists get information about internal defense mechanisms and technologists are enabled to recognize indicators relevant in biophysics and technology.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The Boreal Taiga
    Subalpine and Subarctic Dwarf Shrubs
    Mountain Ranges in Eurasia
    Deciduous Forest of Temperate Europe
    Deciduous Forest of Submediterranean Europe
    Deciduous Forest of Eastern Asia
    Deciduous Forest of Eastern North America
    Coniferous Forest of Pacific North America
    Mediterranean Hard-Leaved Forest.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alexandre Roulin, University of Lausanne, Switzerland ; artwork by Laurent Willenegger.
    Summary: "With heart-shaped face, buff back and wings, and pure white underparts, the barn owl is a distinctive and much-loved bird that has fascinated people from many cultures throughout history. How did the barn owl colonize the world? What adaptations have made this bird so successful? How is the increasing impact of human disturbance affecting these animals? Answering these questions and more, Alexandre Roulin brings together the main global perspectives on the evolution, ecology and behaviour of the barn owl and its relatives, discussing topics such as high reproductive potential, physiology, social and family interactions, pronounced colour variation and global distribution. Accessible and beautifully illustrated, this definitive volume on the barn owl is for researchers, professionals and graduate students in ornithology, animal behaviour, ecology, conservation biology and evolutionary biology, and will also appeal to amateur ornithologists and nature lovers"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    editor in chief, Raymond L. Barnhill ; associate editors, A. Neil Crowson, Cynthia M. Magro, Michael W. Piepkorn, Heinz Kutzner, Garrett T. Desman.
    Summary: "This book summarizes the latest advances in the field, covering clinical presentation and features, diagnostic testing, current and new lab techniques, histologic appearances, and differential diagnoses of major skin diseases. For virtually every kind of skin lesion, this skill-sharpening resource has everything clinicians need to successfully perform differential diagnosis at the microscopic level. Barnhill's Dermatopathology features a systematic approach that cuts through the complexity of the discipline's traditional disease-oriented focus, providing a ready-to-use diagnostic approach that puts the entire world of dermatopathology into perspective. The book's vast scope encompasses all skin disease processes - inflammatory, non-inflammatory, infections, and proliferations (hamartomas, hyperplasias, and neoplasms, plus disorders of the nails, oral and genital mucosa, and conjunctiva). This fourth edition includes thoroughly updated and revised chapters ; new detailed appendices on laboratory methods, stains, and updated immunohistochemistry ; newly updated sections on various inflammatory conditions, infections, melanocytic, lymphoid, vascular, and other neoplastic conditions ; more than 1500 high-quality color images ; and two new chapters on disorders of the genital mucosa and tumors of the conjunctiva."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Microscopic Interpretation / Raymond L. Barnhill and Daniel M. Jones
    Spongiotic Dermatitis / Preeti Jhorar, Michael Murphy, and Jane M. Grant-Kels
    Interface Dermatitis / Jacqueline M. Junkins-Hopkins and Thomas D. Horn
    Psoriasiform Dermatitis / Isabella Fried, Raymond L. Barnhill
    Superficial and Deep Perivascular Dermatitis / A. Neil Crowson
    Nodular and Diffuse Cutaneous Infiltrates / Garrett Desman, Jeff D. Harvell, Raymond L. Barnhill
    Intraepidermal Vesiculopustular Diseases / Cynthia M. Magro, A. Neil Crowson, Terence J. Harrist
    Subepidermal Blistering Diseases / A. Neil Crowson and Cynthia M. Magro
    Vasculitis and Related Disorders / Sarah K. Barksdale and Raymond L. Barnhill
    Disorders of Cutaneous Appendages / Lynne J. Goldberg and Sarah K. Barksdale
    Panniculitis / Almut Boer-Auer, Raymond L. Barnhill, Birgitta Schmidt
    Cutaneous Drug Eruptions / A. Neil Crowson and Cynthia M. Magro
    Cutaneous Reactions to Exogenous Agents / A. Neil Crowson and Cynthia M. Magro
    Alterations of the Stratum Corneum and Epidermis / Michael W. Piepkorn
    Disorders of Pigmentation / A. Neil Crowson, Cynthia M. Magro, Anne Janin, and Raymond L. Barnhill
    Deposition Disorders / Franco Rongioletti, Raymond L. Barnhill
    Alterations of Collagen and Elastin / Garrett Desman and Raymond L. Barnhill
    Ectopic Tissue / Jacqueline M. Junkins-Hopkins
    Bacterial Infections / Ronald P. Rapini
    Treponemal and Rickettsial Diseases / A. Neil Crowson, Cynthia M. Magro, J. Stephen Dumler, and Raymond L. Barnhill Fungal Infections / Alexandre Alanio, Matthew W. McCarthy, Thomas J. Walsh, Raymond L. Barnhill, and Catherine Lisa Kauffman
    Viral Infections / Garrett Desman, Clay J. Cockerell, and James J. Lyons
    Protozoal and Algal Infections / Eileen Burd, Lars Westblade, and Paul Hofman
    Helminthic Diseases / Blaine A. Mathison, Raymond L. Barnhill
    Cutaneous Cysts and Related Lesions / Glynis A. Scott
    Tumors of the Epidermis / Alan S. Boyd
    Tumors of Melanocytes / Raymond L. Barnhill, Michael W. Piepkorn, Armita Bahrami, Artur Zembowicz, and Thomas Wiesner
    Tumors with Hair Follicle and Sebaceous Differentiation / Maxime Battistella, Mark R. Wick, Heinz Kutzner, Raymond L. Barnhill
    Sweat Gland Tumors / Maxime Battistella, Mark R. Wick, Heinz Kutzner, and Raymond L. Barnhill
    Fibrous and Fibrohistiocytic Tumors / Scott C. Bresler, Stefan Kraft, Jason L. Hornick, and Scott R. Granter
    Vascular Tumors and Vascular Malformations / Heinz Kutzner, Hansgeorg Muller, Michel Wassef, Steven J. Hunt, Daniel J. Santa Cruz, Raymond L. Barnhill
    Tumors of Adipose Tissue, Muscle, Cartilage, and Bone / Kristen M. Paral and Thomas Krausz
    Neural and Neuroendocrine Tumors / Zsolt B. Argenyi, Chris H. Jokinen
    Lymphoid, Leukemic, and Other Cellular Infiltrates / Werner Kempf, Guenter Burg, Cesare Massone, Lorenzo Cerroni, Melissa Pulitzer, A. Neil Crowson, and Cynthia M. Magro
    Cutaneous Metastases / Ghadah Al Sannaa, Alexander J. Lazar
    Disorders of the Nail Apparatus / Aldo Gonzalez-Serva, Raymond Barnhill
    Disorders of Oral Mucosa / Mark A. Lerman and Sook-Bin Woo
    Disorders of the Genital Mucosa / Russell A. Ball, Katherine M. Ball, Kelly L. West
    Conjunctival Tumors / Artur Zembowicz, Jakub Khzouz, Sarah E. Coupland, Nathalie Cassoux, Raymond Barnhill.
    Digital Access AccessDermatology 2020
  • Digital
    Garrett T. Desman, Raymond L. Barnhill.
    Contents:
    Inflammatory diseases of the epidermis
    Dermal based inflammatory diseases
    Vesiculobullous diseases
    Vasculitis and related disorders
    Inflammatory diseases of adnexal structures and subcutis
    Alterations to components of the epidermis and dermis
    Infectious diseases of the skin
    Tumors of the epidermis and cysts
    Adnexal tumors
    Melanocytic proliferations
    Tumors of mesenchymal origin
    Lymphoid, leukemic, and other cellular infiltrates.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessDermatology
    AccessDermatology
  • Print
    Zora Neale Hurston ; edited by Deborah G. Plant ; foreword by Alice Walker.
    Summary: In 1927, Zora Neale Hurston went to Plateau, Alabama, just outside Mobile, to interview eighty-six-year-old Cudjo Lewis. Of the millions of men, women, and children transported from Africa to America as slaves, Cudjo was then the only person alive to tell the story of this integral part of the nation's history. Hurston was there to record Cudjo's firsthand account of the raid that led to his capture and bondage fifty years after the Atlantic slave trade was outlawed in the United States. In 1931, Hurston returned to Plateau, the African-centric community three miles from Mobile founded by Cudjo and other former slaves from his ship. Spending more than three months there, she talked in depth with Cudjo about the details of his life. During those weeks, the young writer and the elderly formerly enslaved man ate peaches and watermelon that grew in the backyard and talked about Cudjo's past--memories from his childhood in Africa, the horrors of being captured and held in a barracoon for selection by American slavers, the harrowing experience of the Middle Passage packed with more than 100 other souls aboard the Clotilda, and the years he spent in slavery until the end of the Civil War. Based on those interviews, featuring Cudjo's unique vernacular, and written from Hurston's perspective with the compassion and singular style that have made her one of the preeminent American authors of the twentieth-century, Barracoon masterfully illustrates the tragedy of slavery and of one life forever defined by it. Offering insight into the pernicious legacy that continues to haunt us all, black and white, this poignant and powerful work is an invaluable contribution to our shared history and culture.

    Contents:
    Foreword. Those who love us never leave us alone with our grief : reading Barracoon : the story of the last "black cargo" / by Alice Walker
    Introduction
    Editor's note
    Barracoon. Preface
    Introduction
    THe king arrives
    Barracoon
    Slavery
    Freedom
    Marriage
    Kossula learns about law
    Alone
    Appendix. Takkoi or Attako--children's game
    Stories Kossula told me
    The monkey and the camel
    Story of de Jona
    Now disa Abraham fadda de faitful
    The lion woman
    Afterword and additional materials / edited by Deborah G. Plant.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E444.L49 H87 2019
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Douglas K. Pleskow, Chief, Clinical Gastroenterology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Associate Clinical Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, United States, Tolga Erim, Director of Endoscopy, Department of Gastrenterology, Digestive Disease Center, Cleveland Clinic Florida, Weston, FL, United States.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Michael R. Migden, Leon Chen, Sirunya Silapunt, editors.
    Contents:
    Chapter 6: Cryotherapy and Electrodesiccation & Curettage for Basal Cell Carcinoma Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Editor Biographies
    Chapter 1: Epidemiology and Risk Factors of Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Epidemiology
    Introduction
    Geography
    Demographics
    Location and Histologic Subtype
    Morbidity and Mortality
    Economic Burden
    Prevention
    Risk Factors
    Introduction
    UV Radiation
    Photosensitizing Medications
    Ionizing Radiation
    Chemical Exposures
    Immunosuppression
    Genes
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 2: Pathophysiology of Basal Cell Carcinoma and Its Associated Genetic Syndromes
    Introduction Basal Cell Nevus Syndrome (BCNS)
    Bazex-Dupre-Christol Syndrome
    Rombo Syndrome
    Additional Genetic Syndromes with Increased Risk of Basal Cell Carcinoma
    References
    Chapter 3: Histopathology of Basal Cell Carcinoma and Its Variants
    Introduction
    Common Histologic Features
    Histologic Variants
    Nodular Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Superficial Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Infundibulocystic/Hamartomatous Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Fibroepithelioma of Pinkus
    Infiltrative Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Morpheaform Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Micronodular Basal Cell Carcinoma Clear Cell Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Adenoid Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Pleomorphic Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Keratotic Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Basal Cell Carcinoma with Matrical Differentiation
    Basal Cell Carcinoma with Ductal Differentiation
    Metaplastic Basal Cell Carcinoma
    High-Risk Features
    References
    Chapter 4: Topical Therapy for the Treatment of Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Introduction
    Background
    Mechanism of Action
    Imiquimod
    5-Fluorouracil
    Ingenol Mebutate
    Efficacy
    Imiquimod
    5-Fluorouracil
    Ingenol Mebutate
    Safety
    Imiquimod
    5-Fluorouracil Ingenol Mebutate
    Comparative Studies
    Imiquimod
    Comparison of Different Treatment Regimens of Imiquimod to Vehicle Cream
    Comparison of Imiquimod to Other Treatment Modalities
    5-Fluorouracil
    Ingenol Mebutate
    Emerging Topical Treatments and Combination Therapies
    Combination Therapies
    Imiquimod Plus CT
    Imiquimod Plus PDT
    Imiquimod Plus Curettage
    Imiquimod Plus MMS
    5-FU Combination Therapy
    Discussion and Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 5: Local Immunotherapy for Basal Cell Carcinoma with Interferon
    Introduction
    Background Role of the Immune System
    Treatment with Immunostimulatory Agents (ISRX)
    Efficacy
    Low Recurrence Rate
    Normal Skin Markings
    Cosmesis
    Preservation of Function
    No Wound
    All Other Therapeutic Options Remain Open
    Disadvantages of ISRX
    Mechanism of Action of ISRX
    Patient/Tumor Selection
    Interferon Injections
    Preparation of IFN for Injection
    Injection Technique
    Dosage of IFN
    Combination of IFN with IMIQ
    Side Effects
    Recommended Follow-Up for BCC Treated with ISRX
    Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gérard M. Scortecci, editor.
    Summary: This manual will help oral implantologists to understand the principles that underlie the use of basal implants as a means to provide simple solutions to complex and highly demanding clinical situations without the need for prior bone grafting. It will also serve as a richly illustrated practical guide to application of the technique. The book is in three parts, the first of which discusses basic principles and related themes, including osteogenesis, osseointegration, cortical anchorage stability, biomechanics, surgical techniques, and basal implant prosthodontics. Step-by-step guidance is then offered on the application of these principles, focusing on operating techniques, 3D treatment planning, transitional and final screw-secured prostheses, and postoperative follow-up. The third part of the book addresses a wide range of clinical situations that can be treated by basal implantology, with particular attention to the treatment of high, thin alveolar ridges and the atrophic maxilla and mandible and to the correction of previous implant failures. Potential complications and postimplantation neuropathies are also discussed, with guidance on their management.

    Contents:
    Basic Principles of Basal Implantology: Definition and Goals of Basal Implantology
    Principles of Initial Bone Bed Preparation
    The Stability Principle
    Biomechanics
    3D Implant Planning for Basal Implantology
    Basal Implantology Techniques. Step by Step Guide to Basal Implantology: Patient Selection and Treatment Planning
    Priorities in Extreme Situations
    Atraumatic Operating Techniques
    Post-Operative Follow-up. Clinical Situations: Type of Edentulism
    Single Tooth Replacement with Basal Implants
    Multiple Tooth Replacements With Basal Implants
    Complete Edentulism; the Atrophic Maxilla and/or Mandible. Maintenance, Long-Term Follow-up and Correction of Problems: Maintenance
    Long-Term Follow-up
    Correction of Problems.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Susan E. White.
    Contents:
    Introduction to medical research
    Study designs in medical research
    Summarizing data & presenting data in tables & graphs
    Probability & related topics for making inferences about data
    Research questions about one group
    Research questions about two separate or independent groups
    Research questions about means in three or more groups
    Research questions about relationships among variables
    Analyzing research questions about survival
    Statistical methods for multiple variables
    Survey research
    Methods of evidence-based medicine and decision analysis
    Reading the medical literature.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessEmergency Medicine
    AccessEmergency Medicine
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessAnesthesiology
  • Digital/Print
    Katzung, Bertram G.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM300 .B312
    16
  • Digital
    Pranab Dey.
    Summary: This book provides detailed information on basic and advanced laboratory techniques in histopathology and cytology. It discusses the principles of and offers clear guidance on all routine and special laboratory techniques. In addition, it covers various advanced laboratory techniques, such as immunocytochemistry, flow cytometry, liquid based cytology, polymerase chain reaction, tissue microarray, and molecular technology. Further, the book includes numerous color illustrations, tables and boxes to familiarize the reader with the work of a pathology laboratory. The book is mainly intended for postgraduate students and fellows in pathology as well as practicing pathologists. The book is also relevant for all the laboratory technicians and students of laboratory technology.

    Contents:
    Fixation of histology samples
    Processing of tissue
    Embedding of tissue
    Decalcification of bone
    Tissue microtomy
    Frozen section of tissue: technique and applications
    Staining principle and general procedure of stain
    Haematoxylin and eosin stain
    Special stains for protein, lipid, carbohydrate, nucleic acid and pigments
    Stains for the connective tissue
    Stains for the amyloid
    Stains for the microbial organisms
    Cytology sample: procurement, fixation and processing
    Routine staining in cytology laboratory
    Fine needle aspiration biopsy technique
    Immunochemistry in histology and cytology: principle, technique and applications
    Flow cytometry: principle, technique and applications
    Digital image analysis and virtual microscopy: principle, technique and applications
    Liquid based cytology and automated screening devices
    Polymerase chain reaction and DNA sequencing: principle, technique and applications
    Fluorescent in situ hybridisation techniques: principle, technique and applications
    Tissue microarray: technique and applications
    Sanger sequencing and next generation gene sequencing: basic principles and applications
    Light microscope: optical components, principle and handling
    Fluorescence microscope and confocal microscopy: basic parts and principle
    Laboratory organization and quality control
    Laboratory safety: essential precautions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Pranab Dey.
    Summary: The second edition of this well-received book provides detailed information on the basic and advanced laboratory techniques in histopathology and cytology. It offers clear guidance on the principles and techniques of routine and special laboratory techniques. It also covers advanced laboratory techniques such as immunocytochemistry, flow cytometry, liquid-based cytology, polymerase chain reactions, tissue microarray, molecular technology, etc. The book's second edition covers several important recent topics with many new chapters, such as liquid biopsy, artificial neural network, digital pathology, and next-generation sequencing. Each chapter elucidates basic principle, practical methods, troubleshooting, and clinical applications of the technique. It includes multiple colored line drawings, microphotographs, and tables to illustrate each technique. The book is a helpful guide to the post-graduate students and fellows in pathology, practicing pathologists, as well as laboratory technicians, and research students.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Fixation of histology samples: Principles, methods and types of fixatives
    Chapter 2: Processing of tissue in the histopathology laboratory
    Chapter 3: Embedding of tissue in histopathology
    Chapter 4: Decalcification of bony and hard tissue for histopathology processing
    Chapter 5: Tissue Microtomy: principle and procedure
    Chapter 6: Frozen section: Principle and procedure
    Chapter 7: Staining principle and general procedure of staining of the tissue
    Chapter 8: Haematoxylin and Eosin stain of the tissue section
    Chapter 9: Special Stains for the carbohydrate, protein, lipid, nucleic acid and pigments
    Chapter 10: Connective tissue stain: Principle and procedure
    Chapter 11: Amyloid staining
    Chapter 12: Stains for the Microbial Organisms
    Chapter 13: Cytology sample procurement, fixation and processing
    Chapter 14: Routine staining in cytology laboratory
    Chapter 15: The basic technique of fine needle aspiration cytology
    Chapter 16: Immunocytochemistry in histology and cytology
    Chapter 17: Flow cytometry: Basic principles, procedure and applications in pathology
    Chapter 18: Digital pathology
    Chapter 19: Automation in the laboratory and Liquid-based cytology
    Chapter 20: Polymerase chain reaction: Principle, technique and applications in pathology
    Chapter 21: Fluorescent in situ hybridisation techniques in pathology: Principle, technique and applications
    Chapter 22: Tissue microarray in pathology: Principal, technique and applications
    Chapter 23: Sanger sequencing and next-generation gene sequencing: Basic principles and applications in pathology
    Chapter 24: Liquid biopsy: Basic principles, techniques and applications
    Chapter 25: Artificial neural network in Pathology: Basic principles and applications
    Chapter 26: Compound Light microscope and other different microscopes
    Chapter 27: Fluorescence microscope, confocal microscope and other advanced microscopes: Basic principles and applications in pathology
    Chapter 28: Electron microscopy: Principle, components, optics and specimen processing
    Chapter 29: Quality control and laboratory organization
    Chapter 30: Laboratory safety and laboratory waste disposal
    Multiple choice questions for the self-assessment.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by David. B. Burr, Matthew R. Allen.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Basic bone biology and physiology
    section 2. Assessment of bone structure and function
    section 3. Skeletal adaptation
    section 4. Hormonal and metabolic effects on bone
    section 5. Skeletal disease and treatment.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Basic and clinical dermatology to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Basic and clinical oncology to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    EBSCOhost
    2023/24 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2022/23 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2021/22 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    EBSCOhost
    2019/20 ed. Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Mahdi Balali-Mood, Mohammad Abdollahi, editors.
    Summary: This book explains the chemistry of Organophosphorus compounds (OPs), their mechanism of toxicity and the history of OPs from their initial discovery to the development of new compounds such as Novichoks. It details the harmful effects to human health both as a result of acute and chronic OP exposure and the necessary clinical management of affected patients to reduce their toxic side effects. The book also explains the detrimental effect that OPs have had on the environment and the efforts being made to prevent this in the future. Finally, the book looks at the incidents where OPs have been used as chemical warfare agents. Basic and Clinical Toxicology of Organophosphorus Compounds aims to act as a comprehensive guide to all aspects of OPs and is a key resource for clinical toxicologists and related health professionals involved in the prevention, diagnosis and clinical management of OP patients, toxicologists and other scientists involved in research on OPs including regulatory issues and postgraduate students in Toxicology and related fields.

    Contents:
    Chemistry and Classification of OP Compounds
    History of the Use and Epidemiology of Organophosphorus Poisoning
    Acute Toxicity of Organophosphorus Compounds
    Chronic Toxicity of Organophosphorus Compounds
    Toxicity and Novel Biomarkers of OP Exposure
    Clinical Management of Acute OP Pesticide Poisoning
    Clinical Management of Organophosphorus Nerve Agents' Poisonings
    Occupational and Environmental Aspectsof Organophosphorus Compounds
    Summary, Discussion, and Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by George W. Williams, Erin S. Williams.
    Contents:
    Section I. Anatomy
    Section II. Physics, monitoring, and anesthesia delivery devices
    Section III. Principles of pharmacology
    Section IV. Clinical sciences
    Section V. Organ-based basic and clinical sciences
    Section VI. Professional challenges.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Susan J. Hall, Ph. D., College of Health Sciences, University of Delaware.
    Summary: This edition has been significantly updated from the previous edition. The approach taken remains an integrated balance of qualitative and quantitative examples, applications, and problems designed to illustrate the principles discussed. The seventh edition also retains the important sensitivity to the fact that some beginning students of biomechanics possess weak backgrounds in mathematics. For this reason, it includes numerous sample problems and applications, along with practical advice on approaching quantitative problems. With balanced, integrated coverage of applied anatomy, mechanical principles, and relevant sport and daily living applications, this text introduces you to the basics of biomechanics. The quantitative aspects of biomechanics are presented in a manageable, progressive fashion, with practical advice on approaching both qualitative and quantitative problems in biomechanics.

    Contents:
    What Is Biomechanics?
    Kinematic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion
    Kinetic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion
    The Biomechanics of Human Bone Growth and Development
    The Biomechanics of Human Skeletal Articulations
    The Biomechanics of Human Skeletal Muscle
    The Biomechanics of the Human Upper Extremity
    The Biomechanics of the Human Lower Extremity
    The Biomechanics of the Human Spine
    Linear Kinematics of Human Movement
    Angular Kinematics of Human Movement
    Linear Kinetics of Human Movement
    Equilibrium and Human Movement
    Angular Kinetics of Human Movement
    Human Movement in a Fluid Medium. Machine generated contents note: 1. What Is Biomechanics?
    Biomechanics: Definition and Perspective
    What Problems Are Studied by Biomechanists?
    Why Study Biomechanics?
    Problem-Solving Approach
    Quantitative versus Qualitative Problems
    Solving Qualitative Problems
    Formal versus Informal Problems
    Solving Formal Quantitative Problems
    Units of Measurement
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    2. Kinematic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion
    Forms of Motion
    Linear Motion
    Angular Motion
    General Motion
    Mechanical Systems
    Standard Reference Terminology
    Anatomical Reference Position
    Directional Terms
    Anatomical Reference Planes
    Anatomical Reference Axes
    Joint Movement Terminology
    Sagittal Plane Movements
    Frontal Plane Movements
    Transverse Plane Movements
    Other Movements
    Spatial Reference Systems
    Analyzing Human Movement. Contents note continued: Prerequisite Knowledge for a Qualitative Analysis
    Planning a Qualitative Analysis
    Conducting a Qualitative Analysis
    Tools for Measuring Kinematic Quantities
    Video and Film
    Other Movement-Monitoring Systems
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    3. Kinetic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion
    Basic Concepts Related to Kinetics
    Inertia
    Mass
    Force
    Center of Gravity
    Weight
    Pressure
    Volume
    Density
    Torque
    Impulse
    Mechanical Loads on the Human Body
    Compression, Tension, and Shear
    Mechanical Stress
    Torsion, Bending, and Combined Loads
    The Effects of Loading
    Repetitive versus Acute Loads
    Tools for Measuring Kinetic Quantities
    Vector Algebra
    Vector Composition
    Vector Resolution
    Graphic Solution of Vector Problems
    Trigonometric Solution of Vector Problems
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems. Contents note continued: Laboratory Experiences
    4. The Biomechanics of Human Bone Growth and Development
    Composition and Structure of Bone Tissue
    Material Constituents
    Structural Organization
    Types of Bones
    Bone Growth and Development
    Longitudinal Growth
    Circumferential Growth
    Adult Bone Development
    Bone Response to Stress
    Bone Modeling and Remodeling
    Bone Hypertrophy
    Bone Atrophy
    Osteoporosis
    Postmenopausal and Age-Associated Osteoporosis
    Female Athlete Triad
    Preventing and Treating Osteoporosis
    Common Bone Injuries
    The Biomechanics of Bone Fractures
    Epiphyseal Injuries
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    5. The Biomechanics of Human Skeletal Articulations
    Joint Architecture
    Immovable Joints
    Slightly Movable Joints
    Freely Movable Joints
    Articular Cartilage
    Articular Fibrocartilage
    Articular Connective Tissue
    Joint Stability. Contents note continued: Shape of the Articulating Bone Surfaces
    Arrangement of Ligaments and Muscles
    Other Connective Tissues
    Joint Flexibility
    Measuring Joint Range of Motion
    Factors Influencing Joint Flexibility
    Flexibility and Injury
    Techniques for Increasing Joint Flexibility
    Neuromuscular Response to Stretch
    Active and Passive Stretching
    Ballistic, Static, and Dynamic Stretching
    Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation
    Common Joint Injuries and Pathologies
    Sprains
    Dislocations
    Bursitis
    Arthritis
    Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Osteoarthritis
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    6. The Biomechanics of Human Skeletal Muscle
    Behavioral Properties of the Musculotendinous Unit
    Extensibility and Elasticity
    Irritability and the Ability to Develop Tension
    Structural Organization of Skeletal Muscle
    Muscle Fibers
    Motor Units
    Fiber Types
    Fiber Architecture. Contents note continued: Skeletal Muscle Function
    Recruitment of Motor Units
    Change in Muscle Length with Tension Development
    Roles Assumed by Muscles
    Two-Joint and Multijoint Muscles
    Factors Affecting Muscular Force Generation
    Force-Velocity Relationship
    Length-Tension Relationship
    Stretch-Shortening Cycle
    Electromyography
    Electromechanical Delay
    Muscular Strength, Power, and Endurance
    Muscular Strength
    Muscular Power
    Muscular Endurance
    Muscle Fatigue
    Effect of Muscle Temperature
    Common Muscle Injuries
    Strains
    Contusions
    Cramps
    Delayed-Onset Muscle Soreness
    Compartment Syndrome
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    7. The Biomechanics of the Human Upper Extremity
    Structure of the Shoulder
    Sternoclavicular Joint
    Acromioclavicular Joint
    Coracoclavicular Joint
    Glenohumeral Joint
    Scapulothoracic Joint
    Bursae
    Movements of the Shoulder Complex. Contents note continued: Muscles of the Scapula
    Muscles of the Glenohumeral Joint
    Flexion at the Glenohumeral Joint
    Extension at the Glenohumeral Joint
    Abduction at the Glenohumeral Joint
    Adduction at the Glenohumeral Joint
    Medial and Lateral Rotation of the Humerus
    Horizontal Adduction and Abduction at the Glenohumeral Joint
    Loads on the Shoulder
    Common Injuries of the Shoulder
    Dislocations
    Rotator Cuff Damage
    Rotational Injuries
    Subscapular Neuropathy
    Structure of the Elbow
    Humeroulnar Joint
    Humeroradial Joint
    Proximal Radioulnar Joint
    Carrying Angle
    Movements at the Elbow
    Muscles Crossing the Elbow
    Flexion and Extension
    Pronation and Supination
    Loads on the Elbow
    Common Injuries of the Elbow
    Sprains and Dislocations
    Overuse Injuries
    Structure of the Wrist
    Movements of the Wrist
    Flexion
    Extension and Hyperextension
    Radial and Ulnar Deviation
    Structure of the Joints of the Hand. Contents note continued: Carpometacarpal and Intermetacarpal Joints
    Metacarpophalangeal Joints
    Interphalangeal Joints
    Movements of the Hand
    Common Injuries of the Wrist and Hand
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    8. The Biomechanics of the Human Lower Extremity
    Structure of the Hip
    Movements at the Hip
    Muscles of the Hip
    Flexion
    Extension
    Abduction
    Adduction
    Medial and Lateral Rotation of the Femur
    Horizontal Abduction and Adduction
    Loads on the Hip
    Common Injuries of the Hip
    Fractures
    Contusions
    Strains
    Structure of the Knee
    Tibiofemoral Joint
    Menisci
    Ligaments
    Patellofemoral Joint
    Joint Capsule and Bursae
    Movements at the Knee
    Muscles Crossing the Knee
    Flexion and Extension
    Rotation and Passive Abduction and Adduction
    Patellofemoral Joint Motion
    Loads on the Knee
    Forces at the Tibiofemoral Joint
    Forces at the Patellofemoral Joint. Contents note continued: Common Injuries of the Knee and Lower Leg
    Anterior Cruciate Ligament Injuries
    Posterior Cruciate Ligament Injuries
    Medial Collateral Ligament Injuries
    Meniscus Injuries
    Iliotibial Band Friction Syndrome
    Patellofemoral Pain Syndrome
    Shin Splints
    Structure of the Ankle
    Movements at the Ankle
    Structure of the Foot
    Subtalar Joint
    Tarsometatarsal and Intermetatarsal Joints
    Metatarsophalangeal and Interphalangeal Joints
    Plantar Arches
    Movements of the Foot
    Muscles of the Foot
    Toe Flexion and Extension
    Inversion and Eversion
    Pronation and Supination
    Loads on the Foot
    Common Injuries of the Ankle and Foot
    Ankle Injuries
    Overuse Injuries
    Alignment Anomalies of the Foot
    Injuries Related to High and Low Arch Structures
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    9. The Biomechanics of the Human Spine
    Structure of the Spine
    Vertebral Column. Contents note continued: Vertebrae
    Intervertebral Discs
    Ligaments
    Spinal Curves
    Movements of the Spine
    Flexion, Extension, and Hyperextension
    Lateral Flexion and Rotation
    Muscles of the Spine
    Anterior Aspect
    Posterior Aspect
    Lateral Aspect
    Loads on the Spine
    Common Injuries of the Back and Neck
    Low Back Pain
    Soft-Tissue Injuries
    Acute Fractures
    Stress Fractures
    Disc Herniations
    Whiplash Injuries
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    10. Linear Kinematics of Human Movement
    Linear Kinematic Quantities
    Distance and Displacement
    Speed and Velocity
    Acceleration
    Average and Instantaneous Quantities
    Kinematics of Projectile Motion
    Horizontal and Vertical Components
    Influence of Gravity
    Influence of Air Resistance
    Factors Influencing Projectile Trajectory
    Projection Angle
    Projection Speed
    Relative Projection Height. Contents note continued: Optimum Projection Conditions
    Analyzing Projectile Motion
    Equations of Constant Acceleration
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    11. Angular Kinematics of Human Movement
    Observing the Angular Kinematics of Human Movement
    Measuring Angles
    Joint Angles and Body Segment Orientations
    Tools for Measuring Body Angles
    Instant Center of Rotation
    Angular Kinematic Relationships
    Angular Distance and Displacement
    Angular Speed and Velocity
    Angular Acceleration
    Angular Motion Vectors
    Average versus Instantaneous Angular Quantities
    Relationships Between Linear and Angular Motion
    Linear and Angular Displacement
    Linear and Angular Velocity
    Linear and Angular Acceleration
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    12. Linear Kinetics of Human Movement
    Newton's Laws
    Law of Inertia
    Law of Acceleration. Contents note continued: Law of Reaction
    Law of Gravitation
    Mechanical Behavior of Bodies in Contact
    Friction
    Momentum
    Impulse
    Impact
    Work, Power, and Energy Relationships
    Work
    Power
    Energy
    Conservation of Mechanical Energy
    Principle of Work and Energy
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    13. Equilibrium and Human Movement
    Equilibrium
    Torque
    Resultant Joint Torques
    Levers
    Anatomical Levers
    Equations of Static Equilibrium
    Equations of Dynamic Equilibrium
    Center of Gravity
    Locating the Center of Gravity
    Locating the Human Body Center of Gravity
    Stability and Balance
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    14. Angular Kinetics of Human Movement
    Resistance to Angular Acceleration
    Moment of Inertia
    Determining Moment of Inertia
    Human Body Moment of Inertia
    Angular Momentum. Contents note continued: Conservation of Angular Momentum
    Transfer of Angular Momentum
    Change in Angular Momentum
    Angular Analogues of Newton's Laws of Motion
    Newton's First Law
    Newton's Second Law
    Newton's Third Law
    Centripetal Force
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    15. Human Movement in a Fluid Medium
    The Nature of Fluids
    Relative Motion
    Laminar versus Turbulent Flow
    Fluid Properties
    Buoyancy
    Characteristics of the Buoyant Force
    Flotation
    Flotation of the Human Body
    Drag
    Skin Friction
    Form Drag
    Wave Drag
    Lift Force
    Foil Shape
    Magnus Effect
    Propulsion in a Fluid Medium
    Propulsive Drag Theory
    Propulsive Lift Theory
    Stroke Technique
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    Appendices
    A. Basic Mathematics and Related Skills
    B. Trigonometric Functions
    C.Common Units of Measurement. Contents note continued: D. Anthropometric Parameters for the Human Body.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2015
  • Digital
    Susan J. Hall.
    Summary: Introductory Problems -- Additional Problems -- Laboratory Experiences -- 3 Kinetic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion -- Basic Concepts Related to Kinetics -- Inertia -- Mass -- Force -- Center of Gravity -- Weight -- Pressure -- Volume -- Density -- Torque -- Impulse -- Mechanical Loads on the Human Body -- Compression, Tension, and Shear -- Mechanical Stress -- Torsion, Bending, and Combined Loads -- The Effects of Loading -- Repetitive versus Acute Loads -- Tools for Measuring Kinetic Quantities -- Vector Algebra -- Vector Composition -- Vector Resolution

    Contents:
    Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Brief Contents
    Contents
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    1 What Is Biomechanics?
    Biomechanics: Definition and Perspective
    What Problems Are Studied by Biomechanists?
    Why Study Biomechanics?
    Problem-Solving Approach
    Quantitative versus Qualitative Problems
    Solving Qualitative Problems
    Formal versus Informal Problems
    Solving Formal Quantitative Problems
    Units of Measurement
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    2 Kinematic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion
    Forms of Motion Linear Motion
    Angular Motion
    General Motion
    Mechanical Systems
    Standard Reference Terminology
    Anatomical Reference Position
    Directional Terms
    Anatomical Reference Planes
    Anatomical Reference Axes
    Joint Movement Terminology
    Sagittal Plane Movements
    Frontal Plane Movements
    Transverse Plane Movements
    Other Movements
    Spatial Reference Systems
    Analyzing Human Movement
    Prerequisite Knowledge for a Qualitative Analysis
    Planning a Qualitative Analysis
    Conducting a Qualitative Analysis
    Tools for Measuring Kinematic Quantities
    Video and Film Graphic Solution of Vector Problems
    Trigonometric Solution of Vector Problems
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    4 The Biomechanics of Human Bone Growth and Development
    Composition and Structure of Bone Tissue
    Material Constituents
    Structural Organization
    Types of Bones
    Bone Growth and Development
    Longitudinal Growth
    Circumferential Growth
    Adult Bone Development
    Bone Response to Stress
    Bone Modeling and Remodeling
    Bone Hypertrophy
    Bone Atrophy
    Osteoporosis Postmenopausal and Age-Associated Osteoporosis
    Female Athlete Triad
    Preventing and Treating Osteopenia and Osteoporosis
    Common Bone Injuries
    The Biomechanics of Bone Fractures
    Epiphyseal Injuries
    Summary
    Introductory Problems
    Additional Problems
    Laboratory Experiences
    5 The Biomechanics of Human Skeletal Articulations
    Joint Architecture
    Immovable Joints
    Slightly Movable Joints
    Freely Movable Joints
    Articular Cartilage
    Articular Fibrocartilage
    Articular Connective Tissue
    Joint Stability
    Shape of the Articulating Bone Surfaces
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2019
  • Digital
    Susan J. Hall, College of Health Sciences, University of Delaware.
    Summary: "Biomechanics is a field that analyzes the mechanical aspects of biological organisms. In this book focused on human biomechanics, anatomical and mechanical factors, as well as functional applications are covered. The integrated approach to coverage of these areas taken in previous editions is continued in this ninth edition"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    What Is Biomechanics?
    Kinematic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion
    Kinetic Concepts for Analyzing Human Motion
    The Biomechanics of Human Bone Growth and Development
    The Biomechanics of Human Skeletal Articulations
    The Biomechanics of Human Skeletal Muscle
    The Biomechanics of the Human Upper Extremity
    The Biomechanics of the Human Lower Extremity
    The Biomechanics of the Human Spine
    Linear Kinematics of Human Movement
    Angular Kinematics of Human Movement
    Linear Kinetics of Human Movement
    Equilibrium and Human Movement Angular Kinetics of Human Movement
    Human Movement in a Fluid Medium
    Appendix A: Basic Mathematics and Related Skills
    Appendix B: Trigonometric Functions
    Appendix C: Common Units of Measurement
    Appendix D: Anthropometric Parameters for the Human Body
    Appendix E: Equations
    Glossary
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Paul K. Sikka, Shawn T. Beaman, James A. Street.
    Contents:
    Part I. The Basics
    1.History of Anesthesia
    2.Preoperative Evaluation
    3. Approach to Anesthesia
    4. Perioperative Airway Management
    5. Anesthesia Machine
    6. Patient Monitoring
    7. Fluid and Electrolyte balance
    8. Transfusion Medicine
    Part II. Anesthetic Pharmacology
    9. Mechanisms of Anesthetic Action
    10. Inhalational Anesthetics
    11. Intravenous Induction Agents
    12. Opioids and Benzodiazepines
    13. Neuromuscular blocking and reversal agents
    14. Antiemetics
    15. NSAIDs and Alpha-2 Adrenergic Agonists
    16. Diuretics
    17. Cardiovascular pharmacology
    18. Local Anesthetics
    19. Allergic reactions
    20. Drug Interactions
    Part III. Regional Anesthesia
    21. Spinal and Epidural Anesthesia
    22. Peripheral nerve blocks
    23. Ultrasound guided peripheral nerve blocks
    24. Pain Management
    25. Orthopedic Anesthesia
    Part IV. Specialty Anesthesia
    26. Cardiac Anesthesia
    27. Vascular Anesthesia
    28. Ophthalmic Surgery
    29. Neuroanesthesia
    30. Ambulatory Anesthesia
    31. Non-Operating Room Anesthesia
    32. Hepatic and Gastrointestinal diseases
    33. Renal and Urinary Tract Diseases
    34. Endocrine diseases
    35. Neurological and Neuromuscular Diseases
    36. Ophthalmic Surgery
    37. Ear, nose and throat surgery
    38. Obstetric Anesthesia
    39. Pediatric Anesthesia
    40. Critical Care
    41. Postoperative anesthesia care
    Part V. Special Anesthesia Topics
    42. Obesity
    43. The Elderly patient
    44. Pulmonary Aspiration & Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting
    45. Acid Base balance
    46. Trauma
    47. Spine Surgery
    48. Robotic Surgery
    49. Patient positioning and Common nerve injuries
    50. Substance Abuse
    51. Awareness under anesthesia
    52. Infectious diseases
    53. Alternative Medicine and Anesthesia
    54. Cosmetic Surgery
    55. Hazards of Working in the Operating Room
    56. Operating room management
    57. Residency Requirements and Guidelines.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Paul A. Young, PhD, DSc (hon), Professor and Chairman Emeritus, Department of Anatomy and Neurobiology, Saint Louis University School of Medicine, St. Louis, Missouri, Paul H. Young, MD, Clinical Professor of Neurosurgery, Department of Surgery, Clinical Professor of Anatomy, Center for Anatomical Science and Education, Department of Surgery, Saint Louis University School of Medicine, St. Louis, Missouri, Daniel L. Tolbert, PhD, Emeritus Professor of Anatomy and Surgery, Emeritus Director, Center for Anatomical Science and Education, Department of Surgery, Saint Louis University School of Medicine, St. Louis, Missouri.
    Summary: Clinically oriented and student friendly, Basic Clinical Neuroscience provides the anatomic and pathophysiologic basis necessary to understand neurologic abnormalities. This concise but comprehensive text emphasizes the localization of specific medically important structures and clinically important pathways, using anatomy-enhancing illustrations. [From book jacket].

    Contents:
    Part I. Organization, cellular components, and topography of the CNS
    Introduction, organization, and cellular components
    Spinal cord: topography and functional levels
    Brainstem: topography and functional levels
    Forebrain: topography and functional levels
    Part II. Motor systems
    Lower motor neurons: flaccid paralysis
    The Pyramidal system: spastic paralysis
    Spinal motor organization and brainstem supraspinal paths: postcapsular lesion recovery and decerebrate posturing
    The Basal ganglia: dyskinesia
    The Cerebellum: ataxia
    The Ocular motor system: gaze disorders
    Part III. Sensory systems
    The Somatosensory system: anesthesia and analgesia
    The Auditory system: deafness
    The Vestibular system: vertigo and nystagmus
    The Visual system: anopsia
    The Gustatory and olfactory systems: ageusia and anosmia
    Part IV. The Cerebral cortex and limbic system
    The Cerebral cortex: aphasia, agnosia, and apraxia
    The Limbic system: anterograde amnesia and inappropriate social behavior
    Part V. The Visceral system
    The Hypothalamus: vegetative and endocrine imbalance
    The Autonomic nervous system: visceral abnormalities
    Part VI. The Reticular formation and cranial nerves
    Reticular formation: modulation and activation
    Summary of the cranial nerves: components and abnormalities
    Part VII. Accessory components
    The Blood supply of the central nervous system: stroke
    The Cerebrospinal fluid system: hydrocephalus
    Part VIII. Development, aging, and response of neurons to injury
    Development of the nervous system: congenital anomalies
    Aging of the nervous system: dementia
    Recovery of function of the nervous system: plasticity and regeneration
    Part IX. Where is the lesion?
    Principles for locating lesions and clinical illustrations.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QM451 .Y68 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Vijay Kumar, Kiran Dip Gill.
    Summary: This book is a practical guidebook in biochemistry, for medical as well as life sciences' students. The book covers reference values, sample collection procedure and detailed protocol to perform experiments. Each experiment starts with a brief introduction of the protocol, followed by specimen requirements and procedure. The procedures are presented in a very lucid manner and discuss details of calculations and clinical interpretations, The book is divided into 29 chapters, It offers references, general guidelines and abbreviations and provides principles and procedures of clinical biochemistry tests, along with their diagnostic importance.

    Contents:
    Common clinical laboratory hazards and waste disposal
    Blood collection and preservation
    Quality Control in laboratory
    Automation in clinical laboratory
    Photometry-Colorimeter and Spectrophotometer
    Preparation of general laboratory solutions and buffers
    Examination of urine for normal constituents
    To perform qualitative tests for urinary proteins
    To determine the quantity of proteins in urine sample using Biuret reaction
    To estimate the amount of total protein and albumin in serum and to find A/G ratio
    To perform qualitative test for reducing substances in urine
    Quantitative analysis of reducing sugars in urine
    Estimation of blood glucose levels by Glucose Oxidase method
    Estimation of blood glucose levels by Folin and Wu method
    To perform Glucose Tolerance Test
    Estimation of urea in serum and urine
    To determine urea clearance
    To estimate creatinine level in serum and urine by Jaffe's reaction
    To determine creatinine clearance
    To determine the uric acid concentration in serum and urine
    Estimation of total calcium in serum and urine
    Estimation of inorganic phosphorus in serum and urine
    To estimate the amount of total cholesterol in serum
    To estimate total and direct bilirubin in serum
    To determine Alanine and Aspartate Transaminases activity in serum
    To estimate the activity of alkaline phosphatase in serum
    To estimate the activity of acid phosphatase in serum
    To determine serum and urinary amylase activity
    To estimate the activity of lipase in serum
    Qualitative analysis of ketone bodies in urine
    Qualitative test for bile pigments and urobilinogen in urine
    Determination of total lactate dehydrogenase activity in serum
    To measure the activity of Creatine kinase-MB and Total Creatine kinase in serum
    Analysis of Cerebrospinal Fluid for proteins and sugars
    To analyze lipid profile from given serum sample
    To determine sodium and potassium in serum by using Flame photometry
    To perform Radioimmunoassay
    To perform Enzyme linked Immunosorbant assay
    Some important case studies.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Marc W. Harrold, Robin M. Zavod.
    Summary: "This text will focus upon the basic, fundamental concepts that govern the discipline of medicinal chemistry as well as how and why these concepts are essential to therapeutic decisions. The text will include numerous examples of each concept as well as review questions designed to help readers assess their understanding of these concepts. Each chapter will also include a section that focuses upon the application of the pertinent concepts to therapeutic decisions. The text is meant to be comprehensive in regards to the fundamental chemical concepts that govern drug action; however, it will not discuss every drug or drug class. Through conceptual discussions, examples, and applications, the text should provider with the knowledge and skills to discuss the pertinent chemistry of drug molecules"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Functional Group Characteristics and Roles
    Identifying Acidic and Basic Functional Groups
    Solving pH and pKa Problems
    Salts and Solubility
    Drug Binding Interactions
    Stereochemistry and Drug Action
    Drug Metabolism
    Structure Activity Relationships and Basic Concepts in Drug Design
    Whole Molecule Drug Evaluation.
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
  • Digital
    Janet L Stringer.
    Summary: "Basic Concepts in Pharmacology: What You Need to Know for Each Drug Class is a review book for pharmacology designed to help students organize and understand the hundreds of drugs covered in pharmacology classes today"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2022
  • Digital
    W. Gray (Jay) Jerome, Robert L. Price, editors.
    Summary: Basic Confocal Microscopy, Second Edition builds on the successful first edition by keeping the same format and reflecting relevant changes and recent developments in this still-burgeoning field. This format is based on the Confocal Microscopy Workshop that has been taught by several of the authors for nearly 20 years and remains a popular workshop for gaining basic skills in confocal microscopy. While much of the information concerning fluorescence and confocal microscopy that made the first edition a success has not changed in the six years since the book was first published, confocal imaging is an evolving field and recent advances in detector technology, operating software, tissue preparation and clearing, image analysis, and more have been updated to reflect this. Several of these advances are now considered routine in many laboratories, and others such as super resolution techniques built on confocal technology are becoming widely available.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Introduction and Historical Perspective
    Chapter 2 The Theory of Fluorescence
    Chapter 3 Fluorescence Microscopy
    Chapter 4 Specimen Preparation
    Chapter 5 Labeling Considerations for Confocal Microscopy
    Chapter 6 Digital Imaging
    Chapter 7 Confocal Digital Image Capture
    Chapter 8 Types of Confocal Instruments: Basic Principals and Advantages and Disadvantages
    Chapter 9 Setting the Operating Parameters
    Chapter 10 3D Reconstruction of Confocal Image Data
    Chapter 11 Analysis of Image Similarity and Relationship
    Chapter 12 Ethics and Resources.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Gail I. Smith, MA, RHIA, CCS-P.
    Digital Access STAT!Ref 2021
    Limited to 5 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Brent G. Petty.
    Contents:
    1. Components of the electrocardiogram: the normal tracing
    2. Axis
    3. Myocardial infaction and ischemia
    4. Atrioventricular (AV) block
    5. Bundle branch blocks and hemiblocks
    6. Chamber enlargement
    7. Arrhythmias
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    by Brent G. Petty.
    Summary: This significantly expanded second edition of this important textbook provides a comprehensive overview of the basics of electrocardiography. Each chapter is revised, and the book includes new chapters that focus on pacemakers, low voltage, pulmonary embolism, and hypothermia. The book is intended to help students in all health care delivery fields and at all levels of training to learn the basic concepts of interpreting electrocardiograms. It concisely covers the essential components of electrocardiography (ECG or EKG) and helps readers identify a number of conditions, including arrhythmias, bifascicular blocks, and heart attacks. Chapters are constructed to introduce basic themes, show examples from actual patient tracings, and provide practice through self-test electrocardiograms that reinforce the concepts taught in the chapter. Additionally, practice tracings build on the information provided in earlier chapters as well as on the features of the current one. Designed for the clerkship student, resident, or even the practicing professional who wants to brush up on EKG particulars, the second edition of Basic Electrocardiography is a user-friendly guide to one of medicine's most useful tools.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1
    Components of the Electrocardiogram: The Normal Tracing
    Chapter 2. Axis
    Chapter 3. Myocardial Infarction and Ischemia
    Chapter 4. Atrioventricular (AV) Block
    Chapter 5. Bundle Branch Blocks and Hemiblocks
    Chapter 6. Chamber Enlargement
    Chapter 7. Arrhythmias
    Chapter 8. Pacemakers
    Chapter 9. Pulmonary Embolism
    Chapter 10. Hypothermia.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Alopi M. Patel, Himani V. Bhatt, Sang J. Kim.
    Summary: Focused and results-based, this important board review title covers everything that residents need to know when preparing for their Anesthesiology BASIC exam. Written by residents familiar with the exam, its use of bullet points and illustrations enables effective learning and efficient exam preparation. Providing a comprehensive review of all exam topics, the guide uses a clear and focused note-taking style to present 'high-yield' information, enabling efficient study techniques. Bullet points and short paragraphs feature to help rapid understanding, with margin space provided to annotate and add further notes. The helpful format ensures that all exam preparation, including notes from question banks, can be kept in this 'one-stop' review book. Mirroring the BASIC exam requirements, this book covers clinical anesthetic practice, pharmacology, physiology, anatomy, and anesthesia equipment and monitoring. Written by residents for residents, it is an essential preparation resource for the Anesthesiology BASIC exam.

    Contents:
    Anatomy
    Anesthesia delivery systems
    Monitoring methods
    Ventilators, alarms, and safety features
    Defibrillators
    Electrical, fire, and explosion hazards
    Basic mathematics and statistics
    General pharmacology
    Inhaled anesthetics
    Opioids
    Intravenous anesthetics
    Local anesthetics
    Muscle relaxants Evaluation of the patient and preoperative preparation
    Preparation for general anesthesia and premedication
    Regional anesthesia
    General anesthesia
    Monitored anesthesia care and sedation
    Intravenous fluid therapy
    Complications of anesthesia: etiology, prevention, treatment
    Postanesthesia recovery period: analgesics
    Postanesthesia recovery period: common scenarios
    Central and peripheral nervous system
    Pain mechanisms and pathways
    Autonomic nervous system
    Central nervous system anatomy
    Respiratory physiology
    Respiratory system anatomy
    Respiratory system: pharmacology
    Cardiovascular physiology
    Basics of cardiopulmonary resuscitation, medications, defibrillators, and advanced
    Cardiac life S
    Cardiovascular anatomy
    Cardiovascular pharmacology
    Gastrointestinal systems
    Renal anatomy and physiology
    Renal pharmacology
    Hematologic system: coagulation, anticoagulation, antiplatelet, and thrombolytics
    Transfusions Reactions to transfusions
    Endocrine and metabolic systems
    Neuromuscular physiology and disorders
    Special problems or issues in anesthesiology
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Moran S. Saghiv, Michael S. Sagiv.
    Summary: This book reviews the assessment of human performance and the role of different exercise modes both in a laboratory and clinical setting. Details of how to successfully perform basic laboratory procedures for exercise training in health and disease, as well as how to apply non-invasive measurements in exercise physiology are provided. Chapters cover how to appropriately use a range of measures in assessing pulmonary function, anaerobic function and oxygen uptake. Techniques for cardiopulmonary rehabilitation and the mechanisms associated with thermoregulation are also described. Interactive exercises enable readers to easily assimilate key concepts and develop a thorough understanding of the topic. Basic Exercise Physiology provides both trainees and professional healthcare staff interested in exercise physiology with a detailed and practically applicable resource on the topic.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Introduction
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Exercise Physiology
    Introduction
    Modes of Exercise
    Energy for Exercise
    Myocardial Contractility
    Exercise Benefits
    Physical Work Capacity
    Exercise and Cardiovascular Disease
    Pressure Overload and Volume Overload
    Muscular Function
    Oxygen Uptake and Muscle Fibers
    Muscle Fibers
    Aerobic and Anaerobic Capacities
    Strenuous Exercise
    Energy Interplay
    The Pulmonary Function
    Maximal VO2 Values
    The Cardiovascular System Gender Effects on Physiological Differences
    Thermoregulation
    Physiological Responses During Diving
    Physiological Response Altitude
    Physiological and Medical Responses in Space
    Epigenetic Responses
    Aging Effects on Physiological Responses
    Functional Capacity in Health and Disease
    References
    Chapter 2: Metabolism
    Anabolism vs. Catabolism
    Energy Production
    Metabolic Pathways
    The Phosphocreatine System
    The Anaerobic Pathway
    The Aerobic Pathway
    Electron Transport-Linked Phosphorylation
    Lactate Production and Utilization
    Fat Metabolism The Cori Cycles
    Metabolic Rates
    Factors Affecting BMR and RMR
    Direct vs Indirect Calorimetry
    Respiratory Quotient and RER
    RER for Carbohydrate, Fat, and Protein
    Rate of Energy Expenditure
    Hormonal Regulation of Metabolism
    The Endocrine System
    Anabolic and Catabolic Hormones
    G Protein-Coupled Receptors
    Substrate Oxidation
    Hormonal Regulation During Anaerobic Exercise
    Hormonal Regulation During Aerobic Exercise
    Hormonal Regulation During Resistance Exercise
    Hypothalamic Effect on Metabolic Rate Regulation
    Myocardial Metabolism The Metabolic Syndrome
    Diabetes
    Insulin Resistance
    Glycated Hemoglobin
    Effects of Diabetes on Body's Systems
    Diabetic Ketoacidosis
    Kidney Dysfunction in Diabetes
    The Cardiovascular System in Diabetes
    Nervous System and Epigenetic Role in Diabetes
    Exercise's Effects on Diabetic Patients
    Endothelial Dysfunction and Exercise
    Effect of Exercise on Calmodulin Signaling Pathway
    Lipids Metabolism
    Resistance Training in Diabetics
    Effect of Aerobic Exercise on GLUT4 Translocation
    Combined Aerobic and Resistance Exercises in Diabetics Recommended Exercise Training Intensities
    Obesity
    Body Composition Measurements
    Obesity as a Risk Factor
    Obesity and Cardiovascular Disease
    Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Obesity
    Effects of Exercise on Obesity
    Suppressant
    Resistive Exercise Training Effect on Obesity
    The Endocrine System in Fat Metabolism
    Exercise Epigenetics in Obesity
    Effects of Exercise on Lipids
    Laboratory Assignment on Obesity
    Measurement Techniques
    Underwater Weighing
    Skinfold Method
    Measurement Sites (Figs. 2.55, 2.56, 2.57, 2.58, and 2.59)
    Estimation of Body Density
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Simon H. Felton, Alison Chapman.
    Summary: "Oral health education and promotion is an increasingly important topic in the dental industry, and oral health is integral to our general wellbeing. Oral health education involves practical, face-to-face expert instruction provided by a trained educator to a patient, with specific goals in both preventing oral conditions and diseases and managing pre-existing conditions. Promotion is concerned with making people aware of oral health issues on a local, national and international level through initiatives and programmes. Both education and promotion have the same objective -- to help people achieve and maintain good oral health"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The oral cavity in health
    Plaque, calculus, and staining
    Dental plaque-induced gingivitis
    Periodontal disease
    Caries
    Tooth surface loss and sensitivity
    Xerostomia
    Other diseases and disorders affecting the oral cavity
    Nutrition, diet, and exercise
    Sugars in the diet
    Fluoride
    Fissure sealants
    Smoking cessation and substance misuse
    Anti-plaque agents
    Communication
    Education and planning sessions
    Setting up a preventive dental unit
    Planning an oral hygiene presentation to a group
    Practical oral hygiene instruction
    Pregnant patients
    Parents and guardians of pre-11 year olds
    Adolescent and orthodontic patients
    Older people
    At-risk patients and people with special needs
    Minority cultural and ethnic populations in the United Kingdom
    Other health professionals
    Planning education case studies, exhibitions, and record of competence
    Sociology
    Epidemiology
    Evidence-based prevention
    UK dental services
    Oral health promotion
    Dental research.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Print
    Joseph D. Noshpitz, editor-in-chief.
    Contents:
    v. 1. Development / Justin D. Call ... [et al.], editors
    v. 2. Disturbances in development / Joseph D. Noshpitz, editor
    v. 3. Therapeutic interventions / Saul I. Harrison, editor
    v. 4. Prevention and current issues / Irving N. Berlin and Lawrence A. Stone, editors
    v. 5. Advances and new directions / Justin D. Call ... [et al.].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ499 .B33
    5
  • Digital
    Abul K. Abbas , Andrew H. Lichtman MD, and Shiv Pillai .
    Contents:
    Introduction to the immune system : nomenclature, general properties, and components
    Innate immunity : the early defense against infections
    Antigen presentation to t lymphocytes and the functions of major histocompatibility complex molecules : what t lymphocytes see
    Antigen recognition in the adaptive immune system : structure of lymphocyte antigen receptors and development of immune repertoires
    T cell ⁰́₃mediated immunity : activation of t lymphocytes
    Effector mechanisms of t cell ⁰́₃mediated immunity : functions of t cells in host defense
    Humoral immune responses : activation of b lymphocytes and production of antibodies
    Effector mechanisms of humoral immunity : elimination of extracellular microbes and toxins
    Immunologic tolerance and autoimmunity : self⁰́₃nonself discrimination in the immune system and its failure
    Tumor and transplantation immunology : immune responses to cancer cells and normal foreign cells
    Hypersensitivity : disorders caused by immune responses
    Immunodeficiency diseases : disorders caused by defective immunity.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Peter M. A. van Ooijen, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a unique introduction to the vast field of Medical Imaging Informatics for students and physicians by depicting the basics of the different areas in Radiology Informatics. It features short chapters on the different main areas in Medical Imaging Informatics, such as Picture Archiving and Communication Systems (PACS), radiology reporting, data sharing, and de-identification and anonymization, as well as standards like Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM), Integrating the Health Enterprise (IHE) and Health Level 7 (HL7,. Written by experts in the respective fields and endorsed by the European Society of Medical Imaging Informatics (EuSoMII) the scope of the book is based on the Medical Imaging Informatics sub-sections of the European Society of Radiology (ESR) European Training Curriculum Undergraduate Level and Level I. This volume will be an invaluable resource for residents and radiologists and is also specifically suited for undergraduate training.

    Contents:
    From Physical Film to PACS
    The essence of HL7, DICOM, and IHE
    Development of Radiology Reporting
    Basic Imaging Workflow
    Diagnostic displays
    Advanced Visualization Basics
    Sharing imaging data
    De-identification and anonymization
    New and upcoming technologies.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Roland Seifert.
    Summary: This is the perfect pharmacology textbook for medical and pharmacy students. The book was developed on the +30-year experience of the author as pharmacology professor in the United States and Germany. The book discusses the most important drugs (400) in the context of relevant diseases. Summary tables and schemes, MCQ exam questions, case studies and a list of drugs aid memorization of the material before an exam. All chapters are written in the same concise style and use a modern and precise pharmacological nomenclature. After reading of the book, the student will be able to critically assess the proper use of the most important drugs and advise patients properly. The didactic concept of the book has been developed on the authors own pharmacology courses for which he has received numerous teaching awards. The book takes advantage of the learning spiral, in which material is presented repeatedly from various angles. This book is an adaptation for an international audience of the German textbook "Basiswissen Pharmakologie" (2018); ISBN: 978-3-662-56303-8.

    Contents:
    General Principles: Introduction and Pharmacodynamics
    Pharmacokinetics
    Drug Allergy
    Treatment of Drug Intoxications
    Pharmacology of Integrative Systems: Cholinergic and Adrenergic System
    Serotonergic System
    Histaminergic System
    Dopaminergic System
    NO-cGMP System
    Pain Pharmacology
    Immunopharmacology
    Pharmacology of the Kidney
    Pharmacotherapy: Drugs for Treatment of Gastrointestinal Diseases
    Drugs for Treatment of Respiratory Tract Diseases
    Drugs for Treatment of Hypertension
    Drugs for Treatment of Chronic Heart Failure and Coronary Heart Disease
    Drug-Induced Arrhythmias and Drugs for the Treatment of Arrhythmias
    Drugs for Treatment of Thromboembolic Diseases
    Drugs for Treatment of Diabetes mellitus
    Drugs for Treatment of Osteoporosis
    Drugs for Treatment of Thyroid Gland Diseases
    Drugs for Treatment of Dyslipidemias
    Drugs for Treatment of Gout
    Sex Hormones: Hormonal Contraception and Hormonal Replacement Therapy
    Neuron Inhibitors with Pleiotropic Effects and Allosteric GABAA Receptor Modulators
    Local Anesthetics
    Inhalation and Injection Narcotics
    Drugs for Treatment of Depression and Bipolar Disorder
    Drugs for Treatment of Schizophrenia
    Drugs for Treatment of Alzheimers Disease
    Drugs for Treatment of Glaucoma and Age-Related Macular Degeneration
    Drugs for Treatment of Malignant Tumor Diseases
    Drugs for Treatment of Bacterial Infections
    Drugs for Treatment of Viral Infections
    Drugs for Treatment of Fungal Infections
    Integrative Case Studies
    The "100 List" of Drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Hollaender, Alexander.
    Summary: Consists of the proceedings of international Latin American symposia.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Basic life sciences to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    American Heart Association.
    Contents:
    pt. 1. General concepts
    Introduction
    High-quality CPR
    The chain of survival
    Cardiac arrest or heart attack?
    pt. 2. BLS for adults
    BLS general concepts
    BLS healthcare provider adult cardiac arrest algorithm
    Adult 1-rescuer BLS sequence
    Adult chest compressions
    Adult breaths
    Opening the airway
    Barrier devices
    Bag-mask devices
    Adult 2-rescuer BLS sequence
    Team roles and duties for 2-rescuer CPR
    pt. 3. Automated external defibrillator for adults and children 8 years of age and older
    General concepts
    Using the AED
    Special circumstances
    pt. 4. Team dynamics
    General concepts
    Elements of effective team dynamics
    Roles during a resuscitation attempt
    What to communicate
    How to communicate
    Debriefing
    pt. 5. BLS for infants and children
    General concepts
    BLS healthcare provider pediatric cardiac arrest algorithm for the single rescuer
    Infant and child 1-rescuer BLS sequence
    Infant/child chest compressions
    Infant/child breaths
    BLS healthcare provider pediatric cardiac arrest algorithm for 2 or more rescuers
    Infant and child 2-rescuer BLS sequence
    pt. 6. Automated external defibrillator for infants and for children less than 8 years of age
    AED for infants and children
    pt. 7. Ventilation techniques
    CPR and breaths with an advanced airway
    Rescue breathing
    Techniques for giving breaths without a barrier device
    pt. 8. Opioid-associated life-threatening emergencies
    General concepts
    Opioid-associated life-threatening emergency (adult) sequence
    pt. 9. Choking relief for adults, children, and infants
    General concepts
    Choking relief in a responsive adult or child
    Choking relief in an unresponsive adult or child
    Choking relief in infants
    Summary of high-quality CPR components for BLS providers
    Adult CPR and AED skills testing checklist
    Adult CPR and AED skills testing critical skills descriptors
    Infant CPR skills testing checklist
    Infant CPR skills testing critical skills descriptors.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC87.9 .B57 2016
    1
  • Digital/Print
    American Heart Association.
    Summary: The BLS Provider Manual eBook is the electronic equivalent of the AHA's BLS Provider Manual. It offers an alternative to the printed course manual and is for use by a single student before, during and after the BLS Course. Please note, there is a separate supplementary tool included, the BLS Digital Reference Card. This is the electronic equivalent of the BLS Reference Card, and will be automatically included with the purchase of the BLS Provider Manual eBook.

    Contents:
    Part 1: General course concepts
    Part 2: The chain of survival
    Part 3: BLS for adults
    Part 4: Automated External Defibrillator for adults and children 8 years of age and older
    Part 5: Team dynamics
    Part 6: BLS for infants and children
    Part 7: Automated External Defibrillator for infants and children younger than 8 years of age
    Part 8: Alternate ventilation techniques
    Part 9: Opioid-associated life-threatening emergencies
    Part 10: Other life-threatening emergencies
    Part 11: Choking relief for adults, children, and infants
    Appendix.
    Digital Access AHA 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC87.9 .B57 2020
    2
  • Digital/Print
    Summary: "This manual informs about practical procedures in ... assessment based on experience from existing national fluoridation programmes. The assessment tools will primarily be useful in assisting countries in achieving an effective fluoride exposure. It is a hope that the manual will stimulate oral health personnel and public health administrators to use a systematic approach for managing and analysing data obtained from different levels of fluoride exposure. Finally the manual encourages inter-country collaboration on surveillance systems for community programmes using fluoride for prevention of dental caries."--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access WHO 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RK331 .B37 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Volker Musahl, Jón Karlsson, Michael T. Hirschmann, Olufemi R. Ayeni, Robert G. Marx, Jason L. Koh, Norimasa Nakamura, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed to meet the needs of both novice and senior researchers in Orthopaedics by providing the essential, clinically relevant knowledge on research methodology that is sometimes overlooked during training. Readers will find a wealth of easy-to-understand information on all relevant aspects, from protocol design, the fundamentals of statistics, and the use of computer-based tools through to the performance of clinical studies with different levels of evidence, multicenter studies, systematic reviews, meta-analyses, and economic health care studies. A key feature is a series of typical case examples that will facilitate use of the volume as a handbook for most common research approaches and study types. Younger researchers will also appreciate the guidance on preparation of abstracts, poster and paper presentations, grant applications, and publications. The authors are internationally renowned orthopaedic surgeons with extensive research experience and the book is published in collaboration with ISAKOS.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Elisabeth Presterl, Magda Diab-El Schahawi, Jacqui S. Reilly, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an evidence-based, practical approach to the diagnosis and treatment of the most frequent fungal infections in a general hospital. It offers a comprehensive overview of the basic medical and scientific background of fungal infections and carefully explains and discusses epidemiology, pathogenesis, and clinical presentation. Readers will acquire a good and clear perception of invasive fungal infections, including diagnosis and treatment. This user-friendly resource not only serves as a valuable tool in clinical management, but also provides the basis for further research questions and studies in this particular field. It will be a useful companion for midwives as well as for doctors, medical and pharmacy students, nurses and other healthcare professionals.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Jamshid Tehranzadeh.
    Summary: Addresses the fundamental principles and techniques of general diagnostic and advanced musculoskeletal imaging. This book focuses on the conditions and procedures most often encountered in real-world practice, such as: Upper and lower extremity trauma; axial skeletal trauma; arthritis and infection; tumors; and metabolic bone diseases.

    Contents:
    Imaging modalities used in musculoskeletal radiology / Joseph E. Burns
    Skeletal trauma : upper extremity / Cornelia Wenokor, Marcia F. Blacksin
    Skeletal trauma : lower extremity / Cornelia Wenokor, Marcia F. Blacksin
    Axial skeletal trauma / Marcia F. Blacksin, Cornelia Wenokor
    Pediatric skeletal trauma / Marcia F. Blacksin, Cornelia Wenokor
    Arthritis and infection / Michael E. Cody, Jamshid Tehranzadeh
    Tumors / Aydin Soheili, Maryam Golshan Momeni, Jamshid Tehranzadeh
    Metabolic bone diseases / Quazi Al-Tariq [and others]
    Bone infarct and osteochondrosis / David T. Nakamura, Jamshid Tehranzadeh
    Orthopedic hardware and complications / Reza Dehdari, Minal Tapadia
    Signs in musculoskeletal radiology / Amilcare Gentili, Shazia Ashfaq
    Shoulder MRI / Farzad Rezai
    Knee MRI / Arash David Tehranzadeh
    Spine MRI / Samuel Song, Jason Handwerker
    Elbow MRI / Rajeev K. Varma, Alya Sheikh
    Wrist MRI / Maryam Golshan Momeni, Hiroshi Yoshioka
    Hip MRI / Rajeev K. Varma, Ben Plotkin
    Ankle MRI / Shahla Modarresi, Daria Motamedi, Cecilia M. Jude
    Musculoskeletal ultrasound / Sabrina Véras Britto [and others]
    Musculoskeletal scintigraphy / Mark Chambers.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Jamshid Tehranzadeh.
    Summary: "Basic Musculoskeletal Imaging is an easy-to-read teaching textbook that is primarily targeted to medical students and residents in radiology, orthopedics, and physical therapy and rehabilitation that addresses the basic aspects of not only general diagnostic but also advanced imaging of musculoskeletal radiology"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Imaging Modalities Used in Musculoskeletal Radiology / Joseph E. Burns
    Skeletal Trauma : Upper Extremity / Cornelia Wenokor and Marcia F. Blacksin
    Skeletal Trauma : Lower Extremity / Cornelia Wenokor and Marcia F. Blacksin
    Axial Skeletal Trauma / Marcia F. Blacksin and Cornelia Wenokor
    Pediatric Skeletal Trauma / Marcia F. Blacksin and Cornelia Wenokor
    Arthritis and Infection / Michael E. Cody and Jamshid Tehranzadeh
    Tumors / Aydin Soheili, Maryam Golshan Momeni, and Jamshid Tehranzadeh
    Metabolic Bone Diseases / Benjamin D. Levine, Kambiz Motamedi, and Leanne L. Seeger
    Bone Infarct and Osteochondrosis / David T. Nakamura and Jamshid Tehranzadeh
    Orthopedic Hardware and Complications / Reza Dehdari and Minal Tapadia
    Signs in Musculoskeletal Radiology / Amilcare Gentili and Shazia Ashfaq
    Shoulder MRI / Rina Patel and Daria Motamedi
    Knee MRI / Arash David Tehranzadeh
    Spine MRI / Paul Manning and Jason Handwerker
    Elbow MRI / Rajeev K. Varma, Alya Sheikh, and David Ban
    Wrist MRI / Maryam Golshan Momeni and Hiroshi Yoshioka
    Hip MRI / Rajeev K. Varma, Ben Plotkin, and Joanna Chen
    Ankle MRI / Shahla Modarresi, Daria Motamedi, and Cecilia M. Jude
    Musculoskeletal Ultrasound / Erwan Lefebvre, Laura Scarciolla, Anne Cotten, and Thibaut Jacques
    Musculoskeletal Scintigraphy / Mark Chambers.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2021
  • Digital
    Fabio Meneghini.
    Summary: Expressly designed for surgeons in training who are new to nasal rhinoplasty, this textbook is written in a simple didactic style. A century after the first open rhinoplasty was performed by Dr. Aurel Réthi in Hungary, open rhinoplasty is now the most commonly used approach to aesthetic and reconstructive nasal surgery; the author's decades of experience will safely guide the reader through her/his journey from the first contact with new patients to the postoperative analysis of clinical results. Instead of the usual classification of surgical techniques and anatomical regions, here the learning process is based on a sequence of steps, each of which addresses the most frequent problems that surgeons are likely to encounter in everyday clinical practice. In addition, the most relevant surgical instruments and electromedical devices are presented, together with their specific features and techniques, such as inclination and positioning during the procedure. Each step is richly illustrated and supported by a suggested reading list, as well as content on ethical and general principles. A specific chapter on radiological pre-evaluation assessment makes this book unique. Given its clear structure, its appealing didactic style and wealth of figures, Basic Open Rhinoplasty offers a much-valued step-by-step companion for postgraduate students, surgeons in training, and medical practitioners who deal with rhinoplasty in their clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Introduction - Why this Book?
    Approaching the Patient for Nasal Surgery
    Approaching the Patient for Nasal Surgery
    Views of Clinical Facial Photography for Nasal Surgery
    Facial and Nasal Clinical Analysis
    Dentofacial Analysis for Rhinoplasty Patients
    Preoperative CT Scan for Nasal Surgery
    The Rationale of Basic Open Rhinoplasty for Young Surgeons
    Rhinoplasty Treatment Plan - Basic Principles
    Individual Treatment Plan for Rhinoplasty
    Patient Preparation for Rhinoplasty
    Basic Open Rhinoplasty - An Overview
    Basic Open Rhinoplasty - Incisions and Skeletonization
    Basic Open Rhinoplasty - Intraoperative Analysis
    Open Rhinoplasty - Initial Surgical Steps
    Basic Open Rhinoplasty - Intermediate Surgical Steps
    Basic Open Rhinoplasty - Final Surgical Steps
    Basic Open Rhinoplasty - Alar Base Work and Final Nose Dressing
    Chin Surgery for Rhinoplasty Patients
    Cartilage and Fascia Harvesting for Rhinoplasty
    Postoperative Care, Complications and Unsatisfactory Results in Rhinoplasty
    A Clinical Practice Focused on Rhinoplasty.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rudolf Probst, Gerhard Grevers, Heinrich Iro ; with contributions by Frank Rosanowski, Ulrich Eysholdt, Frank Waldfahrer.
    Contents:
    Anatomy, physiology, and immunology of the nose, paranasal sinuses, and face / Gerhard Grevers
    Diagnostic evaluation of the nose and paranasal sinuses / Gerhard Grevers
    Diseases of the nose, paranasal sinuses, and face / Gerhard Grevers
    Lips and oral cavity / Gerhard Grevers
    Pharynx and esophagus / Gerhard Grevers
    The salivary glands / Rudolf Probst, Heinrich Iro, Frank Waldfahrer
    Anatomy and physiology of the ear / Rudolf Probst
    Audiology (hearing tests) / Rudolf Probst
    Pediatric hearing disorders, pediatric audiology / Rudolf Probst
    External ear / Rudolf Probst
    Middle ear / Rudolf Probst
    Inner ear and retrocochlear disorders / Rudolf Probst
    Vestibular disorders / Rudolf Probst
    Facial nerve / Rudolf Probst
    Lateral skull base / Rudolf Probst
    External neck / Heinrich Iro, Frank Waldfahrer
    Larynx and trachea / Heinrich Iro, Frank Waldfahrer
    Voice disorders / Frank Rosanowski, Ulrich Eysholdt
    Speech and language disorders / Frank Rosanowski, Ulrich Eysholdt.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme MedOne Education
  • Digital
    David Chambers, Christopher Huang, Gareth Matthews.
    Summary: Every trainee in anaesthesia requires a thorough understanding of basic physiology and its application to clinical practice. Now in its second edition, this comprehensively illustrated textbook bridges the gap between medical school and reference scientific texts. It covers the physiology requirements of the Primary FRCA examination syllabus. Chapters are organised by organ system, with particular emphasis given to the respiratory, cardiovascular and nervous systems. The practical question-and-answer format helps the reader prepare for oral examinations, while 'clinical reference' boxes translate the physiological concepts to clinical practice. This new edition has been thoroughly updated and revised throughout, and includes six new chapters including the physiology of the eye, upper airway and exercise testing. It provides junior anaesthetists with an essential 'one stop' physiology resource.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Print
    edited by Paul O. P. Tso ; contributors: J. Eisinger [and others]
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    C433 .T88
    2
  • Digital
    Mushabbar A. Syed, Subha V. Raman and Orlando P. Simonetti, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive and authoritative text on the subject of cardiovascular magnetic resonance (CMR). Imaging experts from the most medically advanced areas of the world discuss the basic principles of this modality in detail while maintaining a focus on the needs of cardiovascular imagers who wish to learn more about this subject but do not have a strong background in physics. CMR is now considered a clinically important imaging modality for patients with a wide variety of cardiovascular diseases. Recent developments have influenced a wide variety of cardiovascular imaging applications, many of which are now routinely used in clinical practice in CMR laboratories around the world. That it is non-invasive and lacks ionizing radiation exposure make CMR uniquely important for patients whose clinical condition requires serial imaging follow-up. Basic Principles of Cardiovascular MRI: Physics and Imaging Techniques includes a wealth of CMR examples in the form of high-resolution still images. Each imaging technique is discussed in separate chapters that include the physics and clinical applications (with cardiovascular examples) of that particular technique. As such, this book will be essential for cardiovascular medicine specialists and trainees , cardiovascular physicists, and clinical cardiovascular imagers.

    Contents:
    MRI scanner and coils
    Signal generation
    k-space
    Pulse sequence
    Image acquisition
    Image resolution
    Fast imaging
    High field MRI (3 Tesla or higher)
    Artifacts
    MRI safety
    Gating
    Gradient echo and cine imaging
    Black blood imaging and tissue characterization
    Perfusion
    Stress testing
    Late gadolinium enhancement imaging (scar/fibrosis)
    Phase contrast flow
    Coronary imaging
    Spectroscopy
    Contrast media
    Contrast enhanced MRA
    Non-contrast enhanced MRA
    Advanced cardiovascular magnetic resonance techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Ayman Naseri, executive editor
    Digital Access EBSCOhost 2019
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Murat Beyzadeoglu, Gokhan Ozyigit, Cüneyt Ebruli.
    Summary: This updated work is an all-in-one book, encompassing the essential aspects of radiation physics, radiobiology, and clinical radiation oncology. A complete section is devoted to each of these fields. In the first two sections, concepts that are crucial in radiation physics and radiobiology are reviewed in depth. The third section describes radiation treatment regimens appropriate for the main cancer sites and tumor types. The book has been designed to ensure that the readers will find it easy to use. Many "pearl boxes" are used to summarize the most information, and there are more than 350 helpful illustrations, the majority of them in color. Basic Radiation Oncology, 2nd edition, will meet the need for a practical, up-to-date, bedside-oriented radiation oncology book. It will be extremely useful for residents, fellows, and clinicians in the fields of radiation, medical, and surgical oncology, as well as for medical students, physicians, and medical physicists with an interest in clinical oncology.

    Contents:
    Radiation Physics
    Radiobiology
    Clinical Radiation Oncology
    Central Nervous System Tumors
    Head and Neck Cancers
    Lung Cancer
    Breast Cancer
    Genitourinary System Cancer
    Gynecological Cancers
    Gastrointestinal System Cancers
    Soft Tissue Sarcoma
    Skin Cancer
    Lymphomas and Total Body Irradiation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    David S. Chang, Foster D. Lasley, Indra J. Das, Marc S. Mendonca, Joseph R. Dynlacht.
    Summary: This book is a concise and well-illustrated review of the physics and biology of radiation therapy intended for radiation oncology residents, radiation therapists, dosimetrists, and physicists. It presents topics that are included on the Radiation Therapy Physics and Biology examinations and is designed with the intent of presenting information in an easily digestible format with maximum retention in mind. The inclusion of mnemonics, rules of thumb, and reader-friendly illustrations throughout the book help to make difficult concepts easier to grasp. Basic Radiotherapy Physics and Biology is a valuable reference for students and prospective students in every discipline of radiation oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    David S. Chang [and 4 others].
    Summary: This book is a concise and well-illustrated review of the physics and biology of radiation therapy intended for radiation therapists, dosimetrists, radiation oncology residents, and physicists. It presents topics that are included on the radiation therapy physics and biology board examinations and is designed with the intent of presenting information in an easily digestible format with maximum retention in mind. The inclusion of mnemonics, rules of thumb, and reader-friendly illustrations throughout the book help to make difficult concepts easier to grasp. This new edition is updated throughout with the latest information and applications of radiation oncology physics and biology and includes four new chapters. New topics include: MRI linac, proton beam radiotherapy, chemomodulation and immunomodulation of radiation in vitro and in vivo, and stochastic and deterministic late effects. Basic Radiotherapy Physics and Biology is a valuable reference for radiation oncologists, medical professionals in the field, residents, and all students interested in radiation oncology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    edited by David Hamilton and Frederick Naftolin.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Basis and development of reproduction.--
    v. 2. Reproduction function in men.--
    v. 3. Reproductive function in women.--
    v. 4. Pregnancy.--
    v. 5. Diseases of women.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP251 .B29
    2
  • Digital
    Juan Pedro Martinez-Barbera, Cynthia Lilian Andoniadou, editors.
    Summary: This astute volume brings together the latest expert research on adamantinomatous craniopharyngiomas (ACPs). ACPs are histologically benign but clinically aggressive tumors exhibiting a high propensity for local invasion into the hypothalamus, optic and vascular structures. These tumors, as well as the current treatments, may result in pan-hypopituitarism, diabetes insipidus, morbid obesity followed by type II diabetes mellitus, blindness, as well as serious behavioral and psychosocial impairments. Exploring in detail advances in both the understanding of tumor biology as well as clinical advances in patient management are explored in detail, this book will also look towards potential new treatment approaches. Basic Research and Clinical Aspects of Adamantinomatous Craniopharyngioma is the first book compiling all current research on ACPs. Mouse and human studies have unequivocally demonstrated that mutations in CTNNB1 encoding -catenin underlie the etiology of the majority, if not all ACP tumors. Genetic studies in mice have shown that ACPs are tumors of the pituitary gland and not of the hypothalamus as previously thought, and are derived from Rathke's pouch precursors. In addition, a role for tissue-specific adult pituitary stem cells has been revealed as causative of ACP. Together, these studies have provided novel insights into the molecular and cellular etiology as well as the pathogenesis of human ACP. Finally, this volume covers new treatment approaches that have been shown to be effective both in reducing ACP burden as well as reducing the morbidity associated with therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Morteza Jalali, Francesca Y.L. Saldanha, Mehdi Jalali ; foreword by Dame Sally Davies.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Lea A. Harrington, PhD, Professor Department of Medicine University of Montreal Institute for Research in Immunology and Cancer Pavilion, Montreal, Quebec, Canada, Ian F. Tannock, MD, PhD, DSc, Emeritus Professor of Medicine and Medical Biophysics Princess Margaret Cancer Centre and University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada, Richard P. Hill, PhD, Professor Emeritus Department of Medical Biophysics Princess Margaret Cancer Centre University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canado, David W. Cescon, MD, Phd, Medical Oncologist and Clinician Scientist Princess Margaret Cancer Centre University of Health Network Assistant Professor of Medicine University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario.
    Summary: "Covers cancer causation, cancer biology, and the biology underlying cancer treatment, for trainees in both clinical and research areas of oncology"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Introduction to cancer biology
    Methods of molecular analysis
    Epigenetics
    Cancer epidemiology
    Carcinogenesis
    Cellular signaling
    Oncogenes and tumor-suppressor genes
    Cell proliferation and death
    Genomic stability and DNA repair
    Tumor progression and metastasis
    Angiogenesis
    Tumor growth, microenvironment, metabolism, and hypoxia
    Cancer heterogeneity
    Imaging in oncology
    Molecular and cellular basis of radiotherapy
    Tumor and normal tissue response to radiotherapy
    Discovery and evaluation of anticancer drugs
    Anticancer chemotherapy, pharmacology, and mechanisms of resistance
    Molecular targeted therapies
    Hormones and cancer
    The immune system and immunotherapy
    Guide to clinical studies
    Digital Access AccessHemOnc 2021
  • Digital
    Magdy M. Khalil, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a wide-ranging and up-to-date overview of the basic science underlying PET and its preclinical and clinical applications in modern medicine. In addition, it provides the reader with a sound understanding of the scientific principles and use of PET in routine practice and biomedical imaging research. The opening sections address the fundamental physics, radiation safety, CT scanning dosimetry, and dosimetry of PET radiotracers, chemistry and regulation of PET radiopharmaceuticals, with information on labeling strategies, tracer quality control, and regulation of radiopharmaceutical production in Europe and the United States. PET physics and instrumentation are then discussed, covering the basic principles of PET and PET scanning systems, hybrid PET/CT and PET/MR imaging, system calibration, acceptance testing, and quality control. Subsequent sections focus on image reconstruction, processing, and quantitation in PET and hybrid PET and on imaging artifacts and correction techniques, with particular attention to partial volume correction and motion artifacts. The book closes by examining clinical applications of PET and hybrid PET and their physiological and/or molecular basis in conjunction with technical foundations in the disciplines of oncology, cardiology and neurology, PET in pediatric malignancy and its role in radiotherapy treatment planning. Basic Science of PET Imaging will meet the needs of nuclear medicine practitioners, other radiology specialists, and trainees in these fields.

    Contents:
    History
    Basics and Radiation safety of PET Imaging
    Chemistry of PET radiopharmaceuticals: labelling strategies
    PET radiopharmaceuticals in clinical and research domains
    Quality Control of PET radiopharmaceuticals
    Physiologic and Molecular basis of PET in Cancer imaging
    Basics and new developments of Cardiac PET imaging
    PET in preclinical arena: Instrumentation and applications
    Radiation Dosimetry of PET imaging
    Physics and instrumentation of PET and hybrid PET Imaging: focus on PET/CT
    Hybrid PET/MR Imaging: Technologic advances and clinical applications
    Quality control and quality assurance of PET Scanners
    Image quantification in PET Imaging
    Image processing and data analysis of PET and hybrid PET Imaging
    Partial volume correction in PET imaging
    Compartmental modeling of PET Kinetics
    Motion artefacts and correction techniques in PET/CT
    Role of PET/CT in radiotherapy treatment planning.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Magdy M. Khalil, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I Physics and Chemistry of Nuclear Medicine: Basic Radiation Physics
    Radiation Safety in Nuclear Medicine
    Non-imaging instrumentation in NM
    Quality assurance and quality control of Tc-99m Radiopharmaceuticals
    Tc99m Radio Chemistry
    Radiopharmaceuticals for Diagnosis and Therapy
    PET Chemistry: An Introduction
    PET Chemistry: Radiopharmaceuticals
    Radiation Dosimetry
    Part II SPECT and PET Imaging Instrumentation: Elements of gamma camera and SPECT systems
    Quality Control of planar and SPECT Imaging systems
    Positron Emission Tomography (PET): Basic principles
    CT in Hybrid SPECT/CT and PET/CT
    Part III Image Analysis, Reconstruction and Quantitation in Nuclear Medicine: Fundamentals of Image Processing In Nuclear Medicine
    Emission Tomography and Image Reconstruction
    Quantitative SPECT imaging
    Basic Principales of Radiomics
    Quantitative Cardiac SPECT Imaging
    Tracer Kinetic Modeling: Basics and Concepts
    Tracer Kinetic Modeling: Methodology and Applications.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Mehmet Çakmet, Cengiz Şen, Levent Eralp, Halil Ibrahim Balci, Melih Cıvan, editors.
    Summary: This book provides detailed descriptions of fundamental techniques that may be employed for extremity reconstruction and distraction osteogenesis in accordance with the principles established by Gavriil Abramovich Ilizarov. Techniques of proven value for deformity correction, limb lengthening, reconstruction of post-traumatic and post-osteomyelitis bone defects, non-union surgery, and fracture fixation with external fixators are thoroughly described step by step with the aid of a wealth of illustrative material. In addition, indications and preoperative planning are clearly explained. Throughout, care is taken to highlight important technical tips and tricks as well as clinical pearls and pitfalls. Since the first description of distraction osteogenesis by Ilizarov in the 1950s, numerous technical improvements have been made and new devices, developed, even though the basic principles have remained the same. This new book will be of value for both novice and more experienced surgeons who use distraction osteogenesis for the purpose of extremity reconstruction.

    Contents:
    History
    The philosophy of Ilizarov
    Biological fundamentals of Ilizarov method
    Osteogenesis of distraction
    Components and purpose of Ilizarov system
    Biomechanical principals of Ilizarov external fixator application
    Frame setting techniques
    Types and emplacement of hinges
    Control of fragments
    Kirschner wire application techniques
    Corticotomy techniques
    Lengthening and treatment of limb lenght inequality
    Treatment of pseudoarthrosis by Ilizarov technique
    Treatment of soft tissue contractures by Ilizarov technique
    Ilizarov techniques on treatment of chronic osteomyelitis
    Complications and difficulties
    Introduction to planning of deformity
    Drawing the bone axis of lower extremity on frontal plane
    Mal-alignment test
    Bone deformities of lower extremity on frontal plane
    Drawing the bone axis of lower extremity on saggital plane
    The test of bad inclination
    Bone deformities of lower extremity on saggital plane
    Bone deformities of lower extremity on oblique plane
    Multiapical deformities
    Deformities of translation and angulation
    Rotational deformities
    Anatomical and mechnanical planning
    Types and rules of osteotomy
    Deformities of hip and femur
    Deformities of knee and tibia
    Deformities of foot and ankle
    Deformities of upper extremity
    Deformities caused by metabolical bone diseases
    Deformities caused by smooth tissue contracture over joints
    Fractures of humerus
    Fractures of radius and ulna
    Fractures of the wrist and the hand
    Fractures of pelvis
    Fractures of femur
    Fractures of tibia
    Fractures of the foot.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jean R. Hausheer, MD, executive editor.
    Digital Access EBSCOhost 2019
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Roland Becker, Michael T. Hirschmann, Nanne P, Kort, editors.
    Summary: This book supplies all the information that the young orthopaedic surgeon needs to know when preparing to perform total or partial knee replacement for the first time and also provides more experienced surgeons with a comprehensive general update on the basics. After an opening section on anatomy and kinematics of the knee, patient management during the pre-, peri-, and postoperative phases is covered in detail with the aid of numerous illustrations. The final section considers postoperative patient evaluation, outcome measurements, and the value of registries. Readers will gain a sound understanding of the scientific basis underlying management decisions, of component design philosophies, and of the rationale for preferences such as mechanical alignment and ligament balancing. The pros and cons of a variety of management choices are explained, and guidance provided on patient selection. Surgical techniques are presented on high-quality videos and many tips and tricks are highlighted to help the inexperienced to cope with challenging situations.

    Contents:
    Anthropometry of the Native Knee
    Kinematics of the native knee
    Kinematics of the knee after partial and total knee arthroplasty
    Loading of the knee joint after total knee arthroplasty
    The optimal indication for unicompartmental knee arthroplasty
    The optimal indication for patellofemoral arthroplasty
    The optimal indication for combined patellofemoral and unicondylar knee arthroplasty
    The optimal indication for total knee arthroplasty
    Partial resurfacing implants
    Patients evaluation prior to knee arthroplasty
    Cardiovascular co-morbidity in patients scheduled for TKA
    Patient expectations in total knee arthroplasty
    Basic principles of partial knee arthroplasty
    Principles of total knee arthroplasty
    UKA component design - What do we need to know?
    TKA component design - What do engineers need to know?
    Patellofemoral Arthroplasty-Onlay Versus Inlay Prostheses
    Surgical 2D planning of total knee arthroplasty
    3D planning of total knee arthroplasty - why and how?
    Optimal setup of the operating room
    Tranexamic acid (TXA) in total knee arthroplast
    Optimal positioning of the patient
    Pros and cons of using a tourniquet
    Pro and Cons of tranexamic acid (TXA) in total knee arthroplasty
    Standard approaches to the knee
    Is there an optimal TKA component position?
    Neutral mechanical alignment - the gold standard
    The anatomical alignment concept for total knee arthroplasty
    Kinematic alignment in total knee arthroplasty
    Measured resection technique-how does it work?
    Ligament balancing technique-how does it work
    Posterior femoral referencing in total knee arthroplasty
    Anterior femoral referencing in total knee arthroplasty
    Tibial component rotation in total knee arthroplasty
    Patient specific instrumentation in TKA
    Patients specific partial and total knee arthroplasty- an update
    Navigation in total knee arthroplasty
    Optimal sizing of the femoral, tibial and patellofemoral components in TKA
    Optimal implant fixation in knee arthroplasty: cemented versus cementless knee arthroplasty
    Wound closure in total knee arthroplasty
    Pros and cons of drains for wound drainage in total knee arthroplasty
    Pain management after total knee arthroplasty
    How to handle complications in unicompartmental knee arthroplasty
    How to handle complications during TKA?
    Deformity Correction in Total Knee Arthroplasty
    TKA in fracture treatment
    Thromboembolic prophylaxis after partial or total knee arthroplasty
    How to avoid typical complications after total knee arthroplasty?
    Infection prophylaxis in TKA
    Rehabilitation after Total Knee Arthroplasty
    How to assess outcome after partial or total knee arthroplasty - Measuring results that really matter!
    Function after unicondylar knee arthroplasty- what could you expect?
    Outcome after total knee arthroplasty - what can be expected?
    Function after small knee implants
    Sports after partial or total knee arthroplasty
    The immune response to metal in total knee arthroplasty
    Does digital support influence outcome after total knee arthroplasty?
    Registries-How important are they?
    Most common scores for patients' evaluation.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Gaurav Patel
    Contents:
    What is anesthesiology?
    How to have an amazing anesthesiology rotation
    Smart questions to ask
    OR anesthesia basics
    The preoperative evaluation
    What happens in the OR from the anesthesiologist's perspective?
    The airway: anatomy, assessment, management
    Important pharmacology/medications to know
    Anesthesiology emergencies
  • Digital
    Haidong Dong, Svetomir N. Markovic, editors.
    Summary: "This book provides patients and their physicians (especially "non-oncologist" health care providers) with a clear and concise introduction to cancer immunotherapy, which, unlike traditional forms of cancer therapy, acts by boosting the patient's own immune system to fight cancer. The unique features of cancer immunotherapy make its management, monitoring and side-effects different from those of traditional cancer therapy. Especially novel are the side effects of cancer immunotherapy, necessitating greater awareness for both patients and physicians in order to minimize complications of therapy. The patient-friendly, concise, easy-to-understand, and up-to-date knowledge presented in this book will inform patients about the benefits and risks of cancer immunotherapy, and help them and their care providers to understand how immunotherapy would control their unique disease. Researchers and academic professionals in the field of cancer immunotherapy will also find clear and useful information to help them communicate with patients or address unresolved problems. Some key features of the book are:Expertise. All editors and authors are scientists and oncologists specializing in cancer immunotherapy, and are involved in scientific discovery from the early stage of immune-checkpoint inhibitors to today's daily patient care. Their insights, expertise and experience guarantee the high quality and authority in the science, medicine and practice of cancer immunotherapy. Patient-friendly. This book is written for cancer patients in order to meet their needs when considering immunotherapy. As an educational tool, this book will help the reader balance the risks and benefits based on both science and clinical facts, and therefore to make the best choice in receiving or withdrawing from immunotherapy. Disease Specificity. Cancer is a complicated disease involving multiple stages and pathology. Its response to immunotherapy is individualized and varies depending on cancer types. The authors' expertise in treating different types of cancers, including melanoma, lung, kidney, bladder, and lymphoma, provides disease-specific insights in applying immunotherapy to each disease."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Basic Concepts in Cancer Immunology and Immunotherapy
    Therapeutic Targets of FDA-approved Immunotherapies in Oncology
    Melanoma Immunotherapy
    Significance of Immune Checkpoints in Lung Cancer
    Immunotherapy for Genitourinary Cancers
    Next-generation Immunotherapy in Lymphoma Immunotherapy
    Combined Immunothepary with Conventional Cancer Treatment
    Immunotherapy for Other Malignancies
    Management of Immune-related Adverse Events from Immune Checkpoint Inhibitor Therapy
    Resources for Patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Amar Mukund, editor.
    Summary: This book covers interventional treatments (minimally invasive therapies) for the management of various hepato-biliary disorders and the complications arising due to liver cirrhosis and portal hypertension. Given that interventional radiology and hepato-biliary interventions are comparatively new, very little literature is available on them. This book addresses that gap and offers practitioners and trainees a guide to the management of various hepato-biliary disorders requiring radiological interventions. The content addresses both non-vascular and vascular procedures. The respective chapters cover various procedures, such as image guided diagnostic tissue sampling (FNA and biopsies), guided liver abscess and biliary drainage procedures, liver tumor ablation, intra-arterial and intravenous techniques for the management of vascular diseases of the liver and portal hypertension, variceal bleeds and tumor management. Last but not the least, detailed chapters on interventions for post liver transplant complications are also included. The book is chiefly intended for practicing interventional radiologists, as well as fellows and trainees in interventional radiology courses.

    Contents:
    Section I: Non vascular procedures
    Percutaneous FNA/Biopsy
    Transjugular biopsies
    Drainage procedures
    Percutaneous biliary procedures
    Section II: Vascular procedures
    Drainage procedures
    Management of vascular complications
    IR management in liver trauma
    IR management of hemobilia
    IR management of BCS
    IR management of non-malignant portal vein thrombosis
    Pre-operative interventions - portal vein embolization
    Ablative therapies for liver and biliary tumors
    Transarterial therapies for liver tumors
    Interventions for portal hypertension: TIPS
    Interventions for portal hypertension: BRTO/PARTO
    Interventions for portal hypertension: splenic artery embolization
    Interventions in post-liver transplant settings: vascular complication management
    Interventions in post-liver transplant settings: biliary complication management.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Hooman Poor.
    Summary: This book is a practical and easily understandable guide for mechanical ventilation. With a focus on the basics, this text begins with a detailed account of the mechanisms of spontaneous breathing as a reference point to then describe how a ventilator actually works and how to effectively use it in practice. The text then details: the various modes of ventilation commonly used in clinical practice; patient-ventilator interactions and dyssynchrony; how to approach a patient on the ventilator with respiratory decompensation; the optimal ventilator management for common disease states like acute respiratory distress syndrome and obstructive lung disease; the process of ventilator weaning; and hemodynamic effects of mechanical ventilation. Written for medical students, residents, and practicing physicians in a variety of different specialties (including internal medicine, critical care, surgery and anesthesiology), this book will instruct readers on how to effectively manage a ventilator, as well as explain the underlying interactions between it and the critically ill patient.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    James M. Daniels, William W. Dexter, editors.
    Summary: The field of musculoskeletal ultrasound has rapidly advanced in the past several years. The scanning protocols in particular have become more sophisticated and more standardized. Now in its fully revised and expanded second edition, this volume is the definitive resource on musculoskeletal ultrasound for the beginning practitioner. A new, first of its kind chapter has been added on ultrasound in Sports Medicine Emergencies. This expands the book topic from using POCUS as an office tool to its use on the athletic field to assist with emergencies. This new and detailed chapter includes the acute evaluation of an eye injury, lung, Morrison's pouch, IV access, fluid status, soft tissue and DVT protocols. Conforming to an identical chapter format, all previous chapters have been expanded and updated. Images have been reformatted to larger, clearer versions in addition to probe placement images going from black and white to full color. This book is divided into five different sections. It begins with chapters on the upper extremity such as the hand and wrist. The next section focuses on the lower extremity such as the foot and knee. The third section is nerve based and describes brachial plexus and major peripheral nerves. The fourth section covers Sports Medicine POCUS Emergencies. The last section details specific procedures such as I&D of abscess and hydrodissection. Each chapter follows a standard structure. They open with an approach to the patient, which contains the main pathology and clinical exam. The surface anatomy and ultrasound-based anatomy are then addressed. A discussion on patient positioning and probe settings follows. Pearls, pitfalls and red flags offer tips and pointers on scanning techniques as well as pathology not to be missed. Finally, each chapter is closed out with a summary report. Basics of Musculoskeletal Ultrasound, 2e is a must-have reference for residents, fellowship directors, fellows and primary care physicians as well as athletic trainers, physician assistants, physical therapists and ultrasound technicians. It is also an excellent resource for participants of the AMSSM MSK ultrasound courses.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Frederick O. Stephens, Karl R. Aigner ; with contribution by Kornelia Aigner [and more].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Ashutosh Mukherji.
    Contents:
    Approaching a cancer patient
    Principles of application of radiotherapy
    Use of ither agents with radiation
    Managing radiotherapy complications.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Juliet Corbin, International Institute for Qualitative Methodology, Anselm Strauss.
    Contents:
    Inspiration and background
    Theoretical foundations
    Practical considerations for getting started
    Prelude to analysis
    Strategies for qualitative data analysis
    Memos and diagrams
    Theoretical sampling
    Context
    Process
    Techniques for achieving theoretical integration
    The use of computer programs in qualitative data analysis
    Open coding: identifying concepts
    Developing concepts in terms of their properties and dimensions
    Analyzing data for context
    Bringing process into the analysis
    Integrating categories
    Writing theses, monographs, and dissertations, and giving talks
    About your research
    Criteria for evaluation
    Student questions and answers.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    HA29 .C7724 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Rajvardhan Azad, Shorya Vardhan Azad, Brijesh Takkar.
  • Digital
    Lior Laver, Baris Kocaoglu, Brian Cole, Amelia J. H. Arundale, Jeffrey Bytomski, Annunziato Amendola, editors.
    Summary: This book is designed as a comprehensive educational resource not only for basketball medical caregivers and scientists but for all basketball personnel. Written by a multidisciplinary team of leading experts in their fields, it provides information and guidance on injury prevention, injury management, and rehabilitation for physicians, physical therapists, athletic trainers, rehabilitation specialists, conditioning trainers, and coaches. All commonly encountered injuries and a variety of situations and scenarios specific to basketball are covered with the aid of more than 200 color photos and illustrations. Basketball Sports Medicine and Science is published in collaboration with ESSKA and will represent a superb, comprehensive educational resource. It is further hoped that the book will serve as a link between the different disciplines and modalities involved in basketball care, creating a common language and improving communication within the team staff and environment.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword by Coach Mike Krzyzewski
    Foreword from the ESSKA Leadership
    After Handball and Football, ESSKA's Third Sport-Specific Book-On Basketball Medicine and Science!
    Preface
    A Word from the Editors/Acknowledgments
    Basketball Sports Medicine and Science
    Introduction
    Contents
    Part I: Basic and Applied Sciences
    1: Physical and Anthropometric Characteristics of Basketball Players
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Physical Attributes of the Basketball Player
    1.2.1 Aerobic Capacity
    1.2.2 Anaerobic Power
    1.2.3 Strength
    1.2.4 Speed and Agility 1.2.5 Anthropometric Measures
    References
    2: Activity and Physiological Demands During Basketball Game Play
    2.1 Activity Demands
    2.1.1 Distance Covered
    2.1.2 Activity Frequency
    2.1.3 Activity Duration
    2.2 Physiological Demands
    2.2.1 Blood Lactate Concentration
    2.2.2 Heart Rate
    References
    3: Endocrine Aspects in Performance and Recovery in Basketball
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 The Anabolic-Catabolic Systemic-Local Training Model
    3.2.1 Effect of Single Exercise
    3.2.2 Effect of Interval Training
    3.2.3 Endocrine Aspects in Recovery 3.2.4 Effect of Prolonged Training
    3.2.5 Effect of Basketball Match
    3.2.6 Effect on Performance
    3.3 Summary
    References
    4: Biomechanics of Lower Extremity Movements and Injury in Basketball
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Movement Demands
    4.2.1 Total Distance
    4.2.2 Straight-Line Running
    4.2.3 Non-sagittal Plane Movements
    4.2.4 Vertical Demands
    4.3 Lower Extremity Biomechanics During Basketball Movements
    4.3.1 Jumping and Landing
    4.3.2 Running, Cutting, and Lateral Movements
    4.4 Biomechanical Considerations of Lower Extremity Injuries 4.4.1 Foot and Ankle
    4.4.1.1 Ankle Sprain
    4.4.1.2 Bony Foot Injury
    4.4.2 Knee
    4.4.2.1 Anterior Cruciate Ligament Injury
    4.4.2.2 Tendinopathy of the Knee Extensor Mechanism
    4.5 General Considerations for Rehabilitation and Return to Play
    References
    5: Biomechanics of Upper Extremity Movements and Injury in Basketball
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Movement Demands
    5.3 Upper Extremity Biomechanics During Basketball Movements
    5.3.1 Shooting
    5.3.2 Dribbling
    5.4 Biomechanical Considerations of Upper Extremity Injuries in Basketball
    5.4.1 Finger Fracture 5.4.2 Thumb Sprain
    5.4.3 Wrist Sprain
    5.4.4 Shoulder Injury
    5.4.5 Considerations for Upper Extremity Injury Prevention
    5.5 Considerations for Rehabilitation and Return to Performance
    5.5.1 Finger Fracture
    5.5.2 Thumb Sprain
    5.5.3 Wrist Sprain
    5.5.4 Shoulder Injury
    References
    6: Nutrition and Hydration in Basketball Athletes
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Physiological Demands
    6.3 Energy Requirements in Basketball
    6.4 Macronutrient Status in Basketball
    6.4.1 Carbohydrate Requirements
    6.4.2 Protein Requirements
    6.4.3 Fat Requirements 6.5 Micronutrient Intake in Basketball.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Bernhard F. Gibbs, Franco H. Falcone.
    Contents:
    Paradigm shifts in mast cell and basophil biology and function : an emerging view of immune regulation in health and disease / Ana Olivera and Juan Rivera
    Purification of basophils from peripheral human blood / Franco H. Falcone and Bernhard F. Gibbs
    Mast cell purification protocols / Jasmine Farrington , Elizabeth P. Seward , and Peter T. Peachell
    Generation of a human allergic mast cell phenotype from CD133+ stem cells / Hans Jürgen Hoffmann
    Generation of mast cells from murine stem cell progenitors / Emily J. Swindle
    Integration of the human dermal mast cell into the organotypic co-culture skin model / Jonghui Kim [and four others]
    The absolute basophil count / Elena Borzova and Clemens A. Dahinden
    Mast cell and basophil cell lines : a compendium / Egle Passante
    Detection of mast cells and basophils by immunohistochemistry / Andrew F. Walls and Cornelia Amalinei
    Measuring histamine and cytokine release from basophils and mast cells / Bettina M. Jensen, Sidsel Falkencrone, and Per S. Skov
    Flow cytometric allergy diagnosis : basophil activation techniques / Chris H. Bridts [and five others]
    Microscopy assays for evaluation of mast cell migration and chemotaxis / Monika Bambousková [and three others]
    Use of humanized rat basophil leukemia (RBL) reporter systems for detection of allergen-specific IgE sensitization in human serum / Daniel Wan [and four others]
    Gene silencing approaches in mast cells and primary human basophils / Vadim V. Sumbayev and Bernhard F. Gibbs
    Basophil stimulation and signaling pathways / Edward F. Knol and Bernhard F. Gibbs
    Identification and immunophenotypic characterization of normal and pathological mast cells / José Mário Morgado [and three others]
    Identification of murine basophils by flow cytometry and histology / Christian Schwartz and David Voehringer
    Mast cell-mediated reactions in vivo / Vladimir Andrey Giménez-Rivera , Martin Metz, and Frank Siebenhaar.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    M. Brock Fenton, Alan D Grinnell, Arthur N. Popper, Richard R. Fay, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    A History of the Study of Echolocation
    Phylogeny, Genes, and Hearing
    Implications for the Evolution of Echolocation in Bats
    Ultrasound Production, Emission, and Reception
    To Scream or to Listen? Prey Detection and Discrimination in Animal-Eating Bats
    Roles of Acoustic Social Communication in the Lives of Bats
    Guild Structure and Niche Differentiation in Echolocating Bats
    Neural Coding of Signal Duration and Complex Acoustic Objects
    The Neural Processing of Frequency Modulations in the Auditory System of Bats
    Behavioral and Physiological Bases for Doppler Shift Compensation by Echolocating Bats
    Perceiving the World Through Echolocation and Vision
    Perspectives and Challenges for Future Research in Bat Hearing
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Lynn S. Bickley, MD, FACP, Clinical Professor of Internal Medicine, School of Medicine, University of New Mexico, Albuquerque, New Mexico, Peter G. Szilagyi, MD, MPH, Professor of Pediatrics and Executive Vice-Chair, Department of Pediatrics, University of California at Los Angeles (UCLA), Los Angeles, California ; guest editor, Richard M. Hoffman, MD, MPH, FACP, Professor of Internal Medicine and Epidemiology, Director, Division of General Internal Medicine, University of Iowa Carver College of Medicine, Iowa City, Iowa.
    Summary: Bates' Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking is designed for medical, physician assistant, nurse practitioner, and other students who are learning to interview patients, perform their physical examination, and apply clinical reasoning and shared decision making to their assessment and plan, based on a sound understanding of clinical evidence. The twelfth edition has many new features to facilitate student learning. As with previous editions, these changes spring from three sources: the feedback and reviews of students, teachers, and faculty; our commitment to making the book easier to read and more efficient to use; and the abundant new evidence that supports the techniques of examination, interviewing, and health promotion. Throughout the twelfth edition, we emphasize common or important problems rather than the rare or esoteric, though at times we include unusual findings that are classic or life threatening. We encourage students to study the strong evidence base that informs each chapter and to carefully review the clinical guidelines and citations from the health care literature. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Foundations for clinical proficiency
    Evaluating clinical evidence
    Interviewing and the health history
    Beginning the physical examination : general survey, vital signs, and pain
    Behavior and mental status
    The skin, hair, and nails
    The head and neck
    The thorax and lungs
    The cardiovascular system
    The breasts and axillae
    The abdomen
    The peripheral vascular system
    Male genitalia and hernias
    Female genitalia
    The anus, rectum, and prostate
    The musculoskeletal system
    The nervous system
    Assessing children : infancy through adolescence
    The pregnant woman
    The older adult.
  • Digital
    Lynn S. Bickley, Peter G. Szilagyi, Richard M. Hoffman ; guest editor, Rainier P. Soriano.
    Summary: "The thirteenth edition of Bates' Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking is your comprehensive guide to learning to effectively conduct the health interview and physical examination. This section introduces you to the features and learning tools that will lead to successful health assessments, regional examinations, and working with special patient populations. At the start of every chapter, you will see a list of additional learning resources that complement the book in order to build your knowledge and confidence in history taking and examination. The Bates' Visual Guide to Physical Examination offers over more than 8 hours of video content and delivers head-to-toe and systems-based physical examination techniques. When used alongside the book, you have a complete learning solution for preparedness for the boards and patient encounters"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital
    Lynn S. Bickley, Peter G. Szilagyi, Richard M. Hoffman ; guest editor, Rainier P. Soriano.
    Summary: "Bates' Pocket Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking, ninth edition, is a concise, portable text, with new chapters that expand its scope to include all aspects of clinical skills training and education"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Approach to the clinical encounter
    Interviewing, communication, and interpersonal skills
    Health history
    Physical examination
    Clinical reasoning, assessment, and plan
    Health maintenance and screening
    Evaluating clinical evidence
    General survey, vital signs, and pain
    Cognition, behavior, and mental status
    Skin, hair, and nails
    Head and neck
    Eyes
    Ears and nose
    Throat and oral cavity
    Thorax and lungs
    Cardiovascular system
    Peripheral vascular system
    Breasts and axillae
    Abdomen
    Male genitalia
    Female genitalia
    Anus, rectum, and prostate
    Musculoskeletal system
    Nervous system
    Children: Infancy through adloescence
    Pregnant woman
    Older adult.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital
    Sven Klimpel, Heinz Mehlhorn, editors.
    Summary: This book gathers contributions by 16 international authors on the phenomenon bats, shedding some light on their morphology, the feeding behaviors (insects, fruits, blood) of different groups, their potential and confirmed transmissions of agents of diseases, their endo- and ectoparasites, as well as countless myths surrounding their lifestyle (e.g. vampirism, chupacabras, batman etc.). Bats have been known in different cultures for several thousand centuries, however their nocturnal activities have made them mysterious and led to many legends and myths, while proven facts remained scarce. Even today, our knowledge of bats remains limited compared to other groups in the animal kingdom. Also, their famous ability to avoid collisions with obstacles during their nightly flights with the help of a sophisticated and unique system using ultrasound waves (which are transmitted and received) is as poorly studied as birds finding their way from continent to continent. In recent times, where globalization transports millions of people and goods from one end of the earth to the other, there are increased risks posed by agents of diseases, as a result of which bats have received increasing attention as potential vectors. These suppositions are based on their proven transmission of viruses such as rabies.

    Contents:
    Introduction: The world of bats / Heinz Mehlhorn
    Bats: a glimpse on their astonishing morphology and lifestyle / Volker Walldorf and Heinz Mehlhorn
    Bats as potential reservoir hosts for vector-borne diseases / Christian Melaun, Antje Werblow, Markus Wilhelm Busch, Andrew Liston, and Sven Klimpel
    Bat endoparasites: a UK perspective / Jennifer S. Lord and Darren R. Brooks
    Macroparasites of Microchiroptera: bat ectoparasites of Central and South America / Raphael Frank, Julian Münster, Julia Schulze, Andrew Liston, and Sven Klimpel
    Parasitic bat flies (Diptera: Streblidae and Nycteribiidae): host specificity and potential as vectors / Carl W. Dick and Katharina Dittmar
    No myth but reality: blood licking bats / Heinz Mehlhorn
    Vampirism in medicine and culture / Peter Mario Kreuter and Heinz Schott
    Unsolved and solved myths: chupacabras and "goat-milking" birds / Heinz Mehlhorn
    Myth and reality: candiru, the bloodsucking fish that may enter humans / Heinz Mehlhorn.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    by Lisa A. Beltz.
    Contents:
    I : Introduction
    Bat immunology
    II : Viral infections of bats
    Rabies virus and other bat rhabdoviruses
    Henipaviruses and other paramyxoviruses of bats
    Filoviruses and bats
    Bats and coronaviruses
    Other RNA viruses and bats
    Baltimore class I and class II DNA viruses of bats
    Reverse-transcribing bat viruses and large-scale bat virome studies
    III : Bacterial infections of bats
    Arthropod-borne bacterial infections of bats
    Other bacteria and bats
    IV : Protist infections of bats
    Apicomplexans and bats
    Kinetoplastids and bats
    V : Fungal infections of bats
    White-nose syndrome and bats
    Histoplasma capsulatum and other fungi and bats
    VI : Zoonotic disease transmission and bats
    Zoonotic transmission of disease by bats and other animals.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Print
    Nita A. Farahany.
    Summary: "A rock star academic explores the final frontier of personal privacy: your mind. Imagine a world where your brain can be interrogated to learn your political beliefs, thought crimes are punishable by law, and your own feelings can be used against you. Where perfumers create customized fragrances to perfectly suit your emotions, and social media titans bypass your conscious mind to hook you to their products. A world where people who suffer from epilepsy receive alerts moments before a seizure, and the average person can peer into their own mind to eliminate painful memories or cure addictions. Neuroscience has already made all of the above possible today, and neurotechnology will soon become the "universal controller" for all of our interactions with technology. This can benefit humanity immensely, but without safeguards, it can severely threaten our fundamental human rights to privacy, freedom of thought, and self-determination. Companies, governments, and militaries are all in: from contemplative neuroscience to consumer-based EEG technology, there have never been more ways to hack and track our brains. But access is just the beginning. Our brains can be changed with performance-boosting drugs, electrical stimulation, and even surgical interventions. Soon neuro-cinema, neuro-monitoring, and even cognitive warfare will be commonplace--the brain is the next battleground for humanity. The Battle for Your Brain by Nita A. Farahany dives deeply into the promises and perils of the coming dawn of brain access and alteration. Written by one of the world's foremost experts on neuroscience as it intersects with law and ethics, this highly original book offers a pathway forward to navigate the complex ethical dilemmas that neurotechnology presents, which will fundamentally impact our freedom to understand, shape, and define ourselves"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Tracking the brain
    1. The last fortress
    2. Your brain at work
    3. Big Brother is listening
    4. Know thyself
    Part 2: Hacking the brain
    5. Revving up
    6. Braking the brain
    7. Mental manipulation
    8. Bewilderbeasts
    9. Beyond human
    10. On cognitive liberty
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    RC343 .F37 2023
    1
  • Print
    Julia Chinyere Oparah, Helen Arega, Dantia Hudson, Linda Jones, Talita Oseguera.
    Contents:
    Executive summary
    Overview and methods
    A human rights framework
    Prenatal care
    Relationship with maternal health care providers
    Home, hospital, or birth center?
    Labor, birthing and delivery
    The first six weeks
    Recommendations.
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RG961.C2 O63 2018
    1
  • Print
    by Jennifer D. Penschow.
    Summary: "When smallpox inoculation entered western medical practice in 1721 it aroused considerable controversy. A broad-based cohort of enlightened Germans such as publishers, poets, pastors and elite women attempted to dispel the doubts and encourage the innovative procedure. Yet many parents remained fearful, and the contagiousness of inoculation also necessitated a new approach. National pride in the past defeat of bubonic plague aroused optimism that smallpox could be banished using a similar strategy. The arrival in 1800 of Jenner's vaccine ended the debates by offering yet another promising new approach. Battling Smallpox before Vaccination explores the social and medical impacts of inoculation. It offers belated recognition for the valiant attempts of the many protagonists battling against the so-called 'murdering angel' before Edward Jenner's discovery of vaccination. It provides a comprehensive description and penetrating analysis of the understanding and perception of smallpox, the propagation of pro-inoculation information, varied reactions to inoculation, and debates over the idealistic goal of eradicating smallpox"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] David A. Porter, Lew C. Schon.
    Contents:
    Section 1: An introduction to athletic evaluation. The basic foot and ankle physical exam
    Section 2: Sport syndromes. Impingement syndromes of the ankle
    Stress fractures: their causes and principles of treatment
    Medical and metabolic considerations in athletes with stress fractures
    Problematic stress fractures of the foot and ankle
    Ankle and midfoot fractures and dislocations
    Midfoot fractures and dislocations
    Rupture of the anterior tibial and peroneal tendons
    Achilles tendon disorders including tendinopathies and ruptures
    Posterior tibialis tendon injury in the athlete
    Functional nerve disorders and plantar heel pain
    Dermatologic, infectious, and nail disorders
    Section 3: Anatomic disorders in sports. Nonsurgical treatment of acute and chronic ankle instability
    Ankle sprains, ankle instability, and syndesmosis injuries
    Osteochondral lesions of the ankle and occult fractures of the foot and ankle
    Disorders of the subtalar joint, including subtalar sprains and tarsal coalitions
    Diagnostic and operative ankle and subtalar joint arthroscopy
    Foot and ankle endoscopy
    Lesser toe disorders
    Great-toe disorders
    Bunions in the elite athlete: the philosophy and principles
    Chronic leg pain
    Section 4: Unique and exceptional problems in sports. Foot and ankle injuries in dancers
    The military athlete
    Pediatric problems and rehabilitation geared to the young athlete
    Unique considerations for foot and ankle injuries in the female athlete
    Section 5: New advances and augmentations in the foot and ankle. Orthobiologics in foot and ankle applications
    Section 6: rehabilitation and recovery: principles, collaboration, and teamwork
    Rehabilitation of specific foot and ankle issues
    Principles of rehabilitation for the foot and ankle
    The team in the care of the athlete
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Neelam A. Vashi, editor.
    Summary: Over the decades, research has demonstrated that in categories of life deemed to be important, beautiful people achieve more desirable outcomes, are judged more favorably, and receive preferential treatment. An understanding of the historical aspects, science, and implications of what the human mind finds aesthetically pleasing is quintessential for dermatologists, plastic surgeons, and others who practice aesthetic medicine as the importance of beauty in today?s society is what brings patients into clinics. While an element of dissatisfaction with one?s appearance is commonplace, clinicians should remain vigilant for individuals who seek cosmetic procedures to quell excessive body image concerns that are out of proportion to objective physical findings. Body dysmorphic disorder (BDD) is a disorder of self-perception; it is the impairing preoccupation with a nonexistent or minimal flaw in appearance. According to recent statistics, BDD occurs in 0.7?2.4% of the general population; however, multiple studies have suggested an incidence of 6?16% in patients seeking aesthetic medical treatments. Moreover, a vast majority will at some point seek dermatologic treatment and cosmetic surgery. Such patients are unlikely to be satisfied with corrective procedures, and only 15% of dermatologists surveyed thought that they could successfully treat BDD. Therefore, Beauty and Body Dysmor phic Disorder aims to assist dermatologists, plastic surgeons, and other aesthetic providers in recognizing key characteristics as well as providing treatment strategies to help in caring for those with BDD.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG) ; with Robert Casanova, AnnaMarie Connolly, Alice R. Goepfert, Nancy A. Hueppchen, Patrice M. Weiss.
    Summary: "Beckmann and Ling's Obstetrics and Gynecology, 9th Edition, provides the foundational knowledge medical students need to complete an Ob/Gyn rotation, pass national standardized exams, and competently care for women in clinical practice. Highly respected for its authoritative expertise and preferred by students for its concise, consistent approach, the text is fully aligned with the Association of Professors of Gynecology and Obstetrics' educational objectives, upon which most clerkship evaluations and final exams are based. The 9th Edition is updated throughout and enhanced with engaging new features that encourage reflection, strengthen retention, and deliver critical preparation for exams and clinical practice." Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Women's health examination and women's health care management
    The obstetrician-gynecologist's role in screening and preventive care
    Ethics, liability, and patient safety in obstetrics and gynecology
    Embryology and anatomy
    Maternal-fetal physiology
    Preconception and antepartum care
    Genetics and genetic disorders in obstetrics and gynecology
    Intrapartum care
    Abnormal labor and intrapartum fetal surveillance
    Immediate care of the newborn
    Postpartum care
    Postpartum hemorrhage
    Multifetal gestation
    Fetal growth abnormalities : fetal growth restriction and macrosomia
    Preterm labor
    Third-trimester bleeding
    Premature rupture of membranes
    Postterm pregnancy
    Ectopic pregnancy and pregnancy loss
    Endocrine disorders
    Gastrointestinal, renal, and surgical complications
    Cardiovascular and respiratory disorders
    Hematologic and immunologic complications
    Infectious diseases
    Neurologic and psychiatric disorders
    Family planning
    Pregnancy termination
    Sterilization
    Vulvovaginitis
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Pelvic organ prolapse, urinary incontinence, and urinary tract infection
    Endometriosis
    Dysmenorrhea and chronic pelvic pain
    Disorders of the breast
    Gynecologic procedures
    Human sexuality
    Sexual assault and domestic violence
    Reproductive cycles
    Puberty
    Amenorrhea and abnormal uterine bleeding
    Hirsutism and virilization
    Menopause
    Infertility
    Premenstrual syndrome and premenstrual dysphoric disorder
    Cell biology and principles of cancer therapy
    Gestational trophoblastic disease
    Vulvar and vaginal disease and neoplasia
    Cervical neoplasia and carcinoma
    Uterine leiomyoma and neoplasia
    Cancer of the uterine corpus
    Ovarian and adnexal disease.
  • Digital/Print
    American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG) ; with Robert Casanova [and others].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital/Print
    Michelle Obama.
    Summary: "An intimate, powerful, and inspiring memoir by the former First Lady of the United States. When she was a little girl, Michelle Robinson's world was the South Side of Chicago, where she and her brother, Craig, shared a bedroom in their family's upstairs apartment and played catch in the park, and where her parents, Fraser and Marian Robinson, raised her to be outspoken and unafraid. But life soon took her much further afield, from the halls of Princeton, where she learned for the first time what if felt like to be the only black woman in a room, to the glassy office tower where she worked as a high-powered corporate lawyer--and where, one summer morning, a law student named Barack Obama appeared in her office and upended all her carefully made plans. Here, for the first time, Michelle Obama describes the early years of her marriage as she struggles to balance her work and family with her husband's fast-moving political career. She takes us inside their private debate over whether he should make a run for the presidency and her subsequent role as a popular but oft-criticized figure during his campaign. Narrating with grace, good humor, and uncommon candor, she provides a vivid, behind-the-scenes account of her family's history-making launch into the global limelight as well as their life inside the White House over eight momentous years--as she comes to know her country and her country comes to know her. [This book] takes us through modest Iowa kitchens and ballrooms at Buckingham Palace, through moments of heart-stopping grief and profound resilience, bringing us deep into the soul of a singular, groundbreaking figure in history as she strives to live authentically, marshaling her personal strength and voice in service of a set of higher ideals. In telling her story with honesty and boldness, she issues a challenge to the rest of us: Who are we and who do we want to become?"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Becoming me
    Becoming us
    Becoming more
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E909.O24 O23 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Jan Doolittle Wilson.
    Summary: "Becoming Disabled attempts to forge a new view of the world, one that understands disability as a valuable human variation, embraces interdependency, recognizes the disabling impact of existing ideologies and institutions, and works toward the creation of a society that fully includes, supports, and celebrates all forms of human diversity"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Part I. Identifying disability
    Meanings of disability
    Cripping disability identities
    Part II. (Re)imagining disability
    Disability on display
    Disability and inclusive education
    Part III. Locating disability
    Burrowing within disability
    Making disability home
    Part IV. Mothering disability
    Disability and the constructs of motherhood
    Refiguring motherhood through a disability lens.
  • Print
    Patty Krawec.
    Summary: "The invented history of the Western world is crumbling fast, Anishinaabe writer Patty Krawec says, but we can still honor the bonds between us. Settlers dominated and divided, but Indigenous peoples won't just send them all 'home.' Weaving her own story with the story of her ancestors and with the broader themes of creation, replacement, and disappearance, Krawec helps readers see settler colonialism through the eyes of an Indigenous writer. Settler colonialism tried to force us into one particular way of living, but the old ways of kinship can help us imagine a different future. Krawec asks, What would it look like to remember that we are all related? How might we become better relatives to the land, to one another, and to Indigenous movements for solidarity? Braiding together historical, scientific, and cultural analysis, Indigenous ways of knowing, and the vivid threads of communal memory, Krawec crafts a stunning, forceful call to 'unforget' our history. This remarkable sojourn through Native and settler history, myth, identity, and spirituality helps us retrace our steps and pick up what was lost along the way: chances to honor rather than violate treaties, to see the land as a relative rather than a resource, and to unravel the history we have been taught"--Book jacket flap.

    Contents:
    Foreword / by Nick Estes
    Nii'kinaaganaa
    Introduction
    1. Creation: How We Got Here
    2. Colonization: The Hunger of Big Brother
    3. Removal: Background Noise
    4. Replacement: The Vanishing Indian
    5. Eradication: The Vanished Indian
    Interlude: Flood
    6. The Land: Our Ancestor
    7. The People: We Are Related
    8. Solidarity: Becoming Kin
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E98.K48 K74 2022
    1
  • Digital
    Ronald Rousseau, Leo Egghe, Raf Guns.
    Summary: "Becoming Metric-Wise: A Bibliometric Guide for Researchers aims to inform researchers about metrics so that they become aware of the evaluative techniques being applied to their scientific output. Understanding these concepts will help them during their funding initiatives, and in hiring and tenure. The book not only describes what indicators do (or are designed to do, which is not always the same thing), but also gives precise mathematical formulae so that indicators can be properly understood and evaluated. Metrics have become a critical issue in science, with widespread international discussion taking place on the subject across scientific journals and organizations. As researchers should know the publication-citation context, the mathematical formulae of indicators being used by evaluating committees and their consequences, and how such indicators might be misused, this book provides an ideal tome on the topic. Provides researchers with a detailed understanding of bibliometric indicators and their applications. Empowers researchers looking to understand the indicators relevant to their work and careers. Presents an informed and rounded picture of bibliometrics, including the strengths and shortcomings of particular indicators. Supplies the mathematics behind bibliometric indicators so they can be properly understood. Written by authors with longstanding expertise who are considered global leaders in the field of bibliometrics"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: 1. Introduction
    1.1. Metrics in the Information Sciences
    1.2. Short Overview of Topics Studied in the Field of Informetrics
    1.3. Instruments
    1.4. Other Metrics and the Larger Picture
    1.5. Mathematical Terminology
    2. Scientific Research and Communication
    2.1. Knowledge and Scientific Research
    2.2. Scientific Discoveries
    2.3. Two-Tier Publication System
    2.4. Three-Tier Evaluation System
    3. Publishing in Scientific Journals
    3.1. Editorship and Peer Review
    3.2. Open Access (OA)
    3.3. Scientific Misconduct: Fraud, Plagiarism, Retraction and the Integrity of the Publication Record
    4. Statistics
    4.1. Introduction
    pt. A Descriptive Statistics
    4.2. Simple Representations
    4.3. Measures of Central Tendency
    4.4. Cumulative Distributions and the Quantile Function
    4.5. Measures of Statistical Dispersion
    4.6. Boxplot
    4.7. Scatterplots and Linear Regression
    4.8. Nonparametric Linear Regression
    4.9. Contingency Tables
    4.10. Lorenz Curve and the Gini Index
    4.11. Applications in Informetrics
    pt. B Inferential Statistics
    4.12. Normal Distribution
    4.13. Hypothesis Testing
    4.14. Concluding Remarks on Statistics
    5. Publication and Citation Analysis
    5.1. Publication and Citation Analysis: Definitions
    5.2. Citation Indices: Generalities
    5.3. Citing and Reasons to Cite
    5.4. Citation Classification Schemes
    5.5. Authors and Their Citation Environment
    5.6. Difficulties Related to Counting
    5.7. Note on Eponyms
    5.8. Ethics of Citing
    5.9. Citation Networks and the Mathematics of Citation
    5.10. Bibliographic Coupling and Cocitation Analysis
    5.11. Tri-citations
    5.12. Highly-Cited Documents Become Concept Symbols
    5.13. Citation Generations
    5.14. Delayed Recognition and Sleeping Beauties
    5.15. Short Description of the Web of Science
    5.16. Scopus
    5.17. Google Scholar (GS)
    5.18. Comparisons
    5.19. Final Remarks
    6. Journal Citation Analysis
    6.1. Scientific Journals
    6.2. Publication-Citation Matrix per Article
    6.3. Publication-Citation Matrix of a Journal and the Garfield-Sher (1963) Impact Factor: Introduction
    6.4. Synchronous Impact Factors
    6.5. Diachronous Impact Factors
    6.6. More on Publication-Citation Matrices and Impact Factors
    6.7. Remarks About Journal Impact Factors
    6.8. h-index for Journals
    6.9. Indicators That Take the Importance of the Citing Journal into Account
    6.10. Correlations Between Journal Indicators
    6.11. Audience Factor
    6.12. SNIP Indicator
    6.13. Clarivate Analytics' Journal Citation Reports
    6.14. Structure of the SCImago Database
    6.15. Problems Related to Impact Factors
    6.16. CiteScore Index
    6.17. Who Makes Use of Bibliometric Indicators?
    6.18. Ranking Journals
    6.19. Median Impact Factor
    6.20. Mathematical Properties of the Diachronous and the Synchronous Impact Factor
    6.21. Additional Information
    7. Indicators
    7.1. Introduction
    7.2. Collaboration and Collaboration Indices
    7.3. h-index
    7.4. Simple Variations on the h-index
    7.5. h-Type Indices That Take the Number of Received Citations by Highly Cited Publications into Account
    7.6. Some Other h-type Indices
    7.7. General Impact Factor
    7.8. Success Indices and Success Multipliers
    7.9. Percentile Rank Score and the Integrated Impact Indicator
    7.10. Citation Merit
    7.11. Time Series of Indicators
    7.12. Outgrow Index (CR Index) and Related Indices
    7.13. So's Openness and Affinity Indices
    7.14. Prathap's Thermodynamic Indicators
    7.15. Characteristic Scores and Scales
    7.16. Concluding Remarks
    8. Research Evaluation
    8.1. Introduction
    8.2. Leiden Manifesto
    8.3. University Evaluation
    8.4. University Rankings
    8.5. Evaluation of Research Groups
    8.6. Top x% Publications
    8.7. Country Studies
    8.8. Some Remarks on Evaluations of Individuals
    8.9. Paying Attention to the Social Sciences and Arts & Humanities
    8.10. How to Evaluate Top Labs: An Example From China
    8.11. Nature Index
    8.12. Reflections and Comments
    8.13. Further Remarks
    8.14. Conclusion
    9. Informetric Laws
    9.1. Introduction
    9.2. One-Dimensional Informetrics
    9.3. Two-Dimensional Informetrics
    9.4. Two Applications of Lotka's Law
    9.5. Measuring Inequality
    9.6. Measuring Diversity for a Variable Number of Cells
    10. Networks
    10.1. Basic Network Theory
    10.2. Network Indicators
    10.3. h-Indices in Networks
    10.4. Software for Network Analysis
    11. Timeline of Informetrics.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Irvin D. Yalom.
    Summary: "Bestselling writer and psychotherapist Irvin D. Yalom puts himself on the couch in a lapidary memoir Irvin D. Yalom has made a career of investigating the lives of others. In this profound memoir, he turns his writing and his therapeutic eye on himself. He opens his story with a nightmare: He is twelve, and is riding his bike past the home of an acne-scarred girl. Like every morning, he calls out, hoping to befriend her, "Hello Measles!" But in his dream, the girl's father makes Yalom understand that his daily greeting had hurt her. For Yalom, this was the birth of empathy; he would not forget the lesson. As Becoming Myself unfolds, we see the birth of the insightful thinker whose books have been a beacon to so many. This is not simply a man's life story, Yalom's reflections on his life and development are an invitation for us to reflect on the origins of our own selves and the meanings of our lives"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The birth of empathy
    Searching for a mentor
    I want her gone
    Circling back
    The library, A-Z
    The religious war
    A gambling lad
    A brief history of anger
    The red table
    Meeting Marilyn
    College days
    Marrying Marilyn
    My first psychiatric patient
    Internship: the mysterious Dr. Blackwood
    The Johns Hopkins years
    Assigned to paradise
    Coming ashore
    A year in London
    The brief, turbulent life of encounter groups
    Sojourn in Vienna
    Every day gets a little closer
    Oxford and the enchanted coins of Mr. Sfica
    Existential therapy
    Confronting death with Rollo May
    Death, freedom, isolation, and meaning
    Impatient groups and Paris
    Passage to India
    Japan, China, Bali, and Love's executioner
    When Nietzsche wept
    Lying on the couch
    Momma and the meaning of life
    On becoming Greek
    The gift of therapy
    Two years with Schopenhauer
    Staring at the sun
    Final works
    Yikes! Text therapy
    My life in groups
    On idealization
    A novice at growing old.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC339.52.Y35 A3 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Walter Struhal, Heinz Lahrmann, Alessandra Fanciulli, Gregor K. Wenning, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    Murphy, Francis Daniel.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L71 .M96 1945
    1
  • Digital
    Dmitri Souza, Lynn Kohan, editors.
    Summary: This book describes bedside pain management interventions for basic clinical situations commonly encountered during the inpatient care. It aims to provide clinicians with real-world practical information, including patient selection, required equipment, and procedure guidance, that will optimize patient management. Each chapter addresses a particular procedure or a set of procedures, with specialties selected according to the subject matter. Physicians of any specialty practicing in hospital settings, residents, fellows in training, medical students, physician assistants, nurse practitioners, nurses, psychology, chiropractors, physical therapy and integrative medicine specialists will find this text to be comprehensive and practical.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Challenges of Pain Management and Types of Bedside Interventions
    Challenges of Pain Management and the Role of Bedside Interventions
    1 Overview
    2 Historical Aspects
    3 Recent Developments
    4 Role of Bedside Interventions
    5 Challenges of Inpatient Pain Management
    6 Conclusion
    References
    Clinical Assessment of Pain and Assessment of Outcomes of Bedside Procedures
    1 Overview
    2 Initial Encounter
    3 Detailed History
    Onset
    Location
    Duration
    Course/Frequency
    Character
    Aggravating/Alleviating Factors Related Symptoms
    Severity
    4 Assessment Tools
    5 Physical Examination
    Inspection
    Palpation
    Range of Motion
    Percussion/Auscultation
    Motor
    Sensory
    Provocative Testing
    6 Post-procedure Evaluation
    References
    Further Reading
    Pharmacotherapy of Pain in the Hospital: Review of Limitations
    1 Background
    2 Pain Medications
    Non-steroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs (NSAIDs)
    Acetaminophen
    Antidepressants and Antiepileptic Drugs
    Skeletal Muscle Relaxants
    Opioids
    3 Pain Consult/Bedside Procedures
    4 Conclusion
    References
    Further Reading Sedation and Patient Monitoring for Bedside Pain Management Interventions
    1 Overview
    2 Historical Aspects, Levels of Sedation
    3 Anesthesia for Outpatient Procedures
    4 Anesthesia for Inpatient and ICU Procedures
    5 Potential Complications
    6 Conclusion and Future Directions
    References
    Further Reading
    Bedside Joint, Muscle, and Tendon Injections: Overview
    1 Overview
    2 Historical Aspects
    Types of Injections
    Types of Injection Medications
    3 Recent Developments
    4 Conclusions and Future Directions
    References
    Further Reading Bedside Peripheral Nerve Blockade: Overview
    1 Introduction
    2 Bedside Peripheral Nerve Blockade: Overview
    Background
    Materials, Location, and Supplies
    Ultrasound
    Needles and Catheters
    Local Anesthetics
    Local Anesthetic Systemic Toxicity
    Upper Extremity Nerve Blocks
    Interscalene Block
    Supraclavicular Nerve Block
    Infraclavicular Nerve Block
    Axillary Nerve Block
    Lower Extremity Nerve Blocks
    Femoral Nerve Block
    Adductor Canal Block
    Popliteal Sciatic Nerve Block
    Truncal Nerve Blocks
    Paravertebral Nerve Block
    Erector Spinae Block Transverse Abdominal Plane Block
    Rectus Sheath Blocks
    3 Conclusion
    References
    Further Reading
    Manual Medicine Interventions for Bedside Pain Management
    1 Overview
    2 Historical Aspects and Introduction to Osteopathic Manipulative Treatment
    3 Osteopathic Manipulative Treatment for the Head and Neck, Low Back, Hip and Sacrum
    4 Potential Complications
    5 Documentation of Osteopathic Treatment
    6 Conclusion and Future Directions
    References
    Further Reading
    Bedside Electro-Acupuncture
    1 Overview
    2 Background and Mechanism of Action
    3 Clinical Application and Presentation of Techniques
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Keith L. Moore, T.V.N. (Vid) Persaud, Mark G. Torchia.
    Summary: "Covering the essentials of normal and abnormal human development for students in a variety of health science disciplines, Before We Are Born: Essentials of Embryology and Birth Defects, 10th Edition, reflects new research findings and current clinical practice through concise text and abundant illustrations. This edition has been fully updated by the world's foremost embryologists and is based on the popular text, The Developing Human, written by the same author team. It provides an easily accessible understanding of all of the latest advances in embryology, including normal and abnormal embryogenesis, causes of birth defects, and the role of genes in human development."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to human development
    Human reproduction
    First week of development
    Second week of development
    Third week of development
    Fourth to eighth weeks of human development-- Fetal period : the ninth week to birth
    Placenta and fetal membranes
    Body cavities, mesenteries, and diaphragm
    Pharyngeal apparatus, face, and neck
    Respiratory system
    Alimentary system
    Urogenital system
    Cardiovascular system
    Musculoskeletal system
    Nervous system
    Development of eyes and ears
    Integumentary system
    Human birth defects
    The cellular and molecular basis of development.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    by Elaine Vickers.
    Contents:
    An introduction to cancer cell biology & genetics
    Introducing targeted cancer treatments
    Treatments that block proteins involved in cell communication
    Drugs that target : angiogenesis, fusion proteins, PARP, hedgehog signalling and CDKs
    Immunotherapy treatments
    Progress in developing targeted treatments for common solid cancers
    Targeted treatments for haematological cancer.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Barbara J. Bain.
    Contents:
    The blood film and count
    Assessing red cells
    Assessing white cells and platelets
    Haematological findings in health and disease
    Emergency morphology
    Self-assessment.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    Robert M. Sapolsky.
    Summary: Why do we do the things we do? Stanford professor Robert Sapolsky attempts to answer that question as fully as possible, looking at it from every angle. Sapolsky starts by examining the factors that bear on a person's reaction in the precise moment a behavior occurs, and then hops back in time from there, in stages, ultimately ending up at the deep history of our species and its evolutionary legacy.-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The behavior
    One second before
    Seconds to minutes before
    Hours to days before
    Days to months before
    Adolescence; or, Dude, where's my frontal cortex?
    Back to the crib, back to the womb
    Back to when you were just a fertilized egg
    Centuries to millennia before
    The evolution of behavior
    Us versus them
    Hierarchy, obedience, and resistance
    Morality and doing the right thing, once you've figured out what that is
    Feeling someone's pain, understanding someone's pain, alleviating someone's pain
    Metaphors we kill by
    Biology, the criminal justice system, and (oh, why not?) free will
    War and peace
    Epilogue
    Acknowledgments
    Appendix 1: Neuroscience 101
    Appendix 2: The basics of endocrinology
    Appendix 3: Protein basics.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP351 .S27 2017
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Michael S. Ascher, M.D., Petros Levounis, M.D., M.A.
    Summary: Intended for use by clinicians to understand and organize conditions that may not be clearly delineated in DSM-5, this guide features twelves case studies together with an overview of behavioral addictions from neurobiological, theoretical, clinical, and forensic perspectives.--Adapted from Preface.

    Contents:
    Helping people behave themselves : identifying and treating behavioral addictions / Marc N. potenza
    Forensic implications of behavioral addictions / Robert L. Sadoff, Eric Y. Drogin, Samson Gurmu
    Problematic exercise : a case of alien feet / Elias Dakwar
    Food addiction : sugar high / Jessica A. Gold, Kimberly A. Teitelbaum, Mark S. Gold
    Gambling : Lord, I was born a gambling man / Carla J. Rash, Nancy M. Petry
    Internet gaming disorder : virtual or real? / Tolga Taneli, Yu-Heng Guo, Sabina Mushtaq
    Internet addiction : the case of Henry, the "reluctant hermit" / Sean X. Luo, Timothy K. Brennan, Justine Wittenauer
    Texting and e-mail problem use / Tauheed Zaman, Daniel Lache
    Kleptomania : to steal or not to steal : that is the question / Erin Zerbo, Emily Deringer
    Sex addiction : the fire down below / Lisa J. Cohen
    Love addiction : what's love got to do with it? / Alexis Briggie, Clifford Briggie
    Shopping addiction : if the shoe fits, buy it in every color! / Najeeb Hussain, Nicole Guanci, Mahreen Raza, Dmitry Ostrovsky
    Tanning addiction : when orange is the new bronze / Petros Levounis, Omar Mohamed
    Work addiction : taking care of business / Michael Ascher, Jonathan Avery, Yael Holoshitz.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2015
  • Digital
    Art Walaszek.
    Contents:
    Overview of dementia
    Comprehensive management of dementia
    Introduction to behavioral and psychological symptoms of dementia
    Assessment of behavioral and psychological symptoms of dementia
    Management of behavioral and psychological symptoms of dementia
    Management of other threats to safety
    Ethical and legal considerations.
    Digital Access PsychiatryOnline 2020
  • Digital
    Tom A. Schweizer, R. Loch Macdonald editors.
    Summary: A comprehensive, state-of-the-art contribution to a field that is rapidly developing, The Behavioral Consequences of Stroke provides a broad overview of the cognitive and neurobehavioral effects of stroke. As attention to paralysis and the more obvious physical disabilities stroke patients incur expands, greater attention is being paid today to the cognitive and neurobehavioral complications that impact stroke morbidity and even functional neurological recovery in patients. Written by an international panel of experts and edited by a neurosurgeon and by a cognitive neuroscientist, this unique title addresses the full range of issues relevant to the field, including epidemiology, general treatment, sensorimotor control after stroke, post-stroke aphasia, memory loss after stroke, post-stroke depression, the role of imaging after a stroke, and an update on some stroke clinical trials, to name just some of the areas covered. Illuminative and an influential addition to the literature, The Behavioral Consequences of Stroke will serve as an invaluable resource for neurologists, neurosurgeons, physiatrists and other physicians, as well as physical, speech and occupational therapists, nurses, psychologists, and other professionals.

    Contents:
    Stroke epidemiology, etiology, and background / Deven Reddy and Robert G. Hart
    Treatment of stroke / Douglas J. Cook and Michael Tymianski
    Sensorimotor control after stroke / W. Richard Staines, David A.E. Bolton, and William E. McIlroy
    Limb apraxia: types, neural correlates, and implications for clinical assessment and function in daily living / Eric A. Roy [and four others]
    Spatial neglect: not simply disordered attention / James Danckert
    Post-stroke aphasia / Marcelo L. Berthier [and three others]
    Disorders of emotional communication after stroke / Kenneth M. Heilman
    Dysexecutive syndrome after stroke / Olivier Godefroy [and four others]
    Memory loss after stroke / Signy Sheldon and Gordon Winocur
    Behavior after aneurysmal subarachnoid hemorrhage: cognition and functional outcome / Timour Al-Khindi [and three others]
    Cognitive dysfunction after intracerebral hemorrhage, vasculitis, and other stroke syndromes / Eric E. Smith and José Andrés Venegas-Torres
    Post-stroke depression / Bradleigh D. Hayhow, Simone Brockman, and Sergio E. Starkstein
    Better dead than alive? Quality of life after stroke / Thomas Schenk and Adam J. Noble
    MRI methods applied to stroke / Bradley J. MacIntosh and Simon J. Graham
    Clinical outcomes, stroke trials, and cognitive outcome / Benjamin W.Y. Lo [and four others]
    Cognitive rehabilitation and recovery after stroke / Audrey Bowen and Emma Patchick.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Juan Carlos Reboreda, Vanina Dafne Fiorini, Diego Tomás Tuero, editors.
    Summary: This book covers central aspects of behavioral ecology, including sexual selection, social and genetic mating systems, cooperative breeding, brood parasitism, brood reduction, migration, personalities, and communication. Over the past several years, Neotropical bird species from temperate to tropical latitudes of South America have been extensively studied yielding valuable insights into the evolutionary mechanisms that drive their behavioral traits. International experts provide a general overview of main behavioral aspects, and present the main findings of their work, including experimental approaches to testing the most accepted behavioral theory in their model systems. They propose new theoretical frameworks and future research directions. The book provides a comprehensive and updated guide for all researchers, students, and professionals whose work involves the study and management of birds across the Neotropical region.

    Contents:
    Social mating system divergence between north and south temperate wrens
    Understanding variation in extra-pair paternity in birds : a focus on Neotropical birds
    Cooperative and communal breeding
    Sexual selection and mating systems : contributions from a Neotropical passerine model
    Brood reduction in Neotropical birds : mechanisms, patterns and insights from studies in the imperial shag (Phalacrocorax atriceps)
    Obligate brood parasitism on Neotropical birds
    Bird migration in South America : the fork-tailed flycatcher (Tyrannus savana) as a case study
    Visual and acoustic communication in Neotropical birds : diversity and evolution of signals
    A reappraisal of the fruit-taking and fruit-handling behaviors of Neotropical birds
    Perspectives on the study of field hummingbird cognition in the neotropics.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jin-Hua Li, Lixing Sun, Peter M. Kappeler, editors.
    Summary: This open access book summarizes the multi-disciplinary results of one of China's main primatological research projects on the endemic Tibetan macaque (Macaca thibetana), which had continued for over 30 years, but which had never been reported on systematically. Dedicated to this exceptional Old World monkey, this book makes the work of Chinese primatologists on the social behavior, cooperation, culture, cognition, group dynamics, and emerging technologies in primate research accessible to the international scientific community. One of the most impressive Asian monkeys, and the largest member of its genus, the Tibetan macaque deserves to be better known. This volume goes a long way towards bringing this species into the spotlight with many excellent behavioral analyses from the field.- Frans de Waal, Professor of Psychology, Emory University, USA. Macaques matter. To understand primate patterns and trends, and to gain important insight into humanity, we need to augment and expand our engagement with the most successful and widespread primate genus aside from Homo. This volume focuses on the Tibetan macaque, a fascinating species with much to tell us about social behavior, physiology, complexity and the macaque knack for interfacing with humans. This book is doubly important for primatology in that beyond containing core information on this macaque species, it also reflects an effective integrated collaboration between Chinese scholars and a range of international colleagues--exactly the type of collaborative engagement primatology needs. This volume is a critical contribution to a global primatology. - Agustín Fuentes, Professor of Anthropology, University of Notre Dame, USA. I have many fond memories of my association with Mt. Huangshan research beginning in 1983, when together with Professor Qishan Wang we established this site. It is such a beautiful place and I miss it. It is gratifying to see how far research has progressed since we began work there, becomi ng more internationalized and very much a collaborative endeavor under the long-term direction of Professor Jin-Hua Li and colleagues. This book highlights the increased interest in this species, representing a variety of disciplines ranging from macro aspects of behavior, cognition and sociality, to micro aspects of microbes, parasites and disease, authored by a group of renowned Chinese and international primatologists. I applaud their efforts and expect more interesting work to come from this site in the years ahead.- Kazuo Wada, Professor Emeritus, Kyoto University, Japan.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    Chapter 1: Recent developments in primatology and their relevance to the study of Tibetan macaques
    Part II: Social Behavior and Dynamics in Tibetan Macaques
    Chapter 2: Social and Life History Strategies of Tibetan Macaques at Mt. Huangshan
    Chapter 3: Size Matters in Primate Societies: How Social Mobility Relates to Social Stability in Tibetan and Japanese Macaques
    Chapter 4: Behavioral exchange and interchange as strategies to facilitate social relationships in Tibetan macaques
    Chapter 5: Social relationships impact collective decision-making in Tibetan macaques
    Chapter 6: Considering Social Play in Primates: A Case Study in Juvenile Tibetan Macaques (Macacathibetana)
    Chapter 7: The Vocal Repertoire of Tibetan Macaques (Macacathibetana) and Congeneric Comparisons
    Chapter 8: Tibetan Macaque Social Style: Co-variant and Quasi-independent Evolution
    Part III: Evolution of Rituals: Insights from Bridging Behavior
    Chapter 9: Preliminary observations of female-female bridging behavior in Tibetan macaques (Macacathibetana) at Mt. Huangshan, China
    Chapter 10: Bridging Behavior and Male-Infant Interactions in Macacathibetana and M. assamensis: Insight into the Evolution of Social Behavior in the sinica Species-group of Macaques
    Part IV: Livingwith Microbes, Parasites, and Diseases
    Chapter 11: The gut microbiome of Tibetan macaques: composition, influencing factors and function in feeding ecology
    Chapter 12: Medicinal Properties in the Diet of Tibetan Macaques at Mt. Huangshan
    A Case for Self-medication
    Chapter 13: Primate infectious disease ecology: Insights and future directions at the human-macaque interface
    Part V: Emerging Technologies in Primatology
    Chapter 14: High field MRI technology for behavioral and cognitive studies in macaques in vivo.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Leslie S. Zun, Kimberly Nordstrom, Michael P. Wilson, editors.
    Summary: This fully updated second edition focuses on mental illness, both globally and in terms of specific mental-health-related visits encountered in emergency department settings, and provides practical input from physicians experienced with adult emergency psychiatric patients. It covers the pre-hospital setting and advising on evidence-based practice; from collaborating with psychiatric colleagues to establishing a psychiatric service in your emergency department. Potential dilemmas when treating pregnant, geriatric or homeless patients with mental illness are discussed in detail, along with the more challenging behavioral diagnoses such as substance abuse, factitious and personality disorders, delirium, dementia, and PTSD. The new edition of Behavioral Emergencies for Healthcare Providers will be an invaluable resource for psychiatrists, psychologists, psychiatric and emergency department nurses, trainee and experienced emergency physicians, and other mental health workers.

    Contents:
    The Magnitude of the Problem of Psychiatric Illness
    The Medical Screening Process for Psychiatric Patients Presenting Acutely to the Emergency Departments
    The Modern Emergency Psychiatry Interview
    General Management of the Poisoned Patient
    Drug Intoxication in the Emergency Department
    Co-occurring Substance Use Disorder in the Emergency Department
    Depression in the Emergency Department
    Discharge of the Emergency Patient with Risk Factors for Suicide: Psychiatric and Legal Perspectives
    Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders in the Emergency Department
    The Patient with Anxiety Disorders in the Emergency Department
    Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder in the Emergency Department
    Psychosis in the Emergency Department
    Personality Disorders in the Emergency Department
    Malingering and Factitious Disorder in the Emergency Department
    The Patient with Delirium and Dementia
    Excited Delirium Syndrome: Diagnosis and Treatment
    Medical Illness in Psychiatric Disease
    Medical Mimics of Psychiatric Illnesses
    Acute Care of Eating Disorders
    When to Admit the Psychiatric Patient
    Verbal De-escalation in the Emergency Department
    Peer Mentors in the Emergency Department
    Agitation in the Emergency Department
    Restraint and Seclusion in the Emergency Department
    Boarding of Psychiatric Patients in the ED
    Rapidly Acting Treatment in the ED for Psychiatric Patients
    Pre-hospital Behavorial Emergencies
    Mental Health Issues in Adolescents
    Mental Health Issues after Sexual Assault
    Mental Health Issues in Veterans
    Mental Health Issues in Children
    Mental Health Issues in Geriatrics
    Disaster and Terrorism in Emergency Psychiatry
    Mental Health Issues in the Homeless
    Behavioral and Neurocognitive Sequelae of Concussion in the Emergency Department
    Mental Health in Pregnancy
    Cultural Concerns and Issues in Emergency Psychiatry
    Emergency Psychiatry in Rural Versus Urban Settings
    Coordination of Care with Psychiatry
    Integration with Community Resources
    The Role of Telepsychiatry
    Triage of Psychiatric Patients in the Emergency Department
    Informed Decision-Making in the Emergency Department
    Risk Management in the Emergency Department: Liabilities, Duties, and EMTALA
    Delivery Models of Emergency Psychiatric Care
    The Gun Talk: How to Have Effective Conversations with Patients and Families about Firearm Injury Prevention
    Disposition Decisions for Psychiatric Patients Presenting to the Emergency Setting.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Mitchell D. Feldman, John F. Christensen ; associate editor, Jason Satterfield.
    Summary: Behavioral Medicine delivers real-world coverage of behavioral and interactional issues that occur between provider and patient in everyday clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Section I: The Doctor & Patient
    Chapter 1: The Medical Interview
    Chapter 2: Empathy
    Chapter 3: Giving Bad News
    Chapter 4: Difficult Patients/Difficult Situations
    Chapter 5: Suggestion & Hypnosis
    Chapter 6: Practitioner Well-being
    Chapter 7: Mindful Practice
    Section II: Global Health
    Chapter 8: Global Health and Behavioral Medicine
    Chapter 9: Environment, Health, and Behavior
    Chapter 10: Training of International Medical Graduates
    Section III: Working with Specific Populations
    Chapter 11: Families
    Chapter 12: Children
    Chapter 13: Adolescents
    Chapter 14: Older Patients
    Chapter 15: Cross-cultural Communication
    Chapter 16: Women
    Chapter 17: Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, & Transgender Patients
    Chapter 18: Vulnerable Patients
    Section IV: Health Related Behavior
    Chapter 19: Behavior Change
    Chapter 20: Patient Adherence
    Chapter 21: Tobacco Use
    Chapter 22: Obesity
    Chapter 23: Eating Disorders
    Chapter 24: Alcohol & Substance Use
    Section V: Mental & Behavioral Disorders
    Chapter 25: Depression
    Chapter 26: Anxiety
    Chapter 27: Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder
    Chapter 28: Somatic Symptom Disorders
    Chapter 29: Personality Disorders
    Chapter 30: Dementia & Delirium
    Chapter 31: Sleep Disorders
    Chapter 32: Sexual Problems
    Section VI: Special Topics
    Chapter 33: Integrative Medicine
    Chapter 34: Stress & Disease
    Chapter 35: Pain
    Chapter 36: HIV/AIDS
    Chapter 37: Errors in Medical Practice
    Chapter 38: Intimate Partner Violence
    Chapter 39: Chronic Illness & Patient Self-Management
    Chapter 40: Palliative Care, Hospice, & Care of the Dying
    Section VII: Teaching and Assessment
    Chapter 41: Competency-Based Education for Behavioral Medicine
    Chapter 42: Teaching Behavioral Medicine: Theory and Practice
    Chapter 43: Assessing Learners and Curricula in the Behavioral and Social Sciences
    Chapter 44: Evidence-Based Behavioral Practice
    Chapter 45: Narrative Medicine
    Chapter 46: Educating for Professionalism
    Chapter 47: Trainee Well-Being.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Mitchell D. Feldman, John F. Christensen ; associate editors, Jason M. Satterfield, Ryan Laponis.
    Summary: "This fifth edition of Behavioral Medicine: A Guide for Clinical Practice features important revisions of chapters from the previous editions to reflect advances in pharmacotherapy and evidence on the relationship between psychosocial factors and disease"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2020
  • Digital
    Bradley K. Taylor, David P. Finn, editors.
    Summary: This volume brings together a series of authoritative chapters written by leading experts in preclinical and clinical aspects of pain neurobiology. It is essential reading for scientists, clinicians and students in need of a comprehensive review of behavioral readouts for the preclinical assessment of chronic pain and analgesic drug efficacy, or those with a general interest in behavioral neuroscience. At the core of this volume are emerging details of the physiology, pharmacology, and psychology of previously neglected types of chronic pain. These types include chronic post-operative pain in humans as well as animal behavioral assays that model the chronic pain of multiple sclerosis, post-herpetic neuralgia, painful diabetic neuropathy, visceral pain, latent central sensitization, and chronic muscle pain. Also emphasized are the complex bidirectional comorbidities between chronic pain and drug dependence, cognitive deficit, stress, anxiety, depression, social interaction, and prior injury history. The novel and exciting ideas introduced within this book, such as endogenous opioid dependence after tissue injury, generate real hope that effective treatment strategies for chronic pain will emerge in the near future.

    Contents:
    Endogenous inhibition of pain behaviour
    Stress-induced hyperalgesia
    Pain and PTSD
    Chronic pain
    Behavior in children and juvenile
    Animal models
    Clinical chronic pain models
    Stress-induced analgesia
    Pain and cognition in multiple sclerosis
    Models of diabetes?induced neuropathic pain
    Operant conditioning of pain
    Post-herpetic neuralgia
    Chronic muscle pain.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Hoa Huu Phuc Nguyen, M. Angela Cenci, editors.
    Contents:
    Clinical Aspects of Huntington's Disease
    The Neuropathology of Huntington's Disease
    Neurobiology of Huntington's Disease
    Mouse Models of Huntington's Disease
    Transgenic Rat Models of Huntington's Disease
    Large Animal Models of Huntington's Disease
    Therapeutic Strategies for Huntington's Disease
    Clinical and Pathological Features of Parkinson's Disease
    Symptomatic Models of Parkinson?s Disease and L-DOPA-Induced Dyskinesia in Non-human Primates
    Neuroinflammation in Parkinson's Disease Animal Models: A Cell Stress Response or a Step in Neurodegeneration?
    Viral Vector-Based Models of Parkinson's Disease
    Transgenic Rodent Models to Study Alpha-Synuclein Pathogenesis, with a Focus on Cognitive Deficits
    Modeling LRRK2 Pathobiology in Parkinson's Disease: From Yeast to Rodents
    Models of Multiple System Atrophy.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Carmine M. Pariante, M. Danet Lapiz-Bluhm, editors.
    Summary: Stress is such an over-used word that it is at time difficult to define its core features. When is an environment stressful? What does a stressful environment do to the brain and to the body? What are the biological mechanisms by which a stressor affects us? How does stress contributes to the onset and the progression of mental disorders? How do the effects of stress change over the life-time of an individual? These are just some of the overarching questions addressed by this book, thanks to the contribution of some of the world leading experts on the neurobiology of stress at the pre-clinical and clinical levels. Topics include current advances on the neurobiology of stress on various neurobiological systems such as immune, hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis, neurogenesis and neuroplasticity, neurotransmitter (glutamate, noradrenaline, dopamine, serotonin and endocannabinoid), neuropeptides, cognition and emotional processing as well as in utero and early postnatal effects. The clinical chapters deal with the relationship of stress and mental disorders such as depression, posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD), anxiety disorders, schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, substance abuse and addiction, dementia and age-related cognitive decline as well as resilience to stress. Thus, this book brings together some of the most updated and authoritative views on the effects of stress of brain and behavior.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Effects of stress on the immune system
    Effects of stress on the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis
    Effects of stress on neurogenesis and neuroplasticity
    Effects of stress on neurotransmitter systems
    Effects of stress on neuropeptides (CRH, AVP)
    Effects of stress on cognition and emotional processing
    Effects of in utero (prenatal and perinatal) and early postnatal stress
    Stress and depression.- Stress and posttraumatic stress disorder
    Stress and other anxiety disorders
    Stress, schizophrenia and bipolar disorder.- Stress, substance abuse and addiction
    Stress, dementia and age-related cognitive decline.- Resilience to stress. .
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Barry R. Komisaruk, Gabriela González-Mariscal.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Neuroendocrinology of sexual behavior
    section 2. Neuroendocrinology of maternal behavior and brain development
    section 3. Neuroendocrine insights toward development of therapeutic agents
    section 4. Epilogue.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Elisabeth B. Binder, Torsten Klengel, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a unique overview on the most recent developments in initially diverse areas of behavioral genomic research that now start to intertwine to provide more detailed insights into the complex nature of behavior in health and disease. It focuses on our current understanding of genetic and epigenetic mechanisms of brain function and how they contribute to the complex formation of behavioral traits and psychiatric disorders. Readers experience diverse perspectives of the contributing authors starting from the genetic viewpoint and the effort to establish functional connection between genetic variants and behavioral phenotypes. Particular attention is given to the broad spectrum of epigenetic mechanisms and behavior. The chapter 'Role of MicoRNAs in Anxiety and Anxiety-Related Disorders', DOI 10.1007/7854_2019_109, available open access under a CC BY 4.0 license at link.springer.com.

    Contents:
    GWAS of behavioral traits
    Genetic variation in long range enhancers
    DNA methylation and hydroxymethylation and behavior
    Social environment and epigenetics
    Histone modifications and behavior
    Cellular models of neuropsychiatric disorders
    miRNAs and anxiety related behaviors
    Transposable elements
    Inter and transgenerational effects on behavior.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Eleanor H. Simpson, Peter D. Balsam, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1
    THE NEUROBIOLOGY OF COMPONENTS OF MOTIVATIONAL DRIVE
    Regulation of the Motivation to Eat
    Sexual Motivation Opposed by the Influences of Stress
    Motivational Forces Driving Social Behaviours
    The Roles of Wanting and Liking in Motivating Behaviour, Including Gambling, Food and Drug Addiction. Circadian Regulation of Motivated Behaviour
    How Negative Forces Influence Motivations Part 2
    NEURAL MEASURES AND CORRELATES OF MOTIVATION SIGNALS AND COMPUTATIONS
    Neural Computations of Postive and Negative Reward Value
    The Dopaminergic Regulation of Motivated Behaviour
    Neural Modulators other than Dopamine that Regulate Motivated Behaviours
    Neural Correlates of Motivation Signals in Humans
    Motivational Forces in Decision Making Processes
    Part 3
    APATHY AND PATHOLOGICAL DEFICITS IN MOTIVATION
    The Identification of Phenotypes and Biomarkers in Depression
    Defining Motivation Deficits in Schizophrenia and Relating them to Clinical Symptoms
    Dissecting the Behavioural components of deficits in motivation in Patients with Schizophrenia
    How Deficits in Motivation are Similar and Different in Depression and Schizophrenia
    Modeling Motivation Deficits in Rodents
    Part 4
    ADDICTION AND THE APTHOLOGICAL MISDIRECTION OF MOTIVATED BEHAVIOUR
    Motivation in Overdrive: Substance Abuse Disorder
    Insight into Gambling motivation from Animal Models
    Part 5
    DEVELOPMENTS IN TREATMENTS FOR MOTIVATION PATHOLOGIES
    The Role of Motivation in Schizophrenia Cognitive Remediation
    The Impact of Regulating Focus on Motivated Behaviour
    Insights into Gambling Motivation from Animal Models
    Exploring Pharmacological Agents in Animal Models.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Barbara Fadem, Ph.D., Professor, Department of Psychiatry, Rutgers New Jersey Medical School, Newark, New Jersey.
    Contents:
    The beginning of life: pregnancy through preschool
    School age, adolescence, special issues of development, and adulthood
    Aging, death, and bereavement
    Genetics, anatomy, and biochemistry of behavior
    Biological assessment of patients with psychiatric symptoms
    Psychoanalytic theory and defense mechanisms
    Learning theory
    Clinical assessment of patients with behavioral symptoms
    Substance-related disorders
    Normal sleep and sleep disorders
    Schizophrenia spectrum and other psychotic disorders
    Depressive disorders and bipolar and related disorders
    Anxiety disorders, somatic disorders, and related conditions
    Neurocognitive, personality, dissociative, and eating disorders
    Psychiatric disorders in children
    Biologic therapies: psychopharmacology
    Psychological therapies
    The family, culture, and illness
    Sexuality
    Aggression and abuse
    The physician-patient relationship
    Psychosomatic medicine
    Legal and ethical issues in medicine
    Health care in the United States
    Medical epidemiology
    Statistical analyses.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC457.2 .F34 2017
    1
  • Print
    Barbara Fadem.
    Summary: "Offering current coverage of behavioral science, psychiatry, epidemiology, and related topics, BRS Behavioral Science, Eighth Edition, prepares students to rapidly recall key information on the mind-body relationship and confidently apply that knowledge on exams and in practice. The popular BRS format presents essential information in a succinct, streamlined approach preferred by today's busy students, accompanied by hundreds of USMLE-style review questions with detailed answers and explanations to help strengthen students' exam readiness"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The beginning of life : pregnancy through preschool
    School age, adolescence, special issues of development, and adulthood
    Aging, death, and bereavement
    Genetics, anatomy, and biochemistry of behavior
    Biological assessment of patients with psychiatric symptoms
    Psychoanalytic theory and defense mechanisms
    Learning theory
    Clinical assessment of patients with behavioral symptoms
    Substance-related disorders
    Typical sleep and sleep-wake disorders
    Schizophrenia spectrum and other psychotic disorders
    Depressive disorders and bipolar and related disorders
    Anxiety disorders, obsessive-compulsive and related disorders, somatic symptom disorders, and trauma and stressor-related disorders
    Psychiatric disorders in children
    Biologic therapies : psychopharmacology
    Psychological therapies
    The family, culture, and illness
    Sexuality
    Aggression and abuse
    The physician-patient relationship
    Psychosomatic medicine
    Legal and ethical issues in medicine
    Health care in the United States
    Medical epidemiology
    Statistical analyses.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RC457.2 .F34 2021
    1
  • Print
    Susan Michie, Lou Atkins and Robert West.
    Summary: "This is a practical guide to designing and evaluating behaviour change interventions and policies. It is based on the Behaviour Change Wheel, a synthesis of 19 behaviour change frameworks that draw on a wide range of disciplines and approaches. The guide is for policy makers, practitioners, intervention designers and researchers and introduces a systematic, theory-based method, key concepts and practical tasks"--Publisher website.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    1. Understand the behaviour
    2. Identify intervention options
    3. Identify content and implementation
    4. A case study using the BCW to design an intervention to prevent melioidosis in Northeast Thailand.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    BF637.B4 M53 2014
    1
  • Print
    translated by Robert Martin.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    F360 .H75e
    1
  • Digital
    Yoshiaki Ishigatsubo, editor.
    Summary: This book, besides reviewing basic and clinical aspects of Behėt's disease, covers the latest findings, including genetic studies and treatment with biologics for the disease. Although the cause of Behėt's disease is still unknown, it is well known that genetic factors, such as HLA-B51, are involved in its development. Recently, novel susceptibility loci including IL10, IL23R-IL12RB2, and endoplasmic reticulum aminopeptidase 1 have been identified, providing new insights into the pathogenesis of the disease. In addition to basic research, the beneficial efficacy of anti-TNF-alpha monoclonal antibodies has also been suggested for not only uveitis associated with the disease but also other subtypes of the disease such as entero-, vasculo-, and neuro- Behėt's disease. Behėt's Disease: From Genetics to Therapies provides essential information both for basic researchers working in the fields of immunology, inflammation, and genetics, and for clinical physicians who are interested in Behėt's disease, such as ophthalmologists, rheumatologists, dermatologists, gastroenterologists, neurologists, and vascular surgeons.

    Contents:
    1. Overview
    2. The Immunopathology of Behcet's Disease
    3. Genetics
    4. Ocular Involvement
    5. Vascular Involvement of Behėt?s Disease
    6. Neurological Involvement
    7. Gastrointestinal Involvement
    8. Mucocutaneous Manifestations
    9. Perspective .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Lorenzo Emmi, editor.
    Contents:
    1. The Numbers of Behçet: A Rare Disease? / Agata Polizzi and Domenica Taruscio
    2. From Hippocrates to Hulusi Behçet: What History / Donatella Lippi
    3. Epidemiology of Behçet Syndrome / Olga Addimanda, Giulia Pazzola, Nicolò Pipitone and Carlo Salvarani
    4. Behçet's Syndrome According to Classical and Population Genetics / Akira Meguro, Nobuhisa Mizuki, Ahmet Gül, Nobuyoshi Kitaichi and Shigeaki Ohno
    5. Infections, Autoimmunity, and Behçet's Syndrome: What Liaison? / Mario Milco D'Elios, Marisa Benagiano, Amedeo Amedei and Giacomo Emmi
    6. Pathogenesis of Behçet Syndrome / Giacomo Emmi, Danilo Squatrito, Elena Silvestri, Alessia Grassi and Lorenzo Emmi
    7. Mucocutaneous Involvement in Behçet's Syndrome / Umit Tursen
    8. Neurological and Neuropsychological Manifestation in Behçet's Syndrome / Shunsei Hirohata
    9. Ocular Involvement and Behçet Disease / Lorenzo Vannozzi, Ugo Menchini and Massimo Accorinti
    10. Articular and Muscular Manifestations in Behçet's Disease / Anne-Claire Desbois, Betrand Wechsler and David Saadoun
    11. Cardiovascular Issues: Aneurysms and Pseudoaneurysms, Thrombosis, Atherosclerosis, and Cardiac Involvement / Elena Silvestri, Caterina Cenci, Chiara Della Bella, Anna Maria Cameli and Domenico Prisco
    12. Intestinal Behçet Disease / Cristina Cenci and Monica Milla
    13. Audio Vestibular Involvement in Behçet's Disease / Paolo Vannucchi and Rudi Pecci
    14. Behçet's Syndrome and Gynecological Manifestation in Reproductive Age and Pregnancy / Maria Elisabetta Coccia and Tommaso Capezzuoli
    15. Pediatric Onset of Behçet Syndrome / Ezgi Deniz Batu, Rolando Cimaz and Seza Özen
    16. Behçet's Disease. Differential Diagnosis / Maria Grazia Sabbadini and Stefano Franchini
    17. Classification and Diagnosis Criteria for Behçet's Disease / Fereydoun Davatchi, Bahar Sadeghi Abdollahi, Farhad Shahram, Cheyda Chams-Davatchi, Hormoz Shams and Abdolhadi Nadji
    18. Prognosis and Disease Activity / Rosaria Talarico, Anna d'Ascanio, Rossella Neri, Chiara Baldini, Marta Mosca and Stefano Bombardieri
    19. Old and New Treatment for Behçet's Disease / Fabrizio Cantini and Gerardo Di Scala
    20. Surgical Treatment of Angio-Behçet / Stefano Camparini and Genadi Genadiev.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Yusuf Yazıcı, Gulen Hatemi, Emire Seyahi, Hasan Yazıcı, editors.
    Summary: The expanded second edition of this important work provides an up-to-date and comprehensive overview of Behçet syndrome. New and updated chapters focus on recent advances in the areas of pathogenesis, the microbiome, genetics and epigenetics, clustering of symptoms, disease assessment and new treatment options. The book examines how these developments have changed the way physicians approach diagnosis, treatment, and management of Behçet patients. It also analyzes the wide variety of clinical manifestations of the disease including mucocutaneous lesions, intraocular inflammation, central nervous system involvement, deep vein thrombosis and other forms of major vascular disease. Building on the success of its predecessor, the Second Edition of Behçet Syndrome is an invaluable resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and graduate students in rheumatology, dermatology, ophthalmology, neurology, gastroenterology, and internal medicine.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Disease Definition and Epidemiology
    Chapter 3. Skin Mucosa Involvement and the Pathergy Reaction
    Chapter 4. Eye Disease
    Chapter 5. Nervous System Disease
    Chapter 6. Lung Disease
    Chapter 7. Peripheral Vascular and Cardiac Disease
    Chapter 8. Locomotor System Disease
    Chapter 9. Gastrointestinal Involvement
    Chapter 10. Other Clinical Aspects
    Chapter 11. Pediatric Behçet's Syndrome
    Chapter 12. Histopathology
    Chapter 13. Behçet Syndrome and Microbes
    Chapter 14. Thrombophilia in Behçet Syndrome
    Chapter 15. Genetics and Epigenetics
    Chapter 16. Disease Mechanisms
    Chapter 17. Prognosis
    Chapter 18. Disease Assessment
    Chapter 19. Management
    Chapter 20. The Patient's View
    Chapter 21. Future Research Considerations.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Kevin Kniery, MD, MPH, Jason Bingham, MD, John McClellan, MD, Scott Steele, MD, MBA, Meghana Kashyap, MD, Michael Vu, MD.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RD32 .B44 2022
    1
  • Print
    Imbolo Mbue.
    Summary: In the fall of 2007, Jende Jonga, a Cameroonian immigrant living in Harlem, lands a job as a chauffeur for Clark Edwards, a senior executive at Lehman Brothers. Their situation only improves when Jende's wife Neni is hired as household help. But in the course of their work, Jende and Neni begin to witness infidelities, skirmishes, and family secrets. Then, with the 2008 collapse of Lehman Brothers, a tragedy changes all four lives forever, and the Jongas must decide whether to continue fighting to stay in a recession-ravaged America or give up and return home to Cameroon.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3613.B84 B44 2017
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Denise Koufogiannakis, Alison Brettle.
    Summary: This book builds a research-grounded, theoretical foundation for evidence based library and information practice and illustrates how librarians can incorporate the principles to make more informed decisions in the workplace. The book takes an open and encompassing approach to exploring evidence based library and information practice (EBLIP) and the ways it can improve the practice of librarianship. Bringing together recent theory, research, and case studies, the book provides librarians with a new reference point for how they can use and create evidence within their practice, in order to better meet the needs of their communities. Being Evidence Based in Library and Information Practice is divided into two parts; in the first part the editors explore the background to EBLIP and put forward a new model for its application in the workplace which encompasses 5 elements: Articulate, Assemble, Assess, Agree, Adapt. In the second part, contributors from academic, public, health, school and special libraries from around the world provide an overview of EBLIP developments in their sector and offer examples of successful implementation. The book will be essential reading for library and information professionals from all sectors who want to make more informed decisions and better meet the needs of their users. The book will also be of interest to students of library and information studies and researchers.

    Contents:
    Introduction / Denise Koufogiannakis and Alison Brettle
    A new framework for EBLIP / Denise Koufogiannakis and Alison Brettle
    Articulate / Alison Brettle and Denise Koufogiannakis
    Assemble / Denise Koufogiannakis and Alison Brettle
    Assess / Alison Brettle and Denise Koufogiannakis
    Agree / Denise Koufogiannakis and Alison Brettle
    Adapt / Alison Brettle and Denise Koufogiannakis
    Practitioner-researchers and EBLIP / Virginia Wilson
    Academic libraries / Mary M. Somerville and Lorie A. Kloda
    Public libraries / Pam Ryan and Becky Cole
    Health libraries / Jonathan D. Eldredge, Joanne Gard Marshall, Alison Brettle, Heather N. Holmes, Lotta Haglund and Rick Wallace
    School libraries / Carol A. Gordon
    Special libraries / Bill Fisher
    Conclusion / Denise Koufogiannakis and Alison Brettle.
    Limited to 1 simultaneous users
  • Print
    Atul Gawande.
    Summary: Gawande, a practicing surgeon, addresses his profession's ultimate limitation, arguing that quality of life is the desired goal for patients and families of the terminally ill.

    Contents:
    The independent self
    Things fall apart
    Dependence
    Assistance
    A better life
    Letting go
    Hard conversations
    Courage.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R726.8 .G39 2014
    2
  • Digital
    Imelda Coyne, Bernie Carter, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a clear framework for conducting participatory research with children and young people supported with practical examples from international research studies. Our aim is to encourage more participatory research with children and young people on all matters that affect their lives. This book illustrates innovative ways of being participatory and sheds new light on involvement strategies that play to children's and young people's competencies. Participatory research is based on the recognition of children and young people as active contributors rather than objects of research. Participatory researchers support and value the voices of children and young people in all matters that concern them. Core to participatory research practice is a strengths-based approach that aims to promote the active engagement of children and young people in all stages of research, from inception to implementation. Engagement of children and young people requires the use of creative, participatory methods, tools and involvement strategies to reveal children's competencies. This book shares knowledge about creative participatory techniques that can enable and promote children's ways of expressing their views and experiences. The book provides guidance on appropriate techniques that reduce the power differential in the adult-child relationship and which optimise children's abilities to participate in research. This book is targeted at researchers, academics, practitioners who need guidance on what tools are available, how the tools can be used, advantages and challenges, and how best to involve children in all stages of a research project. It will provide several examples of how children can have an active participatory role in research. There is increasing interest in involving children as co-researchers but little guidance on how this can be done. This book fills a gap in the current books by addressing all of these issues outlined above and by providing worked examples from leading researchers and academics. It will have wide appeal across a range of different disciplines.

    Contents:
    Dedication
    Preface
    Table of content
    Chapter 1. Participatory research in the past, present and future.- Chapter 2. Principles of participatory research.- Chapter 3. Ethical issues in participatory research with children and young people
    Chapter 4. Being participatory.- Chapter 5. Being participatory through play.- Chapter 6. Being participatory through interviews.- Chapter 7. Being participatory through photo based images.- Chapter 8. Being participatory through the use of app-based research tools.- Chapter 9. Participatory research: does it genuinely extend the sphere of children and young people's participation?
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Jeanine W. Turner.
    Summary: "We all manage our social presence, which is how we interact with others mediated by technology--our phones, a Zoom conference, a webinar, or online teaching, for example--and we all engage in multicommunicating, which means, for example, listening to a presenter in a meeting while texting or chatting on the side. We can be much more effective at work and at home with family (or at home with work and family) if we are aware of the most effective means of allocating our social presence--budgeting our time and attention in every interaction. This book explains four types of social presence and explains when and where to employ each one. The four types are budgeted, entitled, competitive, and invitational. The book is arranged in four parts according to those four types of social presence. Within each part are two chapters pertaining to using that type of presence at work and at home, respectively. The conclusion helps readers choose the right type of social presence for any setting"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction: What does social presence mean, and why should you care about it?
    Paying some attention, screens on : budgeted presence
    Budgeted presence in the workplace
    Budgeted presence outside the workplace
    "Turn off your phone and listen to me" : entitled presence
    Entitled presence in the workplace
    Entitled presence outside the workplace
    Selling your agenda while screens are on : competitive presence
    Competitive presence in the workplace
    Competitive presence outside the workplace
    Sleep mode : invitational presence
    Invitational presence in the workplace
    Invitational presence outside the workplace
    Conclusion: Implementing these strategies in any setting.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Prof Dev 214
    1
  • Digital/Print
    bearbeitet und herausgegeben von Franz Nissl.
    Digital Access Google Books 1913-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L608 .N72
    1
  • Print
    Orsós, F.
    Contents:
    Contents
    1. Faltensystem und Verschlusseinrichtung der Vagina, von F. Orsós.
    Access via Annales chirurgiae et gynaecologiae fenniae. 1957; 68
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    1957.
    SHELVED AS A PERIODICAL UNDER: Annales chirurgiae et gynaecologiae fenniae. Supplementum ; 68.
  • Digital/Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Beiträge zur Onkologie to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Jameson, David L.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Benchmark papers in genetics to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Langley, L. L.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Benchmark papers in human physiology to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Bernard R. Glick.
    Summary: This book provides a straightforward and easy-to-understand overview of beneficial plant-bacterial interactions. It features a wealth of unique illustrations to clarify the text, and each chapter includes study questions that highlight the important points, as well as references to key experiments. Since the publication of the first edition of Beneficial Plant-Bacterial Interactions, in 2015, there has been an abundance of new discoveries in this area, and in recent years, scientists around the globe have begun to develop a relatively detailed understanding of many of the mechanisms used by bacteria that facilitate plant growth and development. This knowledge is gradually becoming an integral component of modern agricultural practice, with more and more plant growth-promoting bacterial strains being commercialized and used successfully in countries throughout the world. In addition, as the worlds population continues to grow, the pressure for increased food production will intensify, while at the same time, environmental concerns, mean that environmentally friendly methods of food production will need to replace many traditional agricultural practices such as the use of potentially dangerous chemicals. The book, intended for students, explores the fundamentals of this new paradigm in agriculture, horticulture, and environmental cleanup.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    1: Introduction to Plant Growth-Promoting Bacteria
    1.1 The Problem
    1.2 Possible Solutions
    1.3 Plant Growth-Promoting Bacteria
    1.3.1 Organisms in Soil
    1.3.2 Root Exudation
    1.3.3 Effect of PGPB on Plants
    1.4 PGPB Mechanisms
    1.5 Screening for New PGPB
    1.6 Commercial Inoculants
    1.6.1 Commercial Considerations
    1.6.2 Inoculation Methods
    1.6.3 Large-Scale Growth of PGPB
    1.6.4 Commercialized Inoculant Examples
    Bibliography
    2: Microbiomes and Endophytes
    2.1 Microbiomes
    2.1.1 Root Microbiome 2.1.2 Seed Microbiome
    2.1.3 Synthetic Microbiomes
    2.2 Endophytes
    2.2.1 Endophytic Genes
    2.2.2 Isolating Endophytes
    2.2.3 Endophytes and Flowers
    2.2.4 Endophytic Fungi
    Bibliography
    3: Some Techniques Used to Elaborate Plant-Microbe Interactions
    3.1 Next-Generation DNA Sequencing
    3.1.1 DNA Sequences of Complete Bacterial Genomes
    3.2 The Polymerase Chain Reaction
    3.2.1 Real-Time PCR
    3.3 Transcriptomics
    3.3.1 DNA Microarray Technology
    3.4 Proteomics
    3.5 Metabolomics
    3.6 CRISPR
    3.7 Imaging
    3.7.1 High-Resolution Scanning
    3.7.2 Labeling PGPB 3.8 Microencapsulation
    Bibliography
    4: Resource Acquisition
    4.1 Nitrogen Fixation
    4.1.1 Cyanobacteria
    4.1.2 Rhizobia
    4.1.3 Free-Living Bacteria
    4.1.4 Nitrogenase
    4.1.5 Nodulation
    4.1.6 Hydrogenase
    4.2 Sequestering Iron
    4.2.1 Siderophore Structure
    4.2.2 Siderophore Biosynthesis Genes
    4.2.3 Regulation of Iron Uptake
    4.2.4 Siderophores in the Rhizosphere
    4.3 Solubilizing Phosphorus
    Bibliography
    5: Modulating Phytohormone Levels
    5.1 Auxin
    5.1.1 Biosynthetic Pathways
    5.1.1.1 The IAM Pathway
    5.1.1.2 The IPA Pathway 5.1.1.3 The IAN Pathway
    5.1.1.4 Multiple Pathways
    5.1.2 Regulation
    5.1.2.1 Gene Localization
    5.1.2.2 IAA Conjugation
    5.1.2.3 Stationary Phase Control
    5.1.2.4 Regulatory Sequences
    5.1.3 Effects on PGPB Survival
    5.2 Cytokinin
    5.3 Gibberellin
    5.4 Ethylene
    5.4.1 Ethylene Biosynthesis and Mode of Action
    5.4.2 ACC Deaminase
    5.4.2.1 Enzyme Assays
    5.4.2.2 Transcriptional Regulation
    5.4.3 Ethylene and Nodulation
    5.4.4 Ethylene and Plant Transformation
    5.5 Volatile Organic Compounds
    Bibliography
    6: Biocontrol of Bacteria and Fungi 6.1 Phytopathogens
    6.2 Allelochemicals Including Antibiotics and HCN
    6.3 Siderophores
    6.4 Cell Wall-Degrading Enzymes
    6.5 Phytohormones
    6.6 Competition
    6.7 Volatile Compounds
    6.8 Lowering Ethylene
    6.9 Systemic Resistance
    6.9.1 Effects on Plant Gene Expression
    6.10 Bacteriophages
    6.11 Quorum Sensing and Quorum Quenching
    Bibliography
    7: Biocontrol of Insects and Nematodes
    7.1 Insects
    7.1.1 Bacillus thuringiensis
    7.1.1.1 Producing B. thuringiensis Cry Protein During Vegetative Growth
    7.1.1.2 Transferring Cry Genes
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    James Leong, Sam Salek, Stuart Walker ; foreword by Hans-Georg Eichler.
    Contents:
    Prologue
    Preface
    Overview
    Approaches to utilising decision-making framework
    Benefit-risk assessment of medicines by pharmaceutical companies and regulatory authorities
    Development of a universal benefit-risk framework and template
    Implementation of the benefit-risk assessment template by mature agencies
    Implementation of the benefit- risk summary template by a maturing agency: A case study
    Communicating benefit-risk decisions by US FDA, EMA, TGA and Health Canada
    Conclusions and future directions
    References.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    M. Mohamed Essa, Mohammed Akbar, Gilles Guillemin, editors.
    Summary: Focuses on the effects of natural products and their active components on brain function and neurodegenerative disease prevention. Phytochemicals such as alkaloids, terpenes, flavanoids, isoflavones, saponins etc are known to possess protective activity against many neurological diseases. The molecular mechanisms behind the curative effects rely mainly on the action of phytonutrients on distinct signaling pathways associated with protein folding and neuro-inflammation. The diverse array of bioactive nutrients present in these natural products plays a pivotal role in prevention and cure of various neurodegenerative diseases, disorders, or insults, such as Alzheimer's Disease, Parkinson's Disease, Huntington's Disease, traumatic brain injury, and other neuronal dysfunctions. However, the use of these antioxidants in the management of neurodegenerative conditions has so far been not well understood. This is a comprehensive collection addressing the effects on the brain of natural products and edible items such as reservatrol, curcumin, gingerol, fruits, vegetables, nuts, and marine products.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    by Antonio Capurso, Gaetano Crepaldi, Cristiano Capurso.
    Summary: This book illustrates the role of Mediterranean diet in connection with well-being and particularly its impact on health and elderly care, as well as on the mechanisms of aging. Aging is a natural process of human life. The knowledge that a healthy dietary regimen like the Mediterranean diet can effectively prevent or delay many diseases typically affecting aging people may help to better manage the aging process. From this point of view, knowledge of the numerous benefits of the Mediterranean-style diet may effectively promote better management of the burden of elderly care. As early as the 1950s, Ancel Keys pointed out the effectiveness of the Mediterranean diet in helping to control, and possibly avoid, myocardial infarction and/or cholesterol metabolism. Quite soon after the first studies were published, it became clear that the Mediterranean diet was beneficial not only in connection with cardiovascular disease but also many other diseases, from diabetes to hypertension, from cancer and thrombosis to neurodegenerative diseases, including dementia. Examining those benefits in detail, this book offers a valuable educational tool for young professionals and caregivers, as well as for students and trainees in Geriatrics and Nutrition.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    1. The historical origins and composition of Mediterranean diet
    2. The extra virgin olive oil
    3. Extra virgin olive oil and the effects on cholesterol, atherosclerosis and myocardial infarction
    4. Extra virgin olive oil and diabetes mellitus
    5. Extra virgin olive oil and thrombosis
    6. Extra virgin olive oil and blood pressure
    7. Extra virgin olive oil and neurodegenerative diseases
    8. Extra virgin olive oil and cancer
    9. The vegetables
    10. Fish
    11. Fresh fruit
    12. Nuts
    13. Smells and tastes of Mediterranean diet. The herbs
    14. Red and white wine
    15. Other ingredients of the Mediterranean diet today: tomatoes and other vegetables.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Thomas Liehr.
    Summary: Benign & Pathological Chromosomal Imbalances systematically clarifies the disease implications of cytogenetically visible copy number variants (CG-CNV) using cytogenetic assessment of heterochromatic or euchromatic DNA variants. While variants of several megabasepair can be present in the human genome without clinical consequence, visually distinguishing these benign areas from disease implications does not always occur to practitioners accustomed to costly molecular profiling methods such as FISH, aCGH, and NGS. As technology-driven approaches like FISH and aCGH have yet to achieve the promise of universal coverage or cost efficacy to sample investigated, deep chromosome analysis and molecular cytogenetics remains relevant for technology translation, study design, and therapeutic assessment. Knowledge of the rare but recurrent rearrangements unfamiliar to practitioners saves time and money for molecular cytogeneticists and genetics counselors, helping to distinguish benign from harmful CG-CNV. It also supports them in deciding which molecular cytogenetics tools to deploy. Shows how to define the inheritance and formation of cytogenetically visible copy number variations using cytogenetic and molecular approaches for genetic diagnostics, patient counseling, and treatment plan development. Uniquely classifies all known variants by chromosomal origin, saving time and money for researchers in reviewing benign and pathologic variants before costly molecular methods are used to investigate. Side-by-side comparison of copy number variants with their recently identified submicroscopic form, aiding technology assessment using aCGH and other techniques.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Nisar Ahmad Chowdri, Fazl Q. Parray, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Surgical anatomy of anal canal and rectum
    2. Physiology of defecation
    3. Hemorrhoids
    4. Anal fissure
    5. Perianal sepsis and fistula
    6. Pilonidal disease
    7. Rectovaginal fistulas
    8. Anorectal injuries
    9. Anal incontinence
    10. Complete rectal prolapse in adults
    11. Pelvic floor dysfunction
    12. Perianal dermatiology
    13. Benign ulcers of the anorectum
    14. Benign stricutes of anorectum
    15. Benign tumors of the anorectum.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Catherine N. Chinyama.
    Contents:
    The normal female breast
    Overview of benign breast lesions.-Radiology of breast lesions
    Surgery of benign breast lesions.-Pathology of benign breast lesions
    Inflammatory lesions
    Cystic lesions
    Fibro-epithelial lesions
    Infiltrative pseudo-malignant lesions
    Epithelial proliferative lesions
    Columnar cell lesions
    Mucocele-like lesions
    Calcification in benign lesions
    Non-epithelial lesions
    Male breast lesions
    Risk assessment in benign breast lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Natan Zundel, W. Scott Melvin, Marco G. Patti, Diego Camacho, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to review all of the literature, including landmark papers and the most current published data, in regard to the management of non-malignant foregut diseases. A number of surgeons publish and focus in malignant diseases of the esophagus, but this text emphasizes the benign ones, their problems and how to face them with the new available resources and technology. This book describes the different diagnostic tools available, as well as the different therapies for the management of gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) and its potential complications like Barret's or strictures, and the associated anatomical abnormalities such as hiatal hernia or short esophagus, and more. Motility disorders of the esophagus, esophageal diverticula and perforations are also discussed. Different devices and approaches can be used to treat these diseases and they are covered and explained in different chapters of the book. Written by experts in the field, Benign Esophageal Disease provides surgeons and physicians with a concise and comprehensive summary of the current state of the field and will help guide patient management.

    Contents:
    Work up and Evaluation
    Medical Management
    Endoscopic Therapy
    Magnetic Augmentation of Sphincter
    Surgical Therapies
    Recurrence Symptoms after Surgical Intervention
    Managing GERD in Difficult Situations
    Work up and Evaluation
    Medical Modalities
    Endoscopic Treatments
    Surgical Management
    Redo Interventions in Failed Procedures
    Surgical Management of End Stages of Achalasia
    Work up and Evaluation
    Endoscopic and Surgical Techniques
    Medical Evaluation
    Ablative Therapies
    Endoscopic Mucosal Resection
    Esophageal Strictures
    Esophageal Perforation
    Esophageal Bleeding.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Deepak M. Kamat, Melissa Frei-Jones.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of benign hematologic disorders in children. Divided into nine sections, the text reviews common hematologic disorders or conditions that affect children, while providing state-of-the-art information on pathophysiology, diagnosis, treatment, and management strategies. The text begins with a section on hematopoiesis, and the next section covers red blood cell disorders. The following sections provide overviews of platelet disorders, white blood cell disorders, and coagulation disorders. The sixth and seventh sections discuss neonatal hematology and bone marrow failure syndrome. The eighth section reviews supportive care, while the final section covers miscellaneous subjects including pediatric vascular anomalies and complement dysregulation syndromes. Written by experts in the field, Benign Hematologic Disorders in Children: A Clinical Guide is a valuable resource for clinicians and practitioners who treat children afflicted with these disorders.

    Contents:
    Part I: Origin of Blood Cells
    Hematopoiesis
    Part II: Red Blood Cell Disorders
    Nutritional Anemias: Iron Deficiency and Megaloblastic Anemia
    Lead Poisoning
    Immune and Non-Immune Hemolytic Anemia
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Thalassemia
    Disorders of RBC Metabolism
    Red blood cell membrane defects
    Part III: Platelet disorders
    Immune Thrombocytopenia
    Inherited and Congenital Thrombocytopenia
    Platelet Disorders
    Thrombocytosis in Children
    Part IV: WBC disorders
    Neutropenia
    Granulocytosis
    Disorders of Granulocyte Functions
    Part V: Coagulation Disorders
    Von Willebrand Disease
    Hemophilia
    Acquired Disorders of Coagulation in Neonates and Children
    Thromboembolism
    Heavy Menstrual Bleeding and Bleeding Disorders in Adolescents: A Primer for the Primary Care Physician
    Part VI: Neonatal Hematology
    Newborn Screening for Hemoglobinopathies
    Neonatal Immune Hemolytic Anemia
    Neonatal Hemostasis Disorders of Bilirubin Metabolism
    Part VII: Bone Marrow Failure Syndrome
    Failure of Erythrocyte Production
    Inherited Bone Marrow Failure Syndromes
    What Pediatricians Need to Know about Acquired Aplastic Anemia
    Part VIII: Supportive Care
    Immunizations in the Child with Sickle Cell Disease
    Transfusion Medicine for Pediatrics
    Management of infections in neutropenic patients
    Part IX: Miscellaneous
    Pediatric Vascular Anomalies: Opportunities in Primary Care
    Complement Dysregulation Syndromes in Children and Adolescents.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Luca Aldrighetti, Francesco Cetta, Gianfranco Ferla, editors ; forewords by Gennaro Nuzzo and Antonio Daniele Pinna ; in collaboration with Francesca Ratti.
    Summary: Diagnosis of benign tumors of the liver is experiencing exponential growth, mainly owing to the diffusion of more accurate imaging techniques. This monograph opens by examining the epidemiology, histopathology, and genetics of these diseases and discussing liver physiopathology. The role of imaging techniques is described, and clear guidance provided on differential diagnosis. The full range of benign liver tumors and conditions is then systematically reviewed, including liver cysts and polycystic liver disease, Caroli disease, hemangiomas, focal nodular hyperplasia, adenomas, hepatic manifestations of systemic diseases, and focal infectious diseases. Surgical indications are accurately analyzed, with a view to assisting in the avoidance of useless interventions. Transplantation, laparoscopic resection, and robotic surgical techniques are described and illustrated, emphasizing the optimization of intra- and postoperative management in order to avoid potential complications and degeneration. In these chapters, attention is drawn to the ways in which the surgical management of benign liver tumors differs from that of malignant tumors. Information is also provided on anesthesia, blood transfusion, the role of interventional radiology in patients with benign liver tumors and fast track programs for liver surgery. This book, in handy format, will prove essential reading for all who are interested in benign liver surgery and will represent an invaluable source of knowledge for general and hepatobiliary surgeons, whether in training or practice.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Part I: General Perspective
    1. Epidemiology and Histopathology of Benign Liver Tumors
    2. Molecular Biology and Genetics of Benign Liver Tumors
    3. Genetic Syndromes and Benign Liver Tumors (Multiple Adenomas in Glycogen Storage Disease)
    4. Liver Physiopathology (Ischemia/Reperfusion, Factors affecting Liver Regeneration)
    Part II: Imaging
    5. Imaging Techniques (Ultrasound, CT, MR) of Benign Liver Tumors
    6. Imaging Morphology in Benign Liver Tumors
    7. Differential Diagnosis of Benign Liver Tumors
    Part III: Systematic Review of Benign Liver Tumors
    8. Cysts and Polycystic Liver Disease
    9. Caroli's Disease: Cystic Bile Duct Dilatations
    10.Hepatolithiasis
    11. Hemangiomas
    12. Focal Nodular Hyperplasia
    13. Hepatocellular Adenoma
    14. Adenoma and Biliary Cystadenoma
    15.Benign Tumors of Bile Ducts and Gallbladder
    16. Liver Focal Localizations of Systemic Diseases
    17. Focal Infectious Diseases
    Part IV: Treatment of Benign Liver Tumors
    18. Transplantation for Benign Liver Lesions
    19. Laparoscopic Liver Surgery in Benign Liver Lesions
    20. Robotic Liver Resection for Benign Tumors
    21. Interventional Radiology in Benign Liver Tumors: Embolization and Ablation
    22. Intraoperative Ultrasound in Liver Surgery for Benign Tumors
    23. Anesthesia and Intraoperative Management in Liver Surgery
    24. Blood and Transfusion Management in Benign Liver Tumors
    25. Fast Track Programs in Benign Liver Tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Rebecca N. Baergen, Graham J. Burton, Cynthia G. Kaplan, editors.
    Summary: This book had its beginning in 1967 when Shirley G. Driscoll and Kurt Benirschke wrote in English the volume on placental pathology for the Henke-Lubarsch, the noted German Handbook of Pathology. There seemed to be a need for wider distribution of the text and it was reprinted by Springer Verlag, New York, essentially the only book available devoted just to the human placenta. Dr. Benirschke authored 5 subsequent editions in collaboration with Peter Kaufmann, Rebecca Baergen and Graham Burton in 1990 (2nd edition), 1995 (3rd edition), 2000 (4th edition), 2006 (5th edition) and 2012 (6th edition). In the early editions, the most important material was in a larger font than the extensive review of exceptions and the discussion in the literature. Since 1967, many other shorter placenta books have been published in English, French and German. None of these have included the breadth of discussion or the voluminous references which includes details of many historic articles, not readily available. Interest in the placenta has wildly expanded over the intervening 50+ years with the vast majority of Pathologists, Obstetricians and Pediatricians recognizing its value. In addition, there are now quite a few new journals, societies and meetings devoted to the placenta in both clinical and research areas. The interest extends into areas of study well beyond the realm of anatomic pathology. The 7th edition will, of necessity, differ from the prior editions which Dr. Benirschke wrote largely himself at first, and later with the help of the above noted co-authors. It will now be an international multi-authored book with nearly 40 contributors revising one or more chapters. The explosion of new information as necessitating some reordering of chapters and adding completely new chapters including Chapters 31 and 32, "Innovations in Placental Pathology" and "Imaging in Placental Pathology." Dr. Burtons section has been extensively edited, as well. The editors gave the new authors considerable latitude in how to write the new and/or edited chapters. Many of the revised chapters retain much of Dr. Benirschkes anecdotal information as well as the voluminous references. Others are more modern in their approach. All contain substantial new references and current information. It is our hope that Benirschkes Pathology of the Human Placenta will remain as a mainstay reference in placental pathology. It aims to help readers gain a broad understanding of how placental architecture is shaped during normal development, with a view to appreciating how this may be perturbed in complications of pregnancy.

    Contents:
    Examination of the Placenta
    Macroscopic Features of the Delivered Placenta
    Microscopic Survey
    Placental Types
    Early Development of the Human Placenta
    Basic Structure of a Placental Villus
    Architecture of the Villous Trees
    The Placental Bed
    The Placental Circulations
    The Chorionic and Basal Plates
    Approach to Histologic Examination of the Placenta
    Abortion and Chromosomal Anomalies
    Abnormalities in Implantation
    The Placenta Accreta Spectrum
    Anatomy and Pathology of the Placental Membranes
    Anatomy and Pathology of the Umbilical Cord
    Placental Shape Aberrations
    Multiple Pregnancies
    Maternal Vascular Malperfusion and Associated Maternal Diseases
    Maternal Diabetes and Obesity
    Other Maternal Disorders Complicating Pregnancy
    Fetal Vascular Malperfusion
    Erythroblastosis Fetalis, Hydrops Fetalis and Transplacental Hemorrhage
    Fetal Storage Disorders
    Infectious Diseases
    Placental Disorders of Uncertain Etiology
    Placental Mesenchymal Dysplasia
    Molar Pregnancies
    Gestational Trophoblastic Neoplasms
    Chorangiotic Lesions, Benign Tumors, and Heterotopias
    Innovations in Placental Pathology
    Imaging of Placental Pathology
    Assisted Reproductive Technologies
    Legal Considerations.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    editor, William R. Jarvis, President, Jason and Jarvis Associates, LLC, Port Orford, Oregon, Hilton Head Island, South Carolina, San Francisco, California.
    Contents:
    Section I General Considerations of Hospital Infections
    1. Epidemiology of Healthcare-Associated Infections / Belinda Ostrowsky
    2. The Healthcare Epidemiologist / Bryan P. Simmons
    3. Hand Hygiene / Didier Pittet
    4. Occupational Health Services / Elizabeth A. Bolyard
    5. The Development of Infection Surveillance and Prevention Programs / Keith F. Woeltje
    6. Surveillance of Healthcare-Associated Infections / Robert P. Gaynes
    7. The Use of Prevalence Surveys for Healthcare-Associated Infections Surveillance / Bruno P. Coignard
    8. Investigating Endemic and Epidemic Healthcare-Associated Infections / William R. Jarvis
    9. Epidemiologic Methods for Investigating Infections in the Healthcare Setting / Ebbing Lautenbach
    10. Use of Computerized Systems in Healthcare Epidemiology / Keith F. Woeltje
    11. The Role of the Laboratory in Prevention of Healthcare-Associated Infections / Daniel J. Diekema
    12. The Practice of Epidemiology in Community Hospitals / August J. Valenti
    13. The Role of Professional, Governmental, and Regulatory Organizations in Infection Prevention and Control / Tammy S. Lundstrom
    14. Antimicrobial Stewardship: Programmatic Efforts to Optimize Antimicrobial Use / William R. Jarvis
    15. Multidrug-Resistant Organisms: Epidemiology and Control / Mary K. Hayden
    16. Molecular Biology of Resistance: A Brief History of Resistance Mechanisms and the Discovery of Gene Transfer / Robert A. Bonomo
    17. Economic Evaluation of Healthcare-Associated Infections and Infection-Control and Antimicrobial-Stewardship Interventions / Sara E. Cosgrove
    18. Epidemiology and Control of Healthcare-Acquired Infections in Limited-Resource Settings / Victor D. Rosenthal
    Section II Functional Areas of Concern
    19. The Inanimate Environment / John M. Boyce
    20. Disinfection and Sterilization in Healthcare Facilities / David J. Weber
    21. Foodborne Disease Prevention in Healthcare Facilities / Susan Springthorpe
    22. Clinical Laboratory---Acquired Infections / L. Barth Reller
    23. Dialysis-Associated Complications and Their Control / Priti R. Patel
    24. The Intensive Care Unit, Part A: HAI Epidemiology, Risk Factors, Surveillance, Engineering and Administrative Infection Control Practices, and Impact / Stephan A. Harbarth
    25. The Intensive Care Unit, Part B: Antibiotic Resistance and Prevention of CVC-BSIs, Catheter-Associated Urinary Tract Infections, and C. difficile / Dennis G. Maki
    26. The Newborn Nursery and the Neonatal Intensive Care Unit / Nalini Singh
    27. The Perioperative Suite / Sharon Giarrizzo-Wilson
    28. Ambulatory Care Settings / Kathleen H. Petersen
    29. Infections in Long-Term Care Facilities / Chesley L. Richards Jr.
    Section III Endemic and Epidemic Hospital Infections
    30. Incidence and Nature of Endemic and Epidemic Healthcare-Associated Infections / William R. Jarvis
    31. Urinary Tract Infections / Carol E. Chenoweth
    32. Hospital-Acquired and Ventilator-Associated Pneumonia / Henri Balaguera
    33. Nosocomial Tuberculosis / Faiz Ahmad Khan
    34. Infectious Gastroenteritis / Benjamin A. Lopman
    35. Central Nervous System Infections / W. Michael Scheld
    36. Surgical Site Infections / Keith S. Kaye
    37. Infections of Burn Wounds / Basil A. Pruitt, Jr.
    38. Infections due to Infusion Therapy / Leonard A. Mermel
    39. Infections of Implantable Cardiac and Vascular Devices / Raymond Y. Chinn
    40. Infections in Skeletal Prosthesis and Allografts / Daniel P. Lew
    41. The Importance of Infection Control in Controlling Antimicrobial-Resistant Organisms / Barry M. Farr
    42. Healthcare-Associated Respiratory Viral Infections / Janice Lo
    43. Preventing Transmission of Bloodborne Pathogens in the Healthcare Setting / David K. Henderson
    44. Healthcare-Associated Fungal Infections / Benjamin J. Park
    45. Healthcare-Associated Infections in Transplant Recipients / Kent Sepkowitz
    46. Miscellaneous Procedure-Related Infections / Robert A. Weinstein
    47. Public Reporting of Healthcare-Associated Infection Rates / Michael P. Stevens
    48. Patient Safety / Moi Lin Ling.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    editor, William R. Jarvis, MD.
    Contents:
    section I. General considerations of hospital infections
    section II. Functional areas of concern
    section III. Endemic and epidemic hospital infections
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Critical Care)
    LWW Health Library (Internal Medicine)
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jonathan S. Berek, MD, MMS, Laurie Kraus Lacob Professor, Director, Stanford Women's Cancer Center, Stanford Cancer Institute, Chair, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, California, Neville F. Hacker, AM, MD, Professor of Gynaecologic Oncology, Conjoint, University of New Sourth Wales, Director, Gynaecologic Cancer Centre, Royal Hospital for Women, Sydney, Australia ; illustrations and design by Deborah Berek. MA, Tim Hengst, CMI, FAMI.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (ObGyn)
    LWW Health Library (Oncology)
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jonathan S. Berek, Neville F. Hacker ; illustrations and design by Deborah Berek, Tim Hengst.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Oncology)
    LWW Health Library (ObGyn)
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jonathan S. Berek.
    Summary: Covering the entire spectrum of women's healthcare, Berek & Novak's Gynecology, 16th Edition, provides definitive information and guidance for trainees and practicing physicians. A newly streamlined design and brilliant, full-color illustrations highlight must-know content on principles of practice and initial assessment, including relevant basic science; preventive and primary care for women; and methods of diagnosis and management in general gynecology, operative gynecology, urogynecology and pelvic reconstructive surgery, early pregnancy issues, reproductive endocrinology, and gynecologic oncology. --Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jonathan S. Berek, Deborah L. Berek.
    Summary: "This is the first "Essentials" version of Berek & Novak's Gynecology, which is now in its 16th edition. This abridged volume arrives in response to many requests for an easily portable reference that contains the key points and salient features of the full-length book"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital/Print
    David R. Boone, Richard W. Castenholz, editors , volume one ; George M. Garrity, editor-in-chief ; editorial board, James T. Staley ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    v. 1. The Archaea and the deeply branching and phototrophic bacteria
    v. 2. The Proteobacteria: part A. Introductory essays; part B. The Gammaproteobacteria; part C. The Alpha-, beta-, delta-, and epsilonproteobacteria
    v. 3. The Firmicutes
    v. 4. The Bacteroidetes, Spirochaetes, Tenericutes (Mollicutes), Acidobacteria, Fibrobacteres, Fusobacteria, Dictyoglomi, Gemmatimonadetes, Lentisphaerae, Verrucomicrobia, Chlamydiae, and Planctomycetes
    v. 5. The Actinobacteria.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
    Springer
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Reference (Upstairs)
    QR81 .B46
    8
  • Digital
    supervising editor, William B. Whitman ; editors, Paul DeVos, Jonsik Chun, Sveltlana Dedysh, Brian Hedlund, Peter Kämpfer, Fred Rainey, Martha Trujillo.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] R. Shane Tubbs, Mohammadali M. Shoja, Marios Loukas.
    Contents:
    Skull
    Hyoid bone
    Cervical vertebrae
    Thoracic vertebrae
    Lumbar vertebrae
    Sacrococcygeal vertebrae
    Scapula
    Clavicle
    Humerus
    Radius ulna carpals metacarpals and phalanges
    Ribs and sternum
    Pelvic bones
    Bones of the lower limb
    Temporomandibular joint
    Shoulder joint
    Elbow joint
    Wrist and hand joints
    Sacroiliac joints
    Hip joint
    Knee joint
    Ankle and foot joints
    Orbital muscles
    Middle ear muscles
    Facial muscles and muscles of mastication
    Anterior neck muscles
    Pharyngeal muscles
    Soft palate and tongue muscles
    Prevertebral and craniocervical junction muscles
    Laryngeal muscles
    Back muscles
    Scapulohumeral muscles
    Arm muscles
    Forearm muscles
    Hand intrinsic muscles
    Thoracic wall muscles
    Abdominal wall muscles
    Pelvic diaphragm and external anal sphincter
    Perineal muscles
    Gluteal muscles
    Thigh muscles
    Leg muscles
    Intrinsic muscles of the foot
    Internal carotid artery and anterior cerebral circulation
    Vertebrobasilar arteries
    Persistent fetal intracranial arteries
    Common carotid and cervical internal carotid arteries
    External carotid artery
    Vertebral artery
    Thoracic aorta
    Coronary arteries
    Pulmonary arteries
    Subclavian artery
    Upper limb arteries
    Abdominal aorta
    Renal arteries
    Internal iliac arteries
    Lower limb arteries
    Arteries of the spinal cord
    Diploic veins
    Dural venous sinuses
    Cerebral veins
    Emissary veins
    Veins of the neck
    Veins of the upper limb
    Intrathoracic veins
    Cardiac veins
    Pulmonary veins
    Inferior vena cava portal and hepatic venous systems
    Adrenal renal gonadal azygos hemiazygos lumbar and ascending lumbar veins
    Iliac veins
    Veins of the lower limb
    Venous drainage of the spinal cord
    Thymus
    Tonsils
    Thoracic duct chyle cistern and right lymphatic duct
    Lymphatics of the lower limb
    Forebrain
    Cerebral ventricles
    Pons medulla oblongata and cerebellum
    Subarachnoid space
    Meninges
    Spinal cord and associated structures
    Cranial nerves N-VI
    Facial nerve
    Vestibulocochlear nerve
    Glossopharyngeal nerve
    Vagus accessory and hypoglossal nerves
    Autonomic nervous system
    Spinal nerves
    Cervical plexus
    Nerves of the upper extremity
    Lumbosacral plexus
    Facial asymmetry
    Eyelids eyelashes and eyebrows
    Eye and lacrimal apparatus
    Lateral nasal wall and paranasal sinuses
    Ear
    Salivary glands and ducts
    Thyroid gland
    Parathyroid glands
    Laryngeal cartilages
    Trachea
    Lungs
    Heart
    Esophagus
    Stomach
    Gallbladder and extrahepatic bile ducts
    Liver
    Pancreas
    Spleen
    Small intestines appendix and colon
    Sigmoid colon rectum and anus
    Kidney urinary bladder and ureter
    Adrenal gland
    Male genitourinary system
    Female genital system
    Placenta and umbilical cord
    Breast.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carol D. Berkowitz
    Summary: Berkowitz's Pediatrics is the first choice of textbook reference for pediatricians, residents, and medical students! The newly revised and expanded 6th edition provides clear, practice-oriented guidance on the core knowledge in pediatrics

    Contents:
    Intro
    Part 1: Primary Care: Skills and Concepts
    1. Primary Care: Introduction
    2. Talking With Parents
    3. Talking With Children
    4. Talking With Adolescents
    5. Telephone Management and E-medicine
    6. Informatics
    7. Counseling Families About Internet Use
    8. Cultural Competency Issues in Pediatrics
    9. Global Child Health
    10. Child Advocacy
    Part 2: Principles of Health Care and Pediatric Management
    11. Health Systems Science
    12. Population Health for Pediatricians
    13. Principles of Pediatric Therapeutics
    14. Pediatric Pain and Symptom Management 15. Complementary and Integrative Medicine in Pediatric Primary Care
    16. Principles of Pediatric Surgery
    17. Image Gently Approach to Pediatric Imaging
    18. Simulation in Pediatric Health Care
    19. Pediatric Hospital Medicine
    20. Pediatric Genomic Medicine
    21. Principles of Quality Improvement: Improving Health Care for Pediatric Patients
    22. Pediatric Palliative Care: Principles and Practice
    Part 3: Health Maintenance and Anticipatory Guidance
    23. Neonatal Examination and Nursery Visit
    24. Maternal Perinatal Mood and Anxiety Disorders: The Role of the Pediatrician 25. Newborn Screening
    26. Caring for Twins and Higher-Order Multiples
    27. Male Circumcision
    28. Nutritional Needs
    29. Breastfeeding
    30. Sleep: Normal Patterns and Common Disorders
    31. Oral Health and Dental Disorders
    32. Normal Development and Developmental Surveillance, Screening, and Evaluation
    33. Speech and Language Development: Normal Patterns and Common Disorders
    34. Literacy Promotion in Pediatric Practice
    35. Gifted Children
    36. Children and School: A Primer for the Practitioner
    37. Immunizations 38. Health Maintenance in Older Children and Adolescents
    39. Health Care for International Adoptees
    40. Health Care Needs of Children in Foster Care
    41. Working With Immigrant Children and Their Families
    42. Well-Child Care for Children With Trisomy 21 (Down Syndrome)
    43. Well-Child Care for Preterm Infants
    44. Care of Children With Special Health Care Needs
    45. Injury Prevention
    46. Fostering Self-esteem
    47. Sibling Rivalry
    48. Toilet Training
    49. Crying and Colic
    50. Discipline
    51. Temper Tantrums
    52. Breath-Holding Spells 53. Fears, Phobias, and Anxiety
    54. Thumb-sucking and Other Habits
    55. Enuresis
    56. Encopresis
    Part 4: Adolescent Health
    57. Culturally Competent Care for Diverse Populations: Sexual Orientation and Gender Expression
    58. Reproductive Health
    59. Vaginitis
    60. Sexually Transmitted Infections
    61. Menstrual Disorders
    62. Disorders of the Breast
    63. Substance Use/Abuse
    64. Eating Disorders
    65. Body Modification: Tattooing and Body Piercing
    66. Depression and Suicide in Adolescents
    Part 5: Acute and Emergent Problems
    67. Fever and Bacteremia
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Bruce M. Koeppen, Bruce A. Stanton ; associate editors, Julianne M. Hall, Agnieszka Swiatecka-Urban.
    Summary: " Pairing necessary detail with concise readability, Berne & Levy Physiology, 8th Edition, provides a perfect balance of content to deliver an in-depth understanding of the body's dynamic processes. Long respected for its scientifically rigorous approach, this highly regarded, mid-size text offers essential physiology with integrated coverage of biophysics andkey experimental observations and examples—all designed to provide a solid scientific foundation in physiology for future scientists and clinicians. Uses a logical, organ system-based approach that clearly describes all of the mechanisms that control and regulate bodily function. Includes new clinical case examples, as well as In the Clinic and At the Molecular Level boxes that highlight practical aspects of this fundamental science. Provides key experimental observations and examples that offer a rich understanding of the body's dynamic processes. Discusses recent discoveries such as the role of lymphatics in the nervous system. Begins each chapter with a bulleted list of questions and ends with key concepts covered in that chapter. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices. " -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Jeffrey J. Peterson.
    Summary: "Berquist's Musculoskeletal Imaging Companion is a practical quick-reference guide to the radiologic diagnosis of musculoskeletal disorders. It presents over 1500 large, clear images of common diseases, disorders, and injuries, accompanied by succinct, bulleted "key facts" about the clinical and imaging features of each condition. Chapters cover all anatomic regions and disease entities, imaging of orthopaedic appliances and prostheses, and detailed protocols for all current imaging modalities. The book demonstrates the utility of multiple modalities in specific situations and recommends the best, most cost-effective approach"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA981.A2 B47 2016
    1
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RA981.A2 B47 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Tytgat, G. N. J.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Woolf, Anthony D.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: This book aims to disseminate and review the latest interdisciplinary medical knowledge to provide information on best clinical practice for difficult-to-treat conditions. The chapters address various aspects and approaches to the management of medical conditions that are not fully understood. This is exemplified by complex immune and inflammatory interactions in cancer development and survival-prolonging repeat surgery for pulmonary metastases or advances in craniotomy techniques for intracranial hemorrhage. Other chapters address the quality of life of patients after pyeloplasty, parathyroidectomy, or physically debilitating ankylosing spondylitis. Additional chapters address primary ciliopathies, a group of unclear genetic disorders affecting airway function, and dysfunctional airway remodeling underlying proinflammatory molecular mechanisms. The last few chapters address advances in the use of artificial intelligence for health management and in-silico experiments, which is gaining importance in a variety of difficult-to-control conditions, such as endoprosthetic fixation in orthopedics. The book is dedicated to expanding knowledge in medical care by facilitating communication and discussion across medical disciplines. It is intended for clinical specialists, general practitioners, researchers, and members of all healthcare professions.

    Contents:
    Artificial Intelligence in the Health Care System: An Overview
    Complex interaction among immune, inflammatory, and carcinogenic mechanisms in the head and neck squamous cell carcinoma
    Outcomes of Repeat Pulmonary Metastasectomy: An Evidence Review
    Quality of Life of Patients after Laparoscopic Pyeloplasty Due to Ureteropelvic Junction Obstruction: A Long-Term Observation
    Causes and Effects of Introducing Surgery Safety Checklist: A review
    Benefit of Biological Drugs for Quality of Life in Patients with Ankylosing Spondylitis: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Clinical Trials
    Changes of Motile Ciliary Phenotype in Patients with Primary Ciliopathies
    Effects of Inhalation of STIM-Orai Antagonist SKF 96365 on Ovalbumin-Induced Airway Remodeling in Guinea Pigs
    In Silico Analysis of Bone Tension during Fixation of the Medial Malleolus Fracture after Ankle Joint Endoprosthesis
    Effects of Physical Activity at High Altitude on Hormonal Profiles in Foreign Trekkers and Indigenous Nepalese Porters
    Influence of Parathyroidectomy on Sleep Quality in Primary Hyperparathyroidism
    Mini Craniotomy in the Management of Supra-Tentorial Spontaneous Intracranial Hemorrhage; a Single-Center Outcome of the Minimally Invasive Treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Bruce Ovbiagele.
    Contents:
    Best practices in neurological care / Bruce Ovbiagele
    Epilepsy / Omotola A. Hope & Jeremy Lankford
    Parkinson's disease / Jori Fleisher & Nabila Dahodwala
    Neuromuscular diseases / Hajime Tokuno, Pooia Fattahi & Huned S. Patwa
    Dementia / Liana G. Apostolova
    Headache / Charles C. Flippen II
    Brain tumor management / Seema Nagpal, Scott G. Soltys, Gordon Li, Griffith Harsh & Lawrence Recht
    Neuroinfectious diseases / David Croteau
    Stroke / Shelly Ozark, Diana Goodman & Christine Holmstedt
    Multiple sclerosis / Lily Jung Henson
    Evidence-based therapies in neurologic rehabilitation / Bruce H. Dobkin & Andrew Dorsch
    Neurocritical care / Paul Vespa & Vikas Grover
    Palliative care in neurology / Eli L. Diamond & Alan C. Carver
    Index.
    Digital Access Future Med 2014
  • Digital
    Syed A. Abutalib, Anand Padmanabhan, Huy P. Pham, Nina Worel, editors.
    Summary: In this book, world-renowned experts in the field of hematopoietic cell transplantation examine a range of issues and controversies relating to apheresis, with the aim of identifying current trends and best practices. Readers will find up-to-date guidance on donor evaluation, CD34+ cell mobilization strategies, options and selection of apheresis device, anticoagulation techniques in apheresis, the role of prediction algorithms in determining procedure eligibility and length, and the prevention and management of complications. Applications of apheresis devices in the processing of bone marrow grafts are discussed, and detailed attention is devoted to the indications and rationale for therapeutic apheresis procedures, with individual chapters focusing on therapeutic plasma exchange and immunoadsorption, red cell exchange, and extracorporeal photopheresis. Finally, the applications of apheresis in pediatric donors and in resource-limiting environments are considered. This book, featuring numerous helpful tables, algorithms, and figures, will be of high practical value for residents, fellows, faculty members and other healthcare personnel involved in hematopoietic cell transplantation.

    Contents:
    Introduction and Rationale
    Administrative and Regulatory considerations
    FACT & JACIE Inspections: How to address and avoid common citations
    Donor Evaluation for Hematopoietic Stem and Progenitor Cell Collection
    Mobilization Strategies for HPC (A) collections in Autologous
    Mobilization Strategies for HPC (A) collections in Allogeneic Donors
    HPC (A) and Lymphocyte Collection: Technical Devices (Optia, Amicus, others) and operating parameters
    Anticoagulation and Other Peri-procedural Considerations for Apheresis
    Hematopoietic Stem and Progenitor Cell Collection: Prediction algorithms
    Applications of Apheresis Devices in Processing Bone Marrow Grafts
    Therapeutic Plasma Exchange and Immuoadsorption: Indications and implementation
    Red cell exchange: When and Why?
    Extracorporeal Photopheresis in Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation
    Prevention and Management of Apheresis Complications
    Application of Apheresis in Pediatric Donors: Clinical and Technical Aspects
    Challenges and Optimization of Apheresis Procedures in Resource-limiting Environments.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Ari Shapiro.
    Summary: "In his first book, broadcaster Ari Shapiro takes us around the globe to reveal the stories behind narratives that are sometimes heartwarming, sometimes heartbreaking, but always poignant. He details his time traveling on Air Force One with President Obama, or following the path of Syrian refugees fleeing war, or learning from those fighting for social justice both at home and abroad. As the self-reinforcing bubbles we live in become more impenetrable, Ari Shapiro keeps seeking ways to help people listen to one another; to find connection and commonality with those who may seem different; to remind us that, before religion, or nationality, or politics, we are all human. The Best Strangers in the World is a testament to one journalist's passion for Considering All Things-and sharing what he finds with the rest of us"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction : thank you for listening
    Nature boy
    Impact
    Happy endings
    Musical interlude 1 : je ne veux pas travailler
    The bubble
    War people in war places
    War people in other places
    The other man I married
    The third rail of journalism
    The best strangers in the world
    The whole world falls in
    Answers versus questions
    You can't see schvitz on the radio
    Musical interlude 2 : crowd surfing with cigarettes
    You can't kill me. I'm an idea. I'm timeless
    Playing favorites.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Audiobook (1 concurrent user)
    2023 Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Fulltext (1 concurrent user)
    2023 Limited to 1 simultaneous userSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    PN4874 .S24 2023
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Marco Fioroni, Tamara Dworeck, Francisco Rodriguez-Ropero.
    Summary: β-barrel outer membrane channel proteins (OMP) have great potential as robust and flexible models or components in nanotechnology. Over the last decade biotechnological techniques allowed to expand the natural characteristics of OMPs by modifying their geometry and properties without affecting the overall protein structure and stability. The present book is oriented towards a broad group of readers including graduate students and advanced researchers. The β-barrel structure serviceability for the nano-material design will be its chief topic giving a general introduction to the field of OMP based nano-component development as well as the state of the art of the involved research. On the example of the E. coli FhuA the transformation of an OMP into a tailored nano-channel to be adapted to a non-biological synthetic (i.e. polymer) environment, rendering it competitive with artificial non-biological nano-pores will be outlined specifically the design of a set of protein nano-channels with tailored geometry (diameter, length), conductance and functionality will be reported as a case study. In order to make this book a valuable source of information for both biotechnologists and other scientists interested in bio-nanotechnology an overview of the different steps involved in the nano-channel protein design and production will be reported. The scientific strategy from concept design, theoretical considerations, genetic engineering and large scale production, to system assembly and biophysical characterization with an overview on technological applications including membrane/polymersome technology, will be described.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Biology
    Biophysical Characterization
    Theoretical Considerations and Computational Tools
    Biotechnology
    Technological Applications
    Final Considerations.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Enrico Biancardi, Leonard W. Panella, J. Mitchell McGrath, editors.
    Summary: This book offers definitive coverage of the sea beet, the wild ancestor of all cultivated beets, which grows mainly on Mediterranean shores. The editors have collected both scientific and historical source material, illustrations and references.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgements; About This Book; Note to the Reader; Contents; Affiliation of Editors and Collaborators; Abbreviations; 1 History and Current Importance; 1.1 Predomestication; 1.2 Domestication; 1.3 Athens and Rome; 1.4 Middle Age; 1.5 Renaissance; 1.6 Age of Science; 1.7 State-of-the-Art and Prospects; References; 2 Range of Distribution; References; 3 Morphology; 3.1 Seed; 3.2 Leaves; 3.3 Root; 3.4 Color; 3.5 Seed Stalk; 3.6 Flower; 3.7 Pollen; 3.8 Chemical Composition; References; 4 Physiology; 4.1 Seed Germination; 4.2 Seed Dormancy; 4.3 Chromosome Number 10 Application of Biotechnology10.1 Evolution of DNA Marker Technology (Piergiorgio Stevanato); 10.2 Genomes and Genome Editing (J. Mitchell McGrath); 10.3 Development and Perspectives (J. Mitchell McGrath and Piergiorgio Stevanato); 10.4 Climate Change (J. Mitchell McGrath and Piergiorgio Stevanato); 10.5 Germplasm Conservation and Utilization (J. Mitchell McGrath and Piergiorgio Stevanato); 10.6 Transgenes Spread (J. Mitchell McGrath and Piergiorgio Stevanato); 10.7 Identification of New Traits (J. Mitchell McGrath and Piergiorgio Stevanato) 10.8 Conclusion (J. Mitchell McGrath and Piergiorgio Stevanato)References; Appendix A Scientists and Researchers Involved in Beta maritima; References; Appendix B Lifespan of Authors and Scientists Cited in the Text; Appendix C Beta Chronology; Appendix D Synonyms of Beta maritima(*); Appendix E Essential References; WEB Sites; Libraries 4.4 Self-incompatibility4.5 Male Sterility; 4.6 Self-fertility; 4.7 Flowering; 4.8 Growth Habit; 4.9 Life Span; 4.10 Age at Maturity; 4.11 Reproductive Systems; 4.11.1 Gynodioecy; 4.11.2 Sex Ratio; References; 5 Ecology; 5.1 Survival Strategies; 5.2 Dispersal; 5.3 Gene Flow; References; 6 Taxonomy, Phylogeny, and the Genepool; 6.1 Pre-Linnaean Systems; 6.2 Post-Linnaean and Current Classification; 6.3 Phylogeny; 6.4 The Genepool; References; 7 Uses; 7.1 Medicinal Uses; 7.2 Food Uses; 7.3 Other Uses; References; 8 Source of Useful Traits; 8.1 Resistances to Biotic Stresses 8.1.1 Yellowing Viruses8.1.2 Beet Mosaic Virus; 8.1.3 Rhizomania; 8.1.4 Beet Curly Top Virus; 8.1.5 Powdery Mildew; 8.1.6 Root Rots; 8.1.7 Cercospora Leaf Spot; 8.1.8 Polymyxa Betae; 8.1.9 Black Root; 8.1.10 Minor Fungal Diseases; 8.1.11 Nematodes; 8.1.12 Insects; 8.1.13 Multiple Resistances; 8.2 Resistances to Abiotic Stresses; 8.2.1 Drought and Heat Tolerance; 8.2.2 Salinity Tolerance; 8.3 Other Traits; References; 9 Cultivated Offspring; 9.1 Leaf Beet; 9.2 Garden Beet; 9.3 Fodder Beet; 9.4 Sugar Beet; 9.5 Energy Beet; 9.6 Ornamental Beet; 9.7 Weed Beets; References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Jame Abraham, James L. Gulley, Carmen J. Allegra.
    Contents:
    Head and neck cancer
    Non-small cell lung cancer
    Small cell lung cancer
    Esophageal cancer
    Gastric cancers
    Biliary tract cancers
    Primary cancers of the liver
    Colorectal cancer
    Pancreatic cancer
    Anal cancer
    Other gastrointestinal tumors
    Breast cancer
    Renal cell cancer
    Prostate cancer
    Bladder cancer
    Testicular carcinoma
    Ovarian cancer
    Endometrial cancer
    Cervical cancer
    Vulvar cancer
    Sarcomas and malignancies of the bone
    Skin cancers and melanoma
    Acute leukemia
    Chronic lymphoid leukemias
    Chronic myeloid leukemia
    Chronic myeloproliferative neoplasms
    Multiple myeloma
    Non-Hodgkin lymphoma
    Hodgkin lymphoma
    Hematopoietic cell transplantation
    Carcinoma of unknown primary
    Central nervous system tumors
    Endocrine tumors
    Hematopoietic growth factors
    Infectious complications in oncology
    Oncologic emergencies and paraneoplastic syndromes
    Psychopharmacologic management in oncology
    Management of emesis
    Medical nutrition therapy
    Pain and palliative care
    Central venous access device
    Procedures in medical oncology
    Diagnosis-driven individualization of cancer care
    Basic principles of radiation oncology
    Clinical genetics
    Anticancer agents.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Jame Abraham, James L. Gulley.
    Summary: "The Bethesda Handbook of Clinical Oncology is a clear, concise, and comprehensive reference book for the busy clinician to use in his or her daily patient encounters. The book has been compiled by clinicians who are working at the National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Cleveland Clinic, M.D. Anderson, Mayo Clinic as well as scholars from other academic institutions. To limit the size of the book, less space is dedicated to etiology, pathophysiology, and epidemiology and greater emphasis is placed on practical clinical information. For easy accessibility to the pertinent information, long descriptions are avoided, and more tables, pictures, algorithms, and phrases are included."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Head and neck
    Non-small cell lung cancer.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Jame Abraham, James L. Gulley.
    Summary: "The Bethesda Handbook of Clinical Oncology is a clear, concise, and comprehensive reference book for the busy clinician to use in their daily patient encounters and for board review. The book has been compiled by clinicians who are working at the National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Cleveland Clinic, M.D. Anderson, Mayo Clinic as well as experts from other academic institutions. To limit the size of the book, less space is dedicated to etiology, pathophysiology, and epidemiology and greater emphasis is placed on practical clinical information. For easy accessibility to the pertinent information, long descriptions are avoided, and more tables, pictures, algorithms, and phrases are included. The Bethesda Handbook of Clinical Oncology is not intended as a substitute for the many excellent oncology reference textbooks available that are essential for a more complete understanding of the pathophysiology and management of complicated oncology patients. We hope that the reader-friendly format with its comprehensive review of the management of each disease with treatment regimens, including dosing and schedule, makes this book unique and useful for hematology/oncologists, advanced practice providers, hematology and oncology fellows, residents, students, oncology nurses, and allied health professionals"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2023
  • Digital
    Ritu Nayar, David C. Wilbur, editors.
    Summary: This book offers clear, up-to-date guidance on how to report cytologic findings in cervical, vaginal and anal samples in accordance with the 2014 Bethesda System Update. The new edition has been expanded and revised to take into account the advances and experience of the past decade. A new chapter has been added, the terminology and text have been updated, and various terminological and morphologic questions have been clarified. In addition, new images are included that reflect the experience gained with liquid-based cytology since the publication of the last edition in 2004. Among more than 300 images, some represent classic examples of an entity while others illustrate interpretative dilemmas, borderline cytomorphologic features or mimics of epithelial abnormalities. The Bethesda System for Reporting Cervical Cytology, with its user-friendly format, is a must have for pathologists, cytopathologists, pathology residents, cytotechnologists, and clinicians.

    Contents:
    Specimen Adequacy
    Non-Neoplastic Findings
    Endometrial Cells: The How and When of Reporting
    Atypical Squamous
    Epithelial Abnormalities: Squamous
    Epithelial Abnormalities: Glandular
    Other Malignant
    Anal-Rectal Cytology
    Ancillary Testing
    Computer-Assisted Interpretation of Cervical Cytology
    Educational Notes and Suggestions Appended to Cytology Reports.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Leonid Padyukov.
    Summary: Between the Lines of Genetic Code lays out methodologies and tools for the measurement and evaluation of gene-gene and gene-environment studies and gives perspective on the future of this discipline. The book begins by defining terms for interaction studies, describing methodologies, and critically assessing the viability of current study designs and the possibilities for integrating designs. It then provides recent applications data with case studies in rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, myositis and other complex human diseases. Last, it examines current studies and directions for future applications in patient care. Recent multivariate studies show that gene-gene and gene-environment interactions can explain significant variances in inheritance that have previously been undetectable in univariate analysis. These links among genes and between genes and their environments during the development of diseases may serve as important hints for understanding pathogenic mechanisms and for developing new tools for prognosis, diagnosis, and treatment of various diseases. Systematically integrates methods of defining and detecting gene interactions to provide an overview of the field. Critically analyzes current methods and tools to aid researchers in integrating gene interaction studies Includes examples of current biomedical applications and presents current research expected to shape clinical research in the near future.

    Contents:
    Terminology and definitions for interaction studies
    Reducing dimensionality in the search for gene-gene interactions
    Study design for interaction analyses
    High-throughput genetic interaction study
    Gene-gene and gene : environmental interaction in rheumatoid arthritis
    Genetic and environmental risk factors for multiple sclerosis : a role for interaction analysis
    Gene-gene and gene : environmental interactions in defining risk and spectrum of phenotypes in idiopathic inflammatory myopathies
    Functional studies of gene-gene interaction of autoimmune diseases
    Genetic vectors approach in a study of fine structure of interaction between risk haplotype of HTR2A and HLA-DRB1 shared epitope alleles in rheumatoid arthritis
    Network biology empowering detection and understanding of interactions between genetic factors in development of complex phenotypes
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Ta-Nehisi Coates.
    Summary: In a profound work that pivots from the biggest questions about American history and ideals to the most intimate concerns of a father for his son, Ta-Nehisi Coates offers a powerful new framework for understanding our nation's history and current crisis. Americans have built an empire on the idea of "race," a falsehood that damages us all but falls most heavily on the bodies of black women and men--bodies exploited through slavery and segregation, and, today, threatened, locked up, and murdered out of all proportion. What is it like to inhabit a black body and find a way to live within it? And how can we all honestly reckon with this fraught history and free ourselves from its burden? "I know that this book is addressed to the author's son, and by obvious analogy to all boys and young men of color as they pass, inexorably, into harm's way. I hope that I will be forgiven, then, for feeling that Coates was speaking to me, too, one father to another, teaching me that real courage is the courage to be vulnerable."--Michael Chabon "A work of rare beauty ... a love letter written in a moral emergency, one that Coates exposes with the precision of an autopsy and the force of an exorcism."--Slate. From the Hardcover edition.

    Contents:
    Prologue : the talk
    Part 1. Between the world and me
    The changes
    The second change : Malcolm and the body
    The third change : Mecca and the death of mythology
    Part 2. The sooty details of the scene
    The fourth change : New York and the death of mercy
    The fifth change : Gettysburg and the long war
    The sixth change : Chicago and the streets
    Part 3. A grassy clearing
    The seventh change : eyes open to the world
    The eighth change : the blast
    Epilogue : into the world.
    Digital Access OverDrive 2015
    Limited to 2 simultaneous usersSUNet ID login required
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E185.615 .C6335 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Ted Wilson, Norman J. Temple, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1: Introduction to Beverages
    How Beverages Impact Health and Nutrition
    A Brief History of Human Beverage Consumption: Pre-History to the Present
    Part 2: Health Effects of Coffee, Tea, Wine, Alcohol, and Juices
    Coffee consumption and its impact on health
    Health Benefits of Tea Consumption
    What are the Health Implications of Alcohol Consumption?- Nonalcoholic Components of Wine and Atherosclerotic Cardiovascular Disease
    Cranberry Juice: Effects on Health
    Citrus Juices Health Benefits
    Part 3: Health Effects of Milk: Dairy, Soy and Breast
    Effect of Cow's Milk on Human Health
    Are soy-milk products viable alternatives to cow's milk?- Human Milk and Infant Formula: Nutritional Content and Health Benefits
    Part 4: Beverage Health Effects on Energy Balance, Diabetes, and in Older Adults.-Beverages, satiation, satiety, and energy balance
    Beverage Considerations for Persons with Metabolic Syndrome and Diabetes Mellitus
    Oral Nutritional Supplementation Using Beverages for Older Adults
    Part 5: Health Effects of Sports Drinks, Energy Drinks and Water
    Sports Beverages for Optimizing Physical Performance
    Energy Drinks: the Elixirs of Our Time
    The Nutritional Value of Bottled Water
    Part 6: Marketing of Soft Drinks and Effects of Beverage Sweeteners
    Marketing of Soft Drinks to Children and Adolescents: Why we Need Government Policies
    Sugar in Beverages: Effects on Human Health
    High fructose corn syrup use in beverages: Composition, manufacturing, properties, consumption, and health effects
    Part 7: Beverage Mechanics: Color, Taste, Labeling, and Ingredient Function
    The crucial role of color in the perception of beverages
    Functions of Common Beverage Ingredients
    Labeling Requirements for Beverages in the United States
    Part 8: What is the Future of What We Will Chose to Drink?- Beverage Trends Affect Future Nutritional Health Impact.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Matteo Tardelli, PHD.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Prof Dev 143
    1
  • Digital
    A. George Awad, Lakshmi N.P. Voruganti, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I:Basic and Conceptual Issues
    Schizophrenia and it's sequelae
    Issues that slowed progress in the assessment of health-related quality of life in schizophrenia
    Social cognition and health-related quality of life in schizophrenia
    Conceptual issues in cultural adaptation and the role of culture in assessment of health-related quality of life in schizophrenia
    Part II:Methodological Issues
    A review of quality of life assessment measures in schizophrenia
    limitations and future developments
    a review
    Assessment of burden of care and quality of life of caregivers in schizophrenia
    Electronic technology and advances in assessment of outcomes
    Modern psychometric approaches to analysis of scales for health-related quality of life
    Part III:Beyond Assessment of Quality of Life in Schizophrenia
    Health-related quality of life as an outcome and mediator of other outcomes
    Using routine quality of life assessment to improve effectiveness of community mental health care
    Quality of life assessments in the development and clinical trials of new antipsychotics
    pharmaceutical industry perspective
    Quality of life and health-costs
    the feasibility of cost-utility analysis in schizophrenia
    Health-related quality of life in schizophrenia: health policy and resource allocation
    Beyond assessment of quality of life in schizophrenia: cultural, clinical and research perspectives from India
    a case study
    Part IV:Reinventing Quality of Life in Schizophrenia
    Concluding remarks and future challenges.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Suzanne Waddill-Goad, DNP, MBA, BSN, RN, CEN, CHC.
    Summary: "The healthcare profession typically attracts those who give deeply of themselves to make a positive difference in other people's lives. But that giving can come at a significant price: Burnout. While the healthcare vocation offers myriad options in work settings and career paths, it can also involve tremendous amounts of stress because of long shifts, mental and physical exhaustion, patient challenges, and regulatory changes. When stress and fatigue overtake a healthcare provider's ability to prioritize self-care, burnout is often the result, leading to compromises in quality and patient safety. Since the publication of the first edition of this book, the COVID-19 pandemic has only added dramatically to nurses' stress, exacerbating existing problems with strained resources and labor shortages. In Beyond Burnout, 2nd edition, author Suzanne Waddill-Goad adds new strategies and up-to-date, data-driven information for building resilience and practicing self-care so that nurses and other healthcare workers can navigate their increasingly challenging environment while reducing stress and preventing burnout"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library [2023]
  • Digital
    Juan F. Barrera.
    Summary: About 15 years ago, we asked ourselves why the methods developed by the research institutions for the management of pests were almost not used by small landholder farmers. It seemed obvious to us that conventional pest control -called "Integrated Pest Management"- was based on a reductionist approach. In reviewing the literature on the subject, we found that our concern was not new or unique. The agreement of some authors with our ideas reinforced our efforts to find a holistic approach to pest management. We took two central ideas to develop the holistic approach: First, pest management actions must put the farmer at the center of the system. Second, pest management must consider not only both pests but the other important components of the system in question. This approach based on the farmers and the systems in which they are immersed, is called "Holistic Pest Management" or HPM. In this book, I present the philosophy and practice of HPM, a new paradigm of pest management.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction: Beyond IPM
    2. The Nature of Integrated Pest Management
    3. The Need for a Holistic Approach to Pest Management
    4. Theoretical Support of Holistic Pest Management
    5. Methods for analysis of Holistic Pest Management
    6. Implementing Holistic Pest Management
    7. Holistic Science in Pest Management: Winds of Change.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Susan Kuklin.
    Summary: "Author and photographer Susan Kuklin met and interviewed six transgender or gender-neutral young adults and used her considerable skills to represent them thoughtfully and respectfully before, during, and after their personal acknowledgment of gender preference. Portraits, family photographs, and candid images grace the pages, augmenting the emotional and physical journey each youth has taken. Each honest discussion and disclosure, whether joyful or heartbreaking, is completely different from the other because of family dynamics, living situations, gender, and the transition these teens make in recognition of their true selves."--Amazon.com, viewed February 12, 2014.

    Contents:
    Spectrum. Jessy : the house of my soul ; Christina : every girl is different ; Mariah : the real deal ; Cameron : variables ; Nat : something else
    Lifeline. Luke : untouchable
    Notes and resources. About the Callen-Lorde community health center ; Q & A with Dr. Manel Silva ; About Proud Theater.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    HQ77.9 .K85 2014
    1
  • Digital
    edited by John A. Herrmann and Yvette J. Johnson-Walker, University of Illinois, IL, USA.
    Summary: Tackling One Health from a multi-disciplinary perspective, this book offers in-depth insight into how our health and the health of every living creature and our ecosystem are all inextricably connected. Presents critical population health topics, written by an international group of experts Addresses the technical aspects of the subject Offers potential policy solutions to help mitigate current threats and prevent additional threats from occurring

    Contents:
    Epidemiology : science as a tool to inform One Health policy / Yvette Johnson-Walker and John Kaneene
    Health impacts in a changing climate / Donald J. Wuebbles
    Food safety and security / Megin Nichols, Lauren Stevenson, Casey Barton Behravesh, and Robert Tauxe
    Water security in a changing world / Jeffrey M. Levengood, Ari Hörman, Marja-Liisa Hänninen, and Kevin O'Brien
    One toxicology, One Health, one planet / Daniel Hryhorczuk, Val R. Beasley, Robert Poppenga, and Timur Durani
    Biodiversity and health / Dominic A. Travis, Jonathan D. Alpern, Matteo Convertino, Meggan Craft, Thomas R. Gillespie, Shaun Kennedy, Cheryl Robertson, Christopher A. Shaffer, and William Stauffer
    Emerging infectious diseases : old nemesis, new challenges / Ronald C. Hershow and Kenneth E. Nusbaum
    Companion animals and health / Sandi LeFebvre and Robert V. Ellis
    Zoological institutions and One Health / Thomas Meehan and Yvonne Nadler
    Health leadership and policy / William D. Hueston, Ed G.M. van Klink, and Innocent B. Rwego
    Implementing One Health / Laura Kahn
    The social cost of carbon / William J. Craven
    Complex problems, progressive policy solutions and One Health / John A. Herrmann
    The long and winding road / John A. Herrmann and Yvette Johnson-Walker.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Raffaele Teperino, editor.
    Summary: The genotype/phenotype dichotomy is being slowly replaced by a more complex relationship whereby the majority of phenotypes arise from interactions between ones genotype and the environment in which one lives. Interestingly, it seems that not only our lives, but also our ancestors lives, determine how we look. This newly recognized form of inheritance is known as (epi)genetic, as it involves an additional layer of information on top of the one encoded by the genes. Its discovery has constituted one of the biggest paradigm shifts in biology in recent years. Understanding epigenetic factors may help explain the pathogenesis of several complex human diseases (such as diabetes, obesity and cancer) and provide alternative paths for disease prevention, management and therapy. This book introduces the reader to the importance of the environment for our own health and the health of our descendants, sheds light on the current knowledge on epigenetic inheritance and opens a window to future developments in the field.

    Contents:
    Section I: The physiology of the gene/environment interaction
    Nutrition
    Physical Exercise
    Circadian Rhythm
    Toxicants: Smoke, Alcohol and Heavy Metals
    Hormones
    Section II: Gene-Environment Interaction and Disease Susceptibility
    Obesity and Metabolic Syndromes
    Cancer
    Neurological and Psychiatric Disorders
    Asthma and allergic disorders
    Lamarck Versus Darwin: The Concept of Aquired Epigenetic Inheritance
    Section III: Genome/Epigenome
    Genetic Contribution to Epigenetic Inheritance
    The Controversial Role of DNA Methylation in Epigenetic Inheritance
    Small Non-Coding RNAs
    Chromatin Modifiers
    Soma-to-Germline Information Transfer: Questions and Promises.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by William F. Malcolm, MD, Associate Professor of Pediatrics, Director, Intermediate Level Nurseries, Division of Neonatal-Perinatal Medicine, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, North Carolina ; consultants, Ricki F. Goldstein, MD, Professor of Pediatrics, Director, High-Risk Infant Follow-Up Program, Division of Neonatal-Perinatal Medicine, Duke University Medical Center, durham, North Carolina, Richard J. Martin, MD, Drusinsky-Fanaroff Chair in Neonatology, Professor of Pediatrics, Rainbow Babies & Children's Hospital, Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, Ohio, Betty Vohr, MD, Professor of Pediatrics, Medical Director, Neonatal Follow-Up Program, Women & Infants Hospital, Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.
    Summary: "Beyond the NICU: Comprehensive Care of the High-Risk Infant delivers practical, evidence-based strategies for the care of convalescing NICU graduates in both inpatient and outpatient settings. In four sections, the book covers common problems shared by high-risk infants, role of various care providers from parents to specialists and timely interventions of therapy, timing and execution of transitioning the infant from intensive to convalescent care and from hospital to home, the etiology of chronic conditions affecting high-risk infants, details of convalescent care, discharge planning, and follow-up care for pediatricians"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: Section 1 Introduction
    1 History of the NICU
    2 Commonalities of High Risk Infants: They're not all Preemies
    3 Provider roles
    4 Parent roles/wishes
    5 Transitions for the High Risk Infant
    6 Essential Components of a Comprehensive Follow-up Clinic
    Section 2 Medical Care of the Preterm Infant
    7 Respiratory conditions of the preterm infant
    8 Apnea and bradycardia
    9 Patent ductus arteriosus
    10 Adrenal Insufficiency
    11 Nutrition and growth
    12 Breastfeeding in the NICU Graduate
    13 Necrotizing enterocolitis and short bowel syndrome
    14 Gastroesophageal reflux
    15 Catch-up Growth and Failure to thrive
    16 Hypertension in the NICU Graduate
    17 Anemia of prematurity
    18 Thrombosis and Hematological Issues in the NICU Graduate
    19 Hyperbilirubinemia
    20 Endocrinopathies of the Preterm Infant
    21 Bone Health
    22 IVH, PVL, hypdrocephalus
    23 Retinopathy of prematurity and ophthalmologic issues
    24 Cerebral Palsy
    25 Autism Spectrum Disorder
    26 Intrauterine growth restriction
    27 Post-NICU Issues of Multiple Gestation
    28 Late Preterm Infants
    29 Surgical issues
    Section 3 Medical Care of the Term Infant
    30 Pulmonary Hypertension
    31 Congenital diaphragmatic hernia
    32 Congenital heart disease
    33 ECMO and post-ECMO care
    34 Congenital Intestinal anomalies
    35 Maternal and neonatal infections
    36 Birth asphyxia and HIE
    37 Neonatal abstinence syndrome
    38 Neural tube defects
    39 Neonatal seizures and Infantile spasms
    40 Infant of a diabetic mother
    41 Down Syndrome
    Section 4 Developmental Care of the High Risk Infant
    42 Early developmental issues in the NICU
    43 NICU environment
    44 Gross motor development
    45 Fine motor development
    46 Speech and language development
    47 Feeding Issues in the NICU Graduate
    48 Hearing Loss
    49 Neurodevelopmental testing
    50 Neurodevelopmental outcomes
    51 Family centered care and Social issues
    52 Palliative care
    53 Early Intervention Services
    54 Resources for providers and parents
    Appendices
    App A Discharging the high-risk infant
    App B Equipment needs of the high risk infant
    App C Medications
    App D Tests/Procedures
    App E Telephone Triage
    App F Coding and Billing.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2015
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    R745 .U49
    1
  • Digital
    Ugyen Tshewang, Michael Charles Tobias, Jane Gray Morrison.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: Located in the heart of the Eastern Himalayas, Bhutan practices the philosophy of Gross National Happiness ("GNH") that embraces environmental conservation as one of the main building blocks for its sustainable development goals. Bhutan's conservation strategies and success are largely driven by the strong political will and visionary leadership of His Majesty the King of Bhutan The nation's Buddhist perspectives regarding a deep and abiding respect for nature; and the strategic enforcement of a wide-ranging stringent set of internal regulations and controls have helped ensure ecological gold standards in Bhutan. Moreover, the country is an active member of the international conservation community by fulfilling its implementation of various Multilateral Environment Agreements. While it emerged into the 21st century as one of the 36 global terrestrial "hotspots" in biological diversity conservation ranks, Bhutan's sheer commitment with more than 51% of its territory being managed under the explicit status of a protected area network, and more than 70% of the land under forest cover, represents Bhutan's exemplary dedication to protect the planet despite its smallness in size and economy, and the biological fragility exemplified by its hotspot situation. In the face of imminent severe threats of global warming, Bhutan nonetheless exemplifies the truth that "a small country with a big conservation commitment" can make an enormous contribution to the global community. At the regional level, Bhutan is intent upon protecting the Water Towers of Asia (that glacial expanse of the Himalayas) which is a critical resource bulwark for about one-fifth of the global population downstream in South Asia. Such protections invariably help mitigate climate change by acting as a nation-wide carbon sink through its carbon neutral policies. In short, Bhutan has long represented one of the world's foremost national guardians of biodiversity conservation, ecological good governance, and societal sustainability at a period when the world has entered the Anthropocene - an epoch of mass extinctions. We envision this publication to be ecologically and ethically provocative and revealing for the concerned scientific communities, and governments. Through an extensive review of the scientific and anthropological literature, as well as the research team's own data, the Author's have set forth timely recommendations for conservation policies, strategies and actions. This book provides technical and deeply considered assessments of the state of Bhutan's environment, its multiple, human-induced stressors and pressures; as well as extremely sound, practical techniques that would address conservation strategies in the Himalayas and, by implication, worldwide.

    Contents:
    CHAPTER 1. State of Environment in Bhutan
    Abstract
    Overview of Bhutan.-Ecological Zones & Climatic Features
    Land Use in Bhutan
    Source: FRMD/DOFPS. Conservation Efforts & Protected Area Systems
    Conservation Laws and Policies. Assessment of Non-Protected Areas
    Sustainable Forest Management Plans in Non-protected Area. Scientific Forest Management
    Community Forest Empowerment. Non-Wood Forest Product (NWFP) Management. Plantation and Reforestation Programs. Keystone species and Conservation Areas. Foot Notes
    Annexure 1..1 Classification and Characteristics of Vegetation Zones in Bhutan (Grierson & Long, 1983, see 19)
    Annexure 1.2 Description of Classification of Land Cover Class and Sub-Class in Bhutan (See 20)
    CHAPTER 2
    Drivers and Pressure on the State of Environment in Bhutan. Abstract
    Land Use.-Hydropower projects
    Farm Roads
    Mining and Mineral Development
    Land use for Agriculture
    Waste Management
    CHAPTER 3
    Non-Violent Techniques for Human-Wildlife Conflict Resolution
    Abstract
    Contextual Framework within the ACPB
    Methodology
    Global context of HWC
    Conflict Management Strategies.-Retaliatory Actions and Violent Approaches
    Lethal Control - Counterproductive 96
    From Conflict to Co-existence
    Safe and Non-Violent Approach
    Table 3.1 Important Elements of HWC (WWF-Bhutan, 2016; See Foot Note 78)
    Human Wildlife Conflict Policy
    Implementing Agencies for HWC. Immune-contraception for population control
    Translocation of Problem Animals
    Alternative Livelihoods
    Land-Use Planning and Landscape Management
    Mitigation Measures
    Compensation
    Performance payments
    Ecotourism and Revenue Sharing
    Community Education
    Understanding the Conflict Profile
    Reporting.-Information compilation, management and use
    Response
    measures taken to alleviate a specific or ongoing HWC incident
    Monitoring and Evaluation
    measuring the performance of HWC management
    Human Wildlife Conflict Situation in Bhutan
    Underlying Forces of Human Wild-life Conflicts in Bhutan
    Human Wildlife Conflict Situation in Bhutan
    Preventive Measures
    Mitigation Approach in Bhutan
    Strategic Outcomes
    Table 3.5 Strategic Intents contributing to the Safe System (WWF-Bhutan, 2016; See Foot Note 246)
    Effective Monitoring and Evaluation
    Conclusion and Recommendation
    Non-violent and Safe Approach
    Institutional Arrangement
    Human Wildlife Conflict Policy & Legislation
    Coping Techniques and Mechanisms
    Hotspot Mapping
    Physiological Sterilization of wildlife
    Table 3.6 Immunocontraceptive vaccines used in different animals
    Innovative Research Fund for farmers
    Economic Responses to HWC
    Alternative livelihoods
    Regional Transboundary Conservation
    Foot Notes
    Annexure 3.1 Indicators of the Strategic Outcomes of People, Wildlife, Assets and Habitat
    CHAPTER 4
    Animal Rights and Protection.-Abstract
    Buddhist Perspectives & Conservation Biology
    Bhutanese Buddhism and the Segue To Contemporary Animal Protection Policies
    National Law & Buddhist Ethics
    State Monastic Body
    Non-governmental Organizations (NGO)
    Tshethar (Life Saving) Practices
    Animal Health and Rescue Centers
    Farming Systems and Livestock Population
    Meat Consumption in Bhutan
    Discussion and Recommendations on Animal Protection and Animal Rights
    Animal Protection Policy of Bhutan
    Population control of Livestock Animals
    Institutionalization and Implementation Arrangement
    Monitoring & Implementation
    Dog Population Control
    GNH Index for Animal Kingdom
    References (1-125)
    Annexure 4.1 God's Country: The New Zealand Factor, by Michael Charles Tobias and Jane Gray Morrison, Dancing Star Foundation, 2010
    CHAPTER 5. Gap Analysis of Threatened, Rare, and Under-Represented Species in Bhutan
    Abstract
    Introduction
    Impacts of Extinction of Species
    Taxonomic Classification - Seven Kingdoms Model
    Objectives
    Methodology
    Assessment of Under-Represented Species in Kingdoms
    Under-Represented Species in Classification of Groups
    Records of Species Groups under Animalia Kingdom
    Vertebrates.-Invertebrates
    Species Groups under Plantae Kingdom
    Tracheophytes
    Chromista Kingdom.-Fungi Kingdom
    Protista Kingdom
    Eubacteria Kingdom
    Archaebacteria Kingdom.-Assessment of Threatened Species
    Conservation Status of Fish in Bhutan
    Threatened Endemic Plants in Bhutan
    Under-Representation of Medicinal Plants
    Documentation of Agro-Biodiversity
    Community Participation and Citizen Science
    Discussion and Recommendations
    Foot Notes
    Annexure 5.1 List of Threatened Species of Plants (IUCN Status-2019)
    Annexure 5.2 List of Threatened Species of Mammals in Bhutan (IUCN Status-2019)
    Annexure 5.3 List of Threatened Species of Birds in Bhutan (IUCN) - 2019 NBC.-Annexure 5.4 List of Threatened Fish Species
    Annexure 5.5: List of Threatened Amphibian and Reptile Species
    Annexure 5.6 Monotypic Species of Seed Plants under each Class, Order, Family, Genus and Species (Source Flora of Bhutan, Volume 1, 2 & 3)
    CHAPTER 6
    Conservation Strategy of Threatened and Under-Represented Mammalian Species
    Landscape Conservation Approach
    Mammalian species
    Chinese Pangolin (Manis pentadactyla) Conservation
    Recommendations for Conservation Strategies.-Pygmy Hog (Sus salvanius) Conservation
    Recommendation for Conservation Strategy of Pygmy Hog (Sus salvanius)
    Alpine Musk Deer (Moschus Chrysogaster) and Himalayan Musk Deer (Moschus leucogaster) Conservation
    Recommendations for Conservation Strategy of Musk Deer
    Dhole (Cuon alpinus) Conservation Strategy
    Recommendations for Dhole Conservation Strategy
    Golden Langur (Trachypithecus geei) Conservation Strategy.-Recommendation for Conservation Strategy of Golden Langur
    Conservation of Arunachal Macaque (Macaca munzala)
    Conservation of Hispid Hare (Caprolagus hispidus)
    Conservation of Hog Deer (Axis Porcinus)
    Wild Water Buffalo (Bubalus arnee) Conservation
    Discussion on Conservation of Bats
    Foot Notes (1-131)
    CHAPTER 7Conservation of Threatened and Under-Represented Species of Plants
    Introduction.-Endemic Plant Species
    Monotypic Plant Species
    Discussion on Threatened Orchids
    Critically Endangered flowering plants
    Endangered Flowering Plants
    Recommendations for Conservation Strategy of Plant Species
    Conservation of Bryophytes
    Ecological significance of Bryophytes
    Economic Uses of Bryophytes
    Medicinal Use of Bryophytes
    Bryophytes as Pollution indicators
    Bryophytes in Science and Education
    Threats to Bryophytes
    Lesser Known Timber Species in Bhutan
    Foot Notes
    Annexure 7.1 Most commonly used timber species (Source: FRMD/DoFPS)
    Annexure 7.2 High value timber with less utilization (Source: FRMD/DoFPS)
    CHAPTER 8. Conservation of Threatened Birds, Reptiles, Fishes, Parasites, and Arachnids
    Birds Conservation
    Conservation of White Bellied Heron (Ardea insignis)
    Conservation of Vultures
    Discussion on Conservation of White Winged Duck
    Conservation Strategy of Baer's Pochard
    Conservation Strategy of Eagles.-Recommendations for Conservation Strategy of Threatened Birds
    Conservation of Turtles.-Importance of Turtle Conservation
    Conservation Strategies
    Conservation of Threatened Fish Species
    CHAPTER 9
    Conservation for Food Security and Under-Represented Microbes
    Abstract
    Conservation of Crop Genetic Resources
    Agro-Biodiversity Gene Banks
    Preservation under Permafrost Conditions
    Microbial Conservation Strategies
    FOOT NOTES.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Joan C. Williams.
    Summary: "A cutting edge, objective, relentless approach to inclusion. American companies spend close to billion annually on diversity efforts, with remarkably few results. Too often diversity efforts rest on the assumption that all that's needed is an earnest conversation about "privilege." That's not enough. To truly make progress with diversity, equity and inclusion, we must focus less on documenting the problem and more on just stopping the transmission of it. In Bias Interrupted, Joan C. Williams shows how it's done, and reassuringly, how easy it is to get started. Leaders just need to use standard business systems and standard business tools-data and metrics-to interrupt the bias that is constantly transmitted through formal systems like performance appraisals and the informal systems that control access to opportunities, like mentoring programs. The book presents fresh evidence based on Williams's research and work with companies, in that interrupting bias helps every group-including white men. Comprehensive, though compact and straightforward, Bias Interrupted delivers real, practical value in as efficient and accessible manner as possible to an audience that has never needed it more. It's possible to interrupt bias. Here's where you start"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    What's the path forward?
    Is bias training worthless?
    We're a meritocracy; are you asking us to change that?
    Why do some groups need to be politically savvier to succeed?
    Are you saying that white men have it easy? I don't feel privileged
    We cherish our culture; can we retain that and still achieve DEI goals?
    Can we make progress on DEI without getting all rigid and bureaucratic?
    Many women's priorities change after they have kids. Are you saying I should deny that fact of life?
    Isn't it natural-and inevitable-that people who work harder go further?
    If we hire more women and people of color, won't the DEI problem take care of itself?
    What does the CEO need to do to finally deliver on DEI goals?
    How can a company change who gets access to opportunities? (Hint: only the CEO can)
    How can CDOs and HR get buy-in-and deliver-on DEI goals?
    How can HR and DEI departments work together to interrupt bias in basic business systems?
    How can individual managers help move the needle-and manage more effectively?
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Jennifer L. Eberhardt, PhD.
    Summary: "You don't have to be racist to be biased. Unconscious bias can be at work without our realizing it, and even when we genuinely wish to treat all people equally, ingrained stereotypes can infect our visual perception, attention, memory, and behavior. This has an impact on education, employment, housing, and criminal justice. Now one of the world's leading experts on implicit racial bias offers us insights into the dilemma and a path forward. In [this book], with a perspective that is at once scientific, investigative, and informed by personal experience, Jennifer Eberhardt tackles one of the central controversies and culturally powerful issues of our time. Eberhardt works extensively as a consultant to law enforcement and as a psychologist at the forefront of this new field. Her research takes place in courtrooms and boardrooms, in prisons, on the street, and in classrooms and coffee shops. She shows us the subtle--and sometimes dramatic--daily repercussions of implicit bias in how teachers grade students, or managers deal with customers. It has an enormous impact on the conduct of criminal justice, from the rapid decisions police officers have to make to sentencing practices in court. Eberhardt's work and her book are both influenced by her own life, and the personal stories she shares emphasize the need for change. She has helped companies that include Airbnb and Nextdoor address bias in their business practices and has led anti-bias initiatives for police departments across the country. Here, she offers practical suggestions for reform and new practices that are useful for organizations as well as individuals. Unblinking about the tragic consequences of prejudice, Eberhardt addresses how racial bias is not the fault of nor restricted to a few "bad apples," but is present at all levels of society in media, education, and business. The good news is that we are not hopelessly doomed by our innate prejudices. In Biased, Eberhardt reminds us that racial bias is a human problem--one all people can play a role in solving."--Jacket.

    Contents:
    Part I: What meets the eye. Seeing each other ; Nurturing bias
    Part II: Where we find ourselves. A bad dude ; Male black ; How free people think ; The scary monster
    Part III: The way out. The comfort of home ; Hard lessons ; Higher learning ; The bottom line.
    Limited to 1 simultaneous users
  • Print
    by Theodore C. Ruch ... with an introduction by John F. Fulton ...
    Contents:
    pt.
    1. Anatomy, embryology & quantitative morphology; physiology, pharmacology & psychobiology; primate phylogeny & miscellanea.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    Z7996.P85 R8 1941 pt.1
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Hoff, Ebbe Curtis; Greenbaum, Leon J.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC1005 .H6
    2
  • Print
    by Harry Hoogstraal ; with the editorial assistance of Anna L. Gahin and Alice Djigounian, and the NAMRU-3 Medical Zoology Department Bibliographic Staff.
    Contents:
    v. 1-4. Bibliography of ticks and tickborne diseases from Homer (about 800 B.C.) to 31 December 1969
    v. 5, pt. I. Bibliography of ticks and tickborne diseases from Homer (about 800 B.C.) to 31 December 1973
    v. 5, pt. II. Bibliography of ticks and tickborne diseases from Homer (about 800 B.C.) to 31 December 1976
    v. 7. Bibliography of ticks and tickborne diseases from Homer (about 800 B.C.) to 31 December 1981.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    Z6664.T5 H65
    7
  • Digital/Print
    Center for Minority Group Mental Health Programs.
    Digital Access HathiTrust 1972
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Z7164.R12 U52
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access HathiTrust 1978
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Z7164.R12 U52
    1
  • Print
    Baur, J.
    Contents:
    Volume
    1. Journals / compiled by J. Baur ... [et al.].
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    Z6675.H7 B5
  • Digital
    Nikhil N. Verma, Eric J. Strauss, editors.
    Summary: Comprised exclusively of clinical cases covering the management of injuries to the biceps tendon and superior labrum, this concise, practical casebook will provide clinicians in orthopedics and sports medicine with the best real-world strategies to properly diagnose and treat the various types of injuries they may encounter. Each chapter is a case that opens with a unique clinical presentation, followed by a description of the diagnosis, assessment and management techniques used to treat it, as well as the case outcome and clinical pearls and pitfalls. Cases included illustrate different surgical management strategies for acute and chronic biceps tendon ruptures, anterior shoulder pain, subscapularis tears, proximal tenodesis, synovial chondromatosis and SLAP lesions type 1 through 4. Pragmatic and reader-friendly, The Biceps and Superior Labrum Complex: A Clinical Casebook will be an excellent resource for orthopedic surgeons, sports medicine practitioners and physical therapists alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Douglas T. Carrell, Peter N. Schlegel, Catherine Racowsky, Luca Gianaroli.
    Summary: Now in its fourth volume, the Biennial Review of Infertility brings together the most up-to-date research and clinical information on male and female infertility, emerging assisted reproductive techniques and evolving controversies in reproductive medicine. An impressive panel of contributors presents cutting-edge information in a clear and well-balanced manner. Volume 4 discusses hot topics in contemporary reproductive medicine, including stem cell technologies for male infertility, the current state of ovarian tissue cryopreservation and time-lapse video microscopy of embryos. The expanded section on controversies allows for point/counterpoint discussion between experts with differing opinions on topics like eSET and the use and role of dietary supplements in IVF cycles. Created to provide an ongoing appraisal of current knowledge, the Biennial Review of Infertility stimulates communication amongst all clinicians and researchers working to help couples resolve their infertility.

    Contents:
    Part I: Male
    The Epidemiology of Male Infertility
    Vasectomy Reversal or IVF: Analysis of Factors for Success
    Stem Cell Therapies for Male Infertility: Where Are We Now and Where Are We Going?
    Part II: Female
    Insights Into Mechanisms Causing the Maternal Age-induced Decrease in Oocyte Quality.-Endometriosis and Cancer: Is There an Association?.- Ovarian Tissue Cryopreservation: Where Are We Now?
    Part III: Art
    Animal Models for Developing Clinical Lab Procedures.- Current Status of Time-lapse Microscopy for Embryo Selection
    The Ideal Spermatozoon for ART
    Is Acupuncture Associated with Improved IVF Outcomes?
    Dr. Web and the New Generation of ART Patients
    Part IV: Controversies
    Yes, Elective Single Embryo Transfer Should Be Standard of Care
    Klinefelter Syndrome: Early Treatment of the Adolescent is Warranted
    Klinefelter Syndrome: Early Treatment of the Adolescent is Not Warranted
    Are Dietary Supplements Beneficial for IVF Patients?.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Mowafa Househ, Andre W. Kushniruk and Elizabeth M. Bory.
    Summary: This is the first book offering a comprehensive, yet concise, view on both the challenges and opportunities related to the use of big data in health care. The different chapters report on different perspectives: from health management to patient safety; from the human factor perspective to the ethical and economic ones, and more. By providing a historical background on the use of big data, and critically analyzing current approaches together with issues and challenges related to their applications, the work presented not only sheds light on the problems of big data, but also paves the way for possible solutions and future research directions. The book offers a useful reference guide to health information technology professionals, healthcare managers, healthcare practitioners, and patients alike, helping them in their decision making processes, as well as to students and academicians learning or dealing with data science related research issues in healthcare.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Connie W. Delaney, Charlotte A. Weaver, Judith J. Warren, Thomas R. Clancy, Roy L. Simpson, editors.
    Summary: This text reflects how the learning health system infrastructure is maturing and being advanced by health information exchanges (HIEs) with multiple organizations blending their data or enabling distributed computing. It educates the readers on the evolution of knowledge discovery methods that span qualitative as well as quantitative data mining, including the expanse of data visualization capacities, are enabling sophisticated discovery. Historically, nursing, in all of its missions of research/scholarship, education and practice, has not had access to large patient databases. Nursing has consequently adopted qualitative methodologies with small sample sizes, clinical trials and lab research. In the United States, large payer data has been amassed and structures/organizations have been created to welcome scientists to explore these large data to advance knowledge discovery. Big Data-Enabled Nursing reflects on how health systems have developed and how electronic health records (EHRs) have now matured to generate massive databases with longitudinal trending. It provides instruction on the new opportunities for nursing and educates readers on the new skills in research methodologies that are being further enabled by new partnerships spanning all sectors.

    Contents:
    Part I: The new and exciting world of "big data"
    Why big data?: why nursing?
    Big data in healthcare: a wide look at a broad subject
    A big data primer
    Part II: Technologies and science of big data
    A closer look at enabling technologies and knowledge value
    Big data in healthcare: new methods of analysis
    Generating the data for analyzing the effects of interprofessional teams for improving triple aim outcomes
    Wrestling with big data: how nurse leaders can engage
    Inclusion of flowsheets from electronic health records to extend data for clinical and translational science awards (CTSA) research
    Working in the new big data world: academic/corporate partnership model
    Part III: Revolution of knowledge discovery, dissemination, translation through data science
    Data science: transformation of research and scholarship
    Answering research questions with national clinical research networks
    Enhancing data access and utilization: federal big data initiative and relevance to health disparities research
    Big data impact on transformation of healthcare systems
    State of the science in big data analytics
    Part IV: Looking at today and the near future
    Big data analytics using the VA's 'Vinci' database to look at delirium
    Leveraging the power of interprofessional EHR data to prevent delirium: the Kaiser Permanente story
    Mobilizing the nursing workforce with data and analytics at the point of care
    The power of disparate data sources for answering thorny questions in healthcare: four case studies
    Part V: A call for readiness
    What big data and data science mean for schools of nursing and academia
    Quality outcomes and credentialing: implication for informatics and big data science
    Big data science and doctoral education in nursing
    Global society & big data: here's the future we can get ready for
    Big-data enabled nursing: future possibilities
    Glossary.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Pouria Amirian, Trudie Lang, Francois van Loggerenberg, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews a number of issues including: Why data generated from POC machines are considered as Big Data. What are the challenges in storing, managing, extracting knowledge from data from POC devices? Why is it inefficient to use traditional data analysis with big data? What are the solutions for the mentioned issues and challenges? What type of analytics skills are required in health care? What big data technologies and tools can be used efficiently with data generated from POC devices? This book shows how it is feasible to store vast numbers of anonymous data and ask highly specific questions that can be performed in real-time to give precise and meaningful evidence to guide public health policy.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Improving Healthcare with Big Data
    Data Science and Analytics
    Big Data and Big Data Technologies
    Big Data Analytics for Extracting Disease Surveillance Information: An Untapped Opportunity
    Ebola and Twitter. What Insights Can Public Health Draw from Social Media?
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Jonathan D. Kibble.
    Summary: "The goal of this textbook is to help medical students to efficiently learn and review physiology. The text offers a complete yet concise treatment of the major topics in medical physiology. Several design features are included to make the text easy to use. High-yield clinical pearls are integrated throughout to the text; clinical examples highlight the relevance and application of physiologic concepts. Key concepts are highlighted using italics and basic terms are shown in bold when first used. Full color figures illustrate essential processes; explanatory figure legends allow figures to be used for review. Bullets and numbering are used to break down complex processes Study questions and answers are provided at the end of each chapter. A final examination is also provided, which is organized by body system to allow either comprehensive testing or focused review"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    General Physiology
    Neurophysiology
    Blood
    Cardiovascular Physiology
    Pulmonary Physiology
    Renal Physiology & Acid-Base Balance
    Gastrointestinal Physiology
    Endocrine Physiology
    Reproductive Physiology
    Final Examination.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Veeru Kasivisvanathan, Ben Challacombe, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Stefano Fiorucci, Eleonora Distrutti, editors.
    Summary: This book focusses on the latest results related to the field of bile acids as signaling molecules and describes how these receptors have become a major pharmacological target. It covers all major areas of research in this field, from genetics, chemistry, in silico modeling, molecular biology to clinical applications, offering a cross-country view of the functional role of bile acids as signaling molecules, virtually acting on all major areas of metabolism. While FXR and GPBAR1 are essential bile acid sensors that integrate the de novo bile acid synthesis with intestinal microbiota and liver metabolism, in a broader sense, BARs play a pathogenic role in the development of common human alignments including liver, intestinal and metabolic disorders, such as steatosis (NAFLD) and steato-hepatitis (NASH), diabetes, obesity and atherosclerosis.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; The Pharmacology of Bile Acids and Their Receptors; 1 Introduction; 2 Bile Acids, a Family of Unconventional Steroids; 3 Bile Acids Before the Discovery of Their Receptors; 4 The Discovery of the Bile Acid-Activated Receptors: FXR and Other Nuclear Receptors; 4.1 FXR, the Bile Acid Sensor in Drug Discovery: 1999-2019; 5 Secondary Bile Acids and GPBAR1; 6 Conclusions; References; Bile Acid-Activated Receptors: GPBAR1 (TGR5) and Other G Protein-Coupled Receptors; 1 Introduction; 2 TGR5 and S1PR2 Signaling Pathways; 3 Tissue Distribution of TGR5 and S1PR2 12 Role in Advanced Liver Disease: Potential Therapeutic Target?13 Summary and Perspectives; References; Bile Acid-Activated Receptors: A Review on FXR and Other Nuclear Receptors; 1 Introduction; 2 Bile Acid-Activated Receptor Farnesoid X Receptor (FXR, NR1H4); 2.1 FXR and Bile Acid Metabolism; 2.2 FXR and Lipid Metabolism; 2.3 FXR and Glucose Metabolism; 2.4 FXR as a Therapeutic Target; 3 Bile Acids and Small Heterodimer Partner (SHP, NR0B2); 3.1 SHP and Bile Acid Metabolism; 3.2 SHP and Lipid Metabolism; 3.3 SHP and Glucose Metabolism 4 Bile Acid-Activated Receptor Pregnane X Receptor (PXR, NR1I2)4.1 PXR and Bile Acid Metabolism; 4.2 PXR and Lipid Metabolism; 4.3 PXR and Glucose Metabolism; 5 Bile Acids and Constitutive Androstane Receptor (CAR, NR1I3); 5.1 CAR and Bile Acid Metabolism; 5.2 CAR and Lipid Metabolism; 5.3 CAR and Glucose Metabolism; 6 Bile Acid-Activated Receptor Vitamin D Receptor (VDR, NR1l1); 7 Conclusions and Perspectives; References; The Enterokine Fibroblast Growth Factor 15/19 in Bile Acid Metabolism; 1 FGF Family; 2 Endocrine FGFs; 3 FGF15/FGF19 in Energy Homeostasis 4 Role of FGF15/FGF19 in the Gut-Liver Axis5 FGF19 and Hepatic Diseases; 6 FGF19-Based Therapy: Promising Reality; References; Signaling from Intestine to the Host: How Bile Acids Regulate Intestinal and Liver Immunity; 1 Bile Acids and Intestinal Microbiota; 2 Bile Acids and Immune System; 2.1 Role of Bile Acids in the Regulation of Intestinal and Liver Immunity; 2.2 Immune-Regulatory Effects of Bile Acids in Myeloid Cells: Monocytes/Macrophages and Dendritic Cells; 2.3 Immune-Regulatory Effects of Bile Acids in Lymphoid Cells; References 4 Role of S1PR2 Signaling in Hepatocytes5 Role of S1PR2 and TGR5 in Liver Sinusoidal Endothelial Cells (LSECs); 6 Role of S1PR2 and TGR5 in Hepatic Stellate Cells (HSCs) and Hepatic Myofibroblasts (hMFs); 7 Role of S1PR2 and TGR5 in Macrophages; 8 Role of S1PR2 and TGR5 in Biliary Epithelial Cells; 9 Loss of S1PR2 and TGR5 in Mice and Humans: Contribution to Liver Disease?; 10 S1PR2 and TGR5 in Cholestatic and Biliary Diseases: Pathogenetic Role and Potential Therapeutic Target?; 11 S1PR2 and TGR5 Metabolic Liver Diseases: Potential Therapeutic Target?
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gideon Hirschfield, David Adams, Evaggelia Liaskou, editors.
    Contents:
    1. The Clinical Burden of Biliary Disease: A Global Perspective / Kirsten Muri Boberg
    2. The Healthy Biliary Tree: Cellular and Immune Biology / Massimiliano Cadamuro, Luca Fabris, and Mario Strazzabosco
    3. Pathological Features of Biliary Disease in Children and Adults / Rachel M. Brown and Stefan G. Hübscher
    4. Animal Models of Biliary Disease: Current Approaches and Limitations / Marion J. Pollheimer and Peter Fickert
    5. The Microbiome and Human Disease: A New Organ of Interest in Biliary Disease / Johannes Roksund Hov
    6. Biliary Atresia: From Pathology to Treatment / Jane Hartley and Deirdre Kelly
    7. Drug-Induced Cholestasis: Mechanisms and Importance / Guruprasad P. Aithal and Ann K. Daly
    8. Primary Biliary Cholangitis: Its Science and Practice / Lifeng Wang, Christopher L. Bowlus, Fu-Sheng Wang, and M. Eric Gershwin
    9. Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis (PSC): Current Concepts in Biology and Strategies for New Therapy / Palak J. Trivedi and Tom H. Karlsen
    10. Cholangiocarcinoma: Disease Pathogenesis and New Treatment Paradigms / Gregory J. Gores and Boris Blechacz
    11. Gallstone Disease: Scientific Understanding and Future Treatment / Frank Lammert
    12. IgG4-Related Sclerosing Cholangitis / Emma L. Culver and George Webster
    13. Conclusions and Future Opportunities / David Adams and Evaggelia Liaskou.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Joseph M. Herman, Timothy M. Pawlik, Charles R. Thomas, Jr.
    Summary: The second edition of this book is intended as a definitive text on biliary tract and gallbladder cancers. Specifically, it will serve as a single-source reference on the current knowledge base for the multidisciplinary management of such cancers and thus covers epidemiological, surgical, radiotherapy, and chemotherapy approaches. Akey feature is the demonstration of the impact of cutting-edge technical knowledge on treatment; for example, interventional radiology techniques, novel surgical approaches, and image-guided radiation therapy are all extensively discussed. Diagnosis is also considered in detail, with coverage of novel serum biomarkers, pathologic staging, molecular profiling, and the full range of current and emerging imaging strategies. Further chapters are devoted to epidemiology, the role of growth factor pathways and signal transduction, and histopathology and molecular pathogenesis. Experienced practitioners in a range of specialties will find this amply illustrated book to be an invaluable source of information on the newest diagnostic and treatment techniques in biliary tract and gallbladder cancer, yet it is also sufficiently concise to offer an introduction to the field for students and community practitioners.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Epidemiology of gallbladder and cholangiocarcinoma
    Role Growth Factor Pathways & Signal Transduction
    Histopathology and molecular pathogenesis of biliary tract tumors
    Clinical diagnosis and staging
    Diagnostic imaging of biliary tract & gall bladder tumors
    Overview of Current Strategies
    Imaging of hepatic transplantation for cholangiocarcinoma
    State of the art directions
    Interventional radiology techniques
    Chemoembolization and Radioembolization
    Overview of emerging strategies in the surgical management of biliary tract tumors
    Surgical techniques for intrahepatic biliary tract cancer
    Surgical techniques for techniques for extrahepatic biliary tract cancers
    Surgery for gallbladder
    Systemic therapy (current strategies and new directions)
    Radiotherapy (including combination radiotherapy and systemic therapeutic strategies, 3D-CRT, IMRT approaches)
    Techniques in radiotherapy
    Symptomatic management and palliation
    New Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Chihua Fang, Wan Yee Lau, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest application of digital medical imaging technology in biliary tract surgery, including three-dimensional visualization preoperative evaluation, preoperative surgical planning, and simulated biliary surgery. Digital surgical diagnosis and treatment of cholecystolithisasis, bile duct stones, hepatolithiasis, gallbladder cancer, and bile duct cancer is described in details with more than 900 illustrations. Written by experts with wealthy of clinical experience, it will be a useful reference for general surgeons, as well as practitioners in related disciplines. Chihua Fang is a Professor and Director of Department of Hepatobiliary Surgery, Zhujiang Hospital, Southern Medical University, Guangzhou, China. He is the Chairman of Digital Medicine Branch of Chinese Medical Association. Wan Yee Lau is a Professor of Faculty of Medicine, The Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong, China. He is also the Academician of Chinese Academy of Sciences.

    Contents:
    Applied Anatomy of the Biliary Tract
    Application of Multi-Slice Spiral CT and MRI in Biliary Tract Surgery
    Imaging of Common Biliary Tract Diseases
    3D Visualization of Abdominal CT Images
    3D Printing Technology and Its Application in the Hepatobiliary and Pancreatic Surgery
    Virtual Surgical Instruments and Simulation Surgery
    Application of Indocyanine Green Fluorescence Imaging in Biliary Tract Surgery
    Application of Endoscopic Technique in Biliary Tract Surgery
    Construction and Clinical Application of 3D Visualization Platform for the Blood Supplying of the Extrahepatic Bile Duct
    Digital Surgical Diagnosis and Treatment of Cholecystolithiasis
    Digital Surgical Diagnosis and Treatment of Extrahepatic Bile Duct Stones
    Digital Surgical Diagnosis and Treatment of Hepatolithiasis
    Digital Surgical Diagnosis and Treatment of Biliary Dilatation
    3D Visual Diagnosis and Treatment of Bile Duct Injury
    Digital Surgical Diagnosis and Treatment of Gallbaldder Cancer
    Digital Diagnosis and Surgical Treatment of Bile Duct Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kwok-Hung Lai, Lein-Ray Mo, Hsiu-Po Wang, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Ruth Y. Litovsky, Matthew J. Goupell, Richard R. Fay, Arthur N. Popper, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides an up-to-date reference on the developments and novel ideas in the field of binaural hearing. The primary readership for the volume are specialists in the diverse fields such as psychoacoustics, neuroscience, engineering, psychology, audiology, hearing aids, and cochlear implants.

    Contents:
    Ch 1: Binaural Processing of Sounds
    Ch 2: Localization and Lateralization of Sound
    Ch 3: Sound Source Localization Is a Multisystem Process
    Ch 4: Anatomy and Physiology of the Avian Binaural System
    Ch 5: Binaural Hearing by the Mammalian Auditory Brainstem: Joint Coding of Interaural Level and Time Differences by the Lateral Superior Olive
    Ch 6: Binaural Hearing with Temporally Complex Signals
    Ch 7: Binaural Hearing and Across-Channel Processing
    Ch 8: Binaural Unmasking and Spatial Release from Masking
    Ch 9: Spatial Hearing in Rooms and Effects of Reverberation
    Ch 10: Computational Models of Binaural Processing
    Ch 11: Clinical Ramifications of the Effects of Hearing Impairment and Aging on Spatial and Binaural Hearing
    Ch 12: Physiology of Higher Central Auditory Processing and Plasticity
    Ch 13: Binaural Hearing with Devices.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Guido K.W. Frank, Laura A. Berner, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of our current understanding of binge eating, which is characterized by the uncontrollable consumption of large amounts of food in a discrete time period. Written by experts on eating disorders, it first introduces the phenotype of binge eating, including its epidemiology and assessment. It then describes the underlying neurobiological alterations, drawing on cutting-edge animal models and human studies to do so. In addition, it extensively discusses current treatment models, including medication, psychotherapy, self-interventions and disease prevention. Lastly, an outlook on the future research agenda rounds out the coverage. Given binge eatings current status as an under-researched symptom, but one shared across many eating disorders, this book provides an up-to-date, integrative and comprehensive synthesis of recent research and offers a valuable reference for scientists and clinicians alike.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Part I: Phenotype
    Epidemiology of Binge Eating
    Learning Objectives
    1 Introduction
    2 What Is Binge Eating?
    3 What Eating Disorders Are Defined by Binge Eating?
    4 What Are Prevalence and Incidence?
    5 How Many Individuals Experience Binge Eating?
    6 Does Risk for Binge Eating Differ Across Demographic Groups: Gender, Age Group, and Race/Ethnicity?
    7 Have Rates of Binge Eating Changed in Recent Years?
    8 How Many Individuals Have BN? 2.1 Eating-Related Psychopathology
    2.1.1 Cross-Sectional Associations
    2.1.2 Longitudinal Associations
    2.1.3 Momentary Associations
    2.2 Quality of Life
    2.2.1 Cross-Sectional Associations
    2.2.2 Longitudinal Associations
    2.2.3 Momentary Associations
    2.3 Mood-Related Symptoms and Self-Evaluation
    2.3.1 Cross-Sectional Associations
    2.3.2 Longitudinal Associations
    2.3.3 Momentary Associations
    2.4 Substance Use
    2.4.1 Cross-Sectional Associations
    2.4.2 Longitudinal Associations
    2.4.3 Momentary Associations
    3 Interpersonal Functioning 2.2 Developmental Risk Factors for Binge Eating
    2.2.1 Parental and Peer Influences
    2.2.2 Attachment Style
    2.2.3 Food Environment
    3 Binge Eating Among the Marginalized: Cultural Considerations
    3.1 Prevalence Rates
    3.1.1 Race and Ethnicity
    3.1.2 Food Insecurity
    3.1.3 Sexual Minorities
    3.2 Cultural Risk Factors for Binge Eating
    3.2.1 Discrimination
    3.2.2 Weight Bias
    4 Overall Summary and Future Research
    References
    Psychosocial Correlates of Binge Eating
    Learning Objectives
    1 Introduction
    2 Psychiatric Comorbidity 2.3 Eating Disorder Assessment for the DSM-5 (EDA-5)
    3 Self-Report Measures
    3.1 Eating Disorder Examination-Questionnaire (EDE-Q)
    3.2 Eating Disorder Diagnostic Scale
    3.3 Eating Pathology Symptoms Inventory
    3.4 Questionnaire on Eating and Weight Patterns
    3.5 Self-Monitoring
    4 Laboratory Eating
    5 Conclusion
    References
    Developmental and Cultural Aspects of Binge Eating
    Learning Objectives
    1 Psychological Models of Binge Eating
    2 Binge Eating Across Childhood
    2.1 Prevalence Rates
    2.1.1 Overeating
    2.1.2 Binge Eating
    2.1.3 Loss of Control of Eating 9 Does Risk for BN Differ Across Demographic Groups: Gender, Age Group, and Race/Ethnicity?
    10 Have Rates of BN Changed in Recent Years?
    11 How Many Individuals Have BED?
    12 Does Risk for BED Differ Across Demographic Groups: Gender, Age Group, and Race/Ethnicity?
    13 Have Rates of BED Changed in Recent Years?
    14 Summary and Discussion
    References
    Binge Eating Assessment
    Learning Objectives
    1 Introduction
    2 Clinical Interviews
    2.1 Eating Disorder Examination (EDE)
    2.2 Structured Clinical Interview for DSM-5 (SCID-5)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hiroki Takada, Kiyoko Yokoyama, editors.
    Summary: This book outlines the electro-activity in the human body, human behavior, and other bio-information during image viewing and applies it to a hygienic and clinical setting. The book begins by explaining the basic science of brain measurements and the endocrine system, before analyzing the bio-signals obtained from electrocardiogram (ECG), electrogastrography (EGG), electro-oculography (EOG) and much more. As the book subsequently demonstrates, these bio-signals can be measured using wearable devices, and the data can be used to detect undiagnosed diseases and health-relevant abnormalities. Especially in the field of nursing care for the elderly and rehabilitation, these new options for the management and analysis of biological information hold considerable potential. Bio-information for Hygiene offers a valuable resource for both new and established researchers, as well as students who are seeking comprehensive information on environmental/occupational health and health promotion. It will also assist technical staff whose work involves bio-informatics.

    Contents:
    1 Brain measures
    2 Endocrine system
    3 Electrocardiogram (ECG)
    4 Electrogastrography
    5 Measurements for visual function, including gaze, & electro-oculography (EOG)
    6 Electroencephalography (EEG): EEG as a tool to improve QOL and maintain healthy brain
    7 Electromyography and Performance
    8 Polysomnography
    9 Stabilometry
    10 Motion capture
    11 A Development of Physical Feedback Structure for Virtual Rehabilitation System Using Air Pressure
    12 Artificial Intelligence for Medical Imaging & Hygiene
    13 Meditation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony B. Brennan, Chelsea M. Kirschner.
    Contents:
    ECM-inspired chemical cues : biomimetic molecules and techniques of immobilization / Roger Y. Tam, Shawn C. Owen and Molly S. Shoichet
    Dynamic materials mimic developmental and disease changes in tissues / Matthew G. Ondeck and Adam J. Engler
    The role of mechanical cues in regulating cellular activities and guiding tissue development / Liming Bian
    Contribution of physical forces to the design of biomimetic tissue substitutes / M. Ermis, E.T. Baran, T. Dursun, E. Antmen and V. Hasirci
    Cellular responses to engineered bio-inspired topographic cues / Chelsea M. Kirschner, James F. Schumacher and Anthony B. Brennan
    Engineering the mechanical and growth factor signaling roles of fibronectin fibrils / Christopher A. Lemmon
    Biologic scaffolds composed of extracellular matrix as a natural material for wound healing / Stephen Badylak
    Bio-inspired integration of natural materials / Albino Martins, Marta Alves da Silva, Ana Costa-Pinto, Rui L. Reis and Nuno M. Neves
    Bio-inspired design of skin replacement therapies / Dennis P. Orgill
    Epithelial engineering: from sheets to branched tubes / Hye Young Kim and Celeste M. Nelson
    A biomimetic approach toward the fabrication of epithelial-like tissue / Meng Xu and Hongjun Wang
    Nano- and micro-structured ECM and biomimetic scaffolds for cardiac tissue engineering / Quentin Jallerat, John M. Szymanski and Adam W. Feinberg
    Cardiovascular biomaterials / Elaine L. Lee and Joyce Y. Wong
    Evaluation of bio-inspired materials for mineralized tissue regeneration using type I collagen reporter cells / Lisa T. Kuhn, Emily Jacobs, and A. Jon Goldberg
    Learning from tissue equivalents : biomechanics and mechanobiology / David D. Simon and Jay D. Humphrey
    Mimicking the hematopoietic stem cell niche by biomaterials approaches / Eike Müller, Michael Ansorge, Carsten Werner and Tilo Pompe
    Engineering immune responses to allografts / Anthony W. Frei and Cherie L. Stabler
    Immunomimetic materials / Jamal S. Lewis and Benjamin G. Keselowsky.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Paulo Jorge Bártolo, Bopaya Bidanda, editors.
    Summary: This second edition maintains a focus on integrated biomaterials, computer-aided design, and physical prototyping techniques as examples of the materials and applications that are found in medical environments. All original chapters, written by renowned experts in the field, have been updated along with the addition of four new chapters on: Smart insoles Medical applications of additive manufacturing Additive manufacturing in craniofacial applications Additive manufacturing in hearing aids This wide-ranging treatise on biomaterials and prototyping applications in medicine also focuses on solid freeform fabrication, rapid prototyping, layered manufacturing, and computer-aided design in the development of prosthetic devices. This book is a must-have for bioengineers seeking a comprehensive overview of this important subject and examples of medical applications, as well as researchers and academics in the same field.

    Contents:
    Metallic and Ceramic Biomaterials: Current and Future Developments
    Polymers, Composites and Nano Biomaterials: Current and Future Developments
    Polyurethane Based Materials with Applications in Medical Devices
    Rapid Prototyping of Hydrogels to Guide Tissue Formation
    Engineered Scaffold Architecture Influences Soft Tissue Regeneration
    Customized Implants for Bone Replacement and Growth
    Direct Digital Manufacturing of Complex Dental Prostheses
    Digital Design and Fabrication in Dentistry
    The Development of an Artificial Finger Joint
    Computer-Aided Development of Mega Endo-Prostheses
    Smart Insoles
    Medical Applications of Additive Manufacturing
    Additive Manufacturing in Craniofacial Applications
    Additive Manufacturing in Hearing Aids.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Vladimir Uversky, Yuri Lyubchenko.
    Summary: Bio-Nanoimaging: Protein Misfolding & Aggregation provides a unique introduction to both novel and established nanoimaging techniques for visualization and characterization of misfolded and aggregated protein species. The book is divided into three sections covering: - Nanotechnology and nanoimaging technology, including cryoelectron microscopy of beta(2)-microglobulin, studying amyloidogensis by FRET; and scanning tunneling microscopy of protein deposits - Polymorphisms of protein misfolded and aggregated species, including fibrillar polymorphism, amyloid-like protofibrils, and insulin olig.

    Contents:
    Nanoimaging and nanotechnology of aggregating proteins: A
    Nanoimaging and nanotechnology of aggregating proteins: B
    Polymorphism of protein misfolding and aggregated species
    Polymorphism of protein misfolding and aggregarion processes.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Flavia Fontana, Hélder A. Santos, editors.
    Summary: The book covers the latest developments in biologically-inspired and derived nanomedicine for cancer therapy. The purpose of the book is to illustrate the significance of naturally-mimicking systems for enhancing the dose delivered to the tumor, to improve stability, and prolong the circulation time. Moreover, readers are presented with advanced materials such as adjuvants for immunostimulation in cancer vaccines. The book also provides a comprehensive overview of the current status of academic research. This is an ideal book for students, researchers, and professors working in nanotechnology, cancer, targeted drug delivery, controlled drug release, materials science, and biomaterials as well as companies developing cancer immunotherapy.

    Contents:
    Part 1
    Conventional nanosized drug delivery systems for cancer applications
    Homing peptides for cancer therapy
    Radiolabeling of theranostic nanosystems
    Boosting nanomedicine efficacy with hyperbaric oxygen therapy
    Part 2
    Mesoporous Silica Nanoparticles as Carriers for Biomolecules in Cancer Therapy
    Clearable Nanoparticles for Cancer Photothermal Therapy
    Biohybrid Nanosystems for Cancer Treatment: Merging the Best of Two Worlds
    Electrospun Nanofibers for Cancer Therapy
    Nanoneedle-based materials for intracellular studies
    Part 3
    In vitro assays for nanoparticle-cancer cell interaction studies
    3D tumor spheroid models for in vitro therapeutic screening of nanoparticles
    In vitro and in vivo tumor models for the evaluation of anticancer nanoparticles
    Part 4
    Nanotechnology for the Development of Nanovaccines in Cancer Immunotherapy
    Viral nanoparticles: cancer vaccines and immune modulators
    Industrial Perspective on Cancer Immunotherapy
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Alberto Gobbi, João Espregueira-Mendes, John G. Lane, Mustafa Karahan.
    Summary: This book introduces the exciting field of orthobiology, which will usher in a new array of therapeutic approaches that stimulate the body's natural resources to regenerate musculoskeletal tissues damaged by trauma or disease. The book addresses a range of key topics and discusses emerging approaches that promise to offer effective alternatives to traditional treatments for injuries to bone, cartilage, muscles, ligaments, and tendons. It explains in detail how a variety of innovative products, including biomaterials, growth factors, and autogenous cells, together provide the basis for the regeneration of these musculoskeletal structures and how recent scientific progress has created unique opportunities to address pathological situations that until recently have been treated with unsatisfactory results. The authors are experts from across the world who come together to provide a truly global overview. The book is published in collaboration with ISAKOS. It will be invaluable for all with an interest in this area of medicine, which has already attained huge popularity in Orthopaedics and Sports Medicine and has also attracted the attention of the lay public.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Om V. Singh.
    Summary: "Provide the insights of bio-pigmentation and molecular mechanisms of microbial biosynthesis of pigments. The new avenues of bio-pigments as sustainable resources to overcome from chemically synthesized pigments under safety net will be established"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    K. Marieke Paarlberg, Harry B.M. van de Wiel, editors.
    Summary: This book will assist the reader by providing individually tailored, high-quality bio-psycho-social care to patients with a wide range of problems within the fields of obstetrics, gynecology, fertility, oncology, and sexology. Each chapter addresses a particular theme, issue, or situation in a problem-oriented and case-based manner that emphasizes the differences between routine and bio-psycho-social care. Relevant facts and figures are presented, advice is provided regarding the medical, psychological, and caring process, and contextual aspects are discussed. The book offers practical tips and actions within the bio-psycho-social approach, and highlights important do?s and don?ts. To avoid a strict somatic thinking pattern, the importance of communication, multidisciplinary collaboration, and creation of a working alliance with the patient is emphasized. The book follows a consistent format, designed to meet the needs of challenged clinicians.

    Contents:
    Part I: Obstetrics, gynecology, fertility and sexology. Chapter 1. A pregnant woman afraid of to deliver: How to manage childbirth anxiety
    Chapter 2. A woman afraid of becoming pregnant again: Posttraumatic stress disorder following childbirth
    Chapter 3. A woman who cannot enjoy her pregnancy: Depression in pregnancy and puerperium
    Chapter 4. New mothers with disturbing thoughts: Treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder and of psychosis in postpartum
    Chapter 5. A woman with a positive prenatal test on trisomy 21: Counseling in prenatal diagnosis
    Chapter 6. Parents who lost their baby: Guiding the mourning process in stillbirths and pregnancy terminations
    Chapter 7. A pregnant woman who could not stop drinking: Management of alcohol abuse during pregnancy
    Chapter 8. A young woman asking for labia reduction surgery: A plea for "vulvar literacy"
    Chapter 9. A woman struggling for control: How to manage severe eating disorders
    Chapter 10. A woman with inexplicable mood swings: Patient management of premenstrual syndrome
    Chapter 11. A woman who suffers always and forever: Management of chronic pelvic pain
    Chapter 12. A woman who has been cut: Female genital mutilation from a global perspective
    Chapter 13. A woman with stress incontinence: Urogenital complaints and psychosexual consequences
    Chapter 14. A couple who cannot conceive: Coping with infertility
    Chapter 15. A young woman facing cancer treatment: Shared decision-making in fertility preservation
    Chapter 16. A couple who considers artificial reproductive techniques: Psychosocially informed care in reproductive medicine
    Chapter 17. A woman who never could have coitus: Treatment of lifelong vaginismus
    Chapter 18. A woman with coital pain: New perspectives on provoked vestibulodynia
    Chapter 19. A woman with changing vulvar anatomy: Sexuality in women with lichen sclerosus
    Chapter 20. A woman complaining of lack of sexual desire: Sexological counseling
    Part 2. Fundamental introduction to the concepts of clinical roles, the meta-competences, and POG competency profiles. Chapter 21. A theoretical and empirical study of the core of the psychosomatic approach to obstetrics and gynecology: Meta-competences, clinical roles, and POG competency profiles
    Part 3. Clinical roles and meta-competences: The building blocks of psychosomatic obstetrics and gynecology
    Chapter 22. Introduction
    Chapter 23. History: A historical perspective on patient education in clinical practice and in medical education
    Chapter 24. Scholar: A scholar who cannot see the woods for the trees: The biosocial model as the scientific basis for the psychosomatic approach
    Chapter 25. Health advocate: An obstetrician in doubt--coping with ethical dilemmas and moral decisions
    Chapter 26. Communicator: The gynecologist who could not convince his patients
    Chapter 27. Collaborator: A midwife who had a conflict with an obstetrician--how to transform "contact tics" into "co tactics"
    Chapter 28. Professional: A sexologist who overstepped the mark--how to handle the therapeutic relationship in psychosocial care
    Chapter 29. Leader: A proof of leadership, dealing with and learning from work-related psychotrauma
    Chapter 30. Medical expert: The resident who passed the ultimate test--the integration of roles during the gynecological examination.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Myriam M.-L. Grundy, Peter J. Wilde, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: The structure of a food influences the way it is transformed during processing and digestion. This in turn has an impact on nutrient bioaccessibility (release) and digestibility, and subsequently on the physiological response and health of the individual who consumes that food. Although evidence exists on the health benefits associated with the inclusion of certain lipid-rich foods (e.g. nuts, dairy products and fish) in the diet, the mechanisms that explain the physiological effects and the long-term benefits are not well understood. Lipids in themselves have many beneficial health effects: they are a source of energy and essential fatty acids, they are structural components of cell membranes, they are required to solubilise fat soluble compounds, and they serve as precursors of hormones. In addition, the overall structure of the food containing the lipids plays a crucial role in determining health benefits, notably by influencing lipid bioaccessibility and digestibility. Bioaccessibility and digestibility of lipids from food uniquely focuses on the physico-chemical properties of lipids and lipid rich food, as well as the subsequent effects on human health. Chapters from experts in food digestion examine food structure at both the macro- and micro- levels, covering lipids from plant and animal food products. The editors have developed the book for dietitians, nutritionists, and food scientists. Clinicians and other health professionals, educators in nutrition, and others working in the food industry will also find the material relevant.

    Contents:
    Part 1- Digestion of lipids
    1 Enzymes involved in lipid digestion
    2 Colloidal events that may affect lipid bioaccessibility and digestibility
    3 In vivo and in vitro evaluation of lipid digestion
    Part 2- Lipid metabolism
    4 Oral processing of lipids
    5 Physiological aspects of lipid digestion
    6 Lipid and cardiovascular disease risks
    Part 3-Food structure
    7 Plant food and dietary fibres
    8 Diary products and lipid digestion
    9 Interaction with macronutrients
    Part 4 Other forms of lipids
    10 Lipid digestion and bioaccessibility of lipid soluble molecules
    11 Sterols digestion.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Johnny Stiban, editor.
    Summary: This book is about the various roles of bioactive ceramides and other sphingolipids in cellular biology. The enigmatic biophysical and biochemical properties of ceramides and their propensity to influence membranes whether as rafts or protein-permeable channels are heavily discussed. Metabolism of ceramides and their metabolites is also focused with ceramide synthase family of proteins being a target of extensive review. Ceramide 1-phosphate and other sphingolipids are also presented in cellular physiology and pathophysiology. Prokaryotic origins of mitochondria at the level of membranes and the occurrence of apoptosis in bacteria are presented. Many aspects of ceramide and sphingolipid biology are addressed in this book. Its focus is the metabolism of ceramide in normal and diseased states and the biophysical and biochemical mechanisms governing the bioactivity of these molecules. Sphingolipid research has surged over the past thirty years and this book gathers the recent findings of various aspects of sphingolipid biochemistry. World-renowned scientists from the field of lipid biology, specifically sphingolipid biochemistry, were gathered to write this book. Scholars from most continents of the globe committed to write diligently about their expertise and the newest findings in the relevant fields. This book came to fruition after almost a year and a half of laborious preparation and diligent writings. This book is targeted to the experienced reader who is looking to read about the various aspects of bioactive ceramide signaling, as well as to the newcomer into the field, as the topics are explained in concise yet very informative manner. The authors and editor wish all readers a pleasant time reading this volume, and are adamant that this book will meet all expectations.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editor;
    1: Introduction: Enigmas of Sphingolipids; References;
    2: Prokaryotic and Mitochondrial Lipids: A Survey of Evolutionary Origins; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Bacterial and Mitochondrial Membranes; 2.3 Bacterial Lipids; 2.3.1 Environmental Factors; 2.3.1.1 Pressure; 2.3.1.2 Temperature; 2.3.1.3 Hypersalinity; 2.3.1.4 pH; 2.3.2 The Gram-Negative Outer Membrane; 2.3.3 Common, and Uncommon, Lipids in Bacteria; 2.3.3.1 Hopanoids and Sterols; 2.3.3.2 Sphingolipids and Lipid Rafts; 2.3.3.3 Ladderanes; 2.4 Lipids in Mitochondria 2.4.1 Mitochondrial Cholesterol and Other Sterols2.4.2 Mitochondrial Sphingolipids; 2.5 Programmed Cell Death; 2.5.1 Mitochondria and Apoptosis; 2.5.2 Bacterial Apoptosis; 2.6 Conclusions and Future Directions; References;
    3: Ceramide Channels; 3.1 Introduction; 3.1.1 Membrane Channels; 3.1.2 Membrane Channels Formed by Cellular Lipids; 3.2 Evidence for the Existence of Ceramide Channels; 3.2.1 Ceramide-Induced Permeabilization of the Mitochondrial Outer Membrane to Proteins; 3.2.2 Ceramide Addition Permeabilizes Phospholipid Membranes; 3.2.3 Model of the Ceramide Channel 3.2.4 Visualization of the Ceramide Channel by Electron Microscopy3.2.5 Dynamics of Ceramide Channels; 3.2.6 Ceramide Channel Destabilization by Anti-apoptotic Bcl-2 Family Proteins; 3.2.7 Synergy Between Ceramide and the Pro-apoptotic Protein Bax; 3.2.8 Membrane Specificity of Ceramide Channel Formation; 3.3 Conclusions; References;
    4: A Stroll Down the CerS Lane; 4.1 A Stroll Through the CerS Sequence, from N- to C-Terminus; 4.1.1 The CerS N-Terminus Faces the ER Lumen and Contains a Glycosylation Site; 4.1.2 The First TMD Targets CerS to the ER 4.1.3 A Conserved, Enigmatic Homeobox-Like Domain4.1.4 The TLC Domain Contains the Active Site and Determines Substrate Specificity; 4.1.4.1 The Lag1p Motif May Contain the N-Acylation Site; 4.1.4.2 Long Chain Base Specificity; 4.1.4.3 Acyl-CoA Specificity Is Determined by the Last Loop of the TLC Domain; 4.1.4.4 CerS2 Contains a S1P Receptor-Like Motif; 4.1.5 The CerS C-Terminus Faces the Cytosol and Contains Phosphorylation Sites; 4.2 CerS Regulation; 4.2.1 CerS Dimerization; 4.2.2 CerS Inhibition; 4.2.3 Transcriptional Regulation of CerS; 4.3 Summary and Conclusions; References
    5: The Role of Ceramide 1-Phosphate in Inflammation, Cellular Proliferation, and Wound Healing5.1 Introduction; 5.1.1 Ceramide 1-Phosphate; 5.1.2 The Biosynthesis of Ceramide 1-Phosphate in Mammalian Cells; 5.2 The Generation of Eicosanoids and Induction of the Inflammatory Response by Ceramide 1-Phosphate; 5.3 Ceramide 1-Phosphate and Cell Survival; 5.3.1 The Role of Ceramide 1-Phosphate in Cellular Proliferation; 5.3.2 Acid Sphingomyelinase; 5.3.3 The Association of Ceramide 1-Phosphate with the PI3-K/AKT, NF-kB, and Other Survival Pathways
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mostafa I. Waly, Mohammad Shafiur Rahman, editors.
    Summary: The high rate of urbanization and a steady increase in per capita income has improved the socio-economic status of people all over the world. This has resulted in drastic changes in their lifestyle and food consumption patterns, where traditional foods are being replaced with more ready-made junk foods with few servings of fresh vegetables and fruits. It has been postulated that industrialization has caused change in food choice, dietary pattern modification and resulted in a sedentary lifestyle. In addition, contaminated foods with unsafe microbes and chemical hazards are increasing. All of these events have resulted in an increased risk of cancer, the leading cause of mortality and morbidity worldwide. This book will provide a basic understanding of cancer, its risk factors, preventive measures, and possible treatments currently available, as well as identifying the different dietary factors that might synergize with a sedentary lifestyle in the etiology of cancer, and its prevention measure.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Risk Factors for Cancer: Genetic and Environment; 1 Introduction; 2 Environmental Risk Factors; 2.1 Tobacco; 2.2 Alcohol; 2.3 Occupational Carcinogens; 2.4 Environmental Pollution; 3 Diet Risk Factor; 3.1 Food Contaminants; 3.2 Aflatoxins; 3.3 Chemicals and Pesticides; 3.4 Food Additives; 4 Genetic Predisposition; 5 Interrelationship of Genetic Risk and Environmental Risk Factors; 6 Awareness of Risk Factors; 7 Conclusion; References; Anticancer Potential of Dietary Polyphenols; 1 Introduction; 2 Properties of Polyphenols. 2 Cinnamon as a Cancer Prevention2.1 Species of Cinnamon; 2.2 Chemical and Phytochemical Composition of Cinnamon; 2.3 Medical Uses of Cinnamon; 2.3.1 Cinnamon in Disease and Infection Prevention; 2.3.2 Cinnamon and Cancer Treatment; 2.4 Mechanism of Action of Cinnamon Against Cancer; 2.4.1 Antioxidant Property; 2.4.2 Anti-inflammatory Activity; 2.4.3 Antimicrobial Activity; 2.4.4 Insulin Potentiating Activity; 2.5 Toxicity of Overdose; 3 Conclusion; References; Broccoli (Brassica oleracea) as a Preventive Biomaterial for Cancer; 1 Introduction; 2 Nutritional Composition of Broccoli. 3 Phytochemicals in Broccoli4 Anticancer Effects as Evidenced from Cell Line Studies; 5 Anticancer Effects as Evidence from Animal Trial; 6 Clinical Trials; 7 Conclusion; References; Garlic Preventive Effect on Cancer Development; 1 Introduction; 2 Medicinal Aspects of Allium Foods; 3 Anticancer Effects of Garlic; 4 Bioavailability of Garlic-Derived Compounds; 5 Garlic as a Phytochemical Agent; 6 Conclusion; References; Antioxidant and Health Properties of Beehive Products Against Oxidative Stress-Mediated Carcinogenesis; 1 Introduction; 2 Beehive Products and Cancer; 2.1 Honey; 2.2 Pollen. 3.2.6 Mediation of Cellular Signaling: Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MAPK) Pathway Modulation3.2.7 Mediation of Cellular Signaling: Cell Cycle Arrest; 3.2.8 Mediation of Cellular Signaling: Apoptotic Pathway Induction; 3.2.9 Epigenetic Modifications; 3.2.10 Glycolytic Inhibition; 4 Adjunctive Therapy; 5 Conclusion; References; Natural Products and Their Benefits in Cancer Prevention; 1 Introduction; 2 Antioxidant Properties of Natural Plants; 3 Anticancer Properties of Selected Natural Products; 4 Conclusion; References; Cinnamon as a Cancer Therapeutic Agent; 1 Introduction.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Jing Wang, Baoguo Sun, RongTsao Cao, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes the reported health benefits of bioactive factors in cereal foods and their potential underlying mechanisms. Focusing on potential mechanisms that contribute to the various effects of bioactive factors on obesity, diabetes and other metabolic diseases, it helps to clarify several dilemmas and encourages further investigations in this field. Intended to promote the consumption of cereal foods or whole cereal foods to reduce the risk of chronic diseases, and to improve daily dietary nutrition in the near future, the book was mainly written for researchers and graduate students in the fields of nutrition, food science and molecular biology.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Market and Consumption of Cereal Foods; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Baked Cereal Foods; 1.3 Fermented Cereal Foods; 1.3.1 Fermented Cereal Staple; 1.3.2 Fermented Cereal Beverage; 1.3.3 Fermented Cereal Condiment; 1.4 Extruded Cereal Foods; 1.4.1 Extruded Cereal Staple; 1.4.2 Extruded Cereal Snack; 1.5 Premixed Cereal Powder; References;
    Chapter 2: Technologies for Improving the Nutritional Quality of Cereals; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Extrusion Cooking; 2.3 High Pressure Processing; 2.4 Microwave Processing; 2.5 Milling; 2.6 Germination 2.7 Fermentation2.8 Enzymatic Processing; References;
    Chapter 3: Corn; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Bioactives in Corn; 3.2.1 Phenolics; 3.2.2 Carotenoids; 3.2.3 Alkaloids; 3.2.4 Proteins and Peptides; 3.2.5 Resistant Starch; 3.2.6 Vitamins and Minerals; 3.3 Molecular Mechanism of Bioactives in Corn; 3.4 Effects of Processing on Bioactive Availability; 3.5 Possible Approach to Enhance Health Benefit of Corn Bioactives; 3.6 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 4: Barley; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Bioactives in Barley; 4.3 Molecular Mechanism of Bioactives in Barley; 4.3.1 Antioxidant Properties 4.3.2 Antihyperglycemic4.3.3 Antihyperlipidemia; 4.3.4 Ameliorating Obesity; 4.3.5 Modulation of Gut Microbiota Community; 4.4 Effects of Processing on Availability; 4.5 Possible Approach to Enhance Health Benefits of Barley Bioactives; References;
    Chapter 5: Rice; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Bioactives in Rice; 5.2.1 Proteins; 5.2.2 Oil; 5.2.3 Phenolic Compounds; 5.3 Molecular Mechanisms of Bioactives in Rice; 5.3.1 Antioxidative Activities; 5.3.2 Antibiotic Activities; 5.3.3 Increased Immune Response; 5.3.4 Hypolipidemic Properties; 5.3.5 Anticancer Activity 5.4 Effects of Processing on Availability5.4.1 Germination; 5.4.2 Fermentation; 5.4.3 Extrusion; 5.5 Possible Approach to Enhance Health Benefit of Rice Bioactives; References;
    Chapter 6: Wheat and Wheat Hybrids; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Bioactives in Wheat and Wheat Hybrids; 6.2.1 Dietary Fiber (DF); 6.2.1.1 Distribution of Dietary Fiber in Wheat; 6.2.1.2 Official Methods to Analyze Dietary Fiber; 6.2.1.3 Function of Dietary Fiber; 6.2.2 Resistant Starch; 6.2.2.1 Resistant Starch and Classification; 6.2.2.2 Methods of Analysis of Resistant Starch in Foods 6.2.2.3 Functionality and Beneficial Physiological Effects of RS6.2.3 Vitamins; 6.2.3.1 Water-Soluble Vitamins; 6.2.3.2 Fat-Soluble Vitamins; 6.2.3.3 Other Vitamins; 6.2.4 Minerals; 6.2.4.1 Calcium; 6.2.4.2 Phosphorus; 6.2.4.3 Magnesium; 6.2.4.4 Iron; 6.2.4.5 Zinc; 6.2.4.6 Copper; 6.2.4.7 Sodium and Potassium; 6.2.4.8 Other Minerals; 6.2.5 Phytochemicals in Wheat; 6.2.5.1 Phenolic Compounds; 6.3 Effects of Processing on Wheat Bioactives and the Approach to Enhance Health Benefits of Wheat Bioactives; 6.3.1 Dietary Fiber and resistant starch During Processing
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Andres Trostchansky, Homero Rubbo, editors.
    Summary: The purpose of this book is to introduce the readers on the perspective of the role that unsaturated fatty acids and complex lipids play on health and disease. Bioactive lipids can be modified affecting membrane composition, structure and fluidity in addition to changes in cell signaling associated to lipid-protein (membrane receptors) interactions, issues that are addressed by the authors. This book analyzes key topics involving bioactive lipids and their role in normal signaling and the mechanisms of disease. The book navigates from structural studies of oxidized and non-oxidized lipids to the reactions and cell signaling processes that bioactive lipids play in cardiovascular and neurodegenerative diseases. The book contains the recent advances reported in the literature about lipidomics as well as the role that lipid-derived compounds exert on unfolded protein response and lipid metabolism and disease. This book represents a state of the art introduction to lipid metabolism from a biochemical to an in vivo overview being an useful tool for students and investigators. We hope the mechanistic observations on the role of bioactive lipids in health and disease serve a perspective to improve the existing treatments or propose new lipid-based pharmacology.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I: Structure, Characterization and Physicochemical Properties of Bioactive Lipids;
    1: Diffusion and Transport of Reactive Species Across Cell Membranes; 1.1 Cellular Membranes; 1.2 Diffusion Across Membranes; 1.3 The Permeability Coefficient; 1.4 Interactions of Reactive Species with Membranes; 1.4.1 Oxygen; 1.4.2 Singlet Oxygen; 1.4.3 Nitric Oxide; 1.4.4 Nitrogen Dioxide; 1.4.5 Hydrogen Sulfide; 1.4.6 Peroxynitrite Anion and Peroxynitrous Acid; 1.4.7 Superoxide and Hydroperoxyl Radical; 1.4.8 Hydrogen Peroxide; 1.4.9 Hydroxyl Radical 1.5 Considerations About the Permeability of Membranes to Reactive SpeciesReferences;
    2: Characterization of Hydroxy and Hydroperoxy Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids by Mass Spectrometry; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Fatty Acid Hydroperoxide Formation; 2.3 Hydroperoxide- and Hydroxy-Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids Analysis; 2.3.1 Characterization of Linoleic Acid Hydro(pero)xides; 2.3.2 Characterization of Arachidonic Acid Hydro(pero)xides; 2.3.3 Characterization of Eicosapentaenoic Acid Hydro(pero)xides; 2.3.4 Characterization of Docosahexaenoic Acid Hydro(pero)xides; 2.4 Conclusion; References
    4: Diminishing Inflammation by Reducing Oxidant Generation: Nitrated Fatty Acid-Mediated Inactivation of Xanthine Oxidoreductase4.1 Xanthine Oxidoreductase (XOR); 4.2 Shortcomings Associated with Allo/Oxypurinol Inhibition of XOR; 4.3 Nitrated Fatty Acids; 4.4 OA-NO2 and LNO2 Inactivate XOR; 4.5 XOR-Endothelium Interaction Does not Affect Inactivation by OA-NO2; References;
    5: Unfolded Protein Response: Cause or Consequence of Lipid and Lipoprotein Metabolism Disturbances?; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 The Unfolded Protein Response 5.3 From the Unfolded Protein Response to Lipid Metabolism Disturbances5.4 From Lipotoxicity to Unfolded Protein Response; 5.5 Closing Remarks and Perspectives; References; Part III: Bioactive Lipids in Inflammatory and Cardiovascular Diseases;
    6: Arachidonic Acid and Nitroarachidonic: Effects on NADPH Oxidase Activity; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Arachidonic Acid Metabolism in Macrophage Activation; 6.3 NADPH Oxidase 2 Activation; 6.4 Activation of NOX2 by Arachidonic Acid; 6.5 Inhibition of NOX2 by Nitroarachidonic Acid; 6.6 Summary; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Anil K. Sharma.
    Contents:
    Anticancer Alkaloids: Molecular Mechanisms and Clinical Manifestations.
    Emerging Alkaloids Against Cancer: A Peep into Factors, Regulation, and Molecular Mechanisms.
    Mechanistic Insight into Cancer Aetiology and Therapeutic Management by Natural Metabolites.
    Flavones: Flavonoids Having Chemico-Biological Properties with a Preview into Anticancer Action Mechanism.
    Cancer Chemoprevention by Dietary Polyphenols, Flavonoids, Terpenoids, and Saponins.
    Immunogenic Potential of Natural Products.
    Immunomodulatory and Therapeutic Potential of Marine Flora Products in the Treatment of Cancer.
    Ligand-Based Designing of Natural Products.
    Drug Resistance in Cancer and Role of Nanomedicine-Based Natural Products.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Joginder Singh, Vineet Meshram, Mahiti Gupta, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights different natural products that are derived from the plants and microbes that have shown potential as the lead compounds against infectious diseases and cancer. Natural products represent an untapped source of strikingly diverse chemotypes with novel mechanisms of action and the potential to serve as anticancer and anti-infective agents. The book discusses a range of biotechnologically valuable bioactive compounds and secondary metabolites that have been derived from plant and microorganisms from various ecological niches. It also reviews the latest developments in the field of genomics, bioinformatics and industrial fermentation for harnessing the microbial products for commercial applications. In turn, the books closing section reviews important biotechnological applications of various natural products. Combining the expertise of specialists in this field, the books goal is to promote the further investigation of natural sources for the development of standardized, safe and effective therapies.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Part I: Plants Natural Products: Fountainheads for Drug Discovery and Development
    1: The Artemisia Genus: Panacea to Several Maladies
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Phytochemistry
    1.3 Conservation of Artemisia Species
    1.4 Conclusions
    References
    2: Bacopa monnieri: The Neuroprotective Elixir from the East-Phytochemistry, Pharmacology, and Biotechnological Improvement
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Methodology
    2.3 Bioactivity Study
    2.3.1 Biological Activities of Plant Extract(s)
    2.3.1.1 Pro-cognitive Activity 2.3.1.2 Anti-neurodegenerative Activity
    2.3.1.3 Antidepressant and Anti-stress Activity
    2.3.1.4 Neuroprotective Activity
    2.3.1.5 Cardioprotection
    2.3.1.6 Gastrointestinal and Hepatoprotective Activity
    2.3.1.7 Antiemetic Activity
    2.3.1.8 Anti-epileptic Activity
    2.3.1.9 Antioxidant Activity
    2.3.1.10 Miscellaneous Activity
    2.3.2 Pharmacological Activity of the Active Compounds
    2.3.2.1 Bacoside A
    Anti-Alzheimerś Activity
    Anti-apoptotic Activity
    Anti-epileptic Activity
    Antidepressant Activity
    Anti-dopaminergic Activity
    Anti-inflammatory Activity 3.5.9 Immunomodulatory Properties
    3.5.10 Neuroprotective Activity
    3.5.11 Cardioprotective Activity
    3.6 Phytochemistry of Cinnamon
    3.7 Clinical Study Based on Cinnamon
    3.8 Extraction and Isolation of Bioactive Phytochemicals
    3.9 Biotechnological Techniques for Large-Scale Multiplication of Cinnamomum Species
    3.10 Molecular Markers for Genetic Diversity Assessment of Cinnamomum Species
    3.11 Discussion and Conclusion
    References
    4: Swertia spp.: A Potential Source of High-Value Bioactive Components, Pharmacology, and Analytical Techniques
    4.1 Introduction 3: Current Knowledge of Cinnamomum Species: A Review on the Bioactive Components, Pharmacological Properties, Analytical and B...
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Botanical Description
    3.3 Distribution
    3.4 Traditional Use and Polyherbal Formulation of Cinnamon
    3.5 Pharmacological Property of Cinnamomum Species
    3.5.1 Anti-inflammatory Activity
    3.5.2 Antibacterial Activity
    3.5.3 Antifungal Activity
    3.5.4 Antiviral Activity
    3.5.5 Antioxidant Activity
    3.5.6 Anticancer Activity
    3.5.7 Gastroprotective Activity
    3.5.8 Hypoglycemic/Anti-lipidemic Activity Antioxidant Activity
    Hepatoprotection
    Neuroprotection
    Protease Inhibition Activity
    Renoprotective Activity
    Wound-Healing Activity
    2.3.2.2 Bacopaside I
    2.3.2.3 Betulinic Acid
    2.3.3 Pharmacological Activity of the Polyherbal Formulation(S)
    2.3.3.1 Cognition
    2.3.3.2 Hepatic Encephalopathy
    2.4 Biotechnological Advancement
    2.5 Toxicity Study
    2.6 Drug Designing
    2.7 Structure-Activity Relationship
    2.8 Summary
    2.9 Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Feridoun Karimi-Busheri, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Integration, networking, and global biobanking in the age of new biology
    2. The future of biobanking: a conceptual look at how biobanks can respond to the growing human biospecimen needs of researchers
    3. Sustainability of biobanks in the future
    4. Biobanking: the future of cell preservation strategies
    5. Biobanking for personalized medicine
    6. A global view of breast tissue banking
    7. Biobanking of cerebrospinal fluid for biomarker analysis in neurological diseases
    8. Biobanking in the twenty-first century: driving population metrics into biobanking quality
    9. Challenges in developing a cancer oriented-biobank: experience from a 17 year-old cancer biobank in Sao Paulo, Brazil
    10. China biobanking
    11. Establishing an iso-compliant modern cancer-biobank in a developing country: a model for international cooperation
    12. Nursing and biobanking
    13. A data-centric strategy for modern biobanking
    14. The importance of quality patient advocacy to biobanks: a lay perspective from Independent Cancer Patients Voice (ICPV), based in United Kingdom
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Qayyum Husain, Mohammad Fahad Ullah, editors.
    Summary: This book introduces readers to industrially important enzymes and discusses in detail their structures and functions, as well as their manifold applications. Due to their selective biocatalytic capabilities, enzymes are used in a broad range of industries and processes. The book highlights selected enzymes and their applications in agriculture, food processing and discoloration, as well as their role in biomedicine. In turn, it discusses biochemical engineering strategies such as enzyme immobilization, metabolic engineering, and cross-linkage of enzyme aggregates, and critically weighs their pros and cons. Offering a wealth of information, and stimulating further research by presenting new concepts on enzymatic catalytic functions in basic and applied contexts, the book represents a valuable asset for researchers from academia and industry who are engaged in biochemical engineering, microbiology and biotechnology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Saulius Drukteinis, Josette Camilleri, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on hydraulic calcium silicate-based materials available in clinical dentistry, used as pulp capping materials, root canal sealers, root-end fillers, or root repair materials and which offer improved properties and easier clinical application compared with the original mineral trioxide aggregate. The book introduces the current classification of bioceramic materials and explains their characterization and their physicochemical and biological properties. Thereafter, the various clinical applications of these materials are discussed in depth with reference to the evidence base. The coverage includes applications in endodontic treatments and complications, traumatic dental injuries, management of the vital pulp in both dentitions, and regenerative endodontic procedures. Apart from presenting the latest research on hydraulic calcium silicate-based materials, Bioceramic Materials in Clinical Endodontics promotes an essential balance between basic laboratory and clinical research. It will thus be an important reference for materials science specialists, clinical researchers, and clinicians.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    Current Classification of Bioceramic Materials in Endodontics
    1 Introduction
    2 Classification of Hydraulic Cements
    3 Bioceramics and Hydraulic Calcium Silicate Cements
    4 Clinical Presentation
    5 Conclusions
    References
    Characterization and Properties of Bioceramic Materials for Endodontics
    1 Introduction
    2 Coronal Use
    2.1 Chemical, Physical and Mechanical Properties
    2.2 Biological Characteristics
    2.3 Clinical Performance and Material Interactions
    3 Intra-radicular Use 3.1 Chemial, Physical and Mechanical Properties
    3.2 Biological Characteristics
    3.3 Clinical Performance and Material Interactions
    4 Extra-radicular Use
    4.1 Chemical, Physical and Mechanical Properties
    4.2 Biological Characteristics
    4.3 Clinical Performance and Material Interactions
    4.4 Conclusions
    References
    Bioceramic Materials for Vital Pulp Therapy
    1 Introduction
    2 Pulp Inflammation and Healing
    3 Pulp Capping and Biomaterials
    4 Step-by-Step Procedures
    4.1 Pulp Capping
    4.2 Pulp Chamber Pulpotomy 5 Application of Pulp Capping and 'Bioproducts' to Stimulate Regeneration
    6 Short- and Long-Term Future Developments
    7 Conclusions
    References
    Bioceramic Materials in Regenerative Endodontics
    1 Pulp Regeneration
    2 Regeneration or Repair
    3 Clinical Treatment
    4 Limitations
    5 The Use of Hydraulic Calcium Silicate Cements for Revitalization
    6 Reaction of Hydraulic Tricalcium Silicates with Tissue Fluids
    7 Mechanical Properties of Hydraulic Calcium Silicates in Revitalization
    8 Discoloration
    9 Conclusion
    References Bioceramic Materials for Root Canal Obturation
    1 Introduction
    2 Flowable Hydraulic Calcium Silicate-Based Obturation Materials
    2.1 iRoot®SP, EndoSequence® BC Sealer™, and TotalFill® BC Sealer™
    2.2 EndoSequence BC Sealer HiFlow and TotalFill® BC Sealer HiFlow™
    2.3 Bio-C Sealer
    2.4 Well-Root ST
    2.5 CeraSeal
    2.6 BioRoot™ RCS
    3 Bioceramic-Coated (BC) Gutta-Percha Points for Root Canal Obturation
    4 Sealer Delivery Methods
    5 Root Canal Obturation Techniques
    5.1 Cold Lateral Compaction
    5.2 Warm Vertical Condensation and Its Modifications 5.3 Single-Cone Obturation
    6 Conclusions
    References
    Bioceramic Materials for Management of Endodontic Complications
    1 Introduction
    2 Materials Used for Management of Endodontic Complications
    2.1 iRoot®BP, EndoSequence® BC RRM™, and TotalFill® BC RRM™ Paste
    2.2 iRoot®BP Plus, EndoSequence® BC RRM™, and TotalFill® BC RRM™ Putty
    2.3 iRoot®FS, EndoSequence® BC RRM™, and TotalFill® BC RRM™ Fast Set Putty
    2.4 Well-Root™ PT
    2.5 Biodentine®
    3 Temporary Bioceramic-Based Root Canal Dressing Materials
    4 Apexification Procedures
    5 Perforation Repair
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kausik Chattopadhyay, Subhash C. Basu, editor.
    Summary: "Cell surface small molecules and macromolecules, such as members of cholesterol family (including steroid hormones), the glycolipid family (sphingolipids), the glycoprotein family (both N-linked and O-linked), and a vast array of other receptors have been shown to be involved in normal and abnormal cellular processes. The 11th International Symposium on Cell Surface Macromolecules, held in Mohali, India, in February 2017 provided a comprehensive update on the major advances in this area. Presenting selected contributions from this meeting, this book comprises 24 chapters, which provide in-depth analyses of data on the role of cell surface macromolecules in cellular function and their alterations associated with pathological conditions. It includes comprehensive research papers and critical overviews of the functional role of cell surface molecules, discussing topics such as biochemical, biophysical, and cell biological approaches to study cell membrane molecules, and metabolism of glycoconjugates"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Membrane Organization. Status of membrane asymmetry in erythrocytes: role of spectrin / Sauvik Sarkar, Dipayan Bose, Rajendra P. Giri, Mrinmay K. Mukhopadhyay, Abhijit Chakrabarti
    Multiple roles, multiple adaptors: dynein during cell cycle / Devashish Dwivedi, Mahak Sharma
    Changes in the nuclear envelope in laminopathies / Subarna Dutta, Maitree Bhattacharyya, Kaushik Sengupta
    Biophysics of membrane proteins and cell surface macromolecules. The effect of nanoparticles on the cluster size distributions of activated EGFR measured with photobleaching image correlation spectroscopy / Chiara Paviolo, James W. M. Chon, Andrew H. A. Clayton
    Factors influencing the chaperone-like activity of major proteins of mammalian seminal plasma, equine HSP-1/2 and bovine PDC-109: effect of membrane binding, pH and ionic strength / Cheppali Sudheer Kumar, Bhanu Pratap Singh, Sk. Alim, Musti J. Swamy
    Exploring the mechanism of viral peptide-induced membrane fusion / Gourab Prasad Pattnaik, Geetanjali Meher, Hirak Chakraborty
    Amyloids are novel cell-adhesive matrices / Reeba S. Jacob [and others]
    The prospects of cadherin-23 as a mediator of homophilic cell-cell adhesion / Malay Kumar Sannigrahi, Sai Srinivas, Sabyasachi Rakshit
    Structural-mechanical and biochemical functions of classical cadherins at cellular junctions: a review and some hypotheses / Prince Tiwari, Arpita Mrigwani, Harpreet Kaur, Pallavi Kaila, Rajendra Kumar, Purnananda Guptasarma
    G-protein coupled receptors: from structure to function. Identification of sphingolipid-binding motif in G protein-coupled receptors / Sandeep Shrivastava, Md. Jafurulla, Shrish Tiwari, Amitabha Chattopadhyay
    Molecular signatures of cholesterol interaction with serotonin receptors / Madhura Mohole, Xavier Prasanna, Durba Sengupta, Amitabha Chattopadhyay
    Cell surface macromolecules in neurobiology. Group I metabotropic glutamate receptors (mGluRs): ins and outs / Prabhat Kumar Mahato, Namrata Ramsakha, Prachi Ojha, Ravinder Gulia, Rohan Sharma, Samarjit Bhattacharyya
    Soluble amyloid precursor protein [alpha]: friend or foe? / Nicola J. Corbett, Nigel M. Hooper
    C. elegans locomotion: finding balance in imbalance / Shruti Thapliyal, Kavita Babu
    Cell surface macromolecules: infection, immunity and disease. Induction of apoptosis in metastatic breast cancer cells: XV. Downregulation of DNA polymerase-[alpha] – helicase complex (replisomes) and glyco-genes / Subhash C. Basu [and others]
    Dynamic function of DPMS is essential for angiogenesis and cancer progression / Zhenbo Zhang, Jesús E. Serrano-Negrón, Juan A. Martínez, Krishna Baksi, Dipak K. Banerjee
    Benzothiophenes as potent analgesics against neuropathic pain / Saurabh Yadav, Vishnu Kumar Dwivedi, Sarika Gupta, Avadhesha Surolia
    PRR function of innate immune receptors in recognition of bacteria or bacterial ligands / Aakanksha Gulati, Deepinder Kaur, G. V. R. Krishna Prasad, Arunika Mukhopadhaya
    Structural basis and functional implications of the membrane pore-formation mechanisms of bacterial pore-forming toxins / Anish Kumar Mondal [and others]
    Abiraterone and ionizing radiation alter the sphingolipid homeostasis in prostate cancer cells / Valentina Murdica [and others]
    A glycomic approach towards identification of signature molecules in CD34+ haematopoietic stem cells from umbilical cord blood / Suchandra Chowdhury [and others]
    Microbial cell surface. Vitamin C: a natural inhibitor of cell wall functions and stress response in mycobacteria / Kirtimaan Syal, Dipankar Chatterji
    The wrappers of the 1,2-propanediol utilization bacterial microcompartments / Naimat K. Bari, Gaurav Kumar, Sharmistha Sinha
    F-type lectin domains: provenance, prevalence, properties, peculiarities, and potential / Sonal Mahajan, T. N. C. Ramya.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM300 .B55
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Abhijit Chakrabarti.
    Summary: Consists of critical reviews and original research papers from the 2014 International Symposium on the "Biochemical Role of Eukaryotic Cell Surface Macromolecules". Topics covered include: · neurochemical and biochemical analysis of cell surface glycoconjugates · membrane skeletal organization · GPCRs and other receptors · biophysical approaches to study membrane interactions · glycoconjugate metabolism · dysregulation · molecular mechanisms involved in cell-cell and cell-matrix interaction · glycans in infectious and neurological diseases · cancer and glycosyltransferases as drug targets.

    Contents:
    Human-specific evolutionary changes in the biology of siglecs / Flavio Schwarz, Jerry J. Fong, and Ajit Varki
    Structural changes of GPI anchor after its attachment to proteins: functional significance / Taroh Kinoshita
    Novel insights in membrane biology utilizing fluorescence recovery after photobleaching / Amitabha Chattopadhyay and Md. Jafurulla
    Defects in erythrocyte membrane skeletal architecture / Avik Basu and Abhijit Chakrabarti
    Membrane rafts in the erythrocyte membrane: a novel role of MPP1p55 / Aleksander F. Sikorski, Joanna Podkalicka, Walis Jones, and Agnieszka Biernatowska
    Immuno-modulatory role of porins: host immune responses, signaling mechanisms and vaccine potential / Sanica C. Sakharwade, G. V. R. Krishna Prasad, and Arunika Mukhopadhaya
    Vibrio cholerae cytolysin: structure-function mechanism of an atypical [beta]-barrel pore-forming toxin / Anand Kumar Rai and Kausik Chattopadhyay
    New Vis-Tas in lactosylceramide Research / Subroto Chatterjee, Sumita Mishra, and Sara Kimiko Suzuki
    Plasma membrane-associated sialidase confers cancer initiation, promotion and progression / Taeko Miyagi, Kohta Takahashi, Kazuhiro Shiozaki, Kazunori Yamaguchi, and Masahiro Hosono
    A signal with a difference: the role of GPI anchor signal sequence in dictating conformation and function of the Als5 Adhesin in Candida albicans / Mohammad Faiz Ahmad, Pareeta Gajraj Mann, and Sneha Sudha Komath
    Novel chondroitin sulfate oligosaccharide motifs as biomarkers: insights into their involvement in brain development / Kazuyuki Sugahara
    Role of hyaluronidases in the catabolism of chondroitin sulfate / Shuhei Yamada
    Pattern recognition in legume lectins to extrapolate amino acid variability to sugar specificity / Nisha Jayaprakash Grandhi, Ashalatha Sreshty Mamidi, and Avadhesha Surolia
    Conformational dynamics of oligosaccharides characterized by paramagnetism-assisted NMR spectroscopy in conjunction with molecular dynamics simulation / Ying Zhang, Takumi Yamaguchi, Tadashi Satoh, Maho Yagi-Utsumi, Yukiko Kamiya, Yoshitake Sakae, Yuko Okamoto, and Koichi Kato
    Characterization of cholesterol crystalline domains in model and biological membranes using X-Ray diffraction / R. Preston Mason and Robert F. Jacob
    Role of lipid-mediated effects in [beta]2-adrenergic receptor dimerization / Xavier Prasanna, Amitabha Chattopadhyay, and Durba Sengupta
    Effect of temperature on the phase behaviour of fully saturated DAPC lipid bilayer: a comparative molecular dynamics simulation study / Ipsita Basu and Chaitali Mukhopadhyay
    Biophysical characterization of the interaction of O-acylcholines with the major bovine seminal plasma protein, PDC-109 / Rajani S. Damai, Pradip K. Tarafdar, Bhanu Pratap Singh, S. Thirupathi Reddy, and Musti J. Swamy
    Crystal structure of APO and ligand bound Vibrio cholerae ribokinase (Vc-RK): role of monovalent cation induced activation and structural flexibility in sugar phosphorylation / Rakhi Paul, Madhumita Dandopath Patra, and Udayaditya Sen
    Synthetic glycolipids and (p)ppGpp analogs: development of inhibitors for mycobacterial growth, biofi lm and stringent response / Kirtimaan Syal, Krishnagopal Maiti, Kottari Naresh, Dipankar Chatterji, and N. Jayaraman
    Regulations of glycolipid: XI. glycosyltransferase (GSL: GLTs) genes involved in SA-LeX and related GSLs biosynthesis in carcinoma cells by biosimilar apoptotic agents: potential anticancer drugs / Subhash Basu, Rui Ma, Joseph R. Moskal, and Manju Basu
    N-acetylglucosaminyl 1-phosphate transferase: an excellent target for developing new generation breast cancer therapeutic / Aditi Banerjee, Juan A. Martinez, Maria O. Longas, Zhenbo Zhang, Jesus Santiago, Krishna Baksi, and Dipak K. Banerjee
    Involvement of vascular endothelial growth factor in serotonin 1A receptor-mediated neuroproliferation in neonatal mouse hippocampus / S. Samaddar, B. Ranasinghe, S.J. Tantry, P.R. Debata, and P. Banerjee
    Structural heterogeneity of glycoform of Alpha-1 acid glycoprotein in alcoholic cirrhosis patients / Goutam Mandal, Hirokazu Yagi, Koichi Kato, and Bishnu Pada Chatterjee.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Eastham, R. D.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RB40 .B615
    5
  • Print
    David E. Metzler ; in association with Carol M. Metzler ; designed and illustrated by David J. Sauke.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QH345 .M39
    2
  • Digital
    J. Robin Harris, Viktor I. Korolchuk, editors.
    Summary: In recent years, volumes of the long-established Springer Subcellular Biochemistry series have shown great diversity of content, thus interesting biochemical topics, enthusiastically edited in all cases, have been readily accommodated. This new volume of the Subcellular Biochemistry series, Biochemistry and Cell Biology of Ageing: Part II, offers a broad overview of many different Clinical Science aspects of Ageing. The 17 chapters included in the book, contributed by knowledgeable authors, review many important topics at an advanced level. Whilst it has proved impossible to include all relevant topics, there is much present that will be of value to the reader. The book contains chapters on: "Poor Early Growth and Age-associated Disease; The Immune System and its Dysregulation with Ageing; Pulmonary Diseases and Ageing; Neurodegenerative Diseases and Ageing; Ageing and Cognition; Ageing and Osteoarthritis; Down Syndrome, Ageing and Epigenetics; The Vestibular System and Ageing; Signal Transduction, Ageing and Disease; Skin Changes During Ageing; Connective Tissue and Age-related Diseases ; Potential Cellular and Biochemical Mechanisms of Exercise and Physical Activity on the Ageing Process; Health Benefits of Anti-ageing Drugs; Visual Defects and Ageing; Hutchinson-Gilford Progeria Syndrome: Challenges at Bench and Bedside; Osteoporosis and the Ageing Skeleton; Neurovascular Ageing and Age-related Diseases" The book is primarily directed to advanced biomedical science and medical students, postgraduates, researchers, clinicians and academics in the field of Ageing. An earlier companion volume of the Subcellular Biochemistry series - Biochemistry and Cell Biology of Ageing: Part I (Volume 90) - covering the Biomedical Science aspects of ageing, has also been recently published.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Emine E. Abali, Roy Carman, Douglas B. Spicer.
    Summary: "This book can serve as a companion text for many standard textbooks of biochemistry, especially in stand-alone biochemistry or foundational science lecture-based courses, it is particularly suited as a primary resource in more integrated curricula. It can also serve as an excellent review of relevant biochemistry topics for more advanced students"-- Provided by publisher. "Biochemistry Behind the Symptoms takes a problem-based approach to understanding and applying biochemistry for superior clinical outcomes. Organized around the common symptoms encountered by clinicians, this engaging text clarifies the connections between foundational science and clinical manifestations to help users form confident diagnoses throughout their clerkship and beyond. Each chapter explores the biochemical concepts behind underlying causes and demonstrates their ties to presenting symptoms through 5 realistic patient cases. Accompanying questions encourage discussion and guide users in building accurate differential diagnoses. Ideal for peer-to-peer learning environments or independent study, this practical approach strengthens users' application of fundamental knowledge and ensures the long-term retention essential to clinical success. 50 Patient Cases emphasize the biochemical concepts behind common patient symptoms through problem-based learning. Clinical Impression sections encourage critical thinking and train students step by step in building effective differential diagnoses. Basic Science Correlations in each Patient Case clarify the biochemical concepts underlying diagnosis with an engaging question-and-answer format. High-Yield Concepts summarized after each Patient Case reinforce students' comprehension of essential chapter concepts. Digital Animations immerse students in biochemical processes to enrich their understanding and diagnostic confidence. "-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Shortness of Breath
    Jaundice
    Diarrhea
    Bruising
    Fatigue
    Failure to Thrive
    Developmental Delays in Infancy and Early Childhood
    Gout
    Altered Mental Status
    Obesity.
  • Digital
    Fernando Alemanno, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses and explains the importance of biochemistry knowledge in understanding what happens to patients during anesthesia and/or to those being in intensive care. It covers a wide range of topics, such as Cerebral Edema, Shock, Blood-Brain Barrier, The Pulmonary surfactant, The Acid-Base equilibrium, Local anaesthetics, Perineural adjuvants, Normobaric Oxygen Therapy, Theories of Narcosis. Hyperventilation effects and consequences are also presented. For instance, by hyperventilating a patient with a PaCO2 significantly below 25 mmHg, we risk blocking pyruvic acid carboxylation and transforming it into oxalacetic acid, which in turn knocks out the Krebs cycle, possibly leading to a complication, i.e. to metabolic acidosis and not to compensation for respiratory alkalosis. It is also worth remembering that vitamins are actually molecules of pretty considerable potency and should not be simply intended as integrators. If we inject a patient under intensive care with vitamin C, this not only plays a capillary-protective role but facilitates the conversion of dopamine to noradrenaline. As far as vitamin B6 goes, not only is it the most natural of antiemetics but the coenzyme responsible for transforming glutamate as one of the most powerful excitatory mediators into GABA, one of the fiercest inhibitors. Anesthesiological and intensive care practice require a detailed biochemistry knowledge to avoid onset of complications and/or to deal with unexpected events promptly and appropriately. The book is intended for anesthesiologists, intensivists, anesthesia teachers, anesthesia trainees and residents.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Chapter 1 Enzymes and Coenzymes
    Chapter 2 Anaerobic Glycolysis or Embden-Meyerhof Pathway
    Chapter 3 The Tricarboxylic Acids Cycle or Krebs Cycle
    Chapter 4 The Collateral Glutamate
    GABA Cycle
    Chapter 5 The Pentose Cycle or Direct Oxidative Pathway (DOP) (The Sleep Pathway)
    Chapter 6 Neurotransmitters
    Chapter 7 The Blood-Brain Barrier (BBB)
    Chapter 8 Shock
    Chapter 9 Cerebral Edema
    Chapter 10 The Pulmonary Surfactant
    Chapter 11 When the Mind Does Not Work As It Should
    Chapter 12 Thiamine (Vitamin B1)
    Chapter 13 Normobaric Oxygen Therapy (NBO)
    Chapter 14 The Acid
    Base equilibrium
    Chapter 15 Theories of Narcosis
    Chapter 16 Local Anaesthetics
    Chapter 17 Perineural Adjuvants
    Chapter 18 The Grand Design
    Chapter 19 Epilogue and Farewell.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tsugikazu Komoda, Toshiyuki Matsunaga.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Ricardo Jorge Gelpi, Alberto Boveris, Juan José Poderoso, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Section 1 GENERAL ASPECTS: 1 The concept of oxidative stress after 30 years
    2 Evolution of atmospheric oxygen and oxygen metabolism
    3 Mitochondria as origin of cellular oxidative stress
    4 Biochemistry and physiology of mtNOS
    5 Biochemistry of nitrogen reactive species
    6 Biochemistry of nitro fatty acids
    7 Mammalian adaptation to life at high altitude
    8 Metabolic syndrome and oxidative stress in rat pancreas
    9 Progesterone prevents mitochondrial dysfunction and oxidative stress in the spinal cord of wobbler mice
    10 Mitochondrial transfer by intercellular nanotubes
    Section 2 CARDIOVASCULAR: 11 Role of Oxidative Stress in Subcellular Defects in Ischemic Heart Disease
    12 Regulation of protein nitrosylation by Trx1
    13 Inhibition of adenylyl cyclase type 5 increases longevity and healthful aging through oxidative stress protection
    14 Antioxidant supplementation in elderly cardiovascular patients
    15 Rupture of redox homeostasis in a model of pulmonary artery
    16 Mitochondrial reactive oxygen species triggered by the cardiac renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system
    17 Mitochondrial complex I inactivation and increased autooxidation after ischemia-reperfusion in the stunned heart
    18 Oxidized LDL and atherogenesis
    19 Reactive oxygen species and cyclooxygenase products in the regulation of blood flow in small vessels
    20 Thioredoxin-1 attenuates postischemic ventricular and mitochondrial dysfunctions
    21 Nitro-arachidonic acid reduces the damaged area in rat myocardial infarction
    22 Inhaled particulate matter and myocardial dysfunction
    Section 3 NEURODEGENERATION AND NEURONAL FUNCTION: 23 Effect of lipoic acid in the triple transgenic mouse model of Alzhaimer's disease
    24 Neurovascular coupling mediated by NO in the hippocampus
    25 Protection from neurodegeneration: signaling and mitocondrial regulation
    26 Oxidative stress and neurodegeneration
    27 Oxidative stress, metabolic syndrome and Alzheimerþs disease
    28 Systemic oxidative stress in patients with neurodegenerative diseases
    Section 4 CANCER: 29 Oxygen metabolism and oxidative stress in cancer cells
    30 Mitochondrial biogenesis is required for survival and propagation of cancer cells
    31 Tumor immunology & immunotherapy in patients
    32 Oncogene-induced Nrf2 repression as adaptive response of cancer cells to acquire a pro-oxidant state favoring cell survival and in vivo tumor growth
    33 Mitochondrial dynamics regulate oxidative metabolism in Leydig tumor cells
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Mary Ann Asson-Batres, Cécile Rochette-Egly, editors.
    Summary: A role for vitamin A in living organisms has been known throughout human history. In the last 100 years, the biochemical nature of vitamin A and its active derivative, retinoic acid, its physiological impact on growth processes and the essential details of its mechanism of action have been revealed by investigations carried out by researchers using vertebrate and more recently invertebrate models to study a multiplicity of processes and conditions, encompassing embryogenesis, postnatal development to old age. A wealth of intercellular interactions, intracellular signaling systems and molecular mechanisms have been described and the overall conclusion is that retinoic acid is essential for life. This book series, with chapters authored by experts in every aspect of this complex field, unifies the knowledge base and mechanisms currently known in detailed, engaging, well-illustrated, focused chapters that synthesize information for each specific area. In view of the recent explosion in this field, it is timely to publish a contemporary, comprehensive, book series recapitulating the most exciting developments in the field and covering fundamental research in molecular mechanisms of vitamin A action, its role in physiology, development and continued well-being and the potential of vitamin A derivatives and synthetic mimetics to serve as therapeutic treatments for cancers and other debilitating human diseases. VOLUME I: Here, we present the first volume of a multi-volume series on Retinoic Acid Signaling that will cover all aspects of this broad and diverse field. One aim of Volume I is to present a compilation of topics related to the biochemistry of nuclear retinoic acid receptors, from their architecture when bound to DNA and associated with their coregulators to their ability to regulate target gene transcription. A second aim is to provide insight into recent advances that have been made in identifying novel targets and non-genomic effects of retinoic acid. Volume I is divided into ten chapters contributed by prominent experts in their respective fields. Each chapter starts with the history of the area of research. Then, the key findings that contributed to development of the field are described, followed by a detailed look at key findings and progress that are being made in current, ongoing research. Each chapter is concluded with a discussion of the relevance of the research and a perspective on missing pieces and lingering gaps that the author recommends will be important in defining future directions in vitamin A research.

    Contents:
    Forward
    History of Retinoic Acid Receptors
    Architecture of DNA Bound RAR Heterodimers
    Retinoic Acid Receptors: Structural Basis for Coregulator Interaction and Exchange
    Evolution of Retinoic Acid Receptors and Retinoic Acid Signaling
    RXRs: Collegial Partners
    Nuclear and Extra-Nuclear Effects of Retinoic Acid Receptors: How they are interconnected- The Roles of Retinoic Acid and Retinoic Acid Receptors in Inducing Epigenetic Changes
    RARs and micro RNAs
    Integrative genomics to dissect retinoids functions
    Complexity of the RAR{u2010}Mediated Transcriptional Regulatory Programs
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mary Ann Asson-Batres, Cécile Rochette-Egly, editors.
    Summary: This book covers subjects that have major impacts on society, such as the mechanism of maternal-fetal transfer of vitamin A, and the effects of alcohol on retinoic acid signaling and mammalian embryonic development. There has been an awareness of the importance of consuming vitamins throughout human history, but empirical studies of their physiological role and mode of action only began about 150 years ago. Since then, the biochemical nature of vitamin A and its active derivative, retinoic acid, have been identified and researchers around the globe have investigated retinoic acid's physiological function in growth processes and in maintaining life Written by leading experts, this book discusses the latest findings and advances in retinoic acid research. It addresses topics such as the role of retinoic acid signaling in a multitude of processes, including limb, heart and respiratory system development, as well as its role in maintaining postnatal organ systems. This book is a valuable resource for scientists involved in vitamin A/retinoic acid research and readers interested in developmental biology.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1 How Dietary Deficiency Studies Have Illuminated the Many Roles of Vitamin A During Development and Postnatal Life
    Introduction
    History
    In Pursuit of an Unknown Factor
    First Impressions of Effects on Postnatal Animals
    Effects of Vitamin A on the Postnatal Nervous System
    Effects of Vitamin A on Reproduction and Embryonic Development
    Development of the Field
    Search for a Mechanism of Action
    Current State of the Field
    Post 1987
    Vitamin A Deficiency in Postnatal Animals
    Custom Diets Maternal VA Status and Fetal Retinoid Concentrations
    Placental VA Levels Versus Fetal Retinoid Concentrations
    Development of the Field
    Maternal-Fetal Transfer of VA: Is There a Role for the RBP-Retinol Complex?
    Maternal-Fetal Transfer of VA: The Role for Other Placental Proteins
    Maternal-Fetal Transfer of Other Retinoids
    Maternal-Fetal Transfer of VA-Unanswered Questions
    Current State of the Field
    The Retinol-RBP Pathway Is the Primary Contributor to Embryonic Development
    Mechanisms of Maternal-Fetal Transfer of VA-Containing Lipoprotein Other NGS-Based Technologies to Detect Regions Containing RAR Binding Sites
    Integrative Approaches
    Relevance
    Future Directions
    References
    4 RA Signaling in Limb Development and Regeneration in Different Species
    Introduction
    History
    Development of the Field
    Zebrafish Fin Development
    Amphibian Limb Development
    Amphibian Limb Regeneration
    Chick Limb Development
    Mouse Limb Development
    Current State of the Field
    Complexities of Limb Formation
    Relevance
    The Future
    References
    5 Retinoic Acid Signaling and Heart Development
    Introduction Vitamin A Deficiency Effects on the Rodent Olfactory System
    The Hippocampus-Synaptic Plasticity
    The Cardiovascular System
    Effects of Vitamin A Deficiency on Other Postnatal Systems
    Relevance
    Future Directions
    How Much Vitamin A Do Animals Need for Optimal Health and Longevity?
    Have All Actions of Vitamin A Been Described?
    References
    2 Maternal-Fetal Transfer of Vitamin A and Its Impact on Mammalian Embryonic Development
    Introduction
    History
    Early Discoveries: VA and Infertility
    Maternal Dietary VA Intake and Fetal Retinoid Concentrations
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mary Ann Asson-Batres, Cecile Rochette-Egly, editors.
    Contents:
    Carotenoids and retinoids: nomenclature, chemistry, and analysis / Earl H. Harrison, Robert W. Curley Jr.
    Functions of intracellular retinoid binding-proteins / Joseph L. Napoli
    Vitamin A transport and cell signaling by the retinol-binding protein receptor stra6 / Noa Noy
    Vitamin A absorption, storage and mobilization / William S. Blaner, Yang Li, Pierre-Jacques Brun, Jason J. Yuen, Seung-Ah Lee [and others]
    Retinoic acid synthesis and degradation / Natalia Y. Kedishvili
    Cellular retinoic acid binding proteins: genomic and non-genomic functions and their regulation / Li-Na Wei
    Non-classical transcriptional activity of retinoic acid / Noa Noy
    Vitamin A as pkc co-factor and regulator of mitochondrial energetics / Ulrich Hammerling
    Vitamin A and vision / John C. Saari.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Simmi Kharb
    Summary: "The book is conceived and written with the hope that it would create interest and enthusiasm among students, particularly because biochemistry has a crucial role in human health and diseases. Most students in medicine and health-related fields will eventually be able to apply biochemical principles to the practice of medicine. The goal of the book is to help you revise the topics covered in a lecture along with suitable interpretation of clinical correlations. This will help you answer the questions as to why you are reading this topic and how you will apply biochemical principles to the art of healing and the relief of human suffering."--Preface
  • Digital
    Guenther Witzany, editor.
    Summary: This is the first book to systemize all levels of communicative behavior of phages. Phages represent the most diverse inhabitants on this planet. Until today they are completely underestimated in their number, skills and competences and still remain the dark matter of biology. Phages have serious effects on global energy and nutrient cycles. Phages actively compete for host. They can distinguish between 'self and 'non-self (complement same, preclude others). They process and evaluate available information and then modify their behaviour accordingly. These diverse competences show us that this capacity to evaluate information is possible owing to communication processes within phages (intra-organismic), between the same, related and different phage species (interorganismic), and between phages and non-phage organisms (transorganismic). This is crucial in coordinating infection strategies (lytic vs. lysogenic) and recombination in phage genomes. In 22 chapters, expert contributors review current research into the varying forms of phage biocommunication and Phagetherapy. Biocommunication of Phages aims to assess the current state of research, to orient further investigations on how phages communicate with each other to coordinate their behavioral patterns, and to inspire further investigation of the role of non-phage viruses (non-lytic, non-prokaryotic) in these highly dynamic interactional networks.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. What Does Communication of Phages Mean?
    Chapter 2. Phage-Phage, Phage-Bacteria, and Phage-Environment Communication
    Chapter 3. Phage communication and the ecological implications on microbial interactions, diversity, and function
    Chapter 4. Phage-Phage Interactions
    Chapter 5. Social interactions among bacteriophages
    Chapter 6. Phage protein interactions in the inhibition mechanism of bacterial cell
    Chapter 7. Are phages parasites or symbionts of bacteria?
    Chapter 8. Microbial communication networks: sketching a methodology to analyze communication involving bacteriophages inside environmental communities
    Chapter 9. Information stored in a phage particle: Lactobacillus delbrueckii bacteriophage LL-H as a case
    Chapter 10. Archaeal viruses and their interactions with CRISPR-Cas systems
    Chapter 11. Filamentous phages affect virulence of the phytopathogen Ralstonia solanacearum
    Chapter 12. Intra-population interactions and the evolution of RNA phages
    Chapter 13. ssRNA phages: life cycle, structure and applications
    Chapter 14. Phages as therapy or "dietary supplements"against multiresistant bacteria?
    Chapter 15. Bacteriophage application and biological safety (or how should I train my dog not to bite me)
    Chapter 16. Phage therapy: an alternative to antibiotics
    Chapter 17. Bacteriophage as a therapeutic agent to combat bacterial infection: A journey from history to application
    Chapter 18. Phagetherapy: Clinical applications
    Critical appraisal of randomized controlled trials
    Chapter 19. Bacteriophage therapies targets multiple diseases caused by protein misfolding
    Chapter 20
    Phage Therapy in Cystic Fibrosis. Challenges and Perspectives
    Chapter 21. Bacteriophage Applications for Food Safety
    Chapter 22. Bacteriophages for environmental applications: Effect of trans-organismic communication on wastewater treatments.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Imad About, editor.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive guide to BiodentineTM, an innovative biocompatible and bioactive material based on pure tricalcium silicate that can permanently replace dentin and can also serve as a temporary enamel substitute. Although BiodentineTM has been widely used across the world for the past decade, this is the first book to be devoted to its properties, interactions with the soft and hard tissues, and its multiple clinical applications. The coverage encompasses applications in primary and permanent teeth, in specialties as diverse as restorative dentistry, endodontics, paediatric dentistry, dental traumatology, and prosthetic dentistry. BiodentineTM application both in vital pulp therapy and endodontic procedures is illustrated and clinical step by step protocols are provided. The book provides a detailed update on BiodentineTM use to preserve the pulp vitality in direct/indirect pulp capping, pulpotomy and irreversible pulpitis treatment. It also details BiodentineTM use for non-vital teeth treatment in indications such as root/furcation perforation repair, apexification as well as in regenerative endodontic procedures.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1) Biodentine Microstructure and Composition
    Chapter 2) Biodentine Physico-chemical Properties: From Interactions with Dental Tissues to Aging
    Chapter 3) Biocompatibility and Bioactive Properties of Biodentine
    Chapter 4) Biodentine in Inflammation and Pain Control
    Chapter 5) Biodentine Clinical Applications in Vital Pulp Therapy in Permanent Teeth
    Chapter 6) Biodentine: Applications in Pulpotomy of Deciduous Teeth
    Chapter 7) Biodentine Applications in Traumatology and Fractures
    Chapter 8) Biodentine Applications in Irreversible Pulpitis Management in Children and Adults
    Chapter 9) Calcium Silicate-based Cement (Biodentine TM) as a Bioactive Material for the Long-Term Preservation of Pulp Vitality in Restorative Dentistry and Prosthodontics
    Chapter 10) Biodentine Applications in Furcation Perforation and Root Resorption
    Chapter 11) Clinical Applications of Biodentine in Regenerative Endodontics/Revitalization.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital/Print
    editors, Paul G. Yock, Stefanos Zenios, Joshua Makower, Todd J. Brinton, Uday N. Kumar, F.T. Jay Watkins ; principal writer, Lyn Denend ; specialy editor, Thomas M. Krummel ; web editor, Christina Kurihara.
    Summary: "This step-by-step guide to medical technology innovation, now in full color, has been rewritten to reflect recent trends of industry globalization and value-conscious healthcare. Written by a team of medical, engineering, and business experts, the authors provide a comprehensive resource that leads students, researchers, and entrepreneurs through a proven process for the identification, invention, and implementation of new solutions. Case studies on innovative products from around the world, successes and failures, practical advice, and end-of-chapter 'Getting Started' sections encourage readers to learn from real projects and apply important lessons to their own work. A wealth of additional material supports the book, including a collection of nearly 100 videos created for the second edition, active links to external websites, supplementary appendices, and timely updates on the companion website at ebiodesign.org. Readers can access this material quickly, easily, and at the most relevant point in the text from within the ebook"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: Preface; Focus on value; Global perspectives; Process insights; Part I. Identify: Stage
    1. Needs Finding: 1.1 Strategic focus; 1.2 Needs exploration; 1.3 Need statement development; Case study; Stage
    2. Needs Screening: 2.1 Disease state fundamentals; 2.2 Existing solutions; 2.3 Stakeholder analysis; 2.4 Market analysis; 2.5 Needs selection; Case study; Part II. Invent: Stage
    3. Concept Generation: 3.1 Ideation; 3.2 Initial concept selection; Case study; Stage
    4. Concept Screening: 4.1 Intellectual property basics; 4.2 Regulatory basics; 4.3 Reimbursement basics; 4.4 Business models; 4.5 Concept exploration and testing; 4.6 Final concept selection; Case study; Part III. Implement: Stage
    5. Strategy Development: 5.1 IP strategy; 5.2 R & D strategy; 5.3 Clinical strategy; 5.4 Regulatory strategy; 5.5 Quality management; 5.6 Reimbursement strategy; 5.7 Marketing and stakeholder strategy; 5.8 Sales and distribution strategy; 5.9 Competitive advantage and business strategy; Case study; Stage
    6. Business Planning: 6.1 Operating plan and financial model; 6.2 Strategy integration and communication; 6.3 Funding approaches; 6.4 Alternate pathways; Case study; About the author team; Image credits; Glossary; Index.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2015
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital
    Armen B. Avagyan, Bhaskar Singh.
    Summary: Air pollution policy is closely connected with climate change, public health, energy, transport, trade, and agriculture, and generally speaking, the Earth has been pushed to the brink and the damage is becoming increasingly obvious. The transport sector remains a foremost source of air pollutants - a fact that has stimulated the production of biofuels. This book focuses on the biodiesel industry, and proposes a modification of the entire manufacturing chain that would pave the way for further improvements. Oil derived from oilseed plantations/crops is the most commonly used feedstock for the production of biodiesel. At the same time, the UK's Royal Academy of Engineering and 178 scientists in the Netherlands have determined that some biofuels, such as diesel produced from food crops, have led to more emissions than those produced by fossil fuels. Accordingly, this book re-evaluates the full cycle of biodiesel production in order to help find optimal solutions. It confirms that the production and use of fertilizers for the cultivation of crop feedstocks generate considerably more GHG emissions compared to the mitigation achieved by using biodiesel. To address this fertilization challenge, projecting future biofuel development requires a scenario in which producers shift to an organic agriculture approach that includes the use of microalgae. Among advanced biofuels, algae's advantages as a feedstock include the highest conversion of solar energy, and the ability to absorb CO2 and pollutants; as such, it is the better choice for future fuels. With regard to the question of why algae's benefits have not been capitalized on for biofuel production, our analyses indicate that the sole main barrier to realizing algae's biofuel potential is ineffective international and governmental policies, which create difficulties in reconciling the goals of economic development and environmental protection.

    Contents:
    Introduction. Links to International Policy and Markets.
    Biodiesel from Plant Oil and Waste Cooking Oil.
    Biodiesel from Algae.
    Barriers in the Biofuel-Producing Chain and Revision of Environmental Impacts.
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Münir Öztürk, Volkan Altay, Recep Efe, editors.
    Summary: Of the world's seven continents, Asia is the largest. Its physical landscapes, political units, and ethnic groups are both wide-ranging and many. Southwest, South and Middle Asia are highly populated regions which, as a whole, cover an extremely large area of varied geography. In total, this domain is unique in its plant diversity and large vegetation zones with different communities and biomes. It is rich in endemics, with specific and intraspecific diversity of fruit trees and medicinal plants, including a number of rare, high value, species. At the same time, much of the land in the region is too dry or too rugged, with many geographical extremes. Overgrazing, oil and mineral extraction, and poaching are the major threats in the area. This two-volume project focuses on the dynamic biodiversity of the region with in-depth analysis on phytosociology, plants, animals and agroecology. There are also chapters that explore new applications as well as approaches to overcome problems associated with climate change. Much of the research and analysis are presented here for the first time. We believe this work is a valuable resource for professionals and researchers working in the fields of plant diversity and vegetation, animal diversity and animal populations, and geo-diversity and sustainable land use, among others. The first volume guides our readers to West Asia and the Caucasus region, while volume two focuses on issues unique to South and Middle Asia.

    Contents:
    Biodiversity and Environmental Conservation in Palestine
    Lichens of the Negev Desert (Israel) - Diversity, distribution, and of the relationship with microclimate
    Lichens: Characteristics, importance, uses, distribution in Turkey
    Endangered swamp forests in Turkey - An ecological inventory, prospects and challenges
    Forest fires and sustainability in Mediterranean ecosystems
    Turkey's Wild Orchids
    Agrodiversity in Turkey: Case study on Rice
    Pepper Agrodiversity in West Asia
    Promising small molecules against cancer from Ganoderma genus
    The Vertebrate Biodiversity of Turkey
    Medicinal Plants of Northeast Anatolia
    Main Problems of the Sustainable Development of the South Caucasus and Processes of Transformation of Landscapes (Ecosystems) Biodiversity
    Forest cover for the safety of biosphere and environment
    Agrodiversity and Sustainable Development
    Plant Diversity and General Vegetation of Georgia
    Faunal Diversity in Georgia- General Perspective
    An Overview of the Plant Diversity of Azerbaijan
    Agrobiodiversity of Azerbaijan
    Faunal diversity of Azerbaijan
    Genus Crataegus (Rosaceae) in the flora of Nakhchivan Autonomous Republic of Azerbaijan
    Herbals used in Western Iran as food and for health treatments
    Fish Fauna in the Amur Water System of the Jewish Autonomous Region in Russia
    Paleogeography of Caspian Sea, Water Level Fluctuations and Consequences on the Environment and Civilization.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kishan Gopal Ramawat, editor.
    Summary: Plant classifications are based on morphological characters and it is difficult, particularly in small plants and grasses, to identify these below generic level on the basis of these characters using a dissecting microscope. Plant species have intra- and inter-specific variation in secondary metabolites which can be utilized as marker compounds for identification and classification of plants. Secondary metabolites are produced as a result of primary metabolism and the production of these compounds not only involves several genes but also it is an energy dependent process. Hence these products cannot be considered as insignificant for the plant and the environment. Modern tools of molecular biology and secondary metabolites present in them can definitively decide about classification of plants. Absence of correct identification of plant is associated to many problems of resource utilization. Due to wide availability of these tools, interest has revived in systematics and correct classification of plants based on these parameters for their sustainable utilization and resource management. The purpose of this book is to assess the potential of phytochemical and molecular tools in the systematic and classification of plants. The topics covered include species concept, barcoding and phylogenetic analysis, chemotaxonomy use of polyketides, carotenes, cuticular wax, volatile oils, biodiversity of corals, metazoans, Ruta and Echinocereus. It provides comprehensive and broad subject-based reviews, useful for students, teachers, researchers, and all others interested in the field. The field has been kept wide and general to accommodate the wide-ranging topics. This book will be useful to agriculturists, chemists, botanists, industrialists, and those involved in planning of crop plants.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    Part I: Biodiversity
    2. Generation of Data on Reproductive Ecology is Important for Effective Conservation of Our Plant Diversity
    3. Molecular Approaches to Explore Coastal Benthic Metazoan Diversity
    Success and Constraints
    4. Soft Corals Biodiversity in the Egyptian Red Sea
    5. Assessment of Grasslands in Indian Desert
    a Holistic Approach
    Part II: Chemotaxonomic Markers
    6. Chemotaxonomy Significance of Alkaloids in Plants
    7. Iridoids as Chemotaxonomic Marker
    8. Chemosystematic Significance of Flavonoids
    9. Isoquinoline Alkaloids as Chemotaxonomic Markers
    10. Saponin Diversity in Plants
    11. Chemotaxonomy and Chemodiversity of Fungal Polyketides
    12. Chemotaxonomic Profiling for High-Value Caretonoids in Microalgae
    13. Fungi
    Part III: Diversity and Phylogeny
    14. Plant Barcoding and Phylogenetic Analysis: Advances, Challenges and Future Trends
    15. Molecular Techniques to Assess Plant Diversity
    16. Diversity of the Genus Ocimum
    17. Phylogeny in Echinocereus (Cactaceae): Taxonomic Implications
    18. Genetic Variation in Brassica and Allied Genera
    Part IV: Case Studies in Chemotaxonomy
    19. Chemotaxonomic Survey on the Genus Sedum L. (Crassulaceae) Based on Distribution and Variability of the Epicuticular Wax Constituents
    20. Chemotaxonomic Study of Volatile Oils from Rhizomes of Zingiber species (Zingigeraceae)
    21. Chemical Variability in Essential Oils from Ruta Species and its Taxonomic and Ecological Significance
    22. Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Brian J. Huntley, Vladimir Russo, Fernanda Lages, Nuno Ferrand, editors.
    Summary: This open access multi-authored book presents a 'state of the science' synthesis of knowledge on the biodiversity of Angola, based on sources in peer-reviewed journals, in books and where appropriate, unpublished official reports. The book identifies Angola as one of the most biologically diverse countries in Africa, but notes that its fauna, flora, habitats and the processes that drive the dynamics of its ecosystems are still very poorly researched and documented. This 'state of the science' synthesis is for the use of all students of Angola's biodiversity, and for those responsible for the planning, development and sustainable management of the country's living resources. The volume brings together the results of expeditions and research undertaken in Angola since the late eighteenth century, with emphasis on work conducted in the four decades since Angola's independence in 1975. The individual chapters have been written by leaders in their fields, and reviewed by peers familiar with the region.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Introduction: Setting The Scene
    Chapter 1. Introduction: Towards a Modern Synthesis
    Chapter 2. Angola in Outline: Physiography, Climate and Patterns of Biodiversity
    Chapter 3. Marine Biodiversity of Angola: Biogeography and Conservation
    Chapter 4. Biodiversity in Angola through Time: A Paleontological Perspective
    Part 2. Flora, Vegetation and Landscape change
    Chapter 5. The Flora of Angola: Collectors, Richness and Endemism
    Chapter 6. Vegetation Survey, Classification and Mapping in Angola
    Chapter 7. Suffrutex Dominated Ecosystems in Angola
    Chapter 8. Landscape Changes in Angola
    Part 3. INVERTEBRATE DIVERSITY: ENVIRONMENTAL INDICATORS
    Chapter 9. The Dragonflies and Damselflies of Angola: An Updated Synthesis
    Chapter 10. The Butterflies and Skippers of Angola
    Part 4. VERTEBRATES: DISTRIBUTION AND DIVERSITY
    Chapter 11. The Freshwater Fishes of Angola
    Chapter 12. The Amphibians of Angola: Early Studies and the Current State of Knowledge
    Chapter 13. The Reptiles of Angola: History, Diversity, Endemism and Hotspots
    Chapter 14. The Avifauna of Angola: Richness, Endemism and Rarity
    Chapter 15. The Mammals of Angola
    Chapter 16
    The Cetaceans of Angola
    Chapter 17. The Giant Sable Antelope: Angola?s National Icon
    Part 5. RESEARCH AND CONSERVATION OPPORTUNITIES
    Chapter 18. Biodiversity Conservation: History, Protected Areas and Hotspots
    Chapter 19. Museum and Herbarium Collections for Biodiversity Research in Angola
    Chapter 20. Biodiversity Research and Conservation Opportunities.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ghulam Hassan Dar, Anzar A. Khuroo, editors.
    Summary: The Himalaya, a global biodiversity hotspot, sustains about one-fifth of the humankind. Nestled within the north-western mountain ranges of the Himalaya, the Jammu and Kashmir (J&K) State harbours more than half of the biodiversity found in the Indian Himalaya. The wide expanse of State, spread across the subtropical Jammu, through the temperate Kashmir valley, to the cold arid Ladakh, is typical representative of the extensive elevational and topographical diversity encountered in the entire Himalaya. This book, the most comprehensive and updated synthesis ever made available on biodiversity of the J&K State, is a valuable addition to the biodiversity literature with global and regional relevance. The book, arranged into 7 parts, comprises of 42 chapters contributed by 87 researchers, each of whom is an expert in his/her own field of research. The precious baseline data contained in the book would form the foundation for assessing current status of knowledge about the bioresources, identify the knowledge gaps, and help prioritization of conservation strategies to steer the sustainable use of biodiversity in this Himalayan region. Given the breadth of topics covered under the banner of biodiversity in this book, it can surely serve as a model for documentation of biodiversity in other regions of the world. The book will be of immense value to all those who, directly or indirectly, have to deal with biodiversity, including students, teachers, researchers, naturalists, environmentalists, resource managers, planners, government agencies, NGOs and the general public at large. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    An introduction to biodiversity of the Himalaya : Jammu and Kashmir State
    Biodiversity : a global perspective
    Floristic diversity of India : an overview
    Faunal diversity of India
    Floristic diversity of the Indian Himalaya
    Jammu and Kashmir State : an overview
    Vegetation of Jammu and Kashmir State : a general account
    Forest ecosystems of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Aquatic ecosystems of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Genetic diversity in rosaceous fruits of Jammu and Kashmir State : apple, apricot, and almond
    Varietal diversity in cereal crops of the Jammu and Kashmir State
    Genetic diversity in Lymnaea acuminata from Jammu region, Jammu and Kashmir State
    Algal diversity in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Fungal diversity in the Kashmir Himalaya
    Diversity of lichens in Jammu and Kashmir State
    An updated checklist of bryophytes in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Pteridophytic flora of Jammu and Kashmir State : a new sketch
    Diversity of gymnosperms in Jammu and Kashmir State
    An updated taxonomic checklist of angiosperms in Jammu and Kashmir State
    An updated checklist of aquatic macrophytes in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Diversity in medicinal and aromatic flora of the Kashmir Himalaya
    An annotated inventory of arboreal flora in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Asteraceae in Jammu and Kashmir Himalaya : a floristic account
    Leguminosae in Jammu and Kashmir State : a systematic checklist
    Poisonous plants of the Kashmir Himalaya : a checklist
    Flora of Ladakh : an annotated inventory of flowering plants
    Taxonomic inventory of ants (Hymenoptera: Formicidae) in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Biodiversity of butterflies (Lepidoptera: Rhopalocera) of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Select brachycera families (Diptera) in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Diversity of insects infesting medicinal and aromatic plants in the Kashmir Valley
    Moth (Lepidoptera) fauna of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Bark beetle fauna (Coleoptera: Curculionidae) of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Diversity of fishes in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Annotated list of amphibians and reptiles of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Avifaunal diversity in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Wild mammalian diversity in Jammu and Kashmir State
    Threatened flora of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Threatened fauna of Jammu and Kashmir State
    Urbanization and its impact on biodiversity in the Kashmir Himalaya
    Impact of climate change on vegetation distribution in the Kashmir Himalaya
    Biodiversity conservation in Jammu and Kashmir State : current status and future challenges
    Biodiversity conservation in Jammu and Kashmir State : legal framework and concerns.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marianne Darbi.
    Summary: We are witnessing an alarming, global biodiversity crisis with an ongoing loss of species and their habitats. In response, a number of tools and approaches - including some that are contested - are being explored and promoted. Biodiversity offsets are one such approach, and deserve critical examination since the debate surrounding them has often been oversimplified and lacking practical evidence. As such, this study presents a refined typology including seven types of biodiversity offsets and taking into account different contexts, governance arrangements and drivers. It draws on a detailed analysis of theoretical concepts to explain the voluntary implementation of biodiversity offsets using an internet-based (netnographic) research approach. Furthermore it builds on a broad global explorative base of 72 practical examples and presents in-depth case studies for each type. The results reveal a number of global tendencies that allow recommendations to be made for different locations, contexts and stakeholders. They also encourage the expansion of this research field to respond to the pressing needs of policy and practice.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Abstract
    Keywords
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    1: Biodiversity Offsets and No Net Loss: Introduction, Problem Statement, and Research Questions
    1.1 Introduction to the Context for Biodiversity Offsets: From Biodiversity Loss to No Net Loss of Biodiversity
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    1.2 Introduction to the Concept of Biodiversity Offsets
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    1.3 Problems of Biodiversity Offsets, Research Gaps, and Problem Statement 2.2.2 Theoretical Concepts of Empirically Grounded Typification: The Attribute Space After Lazarsfeld and Barton
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    2.3 Methods for Empirical Analysis and Sampling
    2.3.1 Methods and Materials of Data Collection
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    2.3.2 Methods for Sampling as Basis for Choice of Case Studies
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    References
    3: Applying the Concept of Voluntariness to Explain Behavior Towards Environmental Conservation What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    1.4 Aim and Research Design
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    References
    2: Developing a Typology of Biodiversity Offsets Using an Internet and Expert Based Approach: Methods and Materials
    2.1 General Methodology of an Internet-Based Research
    Why Was This Research Approach Chosen for the Present Study?
    2.1.1 Introduction to Web 2.0 and the Role of Cyberscience for Academic Research
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    2.1.2 The Netnographic Approach What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    2.1.3 Research Process of Internet-Based (Web 1.0 and Web 2.0) Research: The RUDE Procedure
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    2.1.4 Variety and Choice of Tools for Research in a Web 2.0 Environment
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    2.2 Typification and Categorization as a Scientific Method
    2.2.1 Definition, Terminology, and Scope: Ideal Versus Empirical Types
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study? Why Is It Necessary to Establish a Theoretically Grounded Description of Voluntariness for the Present Study?
    3.1 Defining and Understanding the Notion of Voluntariness and Its Prerequisites: Definition, Terminology, and Scope
    3.1.1 Descriptive Approach
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    3.1.2 Normative Approach
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    3.2 General Theoretical Concepts to Analyze or Explain Voluntariness
    3.2.1 The Egoism-Altruism Paradigm
    What Are the Implications for the Present Study?
    3.2.2 Economic Theories
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sharad P. Paul.
    Summary: This book is a detailed review of the 'state-of-the art' of skin lines in cutaneous surgery. Surgical literature is inundated with references to Langer's Lines, Cleavage Lines, Wrinkle Lines and Relaxed Skin Tension Lines, but this title discusses the difference between these and incisional and excisional lines biomechanically, introducing the concept of biodynamic excisional skin tension (BEST) Lines. The problem with current concepts of skin tension lines is that they seem to differ in different textbooks, and lines for surgical egress, which work in conditions of low tension, are not necessarily suitable for skin cancer surgery. Biodynamic Excisional Skin Tension Lines for Cutaneous Surgery describes skin biomechanics, the properties of collagen and elastin, lower limb skin vascularity and also maps BEST lines across the body, making it a great reference guide for plastic or dermatologic surgery worldwide. As such, it will be beneficial for anyone performing cutaneous surgery and skin cancer excisions in clinical practice, or for those planning further research into skin biomechanics to read this volume.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Iris Lewandowski, editor ; in collaboration with Nicole Gaudet [and 4 more].
    Summary: This book is open access under a CC BY 4.0 license. This book defines the new field of "Bioeconomy" as the sustainable and innovative use of biomass and biological knowledge to provide food, feed, industrial products, bioenergy and ecological services. The chapters highlight the importance of bioeconomy-related concepts in public, scientific, and political discourse. Using an interdisciplinary approach, the authors outline the dimensions of the bioeconomy as a means of achieving sustainability. The authors are ideally situated to elaborate on the diverse aspects of the bioeconomy. They have acquired in-depth experience of interdisciplinary research through the university's focus on "Bioeconomy", its contribution to the Bioeconomy Research Program of the federal state of Baden-Württemberg, and its participation in the German Bioeconomy Council. With the number of bioeconomy-related projects at European universities rising, this book will provide graduate students and researchers with background information on the bioeconomy. It will familiarize scientific readers with bioeconomy-related terms and give scientific background for economists, agronomists and natural scientists alike.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    Part I: Bioeconomy Concepts and Research Methods
    Chapter 2: Context
    Chapter 3: Bioeconomy concepts
    Chapter 4: Core principles
    Chapter 4: Inter- and Transdisciplinarity in the Bioeconomy
    Part II: Knowledge Base for Biobased Value Chains
    Chapter 5:Biobased Resources and Value Chains
    Chapter 6: Primary Production
    Chapter 7: Processing of Biobased Resources
    Chapter 8: Markets, Sustainability management and Entrepreneurship.- Part III: Transition to a Sustainable Bioeconomy
    Chapter9: Modelling and Tools Supporting the Transition to a Bioeconomy
    Chapter 10: Environmental Economics, the Bioeconomy and the Role of Government
    Chapter 11: Economic Growth, Development, and Innovation? The Transformation towards a Knowledge-based Bioeconomy
    Chapter 12: The Bioeconomist.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Joachim Pietzsch, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an interdisciplinary and comprehensible introduction to bioeconomy. It thus offers basic knowledge for understanding a transformation process that will shape the 21st century and requires the integration of many, so far unrelated disciplines and industries. We are talking about the gradual and necessary transition from the age of fossil fuels, which began around 200 years ago, to a global economy based on renewable raw materials (and renewable energies). The success of this transition is key to coping with the challenge of climate change. This book conceives the realization of bioeconomy as a threefold task - a scientific, an economic and an ecological one. · Where does the biomass come from that we need primarily for feeding the growing world population but also for future energy and material use? How can it be processed in biorefineries and what role does biotechnology play in this regard? · Which aspects of innovation economics need to be considered, which economic aspects of value creation, competitiveness and customer acceptance are important? · What conditions must a bioeconomy fulfil in order to enable a sustainable development of life on earth? May it be regarded as a key to further economic growth or shouldn't it rather orient itself towards the ideal of sufficiency? By dealing with these questions from the not necessarily consistent perspectives of proven experts, this book provides an interdisciplinary overview of a dynamic field of research and practice that raises more questions than answers and thus may nurture the motivation of many more people to seriously engage for the realization of a bioeconomy. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: The origin of biomass
    Chapter 3: Food security and healthy nutrition in the context of the bioeconomy
    Chapter 4: The use of biomass for the production of fuel and chemicals
    Chapter 5: The importance of biotechnology for bioeconomy
    Chapter 6: The bioeconomy from the point of view of the innovation economy
    Chapter 7: Bioeconomy as a circular and integrated system
    Chapter 8: Criteria for the success of the bioeconomy
    Chapter 9: The conditions of a sustainable bioeconomy
    Chapter 10: Bioeconomy
    Key to unlimited economic and consumer growth?
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Angela Hewlett, A. Rekha K. Murthy, editors.
    Summary: This text gathers the weaknesses revealed during recent infections outbreaks and organizes them into a guide for combating the trends in emerging infections as they relate to hospital preparedness. As the first book to exclusively explore infectious emergencies, the text begins by reviewing potential pathogens and the clinical issues that may threaten hospital safety before delving into the best operational guidelines for commanding a staff under extreme circumstances, including incident command, communication, transport, maintenance, and a myriad of other topics that can remain manageable with proper protocol. Written by experts in the field, this text is the only one that offers the most effective clinical responses to a crisis at every level of care, including special population, laboratory techniques, care of the deceased, behavioral support, and medical documentation. The text concludes by focusing on the reality of care by introducing true examples from the field and the lessons gained from these cases. Bioemergency Planning is a vital resource for infectious disease specialists, hospitalists, epidemiologists, internal medicine physicians, nurses, social workers, public health officials, and all medical professionals who need to be prepared to respond to an infection outbreak.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Suresh C. Sikka, Wayne J.G. Hellstrom.
    Summary: Bioenvironmental Issues Affecting Men's Reproductive and Sexual Health is structured into two parts related to men's reproductive and sexual health with eight sections designed to enable a logical flow of such knowledge. The book is focused on the biology of key organs involved in male reproduction and the environmental influences affecting their functions with particular emphasis on clinical aspects. Individual chapters within the book range from basic to translational aspects, but all hold clinical relevance. This is an essential reference for those working and learning in the field of human reproduction, reproductive toxicology and environmental influences on reproductive and sexual health.

    Contents:
    How environmental and air pollution disrupt spermatogenesis and male reproductive health / Jorge Hallak, Mariana M. Veras and Paulo Hilário N. Saldiva
    Environmental issues resulting in hypogonadism in Brazilian men / Carlos T. Da Ros and Túlio M. Graziottin
    Envronmental risk factors related to male reproductive health in Turkish society / Serap Gur and Suresh C. Sikka
    Effect of environmental toxins on spermatogonial stem cells / Kara E. McAbee, Samuel S. Pendergraft, Anthony Atala, Colin Bishop and Hooman Sadri-Ardekani
    Lifestyle stress and its impact on male reproductive health / Angela Pressman, Antonio Hernanadez and Suresh C. Sikka
    The impact of lifestyle factors on male reproduction / Manaf Alom, Kevin Wymer and Landon Trost
    Obesity, Hypogonadism, and male fertility / Joseph A. La Nasa and Jr.
    Lifestyle factors and medical therapy in the management of male fertility / Tolulope O. Bakare nd Jason R. Kovac
    Yoga meditation lifestyle intervention / Rima Dada and Madhuri Tolahunase
    Lifestyle, environment and male reproductive health / Ibraheem Rehman, Gulfam Ahmad and Saad Alshahrani
    Environmental issues in maintaining reproductive health / Michael Lao, Brooke A. Harnisch, and Stanton C. Honig
    Environmental contamination and testicular function / Ralf Henkel
    Reproductive health issues in Latin America / Milton Ghirelli-Filho and Sidney Glina
    Adverse effects of drugs on male reproduction / Mira Aubuchon and Erma Z. Drobnis
    Beneficial or detrimental effects of phosphodiesterase-5 (PDE-5) inhibitors on semen quality and testicular function? / Fotios Dimitriadis, Sotirios Skouros, Atsushi Takenaka and Nikolaos Sofikitis
    Environmental issues resulting in andropause and hypogonadism / Shubhadeep Roychoudhury and Rudrarup Bhattacharjee
    Androgen receptor modulators / Hoang M. Tue Nguyen, Daniel J. Heidenberg and Suresh C. Sikka
    Heavy metal toxicity affecting fertility and reproduction of males / Fouad M. Badr and Ola El-Habit
    Environmental toxicants / Shiv B. Kumar, Rima Dada and Narmada P. Gupta
    Role of environmental toxicants in sperm autophagy, mitophagy, and apoptosis / Chandra Mohan and Suresh C. Sikka
    Impact and environmental factors on the genomics and proteomics landscapes of male infertility / Ahmet Ayaz, Narasimhan Kothandaraman, Ralf Henkel and Suresh C. Sikka
    Role of sperm chromatin structure assay technology in evaluating sperm DNA damage due to environmental influences / Donald P. Evenson
    Standardized semen analysis and quality control management for multicenter male reproductive toxicology clinical trials / Suresh C. Sikka and Ahmet Ayaz
    Components of erection and evaluation as the potential target systems for environmental toxicants / Laith Alzweri and Arthur L. Burnett
    Effects of endocrine-disrupting chemicals on penile tissue development, histoarchiotecture, and erectile physiology / Abdulmaged M. Traish
    Penile fibrogenesis affecting men's reproductive and sexual health / Omer A Raheem, Fady Ghali and Mahadevan R. Rajasekaran
    The epidemiology and pathophysiology of erectile dysfunction and the role of environment / Sarah Collica, Filippo Pederzoli and Trinity Bivalacqua
    Environment, drugs and chemical exposures in the realm of human sexualtiy / Suresh C. Sikka
    Role of risk factors such as smoking, alcohol, and substance abuse on sexual health of Brazilian men / Carlos T. Da Ros and Túlio M. Graziottin
    Effects of electronic cigarettes on men's reproductive sexual health / Bashir M. Rezk, Suresh C. Sikka and Wayne J.G. Hellstrom
    The influences of diet, supplements, and environmental stressors on erectile function / Yuji Hotta and Kazunori Kimura
    Endocrine disruptors in the environment affeceting erectile function / Run Wang and Chris Kannady
    Environmental health policy regarding men's reproductive and sexual health / Amit Reddy, Malhar J. Parikh, Andrew T. Gabrielson and Suresh C. Sikka
    Drugs of abuse / Nora M. Haney, Linley Diao and Kenneth DeLay
    Posttraumatic stress disorder and its effects on men's sexual and reproductive health / Andrew T. Gabrielson, James Liu and Suresh C. Sikka
    Perfumery, essential oils, and household chemicals affecting reproductive and sexual health / Suresh C. Sikka and Alma R. Bartolome.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Isadore Kanfer, editor.
    Summary: Although the Bioequivalence (BE) requirements in many global jurisdictions have much in common, differences in certain approaches and requirements such as definitions and terms, choice of comparator (reference) product, acceptance criteria, fasted and fed studies, single and multi-dose studies, biowaivers and products not intended for absorption into the systemic circulation (locally acting medicines and dosage forms), amongst others, provide food for thought that standardisation should be a high priority objective in order to result in a harmonized international process for the market approval of products using BE. An important objective of Bioequivalence Requirements in Various Global Jurisdictions is to attempt to gather the various BE requirements used in different global jurisdictions to provide a single source of relevant information. This information from, Brazil, Canada, China, European Union, India, Japan, MENA, Russia South Africa, the USA and WHO will be of value to drug manufacturers, regulatory agencies, pharmaceutical scientists and related health organizations and governments around the world in the quest to harmonize regulatory requirements for the market approval of generic products.

    Contents:
    Brazil
    Canada
    China
    The European Union
    India
    Bioequivalence Studies in Japan
    Middle East and North Africa (MENA) Bioequivalence Requirements
    Russia
    South Africa
    The United States of America
    World Health Organization (WHO).
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Constantine Mavroudis; ‎J. Thomas Cook; ‎Constantine D. Mavroudis.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Megan-Jane Johnstone AO, PhD, BA, RN.
    Summary: "Now in its eighth edition, Bioethics: A Nursing Perspective provides practical guidance on the ethical issues you might come across in nursing practice, with real-world examples that help to bring this important subject to life. Author Dr Megan-Jane Johnstone AO, Australia's foremost nursing ethics scholar, provides a comprehensive framework for negotiating the ethical challenges, obligations and responsibilities you might face. The text is engaging and easy to follow, and has been fully updated to reflect current issues in health care such as nurse practitioner assisted dying, pandemic ethics, and the moral costs of misinformation and medical conspiracy theories. . This book is a suitable companion to the law and ethics components of both undergraduate and postgraduate nursing studies, and is relevant for all nurses who encounter ethical problems in their everyday practice." -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2023
  • Digital
    Amy E. Caruso Brown, Travis R. Hobart, Cynthia B. Morrow, editors.
    Summary: This unique textbook utilizes an integrated, case-based approach to explore how the domains of bioethics, public health and the social sciences impact individual patients and populations. It provides a structured framework suitable for both educators (including course directors and others engaged in curricular design) and for medical and health professions students to use in classroom settings across a range of clinical areas and allied health professions and for independent study. The textbook opens with an introduction, describing the intersection of ethics and public health in clinical practice and the six key themes that inform the book's core learning objectives, followed by a guide to using the book. It then presents 22 case studies that address a broad spectrum of patient populations, clinical settings, and disease pathologies. Each pair of cases shares a core concept in bioethics or public health, from community perspectives and end-of-life care to medical mistakes and stigma and marginalization. They engage learners in rigorous clinical and ethical reasoning by prompting readers to make choices based on available information and then providing additional information to challenge assumptions, simulating clinical decision-making. In addition to providing a unique, detailed clinical scenario, each case is presented in a consistent format, which includes learning objectives, questions and responses for self-directed learning, questions and responses for group discussion, references, and suggested further reading. All cases integrate the six themes of patient- and family-centered care; evidence-based practice; structural competency; biases in decision-making; cultural humility and awareness of the culture of medicine; and justice, social responsibility and advocacy. The final section discusses some challenges to evaluating courses and learning encounters that adopt the cases and includes a model framework for learner assessment.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Approaches to Using This Book
    "How Many of These Surgeries Have You Done?"
    "Can't Stop Coughing (But I Need to Get Back to the Shelter by 6)"
    "I Think Im in Labor"
    "Why Does My Son Have Lead in His Blood?"
    "Our Baby Is Turning Blue"
    "I Have a Touch of Sugar but I Cant Afford My Meds"
    "I Dont Want My Child to Get Vaccines"
    "Our Son's Cancer Is Gone. Why Can't We Stop Treatment?"
    "He Has a Gun and Wants to Kill Himself"
    "Bleeding Too Much" (In the Words of a Refugee)
    "My Father Wouldnt Want to Live Like This"
    "Were Not Ready to Give Up"
    "Please Look Beyond My Disability"
    "It Runs in the Family"
    "I Know Something Is Wrong"
    "Im in Pain!"
    "I Don't Want to Be a Guinea Pig"
    "Wait, Im a Research Subject?"
    "I Need Blockers So I Dont Turn Into a Girl"
    "You Dont Understand--He Needs That Bottle"
    "They Say My Babys Head Is Too Small"
    "I Just Want to Help People and See the World"
    Evaluating Cases in Context
    A Practical Framework for Learner Assessment.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Akira Akabayashi.
    Summary: This open access book addresses a variety of issues relating to bioethics, in order to initiate cross-cultural dialogue. Beginning with the history, it introduces various views on bioethics, based on specific experiences from Japan. It describes how Japan has been confronted with Western bioethics and the ethical issues new to this modern age, and how it has found its foothold as it decides where it stands on these issues. In the last chapter, the author proposes discarding the overarching term 'Global Bioethics in favor of the new term, 'Bioethics Across the Globe (BAG), which carries a more universal connotation. This book serves as an excellent tool to help readers understand a different culture and to initiate deep and genuine global dialogue that incorporates local and global thinking on bioethics. Bioethics Across the Globe is a valuable resource for researchers in the field of bioethics/medical ethics interested in adopting cross-cultural approaches, as well as graduate and undergraduate students of healthcare and philosophy.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. A Brief History of Bioethics in Japan
    Chapter 2. Brain-death and organ transplantation: The first Japanese Path
    Chapter 3. Informed Consent, Familism, and the Nature of Autonomy
    Chapter 4. End-of-Life Care, Advance Directives, Withholding and Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatment, and The Goals of Medicine
    Chapter 5. The Moral Status of the Embryo: The Second Japanese Path
    Chapter 6. The Great East Japan Earthquake and the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Plant Accident
    Chapter 7. Outcome egalitarianism and opportunity egalitarianism
    Chapter 8. Research Regulations, Ethics Committees, and Confronting Global Standards
    Chapter 9. Modern Medical Professionalism
    Chapter 10. What does it mean to be truly "interdisciplinary"?
    Chapter 11. Rebirthing Bioethics: Going Global.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    series editors, James F. Childress ... [et al.].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    KF3821.A6 B61 1983-
    3
  • Digital
    editors, Bhoopander Giri, Ram Prasad, Qiang-Sheng Wu and Ajit Varma.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the benefits of biofertilizers as an alternative to chemical fertilizers and pesticides. Agricultural production has increased massively over the last century due to increased use of chemical fertilizers and pesticides, but these gains have come at a price. The chemicals are not only expensive; they also reduce microbial activity in agricultural soils and accumulate in the food chain, with potentially harmful effects for humans. Accordingly, it is high time to explore alternatives and to find solutions to overcome our increasing dependence on these chemicals. Biofertilizers, which consist of plant remains, organic matter and microorganisms, might offer an alternative. They are natural, organic, biodegradable, eco-friendly and cost-effective. Further, the microbes present in the biofertilizers are important, because they produce nutrients required for plant growth (e.g., nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium), as well as substances essential for plant growth and development (e.g., auxins and cytokinins). Biofertilizers also improve the physical properties, fertility and productivity of soil, reducing the need for chemical fertilizers while maintaining high crop yield. This makes biofertilizers a powerful tool for sustainable agriculture and a sustainable environment. The book covers the latest research on biofertilizers, ranging from beneficial fungal, bacterial and algal inoculants; to microbes for bioremediation, wastewater treatment; and recycling of biodegradable municipal, agricultural and industrial waste; as well as biocontrol agents and bio-pesticides. As such, it offers a valuable resource for researchers, academics and students in the broad fields of microbiology and agriculture.

    Contents:
    1. Microbial Biofertilizers: Types and Applications
    2. Fungal Inoculants for Native Phosphorus Mobilization
    3. Potential Applications of Algae-based Biofertilizer
    4. Ectomycorrhizal Fungi: Role as Biofertilizers in Forestry
    5. Perspectives on the Role of Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi in the in-vivo Vegetative Plant Propagation
    6. Silicon (Si) and Zinc (Zn) Solubilizing Microorganisms: Role in Sustainable Agriculture
    7. Status and prospects of bacterial inoculants for sustainable management of agroecosystems
    8. Plant Nutrient Management Through Inoculation of Zinc Solubilizing Bacteria for Sustainable Agriculture
    9. Endophytic Bacteria as A Modern Tool for Sustainable Crop Management Under Stress
    10. Biofertilizers in Argentina
    11. Rhizobial Inoculants for Sustainable Agriculture: Prospects and Applications
    12. Biofertilizer and their role in sustainable agriculture
    13. The use of Microorganisms for the Biodegradation of Sewage Sludge and the Production of Biocompost for Sustainable Agriculture
    14. Circadian Rhythms in Plant Microbe Interaction: For Better Performance of Bioinoculants in the Agricultural Fields
    15. The Actinobacteria and Their Role as Plant Probiotics
    16. Organic Fertilizer from Algae: A Novel Approach Towards Sustainable Agriculture
    17. Phosphate Solubilizing Fungi and Their Potential Role in Sustainable Agriculture
    18. Fungi as Biological Control Agents
    19. Biocontrol Agents: Potential of Biopesticides for Integrated Pest Management
    20. Microbial-Mediated Plant Growth Promotion: A Mechanistic Overview on Cultivable Plant Growth Promoting Members
    21. Mycorrhizas and Tolerance of Abiotic Stress in Citrus Plants
    22. Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi (AMF) from Heavy Metal Contaminated Soils: Molecular Approach and Application in Phytoremediation
    23. The Role of Arbuscular Mycorrhiza in Sustainable Environment and Agriculture
    24. Microbe-Mediated Removal of Heavy Metals for Sustainable Agri cultural Practices.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Melvin A. Shiffman, Mervin Low, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Gianfranco Donelli, editor.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to provide readers with a wide overview of the main healthcare-associated infections caused by bacteria and fungi able to grow as biofilm. The recently acquired knowledge on the pivotal role played by biofilm-growing microorganisms in healthcare-related infections has given a new dynamic to detection, prevention and treatment of these infections in patients admitted to both acute care hospitals and long-term care facilities. Clinicians, hygienists and microbiologists will be updated by leading scientists on the state-of-art of biofilm-based infections and on the most innovative strategies for prevention and treatment of these infections, often caused by emerging multidrug-resistant biofilm-growing microorganisms.

    Contents:
    Biofilm Formation by Clinical Isolates and its Relevance to Clinical Infections
    Biofilm-based implant infections in orthopaedics
    Clinical and Microbiological Aspects of Biofilm-Associated Surgical Site Infections
    Peri-implant infections of oral biofilm etiology
    Microbiological diversity of peri-implantitis biofilms
    Anaerobes in biofilm-based healthcare-associated infections
    Microbial biofilm development on neonatal enteral feeding tubes
    Voice prostheses, microbial colonization and biofilm formation
    Microbial composition and antibiotic resistance of biofilms recovered from endotracheal tubes of mechanically ventilated patients
    Biofilm and Central Line Associated Bloodstream Infections.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Gianfranco Donelli, editor.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to provide readers with a wide overview of the main healthcare-associated infections caused by bacteria and fungi able to grow as biofilm. The recently acquired knowledge on the pivotal role played by biofilm-growing microorganisms in healthcare-related infections has given a new dynamic to detection, prevention and treatment of these infections in patients admitted to both acute care hospitals and long-term care facilities. Clinicians, hygienists and microbiologists will be updated by leading scientists on the state-of-art of biofilm-based infections and on the most innovative strategies for prevention and treatment of these infections, often caused by emerging multidrug-resistant biofilm-growing microorganisms.

    Contents:
    Persister cells in biofilm associated infections
    Fungal biofilms in human disease
    Biofilm-Infected Pressure Ulcers: Current Knowledge and Emerging Treatment Strategies
    Microbial biofilms and adverse reactions to gel fillers used in cosmetic surgery
    Role of biofilms in breast implant associated infections and capsular contracture
    Innovative strategies for combating biofilm-based infections
    Antimicrobial polymers for anti-biofilm medical devices: state of art and perspectives
    Antimicrobial Photodynamic Therapy for Treatment of Biofilm-based Infections
    Anti-Biofilm Agents in Control of Device-Related Infections
    Lipid- and polymer-based drug delivery carriers for eradicating microbial biofilms causing medical device-related infections.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sunil Kumar, Niharika Chandra, Leena Singh, Muhammad Zaffar Hashmi, Ajit Varma, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights treatment strategies for bacterial biofilms in connection with a variety of human diseases. In particular, it reviews bacterial biofilm formation and its mechanism. Topics covered include biofilms in human health, the role of biofilms in mediating human diseases, and methods for testing bacterial biofilms. Further sections concentrate on biofilm-mediated diseases in different parts of the human gastrointestinal tract, while therapeutic strategies for biofilm control and natural agents that disrupt bacterial biofilms are also covered. Readers will also find the latest advances in probiotics and biofilms, as well as the use of probiotics to counteract biofilm-associated infections. Biofilms and antimicrobial resistance are discussed. Subsequent chapters address the management of inflammatory bowel disease via probiotics biofilms, as well as the role of probiotics bacteria in the treatment of human diseases associated with bacterial biofilms. The book is chiefly intended for clinicians/scientists in the fields of medical microbiology, applied microbiology, biochemistry, and biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1
    An Introduction to Microbial Biofilm
    Chapter 2
    Biofilms: The Good and the Bad
    Chapter 3
    Biofilms in Human Health
    Chapter 4
    The Role of Biofilms in Originating, Mediating, and Proliferating Infectious Diseases
    Chapter 5
    Modern Methods in Microscopy for the Assessment of Biofilms
    Chapter 6
    Molecular Methods for the Assessment of Microbial Biofilms
    Chapter 7
    Biofilm Mediated Dental Diseases
    Chapter 8
    Biofilm Mediated Diseases of the Eye
    Chapter 9
    Biofilm mediated Diseases of the Ear, Nose, and Throat
    Chapter 10
    Biofilm mediated Diseases of Heart and Lungs
    Chapter 11
    Role of Biofilms in Medical Devices and Implants
    Chapter 12
    Biofilm Mediated Gastrointestinal Diseases
    Chapter 13
    Biofilm Mediated Urinary Tract Infections
    Chapter 14
    Biofilm Mediated Skin Infections
    Chapter 15
    Approaches Towards Microbial Biofilm Disruption by Natural Bioactive Agents
    Chapter 16
    Probiotics and Biofilm
    Chapter 17
    Probiotics to Counteract Biofilm-Associated Infections
    Chapter 18
    Biofilms and Antimicrobial Resistance
    Chapter 19
    Management of Inflammatory Bowel Disease by Probiotics Biofilm.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Iqbal Ahmad, Fohad Mabood Husain.
    Contents:
    Biofilms : an introduction and significance in plant and soil health
    Role of PGPR in biofilm formations and its importance in plant health
    Concept of mono and mixed biofilms and their role in soil and in plant association
    Bacillus biofilms and their role in plant health
    Biofilm formation by Psedumonas spp. and their significance in biocontrol
    Quorum sensing mechanisms in rhizosphere biofilms
    Biofilm formation and quorum sensing in the rhizosphere
    The significance of fungal biofilms in association with plants and soils
    Chemical nature of biofilm matrix and its significance
    Root exudates : composition and impact on plant-microbe interaction
    Biochemical and molecular mechanism in biofilm studies in plant associated bacteria
    Techniques in studying biofilms and their characterization : microscopy to advanced imaging systems in vitro and in situ
    Gene expression and enhanced antimicrobial resistance in biofilms
    In vitro assessment of biofilm formation by soil and plant associated microorganisms
    Biotic and abiotic factors affecting biofilm in vitro and in the rhizosphere
    The ecological significance of soil associated biofilms and stress management
    Developed biofilm-based microbial ameliorators for bioremediating degraded ecosystems and the environment
    Bioremediation and biofilm in soil and plant root association
    Biofilms for remediation of heavy metals and xenobiotic compounds : a technical review
    Plant pathogenic bacteria : role of quorum sensing and biofilm in disease development
    Plant pathogenic bacteria biofilm instigation and its control measures
    Application of biofilm and quorum sensing inhibitors in food protection and safety
    Biofilm inhibition by natural products of marine origin and their environmental application
    Biofilm formation by enteric pathogens on plants and its impact on human health
    Role of in silico studies in designing QS/antibiofilm agents for controlling biofouling and plant diseases.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] John Love.
    Contents:
    Biofuels: The Back Story / John A. Bryant and John Love
    Biofuels in Operation / Lionel Clarke
    Anaerobic Digestion / John Bombardiere and David A. Stafford
    Plant Cell Wall Polymers / Stephen C. Fry
    Ethanol Production from Renewable Lignocellulosic Biomass / Leah M. Brown, Gary M. Hawkins and Joy Doran-Peterson
    Fatty Acids, Triacylglycerols and Biodiesel / John A. Bryant
    Development of Miscanthus as a Bioenergy Crop / John Clifton-Brown, Jon McCalmont and Astley Hastings
    Mangrove Palm, Nypa fruticans: '3-in-1' Tree for Integrated Food/Fuel and Eco-Services / C.B. Jamieson, R.D. Lasco and E.T. Rasco
    The Use of Cyanobacteria for Biofuel Production / David J. Lea-Smith and Christopher J. Howe
    Third-Generation Biofuels from the Microalga, Botryococcus braunii / Charlotte Cook, Chappandra Dayananda, Richard K. Tennant and John Love
    Strain Selection Strategies for Improvement of Algal Biofuel Feedstocks / Leyla T. Hathwaik and John C. Cushman
    Algal Cultivation Technologies / Alessandro Marco Lizzul and Michael J. Allen
    Biofuels from Macroalgal Biomass / Jessica Adams
    Lipid-based Biofuels from Oleaginous Microbes / Lisa A. Sargeant, Rhodri W. Jenkins and Christopher J. Chuck
    Engineering Microbial Metabolism for Biofuel Production / Thomas P. Howard
    The Sustainability of Biofuels / J.M. Lynch
    Biofuels and Bioenergy
    Ethical Aspects / John A. Bryant and Steve Hughes
    Postscript / John Love and John A. Bryant
    Selected References and Suggestions for Further Reading.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Mansour Ghorbanpour, Prachi Bhargava, Ajit Varma, Devendra K. Choudhary, editors.
    Summary: Several nano-scale devices have emerged that are capable of analysing plant diseases, nutrient deficiencies and any other ailments that may affect food security in agro-ecosystems. It has been envisioned that smart delivery systems can be developed and utilised for better management of agricultural ecosystems. These systems could exhibit beneficial, multi-functional characteristics, which could be used to assess and also control habitat-imposed stresses to crops. Nanoparticle-mediated smart delivery systems can control the delivery of nutrients or bioactive and/or pesticide molecules in plants. It has been suggested that nano-particles in plants might help determine their nutrient status and could also be used as cures in agro-ecosystems. Further, to enhance soil and crop productivity, nanotechnology has been used to create and deliver nano fertilizers, which can be defined as nano-particles that directly help supply nutrients for plant growth and soil productivity. Nano-particles can be absorbed onto clay networks, leading to improved soil health and more efficient nutrient use by crops. Additionally, fertilizer particles can be coated with nano-particles that facilitate slow and steady release of nutrients, reducing loss of nutrients and enhancing their efficiency in agri-crops. Although the use of nanotechnology in agro-ecosystems is still in its early stages and needs to be developed further, nano-particle-mediated delivery systems are promising solutions for the successful management of agri-ecosystems. In this context, the book offers insights into nanotechnology in agro-ecosystems with reference to biogenic nanoparticles. A useful resource for postgraduate and research students in the field of plant and agricultural sciences, it is also of interest to researchers working in nano and biotechnology.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1: Application of Nanotechnology in Agricultural Farm Animals
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Improvement in Animal Health
    1.2.1 Veterinary Diagnostics
    1.2.2 Veterinary Therapeutics and Vaccine Delivery
    1.3 Improvement in Animal Production
    1.3.1 Nanofeed
    1.3.2 Nano-Reproduction
    1.4 Conclusion
    References
    2: Nanoparticles in Plant Growth and Development
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Molecular Mechanism of Nanoparticles in Plant Growth and Protection 2.2.1 Mode of Entry and Uptake
    2.2.2 Nanoparticle-Plant Interactions
    2.2.3 Translocation
    2.3 Effect of Nanoparticles
    2.3.1 Effect on Photosynthesis
    2.3.2 Effect on Seed Germination
    2.3.3 Root and Shoot Growth
    2.3.4 Effect on Nutrient Delivery
    2.3.5 Effect on Rhizospheric Environment
    2.3.6 Toxicity
    2.3.6.1 Pathogen Suppression
    2.3.6.2 Regulated Delivery of Pesticides
    2.3.6.3 Physiological and Biochemical Changes in Plants
    2.3.7 Accumulation of Nanoparticles
    2.3.7.1 In Plants
    2.3.7.2 In Soil and Water Bodies
    References 3.14 Classification of Nanosensors
    3.15 Advantages of Nanosensors
    3.16 Nanotechnology for Post-harvest Improvement
    3.17 Microbial Nanoformulations in Quality Enhancement
    3.18 Nanopackaging Technology
    References
    4: Agriculture and Nanoparticles
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Effects of Nanoparticles on Plant Development
    4.3 Conclusion
    References
    5: Large-Scale Production/Biosynthesis of Biogenic Nanoparticles
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Detoxification Principles
    5.3 Biosynthesis of Biogenic Nanoparticles 3: Use of Nanotechnology in Quality Improvement of Economically Important Agricultural Crops
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Nanoparticles in Agriculture and Their Fabrication
    3.3 Polymers Used as Nanocarriers
    3.4 Nanoparticles for Seed Germination and Plant Growth
    3.5 Nanofertilizers
    3.6 Classification of Nanofertilizers
    3.7 Benefits of Nanofertilizers
    3.8 Advantages of Nanofertilizers
    3.9 Nanoherbicides
    3.10 Advantages of Nanoherbicides
    3.11 Nanopesticides
    3.12 Advantages of Nanopesticides
    3.13 Nanosensors and Their Applications 5.4 Industrial-Scale Production/Biosynthesis of Biogenic Nanoparticles
    5.5 Process Scale-Up Principles
    References
    6: Role of Nanotechnology in the Management of Agricultural Pests
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Methods for the Management of Insects/Pests
    6.3 Nanoparticles as a New Tool for Pest Management
    6.4 Role of Naturally Occurring Nanoparticles in Insects
    6.5 Nanoparticles Used in Biopesticides Controlled Release Formulations
    6.6 Classes of Nanoparticles
    6.7 Nanopesticides
    6.8 Methods to Develop Nanoparticles for Pest Control
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tiago S. Vasconcelos, Fernando R. da Silva, Tiago G. dos Santos, Vitor H.M. Prado, Diogo B. Provete.
    Summary: This book analyzes different facets of anuran amphibian distribution in South America. We integrate alternative biological metrics employing cutting-edge methods to understand the dynamic processes underlying species distribution patterns. By using the modern biogeographic toolbox, we explore how richness gradients, phylogenetic diversity, functional diversity, and range size/endemism distribution of amphibians vary along the continent. Moreover, we present a robust proposal for priority areas for conservation of anurans in South America that maximizes representativeness of distinct biodiversity facets.

    Contents:
    An Introduction to the Biogeography of South American Anurans
    South American Anurans: Species Diversity and Description Trends Through Time and Space
    Patterns of Species Richness, Range Size, and their Environmental Correlates of South American Anurans
    Spatial Distribution of Phylogenetic Diversity of South American Anurans
    Geographical Patterns of Functional Diversity of South American Anurans
    Biogeographic Regionalization of South American Anurans
    Spatial Conservation Prioritization for the Anuran Fauna of South America.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Errol C Friedberg, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center at Dallas, USA ; foreword by Sydney Brenner.
    Contents:
    Growing up in Brooklyn
    The essential Paul Berg
    College and World War II
    Western Reserve University
    Copenhagen
    Washington University, St. Louis
    Discovering transfer RNA
    Stanford University and its refurbished Department of Biochemistry
    Transcription and translation : new directions
    Making recombinant DNA : the first faltering steps
    Making recombinant DNA : a major breakthrough
    EcoRI restriction endonuclease : a major breakthrough
    "Coincidence is the word we use when we can't see the levers and pulleys"
    Yet another Stanford contribution
    An historic meeting in Hawaii
    The recombinant DNA controversy
    A momentous Gordon Research Conference
    Making recombinant molecules with frog DNA
    The controversy heats up
    Asilomar II
    The dissenters : a different point of view
    The aftermath
    Legislative and revisionist challenges to recombinant DNA
    Asilomar II : lessons learned
    The Nobel Prize in chemistry
    Commercializing the technology
    Life goes on
    The "retirement" years
    Public policy issues : and other interests
    Personal challenges.
    Digital Access World Scientific 2014
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    QH447 .F75 2014
    1
  • Digital
    Kota Miura, Nataša Sladoje, editors.
    Summary: This open access textbook provides students and researchers in the life sciences with essential practical information on how to quantitatively analyze data images. It refrains from focusing on theory, and instead uses practical examples and step-by step protocols to familiarize readers with the most commonly used image processing and analysis platforms such as ImageJ, MatLab and Python. Besides gaining knowhow on algorithm usage, readers will learn how to create an analysis pipeline by scripting language; these skills are important in order to document reproducible image analysis workflows. The textbook is chiefly intended for advanced undergraduates in the life sciences and biomedicine without a theoretical background in data analysis, as well as for postdocs, staff scientists and faculty members who need to perform regular quantitative analyses of microscopy images.

    Contents:
    Workflows and Components of Bioimage Analysis
    Measurements of Intensity Dynamics at the Periphery of the Nucleus
    3D Quantitative Colocalisation Analysis
    The NEMO Dots Assembly: Single-Particle Tracking and Analysis
    Introduction to MATLAB: Image Analysis & Brownian Motion
    Resolving the process of Clathrin Mediated Endocytosis Using Correlative Light & Electron Microscopy (CLEM).
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Asheesh Shanker, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the concepts and approaches used for sequence, structure, and phylogenetic analysis. Starting with an introduction to the subject and intellectual property protection for bioinformatics, it guides readers through the latest sequencing technologies, sequence analysis, genomic variations, metagenomics, epigenomics, molecular evolution and phylogenetics, structural bioinformatics, protein folding, structure analysis and validation, drug discovery, reverse vaccinology, machine learning, application of R programming in biological data analysis, and the use of Linux in handling large data files.

    Contents:
    Intellectual Property Rights and Bioinformatics: An Introduction
    Next-Generation Sequencing: Technology, Advancements, and Applications
    Sequence Alignment
    Understanding Genomic Variations in the Context of Health and Disease: Annotation, Interpretation, and Challenges
    Metagenomics: Focusing on the Haystack
    Computational Epigenomics and its Application in Regulatory Genomics
    Data Mining to Detect Common, Unique, and Polymorphic Simple Sequence Repeats
    R-Programming for Genome-Wide Data Analysis
    Computational Approaches to Studying Molecular Phylogenetics
    Structural Bioinformatics: Life Through the 3D Glasses
    A Survey of the Structural Parameters Used for Computational Prediction of Protein Folding Process
    Quality Assessment of Protein Tertiary Structures: Past, Present, and Future
    Predicting Protein Function Using Homology-Based Methods
    Drug Discovery: An In Silico Approach
    Advanced In Silico Tools for Designing of Antigenic Epitope as Potential Vaccine Candidates Against Coronavirus
    Machine Learning: What, Why, and How?
    Command-Line Tools in Linux for Handling Large Data Files.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Xuhua Xia.
    Summary: This second edition integrates the more technical and mathematical aspects of bioinformatics with concrete examples of their application to current research problems in molecular and cellular biology. This broad, unified approach is made possible, in large part, by the very wide scope of Dr. Xia's own research experience. The integration of genomics, proteomics and transcriptomics into a single volume makes this book required reading for anyone entering the new and emerging field of Systems Biology.

    Contents:
    Blast and Fasta
    Sequence alignment
    Contig assembly
    DNA replication and viral evolution
    Gene and motif prediction
    Hidden Markov Models
    Gibbs Sampler
    Bioinformatics and vertebrate mitochondria
    Characterizing translation efficiency
    Protein isoelectric point
    Bioinformatics and Two-Dimensional Protein Separation
    Self-Organizing Map and other clustering Algorithms
    Molecular Phylogenetics
    Fundamentals of Proteomics.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Kevin Byron, New Jersey Institute of Technology, Newark, USA, Katherine G. Herbert, Montclair State University, New Jersey, USA, Jason T.L. Wang, New Jersey Institute of Technolog, Newark, USA.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Overview of bioinformatics databases
    Chapter 2. Biological data cleaning
    Chapter 3. Biological data integration
    Chapter 4. Biological data searching
    Chapter 5. Biological data mining
    Chapter 6. Biological network inference
    Chapter 7. Cloud-based biological data processing.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Atul Kumar Upadhyay, R Sowdhamini, Virupaksh U. Patil, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This book illustrates the importance and significance of bioinformatics in the field of agriculture. It first introduces the basic concepts of bioinformatics, such as homologous sequence and gene function analyses, determination of protein structures, and discusses machine learning applications for an in-depth understanding of the desired genes and proteins based on commonly used bioinformatics software and tools, e.g. BLAST, molecular modelling, molecular-docking and simulations, protein-protein and domain-domain interactions. The book also describes recent advances in the high-throughput analysis of whole genome and transcriptome using next-generation sequencing platforms, and functional proteome studies. It also examines the role of computational biology in understanding and improving the nutrient quality and yield of crops. Lastly, the book explores a comprehensive list of applications of bioinformatics to improve plant yield, biomass, and health, and the challenges involved.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1_Introduction to concepts of Agri-informatics
    Chapter 2_Bioinformatics tools for genomics assisted breeding and population genetics
    Chapter 3_Role of computational biology in sustainable development of Agriculture
    Chapter 4_High Throughput Sequencing Technologies and Application In Crop Improvement
    Chapter 5_Systems biology approach for Simulation of omics data
    Chapter 6_Big data and its analyatics in Agriculture
    Chapter 7_Role of omics approaches in improving crop's nutritional value
    Chapter 8_Computational study of diseases and insect resistance to upgrade the production of plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pandjassarame Kangueane.
    Summary: Bioinformation Discovery illustrates the power of biological data in knowledge discovery. It describes biological data types and representations with examples for creating a workflow in bioinformation discovery. Concepts are illustrated using line diagrams.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Preface; Acknowledgments; Abbreviations; Contents; List of Figures; List of Tables; About the Author;
    Chapter 1: Bioinformatics for Bioinformation; 1.1 Bioinformatics; 1.2 Bioinformatics-Related Terms; 1.3 Some Journals Supporting Bioinformatics; 1.4 Bioinformatics in Drug Discovery; 1.5 Skills for Bioinformatics; 1.5.1 UNIX Commands for Bioinformation Discovery; 1.5.2 Mathematics of Bioinformatics; 1.6 Bioinformatics Warehousing in Drug Discovery; 1.7 Bioinformatics Components; 1.8 Bioinformation; 1.9 Bioinformatics Variables; 1.10 Cell Constituents; 1.10.1 Nucleic Acids. 1.10.2 Proteins1.10.3 Classification of Amino Acids; 1.11 Codon and Codon Usage Table; 1.12 Bioinformation Discovery; 1.13 Bioinformatics Principle; 1.14 Bioinformatics Challenges; 1.15 Biological Data; 1.16 Data Explosion; 1.17 Sequence Data; 1.18 Structure Data; 1.19 Small Molecules; 1.20 Macromolecules; 1.21 SCOP Dataset; 1.22 CATH Dataset; 1.23 Functional Data; 1.24 Pathway Data; 1.25 Bioinformatics Developments; 1.26 Discovery Environment; 1.27 Sequence, Structure Alignment, and Evolutionary Inferences; 1.27.1 Sequence Alignment; 1.28 Molecular Modeling; 1.28.1 Protein Modeling. 1.28.2 Methods of Protein Modeling1.28.3 Popular Force Fields for Molecular Mechanics; 1.28.4 Prediction of Protein Structure; 1.28.5 Caveats on Homology Modeling; 1.29 Molecular Docking; 1.30 Phylogenetic Analysis; 1.31 Exercises;
    Chapter 2: Creating Datasets for Bioinformation; 2.1 Datasets; 2.2 HLA Binding Peptide Dataset; 2.3 MHC-Peptide Structural Dataset; 2.4 Grouping of MHC-Peptide Structures; 2.5 PDB Chain Identifier; 2.6 Information Redundancy in Dataset; 2.7 Information from MHC-Peptide Data; 2.8 Structural Parameters for MHC-Peptide Dataset Analysis. 2.9 Creation of Heterodimer and Homodimer Dataset2.10 Homodimer Folding Dataset; 2.11 Intronless Genes Dataset; 2.12 Human Single Exon Gene (SEG) Dataset; 2.13 Intron Containing Genes Dataset; 2.14 Fusion Protein Dataset; 2.15 Cholera Toxin Dataset; 2.16 HIV-1 GP160 (GP120/GP40) Structures; 2.17 Biological Data to Knowledge; 2.18 Exercises; References;
    Chapter 3: Tools and Techniques; 3.1 ALIGN; 3.2 BIMAS; 3.3 BLAST; 3.4 CLUSTALW; 3.5 DeCypher; 3.6 DEEP VIEW; 3.7 FASTA; 3.8 INSIGHT II; 3.9 GENSCAN; 3.10 GROMOS; 3.11 HBPLUS; 3.12 LALIGN/PLALIGN; 3.13 LIGPLOT; 3.14 LOOK; 3.15 MODELLER. 3.16 NACCESS3.17 PHYLIP; 3.18 PROTPARAM; 3.19 PROTORP; 3.20 PSAP; 3.21 InterPro; 3.22 PYMOL; 3.23 RASMOL; 3.24 ROSETTA Design; 3.25 SURFNET; 3.26 SYBYL; 3.27 T-EPITOPE DESIGNER; 3.28 Exercises; References;
    Chapter 4: Protein-Protein Interaction; 4.1 Protein Subunit Interaction; 4.2 Protein Dimer Datasets in Literature; 4.3 Parameters in Subunit Interaction; 4.3.1 Hydrophobic Effect; 4.3.2 Interface Size; 4.3.3 Interface Residues; 4.3.4 Interface H-Bonds; 4.3.5 Interface Electrostatics; 4.3.6 Interface Sidechain-Sidechain Interaction; 4.3.7 Interface Hot Spots; 4.4 Conclusion; 4.5 Exercise.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Heung Jae Chun, Rui L. Reis, Antonella Motta, Gilson Khang, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Paul S. Yamauchi, editor.
    Contents:
     History of Therapies in Dermatology.  Past to Present
     Validated scoring systems
     Interpreting Clinical Trial Data
    Compliance and Persistency
     Quality of Life in the Dermatology Practice
    Medical Legal Issues with Biologic Agents in the Treatment of Psoriasis
    Patient and Physician Perspectives on Traditional  Systemic and Biologic Therapies for Psoriasis
    Outcomes of Comorbidities with Biologic and Systemic Agents  
    Pharmacovigilance
    Pharmacoeconomics of Biologic Therapy in Dermatology
    Immunogenicity of Biologic Agents in Psoriasis  
    Manufacturing of Biologics
     Tumor Necrosis Factor Inhibition
    Dual Inhibition of IL-12/IL- 23 and Selective Inhibition of IL-23 in Psoriasis.- Interleukin-17 Inhibition for the Treatment  of Inflammatory Skin Disease
    Systemic Therapies in Psoriasis
    Nail, Scalp, and Palmoplantar Psoriasis
     Current and Emerging Treatments for Psoriatic Arthritis
    JAK Kinase Inhibitors in Dermatology
       Fumaric Acid Esters in Dermatology
    Phosphodiesterase Inhibitors for the Treatment of Inflammatory Skin Conditions
    Oral Retinoids in Dermatology
     Combination Therapy with Biologics and Other Systemic Treatments in Psoriasis
    Transitioning Biologic and Systemic Therapies in Psoriatic Patients
    Practical Considerations and Complex Cases in Psoriasis
    Biosimilars in Dermatology
    Biological Agents in Pediatric Dermatology
    Oral systemic Agents in Pediatric Dermatology
    Utilization of Biologic and Systemic Agents in the Elderly
     Miscellaneous Uses of Biologic and Systemic Agents in Other Dermatologic Conditions
    Biologics for the Treatment of Atopic Dermatitis
    Oral Agents for Atopic Dermatitis: Current and in Development
     Cutaneous T-cell lymphoma
     Anti-CD20 Agents and Potential Novel Biologics in Pemphigus Vulgaris and Other Autoimmune Blistering Diseases
    Oral Systemic Agents for Immunobullous Disorders
    Biologic and Systemic Agents in Hidradenitis Suppurativa
    Systemic and Biologic Agents for Lupus Erythematosus
    Anti-IgE Therapy in Dermatology
    Role of Intravenous Immunoglobulin in Dermatologic Disorders
     Systemic Antifungals
    Systemic Antivirals in Dermatology  
    Antihelmintics in Dermatology
     Systemic Therapies for Scarring and Non-scarring alopecia
     Dapsone in Dermatology
    Systemic Non-Antibiotic Therapy in acne and rosacea
    Oral Antibiotics in Dermatology: A Practical Overview with Clinically Relevant Correlations and Management Suggestions
    Sonic Hedgehog Pathway Inhibition in the Treatment of Advanced Basal Cell Carcinoma
    Update in Immunotherapies for Melanoma
     Patient advocacy organizations.       .
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Nicholas Brownstone, Tina Bhutani, Wilson Liao, editors.
    Summary: Biologic therapy is a treatment that strives to modulate a patient's immune system to fight a given disease. In psoriasis, a skin disorder that is partly caused by a dysregulated immune system resulting in well-demarcated red areas of the skin with white scales, biologic therapy has the potential to vastly improve upon patient outcomes by minimizing the symptoms of this disease while maximizing the safety profile of the therapy. This book offers an up-to-date and comprehensive review on biologic therapy for the treatment of psoriasis. With over 10 FDA approved biologic agents for psoriasis (with more in the pipeline), confusion exists among providers regarding which agent is best for a particular patient. Chapters cover all FDA approved psoriasis biologic agents (including pipeline agents) for use in pediatric, adult, and geriatric patients. This book is unique in that it will not only cover cutting edge treatment principles based on the latest research, it will also be one of the most comprehensive reviews of psoriasis biologics in the COVID-19 era. Biologic Therapy for Psoriasis is a must-have resource for board certified dermatologists and rheumatologists, dermatology and rheumatology residents and fellows, dermatology physician assistants, nurse practitioners and medical students. The ultimate goal of this book is to improve patient care by making the busy practicing dermatology provider more adept with these particular therapies.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Biologic Therapy for Psoriasis
    Laboratory Monitoring: TB, Hepatitis and HIV
    TNF-Alpha Class of Biologic Agents in Psoriatic Disease
    IL-17 class of Biologic Agents in Psoriatic Disease
    IL-23 Inhibition for the Treatment of Psoriatic Disease: Pathway Discovery and Overview
    Combination Therapy with Biologic Agents
    Biologic Agents for the Treatment of Pediatric Psoriasis
    Special Site Psoriasis
    Comparing Biologic Agents in Treatment of Psoriasis
    Long Term Registry Data for Psoriasis Biologics
    Psoriasis Biologic Agents in Special Populations
    Psoriasis Biologics and the COVID-19 Pandemic: Lessons Learned
    Adherence to Biologic Therapy for Psoriasis.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ghulam Md Ashraf, Athanasios Alexiou, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the latest research into the highly prevalent neurodevelopmental disease most commonly associated with aging: Alzheimers disease (AD). Even after years of research, Alzheimers disease is still far from being cured. It presents a range of common symptoms in the form of behavioral and cognitive impairments. This book describes the symptoms and the biology behind them. The contents covers latest findings on the genetics involved and various factors and pathways influencing disease development. It also covers various non-pharmacological therapies like immunotherapy, use of natural products, and employing nanotechnology in both the detection and treatment of AD. This book also highlights the role of diet and nutrition in healthy aging. Given its scope, it offers a valuable asset for researchers and clinicians alike.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Cognitive Impairment and Rehabilitation in Alzheimers Disease
    Chapter 2. Alzheimers
    a progressive brain disease: causes, symptoms and prevention
    Chapter 3. Diet and nutrition in Alzheimers disease and healthy aging
    Chapter 4. Carbon nanostructures based materials: A novel tools for detection of Alzheimer's disease
    Chapter 5. Oxidative Stress in Alzheimer's Disease: Molecular Hallmarks of Alzheimer's Dementia
    Chapter 6. Strengthen Alzheimers Awareness through Biomusic
    Chapter 7. Diagnosis of Alzheimers Disease Using Brain Imaging: State-of-the-art
    Chapter 8. A Review of the Relationship Between Gut Microbiota and Memory
    Chapter 9. Stem cell therapy: A great leap forward in Alzheimers treatment
    Chapter 10. Diet and Nutrition in Alzheimers disease & Healthy Aging
    Chapter 11. Genetics, Neuronal Pathways, and Electrophysiology of Alzheimers disease
    Chapter 12. Biotechnology and Bioinformatics Applications in Alzheimers disease
    Chapter 13. Neurobiological Mechanisms Involved in the Pathogenesis of Alzheimers Disease
    Chapter 14. Immunotherapy in Alzheimers disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sarah Perrett, Alexander K. Buell, Tuomas P.J. Knowles, editors.
    Summary: This book summarizes naturally occurring and designed bio-inspired molecular building blocks assembled into nanoscale structures. It covers a fascinating array of biomimetic and bioinspired materials, including inorganic nanozymes, structures formed by DNA origami, a wide range of peptide and protein-based nanomaterials, as well as their applications in diagnostics and therapeutics. The book elucidates the mechanism of assembly of these materials and characterisation of their mechanical and physico-chemical properties which inspires readers not only to exploit the potential applications of nanomaterials, but also to understand their potential risks and benefits. It will be of interest to a broad audience of students and researchers spanning the disciplines of biology, chemistry, engineering, materials science, and physics.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Nanozymes: Biomedical Applications of Enzymatic Fe3O4 Nanoparticles From In Vitro to In Vivo
    Chapter 2. DNA Nanotechnology for Building Sensors, Nanopores and Ion-Channels
    Chapter 3. Bio Mimicking of Extracellular Matrix
    Chapter 4. Self-Assembly of Ferritin: Structure, Biological Function and Potential Applications in Nanotechnology
    Chapter 5. Dynamics and Control of Peptide Self-Assembly and Aggregation
    Chapter 6. Peptide Self-Assembly and its Modulation: Imaging on the Nanoscale
    Chapter 7. The Kinetics, Thermodynamics and Mechanisms of Short Aromatic Peptide Self-Assembly
    Chapter 8. Bacterial Amyloids: Biogenesis and Biomaterials
    Chapter 9. Fungal Hydrophobins and Their Self-Assembly into Functional Nanomaterials
    Chapter 10. Nanostructured, Self-Assembled Spider Silk Materials for Biomedical Applications
    Chapter 11. Protein Microgels from Amyloid Fibril Networks
    Chapter 12. Protein Nanofibrils as Storage Forms of Peptide Drugs and Hormones
    Chapter 13. Bioinspired Engineering of Organ-on-Chip Devices.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Roger Härtl, Lawrence J. Bonassar.
    Summary: Although there have been significant advancements in minimally invasive spinal surgery techniques in the last few decades, optimal outcomes for chronic low back pain remain elusive. A number of promising clinical trials have been conducted using tissue engineering and biological interventions for disc degeneration. Written by renowned innovators, this is the first book that covers implementation of these groundbreaking approaches for disc disease. The text begins with key fundamentals including anatomy and physiology, pathophysiology, imaging and biomechanics to delineate healthy versus diseas.

    Contents:
    The human spinal disc : relevant anatomy and physiology / Julien Tremblay-Gravel, Fahad H. Abduljabbar, Jean Ouellet, and Lisbet Haglund
    Pathophysiology of disc disease : disc degeneration / Niloofar Farhang, Joshua Stover, Brandon Lawrence, and Robby D. Bowles
    Imaging of the healthy and diseased spinal disc / Darryl B. Sneag and Hollis G. Potter
    Biomechanics of the healthy and diseased spine / Hans-Joachim Wilke and Fabio Galbusera
    Differences between human and animal discs : pros and cons of current animal models for pre-clinical development of biologic therapies for low back pain / Jeffrey C. Lotz
    Grading scales for disc degeneration and regeneration : clinical and experimental / Peter Grunert
    Disc regeneration : in vitro approaches and experimental results / John T. Martin, Harvey E. Smith, Lachlan J. Smith, and Robert L. Mauck
    Intervertebral disc whole organ cultures / Marianna Peroglio, Zhen Li, Lorin Michael Benneker, Mauro Alini, and Sibylle Grad
    Biological treatment approaches : basic ideas and principles / Victor Y. Leung and Kenneth M. Cheung
    Learning from successes of tissue engineered strategies in non-spine cartilaginous disorders / Stephen Sloan and Lawrence J. Bonassar
    Treatment and of degenerative disc disease and disc regeneration : proteins and genes / Daisuke Sakai and Jordy Schol
    Treatment of degenerated disc disease/disc regeneration : growth factors and platelet-rich plasma / Koichi Masuda and Kenji Kato
    Treatment of degenerated disc disease/disc regeneration : stem cells, chondrocytes or other cells, and tissue engineering / Steven Presciutti and Howard An
    Nucleus replacement and repair : autologous disc chondrocyte transplantation / Christian Hohaus, Timothy Ganey, and Hans Jörg Meisel
    Annulus fibrosus repair / Olivia M. Torre, Michelle A. Cruz, Andrew C. Hecht, and James C. Iatridis
    Summary of clinical trials with biological treatment approaches for spinal disease / Gernot Lang, Ibrahim Hussain, Micaella Zubkov, Yu Moriguchi, Brenton Pennicooke, and Roger Härtl
    Total disc transplantation : current results and future development / Jason Pui Yin Cheung, Dike Ruan, and Keith D.K. Luk
    What have we learned from mechanical total disc replacement? / Timothy T. Roberts, Colin M. Haines, and Edward C. Benzel
    Regulatory overview : obtaining regulatory approval of a biologic/cell product / Michaela H. Purcell, Penny J. White, H. Davis Adkisson
    What makes biological treatment strategies and tissue engineering for ddd interesting to industry? / Hassan Serhan, Elliott A. Gruskin, and William C. Horton
    What will the future bring? : perspectives from around the world / Tony Goldschlager, Claudius Thome, Howard An, and Luiz Vialle.
  • Digital
    volume editors, W.P. Kaschka, D. Rujescu.
    Contents:
    Global suicide / Varnik, P.; Wasserman, D
    Suicidal ideation, suicide attempts and completed suicide in adolescents : neurobiological aspects / Sarchiapone, M.; D'Aulerio, M.; Iosue, M
    Serotonergic and noradrenergic neurotransmitter systems in suicide / Dwivedi, Y
    GABA, depression and suicide / Pabba, M.; Sibille, E
    Genetics of suicidal behavior / Giegling, I.; Rujescu, D
    Gene-environment interaction studies in suicidal behaviour / Mandelli, L.; Serretti, A
    Epigenetics of suicidal behaviour / Turecki, G
    Neurocognitive processes and decision making in suicidal behaviour / Richard-Devantoy, S.; Courtet, P
    Electroencephalographic risk markers of suicidal behaviour / Hodgkinson, S.; Steyer, J.; Kaschka, W.P.; Jandl, M
    Neuroimaging of suicidal behavior / Jollant, F
    Inflammation and suicidal behavior / Postolache, T.T.; Manalai, P.; Brenner, L.A.; Brundin, L
    The contributions of lithium and clozapine for the prophylaxis and treatment of suicidal behavior / Müller-Oerlinghausen, B.; Lewitzka, U
    Challenges for future research and closing remarks / Rujescu, D.; Kaschka, I.N.; Kaschka, W.P.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital/Print
    Vasilis Vasiliou, Samir Zakhari, Helmut K. Seitz, Jan B. Hoek, editors.
    Summary: In recent years, a significant amount of research has emerged connecting the link between alcohol and cancer. The field has rapidly advanced, especially since the complex connection between alcohol and cancer has several unique sub areas that are being investigated and this volume gives a comprehensive overview of these advancements.

    Contents:
    Introduction / Gary J. Murray
    Alcohol and breast cancer: reconciling epidemiological and molecular data / Samir Zakhari and Jan B. Hoek
    Genetic-epidemiological evidence for the role of acetaldehyde in cancers related to alcohol drinking / C.J. Peter Eriksson
    Alcohol and cancer: an overview with special emphasis on the role of acetaldehyde and cytochrome P450 2E1 / Helmut K. Seitz and Sebastian Mueller
    Implications of acetaldehyde-derived DNA adducts for understanding alcohol related carcinogenesis / Silvia Balbo and Philip J. Brooks
    The role of iron in alcohol-mediated hepatocarcinogenesis / Sebastian Mueller and Vanessa Rausch
    Alcoholic cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma / Felix Stickel
    TLR4-dependent tumor-initiating stem cell-like cells (TICS) in alcohol-associated hepatocellular carcinogenesis / Keigo Machida, Douglas E. Feldman, and Hidekazu Tsukamoto
    Synergistic toxic interactions between CYP2E1, LPS/TNF[alpha] and JNK/p38 MAP kinase and their implications in alcohol-induced liver injury / Arthur I. Cederbaum, Yongke Lu, Xiaodong Wang, and Defeng Wu
    Understanding the tumor suppressor PTEN in chronic alcoholism and hepatocellular carcinoma / Colin T. Shearn and Dennis R. Petersen
    Alcohol consumption, WNT/[beta]-Catenin signaling and hepatocarcinogensis / K.E. Mercer, L. Hennings, and M.J.J. Ronis
    Alcohol and HCV: implications for liver cancer / Gyongyi Szabo, Banishree Saha, and Terence N. Bukong
    Application of mass spectrometry-based metabolomics in identification of early noninvasive biomarkers of alcohol-induced liver disease using mouse model / Soumen K. Manna, Matthew D. Thompson, and Frank J. Gonzalez
    Alcohol metabolism by oral streptococci and interaction with human papillomavirus leads to malignant transformation of oral keratinocytes / Lin Tao, Sylvia I. Pavlova, Stephen R. Gasparovich, Ling Jin, and Joel Schwartz
    Genetic polymorphisms of alcohol dehydrogense-1B and aldehyde dehydrogenase-2, alcohol flushing, mean corpuscular volume, and aerodigestive tract neoplasia in Japanese drinkers / Akira Yokoyama, Takeshi Mizukami, and Tetsuji Yokoyama
    Acetaldehyde and retinaldehyde-metabolizing enzymes in colon and pancreatic cancers / S. Singh, J. Arcaroli, D.C. Thompson, W. Messersmith, and V. Vasilou
    Alcohol, carcinoembryonic antigen processing and colorectal liver metastases / Benita McVicker, Dean J. Tuma, Kathryn E. Lazure, Peter Thomas, and Carol A. Casey
    Alcohol consumption and antitumor immunity: dynamic changes from activation to accelerated deterioration of the immune system / Hui Zhang, Zhaohui Zhu, Faya Zhang, and Gary G. Meadows
    A perspective on chemoprevention by resveratrol in head and neck squamous cell carcinoma / Sangeeta Shrotriya, Rajesh Agarwal, and Robert A. Sclafani
    The effects of alcohol and aldehyde dehydrogenases on disorders of hematopoiesis / Clay Smith, Maura Gasparetto, Craig Jordan, Daniel A. Pollyea, and Vasilis Vasiliou
    The effect of alcohol on Sirt1 expression and function in animal and human models of hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC) / Kyle J. Thompson, John R. Humphries, David J. Niemeyer, David Sindram, and Iain H. McKillop
    Transgenic mouse models for alcohol metabolism, toxicity and cancer / Claire Heit, Hongbin Dong, Ying Chen, Yatrik M. Shah, David C. Thompson, and Vasilis Vasiliou
    Fetal alcohol exposure increases susceptibility to carcinogenesis and promotes tumor progression in prostate gland / Dipak K. Sarkar
    Fetal alcohol exposure and mammary tumorigenesis in offspring: role of the estrogen and insulin-like growth factor systems / Wendie S. Cohick, Catina Crismale-Gann, Hillary Stires, and Tiffany A. Katz.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Javad Karimi, Hossein Madadi, editors.
    Summary: The book provides a reference to biological control of arthropod pests in agriculture and of public health importance in Iran. A quick glance over the literature shows a long history of biocontrol attempts in the country. Some historically important events highlighting the interest of Iranian academic, research and extension fields to the natural enemies and their applied aspects are provided. Iran, with an exception of the former USSR, was a pioneer in both basic and applied biocontrol in West Asia. The book consists of four parts: three parts for predators, parasitoids and pathogens, and last part for other approaches and analyses of the current state of biological control in Iran. The book provides the most up-to-date information on pest control and related topics of entomology in Iran. The chapters are written by scholars from major Universities and research centers in Iran.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1 : Introduction
    Chapter 2 : History of pest control and entomology in Iran
    Chapter 3: Predators
    Part 3.1. Ladybirds
    Part 3.2. Heteropterans
    Part 3.3. Other predator groups including
    Lacewings, Syrphids, Midges
    Chapter 4: Insect Pathogens
    Part 4.1. Bacterial entomopathogens
    Part 4.2. Fungal entomopathogens
    Part 4.3. Entomopathogenic and insect parasitic nematodes
    Part 4.4. Other entomopathogenic groups including viruses, protistans and Wolbachia
    Part 5.1. Parasitic wasps Chalcidoidea Ichneumonoidea
    Part 5.2. Superfamily Platygastroidea, Natural enemies of true bugs, moths, spiders and other insects
    Part 5.3. Egg parasitoids of Iran, Superfamily Chalcidoidea, with particular emphasis on Trichogrammatidae
    Part 5.4. Biological control in pomegranate orchards
    Part 5.5. Aphids Parasitoids : Aphidinae
    Part 5.6.Parasitic flies
    Chapter 6: Biological Control of mite pests in Iran
    Chapter 7: Biological control of some medically important flies in Iran
    Chapter 8: Final comments and conclusions
    Limitation of biocontrol program in Iran
    Future of Biocontrol in Iran
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Ken Ishii and Choon Kit Tang
    Summary: Biological DNA Sensor defines the meaning of DNA sensing pathways and demonstrates the importance of the innate immune responses induced by double stranded DNA (dsDNA) through its influencing functions in disease pathology and immune activity of adjuvants for vaccines. Though discussed in specific subsections of existing books, dsDNA and its immunogenic properties has never received the complete treatment given in this book. Biological DNA Sensor approaches the impact of dsDNA's immunogenicity on disease and vaccinology holistically. It paints a complete and concise picture on the topic so you can understand this area of study and make more informed choices for your respective research needs. Chapters are authored by researchers who are renowned for their research focus, ensuring that this book provides the most complete views on the topics. Multi-authored by a distinguished panel of world-class expertsIdeal source of information for those wanting to learn about DNA sensingProvides in-depth explanations of DNA sensing pathways and the innate immune system, bridging the gap between them
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Takemi Otsuki, Yasuo Yoshioka, Andrij Holian, editors.
    Summary: This volume examines our current understanding of the biological effects of fibrous and particulate substances, including discussions on nanoparticles. It offers comprehensive information on the latest insights into the immunological effects of various irritants on the human body. Readers will benefit from the contributing authors' diverse perspectives and extensive discussions of key issues, which include molecular alterations of the immune system and autoimmune diseases in connection with asbestos and silica, among others. The chapters also discuss recommendations, practical methods, and nanosafety science in situations involving exposure to nanotoxic substances. Edited in collaboration with the Japanese Society for Hygiene, this book provides up-to-date information on the immunological effects of nanotoxic substances to researchers interested in environmental and occupational health. Presenting a number of recent concepts and findings in the field, it enables readers to gain a comprehensive knowledge of health problems caused by environmental fibrous and particulate substances.

    Contents:
    1. Macrophage and Multinucleated Giant Cell Classification
    2. NLRP3 Inflammasome-Mediated Toxicity of Fibrous Particles
    3. Approaching a Unified Theory for Particle-Induced Inflammation
    4. Reproductive and Developmental Effects of Nanomaterials
    5. Fibrogenic and Immunotoxic Responses to Carbon Nanotubes
    6. Potential Hazards of Skin Exposure to Nanoparticles
    7. Health Effects of Silver Nanoparticles and Silver Ions
    8. Multiwalled Carbon Nanotube-Induced Pulmonary Fibrogenesis
    9. Silicates and Autoimmunity
    10. Asbestos Exposure and Autoimmunity
    11. T Cell Alteration Caused by Exposure to Asbestos
    12. Effects of Asbestos Fibers on Human Cytotoxic T Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    edited by Madeleine F. Barnothy.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    D656 .B26 1964
    1
  • Digital
    Roberto Ligrone.
    Summary: The book is a detailed account of major biological events that contributed to create the present world and our species, with emphasis on cause-effect interrelationships and environmental impact. Its main goal is to guide the reader toward an understanding of the continuity of life across diversity, and of its large-scale interactions with the planet. Combining scientific soundness with a constant effort for clarity, the book begins with a cloud of dust in a corner of the Galaxy and, covering an immense lapse of time, terminates with an organism that ponders about the texture of the Universe. Comprehensive, updated references added to each chapter will help the reader wishing to expand any of the topics. A glossary explains less common technical terms.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Abbreviations;
    Chapter 1: Introduction; References;
    Chapter 2: The Origins; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Birth of the Solar System; 2.3 The Earth; 2.4 The Activation of Tectonics; 2.5 Tectonic Processes Are Essential to Life; 2.5.1 Tectonics Drives a Powerful Global Thermostat; 2.5.2 Tectonics Recycles Bioelements; 2.6 Birth of the Atmosphere-Ocean-Continental Crust System; References;
    Chapter 3: The Birth of Life; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Seafloor Hydrothermal Vents as Settings for the Emergence of Life; 3.3 A Primordial Role for RNA?; 3.4 The Genetic Code 3.5 A RNA-Protein World3.6 Biological Membranes; 3.7 From Geochemistry to Biochemistry: The Emergence of an Autonomous Metabolism; 3.8 DNA Replaced RNA as the Repository of Biological Information; 3.9 The Bacterial-Archaeal Divide: Ancestral or Derived?; 3.10 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 4: Moving to the Light: The Evolution of Photosynthesis; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Light, Pigments and Photosystems; 4.3 Accessory Pigments; 4.4 The Photochemical Pathway in Anoxygenic Bacteria; 4.5 Evolutionary Interrelationships of Type-1 and Type-2 Photosystems; 4.6 Oxygenic Photosynthesis 4.7 Pathways of Carbon Photosynthetic FixationReferences;
    Chapter 5: The Great Oxygenation Event; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Planetary Oxygen Balance; 5.3 Methane Was Probably as a Key Driver of Planetary Oxygenation; 5.4 The GOE Was Associated with a Long Phase of Climatic Instability; 5.5 After the GOE, the Earth Stabilized in a Low-Oxygen State for over 1 Billion Years; 5.6 The Earth Entered a High-Oxygen Phase About 800 Million Years Ago; 5.7 The Impact of Oxygen on Biological Evolution; References;
    Chapter 6: Eukaryotes; 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Rise and Fall of the Archaezoan Model of Eukaryogenesis6.3 Post-archaezoan Models; 6.4 The Neomuran Model; 6.5 The Origin of the Nucleus; 6.6 Was the Host a Primitive Eukaryote or a Complex Archaeon?; 6.7 The Mitochondria; 6.7.1 Facts About Mitochondria; 6.8 The Last Eukaryote Common Ancestor (LECA) Possessed a Full Set of Fundamental Eukaryotic Traits; 6.9 Eukaryote Phylogeny and Systematics; 6.10 Dating Eukaryote Appearance and Diversification; 6.11 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 7: Sexual Reproduction; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Origin of Meiotic Sex 7.3 The Case of Parthenogenetic Rotifers7.4 Sexual Reproduction Sets Strong Species Boundaries in Eukaryotes; 7.5 Species Boundary in Prokaryotes Is Conventional; 7.6 Gamete Differentiation and Genders; References;
    Chapter 8: Multicellularity; 8.1 Introduction; 8.2 Cellular Specialization and Levels of Organization in Multicellular Organisms; 8.3 Stem Cells and Germ Line; 8.4 Concluding Remarks; References;
    Chapter 9: The Chloroplast and Photosynthetic Eukaryotes; 9.1 Introduction; 9.2 Birth of the Primary Chloroplast; 9.3 The Plants (Archaeplastida); 9.4 Secondary Chloroplasts
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Brian W. van Wilgen, John Measey, David M. Richardson, John R. Wilson, Tsungai A. Zengeya, editors.
    Summary: This open access volume presents a comprehensive account of all aspects of biological invasions in South Africa, where research has been conducted over more than three decades, and where bold initiatives have been implemented in attempts to control invasions and to reduce their ecological, economic and social effects. It covers a broad range of themes, including history, policy development and implementation, the status of invasions of animals and plants in terrestrial, marine and freshwater environments, the development of a robust ecological theory around biological invasions, the effectiveness of management interventions, and scenarios for the future. The South African situation stands out because of the remarkable diversity of the country, and the wide range of problems encountered in its varied ecosystems, which has resulted in a disproportionate investment into both research and management. The South African experience holds many lessons for other parts of the world, and this book should be of immense value to researchers, students, managers, and policy-makers who deal with biological invasions and ecosystem management and conservation in most other regions.

    Contents:
    PART 1: BACKGROUND
    Chapter 1: Biological invasions in South Africa: An overview
    Chapter 2: A brief, selective history of researchers and research initiatives related to biological invasions in South Africa
    PART 2: BIOLOGICAL INVASIONS IN SOUTH AFRICA
    Chapter 3: The biogeography of South African terrestrial plant invasions
    Chapter 4:Invasive alien aquatic plants in freshwater ecosystems
    Chapter 5: Terrestrial Vertebrate Invasions in South Africa
    Chapter 6: Alien freshwater fauna in South Africa
    Chapter 7: Alien terrestrial invertebrates in South Africa
    Chapter 8: Biological invasions in South Africa's offshore sub-Antarctic territories
    Chapter 9: Coastal invasions: The South African context
    Chapter 10: Pathogens of vertebrate animals as invasive species: Insights from South Africa
    Chapter 11: Biological invasions in South Africa's urban ecosystems: Patterns, processes, impacts and management
    PART 3: DRIVERS OF INVASION
    Chapter 12: South Africa's pathways of introduction and dispersal and how they have changed over time
    Chapter 13: The role of environmental factors in promoting and limiting biological invasions in South Africa
    Chapter 14: Biotic interactions as mediators of biological invasions: Insights from South Africa
    PART 4: IMPACTS OF INVASION
    Chapter 15:Impacts of invasions on terrestrial water resources in South Africa
    Chapter 16:The impact of invasive alien plants on rangelands in South Africa
    Chapter 17: An evaluation of the impacts of alien species on biodiversity in South Africa using different methods
    PART 5: MANAGEMENT OF INVASIONS
    Chapter 18: Biological invasion policy and legislation development and implementation in South Africa
    Chapter 19: More than a century of biological control against invasive alien plants in South Africa: a synoptic view of what has been accomplished
    Chapter 20:Analysing the risks posed by biological invasions to South Africa
    Chapter 21:The extent and effectiveness of alien plant control projects in South Africa
    Chapter 22: Experience and lessons from alien and invasive animal control projects carried out in South Africa
    Chapter 23: Biological invasions and ecological restoration in South Africa
    Chapter 24: The social dimensions of biological invasions in South Africa
    Chapter 25: Education, training and capacity building in the field of biological invasions in South Africa
    PART 6: NEW INSIGHTS
    Chapter 26: South Africa as a donor of naturalized and invasive alien plants to other parts of the world
    Chapter 27: South Africa as a donor of alien animals
    Chapter 28: Knowing-doing continuum or knowing-doing gap? Transferring research results to managers of biological invasions in South Africa
    Chapter 29: Biological invasions as a component of South Africa's global change research effort
    Chapter 30: South Africa's Centre for Invasion Biology: An experiment in invasion science for society
    PART 7: THE WAY FORWARD
    Chapter 31:Potential futures of biological invasions in South Africa.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Fabián M. Jaksic, Sergio A. Castro.
    Summary: This book provides a conceptually organized framework to understand the phenomenon of biological invasions at the Anthropocene global scale. Most advances toward that aim have been provided from North American and European researchers, with fewer contributions from Australia and South Africa. Here we fill the void from the Neotropics, focusing on the research experience in South American countries, with a strong emphasis on Argentina and Chile. The text is divided into two parts: The first half comprises self-contained chapters, providing a conceptual, bibliographic and empirical foundation in the field of invasion biology, from an Anthropocene perspective. The second half reviews the ecology, biogeography, and local impacts in South America of exotic species groups (European rabbit, Eurasian wild boar, Canadian beaver, North American mink, and Holarctic freshwater fishes), which are shown to be useful models for case studies of global relevance.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Part 1. Conceptual Framework
    Chapter 1. Introduction to the Phenomenon of Biological Invasions
    Chapter 2. Biological Invasions in the Anthropocene
    chapter 3. Transport and Introduction
    Chapter 4. Naturalisation
    Chapter 5. Range Expansion
    Chapter 6. Impacts on Health, Economy and Diversity
    Chapter 7. Ecological Impacts
    Part 2. Case Studies
    Chapter 8. European Rabbit (Oryctolagus cuniculus) in Chile: The Human Dimension Behind a Biological Invasion
    Chapter 9. Invasive European Wild Rabbits (Oryctolagus cuniculus) in Argentina: State of the Art and Prospects for Research
    Chapter 10. Wild Boar Invasion in Argentina and Chile: Ecology, Impacts and Distribution
    Chapter 11. Reconceiving the Biological Invasion of North American Beavers (Castor Canadensis) in Southern Patagonia as a Socio-ecological Problem: implications and opportunities for research and management
    Chapter 12. Invasion by a Carnivore: the case of american mink (neovison vison) in south america
    Chapter 13. Homogenization of the Freshwater Fish Fauna in Chile: analysing the ichthyogeographic provinces. References.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Tadashi Matsunaga, Tsuyoshi Tanaka, David Kisailus, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses the biologically controlled synthesis of magnetic materials, and its applications in bio-inspired design and synthesis. It highlights several key aspects of biologically produced magnetic materials - (i) organisms that biologically synthesize and utilize magnetic materials; (ii) formation mechanisms; (iii) how these biological formation routes yield various phases and morphologies; and (iv) the resultant magnetic and structural properties - and describes diverse bio-inspired approaches to utilizing magnetic materials in applications ranging from semiconductor to health industries. In addition, the book discusses the recent industrial use of magnetic materials to develop scalable technologies that encompass protein displays, drug-delivery, biophysical separations, and medical diagnostics, as well as outlining future next-generation applications. As such, it offers valuable insights for all scientists interested in using multidisciplinary fields to overcome current obstacles, and in gaining multifaceted expertise in magnetic materials bionanotechnology.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I: Formation Mechanisms of Biological Magnetic Materials;
    Chapter 1: Structure andFunction ofAligned Magnetic Crystals inMagnetotactic Bacteria; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Discovery ofMagnetotactic Bacteria; 1.1.2 Isolation ofMagnetotactic Bacteria; 1.1.3 Magnetotactic Bacteria Diversity; 1.1.4 Magnetotaxis; 1.2 Magnetosome Structure andProtein Localization; 1.2.1 Magnetosome-Associated Proteins; 1.2.2 Tetratricopeptide Repeat (TPR) Protein MamA; 1.2.3 MamA andtheMagnetosome Matrix; 1.2.4 Cytoskeletal Filaments Associated withMagnetosome Chains. 1.2.5 MamK Localization1.2.6 MamK Polymerization; 1.2.7 Recent Advances inUnderstanding theMamK Cytoskeleton; 1.3 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 2: Molecular Mechanism ofMagnetic Crystal Formation inMagnetotactic Bacteria; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Identification ofKey Biological Molecular Components forMagnetic Nano-particle Formation; 2.3 Molecular Analysis ofUnique Prokaryotic Organelle Biogenesis Specialized forMagnetic Nano-particle Production; 2.3.1 Magnetosome Membrane Formation byInvagination ofCytoplasmic Membrane; 2.3.2 Magnetosome Chain Formation. 2.3.3 Iron Transportation andRedox Control WithinMagnetosome2.3.4 The Mechanism ofMagnetite Crystallization andMorphological Regulation; 2.4 Nano-particle Encapsulating Lipid Tubule Synthesis Inspired fromProkaryotic Membrane Deformation Protein, MamY; 2.5 Crystal Size andShape Determination Mechanism ofMagnetic Nano-particles; 2.6 Crystal andGranule Formation fromToxic or Useful Compounds Throughthe Reduction Bioprocess WithinMagnetotactic Bacteria; 2.7 Summary andPerspective; References;
    Chapter 3: Structural andProteomic Analyses ofIron Oxide Biomineralization inChiton Teeth. 3.1 Introduction3.2 Structure andComposition ofFully Mineralized Chiton Teeth; 3.3 Iron Oxide Mineralization inChiton Teeth; 3.3.1 Phase Transformation ofIron Oxides; 3.3.2 Ultrastructural Development; 3.3.3 Organic Matrix inChiton Tooth; 3.3.3.1 Chitin Fibers; 3.3.3.2 Protein; Proteomic Analysis; 3.3.4 Role ofEpithelial Cells; 3.3.5 Iron Delivery Pathway; 3.4 Summary andPerspective; References; Part II: Biological Templating of Magnetic Materials for Medical and Device Applications;
    Chapter 4: Bioengineering andBiotechnological Applications ofBacterial Magnetic Particles. 4.1 Introduction4.2 Developmental Status ofCommercialized Magnetic Particles; 4.3 Production ofFunctional Magnetic Particles by"Magnetosome Display System"; 4.3.1 Development ofHost/Vector System; 4.3.2 Novel Expression Strategies ofTarget Proteins ontoMagnetic Particles; 4.3.3 Improving theMaterial Properties ofMagnetic Particles; 4.4 Developments intheUse ofMagnetic Particles intheMedical Field; 4.4.1 Magnetic Hyperthermia; 4.4.2 Cell Separation; 4.4.3 Receptor Analysis; 4.5 Conclusion; References.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Julio A. Aguirre-Ghiso, editor.
    Summary: "This book focuses on the biological mechanisms of minimal residual disease (MRD) and recurrence. It integrates this biology in solid cancers and in hematological malignancies. It reports also on technological advancements for monitoring MRD, derived from mechanistic insights. Chapters in solid and hematological malignancies address stem cell biology, genetics, epigenetics and micro-environmental regulation of dormant MRD. Novel insight into technologies for molecular phenotyping of MRD and monitoring of CTCs, DTCs and cell free RNA and DNA are also addressed extensively. Five chapters explore the above concepts in solid cancers such as prostate, breast, melanoma, head and neck and esophageal. Two chapters also explore the basic mechanisms of vascular biology targeting and epigenetic mechanisms regulating pluripotency programs during dormancy. Similar biology is explored in hematological malignancies such as T-ALL, CML, AML and multiple myeloma in additional four chapters"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Epigenetic and pluripotency aspects of disseminated cancer cells during minimal residual disease / Maria Jose Carlini, Nitisha Shrivastava, Maria Soledad Sosa
    Anti-angiogenic therapy-mediated endothelial damage: a driver of breast cancer recurrence? / Laura Pisarsky, Cyrus M. Ghajar
    Minimal residual disease in prostate cancer / Frank C. Cackowski, Russell S. Taichman
    Minimal residual disease in head and neck cancer and esophageal cancer / Christoph Sproll, Georg Fluegen, Nikolas H. Stoecklein
    Detection of minimal residual disease and its clinical applications in melanoma and breast cancer patients / Selena Y. Lin, Javier I. J. Orozco, Dave S. B. Hoon
    Preservation of quiescent chronic myelogenous leukemia stem cells by the bone marrow microenvironment / Mansi Shah, Ravi Bhatia
    Minimal residual disease in acute myeloid leukemia / Alexandra Gomez-Arteaga, Monica L. Guzman
    Characteristics and therapeutic targeting of minimal residual disease in childhood acute lymphoblastic leukemia / Irmela Jeremias, Denis M. Schewe
    Minimal residual disease in multiple myeloma: impact on response assessment, prognosis and tumor heterogeneity / Natalie Berger, Seunghee Kim-Schulze, Samir Parekh
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Vinod Krishnan, Anne Marie Kuijpers-Jagtman, Ze'ev Davidovitch.
    Summary: "This new edition continues to be an authoritative reference to the scientific foundations underpinning clinical orthodontics The newly and thoroughly revised Third Edition of Biological Mechanisms of Tooth Movement delivers a comprehensive reference for orthodontic trainees and specialists. It is fully updated to include new chapters on personalized orthodontics as well as the inflammatory process occurring in the dental and paradental tissues. It is heavily illustrated throughout, making it easier for readers to understand and retain the information discussed within. The topics covered range from bone biology, the effects of mechanical loading on tissues and cells, genetics, tissue remodeling, and the effects of diet, drugs, and systemic diseases. The Third Edition of Biological Mechanisms of Tooth Movement features seven sections that cover subjects such as: The development of biological concepts in orthodontics, including the cellular and molecular biology behind orthodontic tooth movement Mechanics meets biology, including the effects of mechanical loading on hard and soft tissues and cells, and biological reactions to temporary anchorage devices Inflammation and orthodontics, including markers for tissue remodeling in the gingival crevicular fluid and saliva Personalized diagnosis and treatment based on genomic criteria, including the genetic influences on orthodontic tooth movement Rapid orthodontics, including methods to accelerate or decelerate orthodontic tooth movement Perfect for residents and PhD students of orthodontic and periodontal programs, Biological Mechanisms of Tooth Movement is also useful to academics, clinicians, bone biologists, and researchers with an interest in the mechanics and biology of tooth movement"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Print
    [edited by] A. Joshua Wand.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    Andrew Hodgkiss.
    Summary: Biological Psychiatry of Cancer and Cancer Treatment provides the reader with expert guidance on how to prevent, detect and manage the 'organic' psychiatric disorders experienced by people with cancer.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Introduction to cancer biology
    Introduction to biological and molecular psychiatry
    Introduction to clinical neuropsychiarty
    Psychiatric consequences of particular cancers
    Psychiatric consequences of cancer treatments: surgery and radiotherapy
    Psychiatric consequences of cancer treatments: conventional chemotherapy
    Psychiatric consequences of cancer treatments: hormone and cytokine treatments
    Psychiatric consequences of cancer treatments: 'small molecule' molecularly targeted agents
    Psychiatric consequences of cancer treatments: therapeutic monoclonal antibodies
    Opportunities for prevention, or early detection, or psychopathology
    Clinical psychiatric assessment of patients with cancer.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    editor, David Monchaud.
    Contents:
    Biological relevance and therapeutic applications of DNA- and RNA-quadruplexes : double helix versus quadruple helix / David Monchaud
    Existence of G-quadruplexes in cells / Sébastien Britton, Alexandra Bartoli & Raphaël Rodriguez
    Diversity of DNA and RNA G-quadruplex structures / Primož Šket and Janez Plavec
    Direct observation of G-quadruplexes using DNA origami nanoscaffold / Arivazhagan Rajendran, Yue Li, Masayuki Endo & Hiroshi Sugiyama
    The G-factor : role of G-quadruplexes in genomic instability and cancer / Mrinal Srivastava & Sathees C. Raghavan
    Assessing the biological relevance of G-quadruplexes in telomeres by specific quadruplex-binding proteins / Takanori Oyoshi
    G-quadruplex dynamics : assays for intramolecular G-quadruplex helicases and inhibitors / Sean M Kerwin & Wendi M. David
    Proteins that interact with DNA and RNA G-quadruplexes / Aaron L. Moye & Tracy M. Bryan
    Biological relevance and small molecule targeting of RNA G-quadruplexes in the human genome / Anthony Bugaut
    Biological mechanisms of action of G-quadruplex targeting agents / Kyle R. Hukezalie, Elwy Okaz & Judy M.Y. Wong
    How has the field of quadruplex ligands fared since 1997? / Xiaogang Qu, Ta-Chau Chang, Kogularamanan Suntharalingam & David Monchaud
    Chiral compounds targeting G-quadruplexes / Chuanqi Zhao & Xiaogang Qu
    Novel metal-containing molecules that target DNA G-quadruplexes / Kogularamanan Suntharalingam
    Novel molecules targeting DNA G-quadruplexes : carbazole derivatives / Ta-Chau Chang, Zi-Fu Wang, Ting-Yuan Tseng & Cheng-Chung Chang
    Nature-inspired strategies to target DNA/RNA-quadruplexes / Aurelien Laguerre, Loic Stefan & David Monchaud
    DNA G-quadruplexes under the spotlight / Mazen Haj Sleiman & Sylvain Ladame
    G-quadruplex DNA for the construction of sensing platforms / Dik-Lung Ma, Modi Wang, Li-Juan Liu, Sheng Lin, Lihua Lu, Daniel Shiu-Hin Chan & Chung-Hang Leung.
    Digital Access Future Med 2015
  • Digital
    Barnali Chaudhuri, Inés G. Muñoz, Shuo Qian, Volker S. Urban, editors.
    Contents:
    Sample and Buffer preparation for SAXS
    Considerations for sample preparation using size-exclusion chromatography
    How to analyze and present SAS data for publication
    Designing and Performing Biological Solution Small-Angle Neutron Scattering Contrast Variation Experiments on Multi-component Assemblies
    SAS-based structural modeling and model validation
    Structural Characterization of Highly Flexible Proteins by Small-Angle Scattering
    What can we learn from wide-angle solution scattering?
    SAS-based studies of protein fibrillation
    High Resolution Distance Distributions Determined by X-ray and Neutron Scattering
    A successful combination: coupling SE-HPLC with SAXS
    Applications of SANS to study membrane protein systems
    Hybrid applications of solution scattering to aid structural biology
    A practical guide to iSPOT modeling: An integrative structural biology platform
    Small angle scattering for pharmaceutical applications: From drugs to drug delivery system.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Wallace Arthur, National University of Ireland, Galway.
    Summary: "Are we alone in the universe, or are there other life-forms 'out there'? This is one of the most scientifically and philosophically important questions that humanity can ask. Now, in the early 2020s, we are tantalizingly close to an answer. As this book shows, the answer will almost certainly be that life-forms are to be found across the Milky Way and beyond. They will be thinly spread, to be sure. Yet the number of inhabited planets probably runs into the trillions. Some are close enough for us to detect evidence of life by analysing their atmospheres. This evidence may be found within a couple of decades. Its arrival will be momentous. But even before it arrives we can anticipate what life elsewhere will be like by examining the ecology and evolution of life on Earth. This book considers the current state of play in relation to these titanic issues"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Ronald F. van Vollenhoven.
    Contents:
    Disease overview
    General treatment aspects
    Overview of biologic therapies
    Cytokine inhibitors
    B-cell directed therapy
    T-cell directed therapy
    Novel biologics and small molecules with biologic-like effects
    Strategies for the optimal use of biologic agents in rheumatoid arthritis
    Considerations for special patient populations
    Conclusions and future outlook.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] James P. Stannard, James L. Cook, Lisa A. Fortier.
    Contents:
    US definitions, current use, and FDA stance on use of platelet-rich plasma in sports medicine / Knut Beitzel, Donald Allen, John Apostolakos, Ryan P. Russell, Mary Beth McCarthy, Gregory J. Gallo, Mark P. Cote, and Augustus D. Mazzocca
    European definitions, current use, and EMA stance of platelet-rich plasma in sports medicine / Stefano Fiorentino, Alice Roffi, Giuseppe Filardo, Maurilio Marcacci, and Elizaveta Kon
    FDA regulation of adult stem cell therapies as used in sports medicine / Mary Ann Chirba, Berkley Sweetapple, Charles P. Hannon, and John A. Anderson
    Cellular chondroplasty : a new technology for joint regeneration / Mary Murphy and Frank Barry
    Autologous-conditioned serum : evidence for use in the knee / David D. Frisbie
    Role of platelet-rich plasma in articular cartilage injury and disease / Randy Mascarenhas, Bryan M. Saltzman, Lisa A. Fortier, and Brian J. Cole
    Use of platelet-rich plasma for patellar tendon and medial collateral ligament injuries : best current clinical practice / Isabel Andia and Nicola Maffulli
    Can platelet-rich plasma enhance anterior cruciate ligament and meniscal repair? / Ian D. Hutchinson, Scott A. Rodeo, Gabriel S. Perrone, Martha M. Murray
    How should we evaluate outcomes for use of biologics in the knee? / Christopher M. LaPrade, Evan W. James, Robert F. LaPrade, Lars Engebretsen
    Biologics used in bone healing / Brett D. Crist and Gregory J. Della Rocca
    Clinical decision making for use of biologics in orthopaedic practice / James L. Cook and James P. Stannard.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2015
  • Digital
    Augustus D. Mazzocca, Adam D. Lindsay.
    Summary: "Designed with the practicing clinician in mind, Biologics in Orthopaedic Surgery provides a succinct, easy-to-digest overview of the integration of biologics (platelet-rich-plasma [PRP], bone marrow aspirate [BMA], and stem cells) into today's orthopaedic practice. Covering relevant basic science as well as clinical applications, this concise reference takes a head-to-toe approach to the emerging role of orthobiologics for specific conditions and procedures, in addition to future directions for implementation"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Introduction. The role of OrthoBiologics in orthopedics
    FDA regulations and impact
    Section 2: Basic science. Growth factors
    Cells
    Tissues
    Section 3: Clinical applications in sports medicine. Biologics in sports medicine: introduction
    Rotator cuff augmentation
    Bone Loss in the upper extremity
    Preserving articular cartilage in the knee
    Orthobiologics in osteoarthritis
    Ligament reconstruction in the knee
    Treating the subchondral environment and avascular necrosis
    Section 4: Clinical applications in general orthopaedics. Biologics in hand and wrist surgery
    Biologic augmentation in peripheral nerve repair
    Biologics in spine surgery
    Biologics in foot and ankle surgery
    Biologics in fracture care
    Biologics in musculoskeletal oncology
    Section 5: Future directions. regenerative engineering
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Ivan D. Montoya, editor.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    PART I: Vaccines: Introduction
    Nicotine
    Cocaine
    Heroin
    Metamphetamine
    PART II: Monoclonal antibodies: Introduction
    Cocaine
    Metamphetamine
    PCP
    PART III: Enzymes: Introduction
    Butyrylcholinesterase
    Cocaine Esterase
    PART IV: New strategies to optimize the development of biologics: Adenovirus based vaccines
    Nanotechnology based vaccines
    Protein Nanoparticles
    DNA Scaffolded Vaccines
    Single Hapten Conjugate Therapeutic Vaccine
    Vaccine Adjuvants
    Laser Adjuvant
    Peptide Conjugates & Cytokine Adjuvants
    T. brucei: A Platform for Immunization
    Vaccines for SUDs and HIV infection
    New Monoclonal Antibodies
    Protein Engineered for Controlled Duration of Action
    PART V: Ethical aspects of biologics to treat SUDs.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Ludwig von Bertalanffy.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    QH331 .B46
    1
  • Digital
    Ramasamy Santhanam.
    Summary: Seas and oceans cover 71% of the earth's surface and they are home to 80% of all life found on the planet . Among the different components of marine life, the phylum Cnidaria (formerly Coelenterata) has been reported to be responsible for more envenomations than any other marine phylum. It is believed that 2% of its known 11000 species are venomous to humans. Incidents caused by jellyfish are common all around the globe, with serious manifestations and occasional deaths reported in some countries. The Australian box jellyfish, Chironex fleckeri, has been reported to be very dangerous to humans, as contact with its tentacles can provoke immediate cardiovascular collapse and death within minutes. Though other volumes on venomous marine fauna are available, this is the first comprehensive book focusing on venomous marine cnidarians. It is a valuable text-cum-reference resource for researchers, teachers and students of various disciplines, including fisheries science, marine biotechnology and marine biology and for university and college libraries. It is also a useful guide for beachgoers, divers, physicians and environmentalists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Biology of Marine Cnidarians
    Chapter 3. Biology and Ecology of Venomous Marine hydrozoans
    Chapter 4. Biology and Ecology of the Venomous Marine true jellyfish
    Chapter 5. Biology and Ecology of the Venomous Marine Box Jellyfish
    Chapter 6. Biology and Ecology of the Venomous Marine Anthozoans
    Chapter 7. Venomology of Marine Cnidarians.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Ajaykumar Vishwakarma, Jeffrey M. Karp.
    Contents:
    I. Biology of stem cell niches and molecular mechanisms
    The need to study, mimic, and target stem cell niches
    Harnessing the biology of stem cells' niche
    Pluripotent stem cell microenvironment
    Regulation of hematopoietic stem cell dynamics by molecular niche signaling
    HSC niche: regulation of mobilization and homing
    Neuronal stem cells niches of the brain
    Cardiovascular stem cell niche
    Intestinal epithelial Lgr5+ stem cell niche and organoids
    The epithelial stem cell niche in skin
    The satellite cell niche in skeletal muscle
    The cancer stem cell niche
    Cellular senescence and stem cell niche
    Biochemical and physical cues in the stem cell niche directing cell fate
    Matrix chemistry controlling stem cell behavior
    Matrix growth factor and surface ligand presentation
    Effects of matrix mechanical forces and geometry on stem cell behavior
    Wettability effect on stem cell behavior
    Fluid flow control of stem cells with investigation of mechanotransduction pathways
    Hypoxia regulation of stem cell: mechanisms, biological properties, and applications
    III. Designing smart biomaterials to mimic and control stem cell niche
    Polymer design and development
    Design and development of ceramics and glasses
    Surface functionalization of biomaterials
    Biofunctional hydrogels for three-dimensional stem cell culture
    Technologies to engineer cell substrate mechanics in hydrogels
    Micro- and nanosurface patterning technologies
    Self-assembled nanostructures (SANs)
    Biometric nanofibers as artificial stem cell niche
    IV. Bioengineering strategies to model synthetic stem cell niches
    Employing microfluidic devices to induce concentration gradients
    Engineering niches for embryonic and induced pluripotent stem cells
    Engineering niches for cardiovascular tissue regeneration
    Engineering niches for blood vessel regeneration
    Engineering niches for bone tissue regeneration
    Engineering vascular niche for bone tissue regeneration
    Engineering niches for cartilage tissue regeneration
    Engineering niches for stem and progenitor cell differentiation into immune cells
    Engineering niches for skin and wound healing
    Designing stem cell niche for liver development and regeneration
    Engineering the niche for intestinal regeneration.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Donald W. Duszynski, Jana Kvičerová and R. Scott Seville.
    Summary: The fundamental concept of The Biology and Identification of the Coccidia (Apicomplexa) of Carnivores of the World is to provide an up-to-date reference guide to the identification, taxonomy, and known biology of apicomplexan intestinal and tissue parasites of carnivores including, but not limited to, geographic distribution, prevalence, sporulation, prepatent and patent periods, site(s) of infection in the definitive and (if known) intermediate hosts, endogenous development, cross-transmission, pathology, phylogeny, and (if known) their treatments. These data will allow easy parasite recognition with a summation of virtually everything now known about the biology of each parasite species covered. The last (very modest) and only treatise published on this subject was in 1981 so this book fills a fundamental gap in our knowledge of what is now known, and what is not, about the coccidian parasites that infect and sometimes kill carnivores and/or their prey that can harbor intermediate stages, including many domestic and game animals.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Todd M. Zimmerman, Shaji K. Kumar, editors.
    Summary: This unique book focuses on the non-myeloma plasma cell dyscrasias. A key resource for this group of diseases, the book features the latest in emerging knowledge and therapeutic developments, including novel therapies. Each disease-specific chapter discusses biology, disease course, and appropriate therapeutic interventions, covering plasma cell leukemia, plasmacytoma, POEMS Syndrome and Castleman's Disease, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, immunoglobin deposition disease, and cryoglobulinemic syndromes, among others. The only book dedicated to this intriguing family of diseases, Biology and Management of Unusual Plasma Cell Dyscrasias will be a long-lasting reference for clinicians and scientists alike.

    Contents:
    Plasma cell leukemia
    PLASMACYTOMA
    CURRENT APPROACH TO DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT
    POEMS Syndrome and Castleman's Disease
    Waldenström macroglobulinemia
    Light Chain Amyloidosis
    Immunoglobulin Deposition Disease
    Cryoglobulinemic Syndromes: Diagnosis and Management
    Idiopathic Systemic Capillary Leak Syndrome (Clarkson Disease)
    Renal Disease Associated with Monoclonal Gammopathy.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Vinod Pullarkat, Guido Marcucci, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise update on current understanding of the biology of acute and chronic leukemias and other bone marrow neoplasms, including myelodysplastic and myeloproliferative disorders, and explores new and emerging treatments. There is a particular focus on the molecular abnormalities that are drivers of leukemia and on their detection by modern molecular techniques. Knowledge of the ways in which genomic and metabolic abnormalities in the hematologic neoplasms affect prognosis and treatment decision making is reviewed. Detailed attention is devoted to targeted therapies, including novel drugs, and to potential targets for future drug development. In addition, readers find in-depth discussion of cellular and antibody-based immunotherapies as well as the role of hematopoietic stem cell transplantation in the treatment of leukemias and bone marrow malignancies. The book is of special interest for hematologists, oncologists, and cancer researchers; it is also of value for hematology trainees and medical students.

    Contents:
    Advances in diagnosis and risk stratification of leukemias and bone marrow neoplasms
    Genetics and diagnostic approach to lymphoblastic leukemia
    Acute promyelocytic leukemia: update on risk stratification and treatment
    Current and emerging therapies for AML
    Current management and new developments in treatment of ALL
    Contemporary therapy of CML
    MDS: Pathogenesis and therapy
    Chronic lymphocytic leukemia: Biology and therapy
    Biology and current treatment of Myeloproliferative neoplasms
    Systemic Mastocytosis: Pathology and treatment
    Adoptive T-cell therapy and other novel immunotherapies for leukemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC643 .B56 2021
    1
  • Print
    Begleiter, Henri; Kissin, Benjamin.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC565 .B615
    7
  • Digital/Print
    Weinberg, Robert A.
    Summary: Thoroughly updated and incorporating the most important advances in the fast-growing field of cancer biology, This book is a textbook for students studying the molecular and cellular bases of cancer at the undergraduate, graduate, and medical school levels. The principles of cancer biology are presented in an organized, cogent, and in-depth manner. The clarity of writing, supported by an extensive full-color art program and numerous pedagogical features, makes the book accessible and engaging. The information unfolds through the presentation of key experiments that give readers a sense of discovery and provide insights into the conceptual foundation underlying modern cancer biology. Besides its value as a textbook, this book is a useful reference for individuals working in biomedical laboratories and for clinical professionals. Every copy of the book comes with an updated DVD-ROM containing the book's art program, a selection of movies, audio file mini-lectures, Supplementary Sidebars, and a Media Guide.

    Contents:
    The biology and genetics of cells and organisms
    The nature of cancer
    Tumor viruses
    Cellular oncogenes
    Growth factors, receptors, and cancer
    Cytoplasmic signaling circuitry programs many of the traits of cancer
    Tumor suppressor genes
    Prb and control of the cell cycle clock
    P53 and apoptosis: master guardian and executioner
    Eternal life : cell immortalization and tumorigenesis
    Multi-step tumorigenesis
    Maintenance of genomic integrity and the development of cancer
    Dialogue replaces monologue : heterotypic interactions and the biology of angiogenesis
    Moving out : invasion and metastasis
    Crowd control : tumor immunology and immunotherapy
    The rational treatment of cancer.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2014
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Print
    edited by Victor Ginsburg and Phillips Robbins.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP701 .B49
    1
  • Print
    Georg Hacker, editor
    Contents:
    Deconstructing the Chlamydial cell wall / Anna Klöckner [and three others]
    One face of Chlamydia trachomatis: the infectious elementary body / Mathilde M. Cossé, Richard D. Hayward and Agathe Subtil
    Manipulation of the host cell cytoskeleton by Chlamydia / Ana T. Nogueira, Antonio T. Pedrosa and Rey A. Carabeo
    Subversion of cell-autonomous host defense by Chlamydia infection / Annette Fischer and Thomas Rudel
    The hidden genomics of Chlamydia trachomatis / James Hadfield [and three others]
    Advances and obstacles in the genetic dissection of Chlamydial virulence / Julie A. Brothwell [and three others]
    Chlamydia trachomatis as the cause of infectious infertility: acute, repetitive or persistent long-term infection? / Larissa Schuchardt and Jan Rupp
    Immunopathogenesis of Chlamydial infections / Ashlesh K. Murphy, Weidang Li and Kyle H. Ramsey
    Chalmydia trachomatis: protective adaptive responses and prospects for a vaccine / Taylor B. Poston and Tone Darville.
  • Digital
    Mukesh K. Meghvansi, Ajit Varma, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the latest findings on fundamental aspects of composting, the interaction of various microorganisms, and the underlying mechanisms. In addition to addressing modern tools and techniques used for composting research, it provides an overview of potential composting applications in both agriculture and environmental reclamation. Composting is the process of organic waste decomposition, mediated by microorganisms. The end-product is called 'compost and can be used as a supplement to improve soil fertility. As the municipal waste generated in most developing countries contains a substantial amount of organic matter suitable for composting, this technology offers a win-win opportunity for stakeholders in terms of disposing of organic waste and providing organic fertilizers for agriculture. In addition, using compost reduces the dependency on harmful chemical fertilizers, and represents a sustainable and environmentally friendly alternative.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Composting: Paradigms and Mechanisms
    Chapter 1: Compost and Compost Tea Microbiology: The "-Omics ́́Era
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Genomic Approaches
    1.2.1 Genomics
    1.2.2 Metagenomics
    1.3 Postgenomic Approaches
    1.3.1 Metatranscriptomics
    1.3.2 Metaproteomics and Metaproteogenomics
    1.3.3 Metametabolomics
    1.4 Conclusions and Future Work
    References
    Chapter 2: Biological Sterilisation, Detoxification and Stimulation of Cucurbitacin-Containing Manure
    2.1 Introduction 2.2 Biosynthesis and Bioactivities of Cucurbitacins
    2.3 Preparation of Cucurbitacin-Containing Manure
    2.3.1 Cultivation of Cucumis africanus
    2.3.2 Preparation of Nemafric-BL Stock Solution
    2.3.3 Preparation of Nemafric-Manure
    2.3.3.1 Potential Sterilisation
    2.3.3.2 Potential Detoxification and Pasteurisation
    2.3.3.3 Potential Stimulation
    2.4 Application and Effects of Nemafric-Manure
    2.4.1 Effects on Plant Variables
    2.4.1.1 Dry Shoot Mass and Fresh Fruit Yield
    2.4.1.2 Effects on Plant-Parasitic Nematodes
    2.4.1.3 Effects on Fusarium Species 2.4.1.4 Effects on Soil Variables
    2.5 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 3: Nematode Succession During Composting Process
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Soil Structure
    3.3 Composting Process and Its Role in Agriculture
    3.3.1 Composting Process and Soil Suppressiveness
    3.3.2 Relationship Between Phytopathogenic Nematodes and Tillage of Soil
    3.4 Soil Nematodes
    3.4.1 Nematode Community Structure
    3.4.2 Colonizer-Persister (Cp) Groupings of Nematode Taxa
    3.4.3 Nematode as Biological Soil Indicators
    3.5 Nematodes Succession During Composting Process 3.6 Conclusions and Future Perspectives
    References
    Chapter 4: Review on Physiological Effects of Vermicomposts on Plants
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 An Overview of Plant Growth-Affecting Activity of Vermicomposts
    4.2.1 Seed Germination
    4.2.2 Plant Vegetative Growth
    4.3 Physiological Effects Associated with Mineral Nutrition: Changes in Soil Mineral Nutrient Availability
    4.4 Physiological Effects Associated with Mineral Nutrition: Changes in Mineral Nutrient Uptake
    4.5 Vermicompost Substances with Plant Growth-Regulating Activity
    4.5.1 Plant Hormones 4.5.2 Humic Substances
    4.6 Activation of Metabolic Processes
    4.6.1 Photosynthesis-Related Parameters
    4.6.2 Defense Responses
    4.7 Evaluation of Vermicompost Quality Based on Physiological Criteria
    4.8 Practical Implications: Use in Different Farming Systems
    4.9 Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: Interaction of Earthworm Activity with Soil Structure and Enzymes
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Earthworm Ecotypes
    5.2.1 Compost Earthworms
    5.2.2 Epigeic Earthworms
    5.2.3 Endogeic Earthworms
    5.2.4 Anecic Earthworms
    5.3 Soil Enzymes
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ahmed Al-Harrasi, Abdul Latif Khan, Sajjad Asaf, Ahmed Al-Rawahi.
    Summary: This book provides insight into the biology and genomics of the genus Boswellia (family Burseraceae), a natural resource used for the production of frankincense, an oleo-gum resin. The Boswellia species are ecologically, medicinally, commercially and culturally important. Significantly contributing to the paucity of comprehensive literature on this genus, this volume provides a detailed discussion on the genomics, physiology and ecology of Boswellia. The chapters cover a wide range of topics, including taxonomy, distribution, genetic diversity and microbiology. The production process of frankincense and its impact on the species are presented as well. In light of the recent decline of various Boswellia populations, species propagation and conservation are discussed. Plant scholars, ecologists and conservation biologists will find this book to be an important and informative reference.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Introduction; References; Contents; About the Authors;
    Chapter 1: Frankincense and Human Civilization: A Historical Review; Etymology of Frankincense; Oleoresin (Tears of the Sun); Frankincense Trade Route; Frankincense Trade and Its Economic Importance; Religious and Cultural Uses; Cosmetic Use; Medicinal Use; References;
    Chapter 2: Taxonomy, Distribution and Ecology of Boswellia; Burseraceae Family; Boswellia Genus; Historical Perspectives on Boswellia Taxonomy; Boswellia Species Description; Distribution of Boswellia Throughout the World; Boswellia sacra Flueck Boswellia ameero Balf. f. Boswellia dioscoridis Thulin; Boswellia popoviana Hepper; Boswellia nana Hepper; Boswellia elongata Balf. f; Boswellia socotrana Balf. f.; Boswellia serrata Roxb. ex Colebr; Boswellia ovalifoliolata Balakr & A.N. Henry; Boswellia rivae; Boswellia frereana Bird; Boswellia neglecta S. Moore; Boswellia dalzielii Hutch; Boswellia carterii Flueck; Boswellia bullata Thul. & Gifri; Boswellia globosa Thul.; Boswellia pirottae Chiov; B. papyrifera; Boswellia microphylla Chiov; References;
    Chapter 3: Frankincense: Tapping, Harvesting and Production; What Is Resin? Boswellia Tapping Influences Its Carbohydrate MetabolismBoswellia Tapping Influences Leaf Gas Exchange Processes; Tapping Causes the Regulation of the Lipid Layer and JA Biosynthesis; Effects of Incisions on Endogenous Salicylic Acid Regulation; Effect of Wounding on Endogenous Abscisic Acid Regulation; Enhanced Elicitation of Endogenous GA in Boswellia; Boswellia Gene Expression Patterns During Wounding; References;
    Chapter 5: Propagation and Conservation of Boswellia sacra; Ecology and Environmental Conditions; Environmental Effects on Plant Morphology; Soil Preparation and Planting How Do the Trees Produce Resin?How Is the Resin Synthesized?; Resin-Producing Plants; Composition of Frankincense Resin; Resin Production After Tapping; Uses of Frankincense; Production of Frankincense; Marketing of Frankincense; Climatic Changes Influencing Frankincense Production; References;
    Chapter 4: Frankincense Tree Physiology and Its Responses to Wounding Stress; Wounding Stress Physiology in Plants; Wounding or Tapping of Frankincense Trees; Boswellia Physiochemical Responses to Tapping; Effect of Wounding on Essential Nutrients and Amino Acid Accumulation Irrigation of Boswellia PlantsNutrient Requirements for Boswellia Growth; Cultivation Practices and Conservation of Boswellia Populations; Pollination and Seed Formation; Germination Rate; Macropropagation; Seedling Propagation in Nurseries; Planting and Protecting Seedlings; Root Cutting Propagation; Root Sucker Propagation; Root Tuber Propagation; Seedling and Rooted Cutting Requirements; Micropropagation; In Vitro Micropropagation of Boswellia; Axillary Bud Break and Axillary Shoot Proliferation; Effects of Seasonal Changes on Explants; Effects of Phytohormones
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Marlene Oeffinger, Daniel Zenklusen, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alexander Birbrair, editor.
    Summary: Pericytes were originally discovered and named more than hundred years ago as contractile cells around the blood vessel endothelial cells. Due to the lack of exclusive markers, pericytes are now defined by a combination of location, morphology and gene expression. Pericytes are attracting increasing attention as important regulators during development and during normal and disturbed organ function. In recent years, remarkable progress has been made in the identification and characterization of pericytes subpopulations and their amazing functions using state-of-art techniques. These advantages facilitated identification of molecular basis of interaction between these cells with several other more well studied cell types, and revealed key signals derived from pericytes involved in homeostasis, regeneration, and disease regulation. In the last ten years, several unexpected roles of pericytes have been discovered. It has been demonstrated that pericytes from different tissues differ in their properties as well as functions. Even more, pericytes are heterogeneous also within the same organ. This book is will describe the major contributions of pericytes to different organs biology in physiological and pathological conditions. The book will teach the readers about this so special cell type that 10 years ago was almost completely forgotten, and it was associated basically only with vascular stability. Recently, it become a very hot topic to work in. Several articles in Nature, Science and Cell have been and are being currently published about this cell type. These recent works are revealing how important those cells are for before unimaginable biological processes. Thus, this book will update us on what are the most novel functions attributed to these cells. Also, will introduce to the young generation all the history about these cells from when they were discovered in different organs till where we are now in this field. So it will be a great book for both cell biology students as well as researchers that will have an update on these cells biology in different organs.

    Contents:
    In Vivo Optical Imaging and Manipulation of Brain Pericytes
    The complex and integral roles of pericytes within the neurovascular unit in health and disease
    Role of pericytes in brain metastasis
    Effects of Cytomegalovirus on Pericytes
    Pericytes in Retinal Ischemia
    Inflammatory mediators released by brain pericytes as sensors and effectors in blood-brain barrier dysfunction
    TLR-4 signaling in Pericytes
    EphA7+ Multipotent Pericytes and Their Roles in Multicellular Organisms
    Skeletal Muscle-Resident Pericyte Responses to Conditions of Use and Disuse
    Pericytes in myocardial diseases
    Adventitial and skeletal muscle pericytes in health and in ischemic tissue regeneration.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Fusco, Alessandro Minelli.
    Summary: Reproduction is a fundamental feature of life, it is the way life persists across the ages. This book offers new, wider vistas on this fundamental biological phenomenon, exploring how it works through the whole tree of life. It explores facets such as asexual reproduction, parthenogenesis, sex determination and reproductive investment, with a taxonomic coverage extended over all the main groups - animals, plants including 'algae', fungi, protists and bacteria. It collates into one volume perspectives from varied disciplines - including zoology, botany, microbiology, genetics, cell biology, developmental biology, evolutionary biology, animal and plant physiology, and ethology - integrating information into a common language. Crucially, the book aims to identify the commonalties among reproductive phenomena, while demonstrating the diversity even amongst closely related taxa. Its integrated approach makes this a valuable reference book for students and researchers, as well as an effective entry point for deeper study on specific topics.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Héctor M. Alvarez.
    Summary: Rhodococcus, a metabolically versatile actinobacterium which is frequently found in the environment, has gained increasing interest due to its potential biotechnological applications. This Microbiology Monographs volume provides a thorough review of the various aspects of the biochemistry, physiology and genetics of the Genus Rhodococcus. Following an overview of its taxonomy, chapters cover the structural aspects of rhodococcal cellular envelope, genomes and plasmids, metabolic and catabolic pathways, such as those of aromatic compounds, steroids and nitriles, and desulfurization pathways, as well as adaption to organic solvents. Further reviews discuss applications of Rhodococcus in the bioremediation of contaminated environments, in triacylglycerols accumulation, and in phytopathogenic strategies, as well as the potential of biosurfactants. In addition, properties of these bacteria to thrive and survive in oligotrophic environments are also discussed. A final chapter describes the sole pathogenic Rhodococcus member, R. equi.

    Contents:
    Refined Systematics of the Genus Rhodococcus Based on Whole Genome Analyses
    Genomics of Rhodococcus
    Central Metabolism of Species of the Genus Rhodococcus
    Oligotrophic Growth of Rhodococcus
    Adaptation of Rhodococcus to Organic Solvents
    Degradation of Alkanes in Rhodococcus
    Biodegradation of Nitriles by Rhodococcus
    The Desulfurization Pathway in Rhodococcus
    Bioremediation of Contaminated Environments Using Rhodococcus
    Production of Trehalolipid Biosurfactants by Rhodococcus
    Biology of Triacylglycerol Accumulation by Rhodococcus
    Interaction of Rhodococcus with Metals and Biotechnological Applications
    Plant-Associated Rhodococcus Species, for Better and for Worse.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Oliver Betz, Ulrich Irmler, Jan Klimaszewski, editors.
    Summary: "Rove beetles (Staphylinidae) are common elements of the soil biota, living in the litter and deeper soil layers. Although they are one of the most diverse and speciose groups of insects, no comprehensive books on their general evolution and ecology are as yet available. This book fills that gap, discussing significant aspects and active research examples in the fields of phylogeny and systematics, ecology and conservation, and reproduction and development. The combination of review chapters and case studies provides an excellent introduction to the biology of rove beetles and enables readers to become familiar with active research fields in this megadiverse group of beetles. Offering easy access to these fields, it also demonstrates how staphylinids are used as bioindicators in applied ecosystem research, including that concerning conservation issues. Experienced scientists and beginners alike find the diversity of subjects covered intriguing and inspiring for continuing and starting their own research. The book is intended for students and researchers in biology and zoology (entomology), including morphologists, ecologists, soil scientists, evolutionary biologists, paleontologists, biogeographers, taxonomists and systematists."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Phylogeny of the family Staphylinidae
    A review of the fossil history of Staphylinoidea
    Biodiversity and geographic patterns of Neotropical Staphylinidae
    Adventive species of rove beetles in Canada
    Effect of environmental conditions on distribution patterns
    A review of Nearctic rove beetles (Staphylinidae) specialized on the burrows and nests of vertebrates
    Rove beetles as bioindicators in agroecosystems
    Parasites of Staphylinidae
    The biology of Steninae
    Biology of acarophagous Scydmeninae
    The evolution of genitalia, spermatophores
    Morphology of the endophallic flagellum
    Morphological diversity of immature Scydmaeninae.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bernard Swynghedauw.
    Summary: This book describes the fundamental process of senescence, and reviews a new concept developed by a number of research groups that is based on cellular senescence and its secretome. This concept provides a basic explanation of the main physiological and pathological features of senescence, and delineates possibilities for "treating" it. Following an introduction to the emerging medical landscape, the increasing incidence of a new epidemiological group (age-related "chronic non-transmissible diseases"), and the multiple origins of aging, the book explores and characterizes the senescent cell, which is linked to benign and pathological age-related manifestations. In turn, the closing chapters discuss how to "treat" or "prevent" the aging process, underscoring the central role of physical exercise and caloric reduction as compared to new senolytic approaches. Appendices are also provided, and address circadian rhythms, telomere shortening, diabetic cardiomyopathy, and senescence in plants and bacteria. Given its scope, the book will primarily be of interest to geriatricians, but will also appeal to a wider range of clinicians.

    Contents:
    Intro; Acknowledgment; Abbreviations; Contents;
    1: Introduction; References;
    2: The Emerging Medical Landscape; 2.1 The Overwhelming Human Responsibility; 2.2 The Two Recent Epidemiological Transitions; 2.2.1 Throughout the World; 2.3 The Emergencies; 2.3.1 The Two Out-Of-Control Risks: Nuclear Power and Poverty; 2.3.2 Age, the First of the Emerging Risks; 2.3.3 Incidence of Non-Transmissible Chronic Diseases; 2.3.4 Other Age-Linked Diseases; References;
    3: The Origins of Ageing; 3.1 Genome Instability; 3.2 Genetics and Heredity; 3.3 Telomeres and Telomerase; 3.4 Proteostasis 3.5 Epigenetics3.6 Microbiota; References;
    4: The Senescent Cell, SC; 4.1 The Overview; 4.2 Consequences of Stem/Precursor Cell Proliferation Arrest; 4.3 The SC Secretome; 4.4 Fibrosis; References;
    5: The Nonfatal Clinical Manifestations of Ageing; 5.1 Hair, Skin, Adipose Tissue; 5.2 Bones, Muscles, and Joints; 5.3 General Conditions, Frailty Syndrome, Fluid Balance, Immune System; 5.4 Biological Rhythms; 5.5 The Senses and Sensitivity; References;
    6: Age-Linked Non-Transmissible Diseases; 6.1 Cancers; 6.2 Neurodegenerative Diseases; 6.3 Type 2 Diabetes and Metabolic Syndrome 6.4 Lungs, Kidneys and Liver Diseases6.5 The Senescent CV System; 6.5.1 The Senescent Myocardium; 6.5.2 The Senescent Vascular System; 6.5.3 Consequences of Change in Characteristic Arterial Impedance; 6.5.4 The Clinical Manifestations of Atherosclerosis; 6.5.5 Heart Failure in Senescence; 6.5.6 Atrial Fibrillation; References;
    7: How to Treat or Prevent, or Slow Down, Cellular Ageing and Senescence?; 7.1 The Various Attempts at Reprogramming; 7.2 Calorie Restriction; 7.3 Physical Exercise; References;
    8: Senescence: A Darwinian Evolutionary Perspective 8.1 Genetic Versus Environmental Factors in Senescence8.2 Senescence and Inflammation; References;
    9: Conclusions; 9.1 The Accession of Gerontechnologies; 9.2 The Adaptive Capacities; 9.3 The Gerontological Aspects of the Making of Ignorance; References;
    10: Summary; References; Annex A: Senescence in Plants and Bacteria; Annex B: Theories of Ageing; Complexity: Is Senescence Linked to a Loss of the Complexity That Is Inherently Linked to Life?; Annex C: Telomeres and Telomerase; Annex D: MicroRNAs, miRs; Annex E: Circadian Rhythms, a Fundamental Basis of Life; The Hypothalamic Clock Molecular MechanismsThe Peripheral Clocks; The Different Biological Rhythms: Sleep/Wakefulness; Hormones; Temperature; Molecular Correlations; Cell Physiology; Annex F: The Diabetic Heart; From a Biological Point of View; Glossary; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Christian E. Badr.
    Contents:
    Bioluminescence imaging : basics and practical limitations / Christian E. Badr
    Extraction and quantification of adenosine triphosphate in mammalian tissues and cells / Junji Chida and Hiroshi Kido
    Neuronal network imaging in acute slices using Ca2+ sensitive bioluminescent reporter / Ludovic Tricoire and Bertrand Lambolez
    Gaussia luciferase-based mycoplasma detection assay in mammalian cell culture / M. Hannah Degeling ... [et al.]
    Split gaussia luciferase for imaging ligand-receptor binding / Kathryn E. Luker and Gary D. Luker
    Video-rate bioluminescence imaging of protein secretion from a living cell / Takahiro Suzuki and Satoshi Inouye
    Bioluminescence reporter gene-based detection of microRNAs / Hae Young Ko, Young Sik Lee, and Soonhag Kim
    Monitoring of transcriptional dynamics of HIF and NFKB activities / Miguel A.S. Cavadas and Alex Cheong
    Real-time bioluminescent tracking of cellular population dynamics / Dan Close ... [et al.]
    Fabrication of bioluminescent capsules and live-cell imaging / Sung Bae Kim
    Bioluminescent imaging of spontaneously occurring tumors in immunocompetent ODD-luciferase bearing transgenic mice / Scott J. Goldman and Shengkan Jin
    Blood-based assay with secreted gaussia luciferase to monitor tumor metastasis / Hiroshi Yamashita, Dan T. Nguyen, and Euiheon Chung
    Bioluminescence imaging of fungal biofilm development in live animals / Greetje Vande Velde ... [et al.]
    Bioluminescent imaging of bacteria during mouse infection / Jonathan M. Warawa and Matthew B. Lawrenz
    Cell-based bioluminescence screening assays / Romain J. Amante and Christian E. Badr
    Bioluminescence-based monitoring of virus vector- mediated gene transfer in mice / Casey A. Maguire
    Simultaneous in vivo monitoring of regulatory and effector T lymphocytes using secreted gaussia luciferase, firefly luciferase, and secreted alkaline phosphatase / Grant K. Lewandrowski ... [et al.]
    Multiplex functional bioluminescent reporters using gaussia luciferase fused to epitope tags in an immunobinding assay / Sjoerd van Rijn, Thomas Würdinger, and Jonas Nilsson
    Noninvasive in vivo monitoring of extracellular vesicles / Charles P. Lai, Bakhos A. Tannous, and Xandra O. Breakefield
    In vitro and in vivo demonstrations of fluorescence by unbound excitation from luminescence (FUEL) / Joe Dragavon ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nusrat Rabbee.
    Summary: The world is awash in data. This volume of data will continue to increase. In the pharmaceutical industry, much of this data explosion has happened around biomarker data. Great statisticians are needed to derive understanding from these data. This book will guide you as you begin the journey into communicating, understanding and synthesizing biomarker data.-From the Foreword, Jared Christensen, Vice President, Biostatistics Early Clinical Development, Pfizer, Inc. Biomarker Analysis in Clinical Trials with R offers practical guidance to statisticians in the pharmaceutical industry on how to incorporate biomarker data analysis in clinical trial studies. The book discusses the appropriate statistical methods for evaluating pharmacodynamic, predictive and surrogate biomarkers for delivering increased value in the drug development process. The topic of combining multiple biomarkers to predict drug response using machine learning is covered. Featuring copious reproducible code and examples in R, the book helps students, researchers and biostatisticians get started in tackling the hard problems of designing and analyzing trials with biomarkers. Features: Analysis of pharmacodynamic biomarkers for lending evidence target modulation. Design and analysis of trials with a predictive biomarker. Framework for analyzing surrogate biomarkers. Methods for combining multiple biomarkers to predict treatment response. Offers a biomarker statistical analysis plan. R code, data and models are given for each part: including regression models for survival and longitudinal data, as well as statistical learning models, such as graphical models and penalized regression models. Nusrat Rabbee is a biostatistician and data scientist at Rabbee & Associates, where she creates innovative solutions to help companies accelerate drug and diagnostic development for patients. Her research interest lies in the intersection of data science and personalized medicine. She has extensive experience in bioinformatics, clinical statistics and high-dimensional data analyses. She has co-discovered the RLMM algorithm for genotyping Affymetrix SNP chips and co-invented a high-dimensional molecular signature for cancer. She has spent over 17 years in the pharmaceutical and diagnostics industry focusing on biomarker development. She has taught statistics at UC Berkeley for 4 years.

    Contents:
    Section I Pharmacodynamic Biomarkers 1. Introduction 2. Toxicology Studies 3. Bioequivalence Studies 4. Cross-Sectional Profile of Pharmacodynamics Biomarkers 5. Timecourse Profile of Pharmacodynamics Biomarkers 6. Evaluating Multiple Biomarkers Section II Predictive Biomarkers 7. Introduction 8. Operational Characteristics of Proof-of-Concept Trials with Biomarker-Positive and -Negative Subgroups 9. A Framework for Testing Biomarker Subgroups in Confirmatory Trials 10. Cutoff Determination of Continuous Predictive Biomarker for a Biomarker-Treatment Interaction 11. Cutoff Determination of Continuous Predictive Biomarker Using Group Sequential Methodology 12. Adaptive Threshold Design 13. Adaptive Seamless Design (ASD) Section III Surrogate Endpoints 14. Introduction 15. Requirement # 1: Trial Level
    Correlation Between Hazard Ratios in Progression-Free Survival and Overall Survival Across Trials 16. Requirement # 2: Individual Level
    Assess the Correlation Between the Surrogate and True Endpoints After Adjusting for Treatment (R2 indiv) 17. Examining the Proportion of Treatment Effect in AIDS Clinical Trials 18. Concluding Remarks Section IV Combining Multiple Biomarkers 19. Introduction 20. Regression-Based Models 21. Tree-Based Models 22. Cluster Analysis 23. Graphical Models Section V Biomarker Statistical Analysis Plan
    Digital Access TandFonline 2020
  • Digital
    Thomas D'Hooghe, editor.
    Contents:
    Building translational research infrastructure and access to expertise for biomarker discovery in cancer / Jacqueline A. Hall
    Biomarkers of endometrial cancer / Nicolas Galazis
    Biomarker development in chronic inflammatory diseases / Aristeidis H. Katsanos [and 6 others]
    Endometriosis and diagnostic delay: the patient's perspective / Silke Apers, Eline A.F. Dancet, and Thomas D/Hooghe
    Genetic biomarkers for endometriosis / Sang Hong Lee, Yadav Sapkota, Jenny Fung, and Grant W. Montgomery
    Epidemiological and clinical risk factors for endometriosis / Leslie V. Farland [and 4 others]
    Peripheral blood biomarkers for endometriosis / Amelie Fassbender [and 4 others]
    Biomarkers for endometriosis in saliva, urine, and peritoneal fluid / Ndeye-Aicha Gueye [and 5 others]
    mRNA and miRNA biomarkers for endometriosis / Lusine Aghajanova, R.O. Burney, N.D. Tran, and Linda C. Giudice
    Proteomic biomarkers for endometriosis / Amelie Fassbender [and 4 others]
    Harmonization of clinical and laboratory data to improve biomarker discovery in endometriosis: WERF EPHect / Nilufer Rahmioglu [and 7 others]
    OMICs studies and endometriosis biomarker identification / Merli Saare [and 5 others]
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Sudhir Srivastava, PH. D, MPH.
    Contents:
    Nuts and bolts of biomarker research / Sharmistha Ghosh and Sudhir Srivastava
    Cancer genome methylation : biology, biomarker and therapeutic opportunities / Shashwat Sharad, Taduru Sreenath, Shiv Srivastava, and Albert Dobi
    Microrna biomarkers for early detection of cancer / Wendy Wang, Matthew R. Young, and Sudhir Srivastava
    Inflammation and cancer / Pamela L. Beatty, Sandra Cascio, and Olivera J Finn
    Exosomes : a valuable biomedical tool in biomarker discovery and development / Jocelyn Lee, Sharmistha Ghosh, and Sudhir Srivastava
    Epithelial-to-mesenchymal transition (EMT) : clinical implications / Elisa CWoodhouse and Suresh Mohla
    Breast cancer / Benjamin A. Katchman, Christos Patriotis, and Karen S Anderson
    Ovarian cancer / Christos Patriotis, Archana Simmons, Karen H. Lu, Robert C. Bast, Jr, and Steven J. Skates
    Esophageal cancer biomarkers / Yanxin Luo, Kishore Guda, Sanford Markowitz, Amitabh Chak, Andrew M Kaz, and William M Grady
    Predictive biomarkers for therapy in adenocarcinoma of the upper digestive tract / Heath D Skinner, Qiongrong Chen, Elena Elimova, Roopma Wadhwa, Shumei Song, and Jaffer A Ajani
    Pancreatic cancer / Sam CWang and Peter J Allen
    Colon cancer / Paul DWagner
    Prognosis and predictive biomarkers for colorectal cancer / Upender Manne, Balananda-Dhurjati Kumar Putcha, Temesgen Samuel, and Sudhir Srivastava
    Early detection of lung cancer / Mohamed Hassanein, Melinda C. Aldrich, Stephen A. Deppen, Karl E. Krueger, Eric L. Grogan, and Pierre P. Massion
    Commonalities in lung cancer and COPD / Malgorzata Wojtowicz and Eva Szabo
    Prostate cancer / Jacob Kagan, Ian M. Thompson, and Daniel W. Chan
    Improving the clinical validity of biomarker research in cancer detection / David F. Ransohoff
    Cancer overdiagnosis, ramifications and research strategies / Barbara K. Dunn and Barnett S. Kramer
    Predictive markers and driver genes from treatment trials : potential utility for early diagnosis / Brian S. Sorg, Sarfraz Memon, Kelly Y. Kim, Aniruddha Ganguly, Tracy Lively, James Tricoli, Magdalena Thurin, Lokesh Agrawal, Tawnya C. McKee, Barbara A. Conley, and J. Milburn Jessup
    Statistical consideration in predictive and prognostic markers / Fei Ye and Yu Shyr
    Clinical validation of molecular biomarkers in translational medicine / Harry B. Burke and William E. Grizzle
    Cancer biomarker assays : performance standards / Anna K Fuzery and Daniel W. Chan
    Bioethics and cancer biomarker research / Nathan Nobis, William Grizzle, and Stephen Sodeke
    Colon cancer screening / Molly Perencevich, Jennifer Inra, and Sapna Syngal.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Hideaki Shimada.
    Summary: This book sheds new light on research into liquid biopsy biomarkers for cancer screening. The chapters in the first half address exosomes, circulating cell-free DNA and autoantibodies, and main solid cancers, along with companion biomarkers - all of which serve as the basis for exploring key research questions for future clinical trials in the book's second half. The study of biomarkers has evolved rapidly thanks to advances in precision medicine. While conventional cancer biomarker research is focused on proteomics or gene analysis of resected tissue, diagnostic markers have since become significant in terms of gauging the effectiveness of molecularly targeted drugs or the likelihood of a favorable prognosis. In addition, conventional treatment strategy, which draws on archives of resected tissue samples, is now gradually being replaced by monitoring with the use of liquid biopsy, which is poised to become the new mainstream in molecular targeting therapy. The contributing authors discuss in detail biomarkers, molecular targets for treatment, monitoring markers to evaluate treatment responses, prognostic markers, and screening and early diagnosis. Accordingly, this excellent collection of texts will benefit not only oncologists, but also medical and biological researchers and pharmaceutical scientists involved in the latest cancer research.

    Contents:
    I. General Statement
    1.Exosomes
    2.Cell Free DNA
    3.Autoantibody
    4.Serum Protein
    Part II. Application to Each Cancer
    5.Head and Neck Cancer / Esophageal Cancer
    6.Gastric Cancer
    7.Colorectal Cancer
    8.Liver Cancer
    9.Pancreas Cancer
    10.Lung Cancer
    11.Breast Cancer
    12.Prostate Cancer
    13.Gynecological Cancers
    14.Malignant Pleural Mesothelioma.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sulen Sarioglu, Ozgul Sagol, Anil Aysal, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to examine all immunohistochemical and molecular pathological biomarkers that can be useful and effective in patient diagnosis, prognosis and treatment decision, especially when faced with a carcinoma of unknown primary. For this purpose, epithelial malignancies of all systems and related biomarkers are examined one by one, and to look at the subject through the metastatic regions window, biomarkers that can be used to determine the primary focus for carcinomas seen in the areas most frequently metastasized are emphasized. With this bi-directional perspective, the reader is able to find biomarkers of any type of carcinoma on a system basis, as well as access to which biomarkers can be used when faced with a metastatic carcinoma. The importance of biomarkers in patient follow-up and treatment is also conveyed through the clinician's eye, and so biomarkers are handled with a holistic approach in all aspects. This book primarily targets pathologists, as well as clinicians (oncologists and surgeons) who manage cancer patients.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1) Definition of Tissue-based Biomarkers Its Place in Medicine and Molecular Pathology
    Chapter 2) The Concept and Mechanisms of Metastasis
    Chapter 3) Biomarkers in Skin Carcinomas
    Chapter 4) Biomarkers in Head and Neck Carcinomas
    Chapter 5) Biomarkers in Pulmonary Carcinomas
    Chapter 6) Biomarkers in Endocrine Organ Carcinomas
    Chapter 7) Biomarkers in Gastrointestinal System Carcinomas
    Chapter 8) Biomarkers in Hepatopancreatobiliary Carcinomas
    Chapter 9) Biomarkers in Urinary Tract and Male Genital System Carcinomas
    Chapter 10) Biomarkers in Gynecological Carcinomas
    Chapter 11) Biomarkers in Breast Carcinomas
    Chapter 12) Diagnostic Approach According to More Frequent Metastatic Sites-Liver, Lungs, Bone, Lymph Nodes
    Chapter 13) Diagnostic Approach According to Uncovered Metastatic Sites - Mediastinum-Timus, Peritoneum, Central Nervous System, Soft Tissue
    Chapter 14) Management of the Patients with Primary Unknown Carcinoma and the Role of Biomarkers
    Chapter 15) Treatment Approach to Carcinomas of Unknown Primary
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Uttam Garg, Laurie D. Smith.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to laboratory diagnosis and biomarkers in inborn error of metabolism
    2. Amino acids disorders
    3. Organic acid disorders
    4. Disorders of mitochondrial fatty acid β-oxidation
    5. Urea cycle and other disorders of hyperammonemia
    6. Newborn screening
    7. Carbohydrate disorders
    8. Mitochondrial disorders
    9. Lysosomal storage disorders: mucopolysaccharidoses
    10. Lysosomal storage disorders: sphingolipidoses
    11. Peroxisomal disorders: clinical and biochemical laboratory aspects
    12. Disorders of purine and pyrimidine metabolism
    13. Biomarkers for the study of catecholamine and serotonin genetic diseases
    14. Cerebral creatine deficiency syndromes
    15. Congenital disorders of glycosylation
    16. Disorders of vitamins and cofactors
    17. Disorders of trace metals
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Nik Sheng Ding, Peter De Cruz, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive and complete overview of biomarkers in clinical practice for inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) bringing together the literature in a clear and concise manner. The book bridges the gap between growing knowledge at the bench and current and future applications of biomarkers in clinical practice. The central structure of the book focuses on prognostic and predictive biomarkers in IBD with an emphasis on the fields of research and scientific techniques (genomics, proteomics and metabonomics) that have led to biomarker discovery and places these biomarkers within a clinical context to help understand their utility in clinical practice. This book will be of use to clinicians who have an interest in using biomarkers in clinical practice as well as clinician researchers and scientists involved in the biomarker research pipeline. The author team comprises experts from around the world in order to bring together the literature in an effort to inform clinicians and researchers about the current state-of-the art in biomarker discovery. It is intended to assist future research efforts and indicate how biomarkers might be best applied to clinical practice both at present and in the future.

    Contents:
    Part I: Introduction
    nflammatory bowel disease – more than meets the eye
    Clinical risk factors – lessons from epidemiology
    Clinical trial design for biomarker discovery
    Database/ big data meets real world
    Patient reported outcomes
    Part II: Biomarkers – Prognostic vs Predictive
    Biomarkers for remote monitoring
    Disease modification
    Part IIV: Crohns disease
    Luminal Crohns disease-. Perianal CD
    Fibrosis/ strictures in CD
    Post-op Crohns disease
    Part IV: Ulcerative colitis
    UC surveillance
    Acute severe UC
    Chronic active UC
    Pouchitis
    Refractory proctitis
    Feacal microbiota transplantation
    Primary sclerosing cholangitis
    Extraintestinal manifestations of IBD
    Part V: Specialised scenarios
    Pregnancy
    Nutrition
    TDM
    Biomarkers to quantify immune response
    Drug toxicity
    Part VI:Scientific
    Exposome and diet
    Microbiota
    Metabonomics
    Immunology
    Genomics
    Systems Biology in Biomarker research
    Part VII: Ideal tools for investigation in the future.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Fausto Rodriguez, Cheng-Ying Ho.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Special Techniques
    Biobanking and Regulations
    Public Databases
    Biomarkers applied to specific tumor types
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Filipe Palavra, Flávio Reis, Daniela Marado, Armando Sena, editors.
    Contents:
    Inflammation biomarkers and cardiometabolic risk
    Cardiovascular disease
    Diabetes mellitus and metabolic syndrome
    Ischemic stroke
    Chronic kidney disease
    Immune-mediated inflammatory rheumatic diseases
    Cardiometabolic risk, inflammation and neurodegenerative disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Alexey Moskalev, editor.
    Summary: This book collects and reviews, for the first time, a wide range of advances in the area of human aging biomarkers. This accumulated data allows researchers to assess the rate of aging processes in various organs and systems, and to individually monitor the effectiveness of therapies intended to slow aging. In an introductory chapter, the editor defines biomarkers of aging as molecular, cellular and physiological parameters that demonstrate reproducible changes - quantitative or qualitative - with age. The introduction recounts a study which aimed to create a universal model of biological age, whose most predictive parameters were albumin and alkaline phosphatase (indication liver function), glucose (metabolic syndrome), erythrocytes (respiratory function) and urea (renal function). The book goes on to describe DNA methylation, known as the "epigenetic clock," as currently the most comprehensive predictor of total mortality. It is also useful for predicting mortality from cancer and cardiovascular diseases, and for analyzing the effects of lifestyle factors including diet, exercise, and education. Individual contributions draw additional insight from research on genetics and epigenetic aging markers, and immunosenescence and inflammaging markers. A concluding chapter outlines the challenge of integrating of biological and clinical markers of aging. Biomarkers of Human Aging is written for professionals and practitioners engaged in the study of aging, and will be useful to both advanced students and researchers.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Alexey Moskalev Section-1: BIOMARKERS OF AGING AND HEALTH Chapter 2: Practical Detection of Biological Age: Why it is not a trivial task
    Ancha Baranova Tiange Cui, Boris Veytsman Chapter 3: Biological age is a universal marker of aging, stress, and frailty
    Timothy V. Pyrkov, Peter O. Fedichev Chapter 4: Biomarkers of health and healthy ageing from the outside-in
    Jonathan Sholl, Suresh Rattan Chapter 5: Biomarkers of aging
    Yizhen Yan, Yonglin Mu, Weiyang Chen, Jing-Dong J. Han Chapter 6: Review of molecular and cellular biomarkers of aging
    Ilya Solovyev, Mikhail Shaposhnikov, Alexey Moskalev Section-2: PROTEOMICS AND GLYCOMICS BIOMARKERS OF AGING Chapter 7: IgG glycans as a biomarker of biological age
    Vilaj M, Gudelj I, Trbojević-Akmačić I, Lauc G, Pezer M Chapter 8: Oxidatively modified proteins and maintenance systems as biomarkers of aging
    Bertrand Friguet, Martin Baraibar Chapter 9: Is impaired proteodynamics a key to understand the biomarkers of cellular aging?
    Jacek M. Witkowski, Tamas Fulop Section-3: GENETICS AND EPIGENETICS AGING MARKERS Chapter 10: Genetic markers of extreme human longevity
    Paola Sebastiani, Anastasia Gurinovich, Harold Bae, Thomas T Perls Chapter 11: Epigenetic biomarkers of aging
    Morgan E. Levine Chapter 12: DNA methylation biomarkers to assess biological age -Dmitiriy Podolskiy, Vadim Gladyshev Chapter 13: Epigenetics of brain aging: lessons from chemo brain and tumor brain
    Anna Kovalchuk, Bryan Kolb, Olga Kovalchuk Chapter 14: Approaches and methods for variant analysis in a cell
    Alexej Abyzov, Flora M. Vaccarino, Alexander E. Urban, Vivekananda Sarangi Section-4: IMMUNOSENESCENCE AND INFLAMMAGING MARKERS Chapter 15: Is there any reliable biomarker for immunosenescence and inflammaging?
    Tamas Fulop, Alan Cohen, Glenn Wong, Jacek M Witkowski, Anis Larbi. Chapter 16: Immune parameters associated with mortality in longitudinal studies of very old people can be markedly dissimilar even in apparently similar populations
    Graham Pawelec, David Goldeck Chapter 17: Gut microbiota and aging
    Kashtanova DA, Tkacheva ON, Strazhesko ID, Dudinskaya EN, Kotovskaya YuV, Popenko AS, Tyaht AV, Alexeev DG Section-5: SYSTEMS BIOLOGY OF AGING, BIOLOGICAL AGE AND MORTALITY MARKERS Chapter 18: Deep integrated biomarkers of aging
    Polina Mamoshina, Alex Zhavoronkov Chapter 19: Quantification of the biological age of the brain using neuroimaging
    James Cole, Katja Franke, Nic Cherbuin Chapter 20: Arterial aging: the role of hormonal and metabolic status and telomere biology
    Irina D. Strazhesko, Daria A. Kashtanova, Ekaterina N. Dudinskaya, Olga N. Tkacheva Chapter 21: Circulating Biomarkers of Aging
    Hongxia Zhang, Brian Wang, Kunlin Jin Chapter 22: Molecular signature of aging driven by Wnt signaling pathway: Lessons from nematodes
    Marco Lezzerini, Yelena V. Budovskaya. Chapter 23: The problem of integrating of biological and clinical markers of aging
    Arnold Mitnitski Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Charles L. Edelstein.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Characteristics of an Ideal Biomarker of Kidney Diseases / M.R Bennett aand P. Devarajan
    Chapter 2: Statistical Considerations in Analysis and Interpretation of Biomarker Studies / C.R. Parikh and H. Theissen Philbrook
    Chapter 3: The Role of Metabolomics in the Study of Kidney Diseases and in the Development of Diagnostic Tools / U. Christians, J. Klawitter, J. Klepacki and J. Klawitter
    Chapter 4: The Role of Proteomics in the Study of Kidney Diseases and in the Development of Diagnostic Tools / U. Christians, J. Klawitter, J. Klepacki and J. Klawitter
    Chapter 5: Cystatin C as a Multifaceted Biomarker in Kidney Disease and Its Role in Defining "Shrunken Pore Syndrome" / A. Grubb
    Chapter 6: Biomarkers in Acute Kidney Injury / C.L. Edelstein
    Chapter 7: Biomarkers of Extra-Renal Complications of AKI / S. Faubel
    Chapter 8: Biomarkers in Kidney Transplantation / S. Jain and A. Jani
    Chapter 9: Biomarkers of Renal Cancer / N.S. Vasudev and R.E. Banks
    Chapter 10: Proteomics and Advancements in Urinary Biomarkers of Diabetics Kidney Disease / M.L. Merchant and J.B. Klein
    Chapter 11: Biomarkers of Cardiovascular Risk in Chronic Kidney Disease / Z.H. Endre and R.J. Walker
    Chapter 12: Diagnostic and Prognostic Biomarkers in Autosomal Dominant Polycystic Kidney Disease / G. Fick-Brosnahan and B.Y. Reed
    Chapter 13: Biomarkers in Glomerular Disease / J.M. Arthur, E. Elnagar and N. Karakala
    Chapter 14: Biomarkers in Preeclampsia / S.A. Karamanchi.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    Lars A. Akslen, Randolph S. Watnick, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews different aspects of the cancer microenvironment, and its regulation and importance for tumor progression. Methodological advancements and practical applications, in terms of how biomarkers are studied and increasingly included in clinical trials and therapy protocols, are described and discussed. Biomarkers of the Tumor Microenvironment is an educational resource for students and members of the cancer research community as a whole, especially for those using morphology analysis techniques and models focusing on the cross-talk between different cell types in tumors. The textbook provides a comprehensive overview of the microenvironment in various contexts from the perspectives of experienced and accomplished cancer researchers and clinicians.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Prologue
    Basic Studies: Tumor Mechanisms and Tissue Biomarkers
    The Role of the Tumor Microenvironment in Regulating Angiogenesis
    Vessel co-option in melanoma
    Tissue Based Biomarkers of Tumor-Vascular Interactions
    Molecular phenotypes of endothelial cells in malignant tumors
    Lymphatics in malignant tumors
    Role of the Extracellular Matrix in Tumor Stroma Barrier or Support?
    Importance of tissue architecture in cancer development and progression
    The Tumor Microenvironment as a Target for Therapeutic Modulation and Monitoring
    Tumor-fibroblast interactions
    Stromal PDGF Receptors as Prognostic and Predictive Biomarkers
    Inflammation and Cancer, the Role of Lipid Signalling in the Continuum Between Two Ends of the Tumor Spectrum
    Cancer Immunity and Immune Evasion Mechanisms
    Drivers of EMT and Immune Evasion
    Inflammatory Biomarkers for Cancer
    Tumor Infiltrating Lymphocytes: Methods and Guidelines
    The Role of Platelets in the Tumor Microenvironment
    Regulation of Tumor Progression and Metastasis by Bone Marrow-Derived Microenvironments
    Neuropilin 1 and Neuropilin 2: Cancer Progression and Biomarker Analysis
    The Role of Axl Receptor Tyrosine Kinase in Tumor Cell Plasticity and Therapy Resistance
    Imaging mass cytometry in studies of the tumor microenvironment
    Artificial intelligence in studies of malignant tumors
    Clinical Applications: Organ Related Biomarker Studies
    Gene Expression Signatures of the Tumor Microenvironment: Relation to Tumor Progress in Breast Cancer
    MR-Derived Biomarkers for Cancer Characterization
    PDX-models and small animal imaging in studies of gynecologic cancers
    The Influence of Tissue Architecture on Drug Response: Anti-Cancer Drug Development in High-Dimensional Combinatorial Microenvironment Platforms
    Models of Tumor Progression in Prostate Cancer
    Prostate biomarkers
    Immune responses in lung cancer
    Tumor-vascular interactions in non-small cell lung cancer
    Tumor-Host Interactions in Malignant Glioma
    The Tumor Microenvironment in Cutaneous Melanoma Friend or Foe?
    Biomarker Panels and Contemporary Practice in Clinical Trials of Targeted Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Véronique Migonney.
    Contents:
    History of biomaterials / Véronique Migonney
    Definitions / Véronique Migonney
    Materials used in biomaterial applications / Géraldine Rohman
    Biocompatibility and norms / Véronique Migonney
    Bioactive polymers and surfaces: a solution for implant devices / Véronique Migonney
    Functionalization of biomaterials and applications / Céline Falentin-Daudre
    Biomaterial structures for anterior cruciate ligament replacement / Cédryck Vaquette
    Animal models for orthopedic applications of tissue engineering / Véronique Viateau, Adeline Decambron, Mathieu Manassero
    Ceramic materials for dental prostheses / Amélie Mainjot
    Dental adhesives / Mathieu Derbanne, Stéphane Le Goff, Jean-Pierre Attal
    Glass ionomer cements: application in pediatric dentistry / Elisabeth Dursun, Stéphane Le Goff, Jean-Pierre Attal
    List of authors.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    volume editor, Sanjukta Deb.
    Contents:
    Biomaterials in relation to dentistry / Deb, S.
    Polymer therapeutics in relation to dentistry / Rojo, L., Deb, S .
    Biological impact of bioactive glasses and their dissolution products / Hoppe, A., Boccaccini, A.R.
    Organic-inorganic composites toward biomaterial application / Miyazaki, T., Sugawara-Narutaki, A., Ohtsuki, C.
    New advanced materials for high performance at the resin-dentine interface / Toledano, M., Osorio, R.
    Nanobiomaterial coatings in dentistry / Choi, A.H., Cazalbou, S., Ben-Nissan, B.
    The effect of titanium surface modifications on dental implant osseointegration / Annunziata, M., Guida, L.
    Global gene expression analysis for the assessment of nanobiomaterials / Hanagata, N.
    Membranes for periodontal regeneration
    a material perspective / Bottino, M.C., Thomas, V.
    Biomaterials in the reconstruction of the oral and maxillofacial region / Ayoub, A., Al-Fotawei, R.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Birru Bhaskar, Parcha Sreenivasa Rao, Naresh Kasoju, Vasagiri Nagarjuna, Rama Raju Baadhe, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Susmitya Bose, Amit Bandyopadhyay Roger Narayan.
    Summary: This volume is a collection of research papers from the Next Generation Biomaterials and Surface Properties of Biomaterials symposia which took place during the Materials Science & Technology 2013 Conference & Exhibition (MS&T'13) in Montréal, Quebec, Canada.

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Bioactive Glass-Ceramic Scaffolds with High-Strength for Orthopedic Applications / EA Aguilar-Reyes, CA León-Patiño, E Villicaña-Molina, L-P Lefebvre
    Metallurgical Characterization of Laser-Sintered Cobalt-Chromium Dental Alloy / Ahmed Fathalah, William A Brantley, Yong-Hoon Jeong, Stephen F Rosenstiel, Matthew S Bryington, William AT Clark, Carl Drago
    Mechanical Properties, Microstructures, and Biocompatibility of Low-Cost [beta]-Type Ti-Mn Alloys for Biomedical Applications / Ken Cho, Mitsuo Niinomi, Masaaki Nakai, Junko Hieda, Pedro Fernandes Santos, Yoshinori Itoh, Masahiko Ikeda
    Microstructural Characteristic of Nano Calcium Phosphates Doped with Fluoride and Titanium Ions / Serap Gungor, Zafer Evis
    Development of Implants Composed of Hollow Hydroxyapatite Microspheres for Bone Regeneration / M N Rahaman, W Xiao, B S Bal
    Porous Titanium Implants Fabricated by a Salt Bath Sintering Process for Bone Repair Applications / MN Rahaman, BS Bal, T Huang
    Navigating the Uncharted Waters of the New AIA U.S. Patent Law / Paul A Serbinowski
    Comparative Analysis of Hydroxyapatite and Titanium-Based Bioscaffolds Fabricated Via Adaptive Foam Reticulation / James Winnett, Kajal K Mallick
    Laser Processing of Tricalicum Phosphate Reinforced Cobalt
    Chrome Alloy Coatings / Thomas Gualtieri, Himanshu Sahasrabudhe, Susmita Bose, Amit Bandyopadhyay
    Effect of Degree of Deacetylation of Chitosan on Macrophage Function / Shalini V Gohil, Lakshmi S Nair
    PECVD SiOx Accelerates Hydroxyapatite Surface Formation for Enhanced Early Osteogenic Differentiation / M F Velten, T Odatsu, PB Aswath, N Kamiya, H Kim, VG Varanasi.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Jani Macari Pallis, Jill L. McNitt-Gray, George K. Hung, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of biomedical applications in sports, including reviews of the current state-of-the art methodologies and research areas. Basic principles with specific case studies from different types of sports as well as suggested student activities and homework problems are included. Equipment design and manufacturing, quantitative evaluation methods, and sports medicine are given special focus. Biomechanical Principles and Applications in Sports can be used as a textbook in a sports technology or sports engineering program, and is also ideal for graduate students and researchers in biomedical engineering, physics, and sports physiology. It can also serve as a useful reference for professional athletes and coaches interested in gaining a deeper understanding of biomechanics and exercise physiology to improve athletic performance.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Equipment Design and Manufacturing
    Best Design and Innovation Practices
    Equipment Design Methodology
    Ergonomics and/or Biomechanics
    Equipment Design
    Facility Design
    Performance Tracking: Analytics, Transmissions, Camera Networking, Feedback to the Athlete
    Material Selection
    Manufacturing Practices: Sustainability, Cost Reduction, Environmental Friendly and Sustainable Approaches
    Part 2: Quantitative Evaluation Methods
    Experimental Methods
    Data Collection/Acquisition Techniques and Technology: Instrumentation, Software
    Experimentation Techniques
    Wind Tunnels
    Camera Systems
    Gait Systems
    Examples of Custom Built Systems from Different Sports
    Overview of Numerical Methods
    Computational Modeling
    Wearable Sensors
    Part 3: Sports Medicine and Bioengineering
    Sports Medicine: Injury Epidemiology
    Traumatic Brain Injury: Equipment Design Considerations, Evaluation of Equipment and Training Effectiveness
    Rehabilitation
    Sports Protective Equipment
    Part 4: Special Topics
    Life Cycle: Considering Gender, Age and Ability Differences
    Methodology and Considerations Equipment Design for Individuals with Disabilities
    Science and Engineering Transfer: Communicating the New Science/Technology to Coaches, Trainers, Athletes
    Tissue Engineering and Biomechanics.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Masataka Kawai.
    Summary: Back cover -Why this book? This book covers a broad area of STEM (science, technology, engineering, and mathematics) disciplines, and is written for those interested in biophysics / biomechanics. It includes viscoelasticity, chemical kinetics, system analysis, muscle biology/biophysics and mechanics, analog and digital electronics, methods for interfacing experimental systems to a computer, and the mathematics needed for all of these. Only the bare essentials are given and many accessory elements are removed, so that it is easier to understand the concepts. Hence the book is brief and short. It is written so that a beginner can understand it, yet the principles can be applied to a variety of advanced systems. Special cases are handled, but readers should be able to apply them to their own projects and expand on them. This book also includes exercises for important theories and equations to be verified, and hints/answers to them are given at the end. If a theory or an equation is not apparent, readers are encouraged to prove them on their own, and convince themselves of their correctness. The equation may not be as difficult as it appears initially. Trying to solve a problem by oneself fosters good thinking, creativity, and independence. Sections of this book were originally written for the purpose of teaching our experimental approaches and methods to new members of our laboratory. It is comprised of six chapters: chapter 1 defines viscoelasticity, chapter 2 describes chemical reactions, chapter 3 teaches how to characterize them, chapter 4 is their application on muscle biology, chapter 5 covers basic mathematical skills needed for these studies, and chapter 6 describes the electronic and computer interfacing of the experimental apparatus including programming. Chapters 1-5 are suitable for biophysically and mechanically oriented students. Chapters 5-6 are also suitable for electrical engineering and computer science students to acquire the basic concepts of electricity, a knowledge on analog and digital circuits, the interfacing of experimental apparatus to computers including programming. It is not necessary to read this book from the beginning, you can start from any chapter based on your interest and need. In a sense, this book is similar to "case-based learning (CBL)", which is a frequently used technique in today's medical schools to teach students. A special patient case is brought out, and students are asked to organize their thoughts around it. By discussing the case with colleagues and researching the literature, the students set up hypotheses, think about the mechanisms and search for remedies. This book describes a special case and discusses it, but the lessons learned can be applied to numerous systems using similar methods and principles, and avoids generalization because that would make the theories abstract and more difficult to understand.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Dominique G. Poitout, editor.
    Contents:
    I. Introduction
    II. Biocompatible Materials
    III. Tissue Biomechanics and Histomorphology
    IV. Biomechanics of Bone Growth
    V. Applications of Biomechanical Principles to Orthopedics and Traumatology
    VI. Applications of Biomechanics Principles to Oncology
    VII. Articular Biomechanics.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nikolai Aleksandrovich Bernstein.
    Summary: This book comprises a series of lectures given by celebrated Soviet neurophysiologist Nikolai Alexandrovich Bernstein in Moscow in 1925 and first published in Russian in 1926. Bernstein's groundbreaking work, which has had a significant influence on the development of neuroscience, movement studies, and other fields of study in Russia, Eastern Europe, and the West, was suppressed during Stalin's regime. At the time of its publication, Biomechanics for Instructors was a significant resource for teachers, with its descriptions of the movement of joints and degrees of freedom, illustrations of how to calculate the work capacity of muscles with bones acting as levers, the role of the central nervous system in movement, and more. Though the terminologies and methods have changed and been updated as research and technologies have progressed, the book remains a valuable introduction for those interested in Bernstein's work more generally, and to those involved in the study of biomechanics. This book is also of interest to historians and philosophers of neuroscience, as well as those involved in movement studies in both the scientific and artistic domains, and to physiotherapists and those involved in sports research and practice. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Cheng Dong, Nastaran Zahir, Konstantinos Konstantopoulos, editors.
    Summary: "This book covers multi-scale biomechanics for oncology, ranging from cells and tissues to whole organ. Topics covered include, but not limited to, biomaterials in mechano-oncology, non-invasive imaging techniques, mechanical models of cell migration, cancer cell mechanics, and platelet-based drug delivery for cancer applications. This is an ideal book for graduate students, biomedical engineers, and researchers in the field of mechanobiology and oncology"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    The National Cancer Institute investment in biomechanics in oncology research / Anthony Dickherber, Shannon K. Hughes, Nastaran Zahir
    DNA mechanics and topology / Sumitabha Brahmachari, John F. Marko
    Mechanics of the cell nucleus / Dong-Hwee Kim, Jungwon Hah, Denis Wirtz
    Extracellular matrix stiffness exists in a feedback loop that drives tumor progression / Allison K. Simi, Mei-Fong Pang, Celeste M. Nelson
    Microenvironment influences cancer cell mechanics from tumor growth to metastasis / Deepraj Ghosh, Michelle R. Dawson
    Mechanical forces in tumor angiogenesis / Matthew R. Zanotelli, Cynthia A. Reinhart-King
    From cancer immunoediting to new strategies in cancer immunotherapy: the roles of immune cells and mechanics in oncology / Virginia Aragon-Sanabria, Gloria B. Kim, Cheng Dong
    Exposing cell-itary confinement: understanding the mechanisms of confined single cell migration / Bin Sheng Wong, Panagiotis Mistriotis, Konstantinos Konstantopoulos
    Modeling cell migration mechanics / Louis S. Prahl, David J. Odde
    Engineered models of metastasis with application to study cancer biomechanics / Michelle B. Chen, Roger D. Kamm, Emad Moeendarbary
    Biomechanics of the circulating tumor cell microenvironment / Benjamin L. Krog, Michael D. Henry
    Platelet-based drug delivery for cancer applications / Nerymar Ortiz-Otero, Zeinab Mohamed, Michael R. King
    Biomaterials in mechano-oncology: means to tune materials to study cancer / Shelly R. Peyton, Maria F. Gencoglu, Sualyneth Galarza, Alyssa D. Schwartz
    Design of fiber networks for studying metastatic invasion / Apratim Mukherjee, Aniket Jana, Brian Koons, Amrinder Nain
    Traction force microscopy for noninvasive imaging of cell forces / Jeffrey A. Mulligan, François Bordeleau, Cynthia A. Reinhart-King, Steven G. Adie
    Noninvasive imaging: Brillouin confocal microscopy / Miloš Nikolić, Christina Conrad, Jitao Zhang, Giuliano Scarcelli.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Thomas K. Uchida.
    Summary: An engaging introduction to human and animal movement seen through the lens of mechanics. How do Olympic sprinters run so fast' Why do astronauts adopt a bounding gait on the moon' How do running shoes improve performance while preventing injuries' This engaging and generously illustrated book answers these questions by examining human and animal movement through the lens of mechanics. The authors present simple conceptual models to study walking and running and apply mechanical principles to a range of interesting examples. They explore the biology of how movement is produced, examining the structure of a muscle down to its microscopic force-generating motors. Drawing on their deep expertise, the authors describe how to create simulations that provide insight into muscle coordination during walking and running, suggest treatments to improve function following injury, and help design devices that enhance human performance.

    Contents:
    First steps
    Walking
    Running
    Muscle biology and force
    Muscle architecture and dynamics
    Musculoskeletal geometry
    Quantifying movement
    Inverse dynamics
    Muscle force optimization
    Muscle-driven simulation
    Muscle-driven walking
    Muscle-driven running
    Moving forward.
  • Digital
    by Tien Tuan Dao, Marie-Christine Ho Ba Tho.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Biomechanics of the musculoskeletal system
    Chapter 2. Modeling of biomedical data uncertainty
    Chapter 3. Knowledge modeling in biomechanics of the musculoskeletal system
    Chapter 4. Clinical applications of biomechanical and knowledge-based models
    Chapter 5. Software and tools for knowledge modeling and reasoning/interference.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Jean-Benoit Morin, Pierre Samozino, editors.
    Summary: This book presents an account of innovative methods and, for most of them, gives direct and practical insights into how practitioners can benefit from their use in their everyday practice. It also explains how to interpret the data measured, and the underlying neuromechanical and biomechanical factors related to sports performance. Written and edited by the same researchers who proposed and validated these methods, this book not only presents innovative methods for an efficient training and testing process (most of which are based on very simple technology and data processing methods), but also discusses the associated background information. Although it is a young scientific discipline, sport biomechanics has taken on an important role in routine sports training, medicine and rehabilitation. It allows both a better understanding of human locomotion and performance and better design of training and injury prevention. In those processes, the testing of athletes is crucial, and the quality and quantity of the variables analysed directly influences the efficiency of physicians', coaches', physiotherapists' and other practitioners' interventions.

    Contents:
    Intro; Acknowledgements; Contents; 1 Introduction; 1.1 Optimizing Sport Performance Is like Cooking; 1.2 See the Big Picture First; 1.3 Simple Models, Simple Methods; References; Cycling; 2 Maximal Force-Velocity and Power-Velocity Characteristics in Cycling: Assessment and Relevance; Abstract; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Measurement of Mechanical Output (Force, Velocity and Power) During Sprint Pedaling; 2.3 Maximal Force- and Power-Velocity Relationships in Cycling; 2.3.1 Testing and Processing; 2.3.2 Meaning of the Indexes Extracted from the Relationships. 2.4 Methodological Consideration and Practical Advices2.4.1 Period of Averaging to Draw F-V or P-V Relationships and Duration of the Sprint; 2.4.2 Quality of the F-V and P-V Models: â#x80;#x9C;Calculatedâ#x80;#x9D; Versus â#x80;#x9C;Trueâ#x80;#x9D; Data; 2.4.3 Main Factors to Control that may influence Maximal Power Output; 2.5 Field Measurement in Ecological Condition; 2.5.1 Mathematical Model of Sprint Cycling; 2.5.2 Direct Measurement with Portable System; 2.6 Conclusion; References; 3 Mechanical Effectiveness and Coordination: New Insights into Sprint Cycling Performance; Abstract; 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Torque Profile and Concept of Mechanical Effectiveness3.2.1 Production of Power over the Pedaling Cycle; 3.2.2 Mechanical Effectiveness: The Orientation of Pedal Force; 3.3 Joint-Specific Power and Interest in Inverse Dynamics; 3.3.1 Approach and Principle; 3.3.2 Information Regarding Force and Power Capabilities in Cycling; 3.4 Muscle Activity and Muscle Coordination; 3.4.1 The Specificity of Muscle Coordination in Sprint Cycling; 3.4.2 Coordination of Monoarticular and Biarticular Muscles; 3.4.3 Muscle Coordination and Torqueâ#x80;#x93;Velocity Relationship. 3.5 Practical Implications and Perspectives for Testing and Performance3.5.1 Pedaling Effectiveness, Muscle Coordination and Performance: Whatâ#x80;#x99;s the Link?; 3.5.2 Outcomes Regarding the Meaning of Forceâ#x80;#x93;Velocity and Powerâ#x80;#x93;Velocity Relationships in Cycling and Perspectives for Testing and Training; 3.6 Conclusion; References; Ballistic Movements of Upper and Lower Limbs; 4 A Simple Method for Measuring Lower Limb Force, Velocity and Power Capabilities During Jumping; Abstract; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Force, Velocity, Power Mechanical Profile. 4.2.1 Force-Velocity and Power-Velocity Relationships in Jumping4.2.2 Force-Velocity Mechanical Profile in Jumping; 4.3 Reference Testing Methods; 4.3.1 Methodological Considerations; 4.3.2 Laboratory Methods; 4.3.3 Field Methods; 4.3.4 Limitations of the Reference Methods; 4.4 A Simple Method for Measuring Force, Velocity and Power During Jumping; 4.4.1 Theoretical Bases and Equations; 4.4.2 Limits of the Method; 4.4.3 Validation of the Method; 4.5 Technologies and Input Measurements; 4.5.1 Jump Height; 4.5.2 Push-off Distance; 4.6 Practical Applications; 4.7 Conclusion; References.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Lisa A. Eaton, Seth C. Kalichman, editors.
    Summary: Three decades into the epidemic, a great deal is known about HIV and its transmission, more people are living with the disease, and the virus is no longer seen as a death sentence. But new people continue to be infected with HIV each year, making prevention strategies that are medically effective and behaviorally engaging as urgent a priority as ever. Biomedical Advances in HIV Prevention: Social and Behavioral Perspectives assembles the latest improvements, barriers to implementation, and possibilities for--and challenges to--future progress. Innovations such as pre-exposure prophylaxis (antiretroviral regimens for the high-risk uninfected) and treatment as prevention (early use of ART to reduce infectiousness of new patients) are examined, as are current findings on ongoing prevention and treatment concerns. Contributors illuminate the complex realities entailing adherence, pointing out technological, behavioral, and cultural roadblocks as well as opportunities to significantly reduce infection rates.

    Contents:
    Part I: Advances in HIV Prevention Technologies
    Advances, Promises, and Challenges in HIV Prevention
    Translating Pre-Exposure Prophylaxis Evidence into Practice and Public Health Impact
    Prevention Services with Persons Living with HIV
    Advocating for Rectal Microbicides and Safe Lubricants
    Part II: Behavioral Challenges and Opportunities
    Adherence to HIV Treatment as Prevention and Preexposure Prophylaxis
    Risk Compensation in Response to HIV Prevention
    Mental Health and Substance Use in the Scale-Up of HIV Prevention
    Substance Use Treatment in the Era of New HIV Prevention Technologies
    Part III: Global Perspectives
    Revolution or Evolution? What Can Approaches Based on the Use of Antiretroviral Drugs Contribute to HIV Prevention in Gay Communities in High-Income Countries?
    Implementing Biomedical HIV Prevention Advances in Uganda
    Implementing Biomedical HIV Prevention Advances in Thailand
    Implementing Biomedical HIV Prevention Advances in Ecuador and Peru.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Mahendra Rai, Avinash P. Ingle, Serenella Medici, editors.
    Summary: Focused more specifically on the recent advances in applications of various metals and their complexes used in biomedicine, particularly in the diagnosis and treatment of chronic diseases. The editors give equal importance to other key aspects such as toxicological issues and safety concerns. The application of metals in the biomedical field is highly interdisciplinary and has a broad appeal across all biomedical specialties. Biomedical Applications of Metals is particularly focused on covering the role of metals in medicine and the development of novel therapeutic products and solutions in the form of alternative medicines, and some topics on Indian traditional medicine i.e., "Ayurveda." In Section I, the book discusses the role of metals in medicines and include chapters on nanoparticles, noble metals, medical devices, copper. selenium, silver, and microbial pathogens; while Section II includes topics on metals toxicity including heavy metals, carcinogens, cancer therapy, Bhasma's and chelating agents used in Ayurveda, and biochemical and molecular targets including actions of metals. These new and emerging concepts of applications of metals in medicine, their crucial role in management of microbial resistance, and their use in the treatment of various chronic diseases is essential information for toxicologists, and clinical and biomedical researchers.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Applications of Metals in Medicine
    Noble Metals in Pharmaceuticals: Applications and Limitations
    The Intriguing Potential of "Minor" Noble Metals: Emerging Trends and New Applications
    Metal-on-Metal Hip Total Hip Arthroplasty: Progress and Problems
    Copper in Medicine: Perspectives and Toxicity
    Silver: Biomedical Applications and Adverse Effects
    The Potential of Metals in Combating Bacterial Pathogens
    Platinum in Biomedical Applications
    Metal-Based Drugs for Treatment of Malaria
    Metal Based Therapy in Traditional and Modern Medicine System and Cancer Therapy: Implications and Limitations
    Mechanism of Action of Anticancer Metallodrugs
    Part 2: Toxicity of Metals
    Toxicity of Bhasmas and Chelating Agents of Ayurveda
    The Flop Side of Using Heavy Metal (oids)s in the Traditional Medicine: Toxic Insults and Injury to Human Health
    Impact of Heavy Metal Carcinogens on Human Health
    Biochemical and Molecular Targets of Heavy Metals and Their Actions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Raymond H.W. Lam, Weiqiang Chen.
    Summary: This textbook provides essential knowledge for biomedical product development, including material properties, fabrication processes and design techniques for different applications, as well as process design and optimization. This book is multidisciplinary and readers can learn techniques to apply acquired knowledge for various applications of biomedical design. Further, this book encourages readers to discover and convert newly reported technologies into products and services for the future development of biomedical applications. This is an ideal book for upper-level undergraduate and graduate students, engineers, technologists, and researchers working in the area of biomedical engineering and manufacturing. This book also: Provides a comprehensive set of fundamental knowledge for engineering students and entry level engineers to design biomedical devices. Offers a unique approach to manufacturing of biomedical devices by integrating and formulating different considerations in process design tasks into optimization problems. Provides a broad range of application examples to guide readers through the thinking process of designing and manufacturing biomedical devices, from basic understanding about the requirements and regulations to a set of manufacturing parameters.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; About the Authors;
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Biomedical Devices; 1.1 Overview of Biomedical Devices; 1.2 Biomedical Device Industry; 1.3 Regulatory Issues; 1.4 The Demands for Biomedical Engineers; 1.5 Human System Basics; 1.6 Surgical Tools; 1.6.1 Surgical Scalpel; 1.6.2 Surgical Sutures; 1.7 Devices for Sensory Organs; 1.7.1 Skin Devices; 1.7.2 Contact Lenses; 1.8 Cardiovascular Devices; 1.8.1 Artificial Heart Valve; 1.8.2 Pacemaker; 1.8.3 Vascular Stent; 1.9 Skeleton Devices; 1.10 Tissue Grafts; 1.11 Summary; References and Further Reading Part I: Biomaterials
    Chapter 2: Basic Material Properties; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Solid Properties; 2.2.1 Direct Stress and Strain; 2.2.2 Stress-Strain Diagram; 2.2.3 Shear Stress and Strain; 2.2.4 Poissonś Ratio; 2.3 Thermal Properties; 2.3.1 Thermal Strain and Deformation; 2.3.2 Specific Heat Capacity; 2.3.3 Changes of Moduli of Elasticity and Rigidity with Temperature; 2.4 Fluidic Properties; 2.4.1 Viscosity; 2.4.2 Types of Flows; 2.5 Surface and Interfacial Properties; 2.5.1 Surface Roughness; 2.5.2 Friction and Lubrication at the Tool-Workpiece Interface; 2.5.3 Adhesion/Binding Strength Problem 3.4Problem 3.5; Problem 3.6; Problem 3.7; Problem 3.8; Problem 3.9; Problem 3.10; References and Further Reading;
    Chapter 4: Polymers; 4.1 Overview; 4.2 Basic Characteristics; 4.3 Polymeric Synthesis; 4.3.1 Overview; 4.3.2 Addition; 4.3.3 Condensation; 4.3.4 Number- and Weight-Average Molecular Weights; 4.4 Physical Properties; 4.4.1 Relaxation, Transition, and Melt Viscosity; 4.4.2 Theory of Melting Point Depression; 4.4.3 Glass Transition as an Iso-Free-Volume State; 4.4.4 Rubbery Elasticity; 4.4.5 Relationships of Tm and Tg with Molecular Weight; 4.5 Common Polymeric Biomaterials ProblemsProblem 2.1; Problem 2.2; Problem 2.3; Problem 2.4; Problem 2.5; Problem 2.6; Problem 2.7; Problem 2.8; Problem 2.9; References and Further Reading;
    Chapter 3: Metals and Alloys; 3.1 Overview; 3.2 Crystalline Characteristic of Metals; 3.2.1 Crystal Direction and Planes; 3.2.2 Line Defects and Grains; 3.3 Common Physical Properties; 3.3.1 Interatomic Attraction and Repulsion; 3.3.2 Corrosion; 3.3.3 Biocompatibility; 3.4 Metal Strengthening; 3.4.1 Work Hardening; 3.4.2 Grain Size Control; 3.4.3 Alloying; 3.5 Common Metallic Biomaterials; Problems; Problem 3.1; Problem 3.2; Problem 3.3 ProblemsProblem 4.1; Problem 4.2; Problem 4.3; Problem 4.4; Problem 4.5; Problem 4.6; Problem 4.7; Problem 4.8; Problem 4.9; Problem 4.10; References and Further Reading;
    Chapter 5: Ceramics; 5.1 Overview; 5.2 General Characteristics; 5.2.1 Basic Physical Properties; 5.2.2 Porosity; 5.2.3 Fracture and Bridging Contribution; 5.2.4 Slip Dislocation; 5.2.5 Biocompatibility; 5.3 Common Bioceramics; 5.3.1 Basic Bioceramics; 5.3.2 Resorbable Ceramics; Problems; Problem 5.1; Problem 5.2; Problem 5.3; Problem 5.4; Problem 5.5; Problem 5.6; Problem 5.7; Problem 5.8; References and Further Reading
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sudip Paul, editor.
    Summary: This book illustrates the significance of biomedical engineering in modern healthcare systems. Biomedical engineering plays an important role in a range of areas, from diagnosis and analysis to treatment and recovery and has entered the public consciousness through the proliferation of implantable medical devices, such as pacemakers and artificial hips, as well as the more futuristic technologies such as stem cell engineering and 3-D printing of biological organs. Starting with an introduction to biomedical engineering, the book then discusses various tools and techniques for medical diagnostics and treatment and recent advances. It also provides comprehensive and integrated information on rehabilitation engineering, including the design of artificial body parts, and the underlying principles, and standards. It also presents a conceptual framework to clarify the relationship between ethical policies in medical practice and philosophical moral reasoning. Lastly, the book highlights a number of challenges associated with modern healthcare technologies.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Basic Overview of Human Physiology
    Chapter 2. Basics of Bioelectronics. Collection methods
    Chapter 3. Overview of Medical Physics
    Chapter 4. Biosensors and Transducers
    Chapter 5. Biomaterials and its medical applications
    Chapter 6. Bioinstrumentation and its design aspects
    Chapter 7. Techniques related to disease diagnosis and therapeutics
    Chapter 8. Biosignals and its significance
    Chapter 9. Medical imaging and image processing
    Chapter 10. Pathophysiology of diseases causing physical disability
    Chapter 11. Rehabilitation engineering
    Chapter 12. Robotics and its applications
    Chapter 13. Calibration, repair and safety aspects
    Chapter 14. Medical ethics and policies
    Chapter 15. Modern diagnostics tools.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Carlos Reyes-Aldasoro.
    Summary: As its title suggests, this innovative book has been written for life scientists needing to analyse their data sets, and programmers, wanting a better understanding of the types of experimental images life scientists investigate on a regular basis. Each chapter presents one self-contained biomedical experiment to be analysed. Part I of the book presents its two basic ingredients: essential concepts of image analysis and Matlab. In Part II, algorithms and techniques are shown as series of 'recipes' or solved examples that show how specific techniques are applied to a biomedical experiments like Western Blots, Histology, Scratch Wound Assays and Fluoresence. Each recipe begins with simple techniques that gradually advance in complexity. Part III presents some advanced techniques for the generation of publication quality figures. The book does not assume any computational or mathematical expertise.

    Contents:
    The basic ingredients
    Introduction to images
    Introduction to color
    Western blots
    Scratch wound assays
    Microscopy
    Analysing fluorescent cells
    Creating publication quality figures from MATLAB.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joo Hwee Lim, Sim Heng Ong, Wei Xiong.
    Contents:
    Overview of biomedical image understanding methods / Wei Xiong, Jierong Cheng, Ying Gu, Shimiao Li and Joo Hwee Lim
    Medical image segmentation and its application in cardiac MRI / Dong Wei, Chao Li and Ying Sun
    Retinal vascular measurements with VAMPIRE / Emanuele Trucco, Andrea Giachetti, Lucia Ballerini, Devanjali Relan, Alessandro Cavinato and Tom MacGillivray
    Analyzing cell and tissue morphologies using pattern recognition algorithms / Hwee Kuan Lee, Yan Nei Law, ChaoHui Huang and Choon Kong Yap
    3D nonrigid image registration by Parzenwindow based normalized mutual information / Rui Xu, YenWei Chen, Shigehiro Morikawa and Yoshimasa Kurumi
    2D/3D image registration for endovascular abdominal aortic aneurysm (AAA) repair / Shun Miao and Rui Liao
    Motion tracking in medical images / Chuqing Cao, Chao Li and Ying Sun
    Blood smear analysis and malaria infection detection from blood cell images / Wei Xiong, SimHeng Ong, Joo Hwee Lim, Jierong Cheng and Ying Gu
    Liver tumor segmentation using SVM framework and pathology characterization / Jiayin Zhou, Yanling Chi, Weimin Huang, Wei Xiong, Wenyu Chen, Jimin Liu and Sudhakar K. Venkatesh
    Benchmarking lymph node metastasis classification for gastric cancer staging / Su Zhang, Chao Li, Shuheng Zhang, Lifang Pang and Huan Zhang
    The use of knowledge in biomedical image analysis / Florence Cloppet
    Active shape model for contour detection of anatomical structure / Huiqi Li and Qing Nie.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Edward H. Shortliffe, James J. Cimino.
    Summary: This 5th edition of this essential textbook continues to meet the growing demand of practitioners, researchers, educators, and students for a comprehensive introduction to key topics in biomedical informatics and the underlying scientific issues that sit at the intersection of biomedical science, patient care, public health and information technology (IT). Emphasizing the conceptual basis of the field rather than technical details, it provides the tools for study required for readers to comprehend, assess, and utilize biomedical informatics and health IT. It focuses on practical examples, a guide to additional literature, chapter summaries and a comprehensive glossary with concise definitions of recurring terms for self-study or classroom use. Biomedical Informatics: Computer Applications in Health Care and Biomedicine reflects the remarkable changes in both computing and health care that continue to occur and the exploding interest in the role that IT must play in care coordination and the melding of genomics with innovations in clinical practice and treatment. New and heavily revised chapters have been introduced on human-computer interaction, mHealth, personal health informatics and precision medicine, while the structure of the other chapters has undergone extensive revisions to reflect the developments in the area. The organization and philosophy remain unchanged, focusing on the science of information and knowledge management, and the role of computers and communications in modern biomedical research, health and health care.

    Contents:
    Biomedical Informatics: The Science and the Pragmatics
    Biomedical Data: Their Acquisition, Storage, and Use
    Biomedical Decision Making: Probabilistic Clinical Reasoning
    Cognitive Science and Biomedical Informatics
    Computer Architectures for Health Care and Biomedicine
    Software Engineering for Health Care and Biomedicine
    Standards in Biomedical Informatics
    Natural Language Processing in Health Care and Biomedicine
    Biomedical Imaging Informatics
    Ethics and Biomedical and Health Informatics: Users, Standards, and Outcomes
    Evaluation of Biomedical and Health Information Resources
    Electronic Health Record Systems
    The Health Information Infrastructure
    Management of Information in Health Care Organizations
    Patient-Centered Care Systems
    Public Health Informatics
    Consumer Health Informatics and Personal Health Records
    Telehealth
    Patient Monitoring Systems
    Imaging Systems in Radiology
    Information Retrieval and Digital Libraries
    Clinical Decision-Support Systems
    Computers in Health Care Education
    Bioinformatics
    Translational Bioinformatics
    Clinical Research Informatics
    Health Information Technology Policy
    The Future of Informatics in Biomedicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kevin Bretonnel Cohen, Dina Demner-Fushman.
    Summary: Biomedical Natural Language Processing" is a comprehensive tour through the classic and current work in the field. It discusses all subjects from both a rule-based and a machine learning approach, and also describes each subject from the perspective of both biological science and clinical medicine. The intended audience is readers who already have a background in natural language processing, but a clear introduction makes it accessible to readers from the fields of bioinformatics and computational biology, as well. The book is suitable as a reference, as well as a text for advanced courses in biomedical natural language processing and text mining.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to natural language processing
    2. Historical background
    3. Named entity recognition
    4. Relation extraction
    5. Information retrieval/document classification
    6. Concept normalization
    7. Ontologies and computational lexical semantics
    8. Summarization
    9. Question-answering
    10. Software engineering
    11. Corpus construction and annotation
    References
    Index.
  • Digital
    edited by Brian J.-F. Wong, Justus Ilgner.
    Contents:
    Contemporary laser surgical procedures in the head and neck
    Advanced therapeutic concepts of light therapy
    Photodynamic therapy
    Optical diagnostics: introduction.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Babak Arjmand, Moloud Payab, Parisa Goodarzi, editors.
    Summary: This textbook covers all the steps in manufacturing a biomedical product from bench to bedside. It specifically focuses on quality assurance and management and explains the different good practice principles in the various phases of product development as well as how to fulfill them: Good laboratory practice, good manufacturing practice and good clinical practice. It provides readers with the know-how to design biomedical experiments to ensure quality and integrity, to plan and conduct standard preclinical studies and to assure the quality of the final manufactured biomedical products. Importantly, it also addresses ethical concerns and considerations. The book discusses the guidelines and ethical considerations for preclinical and clinical studies, to allow readers to identify safety concerns regarding biomedical products and to improve pre-clinical studies for the development of better products. This textbook is a valuable guide for biomedical students (B.Sc., M.S., and Ph.D. students) in the field of molecular medicine, medical biotechnology, stem cell research and related areas, as well as for professionals such as quality control staff, tissue bankers, policy-makers and health professionals.

    Contents:
    1. An Introduction to Biomedical Product Development
    2. Basic Essentials and Applications of Quality Management System (QMS) in Biomedical Sciences
    3. Principles of Good Laboratory Practice (GLP)
    4. Design of Experimental Studies in Biomedical Sciences
    5. Preclinical Studies for Development of Biomedical Products
    6. Principles of Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP)
    7.The importance of Cleanroom facility in manufacturing of biomedical products
    8. Safety concerns and requirement of cell based products for clinical application
    9. Standards and regulatory frameworks (for cell and tissue based products)
    10. Principles of Good clinical Practice (GCP)
    11. Design, performance and monitoring of clinical trials
    12. Good Clinical Practice: Guidelines and Requirement
    13. Ethical Considerations of Biomedical Products Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Seward B. Rutkove.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    PART 1: Basic considerations
    1. So do you really want to pursue research?
    2. What's in store: The brighter side of medical research
    3. What's in store: The darker side of medical research
    4. One degree of separation
    5. Choosing and working with a mentor
    6. Identifying a research niche you can call your own
    7. Useful Definitions
    PART 2: Research Foundations and Structures
    8. The Institutional Review Board: Do's, Don'ts, and Nevers...
    9. Animal Care and Use Committees
    10. Research beyond humans and vertebrates
    11. Hiring Research Staff
    12. Strategy and Tactics: Running a Successful Laboratory
    13. Everything you ever wanted to know about collaboration Part 3: Successful Paper and Grant Writing
    14. Writing a successful research paper. I
    Up to the point of submission
    15. Writing a successful research paper. II
    Revising, resubmitting, and post-acceptance tasks
    16. Funding: An overview
    17. Where to apply for funding: making the right choices
    18. Writing a winning grant application
    19. Grant budgeting
    20. Grant writing: Pearls and lumps of coal
    21. Research Training, Fellowship, and Career grants
    22. Grant review from the inside
    23. Interpreting your reviews
    24. To resubmit or not resubmit and how to do it
    Part 4: Good presentations, conferencing, networking, and other useful tools
    25. The art of good presentation
    26. Effective conferencing
    27. Networking in the 21st century
    28. Conflicts of interest
    29. Scientific conduct and misconduct: what is right and proper, what is not, and what is somewhere in the middle
    30. Article review and reading: being efficient and as thorough as you need to be
    31. Patents
    32. Working with industry
    Part 5: Career choices and life lessons
    33. Jobs in biomedical science: seeking, landing, and changing
    34. Academic Promotion and Titles
    35. On being a mentor
    36. Yardsticks of success
    37. Research Life Lesson #1: Everything takes longer than you think, so plan for it
    38. Research life lesson #2: A person's research is endlessly important to them
    39. Research Life lesson #3: Balance, timing, cycles and seeing the big picture
    40. Research Life Lesson #4: Your career is an ultramarathon, not a sprint
    41. Conclusion: Nothing satisfies like meaningful work
    Acknowledgements.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Iyad Obeid, Ivan Selesnick, Joseph Picone, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an interdisciplinary look at emerging trends in signal processing and biomedicine found at the intersection of healthcare, engineering, and computer science. It examines the vital role signal processing plays in enabling a new generation of technology based on big data, and looks at applications ranging from medical electronics to data mining of electronic medical records. Topics covered include analysis of medical images, machine learning, biomedical nanosensors, wireless technologies, and instrumentation and electrical stimulation. Biomedical Signal Processing: Innovation and Applications presents tutorials and examples of successful applications, and will appeal to a wide range of professionals, researchers, and students interested in applications of signal processing, medicine, and biology. Presents an interdisciplinary look at research trends in signal processing and biomedicine; Promotes collaboration between healthcare practitioners and signal processing researchers; Includes tutorials and examples of successful applications.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Multi-class fNIRS Classification of Motor Execution Tasks with Application to Brain Computer Interfaces
    Chapter 2. A Comparative Study of End-to-End Discriminative Deep Learning Models for Knee Joint Kinematic Time Series Classification
    Chapter 3. Nonlinear Smoothing of Data with Random Gaps and Outliers (DRAGO) Improves Estimation of Circadian Rhythm
    Chapter 4. Wearable Smart Garment Devices for Passive Biomedical Monitoring
    Chapter 5. Spatial Distribution of Seismocardiographic Signals
    Chapter 6. Noninvasive Vascular Blood Sound Monitoring Through Flexible Pvdf Microphone
    Chapter 7. Fast Automatic Artifact Annotator for EEG Signals Using Deep Learning
    Chapter 8. Objective evaluation metrics for automatic classification of EEG events.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Shakti Kumar Yadav, Sompal Singh, Ruchika Gupta.
    Summary: This book is written in a very easy-to-follow format, and explains the key concepts of biomedical statistics in a lucid yet straightforward manner. It explains how mathematical and statistical tools can be used to find answers to common research questions. In addition, the main text is supplemented by a wealth of solved exercises and illustrative examples to aid in comprehension. Given its content, the book offers an invaluable quick reference guide for graduating students and can be very helpful in their examination process. At the same time, it represents a handy guide for medical and paramedical teachers, post-graduate medical students, research personnel, biomedical scientists and epidemiologists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Applications of Statistics
    Chapter 2. Statistical Terms
    Chapter 3. Data Types
    Chapter 4. Data Classification
    Chapter 5. Data Presentation
    Chapter 6. Measures of Central Tendency
    Chapter 7. Measures of Location
    Chapter 8. Measures of Dispersion
    Chapter 9. Sampling Methods
    Chapter 10. Statistical Distribution-Continuous
    Chapter 11. Sampling Distribution and Hypothesis testing
    Chapter 12. Test of Inference- one sample or two sample mean
    Chapter 13. Test for Inference- Multiple sample comparisons
    Chapter 14. Test for Inference- Categorical Data I
    Chapter 15. Test for Inference- Categorical Data II
    Chapter 16. Test for Inference- Correlation and Regression
    Chapter 17. Non Parametric Tests
    Chapter 18. Sample Size Estimation
    Chapter 19. Epidemiological Studies
    Chapter 20. Analysis of Diagnostic Test
    Chapter 21. Demography
    Chapter 22. Measures of Demography
    Chapter 23. Infectious Disease Epidemiology
    Chapter 24. Life Tables
    Chapter 25. Introduction to Probability
    Chapter 26. Random Variable and Mathematical Expectation
    Chapter 27. Statistical Distribution- Discrete
    Chapter 28. Univariate logistic regression- Theoretical aspects
    Chapter 29. Use of Computer software for basic statistics.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Yellowlees Douglas, PhD, Associate Professor, University of Florida, Maria B. Grant, MD, Professor, University of Alabama-Birmingham.
    Summary: "Writing today is a task that most researchers delegate to the least-seasoned member of their unit. These junior members of teams are, if anything, even more in the dark about the entire cycle of writing, submission, and revision than the rest of the team. Perversely, we treat the most challenging aspect of research as gruntwork best passed off to the individuals who cannot refuse to do it. Perhaps, if researchers knew the logistics of good writing and the gauntlets we all pass through in getting work published or funded, they would spend more time mentoring their teammates and even less time delegating"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Writing : the most vital and neglected skill
    Writing for your reader's brain
    Before you begin : getting to so what? and who cares?
    Getting published : manuscripts, journals, and submissions
    Getting funded : applying for grants
    Collaborative writing : pass the baton
    Communicating with the public.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony R. White, Michael Aschner, Lucio G. Costa, Ashley I. Bush.
    Contents:
    Biometals and Alzheimer's disease / Alexandra I. Mot, Peter J. Crouch
    Copper in Alzheimer's disease / Rosanna Squitti, Maricarla Ventriglia, Mariacristina Siotto, Carlo Salustri
    The role of selenium in neurodegenerative diseases / Bárbara R. Cardoso, Dominic J. Hare, Ashley I. Bush
    Does HFE genotype impact macrophage phenotype in disease process and therapeutic response? / Anne M. Nixon, James R. Connor
    Chemical elements and oxidative status in neuroinflammation / Michela Ferraldeschi, Silvia Romano, Maria C. Buscarinu, Arianna Fornasiero, Rosella Mechelli, Benedetta Cerasoli, Anna Pino, Sonia Brescianini, Carlo Mattei, Maria A. Stazi, Alessandro Alimonti, Marco Salvetti, Giovanni Ristori
    Metals and neuroinflammation / Stephen C. Bondy
    Metals and prions / David R. Brown
    Manganese and neurodegeneration / Dinamene Marques Dos Santos, Michael Aschner, Ana P. Marrielha Dos Santos
    Zinc in autism / Stefanie Grabrucker, Andreas M. Grabrucker
    Metals and motor neuron disease / Per M. Roos
    Metals and Lysosomal storage disorders / Henna Kontinnen, Katarína Lejavová, Tarja Malm, Katja M Kanninen
    Developmental exposure to metals and its contribution to age-related neurodegeneration / Lucio G. Costa
    Metal biology associated with Huntington's disease / Terry Jo V. Bichell, Timothy C. Halbesma, K. Grace Tipps, Aaron B. Bowman
    Metal-binding to Amyloid-ss peptide / Melisa Del Barrio, Valentina Borghesani, Christelle Hureau, Peter Faller
    Metals and mitochondria in neurodegeneration / Germán Plascencia-Villa, Miguel José- Yacamán, George Perry
    Metal transporters in neurodegeneration / Hong Jiang
    Metal imaging in the brain / David C. Dorman
    Metalloregulation of protein clearance / Alejandra Ramírez Muñoz, Mark A. Greenough, Ashley I. Bush, Carlos M. Opazo
    Metals and autophagy in neurotoxicitiy / Peng Su, Michael Aschner, Jingyuan Chen, Wenjing Luo
    An overview of multifunctonal metal chelators as potential treatments for neurodegenerative diseases / Frank W. Lewis, David Tétard
    Abnormal function of metalloprotein underlies most neurodegenerative diseases / Katja M. Kanninen, Anthony R. White.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Insup Noh, editor.
    Summary: "This volume outlines the current status in the field of biomimetic medical materials and illustrates research into their applications in tissue engineering. The book is divided into six parts, focusing on nano biomaterials, stem cells, tissue engineering, 3D printing, immune responses and intellectual property. Each chapter has its own introduction and outlines current research trends in a variety of applications of biomimetic medical materials. The biomimetic medical materials that are covered include functional hydrogels, nanoparticles for drug delivery and medicine, the 3D bioprinting of biomaterials, sensor materials, stem cell interactions with biomaterials, immune responses to biomaterials, biodegradable hard scaffolds for tissue engineering, as well as other important topics, like intellectual property. Each chapter is written by a team of experts. This volume attempts to introduce the biomimetic properties of biomedical materials within the context of our current understanding of the nanotechnology of nanoparticles and fibres and the macroscopic aspects of 3D bioprinting"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction. Overviews of biomimetic medical materials / Dipankar Das, Insup Noh
    Nanomaterials as an emerging biomimetic materials. Protein cage nanoparticles as delivery nanoplatforms / Bongseo Choi, Hansol Kim, Hyukjun Choi, Sebyung Kang
    Cell membrane coated nanoparticles: an emerging biomimetic nanoplatform for targeted bioimaging and therapy / Veena Vijayan, Saji Uthaman, In-Kyu Park
    Graphene-based nanomaterials and their applications in biosensors / Young Jun Kim, Bongjin Jeong
    Graphene-functionalized biomimetic scaffolds for tissue regeneration / Yong Cheol Shin, Su-Jin Song, Suck Won Hong, Jin-Woo Oh, Yu-Shik Hwang, Yu Suk Choi [and others]
    Biomimetic materials in tissue engineering. influence of biomimetic materials on cell migration / Min Sung Kim [and others]
    Biomimetic scaffolds for bone tissue engineering / Joon Yeong Park [and others]
    Recent progress in vascular tissue-engineered blood vessels / Jun Chen, Grant C. Alexander, Pratheek S. Bobba, Ho-Wook Jun
    Biomimetic medical materials and stem cells. microenvironmental regulation of stem cell behavior through biochemical and biophysical stimulation / Bogyu Choi, Deogil Kim, Inbo Han, Soo-Hong Lee
    Decellularized tissue matrix for stem cell and tissue engineering / Jung Seung Lee, Yi Sun Choi, Seung-Woo Cho
    Biomaterials for stem cell therapy for cardiac disease / Hyunbum Kim, Seung-Hyun L. Kim, Young-Hwan Choi, Young-Hyun Ahn, Nathaniel S. Hwang
    Immunoresponses of biomimetic medical materials. immunomodulation of biomaterials by controlling macrophage polarization / Hyeong-Cheol Yang, Hee Chul Park, Hongxuan Quan, Yongjoon Kim
    Artificial methods for t cell activation: critical tools in T cell biology and T cell immunotherapy / Kyung-Ho Roh
    Regulatory T cell-mediated tissue repair / Jihye Hong, Byung-Soo Kim
    Functional biomaterials. ROS-responsive biomaterial design for medical applications / Jung Bok Lee [and others]
    Fibrin-based biomaterial applications in tissue engineering and regenerative medicine / Chan Ho Park, Kyung Mi Woo
    Fabrication of electrochemical-based bioelectronic device and biosensor composed of biomaterial-nanomaterial hybrid / Mohsen Mohammadniaei, Chulhwan Park, Junhong Min, Hiesang Sohn, Taek Lee
    Biomimetic self-assembling peptide hydrogels for tissue engineering applications / Jiaju Lu, Xiumei Wang
    Bioartificial esophagus: where are we now? / Eun-Jae Chung
    3-D bioprinting biomaterials. ECM based bioink for tissue mimetic 3D bioprinting / Seung Yun Nam, Sang-Hyug Park
    3D bioprinting for artificial pancreas organ / Seon Jae Lee, Jae Bin Lee, Young-Woo Park, Dong Yun Lee
    Intellectual properties in applications of biomimetic medical materials. current status of development and intellectual properties of biomimetic medical materials / Janarthanan Gopinathan, Insup Noh.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Gordana Vunjak-Novakovic, Department of Biomedical Engineering and Department of Medicine, Columbia University, New York, NY, USA, Kursad Turksen, Sprott Centre for Stem Cell Research, Ottawa Hospital Research Institute, Ottawa, ON, Canada.
    Contents:
    Derivation and network formation of vascular cells from human pluripotent stem cells
    High-throughput cell aggregate culture for stem cell chondrogenesis
    Microfluidic device to culture 3D in vitro human capillary networks
    Multifunction co-culture model for evaluating cell-cell interactions
    Multiwell plate tools for controlling cellular alignment with grooved topography
    Bioreactor cultivation of anatomically shaped human bone grafts
    Determining the role of matrix compliance in the differentiation of mammary stem cells
    Conjugation of proteins to polymer chains to create multivalent molecules
    An assay to quantify chemotactic properties of degradation products from extracellular matrix
    Biomimetic strategies incorporating enzymes into CaP coatings mimicking the in vivo environment
    Fabrication of biofunctionalized, cell-laden macroporous 3D PEG hydrogels as bone marrow analogs for the cultivation of human hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells
    Extracellular matrix mimetic peptide scaffolds for neural stem cell culture and differentiation
    The delivery and evaluation of RNAi therapeutics for heterotopic ossification pathologies
    Mimicking bone microenvironment for directing adipose tissue-derived mesenchymal stem cells into osteogenic differentiation
    Cultivation of human bone-like tissue from pluripotent stem cell-derived osteogenic progenitors in perfusion bioreactors.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Heung Jae Chun, Rui L. Reis, Antonella Motta, Gilson Khang, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kazuyoshi Endo, Toshihiro Kogure, Hiromichi Nagasawa, editors.
    Summary: This open access book is the proceedings of the 14th International Symposium on Biomineralization (BIOMIN XIV) held in 2017 at Tsukuba. Over the past 45 years, biomineralization research has unveiled details of the characteristics of the nano-structure of various biominerals; the formation mechanism of this nano-structure, including the initial stage of crystallization; and the function of organic matrices in biominerals, and this knowledge has been applied to dental, medical, pharmaceutical, materials, agricultural and environmental sciences and paleontology. As such, biomineralization is an important interdisciplinary research area, and further advances are expected in both fundamental and applied research.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Part I. Structure and analysis of biominerals
    1 On the transition temperature to calcite and cell lengths for various biogenic aragonite
    2 TEM study of the radular teeth of the chiton Acanthopleura japonica
    3 Experimental cremation of bone
    crystallite size and lattice parameter evolution
    4 Effect of carbonic anhydrase immobilized on eggshell membranes on calcium carbonate crystallization in vitro
    5 Proteomic Analysis of Venomous Fang Matrix Proteins of Protobothrops flavoviridis (Habu) Snake
    6 Characterization of goldfish scales by vibrational spectroscopic analyses
    7 Relationship between Bone Morphology and Bone Quality in Female Femurs: Implication for Additive Risk of Alternative Forced Molting
    8 Spectroscopic investigation of shell pigments from the family Neritidae (Mollusca: Gastropoda)
    9 3D visualization of calcified and non-calcified molluscan tissues using computed tomography
    Part II Molecular and cellular regulation of biomineralization
    10 Calcium Ion and Mineral Pathways in Biomineralization: a Perspective
    11 Identification of barnacle shell proteins by transcriptome and proteomic approaches
    12 The optical characteristics of cultured Akoya pearl are influenced by both donor and recipient oysters
    13 Influence of B vitamins on proliferation and differentiation of osteoblastic bovine cell cultures; an in vitro study
    14 Rice plant biomineralization: Electron microscopic study on plant opals and exploration of organic matrices involved in biosilica formation
    15 DMP1 binds specifically to type I collagen and regulates mineral nucleation and growth
    16 Exploration of genes associated with sponge silicon biomineralization in the whole genome sequence of the hexactinellid Euplectella curvistellata
    Part III Genome-based analysis of biomineralization
    17 The origin and early evolution of SCPP genes and tissue mineralization in vertebrates
    Part IV Evolution in biomineralization
    18 Immunolocalization of enamel matrix protein-like proteins in the tooth enameloid of actinopterygian bony fish
    19 Geographical and seasonal variations of the shell microstructures in the bivalve Scapharca broughtonii
    Part V Biomineralization in medical and dental sciences
    20 Enhancement of bone tissue repair by octacalcium phosphate crystallizing into hydroxyapatite in situ
    21 The relationship between the structure and calcification of dentin and the role of melatonin
    22 Fabrication of hydroxyapatite nanofibers with high aspect ratio vialow-temperature wet precipitation methods under acidic conditions
    23 Physico-chemical characterisation of the processes involved in enamel remineralisation by CPP-ACP
    24 Molecular Interactions of Peptide Encapsulated Calcium Phosphate Delivery Vehicle at Enamel Surfaces
    25 Preparation of random and aligned polycaprolactone fiber as template for classical calcium oxalate through electrocrystallization
    Part VI Bio-inspired materials science and engineering
    26 Dysprosium biomineralization by acidophilic fungus Penidiella sp. strain T9 and its application for metal recovery
    27 Various shapes of gold nanoparticles synthesized by glycolipids extracted from Lactobacillus casei
    28 Octacalcium phosphate overgrowth on b-tricalcium phosphate substrate in metastable calcium phosphate solution
    Part VII Biominerals for environmental and paleoenvironmental sciences
    29 Coral-based approaches to paleoclimate studies, future ocean environment assessment, and disaster research
    30 An elemental fractionation mechanism common to biogenic calcium carbonate
    31 Biomineralization of metallic tellurium by bacteria isolated from deep marine sediment in Niigata Bay Japan
    32 Calcium oxalate crystals in plant communities of the southeast of the Pampean Plain, Argentina
    33 Iron and calcium biomineralizations in the Pampean coastal plains, Argentina: their role in the environmental reconstruction of the Holocene
    Part VIII Mollusk shell formation
    34 Skeletal organic matrices in molluscs: origin, evolution, diagenesis
    35 Functional Analysis on Shelk2 of Pacific Oyster
    36 Mollusk shells: Does the nacro-prismatic "model" exist?
    37 The Marsh's membrane: a key-role for a forgotten structure
    38 Pearl production by implantation of outer epithelial cells isolated from the mantle of Pinctada fucata and the effects of blending of epithelial cells with different genetic backgrounds on pearl quality
    39 Functional analyses of MMP genes in the ligament of Pinctada fucata
    40 Chitin degraded by chitinolytic enzymes induces crystal defects of calcites
    41 Screening for genes participating in the formation of prismatic and nacreous layers of the Japanese pearl oyster Pincatada fucata by RNA interference knockdown
    42 Gene expression patterns in the mantle and pearl sac tissues of the pearl oyster Pinctada fucata
    Part IX Appendix
    43 Selected SEM and TEM images.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Arun K. Shukla.
    Summary: Biomolecular Interactions: Part A, Volume 166, the latest release in the Methods in Cell Biology series, highlights new advances in the field, with this new volume presenting interesting chapters on a variety of timely topics in cell biology. Each chapter is written by an international board of authors.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ScienceDirect
  • Digital
    edited by Carole Aimé, Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, Paris, France, Thibaud Coradin, Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, Paris, France.
    Contents:
    What Are Bionanocomposites? / Agathe Urvoas, Marie Valerio-Lepiniec, Philippe Minard, Cordt Zollfrank
    Molecular Architecture of Living Matter. Nucleic Acids / Enora Prado, Mónika Ádok-Sipiczki, Corinne Nardin
    Lipids / Carole Aimé, Thibaud Coradin
    Carbohydrates / Mirjam Czjzek
    Proteins / Stéphane Romero, François-Xavier Campbell-Valois
    Functional Biomolecular Engineering. Nucleic Acid Engineering / Enora Prado, Mónika Ádok-Sipiczki, Corinne Nardin
    Protein Engineering / Agathe Urvoas, Marie Valerio-Lepiniec, Philippe Minard
    The Composite Approach. Inorganic Nanoparticles / Carole Aimé, Thibaud Coradin
    Hybrid Particles / Nikola Ž Knežević, Laurence Raehm, Jean-Olivier Durand
    Biocomposites from Nanoparticles / Carole Aimé, Thibaud Coradin
    Applications. Optical Properties / Cordt Zollfrank, Daniel Opdenbosch
    Magnetic Bionanocomposites / Wei Li, Yuehan Wu, Xiaogang Luo, Shilin Liu
    Mechanical Properties of Natural Biopolymer Nanocomposites / Biqiong Chen
    Bionanocomposite Materials for Biocatalytic Applications / Sarah Christoph, Francisco M Fernandes
    Nanocomposite Biomaterials / Gisela Solange Alvarez, Martín Federico Desimone
    A Combination of Characterization Techniques / Carole Aimé, Thibaud Coradin.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Oskar C. Aszmann, Dario Farina, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest techniques in amputation rehabilitation and summarizes the most recent research findings in the field of bionic limb reconstruction. Divided into seven parts written by experts in the field, it provides valuable information on e.g. upper extremity injuries, psychological considerations, prosthetic engineering, and surgical and rehabilitation strategies. Illustrative figures and photos of real-life settings further assist understanding. This book is of interest not only for plastic surgeons, but also for hand surgeons, orthopedic and trauma surgeons as well as therapists, prosthetists and engineers.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I. Severe injuries of the upper extremity
    Chapter 1. General Considerations on Upper Limb Amputation and its Levels
    Chapter 2. Psychosocial importance of the hand, consequences of severe hand trauma, amputation and complete brachial plexus injury
    Chapter 3. Inner amputations of the upper extremity
    Part II. Functional restoration in upper limb amputees
    Chapter 4. Body-powered prosthetic systems
    Chapter 5. Mechatronic Design of Functional Prosthetic Systems
    Chapter 6. Osseointegrated amputation prostheses and implanted electrodes
    Chapter 7. Outcome Measures
    Chapter 8. Biologic alternatives to prosthetic hand replacement
    Part III . Selective nerve transfers in upper limb amputees
    Chapter 9. Motor unit characteristics after selective nerve transfers
    Chapter 10. Targeted muscle reinnervation in upper limb amputees
    Part IV. Phantom pain in limb amputees
    Chapter 11. Epidemiology and mechanisms of phantom limb pain
    Chapter 12. Treatment strategies for phantom limb pain
    Part V. Man-machine interfaces in prosthetics
    Chapter 13. Control Strategies for Functional Upper Limb Prostheses
    Chapter 14. Implantable myoelectric sensors for prosthetic control
    Chapter 15. Prosthetic feedback systems
    Part VI. Prosthetic replacement in patients with inner amputations
    Chapter 16. Deafferentation pain following brachial plexus avulsion injuries
    Chapter 17. Treatment algorithm for bionic hand reconstruction in patients with global brachial plexopathies
    Chapter 18. Functional and psychosocial outcomes of bionic reconstruction and impact on quality of life, body image perception and deafferentation pain
    Chapter 19. Ethical considerations and psychological evaluation in elective amputation for Brachial Plexus Injuries
    Part VII. Rehabilitation in upper limb prosthetics
    Chapter 20. Principles of Occupational and Physical Therapy in Upper Limb Amputations
    Chapter 21. Novel technologies in upper extremity rehabilitation
    Chapter 22. Conclusions and Future Outlook.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    John T. Edsall, Jeffries Wyman.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    QH345 .E24
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Ingrida Januleviciene and Alon Harris.
    Summary: This book provides an overview on new insights in glaucoma, the latest technological developments, scientific achievements, and novel research leading to new paradigms in glaucoma diagnosis. Readers will discover a broad picture starting from theoretical perspectives in diagnostic criteria followed by practical examination and clinical interpretations while highlighting potential pitfalls and limitations in analysis. Non-invasive, modern technologies allowing visualization and quantification of various parts of the human eye are fast evolving and improving interpretation of modern diagnostic possibilities are essential to fill the gap between sophisticated equipment, complex clinical data, and the need for precision-medicine based interpretation. Issues such as the importance of intraocular, intracranial, and ocular perfusion pressures (IOP, ICP, OPP) in the pathogenesis of glaucoma; and imaging modalities for examination of the optic nerve head, retinal fiber layer, and visual field assessment in glaucoma are explored in these chapters. The problem-based learning approach presented herein offers a succinct go-to-guide to read and discover answers.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nima Rezaei, Amene Saghazadeh, editors.
    Summary: The book does not aim to constitute definite edges of the sixth sense, but it is to say here that the sixth sense is the result of a break in our present property. The present property is produced from integration of five common senses by the neuro-immuno-endocrine system. Thereby, mental representations of multisensory integration that primarily occur in the brain can reach throughout the body, including the heart and gut. Unconscious thought through synchronization between spatially distant brain networks would help break our present property. It would be a felicific calculus for society people to peek around the forgotten, but real life, corners through which the book "Biophysics and Neurophysiology of the Sixth Sense" seeks to explore.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Chapter 1: What Would Happen If Humans Live Beyond Time?; Introduction; That Which Is Not Seen; The Unconscious-Thought Theory; The Default-Mode Network; The Information-Integration Theory; The Hypothesis of Conscious
    Unconscious Prospection (CUP); An Integrated Approach to the Hypothesis of Conscious
    Unconscious Prospection (CUP); Belief in the Present Time: That Which Generates the Background Noise While Thinking to About the Future; Being Out of Time: A Solution to See That Which Is Not Seen at the Present Time Distinguishing Self-Stimuli from Non-self, Role of Corollary DischargeThe Vestibular System; Proprioception as the Sixth Sense; Conclusions; References; Chapter 7: Extrasensory Perception: Concept and History; Introduction; Sense and Extra-Sense (the Sixth Sense); Proximate Origin of the Research in Extrasensory Perception; Types of Extrasensory Perception; Conclusions; References; Chapter 8: A Psychological Perspective on Extrasensory Perception; Introduction; Elementary Hallucinations; Deranged Hallucinations; Complete Hallucinations; Conclusions Interoceptive Hub and Visceromotor PredictionsModel for Interoceptive Inference Within Visceral Sensorimotor System; Conclusions; References; Chapter 5: Interoceptive Dysfunction; Interoception; Mood Disturbance; Anxiety Disorders; Depression; Autism; Addiction; Chronic Pain and Fibromyalgia; Delusional Body Border Disorders; Eating Disorders; Conclusions; References; Chapter 6: The Proprioceptive System; Introduction; The Proprioceptive System; Muscle Spindles; Golgi Tendon Organs; Joint Receptors; Free Nerve Endings; Skin Mechanoreceptors Neural Coding and PerceptionComputer Vision and Future Directions; Conclusions; References; Chapter 3: Biophysics of Vision; Image Forming Function of Visual System; Cornea; Lens; Accommodation; Pupil; Retina; Non-image Forming Functions of Visual System; Perception of Magnetic Field; Visual System and Circadian Rhythm; Pineal Gland; Melatonin: The Main Product of Pineal Gland; Other Sources of Melatonin; Other Modulators of Melatonin Secretion; Conclusions; References; Chapter 4: Cortex, Insula, and Interoception; Introduction; Insula; Amygdala; Neocortex Resonance: That Which Occurs If Being Out of TimeHow Would Entropy Change Relative to Resonance If Being Out of Time?; Conclusions; References; Chapter 2: Neurophysiology of Visual Perception; Introduction; Neuroanatomical Properties of Visual System; The Eye; The Retina; The Optic Pathways; Brain Regions and Pathways Involved in Perception; The Microstructure of the Primary Visual Cortex; Object Recognition; Perception of Form; Perception of Space; Motion Perception; Eye Movements and Perception; Adaptation; Human Gaze Control; Face Perception; The Constructive Nature of Visual Perception
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Mark C. Leake, editors.
    Contents:
    The biophysics of infection / Mark C. Leake
    Single-molecule observation of DNA replication repair pathways in E. coli / Adam J.M. Wollman, Aisha H. Syeda, Peter McGlynn and Mark C. Leake
    Investigating the swimming of microbial pathogens using digital holography / K.L. Thornton, R.C. Findlay, P.B. Walrad and L.G. Wilson
    What is the 'minimum inhibitory concentration' (mic) of pexiganan acting on escherichia coli?--a cautionary case study / Alys K. Jepson, Jana Schwarz-Linek, Lloyd Ryan, Maxim G. Ryadnov and Wilson C.K. Poon
    Evolution of drug resistance in bacteria / B. Waclaw
    Using biophysics to monitor the essential protonmotive force in bacteria / Mei-Ting Chen and Chien-Jung Lo
    The Type I restriction enzymes as barriers to horizontal gene transfer: determination of the DNA target sequences recognised by livestock-associated methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus clonal complexes 133/ST771 and 398 / Kai Chen, Augoustinos S. Stephanou, Gareth A. Roberts, John H. White, Laurie P. Cooper, Patrick J. Houston, Jodi A. Lindsay and David T.F. Dryden
    Biomechanical analysis of infectious biofilms / David Head
    Designing a single-molecule biophysics tool for characterising DNA damage for techniques that kill infectious pathogens through DNA damage effects / Helen Miller, Adam J.M. Wollman and Mark C. Leake
    Bacterial surfaces: front lines in host-pathogen interaction / Jane E. King and Ian S. Roberts
    Biophysical approaches to bacterial gene regulation by riboswitches / Cibran Perez-Gonzalez, Jonathan P. Grondin, Daniel A. Lafontaine and J. Carlos Penedo
    Bugs on a slippery plane / Dmitri O. Pushkin and Martin A. Bees
    Transcription regulation and membrane stress management in enterobacterial pathogens / Nan Zhang, Goran Jovanovic, Christopher McDonald, Oscar Ces, Xiaodong Zhang and Martin Buck
    How biophysics may help us understand the flagellar motor of bacteria which cause infections / Matthew A.B. Baker
    Mechanics of bacterial cells and initial surface colonization / Sebastian Aguayo and Laurent Bozec
    Neutron reflectivity as a tool for physics-based studies of model bacterial membranes / Robert D. Barker, Laura E. McKinley and Simon Titmuss
    Mechanisms of Salmonella typhi host restriction / Stefania Spanò --Insights into biological complexity from simple foundations / L. Albergante, D. Liu, S. Palmer and T.J. Newman
    Force spectroscopy in studying infection / Zhaokun Zhou and Mark C. Leake
    Imaging immunity in lymph nodes: past, present and future / James Butler, Amy Sawtell, Simon Jarrett, Jason Cosgrove, Roger Leigh, Jon Timmis and Mark Coles
    Novel approaches to manipulating bacterial pathogen biofilms: whole-systems design philosophy and steering microbial evolution / Alexandra S. Penn
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nikolai Vekshin.
    Summary: In this monograph, the author--Head researcher at the Institute of Cell Biophysics of Russian Academy of Sciences--discusses the results of his own long-term studies of mitochondria as well as alternative points of view and experiments of other important researchers in the field. The monograph contains the main aspects of mitochondrial research by a number of physical methods: fluorescence spectroscopy, UV-vis spectrophotometry, IR spectroscopy, light-scattering, optical microscopy, fluorescence microscopy, colorimetry, photobleaching, polarography, among others. The monograph is very useful for researchers and graduate students specializing in mitochondrial biophysics, biochemistry, molecular biology and cytology. The book was published in Russian in 2019 by Photon Publishers (Pushchino, Moscow region).

    Contents:
    The mitochondria in the cell
    Early studies
    Structural features
    Are there giant mitochondria and reticulum
    Evolutionary origins
    Reproduction of mitochondria in cell
    Mitochondrial DNA
    Membrane and matrix proteins
    Bioenergetics
    The respiratory chain
    NADH-dehydrogenase
    Succinate dehydrogenase
    Cytochrome oxidase
    Interactions in enzyme-substrate complexes
    Mechanisms of electron transfer
    Membrane synthesis of ATP
    Proton transport and the chemiosmotic hypothesis
    On the measurement of transmembrane potential
    The conformational hypothesis
    Thermal coupling model
    Photo-respiration and photo-induced synthesis of ATP
    Surface photodesorption
    Flavin and ubiquinone of NADH-dehydrogenases are not involved in the transfer of electrons to artificial acceptors
    The lag-period and the pseudo-oscillations in redox-reactions of NADH with DHPIP
    Electron-conformational properties of the flavoprotein fragment of NADH-dehydrogenase
    Resonant energy transfer from mitochondrial proteins to NADH
    Flavin loss from NADH-dehydrogenase complex
    Stabilization of NADH-dehydrogenase by adenosine phosphates
    Dehydrogenase mitochondrial activity in the touch, determined by the decrease in tryptophan fluorescence by formosan
    Rotenone-insensitive NADH oxidation by respiratory chain fragments
    Cytochrome-C shunts oxidation of NADH
    NADH-oxidasation mitochondrial activity in hypotension when you block the respiratory chain
    Do mitochondria swell much?
    Some properties of protomitochondria
    Protomitochondria in liver cells
    Germinal protomitochondria
    Fluorimetric comparison of protomitochondria and mitochondria
    Photometry and fluorimetry of protomitochondria from liver of young and adult rats.-Degradation of mitochondria to lipofuscin during heating and lighting
    Production of superoxide and lipofuscin after the loss of flavin by NADH-dehydrogenase
    Some properties of mitochondrial lipofuscin.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    John Golbeck, Art van der Est, editors.
    Summary: "The volume is intended as an introduction to the physical principles governing the main processes that occur in photosynthesis, with emphasis on the light reactions and electron transport chain. A unique feature of the photosynthetic apparatus is the fact that the molecular structures are known in detail for essentially all of its major components. The availability of this data has allowed their functions to be probed at a very fundamental level to discover the design principles that have guided evolution. Other volumes on photosynthesis have tended to focus on single components or on a specific set of biophysical techniques, and the authors' goal is to provide new researchers with an introduction to the overall field of photosynthesis. The book is divided into sections, each dealing with one of the main physical processes in photosynthetic energy conversion. Each section has several chapters each describing the role that a basic physical property, such as charge or spin, plays in governing the process being discussed. The chapters proceed in an orderly fashion from a quantum mechanical description of early processes on an ultrafast timescale to a classical treatment of electron transfer and catalysis on a biochemical timescale culminating in evolutionary principles on a geological timescale."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Part I. Light Energy Capture and Energy Transfer
    1. Structure-Based Calculation of Pigment-Protein and Excitonic Pigment-Pigment Coupling in Photosynthetic Light-Harvesting Complexes / Frank Müh and Thomas Renger
    2. Electron-Phonon and Exciton-Phonon Coupling in Light Harvesting, Insights from Line-Narrowing Spectroscopies / Jörg Pieper and Arvi Freiberg
    3. Photosynthetic Energy Transfer and Charge Separation in Higher Plants / Tjaart P.J. Krüger, Vladimir I. Novoderezhkin, Elisabet Romero, and Rienk van Grondelle
    Part II. Underlying Principles of Electron Transport
    4. Tunneling in Electron Transport / Christopher C. Moser
    5. Spin in Photosynthetic Electron Transport / Isaac F. Céspedes-Camacho and Jörg Matysik
    6. Energy Changes in Photosynthetic Electron Transport: Probing Photosynthesis by Pulsed Photoacoustics / David Mauzerall and Steven P. Mielke
    Part III. Separation and Stabilization of Charge
    7. Mechanism of Primary Charge Separation in Photosynthetic Reaction Centers / Sergei Savikhin and Ryszard Jankowiak
    8. Effects of Quasi-Equilibrium States on the Kinetics of Electron Transfer and Radical Pair Stabilisation in Photosystem I / Stefano Santabarbara, Robert Jennings, and Giuseppe Zucchelli
    9. Energetics of Cofactors in Photosynthetic Complexes: Relationship Between Protein-Cofactor Interactions and Midpoint Potentials / James P. Allen and JoAnn C. Williams
    Part IV. Donor Side Intermediates and Water Splitting
    10. The Radical Intermediates of Photosystem II / K.V. Lakshmi, Christopher S. Coates, Stuart Smith, and Ruchira Chatterjee
    11. Structure-Function Relationships in the Mn₄CaO₅ Water-Splitting Cluster / Jian-Ren Shen
    12. Water and Oxygen Diffusion Pathways Within Photosystem II. Computational Studies of Controlled Substrate Access and Product Release / Serguei Vassiliev and Doug Bruce
    Part V. Evolution of the Photosynthetic Apparatus
    13. From Ionizing Radiation to Photosynthesis / Alexander N. Melkozernov
    14. Origin of Oxygenic Photosynthesis from Anoxygenic Type I and Type II Reaction Centers / John F. Allen.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Maika G. Mitchell.
    Summary: Innovation is added value to a known process. Bioprinting: Techniques and Risks for Regenerative Medicine aims to stimulate a scientifically grounded, interdisciplinary, multiscale debate and exchange of ideas using the techniques described in the book. 3D printing and additive manufacturing evolved from within the field of Cell Biology will have the ability to recreate cells queried from large amounts of phenotypic and molecular data. Stem Cell biologists, biotechnologists and material engineers, as well as graduate students will greatly benefit from the practical knowledge and case examples provided throughout this book.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Neha Srivastava, Manish Srivastava, P.K. Mishra, Vijai Kumar Gupta, editors.
    Springer Nature eBooks.
    Summary: Converting biomass to biofuels involves hydrolyzing cellulose to sugars using cost-intensive commercial enzymes an expensive step that makes large-scale production economically non-viable. As such, there is a need for low-cost bioprocessing. This book critically evaluates the available bioprocessing technologies for various biofuels, and presents the latest research in the field. It also highlights the recent developments, current challenges and viable alternative approaches to reduce the overall cost of producing biofuels.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Impact of fermentation types on enzymes used for biofuels production
    Chapter 2. Downstream Processing; Applications and Recent Updates
    Chapter 3. Role of bioreactors in bio-fuel generations
    Chapter 4. Bioprocess for Algal Biofuels Production
    Chapter 5. Effect of Bioprocess Parameters on Biofuel Production
    Chapter 6. Role of substrate to improve biomass to bio fuel production technologies
    Chapter 7. Techno-economic analysis of second-generation bio-fuel technologies
    Chapter 8. Recent advances in metabolic engineering and synthetic biology for microbial production of isoprenoid-based biofuels: an overview
    Chapter 9. Applications of biosensors for metabolic engineering of microorganisms and its impact on biofuel production
    Chapter 10. Recent progress in CRISPR-based technologies applications for biofuels production.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited] by Che J. Connon.
    Contents:
    Bioprocessing for cell based therapies
    Structured methodology for process development in scalable stirred tank bioreactors platforms
    The effect of scale-up on cell phenotype : compatibility testing to optimize bioreactor usage and manufacturing strategies
    The scale-up of human mesenchymal stem cell expansion and recovery
    Challenges of scale-up of cell separation and purification techniques
    Fundamental points to consider in the cryopreservation and shipment of cells for human application
    Short-term storage of cells for application in cell-based therapies
    Cell therapy in practice.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Hrudayanath Thatoi, Sonali Mohapatra, Swagat Kumar Das, editors.
    Summary: The rapid urbanization and industrialization of developing countries across the globe have necessitated for substantial resource utilization and development in the areas of Healthcare, Environment, and Renewable energy. In this context ,this resourceful book serves as a definitive source of information for the recent developments in application of microbial enzymes in various sectors. It covers applications in fermentation processes and their products, extraction and utilisation of enzymes from various sources and their application in health and biomass conversion for production of value added products. Different chapters discuss various areas of bioprospecting in enzyme technology, and describe why these are the mainstays for industrial production of value added products. The rich compilation of the cutting-edge advances and applications of the modern industrial based techniques hold feasible solutions for a range of current issues in enzyme technology. This book will be of particular interest for scientists, academicians, technical resource persons, engineers and members of industry. Undergraduate and graduate students pursuing courses in the area of industrial biotechnology will find the information in the book valuable. General readers having interest towards biofuels, enzyme technology, fermented food and value added products, phytochemicals and phytopharmaceutical products will also find the book appealing. Readers will discover modern concepts of enzymatic bioprocess technology for production of therapeutics and industrial value added products.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Application of enzymes in bioremediation of contaminated hydrosphere and soil environment
    Chapter 2: Bioremediation Of Highly Toxic Hexavalent Chromium By Bacterial Chromate Reductases Family: An Structural And Functional Overview
    Chapter 3: An Overview Of Raw Starch Digesting Enzymes And Their Applications In Biofuel Development
    Chapter 4: Bamboo Valorization By Fermentation And Enzyme Treatment
    Chapter 5: Recent Developments In Pretreatment And Enzymatic Hydrolysis For Cellulosic Bioethanol Production
    Chapter 6: Production Of Biofuel From Disposed Food And Dairy Waste
    Chapter 7: Role of enzymes in synthesis of nanoparticles
    Chapter 8: Protein-Nanoparticle Interaction And Its Potential Biological Implications
    Chapter 9: Enzyme-Nanoparticle Corona: A Novel Approach, Their Plausible Applications And Challenges
    Chapter 10: Enzymes In Fuel Biotechnology
    Chapter 11: Role Of Enzymes In Deconstruction Of Waste Biomass For Sustainable Generation Of Value-Added Products
    Chapter 12: Thermostable Enzymes From Clostridium thermocellum
    Chapter 13: Hot And Cold Bacteria Of Sikkim: Biodiversity And Enzymology
    Chapter 14: Enzymes In Health Care: Cost Effective Production And Applications Of Therapeutic Enzymes In Health Care Sector
    Chapter 15: Significance Of Enzymes In Modern Healthcare: From Diagnosis To Therapy
    Chapter 16: L-Asparaginase And Methioninase As Prospective Anticancer Enzymes: Currentapplications And Production Approaches
    Chapter 17: Production Of Thrombolytic And Fibrinolytic Proteases: Current Advances And Future Prospective
    Chapter 18: Enzymes In Textile Industries
    Chapter 19: Role of Enzymes in Textile Processing.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    by Juan M Bilbao, Robert E Schmidt.
    Summary: Peripheral nerve analysis is a challenging task for pathologists, given the advent of new diagnoses and techniques of analysis and the impact of molecular genetics. This book presents a simple, logical method for constructing a differential diagnosis based on pathology and clinical presentation. It also provides advice on the selection of ancillary molecular, immunohistochemical and genetic techniques to establish a definitive diagnosis. Clear, authoritative guidance is offered on diagnosis of the full range of neuropathies with the aid of a wealth of high-quality color photomicrographs and electron micrographs. The pathologist will benefit greatly from the identification of a variety of artifacts and normal structures occasionally encountered in nerve biopsies that need to be distinguished from specific pathologic alterations. This user-friendly, practical text will be an invaluable aid in achieving the most specific diagnosis possible.

    Contents:
    Introduction and Clinical Correlation
    Normal Peripheral Nerve Structure
    Basic Pathological Mechanisms
    Vasculitic Neuropathy
    Diabetic neuropathies
    Skin Biopsies
    Metabolic Neuropathies
    Inflammatory and Immune-Mediated Neuropathies
    Neuropathies Associated with Infectious Diseases
    Amyloid neuropathy
    Genetic Neuropathies
    Dysproteinemias
    Toxin-induced neuropathies
    Miscellaneous neuropathies.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Cyril Fisher, Elizabeth A. Montgomery, Khin Thway.
    Contents:
    Biopsy techniques, diagnostic methods, and reporting
    Benign and intermediate fibrosing lesions
    Cellular benign and intermediate lesions of fibroblasts and myofibroblasts
    Cutaneous spindle cell lesions
    Intra-abdominal spindle cell lesions
    Smooth muscle tumors
    Myofibroma, myopericytic tumors, myoepithelioma, and myofibroblastoma
    Tumors of specialized lower genital tract mesenchyme
    Benign nerve sheath tumors
    Spindle cell sarcomas
    Epithelioid tumors of soft tissue
    Soft tissue lesions with clear or granular cells
    Pleomorphic soft tissue tumors
    Small round cell tumors
    Benign adipose tissue lesions
    Liposarcoma
    Superficial vascular lesions and mimics of vascular lesions
    Deep vascular lesions
    Osteochondroid lesions of soft tissue
    Superficial myxoid lesions
    Deep myxoid lesions
    Plexiform soft tissue tumors
    Soft tissue tumors with giant cells.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    Jonathan I. Epstein, MD, Professor of Pathology, Urology and Oncology, The Reinhard Professor of Urological Pathology, Director of Surgical Pathology, The Johns Hopkins Medical Institutions, Baltimore, Maryland, Victor E. Reuter, MD, Attending Pathologist and Member, Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Center, Professor of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, Weill Medical College of Cornell University, New York, New York, Mahul B. Amin, MD, Profesor and Chairman Emeritus, Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, Cedars-Sinai Medical Center, Professor of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, UCLA David Geffen School of Medicine, Visiting Professor, Urology, USC Keck School of Medicine, Los Angeles, California, Visiting Professor, Pathology & Immunology, Baylor College of Medicine, Houston, Texas.
    Contents:
    Normal bladder anatomy and variants of normal histology
    Flat urothelial lesions
    Papillary urothelial neoplasms and their precursors
    Urothelial neoplasms with inverted growth patterns
    Invasive urothelial carcinoma
    Histologic variants of urothelial carcinoma
    Conventional morphologic, prognostic, and predictive factors and reporting of bladder cancer
    Glandular lesions
    Squamous lesions
    Cystitis
    Mesenchymal tumors and tumor-like lesions
    Miscellaneous non-tumors & tumors
    Secondary tumors of the bladder
    Urinary tract cytopathology.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Print
    Laura M. Wake, Genevieve Crane, Michael J. Borowitz.
    Summary: Part of the highly regarded Biopsy Interpretation Series, this new volume by Drs. Laura M. Wake, Genevieve Crane, and Michael Borowitz presents a concise, pattern-based approach to bone marrow pathology. Biopsy Interpretation of the Bone Marrow provides superbly illustrated guidance from top experts in the field, covering all aspects of bone marrow aspirates and biopsies: procurement and processing, ancillary techniques, formulation of a final diagnosis, and reporting to the clinical team. Hundreds of full-color illustrations depict the full range of benign and neoplastic processes involving the bone marrow. -- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Stuart J. Schnitt, Laura C. Collins.
    Contents:
    Normal anatomy and histology
    Reactive, inflammatory, and nonproliferative lesions
    Intraductal proliferative lesions : usual ductal hyperplasia, atypical ductalhyperplasia, and ductal carcinoma in situ
    Columnar cell lesions and flat epithelial atypia
    Lobular carcinoma in situ and atypical lobular hyperplasia
    Fibroepithelial lesions
    Adenosis and sclerosing lesions
    Papillary lesions
    Microinvasive carcinoma
    Invasive breast cancer
    Spindle cell lesions
    Vascular lesions
    Other mesenchymal lesions
    Miscellaneous rare lesions
    Nipple disorders
    Male breast lesions
    Breast lesions in children and adolescents
    Axillary lymph nodes
    Treatment effects
    Specimen processing, evaluation, and reporting.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Matthew J. Schniederjan.
    Contents:
    Benign cysts and selected developmental anomalies
    Inflammatory and infectious lesions
    Diffuse gliomas
    Other astrocytomas
    Ependymal tumors
    Other gliomas
    Neuronal and mixed glioneuronal tumors
    Sellar and suprasellar lesions
    Meningeal lesions
    Embryonal tumors
    Choroid plexus tumors
    Pineal region tumors
    Cranial and spinal nerve tumors
    Vascular malformations
    Germ cell tumors
    Hematolymphoid neoplasms
    Select tumors of indeterminate or mesenchymal differentiation
    Metastases
    Intraoperative consultation
    General approach and differential diagnosis.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Edward B. Stelow, Stacey E. Mills.
    Summary: "Part of the highly regarded Biopsy Interpretation Series, this fully revised volume provides practical, highly illustrated information on the diagnosis and prognosis of the full range of biopsies of the various tissues of the head and neck region, including the ear. Biopsy Interpretation of the Head and Neck, 3rd Edition, addresses both common and unusual issues that arise in day-to-day practice, with an emphasis on the complex area of the upper aerodigestive tract and ear. Discusses both neoplastic and non-neoplastic entities to help you arrive at an accurate diagnosis and guide patient management. Provides new information about emerging diagnostic entities and ancillary testing. Covers squamous cell carcinomas, HPV-related tumors, bony lesions, odontogenic lesions, and more"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Normal Anatomy and Histology
    Benign Squamous Proliferations and Neoplasms
    Precursor Lesions of Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Conventional Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Histologic and Etiologic Variants of Squamous Cell Carcinoma
    Salivary Gland-Type Neoplasms
    Adenocarcinomas, Other Than Those That Can Be Classified as Salivary Gland-Type
    Neural, Neuroectodermal, and Neuroendocrine Neoplasms
    Hematopoietic and Lymphoid Disorders
    Germ Cell Tumors
    Soft Tissue Tumors
    Bone, Cartilaginous, and Jaw Lesions That May Be Sampled With Upper Aerodigestive Tract Biopsies
    Nonneoplastic Lesions of the Nasal Cavity, Paranasal Sinuses, and Nasopharynx
    Nonneoplastic Lesions of the Oral Cavity
    Nonneoplastic Lesions of the Larynx
    Pathology of the Ear.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    Michael S. Torbenson, Professor of Pathology, Senior Associate Consultant, Division of Anatomic Pathology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minnesota.
    Contents:
    General approach to biopsy assessment
    General approach to biopsy reports
    The almost normal liver biopsy
    Liver injury patterns
    Acute and chronic viral hepatitis
    Other infections of the liver
    Granulomatous disease
    Drug effects
    Fatty liver disease
    Autoimmune hepatitis
    Biliary tract disease and cholestatic liver disease
    Pediatric cholestatic liver disease
    Vascular disease
    Transplant pathology
    Iron overload disease
    Wilson disease and other genetic diseases
    Liver disease in systemic conditions
    Pediatric benign and malignant tumors
    Adult benign and malignant mesenchymal tumors
    Benign and malignant hepatocellular tumors
    Benign and malignant biliary tumors
    Other tumors of the liver.
    Digital Access Ovid 2015
  • Digital
    Michael S. Torbenson.
    Summary: "Part of the highly regarded Biopsy Interpretation Series, Biopsy Interpretation of the Liver, 4th Edition, provides practical, highly illustrated information on the diagnosis and prognosis of the full range of biopsies of the liver. Practical, well-organized, and highly readable, this fully revised volume by Dr. Michael S. Torbenson addresses both common and unusual issues that arise in the day-to-day interpretation of liver biopsies, teaching the best diagnostic practices as well as how to avoid the most common pitfalls. Frames each diagnosis in its most common clinical context, explaining how the pathology can be used to make key clinical management decisions. Presents key differential features of tumors, organized according to diagnostic category"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    General Approach to Biopsy Specimens
    Liver Injury Patterns
    Immunohistochemistry and Special Stains in Liver Pathology
    The Almost Normal Liver Biopsy
    Acute and Chronic Viral Hepatitis
    Other Infections of the Liver
    Granulomatous Disease
    Drug-Induced Liver Injury
    Fatty Liver Disease
    Autoimmune Hepatitis
    Biliary Tract Disease and Cholestatic Liver Disease
    Pediatric Cholestatic Liver Disease
    Vascular Disease
    Transplant Pathology
    Iron Overload in the Liver
    Genetic Diseases of the Liver
    Liver Disease in Systemic Conditions
    Cryptogenic Cirrhosis
    Benign and Malignant Pediatric Tumors
    Adult Benign and Malignant Mesenchymal Tumors
    Hepatocellular Pseudotumors and Tumors
    Benign and Malignant Biliary Tumors
    Lymphoma and Metastatic Disease.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    David Ilan Suster, Saul Suster.
    Summary: "Biopsy Interpretation of the Lung aids pathologists in accurately evaluating disease processes. It includes detailed chapters on interstitial lung disease, lung cancer, and neuroendocrine tumors. Organized by traditional disease groups, Biopsy Interpretation of the Lung provides a solid approach to formulating surgical and medical decisions."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Methods for Obtaining Lung Biopsies
    Inflammatory Lung Conditions
    Pulmonary Noninfectious Granulomas
    Lung Vasculitis and Hemorrhagic Disorders
    Bacterial Lung Infections
    Fungal Lung Infections
    Parasitic Lung Infections
    Viral Lung Infections
    Interstitial Lung Disease
    Lung Transplant Pathology
    Lymphoid Lesions of the Lung
    Epithelial Lung Neoplasms
    Neuroendocrine Lung Neoplasms
    Unusual Lung Tumors and Tumor-Like Conditions
    Metastatic Tumors to the Lung.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Print
    [edited by] Rebecca L. King, Anamarija M. Perry, Lauren B. Smith.
    Summary: "A new volume in the highly regarded Biopsy Interpretation Series, Biopsy Interpretation of the Lymph Node provides concise, abundantly illustrated information on the pathologic approach to diagnosis for these frequently encountered biopsies. Practical and well organized, this highly readable volume edited by Drs. Rebecca L. King, Anamarija M. Perry, and Lauren B. Smith, addresses both common and unusual issues that arise in the day-to-day interpretation of non-neoplastic and neoplastic lymph node biopsies, teaching the best diagnostic practices as well as how to avoid the most common pitfalls. Focusing on the daily tasks and needs of the general pathologist, it provides a solid foundation for clinical diagnostic decision making. Frames each diagnosis in its most common clinical context, explaining how the pathology can be used to make key clinical management decisions Features high-quality photomicrographs and illustrations throughout-more than 400 images in all Covers the pattern-based approach to lymph node evaluation, giving special emphasis to differential diagnosis and limitations of small biopsies Addresses diagnostic methods and ancillary studies used in lymph node pathology such as immunohistochemistry, flow cytometry, FISH, and molecular studies Provides eBook access to questions and answers for self-assessment and exam review Enrich Your eBook Reading ExperienceRead directly on your preferred device(s),such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook,powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. "-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Lymph Node Evaluation
    Diagnostic Methods and Ancillary Studies
    Benign Diseases Involving Lymph Node
    Precursor Lymphoid Neoplasms, Myeloid Sarcoma, and Blastic Plasmacytoid Dendritic Cell Neoplasm
    Mature B-cell Neoplasms
    Mature T-cell Neoplasms
    Classic Hodgkin Lymphoma and Nodular Lymphocyte Predominant B-cell Lymphoma
    Lymphoproliferative Disorders Associated With Immunodeficiency
    Histiocytic and Dendritic Cell Neoplasms.
  • Digital
    Scott Boerner, MD, FRCPC, Director, Cytopathology, University Health Network, Associate Professor, Department of Laboratory Medicine and Pathobiology, University of Toronto, Ontario, Canada, Sylvia L. Asa, MD, PhD, Senior Scientist, Department of Pathology, University Health Network, Professor, Department of laboratory Medicine and Pathobiology, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada.
    Contents:
    The normal thyroid
    The classification of thyroid pathology
    The cytologic approach to diagnosis of thyroid pathology : technical aspects
    The histologic biopsy of thyroid : technical aspects
    Ancillary tools in thyroid diagnosis
    Cystic lesions
    Inflammatory and lymphoid lesions
    Papillary lesions
    Follicular lesions
    Solid and trabecular lesions
    Squamoid, spindle, and giant-cell lesions
    Small cell lesions.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Sonil Nanda, Dai-Viet N. Vo, Prakash Kumar Sarangi, editor.
    Summary: This book summarizes recent advances in the processing of waste biomass resources to produce biofuels and biochemicals. Worldwide interest in clean energy sources, environmental protection, and mitigating global warming is rapidly gaining momentum and spurring on the search for alternative energy sources, especially for the transportation and industrial sectors. This book reviews the opportunities presented by low-cost organic waste materials, discussing their suitability for alternative fuel and fine chemical production, physicochemical characterization, conversion technologies, feedstock and fuel chemistry, refining technologies, fuel upgrading, residue management, and the circular economy. In addition, it explores applied aspects of biomass conversion by highlighting several significant thermochemical, hydrothermal and biological technologies. In summary, the book offers comprehensive and representative descriptions of key fuel processing technologies, energy conversion and management, waste valorization, eco-friendly waste remediation, biomass supply chain, lifecycle assessment, techno-economic analysis and the circular bioeconomy.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1: Growth of Biofuels Sector: Opportunities, Challenges, and Outlook
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Biofuel Scenario in Canada and the World
    1.3 Policies and Their Impacts on the Success of Advanced Biofuels: Scenario in Canada and the World
    1.4 Outlook for a Sustainable Future
    1.5 Conclusions
    References
    2: Bioconversion of Agro-industrial Residues to Second-Generation Bioethanol
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Composition of Lignocellulosic Biomass 2.3 Commonly Available Agricultural Crop Residues in the World
    2.3.1 Barley and Coffee Residues
    2.3.2 Sugarcane, Maize, Rice, and Wheat Residues
    2.3.3 Cotton
    2.3.4 Oil Palm Residues
    2.3.5 Potato Residues
    2.3.6 Soybean Residues
    2.4 Enzymatic Saccharification of Lignocellulosic Residues
    2.4.1 Cellulases
    2.4.2 Auxiliary Activity 9 Enzyme and Swollenin Protein
    2.4.3 Hemicellulases
    2.4.4 Pectin-Degrading Enzyme System
    2.4.5 Delignifying Enzymes
    2.5 Bioconversion of Biomass to Second-Generation Bioethanol 2.6 Pretreatment of Lignocellulosic Biomass
    2.7 Obtaining an Enzymatic Consortium
    2.8 Fermentation for the Production of Second-Generation Bioethanol
    2.9 Conclusions
    References
    3: Catalytic Transformation of Ethanol to Industrially Relevant Fine Chemicals
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Conversion of Ethanol to Small Oxygenates
    3.2.1 Acetaldehyde
    3.2.2 Acetic Acid and Ethyl Acetate
    3.2.3 Acetone
    3.3 Conversion of Ethanol to Hydrocarbons
    3.3.1 Ethylene
    3.3.2 Propylene
    3.3.3 Butanol
    3.3.4 1,3-Butadiene
    3.4 Conclusions
    References 4: Selective Bioethanol Conversion to Chemicals and Fuels via Advanced Catalytic Approaches
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Dehydration of Ethanol
    4.2.1 Diethyl Ether Production
    4.2.2 Ethylene Production
    4.2.3 Propylene Production
    4.3 Oxidation of Ethanol
    4.3.1 Ethylene Oxide Production
    4.3.2 Acetic Acid Production
    4.4 Steam Reforming of Ethanol and Dehydrogenation
    4.4.1 Steam Reforming of Ethanol to Hydrogen
    4.4.2 Dehydrogenation of Ethanol
    4.4.2.1 Acetaldehyde
    4.4.2.2 Ethyl Acetate
    4.5 Guerbet Reaction of Ethanol
    4.6 Conclusions
    References 5: A Spotlight on Butanol and Propanol as Next-Generation Synthetic Fuels
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Divergent Fuel Properties of Ethanol, Propanol, and Butanol
    5.3 Petrochemical Routes for Butanol Production
    5.4 Biological Route for Butanol Production
    5.5 Petrochemical Routes for Propanol Production
    5.6 Biological Routes for Propanol Production
    5.7 Challenges and Future Perspectives
    5.8 Conclusions
    References
    6: Technological Advancements in the Production and Application of Biomethanol
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Industrial Applications of Methanol
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Khalid Rehman Hakeem, Rouf Ahmad Bhat, Humaira Qadri, editors.
    Summary: Toxic substances threatens aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems and ultimately human health. The book is a thoughtful effort in bringing forth the role of biotechnology for bioremediation and restoration of the ecosystems degraded by toxic and heavy metal pollution. The introductory chapters of the book deal with the understanding of the issues concerned with the pollution caused by toxic elements and heavy metals and their impacts on the different ecosystems followed by the techniques involved in monitoring of the pollution. These techniques include use of bio-indicators as well as modern techniques for the assessment and monitoring of toxicants in the environment. Detailed chapters discussing the role of microbial biota, aquatic plants, terrestrial plants to enhance the accumulation efficiency of these toxic and heavy metals are followed by remediation techniques involving myco-remediation, bio-pesticides, bio-fertilizers, phyto-remediation and rhizo-filtration. A sizable portion of the book has been dedicated to the advanced bio-remediation techniques which are finding their way from the laboratory to the field for revival of the degraded ecosystems. These involve bio-films, micro-algae, genetically modified plants and filter feeders. Furthermore, the book is a detailed comprehensive account for the treatment technologies from unsustainable to sustainable. We believe academicians, researchers and students will find this book informative as a complete reference for biotechnological intervention for sustainable treatment of pollution.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreword
    1. Concerns and Threats of Contamination on Aquatic Ecosystems
    2. Effect of Pesticides on Fish Fauna: Threats, Challenges and Possible Remedies
    3. Impact of Invasive Plants in Aquatic Ecosystems
    4. Role of Modern Innovative Techniques for Assessing and Monitoring Environmental Pollution
    5. Global Scenario of Remediation Techniques to Combat Environmental Pollution
    6. Biopesticides: clean and viable technology for healthy environment
    7. Inoculum addition in the presence of plant rhizosphere for petroleum polluted soil remediation
    8. Vermicomposting: An Eco-friendly Approach for Recycling /Management of Organic Wastes
    9. Bio-Fertilizers: Ecofriendly Approach for Plant and Soil Environment
    10. Phytoremediation of heavy metals: an ecofriendly and sustainable approach
    11. Credibility of in situ Phytoremediation for Restoration of Disturbed Environments
    12. Role of White Willow (Salix alba L.) for Cleaning up the Toxic Metal Pollution
    13. Mycoremediation: a Sustainable Tool for Abating Environmental Pollution
    14. Microbial Biofilm Cell Systems for Remediation of Wastewaters
    15. Pollution remediation by way of using genetically modified plants (GMP)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Rouf Ahmad Bhat, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, Moonisa Aslam Dervash, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses the grave concerns stemming out due to conventional treatment techniques. The main focus of this book revolves round the central kernel of novel technology (bioremediation and biotechnology) which has emerged as an independent warrior to clean up and restore the disturbed environs. Furthermore, this book is a coherent assortment of diverse chapters relevant to the role of biotechnology and bioremediation for restoration of the ecosystems degraded by pesticide and heavy metal pollution. The inaugural chapters deal with the quantification of problem and its magnitude due to pesticides and heavy metals, followed by innovative modern biotechnological and bioremediation treatment technologies and sustainable techniques to remediate the persistent pollutants. It is a detailed comprehensive account for the treatment technologies from unsustainable to sustainable. Academicians, researchers and students shall find it as a complete wrap up regarding biotechnological intervention for sustainable treatment of pollution and shall suffice for the diverse needs of teaching and research.

    Contents:
    Preface
    1. Causes and Effects of Pesticide and Metal Pollution on Different Ecosystems
    2. Ecotoxicology of Heavy Metals: Sources, Effects and Toxicity
    3. Role of Modern Innovative Techniques for Assessing and Monitoring Heavy Metal and Pesticide Pollution in Different Environments
    4. Global Scenario of Remediation Techniques to Combat Pesticide Pollution
    5. Mycoremediation: A Sustainable Approach for Pesticide Pollution Abatement
    6. Bio-pesticides: Application and Possible Mechanism of Action
    7. Values of Biofertilizers for Sustainable Management in Agricultural Industries
    8.Role of Macrophytes in Spontaneous Lacustrine Phytofiltration
    9. Phytoremediation of Heavy Metals Using Salix (Willows)
    10. Photo catalysis: An Effective Tool for Treatment of Dyes Contaminated Wastewater
    11. Removal of dyes from waste water by Micellar Enhanced Ultrafiltration
    12. Biofilm: an innovative modern technology for aquatic pollution remediation
    13. Heavy Metal Soil Contamination and Bioremediation
    14. Environmental Biotechnology: For Sustainable Future
    15. Global Environmental Regulations for Management of Pesticides
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors: Rouf Ahmad Bhat, Khalid Rehman Hakeem, Najla Bint Saud Al-Saud.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Mohd. Shahnawaz, Manisha K. Sangale, Avinash B. Ade.
    Summary: Plastic is one of the widely used polymers around the globe since its discovery. It is highly impossible to think the ease of life without the aid of plastic. Every year billion tons of plastic waste gets accumulated in the environment and leads to death of both marine and terrestrial animals. Plastic is very durable and needs around 1000 years to degrade under the natural environment. The present book illustrates the importance and significance of the bioremediation to tackle the problem of plastic waste. Previously, we have reported elite rhizobacterial isolates (Lysinibacillus fusiformis strain VASB14/WL and Bacillus cereus strain VASB1/TS) of Avicennia marina Vierh (Forsk.) from the West Coast of India with the potential to degrade plastic (polythene). The present book attempted to address the bioremediation scenario of plastic waste (including micro plastic) using microbes with bacteria in particular. Various strategies used to tackle with the plastic waste were highlighted with case studies of plastic waste management, including in vitro, in situ and ex situ with a special reference to biodegradation technology. After the biodegradation of the plastic using microbes, the generated plastic (polythene) degradation products (PE-DPs) were also documented using GC-MS technique followed by their deleterious effect on both animal and plant systems. The book also enhances the awareness of the plastic-free society and also suggests some alternative materials to be used instead of plastic. Lastly, the book suggests/recommends the strategies to be followed by the lawmakers in the government organizations/non-government organizations/social organizations to frame the regulations and guidelines to implement at mass level to reduce the generation of plastic waste.

    Contents:
    Module 1_Introduction
    Module 2_Microplastic
    Module 3_Plastic waste disposal and re-use of plastic waste
    Module 4_Case studies and recent update of plastic waste degradation
    module 5_Bacteria as key players of Plastic Bioremediation
    Module 6_In situ remediation technology for plastic degradation
    Module 7_Ex-situ remediation technology for plastic degradation
    Module 8­_Social awareness of plastic waste threat
    Module 9_Analysis of the plastic degradation products
    Module 10_Toxicity testing of plastic degrading products
    Module 11_Policy and legislation/regulations of plastic waste around the globe
    Module 12_Conclusions and future needs.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Zeynep Altintas.
    Contents:
    General introduction to biosensors and recognition receptors
    Biomarkers in health care
    The use of nanomaterials and microfluidics in medical diagnostics
    SPR-based biosensor technologies in disease detection and diagnostics
    Piezoelectric-based biosensor technologies in disease detection and diagnostics
    Electrochemical-based biosensor technologies in disease detection and diagnostics
    MEMS-based cell counting methods
    Lab-on-a-chip platforms for disease detection and diagnosis
    Applications of quantum dots in biosensors and diagnostics
    Applications of molecularly imprinted nanostructures in biosensors and diagnostics
    Smart nanomaterial's : applications in biosensors and diagnostics
    Applications of magnetic nanomaterial's in biosensors and diagnostics
    Graphene applications in biosensors and diagnostics
    Optical biosensors and applications to drug discovery for cancer cases
    Biosensors for detection of anticancer drug-DNA interactions.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Ramesh Namdeo Pudake, Utkarsh Jain, Chittaranjan Kole, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This book reviews the application of nanosensors in food and agriculture. Nanotechnology has the potential to become transformative technology that will impact almost all sectors. Tools like nanosensors, which detect specific molecular interactions, can be used for on-site, in-situ and online measurements of various parameters in clinical diagnostics, environmental and food monitoring, and quality control. Due to their unprecedented performance and sensitivity, nanobiosensors are gaining importance in precision farming. The book examines the use of nanobiosensors in the monitoring of food additives, toxins and mycotoxins, microbial contamination, food allergens, nutritional constituents, pesticides, environmental parameters, plant diseases and genetically modified organisms. It also discusses the role of biosensors in increasing crop productivity in sustainable agriculture, and nanosensor-based smart delivery systems to optimize the use of natural resources such as water, nutrients and agrochemicals in precision farming.

    Contents:
    Recent trends, prospects, and challenges of nanobiosensors in agriculture
    Nanostructured platforms integrated to biosensors: Recent applications in agriculture. Advances in nanotechnology for bio-sensing in agriculture and food
    Nanomaterial based gas sensor for agriculture sector
    Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) sensors for stress management in crops
    Current trends of plasmonic nanosensors use in agriculture
    Relevance of biosensor in climate smart organic agriculture and their role in environmental sustainability: What has been done and what we need to do?
    New trends in biosensors for pesticide detection
    Application of biosensor for the identification of various pathogens and pests mitigating against the agricultural production: recent advances
    Gold nanoparticles-based point-of-care colorimetric diagnostic for plant diseases
    Advancements in biosensors for fungal pathogen detection in plants
    Journey of Agricultural sensors From conventional to ultra-modern
    PART II: Biosensors in food science, Advances in biosensors based on electrospun micro/nanomaterials for food quality control and safety
    Current trend of electrochemical sensing for mytoxins
    Biosensor for fruit quality monitoring
    Lateral flow assays for food authentication
    Nanobiosensors in agriculture and foods: a scientometric review
    PART III: Biosensors in animal and fishery Sciences, Biosensors: Modern tools for disease diagnosis and animal health monitoring
    Nano-biosensing devices detecting biomarkers of communicable and non-communicable diseases of animals
    Recent advances in biosensor development for poultry industry
    Smart aquaculture: Integration of sensors, biosensors, and artificial intelligence
    Biosensor as potential tool for on-site detection of insect pathogens.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Ashutosh Tiwari and Anthony P.F. Turner.
    Summary: "This book provides detailed review chapters on a range of nanostructures such as nanoparticles, nanowires, nanotubes, nanoribbons, nanorods, nanobelts and nanosheets in the construction of biosensors with set applications of biosensors nanotechnology for biological and chemical analyses, food safety industry, biomedical diagnostics, clinical detection, and environmental monitoring. The authors provide a comprehensive view of cutting-edge research on advanced materials for healthcare technology and applications. The book is written for scientists, researchers, and clinicians from diverse backgrounds across chemistry, physics, materials science and engineering, medical science, pharmacy, biotechnology, and biomedical engineering"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Kerry B. Barker, Sandeep M. Menon, Ralph B. D'Agostino, Sr., Siyan Xu, Bo Jin.
    Contents:
    1. Biosimilars for drug development : the time is now! / Bo Jin, Sandeep M. Menon, Kerry B. Barker, and Ralph B. D'Agostino
    2. From isolation to integration : a systems biology approach for the discovery of therapeutic targets and biomarkers / Attila Seyhan and Claudio Carini
    3. Immunogenicity of biological products : current perspectives and future implications / Candida Fratazzi, Attila Seyhan, and Claudio Carini
    4. Interchangeability between biosimilar and innovator drug products / Bo Jin, Sandeep M. Menon, Kerry B. Barker, and Steven Ye Hua
    5. Bridging a new biological product with its reference product / Jianfun (David) Li and Jin Xu
    6. Accounting for covariate effect to show noninferiority in biosimilars / Siyan Xu, Kerry B. Barker, Sandeep M. Menon, and Ralph B. D'Agostino
    7. Novel method in inference of equivalence in biosimilars / Siyan Xu, Steven Ye Hua, Ronald Menton, Kerry B. Barker, Sandeep M. Menon, and Ralph B. D'Agostino
    8. Multiplicity adjustments in testing for bioequivalence / Steven Ye Hua, Siyan Xu, and Ralph B. D'Agostino
    9. Bayesian methods to assess bioequivalence and biosimilarity with case studies / Steven Ye Hua, Siyan Xu, Kerry B. Barker, Shan Mei Liao, and Shujie Li
    10. Average inferiority measure and standardized margins to address the issues in biosimilar trials / Gang Li and Weichung Joe Shih
    11. Bayesian methods for design and analysis of noninferiority trials / Mani Lakshminarayanan and Fanni Natanegara.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Cheng Liu, K. John Morrow Jr.
    Contents:
    The history of therapeutic monoclonal antibodies / Regis Sodoyer
    Structure, classification and naming of therapeutic monoclonal antibodies / Zhinan Xia
    Mechanism of action for therapeutic antibodies / Yu Zhou and James D. Marks
    Therapeutic monoclonal antibodies and their targets / Maurizio Chiriva-Internati, et al
    Antibody post-translational modifications / Roy Jefferis
    The pharmacology, pharmacokinetics, and pharmacodynamics of antibodies / Ningning Xu, Meimei Liu, Margaret Liu
    Monoclonal antibodies : applications in clinical oncology / Jeanene ("Gigi") Robison
    Development of biosimilar rituximab and clinical experience / Reena Nair
    Monoclonal antibodies for infectious diseases / Steven J. Projan
    Monoclonal antibodies for musculoskeletal, CNS, and other diseases / Junming Yie and Tao Wu
    Manufacture of recombinant therapeutic proteins using chinese hamster ovary cells in large-scale bioreactors : history, methods and perspectives / Florian M. Wurm and Maria De Jesus
    Process development / Samuel D. Stimple and David W. Wood
    Biosimilars and biobetters : impact on biopharmaceutical manufacturing and CMOs / Ronald A. Rader
    Cell line and cell culture development for biosimilar antibody drug manufacturing / Jianguo Yang
    Product analysis of biosimilar antibodies / Weidong Jiang, Scott Liu and Ziyang Zhong
    Bioanalytical development / Rafiq Islam
    Preclinical and clinical development of biosimilar antibodies / João Eurico Fonseca and João Gonçalves
    Regulatory issues / Clarinda Islam
    Legal considerations / K. Lance Anderson, Jennifer R. Moore Meline, and Jonathan D. Ball
    ADCC enhancement technologies for next generation therapeutic antibodies / Cheng Liu and Su Yan
    Biosimilar antibody half-life : engineering for optimal performance / K. John Morrow, Jr
    Technologies for antibody drug conjugation / Patrick G. Holder and David Rabuka.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Annemarie Surlykke, Paul E. Nachtigall, Richard R. Fay, Arthur N. Popper, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Biosonar of Bats and Toothed Whales: An Overview / Annemarie Surlykke and Paul E. Nachtigall
    2. Sonar Signals of Bats and Toothed Whales / Brock (M. B.) Fenton, Frants H. Jensen, Elisabeth K. V. Kalko, and Peter L. Tyack
    3. Production of Biosonar Signals: Structure and Form / Whitlow W. L. Au and Roderick A. Suthers
    4. Sound Intensities of Biosonar Signals from Bats and Toothed Whales / Magnus Wahlberg and Annemarie Surlykke
    5. Hearing During Echolocation in Whales and Bats / Paul E. Nachtigall and Gerd Schuller
    6. Localization and Classification of Targets by Echolocating Bats and Dolphins / James A. Simmons, Dorian Houser, and Laura Kloepper
    7. On-Animal Methods for Studying Echolocation in Free-Ranging Animals / Mark Johnson
    8. Analysis of Natural Scenes by Echolocation in Bats and Dolphins / Cynthia F. Moss, Chen Chiu, and Patrick W. Moore
    9. Echolocation in Air and Water / Peter Teglberg Madsen and Annemarie Surlykke.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Geoffrey R. Norman, David L. Streiner.
    Summary: "New for 2014, Biostatistics: The Bare Essentials, 4th Edition, includes updated information on robust estimators of the mean, the problems of multiple hypothesis testing, bootstrapping and resampling and non-parametric stats. In addition, an entirely new chapter title Measures of Impact discusses measures of incidence and prevalence, risk, morbidity and fatality rates, and more."

    Contents:
    The nature of data and statistics: the basics
    Looking at the data
    Describing the data with numbers
    The normal distribution
    Probability
    Elements of Statistical inference
    Analysis of variance: Comparing two groups the T-test
    More than two groups one way ANOVA
    Factorial ANOVA
    Two repeated observations the paired T-test and alternatives
    Repaeted-measures ANOVA
    Multivariate ANOVA (MANOVA)
    C.R.A.P. detectors
    Regression and correlation: Simple regression and correlation
    Multiple regression
    Logistic and poisson regression
    Advanced topis in regression and ANOVA
    Measuring change
    Analysis of Longitudinal data: Hierarchical linear modeling
    Non-parametric statistics: Tests of significance for categorical frequency data
    Measures of association for categorical data
    tests of significance for ranked data
    Measures of association for ranked data
    Survival analysis
    Measures of impact introductory side bar
    Reprise: Equivalence and Non-inferiority testing
    Screwups, oddballs, and other vagaries of science
    Putting it all together
    gettting started with SPSS.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2014
  • Digital
    Christophe Lalanne, Mounir Mesbah.
    Contents:
    1. Language elements
    2. Simple descriptive statistics
    3. Measures of association, comparison of means or proportions
    4. Correlation, linear regression
    5. Logistic regression
    6. Survival curves, cox regression
    Appendix A. Introduction to SAS studio
    Appendix B. Introduction to SAS Macro
    Appendix C. Introduction to SAS IML.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Bertram K.C. Chan.
    Summary: "Biostatistics for Human Genetic Epidemiology provides statistical methodologies and R recipes for human genetic epidemiologic problems. It begins by introducing all the necessary probabilistic and statistical foundations, before moving on to topics related human genetic epidemiology, with R codes illustrations for various examples. This clear and concise book covers human genetic epidemiology, using R in data analysis, including multivariate data analysis. It examines probabilistic and statistical theories for modeling human genetic epidemiology – leading the readers through an effective epidemiologic model, from simple to advanced levels. Classical mathematical, probabilistic, and statistical theory are thoroughly discussed and presented. This book also presents R as a calculator and using R in data analysis. Additionally, it covers Advanced Human Genetic Data Concepts, the Study of Human Genetic Variation, Manhattan Plots, as well as the Procedures for Multiple Comparison. Numerous Worked Examples are provided for illustrations of concepts and real-life applications"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction to human genetic epidemiology / Bertram K. C. Chan
    Data analysis using R programming / Bertram K. C. Chan
    Applied statistics for human genetics using R / Bertram K. C. Chan
    Applied human genetic epidemiology / Bertram K. C. Chan
    Human genetic epidemiology using R.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    George R. Pettit.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC271.C5 P47
    2
  • Digital
    Chi Yen, Junliang Yang.
    Summary: This book discusses the natural classification and biosystematics of Triticeae, and presents the most significant findings of comprehensive studies on the Triticeae, an important tribe in the grass family (Poaceae) that includes major crops such as wheat, barley, rye and triticale, as well as various forage crops found in different genera. The five-volume Chinese version of Biosystematics of Triticeae was published in 1998, 2004, 2006, 2011, and 2013, and included the 30 genera, 2 subgenera, 464 species, 9 subspecies, and 186 varieties of Triticeae identified to date. This completely revised English edition features up-to-date international research and the latest advances in the field. The book is divided into five volumes, covering a wide range of disciplines from traditional taxonomy and cytogenetics, to molecular phylogeny. Volume I, Triticum-Aegilops complex focuses on the taxonomy and generic relationships of Triticum and Aegilops, discussing the origin of common wheat as a crop. Volume II highlights the taxonomy and systematics of Secale, Tritiosecale, Pseudosecale, Eremopyrum, Henrardia, Taeniantherum, Heteranthelium, Crithopsis, and Hordeum. Volume III describes perennial genera and species including Kengyilia, Douglasdeweya, Agropyron, Australopyrum, and Anthosachne. Volume IV addresses perennial genera and species including Stenostachys, Psathyrostachys, Leymus, Pseudoroegneria, and Roegeneria. Volume V presents perennial genera and species such as Campeiostachys, Elymus,Pascopyrum, Lophopyrum, Trichopyrum, Hordelymus, Festucopsis, Peridictyon, and Psammopyrum.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Classical morphological taxonomy
    Chapter 2. Systematical survey of the genus Aegilops
    Chapter 3. Discovery of wild Triticum species
    Chapter 4. Reihe system of genus Triticum
    Chapter 5. Triticum taxon of British School and Soviet School in the 20 century
    Chapter 6. Cytogenetic relationship of Triticum and Aegilops species
    Chapter 7. Development of Triticum taxonomy
    Chapter 8. Taxonomy of the genus Triticum
    Chapter 9. Taxon within a Triticum species
    Chapter 10. Geographic and historical origin of wheat
    Chapter 11. Artificially synthesized species and genera.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Reetika Singh, Bechan Sharma.
    Summary: Plants have always occupied a prominent position in the life of every living being. Plants are the primary source of food, shelter and medicines. The global inclination toward herbal medicine has advanced the expansion of plant-based pharmaceutical industries to a vast extent. The production of traditional medicine at global market has been estimated to touch US trillion by 2050. Some of the useful plant-based drugs include vinblastine, vincristine, taxol, podophyllotoxin, camptothecin, digoxigenin, morphine, codeine, aspirin, atropine, capscicine, allicin, curcumin, artemesinin and ephedrine. Genus Sapindus is an important economical and medicinal trees, distributed over the world. Soap nuts contain higher amount of saponin, a natural detergent which can be used to clean clothes and hairs. Sapindus species possesses various pharmacological properties including antimicrobial, antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, anticancer, hepatoprotective, anti-trichomonas activity. Extracts of this plant are rich in various phytochemicals and polyphenolic compounds. All the pharmacological properties are due to presence of saponins. Biotechnological techniques can improve the saponin content; thus this chemical content can be produced at large scale and can be used as phytomedicine. We hope that this book would be of great use to under graduates, postgraduates, scientists, researchers and faculty members who are studying, teaching or working in the field of Biotechnology, Phytochemistry and Ethnopharmacology. The techniques explained in this book could be of immense use for the researchers working in this area. We shall deeply appreciate receiving any critical comments and suggestions from the readers from the different parts of globe which would help us improve the first edition of this publication.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Authors; Abbreviations/Acronyms; List of Figures; List of Tables;
    1: Introduction; Further Readings;
    2: Morphological Characteristics of Sapindus Species; 2.1 Botanical Classification of Sapindus; 2.2 Sapindus mukorossi; 2.3 Sapindus trifoliatus; 2.4 Sapindus saponaria; 2.5 Sapindus rarak; 2.6 Traditional Uses of Sapindus Species; Further Readings;
    3: Traditional Uses and Ethnomedicinal Values of Sapindus spp.; 3.1 History of Traditional Medicine; 3.2 Resources of Medicinal Materials; 3.3 Current Status at National and International Levels 3.4 Validation of Traditional Medicinal Values Through Scientific Experiments3.5 Herbal Shampoo Preparation; 3.6 Traditional Medicinal Uses of Sapindus spp.; Further Readings;
    4: Biotechnological Advances in Sapindus sps.; 4.1 Introduction of Biotechnology; 4.2 In Vitro Regeneration of Woody Trees; 4.3 Regeneration via Organogenesis; 4.4 Regeneration via Somatic Embryogenesis; 4.5 Advantages and Limitations of Micropropagation Techniques; 4.6 Propagation of Sapindus Species; 4.6.1 Conventional Propagation of Sapindus; 4.6.2 Micropropagation Studies; 4.7 Mass Propagation of Sapindus mukorossi 4.7.1 Organogenesis4.7.2 Somatic Embryogenesis; 4.7.2.1 Seedling-Derived Leaf Explants; 4.7.2.2 In Vivo Leaf Explants; 4.7.2.3 Rachis Explants; 4.7.2.4 In Vitro Leaf Explants; 4.8 In Vitro Regeneration in Sapindus trifoliatus; 4.8.1 Organogenesis; 4.8.2 Somatic Embryogenesis; 4.8.2.1 Leaf Explant; 4.8.2.2 Development of Somatic Embryos in Saline Media; 4.8.2.3 Sepal Explant; 4.9 Genetic Fidelity Appraisal; 4.9.1 Genetic Fidelity in Sapindus mukorossi; 4.9.1.1 In Vitro Raised Plantlets from Leaf Explants; 4.9.1.2 In Vitro Raised Plantlets from Rachis Explants 4.9.1.3 In Vitro Raised Plantlets from Leaf Explants4.9.2 Genetic Fidelity in Sapindus trifoliatus; 4.10 Solubilizing Property; 4.11 Biodiesel Production; Further Readings;
    5: Phytochemical Analysis and Pharmaceutical Development from Sapindus spp.; 5.1 Phytochemistry of Sapindus; 5.2 Phytochemistry of S. trifoliatus, S. saponaria and S. rarak; 5.3 Saponins; 5.3.1 Biosynthesis of Saponins; 5.3.2 Development of Sapogenin Diversity; 5.4 Evaluation of Phytochemical Activity from S. mukorossi; 5.4.1 Experimental Setup; 5.4.1.1 Material Collection and Preparation of Extracts 5.4.1.2 Preparation of Stock Sample of Extracts5.4.1.3 Antioxidant Activity; 5.4.1.4 Estimation of Reducing Potential; 5.4.1.5 Thiobarbituric Acid Reactive Substance (TBARS) Assay; 5.4.1.6 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2) Scavenging Assay; 5.4.1.7 Estimation of Total Phenolic Content; 5.4.1.8 Estimation of Total Flavonoid Content; 5.5 Observations; 5.5.1 Antioxidant Activity Through TLC and DPPH Assay; 5.5.2 [beta]-Carotene/Linoleic Antioxidant Assay; 5.5.3 Hydrogen Peroxide Scavenging Activity; 5.5.4 Reducing Potential from Leaf and Fruitś Extracts
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Provash Chandra Sadhukhan, Sanjay Premi, editors.
    Summary: This book compiles selected articles presented at the International Conference on Biotechnology & Biological Sciences, BIOSPECTRUM 2017, organized by the Department of Biotechnology, University of Engineering & Management, Kolkata. Focusing on biotechnology-based analysis and intervention to address certain human diseases, the book includes a holistic discourse on disease profiling, molecular level analysis of diseases, and non-invasive medical interventions. It features articles on non-invasive treatment of iron deficiency anemia with iron nanoparticles; novel diagnosis methods based on microarray data; analysis using machine learning techniques like artificial neural network for early detection and treatment of cancer; and drug discovery for preventing the growth of human leukemic cells. Further, the book sheds light on in silico drug design using lipopeptides, and identifying the binding sites for their corresponding ligands. Presenting the concepts of the design of potent and safe antimicrobial compounds to fight multi drug resistant pathogens, it also includes interesting reviews on the design and development of various non-invasive methods, such as multi NIR wavelength probes to identify the risk areas in the diabetic foot at an early stage; and a low-cost cochlear implant prototype designed and developed from commercial off the-shelf components to empower the hearing impaired. The book appeals to students, academics and researchers in a wide range of subject areas, including biotechnology, life sciences, medicine and cancer research.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Chapter 1: Design of Multi-wavelength Near Infra-Red probe to detect risk areas in diabetic foot
    Chapter 2: Cellular and molecular response for sensitising cancer cells and protecting the normal cells from radiation-induced damages
    Chapter 3: A Novel Approach for Production and Study of Medical Ultrasound from Low Cost Electromagnetic Transducers
    Chapter 4: Altered profile of regulatory T cells and NKT cells are characteristics of Chikungunya associated polyarthralgia
    Chapter 5: Cytotoxicity and Apoptosis of Human Colon Carcinoma Cell (HT 29 Cells), Treated with Methanolic Extract of Chlorococcum humicola
    Chapter 6: Universal primer design for the detection of diverged CTX-M Beta Lactamases (ESBL) that give penicillin and cephalosporin resistance during superbug infections
    Chapter 7: Lipopeptides as therapeutics: Molecular docking and drug design
    Chapter 8: Design and Simulation of Geometrical Shape and Size Variations of Micro-electrode for Cochlear Implant
    Chapter 9: Molecular and Protein Interaction Studies for Inhibiting Growth of Human Leukemic Cells: An In silico Structural Approach to Instigate Drug Discovery
    Chapter 10
    Laccase Mediated Synthesis of Bio-material using Agro-residues
    Chapter 11: Extraction of Fungal Xylanase using ATPS-PEG/sulphate and its Application in Hydrolysis of Agricultural Residues
    Chapter 12: Thyme (Thymus vulgaris) essential oil based antimicrobial nanoemulsion formulation for fruit juice preservation.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    María Gabriela Guevara, Gustavo Raúl Daleo, editors.
    Summary: This book offers an overview of the diverse fields application of proteases (also termed proteolytic enzymes or proteinases), including food science and technology, pharmaceutical industries, and detergent manufacturing, reviewing the advances in the biotechnological application plant proteolytic enzymes over the last decade. In recent years, they have been the focus of renewed attention from the pharmaceutical and biotechnology industries, not only because of their activity on a wide variety of proteins but also because they are active over a range of temperatures and pHs. The main audience of this book are researchers working with plant proteases but also professionals from several industry segments such as food production and pharmaceutical companies.

    Contents:
    An overview of plant proteolytic enzymes
    Milk-clotting plant proteases for cheesemaking
    Use of plant proteolytic enzymes for meat processing
    Peptide synthesis using proteases as catalyst
    Plant proteolytic enzymes: their role as natural pharmacophores
    Potential use of plant proteolytic enzymes in hemostasis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Vipin Chandra Kalia, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the latest research on the uses of polyhydroxyalkanoates (PHA), introducing readers to these natural, biodegradable polyesters produced by microorganisms, their functions and applications. The individual chapters discuss the various potentials of these bioplastics, which offer an attractive alternative to non-biodegradable plastics. The book also describes the diverse medical and biomedical applications of PHAs, including their use as drug carriers, memory enhancers, and biocontrol agents, and examines their role in creating a more sustainable economy which is the need of the hour.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Preface; Contents; About the Editor;
    1: The Dawn of Novel Biotechnological Applications of Polyhydroxyalkanoates; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Antimicrobials, Biocontrol and Anticancer Agents; 1.3 Drug Carriers; 1.4 Engineering Tissues; 1.5 Medical Implants and Devices; 1.6 Anti-osteoporosis Agent; 1.7 Memory Enhancer; 1.8 Packaging; 1.9 Agriculture; 1.10 Challenges in Customizing PHAs; 1.11 The Future; References;
    2: Strategy for Biosynthesis of Polyhydroxyalkonates Polymers/Copolymers and Their Application in Drug Delivery; 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Strategy for Biosynthesis of Polyhydroxyalkonates2.2.1 Enhancement of PHA Accumulation and Production; 2.2.2 Approaches to Produce Copolymers; 2.2.2.1 Precursor Feeding; 2.2.2.2 Metabolic Engineering to Synthesize Copolymer Precursors; 2.3 Biodegradability and Biocompatibility of PHA; 2.4 PHA in Drug Delivery; 2.4.1 Intrinsic PHA in Drug Delivery; 2.4.1.1 Nanoparticles; 2.4.1.2 Microsphere; 2.4.1.3 Scaffolds; 2.4.1.4 Nanofibers; 2.4.2 Functionalized PHA in Drug Delivery; 2.4.2.1 Functionalization of PHA Granule Associated Proteins; 2.4.2.2 Functionalized PHA Graft Polymer 2.4.2.3 Functionalized PHA Block Copolymer2.5 Route for Drug Delivery; 2.5.1 Oral Route; 2.5.2 Intravenous Route; 2.5.3 Subcutaneous Route; 2.6 Drug Release Mechanism; 2.7 Factors Affect Drug Release; 2.8 Conclusion; 2.9 Opinion; References;
    3: Applications of Polyhydroxyalkanoates and Their Metabolites as Drug Carriers; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Applications of PHA as Drug Carriers; 3.3 Anticancer Carriers; 3.4 Antibacterial Carriers; 3.5 Wound Dressers; 3.6 Conclusion; References;
    4: Polyhydroxyalkanoates Applications in Antimicrobial Agents Delivery and Wound Healing 4.1 Introduction4.2 Bacterial Infections; 4.3 PHAs as Antimicrobial Agents; 4.4 PHAs as Delivery System of Antimicrobial Agents; 4.4.1 PHB; 4.4.2 PHAs, Their Derivatives and Copolymers; 4.5 Antibacterial Activity Against Biofilms; 4.6 PHAs Applications; 4.6.1 PHAs as Delivery Systems for Oral Use; 4.6.2 PHAs in Wound Healing; 4.6.3 PHAs as Bacteriostatic Agents in Animal Production; 4.7 Conclusions: Opinion; References;
    5: Polyhydroxyalkanoates Applications in Drug Carriers; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Anticancer; 5.3 PHB Microspheres; 5.4 Encapsulation; 5.4.1 Synthesis of Capsules 5.4.2 Characterization Techniques for PHA Capsules5.4.3 Factors Affecting PHA Capsules Properties; 5.4.4 Properties of PHA Capsules; 5.5 Pharmacokinetics and Biodegradation of PHAs; 5.6 Bio-distribution and Toxicity Studies in Animals; 5.7 Nanoparticles; 5.8 Hydrogels; 5.9 Non-woven Membrane; 5.10 Micelles; 5.11 Bone Repair; 5.12 Anti-proliferative Activity; 5.13 Hemolytic Properties; 5.14 Conclusions; 5.15 Opinion; References;
    6: Applications of Polyhydroxyalkanoates Based Nanovehicles as Drug Carriers; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Structure of PHA; 6.3 Bacterial PHA
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Vipin Chandra Kalia, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the practical applications of quorum sensing inhibitors for both human and plant health. Quorum sensing inhibitors that disrupt microbial biofilms can be employed to treat bacterial infections. The book describes the various bioactive molecules that can serve as quorum sensing inhibitors to combat deadly bacterial infections, in addition to several synthetic quorum sensing inhibitors. Quorum sensing is the mechanism through which bacteria develop antibiotic resistance. Intended to provide a clearer understanding of the practical applications of quorum sensing inhibitors, the book details how the problem of antibiotic resistance can be countered through the intelligent application of quorum sensing inhibitors.

    Contents:
    A. Human Health
    Inhibition of Quorum-sensing: a new paradigm in controlling bacterial virulence and biofilm formation
    Targeting Quorum Sensing Mediated Staphylococcus aureus Biofilms: A Proteolytic Approach
    Alternative strategies for control of quorum sensing and biofilm formation of pathogenic Pseudomonas aeruginosa by plant, marine and synthetic based quorum sensing inhibitors
    Quorum Quenching and Biofilm Inhibition: Alternative imminent strategies to control the disease Cholera
    Anti-biofilm peptides: A new class of quorum quenchers and their prospective therapeutic applications
    Quorum sensing inhibition: A target for treating chronic wounds
    Efflux pump-mediated quorum sensing--new avenues for modulation of antimicrobial resistance and bacterial virulence
    CRISPR-Cas systems regulate quorum sensing genes and alter virulence in bacteria
    Developing Anti-virulence Chemotherapies by Exploiting the Diversity of Microbial Quorum Sensing Systems
    Synergism between quorum sensing inhibitors and antibiotics: Combating the antibiotic resistance crisis
    Nanoparticles as quorum sensing inhibitor: Prospects and limitations
    Nanotechnological Approaches in Quorum sensing Inhibition
    Bacterial-mediated biofouling: Fundamentals and control techniques
    Technological developments in quorum sensing and its inhibition for medical applications
    Combating Staphylococcal Infections Through Quorum Sensing Inhibitors. B. Plant Health
    Marine biodiversity as a resource for bioactive molecules as inhibitors of microbial quorum sensing phenotypes
    Quorum Sensing in plant pathogenic bacteria and its relevance in plant health
    Scope of pathogenesis-related proteins produced by plants in interrupting quorum sensing signaling
    Bioactive phytochemicals targeting microbial activities mediated by quorum sensing
    Quorum sensing interference by natural products from medicinal plants: Significance in combating bacterial infection
    Enzymatic Quorum Quenching for Virulence Attenuation of Phytopathogenic Bacteria.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Nitish Kumar editor.
    Summary: For the majority of the world's population, medicinal and aromatic plants are the most important source of life-saving drugs. Biotechnological tools represent important resources for selecting, multiplying and conserving the critical genotypes of medicinal plants. In this regard, in-vitro regeneration holds tremendous potential for the production of high-quality plant-based medicines, while cryopreservation - a long-term conservation method using liquid nitrogen - provides an opportunity to conserve endangered medicinal and aromatic plants. In-vitro production of secondary metabolites in plant cell suspension cultures has been reported for various medicinal plants, and bioreactors represent a key step toward the commercial production of secondary metabolites by means of plant biotechnology. Addressing these key aspects, the book contains 29 chapters, divided into three sections. Section 1: In-vitro production of secondary metabolites Section 2: In-vitro propagation, genetic transformation and germplasm conservation Section 3: Conventional and molecular approaches.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editor; Part I: In Vitro Production of Secondary Metabolite;
    Chapter 1: Production ofPlant Secondary Metabolites: Current Status andFuture Prospects; 1.1 Introduction; 1.1.1 Plant Secondary Metabolites; 1.1.2 Terpenes; 1.1.3 Phenolic Compounds; 1.1.4 Nitrogen-Containing Compounds; 1.2 Production ofPlant Secondary Metabolites; 1.2.1 Callus Culture; 1.2.2 Hairy Root Culture; 1.2.3 Organ Culture; 1.2.4 Elicitation; 1.2.5 Endophytes; 1.2.6 Nitric Oxide; 1.2.7 Abiotic Stress; 1.2.8 Bioreactor; 1.2.9 Metabolic Engineering; 1.2.10 Immobilization 1.3 Production ofValuable Pharmaceutical Compounds ThroughIn Vitro Culture Techniques1.3.1 Taxol; 1.3.2 Morphine andCodeine; 1.3.3 Ginsenosides; 1.3.4 L-DOPA; 1.3.5 Diosgenin; 1.3.6 Capsaicin; 1.3.7 Berberine; 1.3.8 Camptothecin; 1.3.9 Vincristine andVinblastine; 1.4 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 2: The Effects ofrol Genes ofAgrobacterium rhizogenes onMorphogenesis andSecondary Metabolite Accumulation inMedicinal Plants; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Effect ofrolA Gene onMorphogenesis; 2.3 Effect ofrolB Gene onMorphogenesis; 2.4 Effect ofrolC Gene onMorphogenesis 2.5 Effect ofrolD Gene onMorphogenesis2.6 Effect ofrolABC Gene onMorphogenesis; 2.7 The 'rol Effect' onSecondary Metabolites inPlants; 2.8 Effect ofrolA Gene onPlant Secondary Metabolite Accumulation; 2.9 Effect ofrolB Gene onPlant Secondary Metabolite Accumulation; 2.10 Effect ofrolC Gene onPlant Secondary Metabolite Accumulation; 2.11 Synergistic Effect ofrol ABC Gene onPlant Secondary Metabolite Accumulation; 2.12 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 3: Conventional andBiotechnological Approaches toEnhance Steviol Glycosides (SGs) inStevia rebaudiana Bertoni; 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Conventional Approaches3.2.1 Enhancement by Physical Factors; 3.2.2 Enhancement by Chemical Factors; 3.3 Biotechnological Interventions; 3.3.1 Micropropagation; 3.3.2 Enhancement by Biological Factors; 3.3.3 Hairy Root Culture andMetabolic Engineering; 3.4 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 4: Effect ofChemical Elicitors onPentacyclic Triterpenoid Production inInVitro Cultures ofAchyranthes aspera L.; 4.1 Introduction; 4.1.1 Taxonomy ofthePlant; 4.1.2 Ethnobotanical Significance; 4.1.3 Pharmacology; 4.1.4 Chemical Properties; 4.2 Methodology; 4.2.1 Sampling andCollection 4.2.2 Sample Authentication4.2.3 Sample Processing; 4.2.4 Effect ofPlant Growth Regulators onShoot Induction andRate ofMultiplication; 4.2.5 Effect ofElicitors withandWithout PGRs forProduction ofTriterpenoids; 4.2.6 Culturing Conditions; 4.2.7 Extraction; 4.2.8 RP-UFLC Analysis ofSelected Triterpenoids; 4.3 Results andDiscussion; 4.3.1 RP-UFLC Analysis ofSelected Triterpenoids; 4.3.2 Use ofSalicylic Acid (SA), Methyl Jasmonate (MeJA), Jasmonic Acid (JA), andChitosan (CH) inMedia Fortified withandWithout PGRs forProduction ofTriterpenoids
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bhupendra Koul, Pooja Taak.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive collection of various in situ and ex-situ soil remediation regimes that employ natural or genetically modified microbes, plants, and animals for the biodegradation of toxic compounds or hazardous waste into simpler non-toxic products. These techniques are demonstrated to be functionally effective in connection with physical, chemical, and biological strategies. Soil and water contamination through heavy metals, hydrocarbons and radioactive wastes is of global concern, as these factors have cumulative effects on the environment and human health through food-chain contamination. The book discusses the utilization of algae, plants, plant-associated bacteria, fungi (endophytic or rhizospheric) and certain lower animals for the sustainable bioremediation of organic and inorganic pollutants. In addition, it explores a number of more recent techniques like biochar and biofilms for carbon sequestration, soil conditioning and remediation, and water remediation. It highlights a number of recent advances in nanobioremediation, an emerging technology based on biosynthetic nanoparticles. Lastly, it presents illustrative case studies and highlights the successful treatment of polluted soils by means of these strategies.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Authors; Abbreviations;
    Chapter 1: Soil Pollution: Causes and Consequences; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Causes of Soil Pollution; 1.2.1 Natural Sources; 1.2.1.1 Volcanic Eruptions; 1.2.1.2 Earthquakes; 1.2.1.3 Alterations in Rainfall Patterns; 1.2.1.4 Geographical Changes; 1.2.1.5 Tsunamis; 1.2.2 Anthropogenic Sources; 1.2.2.1 Solid Wastes; Municipal Solid Wastes (MSW); Hospital Wastes; Industrial Wastes; 1.2.2.2 Agricultural Practices; Herbicides; Insecticides; Fungicides; 1.2.2.3 Radioactive Wastes; 1.2.2.4 Chemical Wastes; 1.2.2.5 Mining and Smelting. 1.3 Harmful Effects of Soil Pollution1.4 Remedies to Cope with Soil Pollution; 1.5 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 2: Ex situ Soil Remediation Strategies; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Land Farming; 2.3 Biopile; 2.4 Windrow; 2.5 Composting; 2.6 Soil Washing; 2.7 Bioreactor; 2.8 Absorption/Adsorption; 2.9 Ion Exchange; 2.10 Pyrolysis; 2.11 Ultrasonic Technology; 2.12 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 3: In Situ Soil Remediation Strategies; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Physical Methods of Soil Remediation; 3.2.1 Physical Separation; 3.2.2 Soil Flushing; 3.2.3 Volatilization; 3.2.4 Froth Flotation. 3.2.5 Thermal Remediation3.2.5.1 Electrical Resistance Heating (ERH); 3.2.5.2 Steam Injection and Extraction; 3.2.5.3 Conductive Heating; 3.2.5.4 Radio-Frequency Heating (RFH); 3.2.5.5 In situ Vitrification (ISV); 3.3 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 4: Chemical Methods of Soil Remediation; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Chemical Leaching; 4.3 Chemical Fixation; 4.4 Chemical Oxidation; 4.5 Electrokinetic Remediation; 4.6 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 5: Biochar and Soil Remediation; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Carbon Sequestration; 5.3 Nutrient Exchange; 5.4 Water Holding; 5.5 Adsorption/Absorption. 5.6 Oxidation/Reduction5.7 Biochar-Microbe Interaction in Soil; 5.8 Remediation of Organic and Inorganic Contaminants from Soils; 5.9 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 6: Soil Remediation Through Microbes; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Microbial Degradation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons; 6.3 Bioventing; 6.4 Bioleaching; 6.5 Bioaugmentation; 6.6 Mycoremediation; 6.7 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 7: Soil Remediation Through Algae, Plants and Animals; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Phycoremediation; 7.3 Phytoremediation; 7.3.1 Rhizofiltration; 7.3.2 Phytotransformation; 7.3.2.1 Degradation; 7.3.2.2 Volatilization. 7.3.2.3 Stabilization7.3.3 Phytoextraction/Phytoaccumulation; 7.3.4 Phytomining; 7.3.5 Phytostimulation; 7.4 Genetic Engineering Approaches for Phytoremediation; 7.5 Animal-Mediated Soil Remediation; 7.6 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 8: Nanobioremediation; 8.1 Introduction; 8.2 Properties of Nanoparticles; 8.3 Types of Nanoparticles; 8.3.1 TiO2 (Titanium Dioxide) Based Nanoparticles; 8.3.2 Iron Based Nanoparticles; 8.3.3 Bimetallic Nanoparticles; 8.3.4 Nanoclays; 8.3.5 Nanotubes; 8.3.6 Dendrimers and Nanosponges; 8.3.7 Magnetic Nanoparticles.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Satabir Singh Gosal, Shabir Hussain Wani, editors.
    Summary: During the past 15 years, cellular and molecular approaches have emerged as valuable adjuncts to supplement and complement conventional breeding methods for a wide variety of crop plants. Biotechnology increasingly plays a role in the creation, conservation, characterization and utilization of genetic variability for germplasm enhancement. For instance, anther/microspore culture, somaclonal variation, embryo culture and somatic hybridization are being exploited for obtaining incremental improvement in the existing cultivars. In addition, genes that confer insect- and disease-resistance, abiotic stress tolerance, herbicide tolerance and quality traits have been isolated and re-introduced into otherwise sensitive or susceptible species by a variety of transgenic techniques. Together these transformative methodologies grant access to a greater repertoire of genetic diversity as the gene(s) may come from viruses, bacteria, fungi, insects, animals, human beings, unrelated plants or even be artificially derived. Remarkable achievements have been made in the production, characterization, field evaluation and commercialization of transgenic crop varieties worldwide. Likewise, significant advances have been made towards increasing crop yields, improving nutritional quality, enabling crops to be raised under adverse conditions and developing resistance to pests and diseases for sustaining global food and nutritional security. The overarching purpose of this 3-volume work is to summarize the history of crop improvement from a technological perspective but to do so with a forward outlook on further advancement and adaptability to a changing world. Our carefully chosen "case studies of important plant crops" intend to serve a diverse spectrum of audience looking for the right tools to tackle complicated local and global issues.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors; Cell andTissue Culture Approaches inRelation toCrop Improvement; 1 Introduction; 2 Micropropagation; 2.1 Significance ofMicropropagation; 3 Meristem Culture; 4 Micrografting; 5 Somatic Embryogenesis; 6 Somaclonal Variation; 6.1 Induction ofSomaclonal Variation; 6.2 Causes ofSomaclonal Variation; 6.2.1 Chromosomal Changes; 6.2.2 Mitotic Crossing Over; 6.2.3 Apparent 'Point' Mutations; 6.2.4 Cytoplasmic Genetic Changes; 6.2.5 Amplifications andDeamplifications; 6.2.6 Transposable Element Activation. 2.4.1 Establishment ofAseptic Cultures ofExplants InVitro (Stage 1)Collection ofTops andExcision ofSpindles; Sterilization ofSpindles andPreparation ofExplants; Inoculation andIncubation ofSpindle Leaf Segments; 2.4.2 Shoot Multiplication (Stage 2); 2.4.3 Induction ofRoots andHardening ofPlantlets InVitro (Stage 3); 2.4.4 Transfer ofPlantlets toSoil (Stage 4); 2.5 Transplanting ofMicropropagated Plants intheField; 2.6 Production ofCommercial Seed; 2.7 Precautions toBeTaken During Micropropagation; 2.8 Scenario ofSugarcane Micropropagation. 2.9 Significance ofMicropropagation2.10 Problems Associated withMicropropagation; 3 Somatic Embryogenesis; 3.1 Regulation ofSomatic Embryogenesis; 3.2 Effect ofSource ofExplant onSomatic Embryogenesis; 3.3 Evidence forSomatic Embryogenesis andProteins Produced fromCallus; 3.4 Somatic Embryogenesis fromCell Suspension Cultures; 3.5 Somatic Embryogenesis andCryopreservation; 3.6 Somatic Embryogenesis andSynthetic Seeds; 3.7 Somatic Embryogenesis andPlant Regeneration; References; Production ofSuperelite Planting Material Through InVitro Culturing inBanana; 1 Introduction. 6.2.7 Methylation/Demethylation ofDNA6.2.8 Altered Expression ofMultigene Families; 6.3 Nature ofSomaclonal Variation; 6.4 Significance ofSomaclonal Variation inCrop Improvement; 7 In Vitro Production ofHaploids; 7.1 Anther Culture; 7.1.1 Significance ofAnther Culture; 7.2 Isolated Microspore/Pollen Culture; 7.3 Unpollinated Ovary Culture; 7.4 Embryo Rescue fromWide Crosses; 7.4.1 Bulbosum Method; 7.4.2 Wheat Haploids fromWheat × Maize Crosses; 8 Embryo/Ovule/Ovary Culture forWide Hybridization; 9 Somatic Hybridization; 9.1 Protoplast Culture andSomatic Hybridization. 9.2 Significance inCrop Improvement10 In Vitro Production ofSecondary Metabolites; 11 Cryopreservation andInVitro Germplasm Storage; 12 Genetic Transformation forDeveloping Transgenic Crop Varieties; References; Micropropagation andSomatic Embryogenesis inSugarcane; 1 Micropropagation: AnIntroduction; 2 Micropropagation ofSugarcane: Historical Perspective; 2.1 Micropropagation Through Shoot-Tip Culture; 2.2 Micropropagation Through Apical/Axillary Bud Culture; 2.3 Micropropagation Through Spindle Leaf Segment Culture; 2.4 Micropropagation ofSugarcane forCommercial Plant Production.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Satabir Singh Gosal, Shabir Hussain Wani, editors.
    Summary: During the past 15 years, cellular and molecular approaches have emerged as valuable adjuncts to supplement and complement conventional breeding methods for a wide variety of crop plants. Biotechnology increasingly plays a role in the creation, conservation, characterization and utilization of genetic variability for germplasm enhancement. For instance, anther/microspore culture, somaclonal variation, embryo culture and somatic hybridization are being exploited for obtaining incremental improvement in the existing cultivars. In addition, genes that confer insect- and disease-resistance, abiotic stress tolerance, herbicide tolerance and quality traits have been isolated and re-introduced into otherwise sensitive or susceptible species by a variety of transgenic techniques. Together these transformative methodologies grant access to a greater repertoire of genetic diversity as the gene(s) may come from viruses, bacteria, fungi, insects, animals, human beings, unrelated plants or even be artificially derived. Remarkable achievements have been made in the production, characterization, field evaluation and commercialization of transgenic crop varieties worldwide. Likewise, significant advances have been made towards increasing crop yields, improving nutritional quality, enabling crops to be raised under adverse conditions and developing resistance to pests and diseases for sustaining global food and nutritional security. The overarching purpose of this 3-volume work is to summarize the history of crop improvement from a technological perspective but to do so with a forward outlook on further advancement and adaptability to a changing world. Our carefully chosen "case studies of important plant crops" intend to serve a diverse spectrum of audience looking for the right tools to tackle complicated local and global issues.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Plant Genetic Transformation andTransgenic Crops: Methods andApplications; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Making Transgenic Plants; 1.2.1 Gene Transfer Methods inPlants; 1.2.2 Characterization ofPutative Transgenic Plants; 1.2.2.1 Phenotypic Assay; 1.2.2.2 Enzyme Assays; 1.2.2.3 PCR Analysis; 1.2.2.4 Southern Blot Analysis; 1.2.2.5 Western Blot Analysis; 1.2.2.6 Next-Generation Sequencing (NGS) Technologies; 1.2.2.7 Progeny Analysis; 1.2.2.8 Bioassay; 1.3 Engineering Crops forAgronomic Traits. 1.3.1 Development ofInsect-Resistant Plants1.3.1.1 Introduction ofBacterial Gene(s); 1.3.1.2 Introduction ofPlant Gene(s) forInsecticidal Proteins; 1.3.2 Development ofDisease-Resistant Plants; 1.3.2.1 Virus Resistance; Coat Protein-Mediated Resistance (CP-MR); Satellite RNA-Mediated Resistance; Antisense-Mediated Protection; Development ofResistance Using CRISPR/Cas9 Technology; 1.3.2.2 Fungal Resistance; Antifungal Protein-Mediated Resistance; Antifungal Compound-Mediated Resistance; 1.3.2.3 Bacterial Resistance; 1.3.3 Development ofHerbicide-Resistant Plants. 1.3.3.1 Transfer ofGene Whose Enzyme Product Detoxifies theHerbicide (Detoxification)1.3.3.2 Transfer ofGene Whose Enzyme Product Becomes Insensitive toHerbicide (Target Modification); 1.3.4 Development ofPlants Resistant toVarious Abiotic Stresses; 1.3.5 Development ofMale Sterile andRestorer Lines forHybrid Seed Production; 1.3.6 Improvement in Nutritional Quality andMolecular Farming/Pharming; 1.3.7 Biosafety Concerns ofTransgenic Plants; References. 2.5 Conclusion andFuture PerspectivesReferences;
    Chapter 3: RNA Interference: APromising Approach forCrop Improvement; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 RNA Interference (RNAi): siRNAs andmiRNAs; 3.3 RNAi forCrop Improvement; 3.3.1 Biotic Stress Resistance; 3.3.2 Abiotic Stress Tolerance; 3.3.3 Increasing Nutritional Value; 3.3.4 Increase inShelf Life ofFruits; 3.3.5 Production ofSeedless Fruits; 3.3.6 Modification ofFlower Color; 3.3.7 Development ofMale Sterile Lines; 3.3.8 Production ofSecondary Metabolites; 3.3.9 Removal ofAllergens fromFood Crops; 3.3.10 Change inPlant Architecture.
    Chapter 2: Virus Induced Gene Silencing Approach: APotential Functional Genomics Tool forRapid Validation ofFunction ofGenes Associated withAbiotic Stress Tolerance inCrop Plants2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Application ofVIGS Technology to Study Function ofGenes Responsive toVarious Abiotic Stresses; 2.2.1 Drought, Salinity, andOsmotic Stress Tolerance; 2.3 Advantages ofUsing VIGS to Study Abiotic Stress Tolerance Mechanisms inCrop Plants; 2.4 Limitations ofVIGS inStudying Abiotic Stress Tolerance Mechanisms andPossible Approaches toOvercome theLimitations.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Satbir Singh Gosal, Shabir Hussain Wani, editors.
    Summary: During the past 15 years, cellular and molecular approaches have emerged as valuable adjuncts to supplement and complement conventional breeding methods for a wide variety of crop plants. Biotechnology increasingly plays a role in the creation, conservation, characterization and utilization of genetic variability for germplasm enhancement. For instance, anther/microspore culture, somaclonal variation, embryo culture and somatic hybridization are being exploited for obtaining incremental improvement in the existing cultivars. In addition, genes that confer insect- and disease-resistance, abiotic stress tolerance, herbicide tolerance and quality traits have been isolated and re-introduced into otherwise sensitive or susceptible species by a variety of transgenic techniques. Together these transformative methodologies grant access to a greater repertoire of genetic diversity as the gene(s) may come from viruses, bacteria, fungi, insects, animals, human beings, unrelated plants or even be artificially derived. Remarkable achievements have been made in the production, characterization, field evaluation and commercialization of transgenic crop varieties worldwide. Likewise, significant advances have been made towards increasing crop yields, improving nutritional quality, enabling crops to be raised under adverse conditions and developing resistance to pests and diseases for sustaining global food and nutritional security. The overarching purpose of this 3-volume work is to summarize the history of crop improvement from a technological perspective but to do so with a forward outlook on further advancement and adaptability to a changing world. Our carefully chosen "case studies of important plant crops" intend to serve a diverse spectrum of audience looking for the right tools to tackle complicated local and global issues.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; About the Editors;
    Chapter 1: Marker-Assisted Breeding for Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Crop Plants; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Steps in Marker-Assisted Selection (MAS); 1.2.1 Selection of Plants with Desired Morphological Traits; 1.2.2 Development of Breeding Population; 1.2.3 Marker-Assisted Selection of Plants with Desired Traits; 1.2.4 Marker Validation; 1.2.5 Correlation with Morphological Traits; 1.3 MAB for Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Major Crop Plants; 1.3.1 Rice; 1.3.2 Wheat; 1.3.3 Maize; 1.3.4 Chickpea; 1.3.5 Common Bean. 1.3.6 Soybean Al Tolerance1.3.7 Pea; 1.4 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 2: Dynamics of Salt Tolerance: Molecular Perspectives; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Effect of Salinity on Plants; 2.2.1 Germination and Growth; 2.2.2 Effect of Salinity on Photosynthesis and Photosynthetic Pigments; 2.2.3 Water Relation; 2.3 Mechanism of Salt Tolerance; 2.3.1 Tissue Na+ Accumulation as an Indicator of Salt Tolerance; 2.3.2 Na+ Exclusion from Roots; 2.3.3 Sequestration of Na+ into Vacuoles; 2.3.4 Enhanced Tissue Tolerance to High Na+ Concentrations; 2.3.5 Cl ̄Toxicity During Salt Stress. 2.4 Conclusions and Future PerspectivesReferences;
    Chapter 3: Marker-Assisted Breeding for Disease Resistance in Crop Plants; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Benefits of MAS; 3.3 Limits of MAS; 3.4 Case Study of MAS; 3.4.1 SCN Resistance Breeding; 3.5 Marker Discovery; 3.6 Confirmation of Parental Polymorphism; 3.7 High-Throughput Marker Screening; 3.8 Using Marker Data to Inform Selections; 3.9 MAS Considerations; 3.10 Genomic Selection in Crop Breeding; 3.11 Statistics of Prediction Models; 3.12 Factors Affecting Prediction Accuracy; 3.12.1 Training Population Size. 3.12.2 The Extent of LD Between the Markers and the QTL3.12.3 Trait Heritability; 3.12.4 Number of QTL and the Corresponding Effects; 3.13 Conclusions; References;
    Chapter 4: Morpho-Physiological Traits and Molecular Intricacies Associated with Tolerance to Combined Drought and Pathogen Stress in Plants; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Morpho-Physiological Traits that Likely Govern Plant Response to Combined Stress; 4.2.1 Cell Membrane Stability; 4.2.2 Leaf Water Potential; 4.2.3 Stomatal Movement; 4.2.4 Root Length; 4.3 Impact of Combined Stress on Other Morpho-Physiological Parameters. 4.3.1 Leaf Area4.3.2 Leaf Greenness; 4.3.3 Canopy Temperature; 4.3.4 Time to Anthesis; 4.4 More Potential Traits: Analysis from Individual Stress Studies; 4.4.1 Trichome Type and Density; 4.4.2 Cuticular Wax Composition; 4.5 Molecular Mechanism Governing Traits Imparting Combined Stress Tolerance in Plants; 4.6 Future Perspectives; References;
    Chapter 5: Genome Editing for Crop Improvement: Status and Prospects; 5.1 Introduction; 5.1.1 Zinc-Finger Nucleases (ZFNs); 5.1.2 Transcription Activator-Like Effector Nucleases (TALENs); 5.1.3 CRISPR/Cas System.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Nitish Kumar, editor.
    Summary: The depletion of petroleum-derived fuel and environmental concerns have prompted many millennials to consider biofuels as alternative fuel sources. But completely replacing petroleum-derived fuels with biofuels is currently impossible in terms of production capacity and engine compatibility. Nevertheless, the marginal replacement of diesel with biofuel could delay the depletion of petroleum resources and abate the radical climate change caused by automotive pollutants. Energy security and climate change are the two major driving forces for worldwide biofuel development, and also have the potential to stimulate the agro-industry. The development of biofuels as alternative and renewable sources of energy has become critical in national efforts towards maximum self-reliance, the cornerstone of our energy security strategy. At the same time, the production of biofuels from various types of biomass such as plants, microbes, algae and fungi is now an ecologically viable and sustainable option. This book describes the biotechnological advances in biofuel production from various sources, while also providing essential information on the genetic improvement of biofuel sources at both the conventional and genomic level. These innovations and the corresponding methodologies are explained in detail.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Biofuels: perspective for sustainable development and climate change mitigation
    Chapter 2: Nanoparticles for Sustainable Bioenergy and Biofuel Production
    Chapter 3: Bio-hydrogen: technology developments in microbial fuel cells and their future prospects
    Chapter 4: Recent Advances in Genetic Improvement of Jatropha curcas: a potent biodiesel plant
    Chapter 5: Catalytic approach for production of hydrocarbon rich bio-oil from a red seaweed species
    Chapter 6: Seaweed biomass and microbial lipids as a source of biofuel
    Chapter 7: Microbial Biofuels: an economic and eco-friendly approach
    Chapter 8: Biofuels: sources, modern technology developments and views on bioenergy management
    Chapter 9: Integrating omics and microbial biotechnology for the production of Biofuel
    Chapter 10: An Overview on Biomass of Bamboo as a Source of Bioenergy
    Chapter 11: Advances and challenges in sugarcane biofuel development.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sharad Vats, editor.
    Summary: "This book highlights some of the most important biochemical, physiological and molecular aspects of plant stress, together with the latest updates. It is divided into 14 chapters, written by eminent experts from around the globe and highlighting the effects of plant stress (biotic and abiotic) on the photosynthetic apparatus, metabolites, programmed cell death, germination etc. In turn, the role of beneficial elements, glutathione-S-transferase, phosphite and nitric oxide in the adaptive response of plants under stress and as a stimulator of better plant performance is also discussed. A dedicated chapter addresses research advances in connection with Capsicum, a commercially important plant, and stress tolerance, from classical breeding to the recent use of large-scale transcriptome and genome sequencing technologies. The book also explores the significance of the liliputians of the plant kingdom (Bryophytes) as biomonitors/bioindicators, and general and specialized bioinformatics resources that can benefit anyone working in the field of plant stress biology. Given the information compiled here, the book will offer a valuable guide for students and researchers of plant molecular biology and stress physiology alike"--Print version, page 4 of cover.

    Contents:
    Plants Stress Responses to Drought: Physiological, Biochemical and Molecular Basis
    Photosynthesis and Abiotic Stress in Plants
    Ecotoxicological effects of insecticides in plants assessed by germination and other phytotoxicity tools
    Variation in Plant Bioactive Compounds and Antioxidant Activities under Salt Stress
    Response of plants to salinity stress and the role of salicylic acid in modulating tolerance mechanisms: physiological and proteomic approach
    The role of beneficial elements in triggering adaptive responses to environmental stressors and improving plant performance
    Plant adaptation to stress conditions: the case of Glutathione S-transferases (GSTs)
    Phosphite as an inductor of adaptive responses to stress and stimulator of better plant performance
    Nitric oxide and reactive oxygen species interactions in plant tolerance and adaptation to stress factors
    Involvement of Reactive Species of Oxygen and Nitrogen in Triggering Programmed Cell Death in Plants
    Progress and prospects in Capsicum breeding for biotic and abiotic stresses
    MicroRNA (miRNA) and Small interfering RNA (siRNA)
    Biogenesis and functions in plants
    Bryomonitoring of Environmental Pollution
    Bioinformatics resources for the stress biology of plants.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Peggy S.M. Hill, Reinhard Lakes-Harlan, Valerio Mazzoni, Peter M. Narins, Meta Virant-Doberlet, Andreas Wessel, editors.
    Summary: This volume is a self-contained companion piece to Studying Vibrational Communication, published in 2014 within the same series. The field has expanded considerably since then, and has even acquired a name of its own: biotremology. In this context, the book reports on new concepts in this fascinating discipline, and features chapters on state-of-the art methods for studying behavior tied to substrate-borne vibrations, as well as an entire section on applied biotremology. Also included are a historical contribution by pioneers in the field and several chapters reviewing the advances that have been made regarding specific animal taxa. Other new topics covered are vibrational communication in vertebrates, multimodal communication, and biotremology in the classroom, as well as in art and music. Given its scope, the book will appeal to all those interested in communication and vibrational behavior, but also to those seeking to learn about an ancient mode of communication.

    Contents:
    Part I. Studying Vibrational Behavior: Ideas, Concepts and History
    Quo Vadis, Biotremology?
    What is Biotremology?
    Biotremology and Sensory Ecology
    Body Tremulations and their Transmission as Vibrations for Short Distance Information Transfer between Ephippiger Male and Female
    Part II. The State of the Field: Concepts and Frontiers in Vibrational Behavior
    Physical Basis of Vibrational Behaviour: Channel Properties, Noise and Excitation Signal
    Copulatory Courtship with Vibrational Signals
    Stinkbugs: Multisensory Communication with Chemical and Vibratory Signals Transmitted Through Different Media
    Part III. Practical Issues in Studying Vibrational Behavior
    Practical Issues in Studying Natural Vibroscape and Biotic Noise
    Automated Vibrational Signal Recognition and Playback
    Part IV. Vibration Detection and Orientation
    Mechanisms of Vibration Detection in Mammals
    Determining Vibroreceptor Sensitivity in Insects: The Influence of Experimental Parameters and Recording Technique
    Directionality in Insect Vibration Sensing: Behavioral Studies of Vibrational Orientation
    Part V. Biology and Evolution of Vibrational Behavior in Some Well-Studied Taxa
    Vibrational Behavior in Elephants
    Seismic Communication in the Amphibia with Special Emphases on the Anura
    Vibrational Communication in Heelwalkers (Mantophasmatodea)
    Vibrational Behavior in Termites (Isoptera)
    Part VI. Applied Biotremology
    Mating Disruption by Vibrational Signals: State of the Field and Perspectives
    Mating Disruption by Vibrational Signals: Applications for Management of the Glassy-winged Sharpshooter
    Can Vibrational Playback Improve Control of an Invasive Stink Bug?
    Vibrational Trapping and Interference with Mating of Diaphorina citri
    Vibrational Behavior in Bark Beetles: Applied Aspects
    Part VII. Outreach and Resources
    Shaking it up in the Classroom: Coupling Biotremology and Active Learning Pedagogy to Promote Authentic Discovery
    Call for the Establishment of a VibroLibrary at the Animal Sound Archive Berlin
    The Arachnid Orchestras: Artistic Research in Vibrational Interspecies Communication
    Bioacoustic Music Inspired by Biotremological Research.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Kostas N. Fountoulakis.
    Summary: This book examines in detail the diagnostic approach to manic depressive (bipolar) illness, with special reference to the borderline zones with unipolar depression and schizoaffective disorder. Among other diagnostic issues considered are mixed episodes (often misdiagnosed by psychiatrists), rapid cycling, and the confusion with personality disorders. Within the context of diagnosis and understanding of the dynamics of bipolar disorder, temperament, character, and personality are all extensively discussed. Neurocognitive deficit and disability are covered, as are elements of evolutionary biology and behavior. With regard to treatment, the major focus is on evidence-based therapy, with reference to the results of randomized controlled trials and meta-analyses; in addition, contemporary guidelines and future trends are examined. Careful consideration is also given to the psychosocial treatment approach and issues relating to societal and economic costs and burdens.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Historical perspective
    Clinical description
    Comorbid conditions
    Classification
    Epidemiology
    Etiopathogenesis (psychodynamic theories, biological models, genetics)
    Etiopathogenesis (psychodynamic theories, biological models, genetics)
    Assessment (psychometric, neuropsychological, scales)
    Therapy
    Biological therapies (separate for mania, depression and maintenance)
    Randomized Controlled Trials (RCTs)
    Meta-analysis
    Open trials
    Review and opinion papers
    Pharmacoepidemiologic data
    Psychosocial therapies
    Treatment guidelines
    Cautions for pharmaceutical treatment in bipolar patients
    Switching to the opposite pole
    Psychogeriatric issues
    Suicidality
    Gender issues
    Pediatric bipolar disorder
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Allan H. Young, Mario F. Juruena, editors.
    Summary: Bipolar disorder is a common, complex and costly mental health disorder, which sits at the heart of the practice of clinical psychiatry. Effective treatments (pharmacological, psychological and brain stimulation based) have all been discovered serendipitously. With the huge advances in basic neuroscience the way is now clear for novel treatments to be developed based on brain science. This book reviews these possibilities.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    The Neurobiology of Bipolar Disorder
    1 Introduction
    2 Neurotransmitters
    2.1 Serotoninergic System
    2.2 Dopaminergic System
    2.3 Norepinephrinergic System
    2.4 GABAergic System
    2.5 Glutamatergic System
    3 Intracellular Signalling
    4 Adenylate Cyclase Signalling Pathway
    5 Neurotrophins and Neurogenesis
    6 Neuroendocrine
    7 Conclusion
    References
    The Role of Stress in Bipolar Disorder
    1 Introduction
    1.1 Activation of Hormonal Systems After Stress
    1.2 Stress Hormone Receptors 2 Stress Hormone Actions on the Brain in Healthy Individuals
    2.1 Cellular Effects of Stress Hormones on Brain Circuits
    2.2 Neuronal Circuits and Cognitive Function
    3 Changes in Stress Responsiveness in Bipolar Disorder
    3.1 Imbalance in the Stress System: Importance of Genetic and (Early) Life History
    3.2 Changes in the HPA Axis in Bipolar Disorder Patients
    4 Changes in Cognitive Function in Bipolar Disorder Related to Stress
    4.1 Time-Dependent Changes in Cognitive Processing Following Stress in BD Patients 3.1.2 Creatine Kinase
    3.1.3 Calcium
    3.1.4 Increased Oxidative Stress
    3.1.5 Neurotransmitters
    3.1.6 Brain-Derived Neurotrophic Factor (BDNF)
    3.1.7 NAA
    3.1.8 Bcl-2
    3.2 Mitochondrial Genes
    4 How Conventional Drugs for Bipolar Disorder Relate to Mitochondrial Functioning
    5 Mitochondrial Potential Treatments
    5.1 Likely Beneficial
    5.1.1 PPAR Agonists
    5.1.2 Minocycline
    5.1.3 N-Acetyl-Cysteine (NAC)
    5.1.4 Co-enzyme Q10
    5.1.5 Melatonin
    5.2 Theoretically Beneficial, but No Studies Have Been Published
    5.2.1 Ebselen
    5.2.2 Mangosteen 4.2 Network Function in BP Patients and Individuals at Risk for Psychopathology
    5 Concluding Remarks
    References
    The Role of Genetics in Bipolar Disorder
    1 Introduction: Why Genetics Matters in the Susceptibility to Bipolar Disorder?
    2 Bipolar Disorder Is Heritable: Twin, Adoption, and Family Studies
    3 How Many Genes Modulate the Risk of Bipolar Disorder? Linkage Studies, Candidate Gene Studies, and Genome-Wide Association S...
    4 Genetic Overlap Between Bipolar Disorder and Other Brain Disorders: Disorder-Specific or General Genetic Influences? 5 The Role of Rare Genetic Variants
    6 Gene x Environment Studies
    7 Nongenetic Mechanisms Contributing to the Regulation of Gene Expression: Epigenetics
    8 Current and Future Lines of Research
    9 Conclusion
    References
    Targeting Mitochondrial Dysfunction for Bipolar Disorder
    1 The Mitochondria
    1.1 Mitochondria as an Energy Source
    1.2 Other Functions of Mitochondria
    2 Reactive Oxygen Species and Oxidative Stress
    3 Mitochondria in Bipolar Disorder
    3.1 Possible Mechanisms of Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Bipolar Disorder
    3.1.1 A Shift from OXPHOS to Glycolysis
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Susan W. Lehmann, Brent P. Forester, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jair C. Soares, Consuelo Walss-Bass, Paolo Brambilla.
    Summary: Bipolar Disorder Vulnerability: Perspectives from Pediatric and High-Risk Populations synthesizes our current understanding of high-risk and pediatric populations to aid readers in identifying markers of vulnerability for the development of bipolar disorder, with an ultimate goal of the development of drug targets and other therapies for early diagnosis and treatment. The book provides readers with an understanding of biological and environmental factors influencing disease manifestation that will aid them in defining discrete clinical stages and, importantly, establish an empirical basis for the application of novel therapeutics in a phase of illness during which specific treatments could more effectively alter disease course. Whereas most of the literature available on the pathophysiological mechanisms of bipolar disorder focuses on chronically ill adult individuals, this represents the only book that specifically examines pediatric and high-risk populations. An estimated 30 to 60 percent of adult bipolar disorder patients have their disease onset during childhood, with early-onset cases representing a particularly severe and genetically loaded form of the illness. Highlights diverse translational methodologies, including functional and structural neuroimaging, neuropsychological testing and integrated genomics. Examines molecular trajectories in youth with bipolar disorder and unaffected youth at high risk for developing bipolar disorder. Explores the interaction between genomic and environmental influences that shape behavior
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    2
  • Digital
    José Hernán Sarasola, Juan Manuel Grande, Juan José Negro, editors.
    Summary: This book will provide the state-of-the-art research on topics involved in the ecology and conservation of birds of prey. With chapters authored by the most recognized and prestigious researchers on each of the fields, this book will become an authorized reference volume for raptor biologists and researchers around the world.

    Contents:
    Section 1
    General biology
    1 Recent advances in raptor taxonomy and phylogeny
    2 Breeding and nesting biology
    3 Population ecology of birds of prey
    4 Behavioural ecology of raptors
    5 Raptor migration
    6 Dispersal in raptors
    Section 2
    Raptors in human landscapes
    7 Raptors and people: an ancient relationship persisting today
    8 Conflicts between raptors and humans
    9 Causes and consequences of urban living in raptors
    10 Birds of prey in agricultural landscapes, the role of agriculture expansion and intensification
    11 Toxicology of birds of prey
    12 Lead contamination in birds of prey
    13 Raptors electrocutions and power lines collisions
    14 Impact of renewable energy sources on birds of prey
    15 Use of drone imagery for research and conservation of birds of prey
    Section 3
    Conservation and status of raptors around the world
    16 Distribution models for raptor research and conservation
    17 Conservation genetics in birds of prey
    18 Conservation status of Neotropical raptors
    19 Conservation priorities for raptors across Asia
    20 Conservation of African raptors
    21 Conservation status and threats of New World vultures
    22 Old vultures in a changing environment
    23 Past, present and future of raptors on islands
    24 Raptor conservation in practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Anita Kar, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the epidemiology of birth defects and their public health and social implications in India. As neglected childhood disorders, birth defects remain invisible in global maternal and child health dialogues. Birth defects services are emerging in India. This book approaches birth defects from a public health perspective, identifying the core functions of a birth defects service. Keeping in mind the complex task of providing multidisciplinary services for children with disabilities and complex medical conditions, the book examines the basic public health activities that have been put in place to address these conditions in India. The book describes birth defects surveillance and the challenges of acquiring accurate and timely data on birth defects against the background of India's mixed health system. It discusses opportunities for prevention of birth defects and describes the structure and function of an emergent genetic service. It explores issues related to an integrated service for children with special healthcare needs, such as screening, early intervention, and rehabilitation. Furthermore, it describes the impact of these conditions on caregivers, including birth defects stigma. This book not only addresses a knowledge gap in the field of public health in India, but also explores the broader issues of services for children with disabilities and disabling conditions in low and low-middle income settings where access to health care is not universal. Given the depth and breadth of its coverage, the book offers an essential resource for birth defects researchers, researchers in the field of maternal and child health, public health/ global health, disability researchers, and researchers from the fields of rehabilitation sciences, nursing and anthropology. This book will be a valuable read for social medicine/community medicine departments, global health courses, and public health schools in India and other low middle-income countries.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Introduction: Birth Defects and Public Health in Low and Middle-Income Countries
    Contents
    Editor and Contributors
    Abbreviations
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    List of Boxes
    Part I A Public Health Approach
    1 Birth Defects: A Public Health Approach
    The Need for Birth Defects Services in LMICs
    Individual, Health and Social Welfare System Impact
    Magnitude of Congenital Anomalies
    Epidemiological Transition
    A Public Health Framework
    Birth Defect Surveillance
    Prevention of Birth Defects Integrated medical and rehabilitation services
    Other Public Health Activities
    The World Health Assembly Resolution on Birth Defects
    India as an Example of a LMIC
    Socio-demographic and Health Indicators
    Socio-demographic Index and Epidemiological Transition
    Health System
    Maternal and Child Health Services
    References
    2 Some Common Birth Defects
    Section I : Common Congenital Anomalies/Malformations
    Congenital Heart Defects
    Orofacial Clefts
    Spina Bifida and Neural Tube Defects
    Hydrocephalus, Macrocephaly, Microcephaly Clubfoot (Congenital Talipes Equinovarus)
    Developmental Dysplasia of the Hip
    Congenital Limb Defects
    Polydactyly
    Section II : Developmental (Neuromotor) Disabilities
    Intellectual Disability
    Down Syndrome
    Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
    Autism Spectrum Disorders
    Cerebral Palsy
    Congenital Hearing Impairment
    Vision Impairment/Blindness
    Section III : Common Single Gene Disorders
    Hemoglobinopathies
    Hemophilia
    Muscular Dystrophy
    Achondroplasia
    Conclusion
    References 3 Thalidomide: Understanding the Responsibilities of a Birth Defects Service
    Thalidomide
    Thalidomide Distribution Across the World
    Thalidomide Embryopathy/Syndrome
    Health and Social Impact of Thalidomide
    Clinical Needs of Children
    Impact of Disability: Schooling
    Impact on Parents
    Health and Welfare Needs with Ageing
    The Response to the Thalidomide Tragedy
    Health and Social Sector Service Response
    Birth Defects Surveillance
    Drug Regulation
    Abortion Legislation
    Compensation and Economic Support
    Regulated Reintroduction of Thalidomide Thalidomide in Developing Countries
    Lessons for a Birth Defects Service
    Zika Virus and the Public Health Response
    Congenital Zika Virus Syndrome
    Public Health Response
    Health System Challenges
    Impact on Families
    References
    Part II Surveillance, Registries and Magnitude
    4 Birth Defects Surveillance in India
    Background
    Birth Defects Surveillance
    Birth Defects Surveillance: Factors Affecting Reporting of Prevalence Data
    Birth Defects Surveillance in LMICs
    Birth Defects Surveillance in India
    Summary and Conclusion
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Chittaranjan Kole, Hideo Matsumura, Tusar Kanti Behera, editors.
    Summary: This book focusing on the bitter gourd genome is the first comprehensive compilation of knowledge on the botany, cytogenetical analysis, genetic resources and diversity, traditional breeding, tissue culture and genetic transformation, whole genome sequencing and comparative genomics in the Cucurbitaceae family. It discusses the biochemical profile of the bioactives present in this horticultural crop, used both as a vegetable and as a medicine, and also addresses sex determination in bitter gourd. Written by respected international experts, the book is useful to students, teachers and scientists in academia, as well as seed companies and pharmaceutical industries.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Botanical descriptions
    Medicinal properties: bioactives and their actions
    Genetic resources and genetic diversity
    Cytogenetical analysis of bitter gourd genome
    Sex determination
    Tissue culture, genetic engineering & nanotechnology
    Classical genetics and traditional breeding
    Molecular linkage mapping: Map construction and mapping of genes/QTLs
    Genome sequence and its comparative study with other Cucurbitaceae genome
    Functional genomics: metabolomics, transcriptomics (including biochemical study of interaction with parasite)
    Future Prospects.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Br Inst Radiol 1989-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    v. 23-25, 28, 1989-96, 2005.
    SHELVED UNDER: British journal of radiology. Supplement.
    2
  • Digital
    Ebony Omotola McGee ; foreword by David Omotoso Stovall.
    Summary: "Drawing on narratives from hundreds of Black, Latinx, and Indigenous individuals, Ebony Omotola McGee examines the experiences of underrepresented racially minoritized students and faculty members who have succeeded in STEM. Based on this extensive research, McGee advocates for structural and institutional changes to address racial discrimination, stereotyping, and hostile environments in an effort to make the field more inclusive. Black, Brown, Bruised reveals the challenges that underrepresented racially minoritized students confront in order to succeed in these exclusive, usually all-White, academic and professional realms. The book provides searing accounts of racism inscribed on campus, in the lab, and on the job, and portrays learning and work environments as arenas rife with racial stereotyping, conscious and unconscious bias, and micro-aggressions. As a result, many students experience the effects of a racial battle fatigue--physical and mental exhaustion borne of their hostile learning and work environments--leading them to abandon STEM fields entirely. McGee offers policies and practices that must be implemented to ensure that STEM education and employment become more inclusive including internships, mentoring opportunities, and curricular offerings. Such structural changes are imperative if we are to reverse the negative effects of racialized STEM and unlock the potential of all students to drive technological innovation and power the economy."--Amazon.

    Contents:
    Will white supremacy end America's STEM supremacy?
    The plight of the underrepresented in STEM higher education and workforce
    The stress of success for the underrepresented and minoritized in STEM
    Why justice-oriented STEM is the key to getting and keeping students of color in STEM and, oh yeah, saving our planet, too!
    Evaluating efforts to broaden STEM participation
    Next steps for STEM leadership: practical suggestions.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2020
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Print
    Jamila Lyiscott.
    Summary: "Black Appetite. White Food. invites educators to explore the nuanced manifestations of white privilege as it exists within and beyond the classroom. Renowned speaker and author Jamila Lyiscott provides ideas and tools that teachers, school leaders, and professors can use for awareness, inspiration, and action around racial injustice and inequity. Part I of the book helps you ask the hard questions, such as whether your pedagogy is more aligned with colonialism than you realize and whether you are really giving students of color a voice. Part II offers a variety of helpful strategies for analysis and reflection. Each chapter includes personal stories, frank discussions of the barriers you may face, and practical ideas that will guide you as you work to confront privilege in your classroom, campus, and beyond."-- Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    LC196.5.U6 L95 2019
    1
  • Digital
    Mohamed Fawzy Ramadan, editor.
    Summary: Recent developments in the field of nutrition have led to increased interest in herbs and medicinal plants as phytochemical-rich sources for functional food, nutraceuticals, and drugs. As research sheds light on the therapeutic potential of various bioactive phytochemicals, the demand for plant extracts and oils has increased. Black cumin or black seeds (Nigella sativa) have particularly widespread nutritional and medicinal applications. In traditional medicine, black seeds are used to manage fatigue and chronic headache. Black seed oil is used as an antiseptic and analgesic remedy and for treatment of joint's pain and stiffness and can be mixed with sesame oil to treat dermatosis, abdominal disorders, cough, headache, fever, liver ailments, jaundice, sore eyes, and hemorrhoids. Thymoquinone, the main constituent in black seed volatile oil, has been shown to suppress carcinogenesis. Black cumin (Nigella sativa) seeds: Chemistry, Technology, Functionality, and Applications presents in detail the chemical composition, therapeutic properties, and functionality of high-value oils, phytochemicals, nutrients, and volatiles of the Nigella sativa seed. Organized by formulation (seeds, fixed oil, essential oil, and extracts), chapters break this seed down into its chemical constituents and explore their role in the development of pharmaceuticals, nutraceuticals, novel food, natural drugs, and feed. Following numerous reports on the health-promoting activities of Nigella sativa, this is the first comprehensive presentation of the functional, nutritional, and pharmacological traits of Nigella sativa seeds and seed oil constituents.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to black cumin (Nigella sative): Chemistry, Technology, Functionality and Applications
    Section 1. Nigella sative seeds: Cultivation, Composition and Applications
    2. Effect of cultivation, fertilization and irrigation practices on Nigella sative yield and quality
    3. Morphological characters of Nigella sativa
    4. Micro and macroscopic characterization of traded Nigella sativa seeds using applied systematics techniques
    5. Composition of Nigella sativa seeds
    6. Nigella sativa seed peptides (Thionins)
    7. Black cumin polysaccharides
    8. Thymoquinone: Chemistry and cunctionality
    9. Novel Prospective of Nigella sativa Essential Oil Analysis, Culinary and Medicinal Uses
    10. Rediscovering Nigella Seeds Bioactives Chemical Composition using Metabolomics Technologies
    11. Health promoting activities of Nigella sativa seeds
    12. Nigella sativa seed extract in green synthesis and nanocomposite
    13. Food applications of Nigella sative seeds
    14. Nutraceutical importance and applications of Nigella sativa seed flour
    15. Nigella sativa seed cake: nutraceutical significance and applications in the food and cosmetic industry
    16. Nigella sative seeds in cosmetic products
    17. Nigella sativa supplementation in ruminant diets: production, health, and environmental perspectives
    18. Nigella sativa seeds and its derivatives in poultry feed
    19. Nigella sative Seeds and Its Derivatives in Fish Feed
    Section 2: Nigella sative fixed oil: Chemistry, Technology, Functionality and Applications
    20. Composition and Functionality of Nigella sativa Fixed Oil
    21. Effect of processing on the composition and quality of Nigella sativa fixed oil
    22. Food applications of Nigella sativa Fixed Oil
    23. Health-Promoting Activities of Nigella sativa Fixed Oil
    24. Micro- and Nano-encapsulation of Nigella sativa Oil
    25. Biodiesel Production Potential of Nigella sativa Oil
    Section 3: Nigella sative essential oil: Chemistry, Technology, Functionality and Applications
    26. Composition and functionality of Nigella sativa essential oil
    27. Effect of processing on the composition and quality of Nigella sativa essential oil
    28. Food applications of Nigella sativa essential oil
    29. Health-promoting activities of Nigella sativa essential oil
    Section 4: Nigella sative seed extracts: Chemistry, Technology, Functionality and Applications
    30. Composition and Functionality of Nigella sativa Seed Extracts
    31. Nigella sativa seed extracts in functional foods and nutraceutical applications
    32. Health promoting activities of Nigella sativa seed extracts.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Emily Bernard.
    Summary: In these twelve deeply personal, connected essays, Bernard details the experience of growing up black in the south with a family name inherited from a white man, surviving a random stabbing at a New Haven coffee shop while taking graduate studies at Yale, marrying a white man from the north and bring him home to her family, adopting two babies from Ethiopia, and living and teaching in a primarily white New England college town. Each of these essays goes beyond a narrative of black innocence and white guilt and sets out to discover a new way of telling the truth as the author has lived it.

    Contents:
    Beginnings
    Scar tissue
    Teaching the N-word
    Interstates
    Mother on Earth
    Black is the body
    Skin
    White friend
    Her glory
    Motherland
    Going home
    People like me
    Epilogue: my turn.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    E185.97.B337 A3 2019
    1
  • Print
    Marlon James.
    Summary: "Tracker is known far and wide for his skills as a hunter: "He has a nose," people say. Engaged to track down a mysterious boy who disappeared three years earlier, Tracker breaks his own rule of always working alone when he finds himself part of a group that comes together to search for the boy. The band is a hodgepodge, full of unusual characters with secrets of their own, including a shape-shifting man-animal known as Leopard. As Tracker follows the boy's scent -- from one ancient city to another; into dense forests and across deep rivers -- he and the band are set upon by creatures intent on destroying them. As he struggles to survive, Tracker starts to wonder: Who, really, is this boy? Why has he been missing for so long? Why do so many people want to keep Tracker from finding him? And perhaps the most important questions of all: Who is telling the truth, and who is lying? Drawing from African history and mythology and his own rich imagination, Marlon James has written a novel unlike anything that's come before it: a saga of breathtaking adventure that's also an ambitious, involving read. Defying categorization and full of unforgettable characters, Black Leopard, Red Wolf is both surprising and profound as it explores the fundamentals of truth, the limits of power, and our need to understand them both."--Publisher's description

    Contents:
    A dog, a cat, a wolf, and a fox
    Malakin
    One child more than six
    White science and black math
    Here is one oriki
    Death wolf.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PR9265.9.J358 B58 2020
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Abdul Karim Bangura.
    Summary: "In the wake of the murder of George Floyd in Minneapolis, the debate between proponents of Black Lives Matter and All Lives Matter has been reignited. For proponents of Black Lives Matter, the slogan All Lives Matter is not a call for inclusiveness but a criticism of the Black Lives Matter movement. On the other hand, advocates of All Lives Matter insist their slogan is about diversity and colorblindness. The contributors included in Black Lives Matter vs. All Lives Matter: A Multidisciplinary Primer approach the subject from fields as wide ranging as sociology, mathematics, linguistics, business, politics, and psychology, to name a few. This collection adds complexity and international perspectives to the debate, allowing these seemingly simple quarrels over phrasing to be unpacked from many angles. A refreshing variety of looks at one of the defining social movements of the last decade and the reaction to it, this collection will be valuable to those seeking to understand these movements in ways beyond how they are typically framed."-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    General introduction / Abdul Karim Bangura
    Religious perspective / Simon Gisege Omare
    Literary perspective / Saidu Bangura
    Mathematical perspective / Abdul Karim Bangura
    Public administration / policy perspective / Rachael M. Rudolph
    Linguistic perspective / Lilian Achieng' Magonya and Pamela Anyango Oloo
    Sociological perspective / Banson Waiganjo Kanyingi
    Gender and sexuality perspective / Cecy Edijala Balogun
    Economic perspective / Abdul Amin Kamara
    Psychological perspective / Lilian Anyango Olick
    Business perspective / Olumuyiwa Adekunle Kehinde
    Political perspective / Omosefe Oyekanmi
    Juvenile justice perspective / Gerald K. Fosten
    General conclusion / Abdul Karim Bangura.
  • Print
    Chad Sanders.
    Summary: "When Chad Sanders landed his first job in lily-white Silicon Valley, he quickly concluded that to be successful at work meant playing a certain social game. Each meeting was drenched in white slang and the privileged talk of international travel or folk concerts in San Francisco, which led Chad to believe he needed to emulate whiteness to be successful. So Chad changed. He changed his wardrobe, his behavior, his speech--everything that connected him with his Black identity. And while he finally felt included, he felt awful. So he decided to give up the charade. He reverted back to the methods he learned at the dinner table, or at the Black Baptist church where he'd been raised, or at the concrete basketball courts, barbershops, and summertime cookouts. And it paid off. Chad began to land more exciting projects. He earned the respect of his colleagues. Accounting for this turnaround, Chad believes, was something he calls Black Magic, namely resilience, creativity, and confidence forged in his experience navigating America as a Black man. Black Magic has emboldened his every step since, leading him to wonder: Was he alone in this discovery? Were there others who felt the same? In essays, Chad dives into his formative experiences to see if they might offer the possibility of discovering or honing this skill. He tests his theory by interviewing Black leaders across industries to get their take on Black Magic. Black Magic explores Black experiences in predominantly white environments and demonstrates the risks of self-betrayal and the value of being yourself"--adapted from dust jacket.

    Contents:
    Home and neighborhood
    Grade school : gifted and talented programs, private school, and separation
    College : HBCUs, PWIs, and higher learning
    Work
    Spirit : church, God, and faith.
    Digital Access 2021
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital/Print
    Damon Tweedy, M.D.
    Summary: When Tweedy began medical school, he envisioned a bright future where his segregated, working-class background would become irrelevant. Instead he found himself grappling with race, bias, and the unique health problems of black Americans, and met a professor who bluntly questioned whether he belonged in medical school. In examining the complex ways in which both black doctors and patients must navigate the difficult and often contradictory terrain of race and medicine, he illustrates the complex social, cultural, and economic factors at the root of most health problems in the black community.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Disparities. People like us ; Baby mamas ; Charity care ; Inner-city blues
    Barriers. Confronting hate ; When doctors discriminate ; The color of HIV/AIDS
    Perseverance. Matching ; Doing the right thing ; Beyond race.
    Digital Access 2015
    Limited to 5 simultaneous usersSUNet ID login required
    Print Access
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R154.T84 A3 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Akshay Kumar Chakravarthy, editor.
    Summary: Conogethes is a group of moths distributed in Austral-Asian region from India to New Guinea, the Solomon Islands and Australia. The moths are also found in Hawaii and Great Britain. Conogethes is mostly known for the economic impact of its larvae on agricultural crops. Substantial research has been undertaken in order to understand the biology of these harmful insects and to develop strategies to confine their impact. Research on chemical communication between males and females via sex pheromones is in progress. Recent research has also focused on the acoustic communication of Conogethes. The moths can feed on more than 200 plants in diversified habitats. The borer moths have become major pest on Horticultural, Agricultural, Avenue trees and forest trees. Its a pest of Quarantine importance as it has been found in Exportable commodities. The book contains 22 chapters from a dozen countries. The authors are from China, Vietnam, Australia, Sri Lanka, Malaysia, Norway etc. This is the first book on the pest globally where interesting insights are provided. This is one of the book of its kind on single pest dealing with almost all aspects of its biology and management on cultivated crops.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgment; Contents; Editor and Contributors;
    1: Moths of the Genus Conogethes: Taxonomy, Systematics, and Similar Species; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Host Plant Use; 1.3 Systematics and Delimitation; 1.4 Diagnosis; 1.5 Phylogenetic Relationships; References;
    2: Molecular Status of Conogethes spp.: An Overview; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Biosystematics; 2.3 Molecular Identification; 2.3.1 Conogethes Barcode; 2.4 Japan; 2.5 India; 2.6 China; 2.7 New Zealand; 2.8 Other Molecular Works; References;
    3: Conogethes sahyadriensis: A New Borer on Zingiberaceous Crop Plants from India; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Biosystematics; 3.3 Geographical Distribution and Host Range; 3.4 Molecular Characterization; 3.5 Seasonal Incidence and Crop Loss; 3.6 Mating and Feeding Behaviour; 3.7 Sex Pheromone Components; References;
    4: Status of Shoot and Fruit Borer, Conogethes spp. (Crambidae: Lepidoptera) in Asia: Central, South, and the Southeast; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Afghanistan; 4.3 Bhutan; 4.4 Bangladesh; 4.5 Myanmar; 4.6 Nepal; 4.7 Maldives and Other Islands; 4.8 Networking; 4.9 Future Thrusts; References;
    5: Research Progress of Conogethes punctiferalis (Lepidoptera: Crambidae) in China; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Distribution and Host Range; 5.3 Morphology; 5.4 Occurrence and Damage; 5.5 Host-Plant Interactions; 5.6 Artificial Diet; 5.7 Overwinter and Diapause; 5.8 Wolbachia Infection; 5.9 Genetic Diversity and Gene Flow; 5.10 Molecular Taxonomy; 5.11 Integrated Management; References;
    6: Status of Conogethes punctiferalis (Guenée) in South of Vietnam; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Characteristics of C. punctiferalis (Guenée) in South of Vietnam; 6.2.1 Species of Genus Conogethes in South of Vietnam; 6.2.2 Synonyms; 6.2.3 Host Range; 6.2.4 Morphological Characteristics; 6.2.5 Biological Characteristics; 6.2.6 Natural Enemies; 6.3 Status of Conogethes punctiferalis (Guenée) on Crops in South Vietnam; 6.3.1 Durian; 6.3.1.1 Damage Symptoms; 6.3.1.2 Management; 6.3.2 Guava; 6.3.2.1 Damage Symptoms; 6.3.2.2 Management; 6.3.3 Longan; 6.3.3.1 Damage Characteristics; 6.3.3.2 Management; 6.3.4 Rambutan; 6.3.4.1 Damage Symptoms; 6.3.4.2 Management; 6.3.5 Soursop; 6.3.5.1 Damage Symptoms; 6.3.5.2 Management; 6.3.6 Ginger; 6.3.6.1 Damage Symptoms; 6.3.6.2 Management; References;
    7: Status of Shoot and Fruit Borer, Conogethes punctiferalis, in Sri Lanka; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Life History; 7.3 Host Plant and Nature of Damage; 7.4 Conogethes on Teak; 7.5 Conogethes on Zingiberaceae; 7.6 Conogethes on Fruit Crops; 7.7 Management Practices; References;
    8: Status and Management of Conogethes spp. in Malaysia; 8.1 Introduction; 8.2 Key Species; 8.3 Biogeography; 8.4 Host Range; 8.5 Economic Importance; 8.6 Bioecology; 8.7 Seasonality; 8.8 Management; References
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Editor Don K. Nakayama ; principal contributors Peter J. Kernahan, Edward E. Cornwell.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    R695 .B53 2021
    1
  • Digital
    James H. Cone.
    Summary: "The classic text in black theology, with a new foreword by Peter J. Paris and a new afterword by Kelly Brown Douglas"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2020
  • Digital
    Richard Allen Williams.
    Summary: This socially conscious, culturally relevant book explores the little-known history and present climate of Black people in the medical field. It reveals the deficiencies in the American healthcare structure that have contributed to the mismanagement of healthcare in the Black population, and examines cross-currents that intersect with the major events in minority medical history. Illustrated across 10 expertly written chapters, this text features a longitudinal timeline with the presentation of evidence-based information drawn from historical, political, and clinical sources. The book begins with an analysis of diseases particularly prevalent in the Black community due to socioeconomic inequalities in available medical care. These diseases include sickle cell anemia, hypertension, heart failure, drug addiction, and HIV/AIDS. Bolstered by profiles of historically well-known Black physicians, stories of success in medical education, and the remarkable impact of Black medical organizations, subsequent chapters address the triumphs and tribulations of the Black medical professional in America. Concluding with an examination of the current health status of Black people in the United States, the book makes a case for future systemic improvements in healthcare delivery to minority communities. A unique, noteworthy reference, Blacks in Medicine: Clinical, Demographic, and Socioeconomic Correlations is written for a broad range of physicians and health providers, as well as professionals in the social sciences and public health.

    Contents:
    Ancient History as a Backdrop to Black Medical History
    Beginning of Transoceanic Slave Transport
    Initiation of the Transatlantic Slave Trade Between Africa and America
    Poor Medical Treatment of Slaves and Its Consequences
    Emergence of the First Black Doctors Trained in Medical Schools
    Beginning of Black Medical Autonomy and Self-Determination
    Destructive Effects of Discrimination and Institutional Racism
    Extreme Medical Hardship Period
    Development of Social Welfare
    Development of Healthcare Reform.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Karen Helton Rhodes, Alexander H. Werner.
    Contents:
    Sect.1: Basics
    1. Epidermis in Clinical Dermatology
    2. Lesion Description/Terminology
    3. Diagnostic Culture and Identification (Bacterial and Fungal)
    4. Obtaining a Diagnostic Biopsy
    5. Practical Cytology
    6. Symptom Checker (Lesional and Regional Dermatoses)
    7. Antibiotic Stewardship and Emerging Resistant Bacterial Infections
    Sect. 2: Diseases/Disorders
    8. Acne (Canine and Feline)
    9. Anal Furunculosis/Perianal Fistula
    10. Anal Sac Disorders
    11. Atopic Disease
    12. Autoimmune Blistering Diseases
    13. Bacterial Pyoderma
    14. Behavioral or Self-Injurious Dermatoses
    15. Biting and Stinging Insects
    16. Contact Dermatitis
    17. Cutaneous Adverse Drug Reaction, Erythema Multiforme, Stevens-Johnson Syndrome, and Toxic Epidermal Necrolysis
    18. Cutaneous Adverse Food Reactions
    19. Demodicosis (Canine and Feline)
    20. Dermatomyositis, Canine Familial
    21. Dermatophytosis
    22. Endocrinopathies, Atypical
    23. Eosinophilic Disease (Granuloma) Complex
    24. Epitheliotropic (Cutaneous) Lymphoma
    25. Histiocytic Proliferative Disorders
    26. Hyperadrenocorticism, Canine
    27. Hyperadrenocorticism, Feline Skin Fragility Syndrome
    28. Hypothyroidism
    29. Keratinization (Cornification) Disorders
    30. Leishmaniasis: Protozoan Dermatitis
    31. Lupus Erythematosus
    32. Malassezia Dermatitis
    33. Mast Cell Tumors
    34. Mycobacterial Infections
    35. Mycoses, Deep
    36. Nocardiosis and Actinomycosis
    37. Otitis Externa, Media, and Interna
    38. Panniculitis
    39. Photodermatoses
    40. Pododermatitis and Claw Disorders
    41. Pre- and Paraneoplastic Syndromes
    42. Sarcoptid Mites
    43. Sebaceous Adenitis, Granulomatous
    44. Sporotrichosis
    45. Superficial Necrolytic Dermatitis
    46. Tumors, Common Skin and Hair Follicle
    47. Uveodermatologic Syndrome
    48. Vasculitis
    49. Viral Dermatoses
    50. Zoonosis 727-730
    A. Canine Genodermatoses
    B. Drug Formulary.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Ashish M. Kamat, Peter C. Black, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a practical, comprehensive, state-of-the-art review of bladder cancer. A valuable resource for anyone with an interest in urothelial tumors, this text brings together a multidisciplinary team of experts who have distilled their vast years of experience and knowledge into a concise, easy to digest format. Topics covered range from importance of a pattern recognition in diagnosis and pathologic evaluation to How I do it? tips on patient selection for appropriate therapies such as chemotherapy, immunotherapy, surgery and radiation. Bridging the gap between a traditional textbook and hands-on experience, this book provides a practical guide to managing day-to-day issues and challenges and brings an algorithmic approach to avoid common pitfalls. Bladder Cancer: A Practical Guide provides a concise yet comprehensive summary of the current status of the field of bladder cancer treatment, guiding patient management and stimulating investigative efforts.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Patient Evaluation
    Screening
    Evaluation for Signs and Symptoms
    Cystoscopy Inc
    Using Urine Markers
    Risk Stratification
    Assessment/Management of Frailty
    Section 2: TURBT (Tumor Resection)
    Indications
    Patient Preparation
    Surgical Technique
    Peri-operative Care
    Management of Common Complications
    Pathologist Assessment and Report
    Oncologic Monitoring
    Section 3: Adjvuant Intravesical Therapy
    Introduction: Choice of Therapy
    BCG
    Chemo
    Device Assisted
    Intravesical Salvage Therapy
    Section 4: Radical Cystectomy
    Indications
    Patient Preparation
    Surgical Technique
    Peri-operative Care
    Management of Common Complications
    Pathologist Assessment and Report
    Oncologic Monitoring
    Section 5: Urinary Diversion
    Incontinent
    Continent Cutaneous
    Orthotopic Neobladder
    Section 6: Peri-operative Chemotherapy
    Neoadjuvant
    Adjuvant
    Section 7: Trimodal Therapy (Radiation)
    Indications
    Patient Preparation
    Concomitant Chemo
    External Beam Radiation
    Management of Recurrence
    Section 8: Systemic Therapy for Advanced Bladder Cancer
    Chemotherapy
    Immunotherapy
    Novel Therapies
    Section 9: Managing Variant Histology
    Squamous/Glandular Differentiation
    Micropapillary
    Sarcomatoid
    Small Cell/Neuroendocrine
    Other
    Squamous
    Adenocarcinoma
    Section 10: Clinical Trials in Bladder Cancer: Practical Pearls
    Bladder Cancer Disease States
    NMIBC
    Metastatic.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Alan J. Wein, Karl-Erik Andersson, Marcus J. Drake, Roger R. Dmochowski, editors.
    Summary: Bladder Dysfunction in the Adult: The Basis for Clinical Management succinctly describes all that the healthcare professional needs to know when treating lower urinary tract symptoms. The book describes how to assess and treat every group of patients likely to be affected with bladder problems, and the underlying mechanisms responsible. Women with stress incontinence, men with enlarged prostates, people with neurological disease and the elderly are all discussed in particular detail. For all professionals treating or learning to treat patients with urinary storage or voiding problems, the concise presentation and thorough coverage provides treatment recommendations and clear explanations. Authored by recognized experts in their respective fields, Bladder Dysfunction in the Adult: The Basis for Clinical Management is a comprehensive resource that allows the reader to develop the knowledge, understanding, and confidence to deal with the many clinical challenges of bladder dysfunction.

    Contents:
    Relevant Anatomy Physiology and Pharmacology
    Normal and Abnormal Function: An Overview
    The Impact of Neurologic Insult on the Lower Urinary Tract
    Dysfunction in Anatomic Outlet Obstruction in Men
    Outlet Obstruction in Women
    Bladder Pain Syndrome
    Other Varieties of Dysfunction
    Evaluation: History and Physical Examination; Imaging; Endoscopy
    Urodynamics
    Special Tests
    Behavioral Therapy
    Urinary Catheters and Other Devices
    Current Pharmacologic Treatment of Lower Urinary Tract Syndromes
    Electrical Stimulation and Neuromodulation
    Surgery for Bladder Outlet Obstruction in the Male
    Surgery for Stress Urinary Incontinence and Pelvic Organ Prolapse
    Surgery for Neuropathic Bladder Dysfunction
    Urinary Diversion
    Tissue Engineering for Neurogenic Bladder
    Considerations in Older People
    Adolescent Urology and Transitional Care
    The Psychological Impact of Lower Urinary Dysfunction.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ignacio Blanco.
    Contents:
    Alpha-1 antitrypsin deficiency
    Serpins and serpinopathies
    Alpha-1 antitrypsin biology
    Alpha-1 antitrypsin gene, genetic heritage, phenotypes, and genotypes
    Alpha-1 antitrypsin deficiency
    Alpha-1 antitrypsin deficiency
    Genetic epidemiology
    Laboratory diagnosis
    Clinical diagnosis
    Liver disease associated with Alpha-1 antitrypsin deficiency
    Respiratory manifestations of the Alpha-1 antitrypsin deficiency
    Other diseases associated with Alpha-1 antitrypsin deficiency
    Clinical management and treatment of lung disease
    Registries and patients' associations
    Current research and future perspectives.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    S. Chandra Nayaka, Rajashekara Hosahatti, Ganesh Prakash, C. Tara Satyavathi, Rajan Sharma, editors.
    Summary: Blast is an important foliar disease that infects the majority of cereal crops like rice, finger millet, pearl millet, foxtail millet and wheat, and thus results in a huge economic impact. The pathogen is responsible for causing epidemics in many crops and commonly shifts to new hosts. Magnaporthe spp. is the most prominent cause of blast disease on a broad host range of grasses including rice as well as other species of Poaceae family. To date, 137 members of Poaceae hosting this fungus have been described in fungal databases. This book provides information on all blast diseases of different cereal crops. The pathogen evolves quickly due to its high variability, and thus can quickly adapt to new cultivars and cause an epidemic in a given crop. Some of the topics covered here include historical perspectives, pathogen evolution, host range shift, cross-infectivity, and pathogen isolation, use of chemicals fungicides, genetics and genomics, and management of blast disease in different cereal crops with adoption of suitable methodologies. In the past two decades there have been significant developments in genomics and proteomics approaches and there has been substantial and rapid progress in the cloning and mapping of R genes for blast resistance, as well as in comparative genomics analysis for resolving delineation of Magnaporthe species that infect both cereals and grass species. Blast disease resistance follows a typical gene-for-gene hypothesis. Identification of new Avr genes and effector molecules from Magnaporthe spp. can be useful to understand the molecular mechanisms involved in the fast evolution of different strains of this fungal genus. Advances in these areas may help to reduce the occurrence of blast disease by the identification of potential R genes for effective deployment. Additionally, this book highlights the importance of blast disease that infects different cereal hosts in the context of climate change, and genomics approaches that may potentially help in understanding and applying new concepts and technologies that can make real impact in sustainable management of blast disease in different cereal crops.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Blast Disease: Historical Importance, Its Distribution, and Host Infectivity Across Cereal Crops
    Recent Advances in Blast Rice Disease
    The Blast-A Major Malady in Neutricereals in Southeast Asia
    Utilizing Host-Plant Resistance to Combat Blast Disease in Rice
    Microconidia: Understanding Its Role in the Rice Blast Fungus Magnaporthe oryzae
    Finger Millet Blast Pathogen Diversity and Management in Uttarakhand
    Finger Millet Blast (Magnaporthe grisea): Current Scenario and Its Integrated Disease
    Advances in Genetics, Genomics for Management of Blast Diseases in Cereal Crops
    Wheat Blast Management: Prospects and Retrospective
    Scenario of Blast Diseases in the Eastern Region of India
    Chemicals in the Management of Blast Disease of Rice
    Magnaporthe Genome: Lessons Learnt and the Way Forward
    Bibliography
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Anthony M.J. Bull, Jon Clasper, Peter F. Mahoney, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1. Basic Science and Engineering
    1. The fundamentals of blast physics
    2. Biomechanics in blast
    3. Behaviour of materials
    4. Blast Loading of Cells
    5. Biological Tissue Response
    Part 2. Weapon Effects and the Human
    6. Blast Injury Mechanism
    Section 3. Principles of Investigating and Modelling Blast and Blast Mitigation
    7. The examination of post-blast scenes
    8. Clinical Forensic Investigation of the 2005 London Suicide Bombings
    9. Modelling the blast environment and relating this to clinical injury- Experience from the 7/7 Inquest
    10. The mortality review panel: a report on the deaths on operations of UK Service personnel 2002-2013
    11. Physical Models- Tissue Simulants.-12. Physical Models- Organ models for primary blast
    13. In Vivo Models of blast injury
    14. Modelling Blast brain injury
    15. Military wound ballistics base study: Development of a Skull/Brain Model
    16. Surrogates of human injury
    17. Computational methods in continuum mechanics
    18. Energised fragments: bullets and fragment simulating projectiles
    Part 4. Applications of blast injury research: Solving clinical problems
    19. Coagulopathy and inflammation: an overview of blast effects
    20. Foot and Ankle Blast Injuries
    21. Traumatic Amputation
    22. Testing and development of mitigation systems for tertiary blast
    23. Pelvic blast injury
    24. Behind Armour blunt trauma (BABT)
    25. Blast Injury to the Spine
    26. Primary Blast Lung Injury
    27. Regional effec ts of explosive devices: The neck
    28. Optimising the anatomical coverage provided by military body Armour systems
    29. Blast injuries of the Eye
    30. Hearing damage through blast
    31. Peripheral Nerve Injuries.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Anthony M.J. Bull ; Jon Clasper ; Peter F. Mahoney, editors ; Alison H. McGregor, Spyros D. Masouros, Arul Ramasamy, section editors.
    Summary: This heavily revised second edition provides a comprehensive multi-disciplinary resource on blast injuries. It features detailed information on the basic science, engineering, and medicine associated with blast injuries. Clear, easy to understand descriptions of the basic science are accompanied by case studies of a variety of clinical problems including heterotopic ossification, hearing damage, and traumatic brain injury, enabling the reader to develop a deep understanding of how to appropriately apply the relevant science into their clinical practice. The use of prosthetics, orthotics and osseointegration in rehabilitation is also covered. Blast Injury Science and Engineering: A Guide for Clinicians and Researchers is a valuable interdisciplinary text primarily focused towards clinical medical professionals and trainees seeking to develop a thorough understanding of injury mechanisms, and the latest treatment techniques. In addition, this resource is of use to individuals in other fields whose work centres around blast injury science such as injury mitigation researchers, military scientists and engineers.

    Contents:
    Preface: A history of blast injury science and engineering
    Part I Basic science and engineering
    Part II Weapons effects and forensics
    Part III Clinical problems
    Part IV Modelling blast and blast mitigation
    Part V Application and innovation
    Part VI Rehabilitation. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Robert J. Kurman, Lora Hedrick Ellenson and Brigitte M. Ronnett, eds.
    Springer Nature eReference.
    Summary: Since the publication of the 1/e in 1977, Blaustein's Pathology of the Female Genital Tract has consolidated its position as the leading textbook of gynecological pathology. An essential reference for all pathologists and residents, this thoroughly updated Seventh Edition includes more than 1400 illustrations in color, informative tables and 22 revised chapters written by internationally recognized experts. Discussion of each specific entity is organized to include general information, etiology, and epidemiology followed by clinical features, pathologic findings, differential diagnosis, clinical behavior, and treatment. This clear organization is applied throughout the book and allows the reader to quickly access key information in every chapter. Blaustein's Pathology of the Female Genital Tract remains the gold-standard reference for practicing pathologists and trainees, as well as for obstetric/gynecology practitioners and residents.

    Contents:
    Benign Diseases of the Vulva
    Premalignant and Malignant Tumors of the Vulva
    Diseases of the Vagina
    Benign Diseases of the Cervix
    Precancerous Lesions of the Cervix
    Carcinoma and Other Tumors of the Cervix
    Benign Diseases of the Endometrium
    Precursor Lesions of Endometrial Carcinoma
    Endometrial Carcinoma
    Mesenchymal Tumors of the Uterus
    Diseases of the Fallopian Tube and Paratubal Region
    Nonneoplastic Lesions of the Ovary
    Diseases of the Peritoneum
    Surface Epithelial Tumors of the Ovary
    Sex Cord-Stromal, Steroid Cell, and Other Ovarian Tumors with Endocrine, Paraendocrine and Paraneoplastic Manifestations
    Germ Cell Tumors of the Ovary
    Nonspecific Tumors of the Ovary Including Mesenchymal Tumors
    Metastatic Tumors of the Ovary
    Diseases of the Placenta
    Gestational Trophoblastic Tumors and Related Tumor-like Lesions
    Hematologic Neoplasms and Selected Tumor-Like Lesions
    Soft Tissue Lesions Involving Female Reproductive Organs. /p>.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Jordi Vallverdú, Vincent C. Müller, editors.
    Summary: This edited volume is about how unprejudiced approaches to real human cognition can improve the design of AI. It covers many aspects of human cognition and across 12 chapters the reader can explore multiple approaches about the complexities of human cognitive skills and reasoning, always guided by experts from different but complimentary academic fields. A central concept is explained: blended cognition, the natural skill of human beings for combining constantly different heuristics during their several task-solving activities. Something that was sometimes observed like a problem as "bad reasoning", is now the central key for the understanding of the richness, adaptability and creativity of human cognition. The topic of this book connects in a significant way with the disciplines of psychology, neurology, anthropology, philosophy, logics, engineering, logics, and AI. In a nutshell: understanding better humans for designing better machines. Any person with interests on natural and artificial reasoning should read this book as a primary source of inspiration and a way to achieve a critical thinking on these topics.

    Contents:
    Preface Blended Cognition Vincent C. Müller & Jordi VallverdúPhilosophy 1. Blended cognition. The robotic challenge Jordi Vallverdú2. Manipulative Abduction, External Semiotic Anchors, and Blended Cognition Lorenzo Magnani3. Practical Reasoning in the Deliberations of an Intelligent Autonomous Agent Douglas Walton4. Blended Automation: The Language-Game of Psychoanalytic Automatism and Cybernetic Automata Vassilis GalanosEngineering 5. Can our Robots rely on an Emotionally Charged Vision-for- Action? An Embodied Model for Neurorobotics Gabriele Ferretti & Eris Chinellato6. Modeling psycho-emotional states via neurosimulation of monoamine neuro-Transmitters Max Talanov, Alexey Leukhin, Fail Gafarov & Jordi Vallverdú7. Towards Conversation Envisioning for Cognitive Robots Maryam Sadat Mirzaei, Qiang Zhang, Stef van der Struijk & Toyoaki NishidaPsychology 8. The blending of human and autonomous-machine cognition Robert Earl Patterson and Robert G. Eggleston (USAF)9. Heuristics of Numerical Choice in Economic Contexts Kay-Yut Chen & Daniel S. Levine Anthropology 10. Towards autonomous artificial agents? Proposal for a naturalistic activity-based model of (artificial) life
    Corentin Chanet & David Eubelen Logics 11. Toward a Logic of Everyday Reasoning Pei Wang Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Asim V. Farooq, James J. Reid, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive overview of blepharitis that covers various the definitions and types of blepharitis. It meets the market need for a comparable book on this topic that recognizes blepharitis as being both a common diagnosis and a challenging condition to treat. Concise and unique, chapters are clinically focused, provide an equal focus on surgical management as well as on medical management of this condition. The book concludes with a look at future directions in the field as they pertain to the diagnosis, clinical treatment, and management of blepharitis. Blepharitis is an invaluable reference written specifically for comprehensive ophthalmologists, cornea and external disease specialists, residents, fellows, and optometrists.

    Contents:
    1. Anterior Blepharitis
    2. Posterior Blepharitis
    3. Local and Systemic Associations
    4. Diagnostic Tools
    5. Sebaceous Carcinoma: Masquerade Syndrome
    6. Medical Management of Blepharitis
    7. Procedural Management
    8. Blepharitis: Future Directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Print
    Rudolfo Anaya ; foreword by Erika L. Sánchez ; introduction by Rudolfo Anaya.
    Summary: "Antonio Marez is six years old when Ultima comes to stay with his family in New Mexico. Ultima is a curandera, one who cures with herbs and magic. Under her wise wing, Tony will probe the family ties that bind and rend him as he discovers himself in the magical secrets of the pagan past-a mythic legacy as palpable as the Catholicism of Latin America. And at each life turn, there is Ultima, who delivered Tony into the world . . . and will nurture the birth of his soul."-- Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PS3551.N27 B58 2022
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Gerald McDonnell, Joyce M. Hansen.
    Summary: "Infection control and concerns about spread of disease date back to ancient times: early Greek, Roman, and Biblical texts outline strict dietary guidelines, quarantines for people with leprosy, and instructions for returning soldiers to burn equipment and clothes. Aristotle instructed Alexander the Great to require his armies to boil their drinking water. Today, concerns about drug resistance (eg: farmed fish as a source of antibiotic resistance; drug-resistant tuberculosis; drug-resistant bacteria on endoscopes) dominate news headlines and command serious research and industry investment.Seymour S Block's Disinfection, Sterilization, and Preservation was first published in 1968, and is considered to be the gold standard for those involved with technologies or products dependent on preservatives, sterilization or disinfection. The various sections and detailed chapters of the book include introductions, fundamental principles of activity, chemical types of disinfectants/sterilants, controls of particular types of microorganisms, physical disinfection/sterilization technologies, medical & health related applications, test methodologies, and miscellaneous other topics. The last edition was published in 2000, and since that time much has changed in our understanding of the risks, the technologies available, and the regulatory environments in the practical applications of these technologies. Additionally, focus has somewhat shifted from "how to kill it" to "how to prevent it" A new edition, discussing new understandings of microbes and how to manage them through disinfection and prevention is necessary. Dr. Block has passed away, but he has several colleagues and previous contributors who are desirous of carrying the mantle of this important title. The proposed editors are well respected in the area, with backgrounds in the antimicrobial control of infection risks; one of the editors has a greater background in the medical application of technologies and the other for industrial applications, offering a nice balance"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Arunangshu Chakraborty, editor.
    Summary: This is a highly informative and carefully presented book for trainees and postgraduate students of anaesthesiology as well as practicing clinicians. This book aims to help them in selecting and implementing the most suitable regional block in each clinical scenario and successfully use the techniques of ultrasound-guided regional anaesthesia (USRA) in their practice. This book covers basics of ultrasound imaging, anatomical aspects and techniques of all nerve blocks that are commonly used in clinical practice in a lucid and illustrated presentation. Regional anaesthesia can be a safe alternative to general anaesthesia. When combined with general anaesthesia, it can provide excellent postoperative analgesia too. With the advent of ultrasound, the scope, safety and reliability of regional anaesthesia has expanded manifold. However, there is a lack of formal clinical training in regional anaesthesia in most of the anaesthesia postgraduate curricula and this book intends to bridge this gap. The book serves as a useful resource to the anaesthetist; trainee or practitioner who wants to master the nerve blocks.

    Contents:
    Basics of ultrasound guided regional anaesthesia
    Blocks in upper limbs
    Blocks for lower limbs
    Truncal blocks
    Neuraxial blocks
    Pediatric Regional Anaesthesia
    Recent advances
    Safety and ergonomics and education.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Richard T. Maziarz, Susan Schubach Slater, editors.
    Springer Nature eBook.
    Summary: This updated and expanded edition developed by the Blood and Marrow Stem Cell Transplant team at Oregon Health & Science University Knight Cancer Institute features the latest medical management guidelines and standards of care for hematopoietic stem cell transplant and cellular therapy patients. Spanning the timeline from the initial consultation throughout the transplant process, this handbook begins by providing a general overview of stem cell transplantation and goes on to outline disease-specific indications for stem cell transplantation. It then focuses on transplant complications and ongoing care, and finally explores cellular therapies for hematologic malignancies. Comprehensive and easy-to-use, Blood and Marrow Transplant Handbook: Comprehensive Guide for Patient Care, Third Edition presents a multidisciplinary approach to information for physicians and advanced practice medical providers as well as residents, fellows, and other trainees who care for patients who undergo transplant and immune effector cell therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Bipin N. Savani.
    Contents:
    Introduction / Bipin N. Savani
    Overview : transplant data and increasing numbers of long-term survivors / Jakob R. Passweg and Helen Baldomero
    Long-term transplant clinic setup / Andre Tichelli ... [et al.]
    Late effects after allogeneic hematopoietic stem cell transplantation / Sairah Ahmed and Yago Nieto
    Late effects after autologous hematopoietic stem cell transplantation / Sairah Ahmed and Yago Nieto
    Graft-versus-host disease and late effects after hematopoetic stem cell transplantation / Gerard Socie
    Prominent role of allied health professionals (nurse practitioners, physician assistants, others) in long term follow-up after hematopoietic stem cell transplantation / Catherine E. Lucid
    Screening and prevention guidelines for hematopoietic cell transplant survivors / Navneet S. Majhail and j. Douglas Rizzo
    Secondary malignancies : prevalence, screening, prevention, and management guidelines / Paolo F. Caimi and Hillard M. Lazarus
    Cutaneous chronic graft-versus-host disease / Attilio Olivieri ... [et al.]
    Anti-infective prophylaxis, immunization and prevention of recurrent infectious complications in long-term survivors / John P. Galvin and Jayesh Mehta
    Seasonal virus infections : prevention and management guidelines / Gaurav Trikha and John R. Wingard
    Exposure to family members : infections and recent live vaccinations / Brian G. Engelhardt and James E. Crowe, Jr.
    Late pulmonary complications after allogeneic hematopietic stem cell transplantation : bronchiolitis obliterans syndrome (BOS) and organizing pneumonia (OP) / Lee Gazourian ... [et al.]
    Post-transplantation bone disease : prevalence, monitoring, prevention and management guidelines / Andre Tichelli and Alicia Rovo
    Ocular complications : prevalence, monitoring, prevention, and management guidelines / Andre Tichelli and Alicia Rovo
    Oral complications in hematopoietic stem cell transplantation survivors : monitoring and management / Andrea L. Utz and Shubhada Jagasia
    Fertility issues, contraception, and pregnancy outcome in long-term survivors / Alicia Rovo ... [et al.]
    Follow-up of children after hematopoietic stem cell transplantation : growth and development / Kristina K. Hardy ... [et al.]
    Posttransplant diabetes mellitus : monitoring, prevention, and management guidelines / Prathima Jasti, Shichun Bao, and Shubhada Jagasia
    Thyroid disease : monitoring and mangement guidelines / M. Kathleen Figaro ... [et al.]
    Special issues related to female long-term survivors / Melissa A. Merideth ... [et al.]
    Cardiac and vascular complications in long-term survivors after hematopoietic stem cell transplantation / Alicia Rovo and Andre Tichelli
    Hyperlipidemia : prevalence, monitoring, management, interactions with immunosuppressive agents and follow-up / Dara L. Eckerle Mize, Shubhada Jagasia, and Jeffrey B. Boord
    Hypertension management in long-term survivors / Imad Abboud
    Gastrointestinal complications of hematopoietic cell transplantation / Preet Bagi ... [et al.]
    Hepatic complications of hematopoietic stem cell transplantation / Niharika Samala ... [et al.]
    Monitoring and management of hepatitis B, hepatitis C, and HIV infection before and after transplantation / Keith Luckett and Stephen Dummer
    Prevention and management of renal complications in long-term survivors / Michael Dickenmann and Joerg P. Halter
    Immunosuppressive agents and monitoring in long-term survivors / Paul Shaughnessy and Helen Leather
    Nutritional assessments and nutritional supplementation for long-term transplant survivors : multivitamins, vitamin D, Calcium, antioxidants, and minerals / Lauren Zatarain ... [et al.]
    Daily routines and guidelines : driving, infection isolation, masks, food/diet, activities, exercise, pets, sun exposures, and others / Angela M. Woods
    Caregivers of long-term survivors / Elizabeth Wulff-Burchfield
    Health-related quality of life in adult and pediatric survivors of hematopoietic stem cell transplantation / Margaret Bevans and Lori Wiener
    Prevalent psychosocial adjustment issues nd solutions : lifestyle and social challenges / Katrina M. Stokes
    Patient's perspective : concepts of long-term survivor support groups and their roles / Michael W. Brown
    Appendix 1 NMDP/Be the match posttransplant guidelines resources / Darlene Haven
    Appendix 2 Long-term follow-up calendar / Andre Tichelli ... [et al.]
    Appendix 3 Commonly used transplant-related medications in long-term survivors / Melissa Logue.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Bipin N Savani, André Tichelli.
    Summary: "Hematopoietic cell transplantation (HCT) provides curative therapy for a variety of diseases. Over the past several decades, significant advances have been made in the field of HCT and now HCT has become an integral part of treatment modality for a variety of hematologic malignancies and some nonmalignant diseases. HCT remains an important treatment option for a wide variety of hematologic and nonhematologic disorders, despite recent advances in the field of immunologic therapies. Factors driving this growth include expanded disease indications, greater donor options (expanding unrelated donor registries and haploidentical HCT), and accommodation of older and less fit recipients. The development of less toxic pretransplant conditioning regimens, more effective prophylaxis of graft-versus-host disease (GVHD), improved infection control, and other advances in transplant technology have resulted in a rapidly growing number of transplant recipients surviving long-term free of the disease for which they were transplanted. The changes over decades in the transplant recipient population and in the practice of HCT will have almost inevitably altered the composition of the long-term survivor population over time. Apart from an increasingly older transplant recipient cohort, the pattern of transplant indications has shifted from the 1990s when chronic myeloid leukemia made up a significant proportion of allo-HCT indications. Changes in cell source, donor types, conditioning regimens, GVHD prophylaxis, and supportive care have all occurred, with ongoing reductions in both relapse and non-relapse mortality (NRM) have been demonstrated"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Print
    Tibor J. Greenwalt, Edwin A. Steane, section editors.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Retired Reference (Downstairs)
    RB37 .C184
    3
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Ruth Lyck, Gaby Enzmann.
    Summary: Within the central nervous system (CNS) the constantly changing blood stream is separated from the CNS parenchyma by the blood brain barrier (BBB) restricting passage to selected immune cells. Under pathological conditions, however, viruses, bacteria, parasites and autoaggressive immune cells can penetrate the barrier and contribute to CNS inflammation. The BBB actively contributes to neuroinflammation by presentation of chemokines, expression of cell adhesion molecules and alteration of barrier properties. As such, understanding the role of the BBB under healthy and pathological conditions is essential for the development of new drugs to efficiently combat inflammatory diseases of the CNS. This book presents a comprehensive collection of reviews that focus on the role of the BBB. Experts in the field share their insight on structural, topological and functional properties of the BBB. They elaborate on pathophysiological changes of the inflamed BBB such as permeability, transporter proteins and alterations in microRNAs and cytokine profile. Additional chapters on multiple sclerosis and bacterial meningitis provide in depth information on significant neuroinflammatory diseases. The selection is complemented by a review on the current understanding of the BBB as signaling hub in tumor pathogenesis in the brain.

    Contents:
    General Introduction to Barrier Mechanisms in the Central Nervous System
    Topological Aspects of the Blood-brain and Blood cerebrospinal Fluid Barriers and their Relevance in Inflammation Research
    The Contribution of the Extracellular Matrix to the BBB in Steady State and Inflammatory Conditions
    Pathophysiology of the Bloodbrain Barrier in Neuroinflammatory Diseases
    Leakage at Blood-neural Barriers
    Blood-Brain Barrier Transporters and Neuroinflammation: Partners in Neuroprotection and in Pathology
    MicroRNAs in Brain Endothelium and Inflammation
    Blood-Brain Barrier Dysfunction during Central Nervous System Autoimmune Diseases
    Pathways Across the Blood Brain Barrier
    Neuroinflammation in Bacterial Meningitis
    Blood Vessels in the Brain: a Signaling Hub in Brain Tumor Inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP375.5 .B56 2017
    1
  • Digital
    John G. Toffaletti, Craig R. Rackley.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey Nursing
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Michel E. Safar, Michael F. O'Rourke, Edward D. Frohlich, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Blood Pressure: Basic Concepts of Steady and Pulsatile Arterial Hemodynamics
    1. Arterial Stiffness, Wave Reflection, Wave Amplification: Basic Concepts, Principles of Measurement and Analysis in Humans / Michael F. O'Rourke, Caroline O'Brien, and Thomas Weber
    2. Large Arteries, Microcirculation, and Mechanisms of Hypertension / Harry A.J. Struijker-Boudier
    3. Direct Measurement of Local Arterial Stiffness and Pulse Pressure / Luc M. Van Bortel, Tine De Backer, and Patrick Segers --4. Ventricular-Arterial Coupling and Mechanism of Wave Reflections / Julio A. Chirinos and Patrick Segers
    5. Determination of Systemic and Regional Arterial Structure and Function / Pierre Boutouyrie, Laurent Macron, Elie Mousseaux, and Stéphane Laurent
    6. Animal Models for Studies of Arterial Stiffness / Patrick Lacolley, Simon N. Thornton, and Yvonnick Bezie
    7. Elastin, Calcium and Age-Related Stiffening of the Arterial Wall / Jeffrey Atkinson
    8. Genetic and Cellular Aspects of Arterial Stiffness / Athanase Benetos, Abraham Aviv, Patrick Lacolley, Michel E. Safar, and Véronique Regnault
    Part II. Blood Pressure and Sodium Balance: Pathophysiological Mechanisms and Cardiovascular Risk
    9. Mechanical Stress and the Arterial Wall / Ernesto L. Schiffrin, Alain Tedgui, and Stephanie Lehoux
    10. Pulsatile Stress, Arterial Stiffness, and Endothelial Function / Robinson Joannidès, Jérémy Bellien, and Christian Thuillez
    11. Hypoxia, Arterial Blood Pressure, and Microcirculation / Jean-Jacques Mourad, Jean-Sébastien Silvestre, and Bernard I. Lévy
    12. The Reality of Aging Viewed from the Arterial Wall / Majd AlGhatrif and Edward G. Lakatta
    13. Emerging Aspects of Angiotensin Biology and Their Potential Role in the Vasculature / Richard N. Re and Julia L. Cook
    14. Arterial Stiffness and the Sympathetic Nervous System / Gianfranco Parati and Paolo Salvi
    15. Oxidative Stress and Hypertension / Jing Wu and David G. Harrison
    16. Heart Failure with Preserved Ejection Fraction / Scott L. Hummel
    17. Structural Alterations in Arterial Stiffness: Role of Arterial Fibrosis / Javier Díez
    18. Salt and Multiorgan Damage in Hypertension: Vascular Stiffening and Cardiorenal Structural Dysfunction Responses / Edward D. Frohlich
    19. Preventive Lessons from Hypertension and Myocardial Infarction: Treating Asymptomatic Individuals to Lower the Risk for Subsequent Cardiovascular Events / Marc A. Pfeffer
    Part III. Hypertension: Evaluation of Cardiovascular Risk and Organ Damage
    20. Value of Brachial and Central Blood Pressure for Predicting Cardiovascular Events / Stanley S. Franklin, Carmel M. McEniery, John R. Cockcroft, and Ian B. Wilkinson
    21. Predictive Value of Arterial Stiffness for Cardiovascular Events / Stéphane Laurent, Pierre Boutouyrie, and Francesco Mattace Raso
    22. Heart Rate, Synchrony and Arterial Hemodynamics / Alberto P. Avolio, Mark Butlin, and Isabella Tan
    23. Pulse Pressure Amplification and Arterial Stiffness in Middle Age / Alberto P. Avolio, Mark Butlin, and Athanase D. Protogerou
    24. Arterial Stiffness, Central Blood Pressure and Cardiac Remodelling: From Cardiac Hypertrophy to Heart Failure / Mary J. Roman and Richard B. Devereux
    25. The Relationship Between Aortic Stiffness, Microvascular Disease in the Brain and Cognitive Decline: Insights into the Emerging Epidemic of Alzheimer's Disease / Angelo Scuteri, Jonathan Stone, and Michael F. O'Rourke
    26. Arterial Stiffness and Risk in Various Cardiovascular Diseases / Charalambos Vlachopoulos, Dimitrios Terentes- Printzios, Kenji Takazawa, and Christodoulos Stefanadis
    27. Large Artery Remodeling and Chronic Kidney Disease / Marie Briet, Michel Delahousse, Gérard London, Stéphane Laurent, and Pierre Boutouyrie
    28. Arterial Changes in Renal Transplantation / Sola Aoun Bahous, Serge Korjian, Yazan Daaboul, Jacques Blacher, and Michel E. Safar
    29. Arterial Stiffness, Central Blood Pressure and Coronary Heart Disease / Piotr Jankowski, Jacques Blacher, and Thomas Weber
    Part IV. Clinical Involvement: Role of Age, Sex, Inflammatory and Metabolic Alterations
    30. Modifications of Blood Pressure Profiles in the Very Old: Role of Frailty and Comorbidities / Athanase Benetos, Sylvie Gautier, and Michel E. Safar
    31. Arterial Stiffness and Amplification in the Very Old / Athanase Benetos, Ghassan Watfa, Paolo Salvi, and Patrick Lacolley
    32. Hypertension in Men and Women: Is It Different? / Harold Smulyan and Bruno Pannier
    33. Obesity, Metabolic Syndrome, Diabetes and Smoking / Isabel Ferreira, Roel J.J. van de Laar, and Coen D.A. Stehouwer
    34. Glucose, Insulin and Potential Strategies of Vascular Stiffening / Guanghong Jia, Annayya R. Aroor, Gerald A. Meininger, and James R. Sowers
    35. Arterial Stiffness in Chronic Inflammation / Kaisa M. Mäki-Petäjä, Carmel M. McEniery, Stanley S. Franklin, and Ian B. Wilkinson
    Part V. Stratifications of Cardiovascular Risk and Therapeutic Consequences on Arterial Stiffness and Wave Reflections
    36. Outcome-Driven Thresholds for Pulse Pressure on Office and Out-of-the-Office Blood Pressure Measurement / Yumei Gu, Lucas S. Aparicio, Yanping Liu, Kei Asayama, Tine W. Hansen, Teemu J. Niiranen, José Boggia, Lutgarde Thijs, and Jan A. Staessen
    37. Properties of Central Arteries in Populations of Different Ethnicity: Ethnicity and Central Arteries / Augustine Nonso Odili, Yumei Gu, and Jan A. Staessen
    38. Changing Concepts on the Role of Blood Pressure Reduction in Stroke Prevention with the Focus on β-Blocking Agents / Ji-Guang Wang, Feng-Hua Ding, Li-Hua Li, and Yan Li
    39. Decreasing Arterial Stiffness and/or Wave Reflections Independently of Mean Arterial Pressure: Effect of Antihypertensive Drugs (Part 1) / Hélène Beaussier, Stéphane Laurent, and Pierre Boutouyrie
    40. Decreasing Arterial Stiffness and/or Wave Reflections Independently of Mean Arterial Pressure: Effect of Non-antihypertensive Drugs (Part 2) / Hélène Beaussier, Stéphane Laurent, and Pierre Boutouyrie
    41. Blood Pressure Variability: Measurements, Influential Factors, Prognosis and Therapy / Yi Zhang, Davide Agnoletti, Alexandra Yannoutsos, Michel E. Safar, and Jacques Blacher
    42. Nitrate: The Ideal Drug Action for Isolated Systolic Hypertension in Elderly? / Xiong J. Jiang and Michael F. O'Rourke
    43. De-stiffening Strategy, Sodium Balance, and Blockade of the Renin-Angiotensin System / Athanase D. Protogerou, Michel E. Safar, Gerard E. Plante, and Jacques Blacher
    44. Long-Term Effects of Calcium Channel Blockers on Central and Peripheral Arteries / Yoshio Matsui and Michael F. O'Rourke
    45. Exercise Training for the Modification of Arterial Stiffness and Wave Reflections / Julian W. Sacre and Bronwyn A. Kingwell.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Adel E. Berbari, Giuseppe Mancia, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth and up-to-date review of the association between blood pressure disorders and diabetes mellitus. In addition, it discusses the specific role of hemodynamic alterations on the vasculature of various target organs (the retina, kidney, brain, and gravid uterus), topics that are infrequently considered and or acknowledged by clinicians. Covering all aspects of the interaction between metabolic and hemodynamic factors, the book presents the diverse perspectives of the contributing authors and extensive discussions of issues including diabetic kidney disease, diabetic hypertensive phenotypes and postural hypotension.

    Contents:
    I Introduction
    1 Coexistence of Diabetes Mellitus and Hypertension
    II Epidemiological Aspects
    2 BP disorders in diabetic children/adolescents
    3 Hypertension and Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus
    4 BP Disorders in Gestational Diabetes (Hypertension / Preeclampsia)
    III Screening and Diagnostic Approaches in Diabetic Hypertensive Patients
    5 Office / Out-of-Office Blood Pressure Measurements
    6 Laboratory Indices / Bioimaging
    IV Pathophysiological Mechanisms
    7 Genetics
    8 Insulin and BP relationships
    9 Mechanisms of Diabetic Nephropathy in Experimental Animals
    10 Molecular Alterations in Diabetic Chronic Kidney Disease
    V Target Organ Damage in Diabetic Hypertensive Patient
    11 Endothelial Dysfunction / Arterial Stiffness
    12 Heart in Diabetic Hypertensive Patients
    13 Cerebrovascular Structural Alterations
    14 Diabetic Nephropathy in Type 1 Diabetes Mellitus
    15 Diabetic Chronic Kidney Disease in Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus (Albuminuric/ Nonalbuminuric)
    16 Diabetic Retinopathy
    VI Strategies for Blood Pressure Control
    17 Target Blood Pressure Values / Choice of Antihypertensive Drug Classes
    VII Benefits of Antihypertensive Treatment
    18 Lifestyle modification
    19 Blood Pressure Thresholds for Initiation of Drug Treatment / and Effect of Blood Pressure Reduction on Target Organs
    VIII Antihypertensive Drugs and Diabetes Mellitus: Special Problems
    20 Adverse reactions associated with RAAS Blockers
    21 Insulin Resistance and New Onset Diabetes Mellitus
    22 Management of Hypertensive Diabetic Patient during Ramadan Fasting
    IX Other Therapeutic Modalities
    23 Control of Blood Glucose and Cardiovascular Risk Profile
    X Hypotensive Disorders
    24 Supine / Postural Hypotensive Blood Pressure Levels.
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Henry Liu, Alan D. Kaye, Jonathan S. Jahr, editors.
    Summary: This book functions as a comprehensive and authoritative reference book in blood transfusion and blood substitutes. It is a collection of the latest developments and the newest investigations, and individual chapters are written by world experts in the arena. The book begins with a historical review on the practice of transfusions as well as the components and physiology of blood. The following chapters cover various topics, including platelet substitutes, hemoglobin-based oxygen carriers, perfluorocarbon based oxygen carriers, and safety issues related to artificial hemoglobin. All chapters provide a bulleted highlights list to facilitate readers in mastering the main points of each individual chapter. Blood Substitutes and Oxygen Biotherapeutics is an invaluable reference book for perioperative care providers, hematologists, anesthesiologists, surgeons, obstetricians and gynecologists.

    Contents:
    ATP and Oxygen: the Energy Economy of the Cell
    Physiological Functions of Blood
    Hemoglobin: Physiology and Hemoglobinopathy
    The Global Burden of Anemia
    Blood Component Therapy: the History, Efficacy, and Adverse Effects in Clinical Practice
    Allogeneic Blood Transfusion: Complications and Side Effects
    The real-time effects of artificial blood substitutes on the microcirculation
    Vascular endothelium and nitric oxide
    A Brief History of Development of Nanobiotechnology-based Blood Substitutes
    Classification of Blood Substitutes
    Hemoglobin-based Oxygen Carriers
    Complications of HBOCs including clinical safety issues
    Free Hemoglobin Toxicity
    Nanotechnology-based oxygen and drug carriers
    Perfluorocarbon-based Oxygen Carriers
    Platelet Substitutes
    Plasma Substitutes
    Novel nanobiotherapeutic based blood substitutes
    Paradigm Shift
    Hemoglobin-Based Blood Substitute
    Hemoglobin vesicles as artificial red cells
    Low Volume Resuscitation Agents in Prehospital Medicine
    ErythroMer: Bio-Inspired Artificial Red Blood Cell
    OxyVita-Erythrocruorin
    HemAssist: History, clinical trials
    Development of Recombinant Hemoglobin
    Hemolink-PolyHeme
    Safety and Tolerability Study -in Stable Adult Patients with Sickle Cell disease
    Oxygent-Sanguinate
    M101, the Hemoglobin from the Sea-Hemopure: clinical trials and current status
    Perftoran: History-Oxycyte-Hemoximer
    Transplantation
    Hemorrhagic Shock: HBOCs in Trauma
    Use of Oxygen
    Regulatory Update.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    by Åke Rieger and Sten-Otto Liljedahl.
    Contents:
    -- Changes in blood volume and plasma proteins after bleeding and immediate substitution with physiologic saline, dog plasma and dog albumin in the splenectomized dog / Å. Rieger
    3. Changes in blood volume and plasma proteins after bleeding and immediate substitution with Macrodex. Rheomacrodex and Physiogel in the splenectomized dog / Å. Rieger
    4. Importance of thoracic duct lymph in restitution of plasma volume and plasma proteins after bleeding and immediate substitution in the splenectomized dog / S
    O. Liljedahl and Å. Rieger.
    Access via Acta chirurgica Scandinavica. 1967; 379
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    v. II-IV, 1967.
    SHELVED AS A PERIODICAL UNDER: Acta chirurgica Scandinavica. Supplementum ; 379.
  • Digital
    Peter J. Hotez, MD, PhD, Baylor College of Medicine.
    Summary: In 2011, Dr. Peter J. Hotez relocated to Houston to launch Baylor's National School of Tropical Medicine. He was shocked to discover that a number of neglected diseases often associated with developing countries were widespread in impoverished Texas communities. Despite the United States' economic prowess and first-world status, an estimated 12 million Americans living at the poverty level currently suffer from at least one neglected tropical disease, or NTD. Hotez concluded that the world's neglected diseases-which include tuberculosis, hookworm infection, lymphatic filariasis, Chagas disease, and leishmaniasis-are born first and foremost of extreme poverty. In this book, Hotez describes a new global paradigm known as "blue marble health," through which he asserts that poor people living in wealthy countries account for most of the world's poverty-related illness. By crafting public policy and relying on global partnerships to control or eliminate some of the world's worst poverty-related illnesses, Hotez believes, it is possible to eliminate life-threatening disease while at the same time creating unprecedented opportunities for science and diplomacy.

    Contents:
    A changing landscape in global health
    The "other diseases": the neglected tropical diseases
    Introducing blue marble health
    East Asia : China, Indonesia, Japan, and South Korea
    India
    Sub-Saharan Africa : Nigeria and South Africa
    Saudi Arabia and neighboring conflict zones of the Middle East and North African region
    The Americas : Argentina, Brazil, and Mexico
    Australia, Canada, European Union, Russian Federation, and Turkey
    United States of America
    The G20 : "a theory of justice"
    A framework for science and vaccine diplomacy
    Future directions.
    Limited to 3 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    José Luis Cort, Pablo Abaunza.
    Summary: This open access book is an original contribution to the knowledge on fishing and research associated with one of the most enigmatic fish of our seas: bluefin tuna, Thunnus thynnus (L.). Based on available evidence, it reconstructs the possible methods used to catch large spawners in the Strait of Gibraltar thousands of years ago and describes the much more recent overfishing that led to a great reduction in the catches of the trap fishery on the area and the disappearance of the northern European fisheries. It is the first book to relate the overfishing of juvenile fishes in certain areas to the decline of large spawners in other very distant areas, revealing one of the main underlying causes of this decline, which has remained a mystery to the fishing sector and scientists alike for over 50 years. This finding should serve to prevent similar cases from arising in the future.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Some characteristics of the bluefin tuna its geographical distribution, areas and fishing systems
    The bluefin tuna catch in the Strait of Gibraltar, a review of its history
    the present state of traps and fisheries research in the Strait of Gibraltar
    Bluefin tuna fishing in the Bay of Biscay
    Research related to bluefin tuna fishing in the Bay of Biscay
    A publication that sheds light on the disappearance of the eastern Atlantic bluefin tuna spawner in the 1960s.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Mitchell S. King, Martin S. Lipsky.
    Summary: Blueprints Family Medicine provides a complete, yet succinct review of the key concepts and topics that students need to know for a four- to six-week family medicine clerkship. With its concise, well-organized format, it serves as an ideal rapid reference for day-to-day patient care as well as subject examinations and board review. Updates throughout reflect the most current treatment and management strategies. A new section covers the 25 drugs most commonly prescribed in the primary care setting. Case vignettes demonstrate clinical applications. 100 USMLE-style review questions, with full explanations, facilitate exam preparation. Key Points at the end of each chapter summarize important information. Clinical boxes highlight clinical manifestations, differential diagnoses, and treatment options. A helpful appendix provides easy access to evidence-based resources.

    Contents:
    Part I. Principles of family medicine
    Elements of family medicine
    Patient communication and coordination of care – Screening – Immunizations
    Preventive care: 19 to 64 Years
    Preoperative evaluation
    Family violence: awareness and prevention
    Part II. Common signs and symptoms
    Allergies
    Back pain
    Chest pain – Constipation – Cough – Diarrhea
    Dizziness/Vertigo – Fatigue
    Headache – Heartburn – Hematuria
    Jaundice in adults
    Knee pain – Lymphadenopathy
    Nausea and vomiting --Painful joints
    Palpitations – Pharyngitis – Proteinuria
    Red eye
    Respiratory infections
    Shortness of breath
    Shoulder pain
    Somatic symptom disorder – Swelling
    Weight loss
    Part III. Common medical conditions – Acne
    Alcohol and substance abuse – Anemia – Anxiety – Asthma
    Atopic dermatitis
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Congestive heart failure – Depression
    Diabetes Mellitus Type 2 – Diverticulitis
    Human immunodeficiency virus
    Hypertension – Hyperthyroidism – Hypothyroidism – Obesity
    Oral health – Osteoporosis
    Prostate disease
    Sexually transmitted diseases
    Skin infections
    Tobacco abuse
    Urinary Tract Infection – Urticaria
    Part IV. Women’s health
    Abnormal pap smear
    Abnormal vaginal bleeding – Amenorrhea
    Breast Masses
    Contraception – Vaginitis
    Part V. Maternity care -Preconception counseling and prenatal care
    Common medical problems in pregnancy
    Postpartum care
    Part VI. Care for infants, children, and adolescents
    Preventive care: newborn to 5 years
    Preventive care: 5 to 12 years
    Adolescent medicine
    Common medical problems in children
    Behavioral issues in children
    Fever in children
    Otitis media
    Preparticipation evaluation
    Part VII. Care for older adults
    Preventive care: 65 years and older
    Geriatric assessment
    Common medical problems in older adults – Dementia
    Urinary incontinence
    Nursing home and end-of-life care
    Part VIII. Common medications
    Analgesics: nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory and opioid medications – Antibiotics
    Cardiovascular medications
    Endocrine medications
    Gastrointestinal medications
    Psychiatric medications
    Other medications.
  • Digital
    Vincent B. Young, MD, PhD, Associate Professor, Departments of Internal Medicine and Microbiology & Immunology, University of Michigan Medical School, Ann Arbor, Michigan, William A. Kormos, MD, MPH, Instructor in Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Davoren A. Chick, MD, FACP, Clinical Associate Professor, Departments of Internal Medicine and Learning Health Sciences, University of Michigan Medical School, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
    Summary: One of the best selling and most highly regarded volumes in the Blueprints series, this book provides a concise review of what students need to know in their rotations or the Boards. Each chapter is brief and includes pedagogical features such as bold key words, tables, figures, and key points boxes. This edition has been reorganized to follow the Clerkship Directors in Internal Medicine guidelines, and includes a new section on neurology, case studies, and additional tables and figures. A question-and-answer section at the end of the book includes 100 board-format questions with complete rationales for each answer choice.

    Contents:
    pt. I, Cardiovascular :
    Chest pain
    Shock
    Coronary heart disease and chronic angina
    Acute coronary syndromes
    Heart failure
    Bradyarrhythmias
    Tachyarrhythmias
    Hypertension
    Valvular heart disease
    Vascular disease
    Syncope. pt. II, Respiratory :
    Dyspnea
    Cough
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Asthma
    Pulmonary embolism
    Interstitial lung disease
    Pleural effusions
    Lung cancer. pt. III, Renal :
    Acid-base disturbances
    Fluid and electrolytes
    Acute Kidney injury
    Chronic kidney disease
    Glomerular disease
    Nephrolithiasis
    Hematuria. pt. IV, Infectious disease :
    Fever and rash
    Pneumonia
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Urinary tract infections
    Tuberculosis
    Gastroenteritis
    Infective endocarditis
    Meningitis
    HIV part I: primary care of the HIV-infected patient
    HIV part II: prophylaxis and treatment of opportunistic infections in HIV. pt. V, Gastrointestinal :
    Abdominal pain
    Diarrhea
    Dyspepsia
    Inflammatory bowel disease
    Hepatitis
    Cirrhosis
    Cholestatic liver disease
    Pancreatitis
    Colorectal cancer. pt. VI, Endocrine :
    Weight loss
    Hyperthyroidism
    Hypothyroidism
    Diabetes mellitus
    Hypercalcemia
    Adrenal insufficiency
    Cushing Syndrome
    Pituitary disease
    Nutritional disorders
    Dyslipidemia. pt. VII, Rheumatology :
    Acute monoarticular arthritis
    Low back pain
    Rheumatoid arthritis
    Seronegative spondyloarthropathies
    Connective tissue diseases
    Vasculitis
    Amyloidosis. pt. VIII, Hematology/Oncology :
    Anemia
    Hemolytic anemia
    Adenopathy
    Bleeding disorders
    Breast cancer
    Prostate cancer
    Leukemia
    Lymphoma. pt. IX, Neurology
    Headache
    Delirium
    Dizziness
    Dementia
    Stroke
    Seizures.
  • Digital
    Frank W. Drislane [and others].
    Contents:
    The neurologic examination
    Neurologic investigations
    The approach to coma and altered consciousness
    Neuro-ophthalmology
    The approach to weakness
    The sensory system
    Dizziness, vertigo, and syncope
    Ataxia and gait disorders
    Urinary and sexual dysfunction
    Headache and facial pain
    Aphasia and other disorders of higher cortical function
    Dementia
    Sleep disorders
    Vascular disease
    Seizures
    Movement disorders
    Head trauma
    Systemic and metabolic disorders
    Central nervous system tumors
    Demyelinating diseases of the central nervous system
    Infections of the nervous system
    Disorders of the spinal cord
    The peripheral nervous system
    Disorders of the neuromuscular junction and skeletal muscle
    Pediatric neurology.
  • Digital
    Frank W. Drislane, Alexandra Hovaguimian, Andrew W. Tarulli, Aimee K. Boegle, Courtney McIIduff, Louis R. Caplan.
    Contents:
    The neurologic examination
    Neurologic investigations
    The approach to coma and altered consciousness
    Neuro-ophthalmology
    The approach to weakness
    The sensory system
    Dizziness, vertigo, and syncope
    Ataxia and gait disorders
    Urinary and sexual dysfunction
    Headache and facial pain
    Aphasia and other disorders of higher cortical function
    Dementia
    Sleep disorders
    Vascular disease
    Seizures
    Movement disorders
    Head trauma
    Systemic and metabolic disorders
    Central nervous system tumors
    Demyelinating diseases of the central nervous system
    Infections of the nervous system
    Disorders of the spinal cord
    Radiculopathy, plexopathy, and peripheral neuropathy
    Disorders of the neuromuscular junction and skeletal muscle
    Pediatric neurology.
  • Digital
    Tamara L. Callahan, Aaron B. Caughey.
    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: pt. I OBSTETRICS
    1. Pregnancy and Prenatal Care
    2. Early Pregnancy Complications
    3. Prenatal Screening, Diagnosis, and Treatment
    4. Normal Labor and Delivery
    5. Antepartum Hemorrhage
    6.Complications of Labor and Delivery
    7. Fetal Complications of Pregnancy
    8. Hypertension and Pregnancy
    9. Diabetes During Pregnancy
    10. Infectious Diseases in Pregnancy
    11. Other Medical Complications of Pregnancy
    12. Postpartum Care and Complications
    pt. II GYNECOLOGY
    13. Benign Disorders of the Lower Genital Tract
    14. Benign Disorders of the Upper Genital Tract
    15. Endometriosis and Adenomyosis
    16. Infections of the Lower Female Reproductive Tract
    17. Infections of the Upper Female Reproductive Tract and Systemic Infections
    18. Pelvic Organ Prolapse
    19. Urinary Incontinence
    20. Puberty, the Menstrual Cycle, and Menopause
    21. Amenorrhea
    22. Abnormalities of the Menstrual Cycle
    23. Hirsutism and Virilism
    24. Contraception and Sterilization
    25. Termination of Pregnancy
    26. Infertility and Assisted Reproductive Technologies
    27. Vulvar and Vaginal Neoplasia
    28. Cervical Neoplasia and Cervical Cancer
    29. Endometrial Cancer
    30. Ovarian and Fallopian Tube Tumors
    31. Gestational Trophoblastic Disease
    32. Benign Breast Disease and Breast Cancer.
  • Digital
    Bradley S. Marino, Katie S. Fine.
    Summary: "Among all the WK clerkship series, Blueprints remains the best-known among medical students. While no individual Blueprints title has sold as consistently as Step-Up to Medicine, the series has maintained a consistent following over the years. In the 2016 clerkship market research study conducted through our market research team, the only series that was mentioned as frequently by both students and clerkship directors was McGraw-Hill's Case Files series"--Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    General pediatrics
    Neonatal medicine
    Adolescent medicine
    Nutrition
    Fluid, electrolyte, and pH management
    Pulmonology
    Infectious disease
    Immunology, allergy, and rheumatology
    Neurology
    Dermatology
    Cardiology
    Hematology
    Oncology
    Gastroenterology
    Endocrinology
    Orthopedics
    Nephrology
    Urology
    Genetic disorders
    Emergency medicine: the acutely ill and injured child.
  • Digital
    Michael J. Murphy, Ronald L. Cowan.
    Contents:
    Psychotic disorders
    Bipolar disorders
    Depressive disorders
    Anxiety disorders
    Trauma- and stressor- related disorders
    Obessive-compulsive and related disorders
    Eating disorders
    Neurodevelopmental disorders and child and adolescent psychiatry
    Neurocognitive disorders
    Substance-related disorders
    Personality disorders
    Miscellaneous disorders
    Special clinical topics
    Legal issues
    Antipsychotics
    Antidepressants and somatic therapies
    Mood stabilizers
    Anxiolytics
    Miscellaneous medications
    Major adverse drug reactions
    Psychological theory and psychotherapy.
  • Digital
    editors-in-chief, Charles D. Bluestone, MD, FACS, FAAP, Distinguished Professor of Otolaryngology, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Division of Pediatric Otolaryngology, Children's Hospital of Pittsburgh of UPMC, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvannia ; Jeffrey P. Simons, MD, FACS, FAAP, Associate Professor of Otolaryngology, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Divisiono of Pediatric Otolaryngology, Children's Hospital of Pittsburgh of UPMC, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvannia ; Gerald B. Healy, MD, FACS, FRCS (Eng), FRCS (Irs), Professor of Otology & Laryngology, Harvard Medical School, Emeritus Healy chair in Otolarynoglogy, Boston Children's Hospital, Emeritus Surgeon-in-Chief, Boston Children's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Past President, American College of Surgeons.
    Contents:
    Section 1 Basic science/general pediatric otolaryngology
    Section 2 Ear and related structures
    Section 3 The Nose, paranasal sinuses, face, and orbit
    Section 4 The Mouth, pharynx, and esophagus
    Section 5 The Airway
    Section 6 The Head and neck
    Section 7 Communication disorders.
    Digital Access R2Library v.1-2 , 2014
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, William R. Jarnigan ; associate editors, Peter J. Allen, William C. Chapman, Michael I. D'Angelica, Ronald P. DeMatteo, Richard Kinh Gian Do, Jean-Nicolas Vauthey ; editor emeritus, Leslie H. Blumgart.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    Rizwan Ahmad Khan, Shagufta Wahab, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the epidemiology, mechanism, risk, various types of injuries, and practical approaches to treating children who have sustained blunt abdominal trauma. It includes dedicated chapters on each key aspect of pediatric blunt abdominal injuries, and explains in detail primary resuscitation and ancillary care for pediatric abdominal trauma. A separate chapter on imaging and interventional imaging helps pediatric caregivers select the right modality in the management of these patients. In addition, the book covers the management of hollow viscus injury and solid organ injury following blunt abdominal trauma. The content is supplemented with detailed flowcharts wherever required to help familiarize readers with the indications and to assist them in surgical decision-making. The book offers a valuable guide for practicing pediatric surgeons, residents in pediatric surgery and trauma surgeons, as well as for general surgeons, general surgery residents, practicing pediatricians and general physicians.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    edited by Beth Faiman, PhD, MSN, APRN-BC, AOCN.
    Contents:
    Basic concepts and indications for transplantation
    Types of transplants and sources of stem cells
    Pretransplant issues
    Transplant preparative regimens, cellular infusion, acute complications, and engraftment
    Graft-versus-host disease
    Post-transplant issues
    Survivorship issues
    Professional practice.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RD123.5 .B68 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Gregory Schwaid.
    Summary: Board Review in Preventive Medicine and Public Health prepares physicians for their initial and recertification board exams in the related specialties of preventive, occupational and aerospace medicine. Formatted in a question and answer based style that imitates material on specialty exams, each question is linked to a detailed answer. The book contains over 640 question and answer sets covering areas such as general public health, health management, health law, community health, infectious disease, clinical preventive medicine, occupational medicine, aerospace medicine, environmental medicine, correctional (prison) medicine, emergency preparedness, epidemiology and biostatistics. The book is an essential board preparation for physicians with a background in the fields of preventive medicine, occupational medicine, and aerospace medicine. It is also useful for medical students, public health students and those wishing to gain an understanding of the key points in these fields.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Carlos Ayala, Brad Spellberg.
    Contents:
    Internal medicine
    Surgery
    Obstetrics and gynecology
    Pediatrics
    Family medicine
    Psychiatry
    Neurology
    Dermatology
    Ophthalmology
    Radiology
    Emergency medicine
    Ethics/law/clinical studies.
  • Digital
    edited by Henry C. Lukaski.
    Contents:
    Body composition in perspective / Henry Lukaski
    Assessment of human body composition : methods and limitations / Hannes Gatterer, Kai Schenk, and Martin Burtscher
    Assessment of muscle mass / Donald Dengel, Christiana J Raymond, and Tyler Bosch
    Hydration status and performance / Ronald Maughan and Susan Shirreffs
    Physical activity on growth and development of youth / Robert Malina and Manuel J. Coelho e Silva
    Anthropometry in physical performance and health / Arthur Stewart and Tim Ackland
    Physical activity and adipose tissue redistribution in obese adults / Brittany P. Hammond, Andrea M. Brennan, and Robert Ross
    Physical activity and body composition changes in overweight and obese children / Scott Going, Jennifer Bea, and Joshua Farr
    Body composition changes with training : methodological implications / Luis Sardinha and Diana Santos
    Endurance athletes / Jordan Moon and Kristina Kendall
    Speed, power and strength athletes / David David Fukuda, Jeffery Stout, and Jay Hoffman
    Weight-sensitive sports / Analiza Silva, Diana Santos, and Catarina Matias
    Military / Karl Friedl
    Body composition and public safety : the industrial athlete / Paul Davis and Mark Abel
    Dietary protein and physical training effects on body composition and physical performance / Michaela C Devries, Sara Y Oikawa, and Stuart Phillips
    Supplements, body composition and performance / Karl Friedl
    Diet and exercise approaches for reversal of exercise-associated amenorrhea / Lynn Cialdella Kam and Melinda Manore.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] David L. Coy, Eugene Lin, Jeffrey P. Kanne.
    Contents:
    The physics of computed tomography
    CT radiation dose and management
    Contrast administration
    Mediastinum
    Lung
    Airways
    Pleura, diaphragm, and chest wall
    Heart and thoracic aorta
    Liver and biliary
    Pancreas
    Kidneys, ureters, and bladder
    Adrenal glands
    Spleen
    Gastrointestinal tract
    Peritoneum and peritoneal spaces
    Retroperitoneum, vessels, and nodes
    Pelvis
    Trauma.
  • Digital
    Massimo Cuzzolaro, Secondo Fassino, editors.
    Summary: This book equips readers with the knowledge required to improve diagnosis and treatment and to implement integrated prevention programs in patients with eating and weight disorders. It does so by providing a comprehensive, up-to-date review of research findings and theoretical assumptions concerning the interface and interactions between body image and such disorders as anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, binge eating disorder, other specified feeding and eating disorders, orthorexia nervosa, overweight, and obesity. After consideration of issues of definition and classification, the opening part of the book examines the concept of body image from a variety of viewpoints. A series of chapters are then devoted to the assessment of the multidimensional construct “body image”, to dysmorphophobia/body dysmorphic disorder, and to muscle dysmorphia. The third part discusses body image in people suffering from different eating disorders and/or overweight or obesity, and two final chapters focus on body image in the integrated prevention of eating disorders and obesity, and cultural differences regarding body image. The book will be of interest to all health professionals who work in the fields of psychiatry, clinical psychology, eating disorders, obesity, body image, adolescence, public health, and prevention.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Gabriele Krombach, Andreas Mahnken ; translator, Terry Telger.
    Contents:
    Imaging of various body regions
    Head and neck
    Mediastinum
    Heart and pericardium
    Major vessels
    Lung and pleura
    Breast
    Liver
    Gallbladder and biliary tract
    Pancreas
    Gastrointestinal tract
    Spleen and lymphatic system
    Adrenal glands
    Kidney and urinary tract
    Female pelvis
    Male pelvis.
  • Digital/Print
    Sonya Renee Taylor.
    Summary: The Body Is Not an Apology The Power of Radical Self-Love Against a global backdrop of war, social upheaval, and personal despair, there is a growing sense of urgency to challenge the systems of oppression that dehumanize bodies and strip us of our shared humanity. Rather than feel helpless in the face of oppression, world-renowned activist, performance poet, and author Sonya Renee Taylor teaches us how to turn to the power of radical self-love in her new book, The Body Is Not an Apology. Radical self-love is the guiding framework that transforms the learned self-hatred of our bodies and the prejudices we have about other people's bodies into a vision of compassion, equity, and justice. In a revolutionary departure from the corporate self-help and body-positivity movement, Taylor forges the inextricable bond between radical self-love and social justice. The first step is recognizing that we have all been indoctrinated into a system of body shame that profits off of our self-hatred. When we ask ourselves, "Who benefits from our collective shame?" we can begin to make the distinction between the messages we are receiving about our bodies or other bodies and the truth. This book moves us beyond our all-too-often hidden lives, where we are easily encouraged to forget that we are whole humans having whole human experiences in our bodies alongside others. Radical self-love encourages us to embark on a personal journey of transformation with thoughtful reflection on the origins of our minds and bodies as a source of strength. In doing this, we not only learn to reject negative messages about ourselves but begin to thwart the very power structures that uphold them. Systems of oppression thrive off of our inability to make peace with bodies and difference. Radical self-love not only dismantles shame and self-loathing in us but has the power to dismantle global systems of injustice-because when we make peace with our bodies, only then do we have the capacity to truly make peace with the bodies of others.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2018
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BF575.S37 T39 2018
    1
  • Print
    Bessel A. van der Kolk, M.D.
    Summary: An expert on traumatic stress outlines an approach to healing, explaining how traumatic stress affects brain processes and how to use innovative treatments to reactivate the mind's abilities to trust, engage others, and experience pleasure. --Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Prologue : Facing trauma
    Part I. The rediscovery of trauma : Lessons from Vietnam veterans
    Revolutions in understanding mind and brain
    Looking into the brain: the neuroscience revolution
    Part II. This is your brain on trauma : Running for your life: the anatomy of survival
    Body-brain connections
    Losing your body, losing your self
    Part III. The minds of children : Getting on the same wavelength: attachment and attunement
    Trapped in relationships: the cost of abuse and neglect
    What's love got to do with it?
    Developmental trauma: the hidden epidemic
    Part IV. The imprint of trauma : Uncovering secrets: the problem of traumatic memory
    The unbearable heaviness of remembering
    Part V. Paths to recovery : Healing from trauma: owning your self
    Language: miracle and tyranny
    Letting go of the past: EMDR
    Learning to inhabit your body: yoga
    Putting the pieces together: self-leadership
    Filling in the holes: creating structures
    Applied neuroscience : rewiring the brain fear-driven mind with brain/computer interface technology
    Finding your voice: communal rhythms and theater
    Epilogue : Choices to be made
    Appendix : Consensus proposed criteria for developmental trauma disorder.
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Summary: The dynamics of body metabolism are changed in the disease process and interact with physical activity. The alteration of metabolism and its consequences raise the need for simple and reliable methods for assessment of body composition. The chapters aim to investigate various interacting components converging on metabolic changes in lung and muscle tissues taking into consideration the drug effects. The effects of exercise and nutritional status are dealt with at a great extent.

    Contents:
    Body composition in heavy smokers / O. Rom-- Metabolic and immunological consequences of vitamin D deficiency in obese children / B. Pyrz̀ak
    Markers of bone metabolism in children with Nephrotic Syndrome treated with corticosteroids / Małgorzata. Pańczyk-Tomaszewska
    Endurance training and the risk of bronchial asthma in female cross-country skiers / A. Żebrowska
    Effects of inspiratory muscle training on resistance to fatigue of respiratory muscles during exhaustive exercise / M.O. Segizbaeva
    Nutritional status in chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and systemic sclerosis / D. Mękal
    Gradual versus continuous Increase of load in ergometric tests / A.M. Preisser
    Evaluation of volumetric changes in differential diagnosis of brain atrophy and active hydrocephalus / E. Szczepek.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jeonhee Jang.
    Contents:
    Body reshaping for health and beauty
    A first look at the meridian system in TCM
    Who can benefit from this treatment?
    Body posture and homeostasis
    Six body types
    Anatomical approach type M1, M2, M3
    Muscle meridian therapy and skin cutaneous therapy
    Treatment methods
    Specific clinical cautions and application.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Jeffery S. Orringer, Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam.
    Summary: Improve your technique, treat patients with confidence, and obtain optimal results using today's most advanced body shaping treatments with guidance from Body Shaping: Skin, Fat and Cellulite, a volume in the Procedures in Cosmetic Dermatology Series. Renowned cosmetic dermatologists-Drs. Orringer, Alam, and Dover-provide you with procedural how-to's and step-by-step advice on proper techniques, pitfalls, and tricks of the trade, equipping you to successfully incorporate the very latest for skin tightening, fat reduction, and sculpting procedures into your busy practice!

    Contents:
    Skin laxity : anatomy, etiology, and treatment indications
    Lasers and lights : skin tightening
    Radiofrequency treatment : skin tightening
    Micro-focused ultrasound : skin tightening
    Subcutaneous fat : anatomy, physiology, and treatment indications
    Cryolipolysis : fat reduction
    Radiofrequency treatment : fat reduction
    Ultrasound treatment : fat reduction
    Liposuction, ultrasound-assisted and powered : fat reduction
    Laser lipolysis : fat reduction
    Injectable fat-reducing therapies : fat reduction
    Cellulite : anatomy, etiology, treatment indications
    Massage/mechanical techniques : cellulite reduction
    Lasers and lights : cellulite reduction
    Radiofrequency and ultrasound : cellulite reduction
    Subcision : cellulite reduction.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Werner Zimmerli.
    Contents:
    Microbiology of bone and joint infections
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of antibiotics in bone
    Preclinical models of infection in bone and joint surgery
    Native joint arthritis in children
    Native joint arthritis
    Septic arthritis of axial joints
    Periprosthetic joint infection : general aspects
    Periprosthetic joint infection after total hip and knee arthroplasty
    Periprosthetic joint infection after shoulder arthroplasty
    Periprosthetic joint infection after elbow arthroplasty
    Periprosthetic joint infection after ankle arthroplasty
    Osteomyelitis : classification
    Osteomyelitis in children
    Acute osteomyelitis in adults
    Subacute osteomyelitis : tuberculous and brucellar vertebral osteomyelitis
    Chronic osteomyelitis in adults
    Diabetic foot osteomyelitis
    Osteomyelitis of the jaws
    Implant-associated osteomyelitis of long bones
    Implant-associated vertebral osteomyelitis
    Postoperative sternum osteomyelitis.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    editor, Werner Zimmerli.
    Summary: "The prevalence of most bone and joint infections is steadily increasing, mainly due to the rising life expectancy of the population, and the increasing use of bone fixation devices and prosthetic joints. For frequent infectious diseases, such as respiratory tract, urinary tract and bloodstream infections, many diagnostic and therapeutic aspects have been studied in a controlled fashion [e.g. 1-3]. In contrast, in the field of bone and joint infections, randomized controlled trials are rare. Exceptions are a randomized controlled study on the role of rifampin in patients with orthopedic implant-associated infections, and a controlled trial comparing two different durations of antibiotic treatment in patients with vertebral osteomyelitis [4, 5]. Therefore, diagnostic and therapeutic advice has to be based mainly on individual clinical expert knowledge and observational studies [6-10]. The optimal diagnostic and therapeutic management of bone and joint infections needs a special know-how in different fields of medicine. Many physicians have only limited clinical experience, since arthritis and osteomyelitis are rare infectious diseases. Therefore, a multidisciplinary approach to these infections is desirable. Only for a few topics, internationally accepted guidelines for the management of bone and joint infections are available [11-13]. In addition, publications on the clinical practice comprising different aspects of these infections are scarce. The aim of this book is to close this gap with texts from a multidisciplinary team of experts in the field. Indeed, specialists in Microbiology, Clinical Pharmacology, Preclinical Research, Pediatrics, Pediatric and Adult Orthopedic Surgery, Infectious Diseases, and Cardiovascular Surgery contributed to this book. This broad spectrum of expertise made it possible to cover a wide range of pathophysiological, epidemiological, diagnostic and therapeutic aspects of bone and joint infection. The principal focus of the book is on clinical practice. It should enable clinicians managing patients according to the best available evidence"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Diagnostic Approach in Bone and Joint Infections
    Unusual Microorganisms in Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Identification of Pathogens in Bone and Joint Infections by Non-Culture Techniques
    Bacteriophages for treatment of biofilm infections
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Antibiotics in Bone
    Preclinical Models of Infection in Bone and Joint Surgery
    Native Joint Arthritis in Children
    Native Joint Arthritis in Adults
    Septic Arthritis of Axial Joints
    Periprosthetic Joint Infection : General Aspects
    Periprosthetic Joint Infection after Total Hip and Knee Arthroplasty
    Periprosthetic Joint Infection after Shoulder Arthroplasty
    Periprosthetic Joint Infection after Elbow Arthroplasty
    Periprosthetic Joint Infection after Ankle Arthroplasty
    Osteomyelitis : Classification
    Osteomyelitis in Children
    Acute Osteomyelitis in Adults
    Subacute Osteomyelitis : Tuberculous and Brucellar Vertebral Osteomyelitis
    Chronic Osteomyelitis in Adults
    Diabetic Foot Osteomyelitis
    Osteomyelitis of the Jaws
    Fracture-related Infection of Long Bones
    Implant-Associated Vertebral Osteomyelitis
    Postoperative Sternal Osteomyelitis.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Hans-Jörg Oestern, Otmar Trentz, Selman Uranues.
    Summary: All European countries, including those that have recently joined the European Union or are candidates for membership, currently show a clear trend towards an increasing number of accidental injuries. This holds true for a range of injuries, including accidents among the elderly, sports injuries, and trauma due to traffic accidents. The increase in the number of injuries is accompanied by rising expectations among patients, who anticipate good functional results even after serious injuries. Despite these developments, trauma surgery is not yet established as an independent field in all European countries. Against this background, there is a clear need for a book that covers the state of the art in trauma surgery. This volume, which focuses on bone and joint injuries orthopedic trauma is intended to help to meet this need. It will also serve to harmonize the practice of trauma surgery within the European Union and to prepare for the UEMS EBSQ trauma surgery.

    Contents:
    1. Rotator Cuff Tears / Martin Jaeger, Kaywan Izadpanah, and Norbert P. Südkamp
    2. Posttraumatic Shoulder Instability / Martin Jaeger, Kaywan Izadpanah, and Norbert P. Südkamp
    3. Proximal Humeral Fractures / Martin Jaeger, Kaywan Izadpanah, and Norbert P. Südkamp
    4. Treatment of Acromioclavicular Joint Dislocation / Klemens Horst, Thomas Dienstknecht, and Hans- Christoph Pape
    5. Clavicle Fractures / Hans-Jörg Oestern
    6. Scapula Fractures / Jan Friederichs and Volker Bühren
    7. Humeral Shaft Fractures / Pol M. Rommens
    8. Distal Humerus Fractures / Klaus J. Burkhart, Pol M. Rommens, and Lars Peter Müller
    9. Coronoid Fractures / Klaus J. Burkhart, Pol M. Rommens, and Lars Peter Müller
    10. Olecranon Fractures / Tobias E. Nowak and Pol M. Rommens
    11. Radial Head Fractures / Klaus J. Burkhart, Pol M. Rommens, and Lars Peter Müller
    12. Forearm Shaft Fractures / Hans-Jörg Oestern
    13. Distal Radius Fractures / Hans-Jörg Oestern
    14. Management of Hand Injuries / Susanne Hellmich and P.M. Vogt
    15. Cervical Spine Injuries / Christoph Josten and Jan-Sven Jarvers
    16. Spine / Markus Schultheiss, Daniel Gulkin, and Florian Gebhard
    17. Pelvic and Acetabular Fractures / Reiner Wirbel and Tim Pohlemann
    18. Pipkin Fractures / Vilmos Vécsei
    19. Femoral Neck Fractures / Vilmos Vécsei
    20. Pertrochanteric Fractures / Vilmos Vécsei
    21. Femoral Shaft Fractures / Vilmos Vécsei
    22. Distal Femur Fractures / Arne Berner and Michael Schütz
    23. Patella Fractures / Hans-Jörg Oestern
    24. Knee Ligament Injuries / Phillip Forkel and Wolf Petersen
    25. Tibial Plateau Fractures / Philipp Kobbe and Hans-Christoph Pape
    26. Tibial Shaft Fractures / Philipp Lichte and Hans-Christoph Pape
    27. Fractures of the Tibial Pilon / Richard Martin Sellei and Hans-Christoph Pape
    28. Foot and Ankle Injuries / Susanne Rein, Ken Jin Tan, Stefan Rammelt, and Hans Zwipp
    29. Pediatric Fractures and Dislocations / Christoph Nau, Dorien Schneidmüller, and Ingo Marzi.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    by Leonard W. Ely and John Francis Cowan.
    Access via Leland Stanford Junior University publications. 1916; 25
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    1916
    SHELVED UNDER: Stanford University publications. University series [25].
    1916
    No. 25 1916 c.2 Shelved under Collection of photographs of John Francis Cowan.
    8.28[b] 1916
  • Digital
    edited by Andrew L. Folpe, G. Petur Nielsen ; series editor, John R. Goldblum.
    Contents:
    1. Approach to bone and soft tissue tumors / Matthew T. Houdek
    2. Adjuvant techniques: immunohistochemistry, cytogenetics, and molecular genetics / Gregory W. Charville
    3. Fibroblastic and myofibroblastic tumors / Elizabeth G. Demicco
    4. Fibrohistiocytic tumors / Elizabeth G. Demicco
    5. Adipocytic tumors / David Creytens
    6. Smooth muscle tumors / Alexander K. Nobori and Sarah M. Dry
    7. Skeletal muscle tumors / Raf Sciot
    8. Tumors of perivascular cells / Leona Doyle
    9. Gastrointestinal stromal tumor / Adrian Marino-Enriquez
    10. Vascular tumors of soft tissue and bone / Yin Pun Hung, G. Petur Nielsen and Andrew L. Folpe
    11. Nerve sheath tumors / Karen J. Fritchie
    12. Matrix-forming tumors of soft tissue / Jen-Chieh Lee and Hsuan-Ying Huang
    13. Tumors of synovial and tenosynovial tissue / Elizabeth G. Demicco and G. Petur Nielsen
    14. Undifferentiated small round cell sarcomas of bone and soft tissue / Brendan C. Dickson
    15. Mesenchymal tumors of miscellaneous type or uncertain lineage / Andrew L. Folpe
    16. Bone-forming tumors / Daniel P. Cassidy and Andrew E. Rosenberg
    17. Cartilage-forming tumors / Darcy A. Kerr and G. Petur Nielsen
    18. Fibroblastic and fibrohistiocytic tumors / Daniel Baumhoer
    19. Hematolymphoid neoplasms of bone / Judith A. Ferry
    20. Giant cell tumor of bone / Akihiko Yoshida
    21. Notochordal cell tumors / Angela R. Shih and G. Petur Nielsen
    22. Osteofibrous dysplasia/adamantinoma / Alyaa Al-Ibraheemi
    23. Cystic tumors of bone / Scott E. Kilpatrick and John D. Reith
    24. Fibrous dysplasia of bone / Scott E. Kilpatrick and John D. Reith
    25. Metastases / John D. Reith and Scott E. Kilpatrick.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Sumon Nandi, Selvon F. St. Clair.
    Summary: This book is a complete guide to the essentials of orthopedics. Covers the full range of conditions, injuries, and diseases encountered in operating and emergency room settings, including fractures, dislocations, bone/joint infections, and spinal cord injuries.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Anatomy Essentials
    Upper Extremity
    Shoulder
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Arm
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Elbow
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Forearm
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Wrist
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Hand
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Lower Extremity
    Pelvis
    Bones Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Hip
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Femur
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Knee
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Lower Leg
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Ankle
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Foot
    Bones
    Muscles
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Spine
    Cervical Spine
    Bones
    Neurovascular Structures Surgical Approach (Fig. 1.56)
    Thoracic Spine
    Bones
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Lumbar Spine
    Bones
    Neurovascular Structures
    Surgical Approach
    Sacrum
    Bones
    Neurovascular Structures
    Chapter 2: Physical Exam Fundamentals
    Definition
    Principles
    Upper Extremity
    Shoulder
    Elbow
    Hand and Wrist
    Lower Extremity
    Hip and Pelvis
    Knee
    Foot and Ankle
    Spine
    Chapter 3: Managing the Floor
    Postoperative Check/Rounding
    Lab Abnormalities
    Anemia
    Hypoglycemia
    Hyponatremia
    Hyperkalemia
    Hypokalemia
    Hypotension Hypoxia
    Tachycardia
    Fever
    Low Urine Output (Oliguria)
    Delirium
    Seizure
    Chest Pain
    Pain Management
    Wound Issues
    Erythema
    Drainage
    Dehiscence
    Chapter 4: Orthopedic Emergencies
    Definition
    Septic Joint
    Definition
    Why Is this Emergent?
    Causes
    Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Suppurative Flexor Tenosynovitis
    Definition
    Why Is this Emergent?
    Causes
    Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Necrotizing Fasciitis
    Definition
    Why Is this Emergent?
    Causes
    Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Compartment Syndrome
    Definition
    Why Is this Emergent?
    Causes Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Open Fracture
    Definition
    Why Is this Emergent?
    Causes
    Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Cauda Equina Syndrome
    Definition
    Why Is this Emergent?
    Causes
    Diagnosis
    Treatment
    Chapter 5: Emergency Room Consultations
    Emergency Room Consults
    High-Energy Trauma Patient and Fracture Management
    Pediatric Fractures
    Dislocations
    Spinal Cord Injury (SCI)
    Tendon Rupture/Laceration
    Fingertip Amputation
    Postoperative Complications
    Other Common ER Consults:
    Chapter 6: Sports Injuries
    Definition
    Team Physician Responsibilities
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Dominique Heymann.
    Summary: Bone Cancer: Bone Sarcomas and Bone Metastases - From Bench to Bedside, Third Edition comprehensively investigates key discoveries in the field of bone biology. New aspects of bone cancer biology are treated in new chapters covering exosomes, autophagy, and metabolism. These have led to the development of entirely new areas for investigation, such as therapies which combine surgery and biological approaches. The Third Edition expands on the original overview of bone cancer development (physiology and pathophysiology), with 40% new material. Each chapter has been written by internationally recognized specialists on the bone cancer microenvironment, bone metastases, osteoclast biology in bone cancer, proteomics, bone niche, circulating tumor cells, and clinical trials. Given the global prevalence of breast and prostate cancers, knowledge of bone biology has become essential for everyone within the medical and cancer research communities. Bone Cancer: Bone Sarcomas and Bone Metastases - From Bench to Bedside continues to offer the only translational reference to cover all aspects of primary bone cancer and bone metastases. This revision opens the door to myeloma with two short chapters dedicated to this bone-associated disease.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Dominique Heymann.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of primary bone tumors and economical aspects of bone metastases
    Tumor: bone interactions: there is no place like bone
    Stem cell niches in the bone: bone marrow organ and their significance for hematopoietic and non-hematopoietic cancer
    Deregulation of osteoblast differentiation in primary bone cancers
    Contribution of osteoclasts to the bone: tumor niche
    Involvement of osteocytes in cancer bone niche
    Role of mesenchymal stem cells in bone cancer; initiation, propagation and metastasis
    Gap junction in bone remodeling and in primary bone tumors: osteosarcoma and Ewing sarcoma
    Macrophages and pathophysiology of bone cancers
    Cytokines and bone cancers
    Technical aspects: how do we best prepare bone samples for proper histological analysis?
    Bone remodeling markers and bone cancer
    Cancer stem cells in representative bone tumors: osteosarcoma, Ewing sarcoma and metastases from breast and prostate carcinomas
    Homeobox genes from the Dlx family and bone cancers
    MicroRNA implication in therapeutic resistance and metastatic dissemination of bone-associated tumors
    Hypoxia and angiogenesis: from primary tumor to bone metastasis
    Modeling osteosarcoma: in vitro and in vivo approaches
    Stemness markers of osteosarcoma
    Molecular pathology of osteosarcoma
    Gene and proteomic profiling of osteosarcoma
    Ewing sarcoma family of tumors
    Biology of Ewing sarcoma
    Osteoclast-rich lesions of bone: a clinical and molecular overview
    Markers for bone sarcomas
    Margins and bone tumors: what are we talking about?
    Cytogenetics of bone tumors
    Genetic aspects of bone tumors
    Cytogenetic and molecular genetic alterations in bone tumors
    Genetics of giant cell tumors of bone
    Mammalian models of bone sarcomas
    Zebrafish models for studying bone cancers: mutants, transgenic fish and embryos
    Imaging of bone sarcomas
    New therapeutic targets in Ewing sarcoma: from pre-clinical proof-of-concept to clinical trials
    Therapeutic approaches for bone sarcomas
    Chondrosarcoma of bone: diagnosis and therapy
    Apoptosis and drug resistance in malignant bone tumors
    Giant cell tumors of bone
    EMT process in bone metastasis
    Histopathology of skeletal metastases
    Disseminated tumor cells in bone marrow of cancer patients
    MicroRNA-mediated regulation of bone metastasis formation: from primary tumors to skeleton
    Myeloma and osteoclast relationship
    In vivo models used in studies of bone metastases
    Interventional radiologic techniques in management of bone tumors
    Diagnosis of bone metastases in urological malignancies : an update
    Pre-clinical molecular imaging of "the seed and the soil" in bone metastasis
    Mechanisms and management of bone cancer pain
    Bone cancer: current opinion in palliative care
    Involvement of sympathetic nerves in bone metastasis
    Pain control with palliative radiotherapy in patients with bone metastases
    Cellular and molecular actions of bisphosphonates
    The use of nitrogen-bisphosphonates to capture the potent anti-tumor arsenal of human peripheral blood [gamma delta] T cells for the treatment of bone cancer metastasis
    Systemic treatment of bone metastases in castration-resistant prostate cancer (CRPC): pre-clinical to clinical point of view
    A multi-targeted approach to treating bone metastases
    Bone metastases in prostate cancer: pathophysiology, clinical complications, actual treatment, and future directions
    Bone-targeted agents and skeletal-related events in breast cancer patients with bone metastases
    Bone metastases : current status of bone-targeted treatments
    Bone metastases, clinical trials II: zoledronic acid and denosumab in the prevention of bone metastases.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Print
    by Harold G. Jacobson. Assisted by Robert H. Freiberger, [et. al.]
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC930.5 .B63 1972
    1
  • Digital
    Reiner Bartl, Christoph Bartl ; with a contribution by Andrea Baur-Melnyk and Tobias Geith.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Justyna J. Miszkiewicz, Sharon L. Brennan-Olsen, Jose A. Riancho, editors.
    Summary: This multidisciplinary book addresses three lines of evidence (medieval, contemporary, and epigenetic) regarding the effect of human socio-economic status on bone health. It provides an overview of the extent to which human social background affects adult bone quality and quantity, and makes recommendations for future skeletal biology research into lifestyle-related musculoskeletal disorders. The book is divided into three major parts, the first of which discusses bone and dental health in medieval human skeletal remains from distinct socio-economic status groups. In turn, Part 2 reviews bone health in contemporary human populations with a range of social backgrounds; in addition, a conceptual model proposing a social gradient of osteoporosis and fracture risk related to biological mechanisms and cumulative stressors throughout the human lifecycle is presented. Lastly, Part 3 highlights the role of epigenetics in socially patterned risk factors for skeletal disorders, and discusses how epigenetic mechanisms transduce the psychosocial environment and increase the risk of developing conditions such as osteoporosis. Overall, the book highlights the importance of considering the social-biological nexus in future skeletal biology research and future treatment of bone disease. Increased awareness of this nexus can potentially improve individual and population-level bone health interventions, reducing the social inequities observed in fracture risk. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable resource for researchers, academics, and students in the fields of medicine, epidemiology, the health sciences, biological anthropology, human anatomy and adaptation, developmental studies of human societies, human biology, and any field concerning musculoskeletal disorders and health. It will also benefit clinical practitioners evaluating osteoporosis, osteopenia, fracture risk, bone quality and quantity.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ellen B. Fung, Laura K. Bachrach, Aenor J. Sawyer, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Rationale for bone health assessment in childhood and adolescence
    2. Tools for measuring bone in children and adolescents
    3. Dual-energy X-Ray absorptiomery technology
    4. Indications for DXA in children and adolescents
    5. Acquisition of DXA in children and adolescents
    6. Analysis and evaluation of DXA in children and adolescents
    7. Reporting DXA results for children and adolescents
    8. DXA evaluation of infants and toddlers
    9. DXA in children with special needs
    10. Bone mineral density as a predictor of vertebral fractures in children and adolescents
    11. Lessons learned from clinical research using QCT, pQCT, and HR-pQCT
    12. Evaluation of fracture without known trauma: use of DXA in differential diagnosis
    13. What's next in the field of bone health in pediatrics? Research considerations
    Appendix A
    Appendix B
    Appendix C
    Appendix D
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Theofilos Karachalios, editor.
    Summary: What is the optimal design and fixation of the implants we use for orthopedic reconstructions? What is the gold standard for the management of patients requiring implants? Is there scope for improvement still further? Huge efforts have been made both by research scientists in orthopedics and the implant industry to furthering the options available for arthroplasty without necessarily considering the cost-effectiveness of this research to clinical outcomes. It has also become apparent that theoretical and laboratory studies do not always match the results of long-term clinical studies of which there regretfully few of sufficient quality. The Editor and his carefully chosen selection of contributors critically evaluate data from basic science, experimental in vivo and in vitro biological and mechanical models, autopsy specimens and long-term clinical studies to answer these questions. Bone-Implant Interface in Orthopedic Surgery: Basic Science to Clinical Applications focuses on the bone-orthopedic implant interface in general and will be useful both for the novice who seeks a quick introduction to this specific topic and for more experienced surgeons who seek an in depth critical review of current practices.

    Contents:
    Current evidence in designs and fixation surfaces in total hip arthroplasty (a brief overview)
    Early and late mechanical stability of the cementless bone implant interface in total joint arthroplasty
    Cement- bone interface in total joint arthroplasty
    The implant cement interface in total hip arthroplasty
    Cobalt-Chrome porous coated implant-bone interface in total joint arthroplasty
    Titanium porous coated implant-bone Interface in Total Joint Arthroplasty
    Grit blasted implant bone interface in total joint arthroplasty Eduardo Garcia-Rey, Eduardo Garcia-Cimbrelo
    HA coated implant - bone interface in total joint arthroplasty
    Trabecular metal - bone interface in total joint arthroplasty
    Assessment of bone implant interface failure in total joint arthroplasty
    The biology of aseptic loosening
    Cement-bone interface in total joint revision arthroplasty
    Cementless fully porous coated implant-bone interface in revision total hip arthroplasty
    Cementless tapered fluted implant bone interface in revision total joint arthroplasty
    Bone-graft and implant-graft interface in total hip arthroplasty
    The effect of pharmacological agents on the bone implant interface
    Bone-implant interface in biofilm associated bone and joint infections
    Modular interfaces
    Local and distant reaction to metallic wear debris
    Bone-implant interface in spine surgery
    Bone-tendon and bone- ligament interface
    Bone implant interface in patients with neoplasmatic disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Andi Setiawan Budihardja, Thomas Mücke, editors.
    Summary: This book describes all methods of bone management currently employed within the field of dental implantology, with the aim of equipping oral surgeons and other practitioners with a sound practical understanding of bone augmentation. The different possibilities for augmentation of the jaw in the vertical and horizontal dimensions are explained, and detailed information provided on the latest techniques of augmentation, including guided bone regeneration, mandibular bone grafting, 3D technique, extraoral bone augmentation, and microvascular bone transplantation. Readers will find clear guidance on diagnosis and treatment planning and helpful discussion of the basic principles of bone augmentation. Individual chapters also address the role of lasers, complications and risks, and emerging trends. The extensive case documentation, with numerous color illustrations and photos, highlights what is possible today in the field of bone regeneration. This book is a â#x80;must readâ#x80;#x9D; for all implantologists, oral maxillofacial surgeons, periodontists, and dentists with an interest in oral surgery.

    Contents:
    Diagnosis and Treatment Planning
    Basic Principle Bone Augmentation
    Mandibular Bone Graft
    Guided Bone Regeneration
    Illiac Crest Graft
    Vascularized Bone Grafts
    Bone Substitute Material
    Sinus Augmentation
    Periimplantitis
    Laser in Implantology
    Complications and Risks
    Future Trends in Dental Implantology.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Meral Beksac.
    Contents:
    Reporter Gene Technologies for Imaging Cell Fates in Hematopoiesis / Sophie Kusy and Christopher H. Contag
    Flow Cytometry for Hematopoietic Cells / Daniela S. Krause, Michelle E. DeLelys, and Frederic I. Preffer
    Isolation and Characterization of Mesenchymal Stem Cells / Sedat Odabas, A. Eser Elçin, and Y. Murat Elçin
    Methods for Functional Analysis of Stem Cells / Michelle Escobedo-Cousin, J. Alejandro Madrigal, and Aurore Saudemont
    An Overview of HLA Typing for Heamatopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation / Katy Latham, Ann-Margaret Little, and J. Alejandro Madrigal
    HLA Typing with Sequence-Specific Oligonucleotide Primed PCR (PCR-SSO) and Use of the Luminex Technology / Klara Dalva and Meral Beksaç
    Sequence Based Typing of HLA: An Improved Group Specific Full Length Gene Sequencing Approach / Christina E.M. Voorter, Fausto Palusci, and Marcel G.J. Tilanus
    Molecular Typing Methods for Minor Histocompatibility Antigens / Eric Spierings
    Natural Killer Cells and Killer-cell Immunoglobulin-like Receptor Polymorphisms: Their Role in Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation / Jennifer Schellekens, Katia Gagne, and Steven G.E. Marsh
    Methods of Detection of Immune Reconstitution and T Regulatory Cells by Flow Cytometry / Richard Charles Duggleby and J. Alejandro Madrigal
    Molecular Methods Used for Detection of Minimal Residual Disease Following Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation in Myeloid Disorders / Ahmet H. Elmaagacli
    Molecular Methods for Detection of Minimal Residual Disease Following Transplantation in Lymphoid and Plasma Cell Disorders / Paolo Corradini and Cristiana Carniti
    Molecular Methods for Detection of Invasive Fungal Infections and Mycobacteria and Their Clinical Significance in Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation / Pinar Yurdakul and Sule Colakoglu
    Post-transplant Monitoring of Chimerism by Lineage-specific Analysis / Sandra Preuner and Thomas Lion
    Urinary Proteomics Employing Capillary Electrophoresis Coupled to Mass Spectrometry in The Monitoring Of Patients After Stem Cell Transplantation / Eva M. Weissinger, William Mullen, and Amaya Albalat.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    College of American Pathologists Hematology and Clinical Microscopy Resource Committee
    Summary: "Bone Marrow Benchtop Reference Guide is an illustrated guide to common and rare cells. For students and medical technologists, it’s an affordable, convenient way to identify various cell types quickly and confidently. Its rugged construction is well suited for heavy use at the workbench. Includes more than than 60 different identifications and detailed descriptions for each cell morphology."-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Christine Beham-Schmid, Annette Schmitt-Graeff.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gary M. Kupfer, Gregory H. Reaman, Franklin O. Smith, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest scientific knowledge on inherited and acquired bone marrow failure syndromes, describing the advances in understanding of genetics and pathophysiology that have been achieved as a result of high-throughput DNA sequencing, RNA expression studies, and modern biochemistry techniques. The full range of relevant conditions is covered, including acquired aplastic anemia, Fanconi anemia, ribosomopathies, telomeropathies, dyskeratosis congenita, Shwachman-Diamond syndrome, Diamond-Blackfan anemia, and congenital neutropenias and thrombocytopenias. In addition, it is explained how the study of these rare diseases has uncovered important new science and elucidated the pathophysiology of more common hematological and oncological diseases. A treatment-specific chapter describes options ranging from the conventional to the cutting edge. Bone Marrow Failure will be of value for both trainee and practicing hematologists and oncologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Lia Angela Moulopoulos, Vassilis Koutoulidis.
    Summary: MRI provides the best means of imaging the bone marrow directly and of non-invasively assessing its composition. Normal age-related bone marrow changes, alterations related to red marrow reconversion, and pathological bone marrow processes generally conform to certain patterns that reflect the underlying marrow changes and can be clearly recognized on MR images. In addition to conventional pulse sequences, advanced MRI techniques such as Dynamic Contrast-Enhanced MRI and Diffusion-Weighted Imaging depict marrow changes at the microvascular and cellular level respectively. This book provides radiologists with in-depth information on the MRI appearances of normal, abnormal and treated marrow following a structured, pattern-based approach. MRI findings for various diseases that affect the bone marrow, particularly those of a malignant nature, are presented in detail. MRI pattern recognition not only offers a systematic approach to image interpretation and diagnosis but also has prognostic implications with regard to some disease entities. Each chapter includes a wealth of high-quality images, together with Key Points summarizing the most important information. In addition to radiologists, practitioners with an interest in hematology and oncology will find this textbook-atlas to be a valuable resource for the latest, clinically relevant advances in bone marrow imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital/Print
    Takashi Nagasawa, editor.
    Summary: This volume summarizes recent advances in research on mesenchymal cell populations in the bone marrow. It explores how mesenchymal cells create niches for immune cells in extramedullary organs and it discusses new concepts of lympho-hematopoietic microenvironments. Readers are introduced to the fundamentals of hematopoietic stem cells (HSCs) differentiation to all types of blood cells, including immune cells, in the bone marrow. The book highlights how this process is supported and regulated by the individual microenvironments of stem cells, termed niches. The identity of HSC niches has been subject to longstanding debates. Recent studies identified the population of mesenchymal stem cells as the major cellular component of niches, for hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells (HSPCs) and their candidate developmental origin. Furthermore, candidate cellular niches for immune cells in lymph nodes and adipose and connective tissues were identified. The authors of this volume focus on shared features between those and HSPC niche cells in the bone marrow. Covering latest research results, this book serves as fascinating read for researchers and clinicians in hematology and immunology.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Skeletal stem cells as the developmental origin of cellular niches for hematopoietic stem and progenitor cells
    Cellular niches for hematopoietic stem cells and lympho-hematopoiesis in bone marrow during homeostasis and blood cancers
    Remodeling of the bone marrow stromal microenvironment during pathogenic infections
    The Roles of IL-7 and IL-15 in Niches for Lymphocyte Progenitors and Immune Cells in Lymphoid Organs
    Lymph node stromal cells: diverse meshwork structures weave functionally subdivided niches
    Immune Niche within the Peritoneal Cavity.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Dimitrios Kardamakis, Vassilios Vassiliou, Edward Chow, editors.
    Summary: The second edition of this book serves both as an introductory and reference book focusing on the field of metastatic bone disease. Featuring contributions from experts in the field, this volume describes the molecular and cellular mechanisms involved in the formation of bone metastases, presents the newer advances made in the understanding of the clinical picture and symptoms of patients, analyses the role of bone markers in research and clinical practice and deals with all aspects of imaging modalities applied for the detection and evaluation of bone metastases. Moreover, the use of all available treatment methods, such as radiotherapy, surgery and systemic treatments for the management of patients with metastatic bone disease is discussed in detail. Overall this volume presents a thorough overview of all aspects of metastatic bone disease and provides a comprehensive and concise information resource for researchers, oncologists, orthopaedic surgeons and clinicians dealing with patients with metastatic bone disease.

    Contents:
    Preface. I Fundamental Concepts
    Pathophysiology of metastatic bone disease
    Bone metastases: epidemiology, clinical picture, SREs and prognosis
    Pain in bone metastases: types and mechanisms. II Investigations Of Bone Metastases
    Radiological evaluations: radiography, CT, MRI.-Nuclear medicine imaging modalities: bone scintigraphy, PET-CT, SPECT.-Bone turnover markers
    New omics approaches for bone metastases. III Therapeutic Management.-Analgesic treatment for bone mets
    Radiotherapy: external beam and radio-surgery
    Radionuclide therapy
    Bisphosphonates
    New targeted therapies for bone metastases
    Chemotherapy and hormone therapy
    HIFU/Radioablation
    Neuropathic bone metastases
    Spinal cord compression and cauda equina compression
    Pathological and impending fracture
    Re-irradiation
    Bone metastases in elderly patients
    Management of metastatic bone disease in the elderly with bisphosphonates and RANKL inhibitors: effectiveness and safety. IV Assesment of Therapeutic Response
    Radiological and nuclear medicine imaging modalities.-Clinical assessment measures
    Outcome measures in bone metastases clinical trials
    Quality of life in patients suffering from metastatic skeletal disease. V Cost of Managing Metastatic Bone Disease
    Cost effectiveness of treatment modalities for bone metastases
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Francesco Bertoldo, Francesco Boccardo, Emilio Bombardieri, Laura Evangelista, Riccardo Valdagni, editors.
    Summary: This book presents up-to-date information on one of the hottest topics in prostate cancer, namely bone metastases. The most recent developments with respect to biology, pathology, diagnosis, and treatment are described, providing readers with an excellent understanding of the mechanisms of metastasis formation, the characteristics of metastases, their aggressiveness, and prognostic factors for treatment response. The coverage includes discussion of all of the best available options (laboratory, radiology, and nuclear medicine) for achieving early diagnosis and both established and novel therapeutic approaches. Detailed information is provided on hormonal manipulations, bone-targeted agents, vaccines, taxanes, and other treatments that are enriching the therapeutic armamentarium. The editors can be considered leaders in the field, with great experience in diagnostic and clinical oncology and research, and the authors are experts in diverse specialties. This ensures a multidisciplinary approach, mirroring the current situation in which treatment in patients with bone metastases is undertaken by a team of specialists and health professionals in a variety of fields.

    Contents:
    Biology and pathophysiology of bone metastases
    Markers of bone turnover
    Bone homing and metastasis
    Markers of prostate cancer
    Circulating cells
    Radiological assessment of bone metastases
    Nuclear Medicine: bone target imaging
    Nuclear Medicine: cancer and receptor target imaging
    Hormonal therapy
    Chemotherapy
    Combinations of hormonal therapy and chemotherapy
    Surgery
    Radiotherapy
    Bone-targeted agents
    Bone seeking radionuclide for therapy
    New frontiers in treatments
    Approaches for the assessment of response to therapies
    From Symptom control to pain palliation
    Economic impact of prostate cancer bone metastases
    Multidisciplinary approach. .
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Slobodan Vukicevic, Kuber T. Sampath.
    Contents:
    Historical perspective of bone morphogenetic proteins
    The systems biology of bone morphogenetic proteins
    Embryonic skeletogenesis and craniofacial development
    BMP and BMP regulation: structure and function
    Novel in vitro assay models to study osteogenesis and chondrogenesis for human skeletal disorders
    Toward advanced therapy medicinal products (ATMPs) combining bone morphogenetic proteins (BMP) and cells for bone regeneration
    BMP signaling in articular cartilage repair and regeneration: potential therapeutic opportunity for osteoarthritis
    BMPs in orthopaedic medicine: promises and challenges
    Osteogrow: a novel graft substitute for orthopedic reconstruction
    Biology of spine fusion and application of osteobiologics in spine surgery
    BMPs in dental medicine: promises and challenges
    Bone morphogenetic protein-7 and its role in acute kidney injury and chronic kidney failure
    Bone morphogenetic protein signaling in pulmonary arterial hypertension
    BMP signaling in fibrodysplasia ossificans progressiva, a rare genetic disorder of heterotopic ossification
    The central role of BMP signaling in regulating iron homeostasis
    BMPs in inflammation
    Physiological and pathological consequences of vascular BMP signaling
    Bone morphogenetic proteins in the initiation and progression of breast cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QP552.B65 B664 2017
    1
  • Digital
    Pascal Laugier, Quentin Grimal, editors.
    Summary: Many significant achievements in new ultrasound technologies to measure bone and models to elucidate the interaction and the propagation of ultrasonic waves in complex bone structures have been reported over the past ten years. Impaired bone remodeling affects not only the trabecular compartment but also the cortical one. Despite the crucial contribution of the cortical structure to the whole bone mechanical competence, cortical bone was understudied for a long time. A paradigm shift occurred around 2010, with a special focus placed on the importance of cortical bone. This has sparkled a great deal of interest in new ultrasound techniques to assess cortical bone. While our book 'Bone Quantitative Ultrasound' published in 2011 emphasized techniques to measure trabecular bone, this new book is devoted for a large part to the technologies introduced recently to measure cortical bone. These include resonant ultrasound spectroscopy, guided waves, scattering, and pulse-echo and tomography imaging techniques. Instrumentation, signal processing techniques and models used are detailed. Importantly, the data accumulated in recent years such as anisotropic stiffness, elastic engineering moduli, compression and shear wave speeds of cortical bones from various skeletal sites are presented comprehensively. A few chapters deal with the recent developments achieved in quantitative ultrasound of trabecular bone. These include (i) scattering-based approaches and their application to measure skeletal sites such as the spine and proximal femur and (ii) approaches exploiting the poro-elastic nature of bone. While bone fragility and osteoporosis are still the main motivation for developing bone QUS, this Book also includes chapters reporting ultrasound techniques developed for other applications of high interest such as 3-D imaging of the spine, assessment of implant stability and transcranial brain imaging. This book, together with the book 'Bone Quantitative Ultrasound' published in 2011 will provide a comprehensive overview of the methods and principles used in bone quantitative ultrasound and will be a benchmark for all novice or experienced researchers in the field. The book will offer recent experimental results and theoretical concepts developed so far and would be intended for researchers, graduate or undergraduate students, engineers, and clinicians who are involved in the field. The book should be considered as a complement to the first book publisher in 2011, rather than a second edition, in the sense that basic notions already presented in the first book are not repeated.

    Contents:
    Preface (Claus Glüer)
    Chapter 1. Introduction (Quentin Grimal and Pascal Laugier)
    Part I: Ultrasound Methods for Skeletal Status Clinical Assessment
    Chapter 2. Quantitative Ultrasound (QUS) in the Management of Osteoporosis and Assessment of Fracture Risk: An Update (Didier Hans, Antoine Metrailler, Elena Gonzalez Rodriguez, Olivier Lamy, Enisa Shevroja)
    Chapter 3. Clinical devices for bone assessment (Kay Raum and Pascal Laugier)
    Chapter 4. Axial transmission – Techniques, devices and clinical results (Nicolas Bochud and Pascal Laugier)
    Chapter 5. Signal processing techniques applied to axial transmission ultrasound (Tho N.H.T. Tran, Kailiang Xu, Lawrence H. Le, and Dean Ta)
    Chapter 6. Ultrasonic Assessment of Cancellous Bone Based on the Two-Wave Phenomenon (Katsunori Mizuno, Yoshiki Nagatani, Isao Mano)
    Chapter 7. Pulse-echo Measurements of Bone Tissues. Techniques and Clinical Results at the Spine and Femur (Delia Ciardo, Paola Pisani, Francesco Conversano, Sergio Casciaro)
    Chapter 8. Scattering in Cancellous Bone (Keith Wear)
    Chapter 9. Ultrasound Scattering in Cortical Bone (Yasamin Karbalaeisadegh and Marie Muller)
    Chapter 10. Single-sided ultrasound imaging of the bone cortex: anatomy, tissue characterization and blood flow (Guillaume Renaud and Sébastien Salles)
    Chapter 11. Ultrasound Computed Tomography (Philippe Lasaygues, Luis Espinosa, Simon Bernard, Philippe Petit, Régine Guillermin)
    Part II: Ex vivo Measurement of Bone Material Properties: New Methods and Data
    Chapter 12. Measurement of Cortical Bone Elasticity Tensor with Resonant Ultrasound Spectroscopy (Simon Bernard, Xiran Cai and Quentin Grimal)
    Chapter 13. Documenting the anisotropic stiffness of hard tissues with resonant ultrasound spectroscopy (Xiran Cai, Simon Bernard, Quentin Grimal)
    Chapter 14. Assessing the elasticity of child cortical bone (Cécile Baron, Hélène Follet, Martine Pihioux, Cédric Payan, and Philippe Lasaygues)
    Chapter 15. Piezoelectric and Opto-Acoustic Material Properties of Bone (Atsushi Hosokawa and Mami Matsukawa)
    Part III: Emerging applications of Bone Quantitative Ultrasound
    Chapter 16. 3D Ultrasound Imaging of the Spine (Yong Ping Zheng and Timothy Tin Yan Lee)
    Chapter 17. Ultrasonic Evaluation of the Bone-Implant Interface (Yoann Hériveaux, Vu-Hieu Nguyen, Guillaume Haïat)
    Chapter 18. Adaptive ultrasound focusing through the cranial bone for non-invasive treatment of brain disorders (Thomas Bancel, Thomas Tiennot, Jean-François Aubry)
    Chapter 19. GuidedWaves in the Skull (Héctor Estrada and Daniel Razansky)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    by Guillaume Chuto, Emmanuel Richelme, Christophe Cermolacce, Michel Nicaud, Bruno Puech.
    Contents:
    Part I: Pathology
    Chapter 1: Orthopedics
    Chapter 2: Rheumatology
    Part II: Anatomy
    Chapter 3: Anatomy
    Appendix
    References
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    by Xiaoguang Cheng, Yongbin Su, Mingqian Huang.
    Summary: This book covers typical imaging features of benign and malignant bone tumors in the hip and knee. Illustrative cases have been carefully selected from thousands processed at the Orthopedic Department of Beijing Jishuitan Hospital, which holds a leading position in orthopedics in China. The chapters are organized by major bone tumour diseases: osteosarcoma, osteochondroma, Ewing sarcoma, bone metastases, etc. Comprehensive imaging information, including X-ray, CT and MRI, is presented in each chapter, and is accompanied by a brief clinical history, imaging findings, differential diagnoses, in-depth analysis and key insights from respected bone tumor specialists. Given its scope, the book offers a valuable guide for musculoskeletal radiologists, orthopedic surgeons, general radiologists, and oncologists alike.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Hip
    1 Aneurysmal Bone Cyst- Case 1
    2 Aneurysmal Bone Cyst- Case 2
    3 Osteoid Osteoma
    Case 1
    4 Osteoid Osteoma
    Case 2
    5 Osteochondroma
    6 Chondroblastoma
    7 Alveolar Soft Part Sarcoma of Bone
    8 Chondromyxoid Fibroma
    9 Desmoid-type fibromatosis
    Case 1
    10 Desmoid-type fibromatosis
    case 2
    11 Giant Cell Tumor
    12 Chondrosarcoma
    13 Ewings Sarcoma
    14 Invasive mesenchymal malignant spindle cell tumor
    15 Bone Metastases
    Case 1
    16 Bone Metastases
    Case 2
    17 Lymphoma
    18 Eosinophilic granuloma
    Case 1
    19 Eosinophilic granuloma
    Case 2
    20 Tuberculosis Arthritis
    21 Septic Arthritis
    22 Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Case 1
    23 Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Case 2
    24 Gouty Arthritis
    25 Septic Arthritis
    Part 2 Knee
    26 Giant Cell Tumor of the bone
    27 Fibroma of Tendon Sheath
    28 Chondroblastoma
    Case 1
    29 Chondroblastoma
    Case 2
    30 Myxoid low grade malignant mesenchymal tumor
    31 Fibrous Cortical Defect
    Case 1
    32 Fibrous Cortical Defect
    Case 2
    33 Intra-osseous lipoma
    34 Giant cell tumor of bone
    35 Osteosarcoma
    36 Undifferentiated High-Grade Pleomorphic Sarcoma
    37 Osteomyelitis
    38 Synovial Sarcoma
    case 1
    39 Synovial Sarcoma
    case 2
    40 Pigmented villonodular synovitis
    Case 1
    41 Pigmented villonodular synovitis
    Case 2
    42 Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Case 1
    43 Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Case 2
    44 Gouty Arthritis
    45 Paget Disease
    46 Tuberculosis
    47 Giant Cell Tumor of the bone
    48 Subchondral cyst
    case 1
    49 Subchondral cyst
    case 2
    50 Extraskeletal myxoid chondrosarcoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jaime Paulos, Dominique G. Poitout, editors.
    Summary: This book reviews the latest techniques for diagnostics and treatments specific to bone and soft tissue tumors. It focuses on imaging and classification of the bone and soft tissue tumors and how histology and cytogenetic aspects can be used to identify tumors. Each chapter focuses on a specific type of tumor, providing a concise overview of relevant information on their characteristics along with the latest surgical and medical treatments available. Bone Tumors: Diagnosis and Therapy Today is a concise guide to successfully identifying and treating bone and soft tissue tumors, making it a valuable resource for practicing medical professionals and trainees who encounter these patients in their day-to-day practice.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Osteomas
    Chapter 3. Osteoid Osteoma
    Chapter 4. Osteoblastoma
    Chapter 5. Osteosarcoma
    Chapter 6. Osteochondroma and hereditary multiple Osteochondromas
    Chapter 7. Enchondroma
    Chapter 8. Chondromyxoid Fibroma
    Chapter 9. Chondroblastoma
    Chapter 10. Chondrosarcoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Andrea Piccioli, Valentina Gazzaniga, Paola Catalano.
    Contents:
    Part I: 1 The study of ancient bone remains
    2 Study and data description
    Part II: 3 Traumatic pathologies
    4 Joint degenerative pathologies
    5 Oncologic pathologies
    6 Infective and Metabolic Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Jane C. Ballantyne, Scott M. Fishman, James P. Rathmell.
    Summary: "The Bonica text is heavy on science. A thorough update is warranted considering work on the fourth edition began in 2007 and there's been no break in research in the interim. Pain Medicine is practiced in several medical specialties; the ABMS recognizes it as a subspecialty of Anesthesiology, Emergency Medicine, Family Medicine, Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, Psychiatry and Neurology, and Radiology. Management of Pain is also researched and practiced by physical therapists and psychologists (two disciplines not recognized by the ABMS). This diffuse assortment of researchers and practitioners author the chapters and purchase the book"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Takeshi Furuichi.
    Summary: This book describes the similarities and differences between two species, bonobos and chimpanzees, based on the three decades the author has spent studying them in the wild, and shows how the contrasting nature of these two species is also reflected in human nature. The most important differences between bonobos and chimpanzees, our closest relatives, are the social mechanisms of coexistence in group life. Chimpanzees are known as a fairly despotic species in which the males exclusively dominate over the females, and maintain a rigid hierarchy. Chimpanzees have developed social intelligence to survive severe competition among males: by upholding the hierarchy of dominance, they can usually preserve peaceful relations among group members. In contrast, female bonobos have the same or even a higher social status than males. By evolving pseudo-estrus during their non-reproductive period, females have succeeded in moderating inter-male sexual competition, and in initiating mate selection. Although they are non-related in male-philopatric society, they usually aggregate in a group, enjoy priority access to food, determine which male is the alpha male, and generally maintain much more peaceful social relations compared to chimpanzees. Lastly, by identifying key mechanisms of social coexistence in these two species, the author also seeks to find solutions or "hope" for the peaceful coexistence of human beings. "Takeshi Furuichi is one of very few scientists in the world familiar with both chimpanzees and bonobos. In lively prose, reflecting personal experience with apes in the rain forest, he compares our two closest relatives and explains the striking differences between the male- dominated and territorial chimpanzees and the female-centered gentle bonobos." Frans de Waal, author of Mamas Last Hug - Animal Emotions and What They Tell Us about Ourselves (Norton, 2019).
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Judea Pearl and Dana Mackenzie.
    Summary: "Everyone has heard the claim, "Correlation does not imply causation." What might sound like a reasonable dictum metastasized in the twentieth century into one of science's biggest obstacles, as a legion of researchers became unwilling to make the claim that one thing could cause another. Even two decades ago, asking a statistician a question like "Was it the aspirin that stopped my headache?" would have been like asking if he believed in voodoo, or at best a topic for conversation at a cocktail party rather than a legitimate target of scientific inquiry. Scientists were allowed to posit only that the probability that one thing was associated with another. This all changed with Judea Pearl, whose work on causality was not just a victory for common sense, but a revolution in the study of the world"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Mind over data
    The ladder of causation
    From buccaneers to guinea pigs: the genesis of causal inference
    From evidence to causes: Reverend Bayes meets Mr. Holmes
    Confounding and deconfounding: or, slaying the lurking variable
    The smoke-filled debate: clearing the air
    Paradoxes galore!
    Beyond adjustment: the conquest of Mt. Intervention
    Counterfactuals: mining worlds that could have been
    Mediation: the search for a mechanism
    Big data, artificial intelligence, and the big questions.
    Limited to 1 simultaneous users
  • Digital
    Oleg Safir, Ranil Sonnadara, Polina Mironova, Rohit Rambani, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a unique opportunity to gain a complete overview of how to run orthopedic surgery training, with all aspects of course planning covered including schedules, objectives, feasibility, instructors, materials, division-specific sessions, evaluations, research and refining course content. This practical program guide offers key information and course structuring guidance sought by orthopaedic specialists who wish to enhance their training programs for residents. Boot Camp Approach to Surgical Training will be a go-to book for both trainers and trainees wishing to successfully plan or complete a surgical education. In addition to surgical trainers and trainees, program directors in medical education, simulation lab directors, educators and researchers in medical training will find this book to be an essential resource for planning effective competency-based courses in orthopaedic surgery.

    Contents:
    Bridging the gap : theoretical principles behind surgical boot camps
    Competency-based medical education : a brief overview
    Toronto orthopaedic boot camp (TOBC)
    Canadian national vascular surgery boot camp
    Cardiac surgery boot camp
    The Toronto neurosurgery PGY-1 boot camp
    Undergraduate surgical boot camp
    Surgical preparatory camp (PREP Camp)
    Surgical simulation lab : feasibility and management
    "I wish I knew this before ..." an implementation science primer and model to guide implementation of simulation programs in medical education
    The future of medical education : simulation-based assessment in a competency-by-design curriculum.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Lois W. Choi-Kain, John G. Gunderson, editors.
    Summary: In Borderline Personality and Mood Disorders: Comorbidity and Controversy, a panel of distinguished experts reviews the last two decades of progress in scientific inquiry about the relationship between mood and personality disorders and the influence of this empirical data on our ways of conceptualizing and treating them. This comprehensive title opens with an introduction defining general trends both influencing the expansion of the mood disorder spectrum and undermining clinical recognition and focus on personality disorders. The overlaps and differences between MDD and BPD in phenomenology and biological markers are then reviewed, followed by a review of the overlaps and distinctions between more atypical mood disorder variants. Further chapters review the current state of thinking on the distinctions between bipolar disorder and BPD, with attention to problems of misdiagnosis and use of clinical vignettes to illustrate important distinguishing features. Two models explaining the relationship between mood, temperament, and personality are offered, followed by a review of the literature on risk factors and early signs of BPD and mood disorders in childhood through young adulthood as well as a review of the longitudinal studies on BPD and mood disorders. The last segment of the book includes three chapters on treatment. The book closes with a conclusion with a synthesis of the current status of thinking on the relationship between mood and borderline personality disorder. An invaluable contribution to the literature, Borderline Personality and Mood Disorders: Comorbidity and Controversy insightfully addresses the mood and personality disorders realms of psychiatry and outlines that it has moved away from contentious debate and toward the possibility of synthesis, providing increasing clarity on the relationship between mood and personality to inform improvements in clinical management of the convergence of these psychiatric domains in common practice.

    Contents:
    Mood Disorders and Personality Disorders: Simplicity and Complexity
    Depressive Disorders in Borderline Personality Disorder: Phenomenology and Biological Markers
    Borderline Personality Disorder, Atypical Depression, and Cyclothymia: Diagnostic Distinctions Crossing Mood and Personality Disorders Borders
    Is Borderline Personality Disorder Underdiagnosed, and Bipolar Disorder Overdiagnosed?
    Affective Instability: Bipolar Disorder vs. Borderline Personality Disorder
    Bipolar Illness versus Borderline Personality: Red Skies versus Red Apples
    Hyperbolic Temperament as a Distinguishing Feature between Borderline Personality Disorder and Mood Dysregulation
    The Integration of Mood, Behavior and Temperament in Mood Spectrum Disorders
    Borderline Personality and Mood Disorders: Risk Factors, Precursors and Early Signs in Childhood and Youth
    Borderline Personality Disorder and Mood Disorders: Longitudinal Course and Interactions
    Pharmacology
    Cognitive Behavioral Therapy-Based Interventions for Borderline Personality Disorder and Mood Disorders
    Psychodynamic Treatment for Borderline Personality Disorder and Mood Disorders: A Mentalizing Perspective
    Conclusion: Integration and Synthesis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Barbara Stanley, Antonia S. New.
    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note:
    1. A History of Borderline Personality Disorder / Antonia S. New and Joseph Triebwasser
    2. Diagnosis of Borderline Personality Disorder / Barbara Stanley and Tanya Singh
    3. Onset, Course, and Prognosis for Borderline Personality Disorder / Mary C. Zanarini and Lindsey C. Conkey
    4. Clinical Phenomenology of Borderline Personality Disorder / Larry Siever
    5. The Relationship Between Childhood Adversity and Borderline Personality Disorder / Joel Paris
    6. Neurobiology of Borderline Personality Disorder / Annegret Krause-Utz, Inga Niedtfeld, Julia Knauber, and Christian Schmal
    7. Genetic Influences on Borderline Personality Disorder / Marijn A. Distel, Marleen H. M. de Moor
    8. Suicidal and Non-Suicidal Self-Injury in Borderline Personality Disorder / Margaret S. Andover, Heather T. Schatten, and Blair W. Morris
    9. Substance Use Disorder in Borderline Personality Disorder / Beth S. Brodsky and Linda Dimeff
    10. Eating Disorders in Borderline Personality Disorder / Eugene Chen
    11. Borderline Personality Disorder and Mood Disorders / Eric A. Fertuck, Megan S. Chesin, and Brian Johnston
    12. Aggressive Behavior and Interpersonal Difficulties in Borderline Personality Disorder / Lori N. Scott and Paul A. Pilkonis
    13. Pharmacological Interventions for Borderline Personality Disorder / Kenneth R. Silk
    14. Mentalization Based Treatment / Lois W. Choi-Kain
    15. Transference Focused Psychotherapy : A Psychodynamic Treatment of Personality Disorders / Frank E. Yeomans and Jill C. Delaney
    16. Dialectical Behavior Therapy / Shireen L. Rizvi and Kristen M. Roman
    17. Cognitive Therapy for Personality Disorders / Kate M. Davidson
    18. Supportive Psychotherapy Case Management / David J. Hellerstein and Ron B. Aviram
    19. Family Psychoeducation Approaches for Borderline Personality Disorder / Valerie Porr
    20. Meeting the Clinical Challenges of Managing Borderline Personality Disorder / Beth S. Brodsky
    21. Assessing, Managing, and Resolving Suicide Risk in Borderline Personality Disorder / Adam Carmel, Jeffrey Sung, and Katherine Anne Comtois
    22. Forensic Issues in Borderline Personality Disorder / Alexander L. Chapman and André Ivanoff
    23. Borderline Personality Disorder and Advocacy : Individuals and Family Members Speaking Out for Change / Paula Tusiani-Eng and Bea Tusiani.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Brian Palmer, Brandon Unruh.
    Summary: This book brings together a series of experts and experienced clinicians to describe and discuss a series of BPD cases in a manner that emphasizes core descriptive and diagnostic features, principles and techniques, and key take-home messages for clinicians at all levels of experience. The book emphasizes consideration for the disorder from multiple perspectives to help identify effective responses to common clinical challenges and decision points. Written by experts in the field, each chapter uses a consistent format to present a common clinical challenge along with an effective therapeutic response and discussion of relevant theoretical and empirically validated principles. Each chapter title contains a patient's (fictionalized) name and a subheading identifying the clinical dilemma or approach to be illustrated. The text includes key points and chapter summaries to help pull together the most important takeaways as quick reference. Borderline Personality Disorder is a vital resource for psychiatrists, psychologists, psychiatric nurses, general internists, social workers, and all medical professions working with patients suffering from Borderline Personality Disorder.

    Contents:
    Organizing and shaping a treatment toward change
    Stimulating Reflection and Curiosity
    Approach to suicidal behaviors in BPD patients
    Navigating Intersession Contact
    Managing mistrust, paranoia, and relationship rupture
    BPD in the Emergency Department
    Principles of Inpatient BPD Management
    Caring for a Patient with BPD on the Inpatient Medical Service
    BPD and Substance Use
    Medical Problems and Comorbidities
    Managing Co-Morbidities and Appropriate Use of Psychopharmacology
    Engaging family to be productive participants in a BPD treatment
    Addressing narcissistic problems in treatment for BPD
    Narcissistic personality disorder with borderline features
    Providing consultation to determine level of care and organize treatment
    Early Diagnosis and Intervention in Adolescents
    When less may be more: scaling limited treatment resources using a stepped-care model.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital/Print
    Trevor Noah.
    Summary: Noah's path from apartheid South Africa to the desk of The Daily Show began with a criminal act: his birth. Born to a white Swiss father and a black Xhosa mother, at the time such a union was punishable by five years in prison. As he struggles to find himself in a world where he was never supposed to exist, his mother is determined to save her son from the cycle of poverty, violence, and abuse that would ultimately threaten her own life. With an incisive wit and unflinching honesty, Noah weaves together a moving yet funny portrait of a boy making his way through a damaged world in a dangerous time. -- Adapted from publisher.

    Contents:
    I. Run
    Born a crime
    Trevor, pray
    Chameleon
    The second girl
    Loopholes
    Fufi
    Robert
    II. The mulberry tree
    A young man's long, awkward, occasionally tragic, and frequently humiliating education in affairs of the heart, part I: Valentine's Day
    Outsider
    A young man's long, awkward, occasionally tragic, and frequently humiliating education in affairs of the heart, part II: the crush
    Colorblind
    A young man's long, awkward, occasionally tragic, and frequently humiliating education in affairs of the heart, part III: the dance
    III. Go Hitler!
    The cheese boys
    The world doesn't love you
    My mother's life
    Acknowledgments.
    Digital Access EBSCO 2016
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    PN2287.N557 A3 2016
    1
  • Digital
    [edited by] Peter M. Waters, Daniel J. Hedequist, Benjamin J. Shore.
    Summary: "Originating from the esteemed Boston Children's Hospital, this new volume in the Illustrated Tips and Tricks series provides succinct, precise information from a wide range of experts on tackling technical problems in pediatric orthopaedic reconstructive surgery. Edited by Drs. Peter M. Waters, Benjamin J. Shore, and Daniel J. Hedequist, this volume presents practical, hands-on content gained from years of surgical experience, including nuggets of wisdom unique to particular institutions. Drawings, operative photos, and videos are used liberally throughout the book to illustrate surgical techniques and provide a handy visual complement to the text. Covers all areas of pediatric orthopaedic reconstructive surgery including sports medicine surgery, reconstruction, neuromuscular correction, upper extremity surgery, spine surgery, hip surgery, pediatric foot and ankle surgery, cerebral palsy related surgery, and orthopaedic oncology. Features the latest surgical techniques, presented in a crisp, step-by-step style, and provides brief overviews of equipment, anesthesia, patient positioning, and other procedural elements...
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Glyn E. Jones.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Chong Tae Kim.
    Summary: "Botulinum Neurotoxin: A Guide to Motor Point Injections identifies the correct motor points for botulinum neurotoxin (BoNT) injections for non-cosmetic purposes such as muscle dystonia, muscle spasticity, teeth grinding, or drooling. Dr. Chong-Tae Kim expertly guides readers through the efficient blocking of neurotransmitters using BoNT, identifying target muscles and clearly demonstrating how to identify optimal insertion points"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Head, face, and neck
    Trunk
    Upper arm
    Forearm
    Hand
    Upper leg
    Lower leg
    Foot
    Deformities of head/face/neck
    Deformities of trunk
    Deformities of upper arm
    Deformities of forearm
    Deformities of hand
    Deformities of upper leg
    Deformities of lower leg
    Deformities of foot
    Appendix: Salivary and sweat glands.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    [edited by] Andrew Blitzer, Brian E. Benson, Diana N. Kirke.
    Summary: "Senior author Dr. Andrew Blitzer is an internationally renowned pioneer on the use of botulinum neurotoxin for functional disorders, with unparalleled expertise on this topic. Joined by co-editors Brian Benson and Diana Kirke, with multidisciplinary contributors, Botulinum Neurotoxin for Head and Neck Disorders Second Edition fills a gap in the medical literature. The unique textbook focuses on the use of botulinum neurotoxins for functional disorders of the head and neck, though with some aesthetic indications. The second edition reflects the latest advances and understanding of existing and emerging applications for botulinum neurotoxins, including new treatment paradigms, revised pharmacology, and an updated review of the literature in all chapters. Twenty superbly illustrated chapters cover the management of hyperfunctional, pain, and hypersecretory syndromes of the head and neck. Hyperfunctional motor disorders are discussed in chapters focused on blepharospasm, facial dystonia, Meige syndrome, oromandibular dystonia, spasmodic dysphonia (laryngeal dystonia), and cervical dystonia. Specific treatment approaches for pain are addressed in chapters on migraine and chronic daily tension headaches, temporomandibular disorders, and trigeminal neuralgia. The treatment of autonomic nervous system disorders is covered in chapters dedicated to Frey syndrome, facial hyperhydrosis, and sialorrhea"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Pharmacology of Botulinum Neurotoxins / Muna I. Bitar, Nikita Kohli, Maya Samman, and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Blepharospasm / Amit Patel, Andrew Blitzer, and Boris L. Bentsianov
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Facial Dystonia / Scott M. Rickert, Amy P. Wu, and Andrew Blitzer Botulinum
    Neurotoxin for Meige Syndrome / Niv Mor and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Oromandibular Dystonia / Daniel Novakovic and Ajay E. Chitkara
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Spasmodic Dysphonia / Phillip C. Song, Lucian Sulica, and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Cervical Dystonia / Tanya K. Meyer, Joel Guss, and Ronda E. Alexander
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Hemifacial Spasm and Facial Synkinesis / Lesley French Childs, Daniel Novakovic, and Scott R. Gibbs
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Hyperfunctional Facial Lines / Brian E. Benson, Diana N. Kirke, and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Upper and Lower Esophageal Spasm / Nwanmegha Young and Brian E. Benson
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Palatal Myoclonus / Ajay E. Chitkara, Catherine F. Sinclair, and Daniel Novakovic
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Temporomandibular Disorders, Masseteric Hypertrophy, and Cosmetic Masseter Reduction / Michael Z. Lerner and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin Therapy in the Laryngopharynx / Craig H. Zalvan, Phillip C. Song, Nwanmegha Young, and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Migraine / Rachel Kaye, Jerome Schwartz, Brian E. Benson, and William J. Binder
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Chronic Tension Headache / Nwanmegha Young and Brian E. Benson
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Trigeminal Neuralgia / Elizabeth Guardiani, Andrew Blitzer, Lesley French Childs, and Ronda E. Alexander
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Frey's Syndrome / Rachel Kaye, Andrew Blitzer, and Brian E. Benson
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Facial Hyperhidrosis / Diana N. Kirke, Daniel Novakovic, and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Sialorrhea / Brianna K. Crawley, Scott M. Rickert, Senja Tomovic, and Andrew Blitzer
    Botulinum Neurotoxin for Radiation-Induced Spasm and Pain / Diana N. Kirke, Brian E. Benson, and Tanya K. Meyer.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Otolaryngology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    edited by, Alastair Carruthers, Jean Carruthers, Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam ; video editor, Omer Ibrahim ; series editors, Jeffrey S. Dover, Murad Alam.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Kyle K. Seo.
    Summary: This book, containing more than 400 photos and illustrations, provides practical guidelines for the cosmetic use of botulinum toxin type A (BTA) in Asians. The differences in BTA treatment of Asians and Caucasians with respect to applicable dose, injection methods, anatomic significance, and indications are clearly described. It is explained how the optimal dose and injection sites for the treatment of wrinkles differ from the guidelines advocated in North America and Europe. Detailed consideration is given to the rapidly expanding role that BTA treatment is playing in facial and body contouring based on leveraging the mechanism of disuse muscle atrophy. Examples that are particularly relevant in Asians include treatment of hypertrophy of the masseter and temporalis muscles and calf muscle reduction. Further chapters are devoted to the use of BTA in the treatment of hyperhidrosis and the intradermal injection of BTA. The book will be an excellent resource for all dermatologists, plastic surgeons, cosmetic Physicians, and other clinicians who employ BTA in Asian patients. .

    Contents:
    1. Botoxology
    2. Wrinkle Treatment with Botullinum Toxin
    3. Facial Contouring with Botulinum Toxin
    4. Multiple Intradermal Botulinum Toxin Injections
    5. Body Contouring with Botulinum Toxin
    6. Hyperhidrosis Treatment with Botulinum Toxin
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Miles G. Berry.
    Summary: This book concisely summarizes the use of Botulinum neurotoxin in facial rejuvenation. It details relevant aspects of the physiology, pharmacology, safety profile and anatomy of the toxin. Chapters breakdown critical aspects related to the clinical assessment and aesthetic administration of this neurotoxin along with insightful information on its regulation. Botulinum Toxin in Clinical Practice provides a practically focused introductory text to the cosmetic applications of this neurotoxin in aesthetic dermatology, making it an ideal resource for the trainee practitioner seeking a concise summary of the topic.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    References
    Acknowledgement
    Contents
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    A Brief History of Botulinum Neurotoxins
    The Biophysiology of Botulinum Neurotoxins
    Botulism
    Non-A Botulinum
    The Pharmacology of Botulinum Neurotoxins
    References
    Chapter 2: Anatomical Considerations
    Facial Musculature
    Frontalis Muscle
    Corrugator Muscle
    Procerus Muscle
    Orbicularis Muscle'
    Aging and the Basis of Therapeutic Muscular Relaxation
    References
    Chapter 3: Basic Concepts of Beauty and Youth
    The Importance of the Human Face
    Gender Specifics Skin Pigmentation
    History of Awareness of Facial Beauty
    Concepts and Analysis of Beauty
    References
    Chapter 4: Skin
    Skin: History
    Skin: Structure/Anatomy
    Physiology and the Aging Face
    Bone
    Retaining Structures
    Muscles and Supporting Fascia
    Subcutaneous Layer
    Skin
    Epidermis
    Dermis
    Skin Types
    Skin Aging
    Genetics
    Hormonal
    The Sun
    Visible Light
    Ultraviolet Light
    Infrared Light
    Gender
    Smoking
    Ethnicity
    Optimisation
    Prevention
    Retinoids
    References
    Chapter 5: Clinical Assessment Consultation: History and Examination
    History
    Examination
    Photography and Consent
    Practical Tips
    Chapter 6: Administration of Botulinum Neurotoxin
    Product Selection, Reconstitution and Storage
    Technique and Product Placement
    Common Treatment Areas
    Glabellar Complex
    Top Tips
    Forehead
    Top Tips
    Crow's Feet
    Top Tips
    Post-Injection Advice
    Safety, Side-Effects and Complications
    Systemic
    Localised
    Lack of Effect/Antigenicity
    References
    Chapter 7: Medical Uses of Botulinum Neurotoxin
    Ophthalmology
    Neurology
    Gastroenterology Urology
    Dental
    Psychiatry
    References
    Chapter 8: The Patient's Page
    Basic Premises
    A Patient Writes
    Chapter 9: Education, Training and Regulation
    HEE
    JCCP and CPSA
    References
    Glossary
    Index
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kate Coleman.
    Summary: "Botulinum Toxin in Facial Rejuvenation, 2nd Edition, covers the entire range of the use of botulinum toxin for cosmetic purposes. Dr. Kate Coleman offers practical guidance for safe handling, selection and assessment of patients, potential complications and pitfalls, and aesthetic techniques, as well as comparative modalities and long-term management. This is an ideal resource for anyone who offers this sought-after procedure, including cosmetic surgeons, oculoplastic surgeons, dermatologists, physician's assistants, and registered nurses"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Botulinum toxin : mode of action and serotypes
    Clinical indications and use
    Patient preparation and injection skills
    Patient selection : the art of understanding neuromodulation and symmetry
    The art of patient selection and short- and long-term management
    Contraindications and complications
    Management of crow's feet
    Management of forehead wrinkles
    Treatment of the perioral region, the neck and scars
    Other solutions.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Scott M. Whitcup, Mark Hallett, editors.
    Summary: In a rapidly progressing field, Botulinum Toxin Therapy provides both clinicians and basic researchers with the latest science on the structure and function of botulinum toxins and the use of these toxins to treat a wide variety of diseases. Part 1 of the book reviews the basic science of botulinum toxins including advances in our understanding of the molecular structure and mechanism of action of botulinum toxins. This section also discusses the manufacturing and formulation of botulinum toxins for clinical use and the development of novel therapeutic toxins for the future. Part 2 reviews the use of botulinum toxins in clinical practice. It discusses the clinical pharmacology of botulinum toxin drugs and their use in a wide variety of clinical conditions including headache, spasticity, pain, disorders of the genitourinary and gastrointestinal tract, strabismus, and medical aesthetics.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Basic Science
    The History of Botulinum Toxins in Medicine: A Thousand Year Journey
    The History of Botulinum Toxins in Medicine: A Thousand Year Journey
    Botulinum Neurotoxins: Mechanism of Action
    Manufacturing and Clinical Formulations of Botulinum Neurotoxins
    Novel Native and Engineered Botulinum Neurotoxins
    Part 2. Clinical Practice
    Clinical Pharmacology of Botulinum Toxin Drugs
    The Use of Botulinum Toxin for Treatment of the Dystonias
    The Use of Botulinum Toxin for Treatment of Spasticity
    Use of Botulinum Toxin in Ophthalmology
    Hyperhidrosis and Aesthetics
    Use of Botulinum Toxin in Genitourinary System
    Gastrointestinal Uses of Botulinum Toxin
    The Use of Botulinum Toxin in the Management of Headache Disorders
    Botulinum Toxin and Pain
    The Use of Botulinum Toxin for Treatment of Depression.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bahman Jabbari.
    Summary: Several books have been written on the subject of botulinum toxin and other neurotoxins for treatment of medical disorders including two Springer publications by Dr. Jabbari. However, despite the huge interest and enthusiasm of the public to learn more about this and other toxins, there is currently no book in the market on this subject which is specifically designed to inform and educate the public on botulinum toxin therapy. Botulinum Toxin Treatment explains and discusses in simple language the structure and function of botulinum toxin and other neurotoxins as well as the rational for its utility in different disease conditions. Safety, factors affecting efficacy, and duration of action, as well as cost and insurance issues are also addressed.

    Contents:
    Intro; Dedication; Preface; Contents; Chapter 1: A Neurotoxin Which is Used for Health
    How it all Began?; Introduction; References; Chapter 2: Basics of Structure and Mechanisms of Function of Botulinum Toxin
    How Does it Work?; Introduction; Excessive Sweating and Drooling; Pain; References; Chapter 3: Botox and Other Neurotoxins; Introduction; Botox (Allergan Inc., Irvine California); Xeomin (Merz Pharmaceuticals, Frankfurt- Germany) [3]; Dysport (Ipsen Limited- Paris France) [5]; Myobloc (Neurobloc in Europe -WorldMed/Solstice Neurosciences, Louisville, Kentucky); Preparation/Injection. Botox Treatment of Plantar Faciitis (PF)Sample Case; Piriformis Syndrome (PS); Conclusion; References; Chapter 6: Botulinum Toxin Therapy for Complications of Stroke; Introduction; Spasticity After Stroke and the Role of Botulinum Toxins in Treatment of Stroke- Related Spasticity; Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Spasticity; Technical Issues in Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Stroke Spasticity; Botulinum Toxin Therapy of Persistent Drooling after Stroke; Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Joint Pain after Stroke; Movement Disorders After Stroke; Conclusion; References. Chapter 7: Botulinum Toxin Treatment in Multiple SclerosisIntroduction; Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Spasticity in Multiple Sclerosis; Technique of Injection; Case Report; Botulinum Toxin Therapy for Bladder Problems in Multiple Sclerosis; Injection Technique; Treatment of Pain with Botulinum Toxins in Multiple Sclerosis; Case Report; Movement Disorders in Multiple Sclerosis; Treatment of Difficulty with Swallowing (Dysphagia); Conclusion; References; Chapter 8: Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Bladder and Pelvic Disorders; Introduction; Botulinum Toxins. ConclusionReferences; Chapter 5: Neurotoxins in Management of Pain Disorders- New Encouraging Data; Intoduction; Anatomy of Pain Pathways; Pain Modulation; Pain Perception; Animal Studies of Botulinum Toxins in the Field of Pain; Nerve Endings and Peripheral Receptors; Dorsal Root Ganglion; Spinal Cord Sensory Neurons; Human Pain Syndromes; Chronic Low Back Pain; Patient Observation; Pain After Shingles (Post-Herpetic Neuralgia-PHN)); Treatment; Botulinum Toxin Treatment; Sample Case; Trigeminal Neuralgia (TN); Botulinum Toxin Treatment; Sample Case; Diabetic Neuropathy; Plantar Fasciitis. Non -FDA Approved Botulinum Toxins Used in Far East AsiaProsigne; Meditoxin/Noronox; Definition of Clinical Trials; Study Class and Efficacy Evaluation; References; Chapter 4: The Role of Botulinum Toxins in Treatment of Headaches; Introduction; Migraine and Chronic Migraine; Treatment of Acute Attacks; Preventive Treatment; Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Migraine; PREEMPT Studies; Sites of Botox Injection, Recommended Dose Per Site and Per Session; How to Inject?; Side Effects of Botox Therapy in Chronic Migraine; Episodic Migraine; Tension-Type Headaches; Secondary Headaches; Economic Issues.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bahman Jabbari.
    Summary: This book provides an authoritative overview of botulinum neurotoxin (BoNT) treatment menus for 14 pain categories with an evidence based literature review on each pain disorder, illustrative figures along with brief video clips showing the techniques and patient interviews. Introductory chapters cover basic information about the mechanism, function and the analgesic effects of the BoNTs based on the data derived from animal studies. Clinical chapters define pain in conditions such as post-herpetic and post-traumatic neuralgias, plantar fasciitis, low back pain, post-surgical pain syndromes and migraine in detail, provide discussion of current modes of treatment and updated information on BoNT therapy. Each chapter also includes illustrative case histories. Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Pain Disorders will prove an invaluable resource for clinicians and researchers involved in the treatment of pain disorders including neurologists, pain medicine specialists, anesthesiologists, internists, those conducting research in pharmacology and toxicology as well as students in these areas.

    Contents:
    Molecular Structure, Mode of Action and Immunology of Botulinum Neurotoxins
    Analgesic effects of botulinum neurotoxins: Data from animal studies
    Neuropathic Pain (NP)
    Migraine and Other Primary Headaches
    Botulinum Neurotoxins and Chronic Low Back Pain
    Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Plantar Fasciitis (Plantar Fasciopathy)
    Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Piriformis Syndrome
    Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Myofascial Pain Syndrome and Fibromyalgia
    Pelvic and Urogenital Pain
    Botulinum Toxin Treatment of Chronic Facial pain: Trigeminal Neuralgia, Temporo-Mandibular Disorders and Dental-Related Pain
    Botulinum Neurotoxins for Relief of Pain Associated with Spasticity
    Treatment of Dystonic Pain with Botulinum Neurotoxins
    Botulinum Toxin Therapy for Prevention of Post-surgical Pain
    Botulinum Toxins for Treatment of Pain in Orthopedic Disorders
    Botulinum Toxins for Treatment of Cancer-related, Post-radiation, Post-surgical and End of Life Pain
    Botulinum Neurotoxin Treatment of Unusual and Rare Painful Disorders
    Future Prospects of Pain Treatment with Botulinum Neurotoxins.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Joel L. Cohen, David M. Ozog.
    Contents:
    1. History of Botulinum Toxin for medical and aesthetic use
    2. Anatomy and aesthetic principles
    3. Botulinum Toxin: from molecule to medicine
    4. Myobloc
    5. Abobotulinumtoxin: development and aesthetic usage
    6. IncobotulinumtoxinA (Xeomin/Bocouture)
    7. Future injectable toxins
    8. Reconstitution, dilution, diffusion, and migration of Botulinum Toxin
    9. Patient selection
    10. Treatment of the glabella
    11. Treatment of the forehead
    12. Treatment of the periocular area - Crow's feet, brow and bunny lines
    13. Contouring of the lower face and of the lower leg and calf
    14. Treatment of the perioral area
    15. Neck rejuvenation
    16. Correction of facial asymmetry
    17. Complications and diffusion
    18. Combination therapy of Botuliinum Toxin with other nonsurgical procedures
    19. Peri-procedure Botulinum Toxin for skin cancer patients and scars
    20. Achieving a natural look
    21. Special considerations in darker skin
    22. Axillary hyperhidrosis
    23. Primary focal palm, sole, craniofacial, and compensatory hyperhidrosis
    24. Topical Botulinum Toxin
    25. Exciting new uses of Botulinum Toxin Type A: dermatology/dermatologic surgery and beyond
    26. Modulating affect and mood with Botulinum Toxin injections: psychosocial implications of neuromodulators
    27. Onabotulinumtoxin A (Botox) in dermatology
    Index.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    editor, Phillip M. Devlin, MD, FACR, FASTRO, FFRRCSI(Hon), Chief, Division of Brachytherapy, Institute Physician, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, and Associate Professor of Radiation Oncology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, Massachusetts ; associate editors, Robert A. Cormack, PhD, Associate Professor of Radiation Oncology, Department of Radiation Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute and Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts, Caroline L. Holloway, MD, FRCP(C), Clinical Assistant Professor, Department of Radiation Oncology, University of British Columbia. and Radiation Oncologist, British Columbia Cancer Agency, Vancouver Island Centre, Victoria, British Columbia, Canada, Alexandra J. Stewart, DM, MRCP, FRCR, Clinical Lead for Oncology, St. Luke's Cancer Centre, Royal Surrey County Hospital, and Honorary Senior Lecturer, University of Surrey, Guildford, England.
    Contents:
    A century of brachytherapy (from the prostate's perspective) / Jesse N. Aronowitz
    Radiobiologic concepts for brachytherapy / Alexandra J. Stewart, Robert A. Cormack, and Kathryn D. Held
    Technical aspects of brachytherapy / Mandar S. Bhagwat, Ivan M. Buzurovic, Antonio L. Damato, Scott A. Friesen, Jorgen L. Hansen, Desmond A. O'Farrell, Emily Sugar, and Robert A. Cormack
    Genitourinary brachytherapy / Paul L. Nguyen, André-Guy Martin, and Peter F. Orio
    Gynecologic brachytherapy / Larissa J. Lee, Antonio L. Damato, and Akila N. Viswanathan
    Breast brachytherapy / Simona M. Shaitelman, Chirag Shah, Leonard H. Kim, Frank A. Vicini, Douglas W. Arthur, and Atif J. Khan
    Thoracic brachytherapy / Keyur J. Mehta, Nitika Thawani, and Subhakar Mutyala
    Skin brachytherapy / Phillip M. Devlin and Anna O. Likhacheva
    Head and neck brachytherapy / J. Nicholas Lukens, Kenneth S. Hu, Peter C. Levendag, David Teguh, Paul Busse, and Louis B. Harrison
    Central nervous system brachytherapy / Abigail L. Stockham and Nils D. Arvold
    Gastrointestinal brachytherapy / Alexandra J. Stewart, Nikolaos Tselis, Michele Albert, Nitika Thawani, and Arthur Sun Myint
    Soft tissue sarcoma brachytherapy / Caroline L. Holloway and Chandrajit P. Raut
    Pediatric brachytherapy / Lara Hathout, Suzanne L. Wolden, and Gilad N. Cohen
    Vascular brachytherapy / Chien Peter Chen, Ray Lin, and Prabhakar Tripuraneni
    Foundations of a brachytherapy practice / D. Jeffrey Demanes, Ron DiGiaimo, Casilda Menchaca-Garcia, and Tamara Syverson.
    Digital Access Ovid 2016
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, David X. Cifu ; associate editors, Blessen C. Eapen [and five others].
    Summary: "Thoroughly updated to reflect the latest advances and technologies, Braddom's Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, 6th Edition, remains the market leader in the field of PM&R. For more than 20 years, this bestselling reference has been the go-to resource for the entire rehabilitation team, providing in-depth coverage of essential core principles along with the latest research, technologies, and procedures that enhance patient care and facilitate optimal return to function. In this edition, lead editor Dr. David X. Cifu and his team of expert associate editors and contributing authors employ a more succinct format that emphasizes need-to-know material, incorporating new key summary features, including high-yield information and study sheets for problem-based learning"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    The physiatric history and physical examination
    Examination of the pediatric patient
    Rehabilitation of swallowing disorders
    Psychological assessment and intervention in rehabilitation
    Practical aspects of impairment rating and disability determination
    Occupational medicine and vocational rehabilitation
    Quality and outcome measures for medical rehabilitation
    Electrodiagnostic medicine
    Rehabilitation and prosthetic restoration in upper limb amputation
    Lower limb amputation and gait
    Upper limb orthotic devices
    Lower limb orthoses
    Spinal orthoses
    Wheelchairs and seating systems
    Therapeutic exercise
    Manipulation, traction, and massage
    Physical agent modalities
    Integrative medicine in rehabilitation
    Assistive technology and environmental control devices
    Neurogenic lower urinary tract dysfunction
    Neurogenic bowel : dysfunction and rehabilitation
    Sexual dysfunction and disability
    Spasticity
    Prevention and management of chronic wounds
    Vascular diseases
    Burns
    Acute medical conditions: cardiopulmonary disease, medical frailty, and renal failure
    Chronic medical conditions: : pulmonary disease, organ transplantation, and diabetes
    Cancer rehabilitation
    Geriatrics
    Rheumatologic rehabilitation
    Common neck problems
    Low back disorders
    Osteoporosis
    Upper limb pain and dysfunction
    Lower limb pain and dysfunction a
    Chronic pain
    Pelvic floor disorders
    Sports medicine and adaptive sports
    Motor neuron diseases
    Neuropathies
    Myopathic disorders
    Traumatic brain injury
    Stroke rehabilitation
    Degenerative movement disorders of the central nervous system
    Multiple sclerosis
    Cerebral palsy
    Myelomeningocele and other spinal dysraphisms
    Spinal cord injury
    Auditory, vestibular, and visual impairments.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    David X. Cifu, MD, Henry L. Lew, MD, PhD.
    Summary: Concise and portable, Braddom's Clinical Handbook of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, by Drs. David X. Cifu and Henry L. Lew, gives you dependable, up-to-date content in a handbook format ideally suited for use at the bedside or in outpatient clinics. This quick reference covers the everyday topics you need - assistive devices and orthoses, spasticity, pediatric, adult, and geriatric care, pain management, outcome measures, and much more - all derived from the most trusted name in the field of PM&R.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Joseph Jankovic, John C. Mazziotta, Scott L. Pomeroy, Nancy J. Newman.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ClinicalKey
    ClinicalKey Nursing
  • Digital
    Bruno Colombo, editor.
    Summary: This book analyzes and discusses in detail art therapy, a specific tool used to sustain health in affective developments, rehabilitation, motor skills and cognitive functions. Art therapy is based on the assumption that the process of making art (music, dance, painting) sparks emotions and enhances brain activity. Art therapy is used to encourage personal growth, facilitate particular brain areas or activity patterns, and improve neural connectivity. Treating neurological diseases using artistic strategies offers us a unique option for engaging brain structural networks that enhance the brain's ability to form new connections. Based on brain plasticity, art therapy has the potential to increase our repertoire for treating neurological diseases. Neural substrates are the basis of complex emotions relative to art experiences, and involve a widespread activation of cognitive and motor systems. Accordingly, art therapy has the capacity to modulate behavior, cognition, attention and movement. In this context, art therapy can offer effective tools for improving general well-being, quality of life and motivation in connection with neurological diseases. The book discusses art therapy as a potential group of techniques for the treatment of neurological disturbances and approaches the relationship between humanistic disciplines and neurology from a holistic perspective, reflecting the growing interest in this interconnection.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    Preface
    Introduction
    Is there an artistic treatment for neurological diseases?
    Biology of art
    The beauty and the brain: Neuroaesthetics
    Neurodegenerative diseases and changes in artistic expression
    Painting in neurology
    Illusions in neurology: from phantoms to mirror therapies
    Music and Mirror Neurons
    Opera and Neurology
    Cinema and Neurology, from history to therapy
    Dance therapy: a clinical approach
    Literature and neurology: Marcel Proust and Hermann Von Helmholtz
    Ceroplastic and neurology
    The significance of art therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    David L. Clark, Nash N. Boutros, Mario F. Mendez.
    Summary: "Now in its fourth edition, The Brain and Behavior introduces the field of neurobiology of human behavior to a wide audience, from graduate students to professionals in the fields of psychology, psychiatry and neurology. This comprehensive resource focuses on locating human behaviors to specific regions of the brain, aiming to make a complex topic visually accessible through the inclusion of clear and focused illustrations. This important new edition emphasises recent developments in our understanding of the human brain which have emerged from imaging studies. The text also features patient case histories with documented anatomical evidence, tying the science with actual clinical examples, making it the most accessible book for medical practitioners of all levels. The collaboration between a neuropsychiatrist, a behavioral neurologist and a neuroanatomist has resulted in a book which synthesizes the complex and evolving information on the neurobiology of human behavior, and presents it in an eminently readable volume"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anatomy of the gross brain
    Histology
    Occipital and parietal lobes
    Temporal lobe: neocortical structures
    Frontal lobe
    Basal ganglia
    Diencephalon: hypothalamus and epithalamus
    Diencephalon: thalamus
    Brainstem
    Limbic system: temporal lobe
    Limbic system: cingulate cortex
    Asymmetry and interhemispheric connections.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Hemanshu Prabhakar, Indu Kapoor, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses the underlying mechanisms connecting the brain and heart. The physiology of the brain is such that it is easily affected by any altered physiology of other systems, which in turn may compromise cerebral blood flow and oxygenation. Together, the brain and heart control our body systems, allowing them to function automatically. This interaction between the brain and other systems makes it important for us to understand how any kind of injury to the brain can produce complications in remote organs or systems, such as the heart. The central nervous system is responsible for vegetative function and is central to homeostasis. Further, central nervous system responses are linked to the ongoing function of other organ systems e.g. feeding, thermoregulation, reproduction and muscle activity. It is therefore logical that neural control of the cardiovascular system must also interact with the neural control of other organ systems. This book explains in detail stressed cardiac conditions, discussing the pathophysiology and proposed treatment, and also describing lesser-known crosstalks between the acutely or chronically affected brain and heart.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgement
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Chapter 1: Neurophysiology of Heart
    1.1 Basic Architecture of Cardiac Control
    1.2 Neural Substrate for Control of Heart
    1.2.1 C1 Neurons of Ventrolateral Medulla (VLM)
    1.2.2 Nucleus Ambiguus (NA)
    1.2.3 Nucleus Tractus Solitarius (NTS)
    1.3 Innervation of the Human Heart
    1.3.1 Afferents from the Heart
    1.3.2 Efferents to the Heart
    1.3.3 Cardiac Plexus
    1.3.4 Intrinsic Cardiac Nervous System
    1.4 Effect of Sympathetic and Parasympathetic Drive on Heart 1.4.1 Laterality in the Autonomic Control of the Heart
    1.4.2 Reciprocal Antagonism
    1.4.3 Synergistic Co-activation
    1.4.4 Sequential Activation
    1.4.5 Context Specific Co-activation
    1.5 Neural Organization for Cardiovascular Control
    References
    Chapter 2: Physiology of Cardiovascular System
    2.1 Haemodynamics of Cardiovascular System
    2.1.1 Evolutionary Origins of Design of Cardiovascular System
    2.1.1.1 Teleology
    2.1.2 Pressures and Volumes of Heart and Vasculature
    2.1.2.1 Mean Circulatory Filling Pressure
    2.1.2.2 Stressed and Unstressed Blood Volume 2.1.2.3 Factors Affecting Mean Circulatory Filling Pressure
    2.1.2.4 Effect of Pulsatile Activity of Heart
    2.1.3 Heart as a Pump
    2.1.3.1 Heterometric Autoregulation (Frank-Starling's Law of Heart)
    2.1.3.2 Homeometric Autoregulation
    2.1.3.2.1 Anrep Effect (Effect of Sudden Changes in the Aortic Pressure)
    2.1.3.2.2 Bowditch Effect (Effect of Sudden Change in the Heart Rate)
    2.1.3.3 Importance of Heterometric and Homeometric Autoregulation
    2.1.3.4 Effect of Neural Stimulation on Heart
    2.1.3.5 Cardiac Cycle
    2.1.3.5.1 Left Ventricular Systole 2.1.3.5.2 Left Ventricular Diastole
    2.1.3.6 Ventricular Function Curve
    2.1.3.7 Pressure-Volume Curves of Ventricles
    2.1.3.8 Cardiac Energetics
    2.1.4 Vasculature
    2.1.4.1 Effect of Resistance on Pressure Gradient in Vasculature
    2.1.4.2 Distribution of Cardiac Output
    2.1.5 Cardiac Output
    2.1.5.1 Effect of Change in Resistance on Cardiac Output
    2.1.5.2 Matching Cardiac Output with Oxygen Demand
    2.1.5.3 Cardiac Output as Point of Circulatory Equilibrium
    2.1.5.3.1 Venous Return Curve
    2.1.5.3.2 Cardiac Response Curve
    2.1.5.3.3 Circulatory Equilibrium 2.1.6 Assessment of Pump Function of Heart
    2.2 Cardiac Reflexes
    2.2.1 Afferent and Efferent Pathways for Cardiac Reflexes
    2.2.2 Reflexes Originating from the Baroreceptors
    2.2.2.1 Neural Mechanism of Baroreflex
    2.2.2.2 Quantification of Baroreflex Sensitivity
    2.2.2.3 Normal Values of Baroreflex Sensitivity
    2.2.2.4 Factors Affecting Baroreflex Sensitivity
    2.2.2.5 Baroreflex Sensitivity in Diseases
    2.2.2.6 Role of Baroreflex in Short-Term and Long-Term Regulation of the Blood Pressure
    2.2.3 Reflexes from Atria
    2.2.3.1 Neural Mechanism of Atria Reflexes
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Stefano Govoni, Pierluigi Politi, Emilio Vanoli, editors.
    Summary: Back Cover Text. This ambitious and comprehensive manual represents an essential contribution to our current understanding of interactions between heart and brain, a research topic generating growing interest. Despite the increasing awareness that neural mechanisms are the primary cause of cardiac disease and its progression, therapy continues to focus on end-organ protection and does not approach the neural core of the problem. Growing public health problems such as heart failure are still treated with autonomic drugs that are 30-40 years old and simply act on cardiac receptors. However, it has now been shown that the progression of ischemic heart disease to heart failure is mainly due to abnormal central responses to incipient cardiac disease, with neural activation the primary cause rather than the consequence of cardiac remodeling. Written by leading international experts in their respective research areas, it presents a variety of perspectives on the core topic: from social and philosophical to gender-related aspects. Designed for a broad readership, it includes dedicated sections for cardiologists, psychiatrists, neurologists and psychotherapists looking for a more insightful and targeted approach to neuro-cardiovascular disease.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Editors
    About the Section Ediotrs
    Contributors
    Part I: Functional Anatomy and Molecular Basis of the Cardiac-Brain Axis
    1 Brain-Heart Afferent-Efferent Traffic
    Introduction: Overview of Cardiac Neuronal Control
    Structural and Functional Organization of the Cardiac Nervous System: Peripheral Signaling
    Cardiac Afferent Neurons
    Nodose Ganglion Cardiac Afferent Neurons
    Dorsal Root Ganglion Cardiac Afferent Neurons Cardiovascular Afferent Neurons in Intrathoracic Extracardiac Ganglia and in Ganglionated Plexi
    Cardiac Motor Neurons
    Cardiac Sympathetic Efferent Neurons
    Cardiac Parasympathetic Efferent Neurons
    Local Circuit Neurons
    Structural and Functional Organization of the Cardiac Nervous System: Central Signaling
    Neuraxial Transduction of Cardiac Pathology
    Neuraxial Transduction of Myocardial Ischemia and Infarction
    Neuraxial Transduction in Heart Failure
    Concluding Summary
    Cross-References
    References
    2 Brain-Heart Communication
    Introduction Evidence of Heart-Brain Interactions: The Hardware
    The Signaling Pathways: The Software
    Reflexes and Modulators: A Complex Network Affecting Cardiac Function
    The Baroreceptor Reflex
    Adrenaline
    Angiotensin II
    Natriuretic Peptides
    Neurotrophins
    Conclusions
    Cross-References
    References
    3 The Cardiorenal Cross Talk
    Introduction
    Measurements of Autonomic Nervous System Activity
    Sympathetic Innervation of the Kidney
    The Sympathorenal Axis in Heart Failure Consequences of Neurohormonal Axis Activation and Fluid Retention in the Circulatory System, in the Kidney Function, and in th...
    Conclusion
    References
    4 Genetic Determinants Affecting the Relationship Between the Autonomic Nervous System and Sudden Death
    Introduction
    Neurocardiac Interactions and Ventricular Arrhythmogenesis
    Anatomy
    Physiology
    Role in Ventricular Arrhythmogenesis
    Genetic Determinants of Autonomic Nervous System Remodeling
    Altered Innervation
    Variants in Human Adrenergic Receptors
    Altered Autonomic Nervous System in Neuronal Disease Sudden Infant Death Syndrome
    Sudden Unexpected Death in Epilepsy
    Small Fiber Neuropathy
    Genetic Determinants of Inherited Arrhythmia Syndromes Susceptible to Autonomic Nervous System Triggering
    Long QT Syndrome
    Catecholaminergic Polymorphic Ventricular Tachycardia
    Brugada Syndrome
    Takotsubo Cardiomyopathy
    Sudden Cardiac Death in General Population
    Conclusion
    References
    5 Cognitive Decline in Elderly Patients with Hypertensive Heart Disease
    Introduction
    Hypertension and Hypertensive Heart Disease in the Elderly
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sergey N. Makarov, Gregory M. Noetscher, Aapo Nummenmaa, editors.
    Summary: The 41st Annual International Conference of the IEEE EMBS, took place between July 23 and 27, 2019, in Berlin, Germany. The focus was on "Biomedical engineering ranging from wellness to intensive care." This conference provided an opportunity for researchers from academia and industry to discuss a variety of topics relevant to EMBS and hosted the 4th Annual Invited Session on Computational Human Models. At this session, a bevy of research related to the development of human phantoms was presented, together with a substantial variety of practical applications explored through simulation.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Tumor Treating Fields Dosimetry and Treatment Planning
    A Theory of Mechanisms Underlying 200 kHz AC Electric Fields Effects on Tumor Cell Structures
    A thermal study of Tumor Treating Fields for glioblastoma therapy
    Improving Tumor Treating Fields with Skull Remodeling Surgery. Surgery Planning and Treatment Evaluation with Finite Element Methods
    A Computational FEM Parcelled-Brain Model for Electric Field Analysis in Transcranial Direct Current Stimulation
    Computer Model of Electroconvulsive Therapy with Tractography Analysis
    Personalization of multi-electrode setups in tCS: methods and advantages
    Solving High-Resolution Forward Problems for Extra- and Intracranial Neurophysiological Recordings Using Boundary Element Fast Multipole Method
    Modeling Primary Fields of TMS Coils with the Fast Multipole Method
    Functional Requirements of Small- and Large-Scale Neural Circuitry Connectome Models
    A miniaturized ultra-focal magnetic stimulator and its preliminary application to the peripheral nervous system
    Modelling studies of non-invasive electric and magnetic stimulation of the spinal cord
    Simplifying the Numerical Human Model with k-means Clustering Method
    Using Anatomical Human Body Model for FEM SAR Simulation of a 3T MRI System
    RF-Induced Unintended Stimulation for Implantable Medical Devices in MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Hemanshu Prabhakar, Nidhi Gupta, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses normal brain physiology and renal physiology, as well as the interactions between the two. The physiology of the brain can easily be affected by any changes to the physiology of other systems, which in turn may compromise cerebral blood flow and oxygenation. Together the brain and the renal system help our body systems to function automatically. The book addresses the basic aspects of neurophysiology and renal physiology in three broad sections, the first of which covers the basic principles of cerebral physiology and neural regulation of the renal system. The second part reviews the normal physiology of the renal system, including the mechanism of action, while the last section summarizes the correlation between the brain and kidney. Highly informative and clearly structured, the book provides essential insights for anyone with an interest in physiology and medicine.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgement
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Neurophysiology and Renal System
    1.1 Basics of Cerebral Physiology
    1.1.1 Cerebral Blood Flow and Autoregulation
    1.1.1.1 Cerebral Blood Flow
    1.1.1.2 Cerebral Autoregulation
    1.1.2 Blood Cerebrospinal Fluid and Blood-Brain Barrier
    1.1.3 Role of Brain in Body Fluid Dynamics
    1.2 Neural Regulation of Renal System
    1.2.1 Efferent Signals from Central Nervous System to Kidneys
    1.2.1.1 Neural Control of the Renal Circulation
    1.2.1.2 Neural Control of Renal Tubular Function 1.2.1.3 Neural Control of Renal Hormonal Secretion
    1.2.2 Afferent Signals from Kidneys to Central Nervous System
    1.2.2.1 Renorenal Reflex Control of Renal Function
    1.2.2.2 Mechanisms of Activation of Renal Sensory Nerves
    1.3 Role of Renal Sympathetic Nerves in Pathophysiological States
    1.3.1 Hypertension
    1.3.2 Chronic Sodium-Retaining Edema-Forming States
    1.4 Brain-Gut-Kidney Axis
    1.5 Conclusion
    References
    2: Normal Physiology of Renal System
    2.1 Structure and Function of Kidney
    2.1.1 Gross Structure
    2.1.1.1 Location 2.1.1.2 Cortex and Medulla
    2.1.2 Functional Unit: The Nephron
    2.1.2.1 Renal Corpuscle
    2.1.2.2 Renal Tubule
    2.1.3 Types of Nephrons
    2.1.4 Juxtaglomerular Apparatus
    2.1.5 Vascular Supply and Innervation of Kidney
    2.1.5.1 Vascular Supply
    2.1.5.2 Innervation of Kidney
    2.1.6 Functions of Kidney
    2.1.7 Recent Advances
    2.2 Glomerular Filtration Rate (GFR)
    2.2.1 Mechanism of Generation of GFR
    2.2.1.1 Pressure Gradients
    2.2.1.2 Filtration Coefficient
    2.2.2 Factors Effecting Glomerular Filtration Rate: (Bhaskar and Oommen 2018) 2.2.3 Regulation of Glomerular Filtration Rate
    2.2.4 Effect of Vasoconstrictors and Vasodilators (Hall and Brands 2012)
    2.2.5 Measurement of GFR (Gaspari et al. 1997)
    2.2.5.1 Filtration Markers
    2.2.5.2 Renal Clearance
    2.2.5.3 Creatinine Clearance Test
    Estimated Creatinine Clearance
    2.2.5.4 SNGFR Estimation Technique (Moore 1984)
    2.3 Transport of Solute Across Kidneys
    2.3.1 Active Transport
    2.3.2 Passive Transport
    2.3.3 Proximal Tubule (Curthoys and Moe 2014)
    2.3.3.1 Sodium Reabsorption
    2.3.3.2 Water Reabsorption 2.3.3.3 Glucose Reabsorption (Mather and Pollock 2011)
    2.3.4 Loop of Henle
    2.3.5 Distal Convoluted Tubule
    2.3.6 Collecting Duct
    2.3.6.1 Reabsorption of Solutes
    2.3.6.2 Reabsorption of Water
    2.4 Urine Concentration and Dilution
    2.4.1 Why Is There a Need for Urine Concentration?
    2.4.1.1 How Is Urine Concentration Achieved?
    The Solute and Water Permeability Characteristics of Each Tubule Segment (Table 2.4)
    The Osmotic Gradient Between the Tubule Lumen and Its Surrounding Interstitium (Knepper and Stephenson 1986)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hemanshu Prabhakar, Charu Mahajan, editors.
    Summary: The central nervous system, which includes the brain and spinal cord, has a high metabolic demand. The physiology of the brain is such that it is easily affected by alterations in other systems, which in turn can compromise cerebral blood flow and oxygenation. Together the brain and spinal cord control the automatic function of our body systems. While other systems of body controls individual functions, central nervous system at the same time does many different functions, especially, controlling the function of other systems. This interaction between the brain and other systems is important when it comes to understanding how injuries to the brain can, at times, produce complications in remote organs or systems of the body, such as the lungs. This book explains the lesser-known crosstalks between acutely or chronically affected brain and lung, describing the pathophysiology of the lung following brain injury and discussing in detail the conflicts between the brain and lungs in relation to the tidal volumes, positive end-expiratory pressures, arterial carbon dioxide and oxygen levels, recruitment maneuvers and positioning, as well as potential therapeutic targets. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgement
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Neurophysiology of Respiratory System
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Historical Perspective
    1.3 Phases of Respiration
    1.4 Basic Architecture of Neural Network for Control of Respiration
    1.5 Neural Substrate for Control of Respiration
    1.5.1 Pre-Bötzinger Complex (Pre-BotC)
    1.5.2 Post-Inspiratory Complex (PICO)
    1.5.3 Parafacial Respiratory Group (pFRG)
    1.5.3.1 Lateral Parafacial Respiratory Group (Lateral pFRG)
    1.5.3.2 Retrotrapezoid Nucleus (RTN)/Ventral Parafacial Respiratory Group 1.5.3.3 Botzinger Complex (BotC)
    1.5.3.4 Kölliker-Fuse (KF)
    1.6 Afferents
    1.6.1 Peripheral Chemoreceptor
    1.6.1.1 Carotid Body
    1.6.1.2 Aortic Bodies
    1.6.2 Central Chemoreceptor
    1.6.2.1 Mechanism of CO2/H+ Sensing
    1.6.3 Mechanoreceptors and Chemosensitive Receptors in Lungs
    1.6.3.1 Mechanoreceptors
    1.6.3.2 Chemosensitive Receptors
    1.6.4 Metabotropic Receptors in Muscles
    1.6.5 Central Pathways and NTS
    1.7 Neural Network for the Respiratory Rhythm
    1.7.1 Neural Substrate for Inspiratory Rhythm
    1.7.1.1 Pacemaker Model 1.7.1.2 Burstlet Model (Modification of Group Pacemaker Model)
    1.7.1.3 Network Ring Model
    1.7.2 Neural Substrate for Post-Inspiratory Phase
    1.7.3 Neural Network for Active Expiration
    1.7.4 Neural Network for Sighs
    1.8 Neural Network for Respiratory Pattern
    1.8.1 Phase Switching
    1.8.2 Proposed Operation of the Model
    References
    2: Physiological Modulation of Respiration and Respiratory Reflexes
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Ventilatory Response to Changes in PaO2 and PaCO2 and Exercise
    2.2.1 Hypoxic Ventilatory Response 2.2.1.1 Effect of Intensity of Hypoxia on HVR
    2.2.1.2 Effect of Duration of Hypoxia on HVR
    2.2.1.3 Effect of Intermittent Hypoxia on HVR, Long-Term Facilitation
    2.2.2 Hypercapnic Ventilatory Response and Effect of pH
    2.2.3 Mechanism of Hypoxic Ventilatory Response and Hypercapneic Ventilatory Response
    2.2.4 Arousal in Hypoxia and Hypercapnia
    2.2.5 Exercise Hyperpnea
    2.2.5.1 Ventilatory Changes During Exercise
    2.2.5.2 Mechanism of Exercise Hyperpnea
    2.2.5.3 Plasticity of the Exercise Hyperpnea
    2.3 Respiratory Reflexes 2.3.1 Reflexes for Protection and Clearing of Airways
    2.3.1.1 Nasotrigeminal Reflex
    2.3.1.2 Sneeze Reflex
    2.3.1.3 Aspiration Reflex
    2.3.1.4 Expiration Reflex
    2.3.1.5 Tracheo-bronchial Cough Reflex
    2.3.2 Reflexes for Modulation of Respiration
    2.3.2.1 Reflexes Originating from Mechanoreceptors
    2.3.2.2 Reflexes from C-type Unmyelinated Fibres
    2.3.2.3 Upper Airway Negative Pressure Reflex
    2.3.2.4 Sigh and Gasps
    2.3.3 Modulation of Breathing in Behavioural States and Non-respiratory Motor Activities
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Andreas Steck, Barbara Steck.
    Contents:
    CHAPTER 1
    I CONSCIOUSNESS
    The Problem of Consciousness
    Neurobiology of Consciousness Models of Consciousness
    The Global Workspace Model
    The Dynamic Core Model
    Epilogue
    Conscious Perception
    The Embodied Mind
    Understanding the Human Brain by Studying Large Scale Networks
    Challenges
    II CLINICAL VIEW OF CONSCIOUSNESS
    Introduction
    The Pathophysiology of Reduced Consciousness
    The Construction of the Conscious Brain
    The Hierarchy of Consciousness
    When Consciousness Fades
    Anesthesia
    Minimally Conscious State
    Altered Consciousness in Neurological Disorders
    Disconnection and Neglect
    Epilepsy
    Narcolepsy
    Alzheimer's disease
    CHAPTER 2
    I MEMORY
    Introduction
    Different Types of Memory
    The Dynamics of Memory Traces
    The Molecular Biology of Memory
    Neurogenesis: Links to Memory and Behavior
    II CLINICAL VIEW OF MEMORY
    The Memory Machinery
    Infantile Amnesia
    Mind, Time and Memory
    Mind and Time in Childhood and Adolescence
    Re-transcription of Memory
    Emotions and Memory
    Amnesias and Memory Disorders
    Transient Global Amnesia
    Chronic or Progressive Amnestic Disorders
    CHAPTER 3
    I EMOTIONS
    Evolving Concept of the Limbic System
    Emotion and Behavior
    Emotional Systems
    The Role of the Frontal Lobe
    Social Emotion and Social Norm
    II THE DEVELOPMENT OF SELF
    Brain Development and the Self
    Psychological and Self
    Development
    True and False Self
    Early Parent
    Child Relationship
    Parenthood
    Early Relationship Disorders
    CHAPTER 4
    I LANGUAGE
    The Evolutionary Origin of Language
    The Classical Language Regions
    The Language Network
    The Neural Basis of Speech Perception and Language
    Language Learning Disorders
    II COMMUNICATION
    Introduction
    Gestural Communication
    Social Interactions or Proto-Conversations
    Speech and Language
    III MUSIC
    Introduction
    Music and the Brain
    Music in Early Human Development
    The Emotional Power of Music
    CHAPTER 5
    STRESS AND TRAUMA
    Stress and the Brain
    Neurobiological Responses to Stress
    Stress and Mental Disorders
    New Avenues for Treatment
    Psychic Trauma
    Concepts
    Psychic Trauma in Children
    Psychobiological Aspects
    Psychodynamic Aspects
    Symptoms and Phases of Psychic Trauma
    Familial Aspects
    Post-Traumatic Consequences
    Post-Traumatic Stress Disorders
    Risk for Psychic Traumatization
    Children of Mentally or Somatically Ill Parents
    Psychotherapeutic Interventions
    Adoption
    CHAPTER 6
    I PAIN AND MIND-BODY
    Introduction
    Pain Mechanisms and Functions
    The Affective Pain System
    Notes on Chronic Pain
    II SOMATIZATION
    PSYCHOSOMATICS
    The Mind
    Body Dilemma
    Psychosomatics
    Speaking Body, Speechless Mind
    Somatization in Children and Adolescents
    CHAPTER 7
    RESILIENCE
    A Dynamic Concept
    Gene
    Environment
    Interactions
    Adoption
    Development
    Temperament
    Stress
    Depression
    Attachment
    Resilience promotion
    CHAPTER 8
    GRIEF
    Introduction
    Prolonged Grief Disorder or Complicated Grief
    Grief in Children and Adolescents
    Pathological Grief and Secret
    Transgenerational Transmission of Traumatic Events
    Neurobiology of Grief and Depression
    New Treatments for Depression
    CHAPTER 9
    DREAMS AND THE DREAMING BRAIN
    History
    The 24-Hour Brain
    Neurophysiology of Dreams
    Transition States of Sleep
    Functions of Dreams
    Lucid Dreaming
    Daydreaming
    Nightmares
    Music in Dreams
    Dream Work in Psychotherapy
    CHAPTER 10
    NOTES TO PSYCHOTHERAPY
    Introduction
    Dialogue between Psychoanalysis and Neuroscience
    Transference and Intersubjective Relationship
    Interpretation / Intervention
    Psychoanalytical Therapy for Patients with Adverse Childhood Experiences
    Psychotherapy in Children and Adolescents
    Indication for Psychoanalytical Therapy
    Psychoanalytical Psychotherapy
    Play
    Psychoanalytical Therapeutic Group Psychodrama
    Psychopharmacological Treatment
    Narratives
    Introduction
    Narratives in Psychotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Moncef Berhouma, Pierre Krolak-Salmon, editors.
    Summary: This unique and richly illustrated volume presents the state of the art in the comprehensive management of major neurosurgical diseases in the elderly (aged 65 and over). It explores all of the common neurosurgical pathologies affecting elderly patients, and emphasizes the paramount importance of tailored management strategies for quality of life. It highlights updated techniques for anaesthesia and critical care, as well as minimally invasive neurosurgical methods intended for this specific group of patients. Radiosurgery treatment is also discussed, in particular for brain tumours. In western societies, the proportion of elderly citizens has nearly reached 20%, and shows no signs of slowing down. The management of neurosurgical conditions in this particular population requires specific multidisciplinary strategies. To address this situation, a team of internationally respected contributors accurately describe degenerative and traumatic spinal diseases, which account for the majority of admissions among the elderly, as well as brain tumours and intracranial haemorrhages, aspects that are raising new ethical issues. The book mainly addresses the needs of neurosurgeons and geriatric neurologists, but also neuro-oncologists and neuro-anaesthesists working with elderly patients, as well as students in these disciplines.

    Contents:
    Part 1. Generalities. 1. Rapid growth in the elderly population of the world / Louis G. Pol
    2. A brief physiology of the aging / Moncef Berhouma
    3. Neurological assessment and neurocognitive evaluation of the elderly / Pierre Krolak-Salmon
    Part 2. Neuroanesthesia and critical care. 4. Neurosurgical anesthesia for the elderly: Is age really just a number? / David A. Wyler, Elizabeth M. Gabrielli, W. Andrew Kofke
    5. Perioperative neurotoxicity in the elderly; / Elizabeth M. Gabrielli, Roderic G. Eckenhoff
    6. Central nervous system infections in the elderly / Rodrigo Hasbun, Allan R. Tunkel
    Part 3. Intracranial tumors. 7. Intracranial meningiomas in the elderly / David B. Schul, Chochlidakis Nikos, Chirstianto B. Lumento
    8. Brain gliomas in the elderly / Cristina Izquierdo Gracia, Francois Ducray
    9. Pituitary adenomas / Paolo Cappabianca, Chiara Caggiano, Domenico Solari, Karol Migliorati, Waleed A. Azab, Elia Guadagno, Marialaura del Basso de Caro, Emmanuel Jouanneau, Luigi M. Cavallo
    10. Vestibular schwannoma surgery in the elderly / Philip Y. Sun, Marina L. Castner, Kathryn M. van Abel, Colin L.W. Driscoll, Michael J. Link
    11. Management of primary CNS lymphoma in elderly patients / Andreas F. Hottinger, Bianca Moura, Francesco Grandoni, Rita de Micheli
    12. Management of brain metastases: Distinctive features in the elderly / Moncef Berhouma
    Part 4. Spinal diseases. 13. Degenerative spine disease / Christian Ewald, Albrecht Waschke
    14. Spinal injuries of the elderly / Christopher D. Witiw, Laureen D. Hachem, Michael G. Fehlings
    15. Extradural vertebral tumors in the elderly / Ryan J. Filler, Timothy T. Roberts, Edward C. Benzel
    16. Intramedullary spinal cord tumors / Rajiv R. Iyer, George I. Jallo
    17. Intradural extramedullary spoinal tumors / Owoicho Adogwa, Richard G. Fessler
    18. Spinal infections / Hideki Nagashima
    Part 5. Head injury. 19. Traumatic brain injury in the elderly / Verena Röckelein, Michael Buchfelder, Andrea Kleindienst
    20. Chronic subdural haematoma in the elderly / Ellie Edlmann, Peter J. Hutchinson, Angelos G. Kolias
    Part 6. Neurovascular. 21. Subarachnoid hemorrhage in the elderly / Mats Ryttlefors, Per Enblad
    22. Spontaneous intracerebral hemorrhage in the elderly / Moncef Berhouma, Timothée Jacquesson, Emmanuel Jouanneau
    23. Swollen middle cerebral artery stroke in the elderly / Desmond A. Briown, Eelco F.M. Wijdicks
    Part 7. Miscellaneous. 24. Trigeminal neuralgia in the elderly / Jonathan Cohen, Hossein Mousavi, Raymond F. Sekula Jr.
    25. Hydrocephalus in the elderly: Diagnosis of idiopathic normal / Albert M. Isaacs, Mark G. Hamilton, Michael A. Williams
    26. Hydrocephalus in the elderly: Surgical management of idiopathic normal pressure hydrocephalus / Albert M. Isaacs, Michael A. Williams, Mark G. Hamilton
    27. Ethics in neurosurgery for the elderly / Farshad Nassiri, Mark Bernstein
    Appendix
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Vladimír Beneš, Ondřej Bradáč, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Motivation to this study
    AVM definition and angioarchitecture
    Feeding arteries
    Associated aneurysms
    Nidus component
    Draining veins
    Genetics of arteriovenous malformations
    Epidemiology of AVM
    Physiology of arteriovenous malformations
    Arterial side
    Steal phenomenon
    Normal perfusion pressure breakthrough
    Venous side
    Occlusive hyperemia
    Compartmental model of AVM nidus
    AVM presentation
    Hemorrhagic presentation
    Morbidity and mortality of AVM related intracranial haemorrhage
    Epilepsy presentation
    Focal neurologic deficit (FND)
    Natural course
    AVM grading
    Surgical AVM grading
    Radiosurgical AVM grading
    Imaging
    Catheter angiography
    Magnetic resonance imaging
    Computed tomography
    Treatment for brain AVMs
    Literature series
    Surgery
    Endovascular embolization
    Stereotactic radiosurgery
    Combined treatment
    ARUBA study comments.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Ingeborg Huitinga and Maree J. Webster.
    Summary: "Brain Banking, Volume 150, serves as the only book on the market offering comprehensive coverage of the functional realities of brain banking. It focuses on brain donor recruitment strategies, brain bank networks, ethical issues, brain dissection/tissue processing/tissue dissemination, neuropathological diagnosis, brain donor data, and techniques in brain tissue analysis. In accordance with massive initiatives, such as BRAIN and the EU Human Brain Project, abnormalities and potential therapeutic targets of neurological and psychiatric disorders need to be validated in human brain tissue, thus requiring substantial numbers of well characterized human brains of high tissue quality with neurological and psychiatric diseases"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section I. Brain donor recruitment strategies. The Netherlands Brain Bank for Psychiatry
    Brain donation procedures in the sudden death brain bank in Edinburgh
    Section II. Brain bank networks. Autism BrainNet
    The NIH NeuroBioBank: Creating opportunities for human brain research
    Section III. Ethical Aspects of Brain Banking and Management of Brain Banks
    Design of a European code of conduct for brain banking
    A review of brain biorepository management and operations
    A new viewpoint: running a non-profit brain bank as a business
    Section IV. Brain dissection, tissue processing and tissue dissemination. The New York Brain Bank of Columbia University: Practical highlights of 35 years of experience
    Neurochemical markers as potential indicators of post-mortem tissue quality
    Section V. Neuropathological diagnosis. Minimal neuropathological diagnosis for brain banking in the normal middle aged and aged brain and in neurodegenerative disorders
    Brain donation at autopsy: Clinical characterization and toxicological analyses
    Section VI. Brain donor data: clinical, genetic, radiologic and research data storage and mining. Information technology for brain banking
    Collecting, storing and mining research data in a brain bank
    What can we learn about brain donors? Use of clinical information in human postmortem brain research
    The art of matching brain tissue from patients and controls for postmortem research
    Section VII. Human brain tissue analyses: old and new techniques. Considerations for optimal use of postmortem human brains for molecular psychiatry: Lessons from schizophrenia
    Epigenetic analysis of human brain tissue
    Laser microdissection and gene expression profiling in the human postmortem brain
    Purification of cells from fresh human brain tissue: Primary human glial cells
    Proteomics and lipidomics in the human brain
    3-D imaging in the post-mortem human brain with CLARITY and CUBIC
    Neuronal life after death: Electrophysiological recordings from neurons in adult human brain tissue obtained through surgical resection or post-mortem
    Post-mortem magnetic resonance imaging
    Cyto- and receptorarchitectonic mapping of the human brain
    Mapping pathological circuitry in schizophrenia
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Dana H. Ballard.
    Contents:
    Brain computation
    Brain overview
    Neurons and circuits
    Cortical memory
    Programs via reinforcement
    Sensory-motor routines
    Motor routines
    Operating system
    Decision making
    Emotions
    Consciousness.
    Digital Access EBSCOhost 2015
  • Digital
    Claude Clément.
    Summary: This book is about the field of brain-computer interfaces (BCI) and the unique and special environment of active implants that electrically interface with the brain, spinal cord, peripheral nerves, and organs. At the heart of the book is the matter of repairing and rehabilitating patients suffering from severe neurologic impairments, from paralysis to movement disorders and epilepsy, that often requires an invasive solution based on an implanted device. Past achievements, current work, and future perspectives of BCI and other interactions between medical devices and the human nervous system are described in detail from a pragmatic point of view. Reviews the Active Implantable Medical Devices (AIMDs) industry and how it is moving from cardiac to neuro applications Clear, easy to read, presentation of the field of neuro-technologies for human benefit Provides easy to understand explanations about the technical limitations, the physics of implants in the human body, and realistic long terms perspectives.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Author; Abbreviations and Acronyms;
    Chapter 1: Introduction; 1.1 Brain-Computer Interface (BCI); 1.2 Technology Versus Science; 1.3 This Is Not Science Fiction; 1.3.1 Cochlear Implants (CI); 1.3.2 Deep Brain Stimulation (DBS); 1.3.3 Spinal Cord Stimulation (SCS); 1.3.4 Sacral Nerve Stimulation (SNS); 1.3.5 Vagal Nerve Stimulation (VNS); 1.3.6 Various Devices; 1.4 Pioneers, Doers, and Dreamers; 1.4.1 Pioneers; 1.4.1.1 Pacemakers; 1.4.1.2 Implantable Cardiac Defibrillators (ICDs); 1.4.1.3 Cochlear Implants; 1.4.1.4 Deep Brain Stimulation 1.4.1.5 Spinal Cord Stimulation1.4.2 Doers; 1.4.2.1 Spinal Cord Stimulation; 1.4.2.2 Sacral Nerve Stimulation; 1.4.2.3 Vagal Nerve Stimulation; 1.4.2.4 Retinal Implants; 1.4.2.5 Peripheral Nerve Stimulation (PNS); 1.4.2.6 Intelligent Prosthesis for Amputees; 1.4.2.7 Diagnostic and Monitoring of Epileptic Patients; 1.4.2.8 BCI for Sensing Motor Areas of the Cortex; 1.4.2.9 Others; 1.4.3 Dreamers; 1.5 The Age of Neuro-Technologies; 1.5.1 Convergence of Technologies; 1.5.2 Limitations of the Pharma- and Bio-Industries; 1.5.3 Unmet Medical Needs; References;
    Chapter 2: From Concept to Patient 2.1 Translational Medicine2.1.1 From Ideas to Products; 2.1.2 Valley of Death; 2.1.3 Multicultural Approach; 2.1.4 Setting Priorities; 2.1.5 Prepare a Plan; 2.1.6 Think About Costs; 2.2 Understanding Our Environment; 2.2.1 Regulated Environment; 2.2.2 Users' Needs; 2.2.3 Human Factors; 2.2.4 Implantology; 2.2.5 Think About Patients and Healthcare Players; 2.2.6 Do Not Listen to Engineers; 2.2.7 Check What Others Are Doing; 2.2.8 Search Reasons of Successes and Failures; 2.2.9 Cumulated Cash-Flow; 2.2.10 Reimbursement; 2.2.11 Global Social Costs; 2.2.12 Intellectual Property (IP); References 3.4.5 Retinal Implants (RI)3.4.6 Urinary Incontinence (UI); 3.4.7 NeuroPace; 3.4.8 Various; 3.5 Long-Term Clinical Perspectives; References;
    Chapter 4: The Human Body: A Special Environment; 4.1 Active Implantable Medical Devices (AIMDs); 4.2 A Special Environment; 4.2.1 Not Negotiable; 4.2.2 Laws of Physics; 4.2.3 Surgical Aspects; 4.2.4 Reaction of Body Tissues; 4.3 Biocompatibility; 4.4 Biostability; 4.5 Corrosion; 4.5.1 Generalities on Corrosion of AIMDs; 4.5.2 Specificities of Corrosion in the Human Body; 4.6 Cleanliness; 4.7 Sterility; 4.8 Accelerated Aging
    Chapter 3: Targets of Neuro-Technologies3.1 Interfacing with the Nervous System; 3.2 Invasiveness; 3.2.1 Noninvasive; 3.2.2 Not So Invasive; 3.2.3 Invasive; 3.3 Invasive Interfaces; 3.3.1 Interfacing with the Brain; 3.3.2 Interfacing with the Spinal Cord; 3.3.3 Interfacing with the Vagal Nerve; 3.3.4 Interfacing with Peripheral Nerves; 3.3.5 Interfacing with Organs; 3.4 Achievements; 3.4.1 Cochlear Implants (CI); 3.4.2 Deep Brain Stimulation (DBS), Parkinson's Disease (PD); 3.4.3 Spinal Cord Stimulation (SCS) for Chronic Back Pain (CBP); 3.4.4 Vagal Nerve Stimulation (VNS)
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    volume editor, Nick F. Ramsey, Jose del R. Millan.
    Contents:
    1. Human brain function and brain-computer interfaces
    2. Brain-computer interfaces: definitions and principles
    3. Stroke and potential benefits of brain to computer interface
    4. Brain-computer interfaces for people with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    5. Brain damage by trauma
    6. Spinal cord lesions
    7. Brain:computer interfaces for communication
    8. Applications of brain-computer interfaces to the control of robotic and prosthetic arms
    9. BCI for rehab ('not control')
    10. Video games as rich environments to foster brain plasticity
    11. Consciousness and communication brain-computer interfaces in severely brain-injured patients
    12. Smart neuromodulation in movement disorders
    13. Bidirectional brain computer interfaces
    14. Brain-computer interfaces and virtual reality for neurorehabilitation
    15. Monitoring performance of professional and occupational operators
    16. Self-Health Monitoring and wearable neurotechnologies
    17. Brain-computer interfaces for basic neuroscience
    18. Electroencephalography
    19. iEEG: dura-lining electrodes
    20. Local field potentials for BCI control
    21. Real-time fMRI for brain-computer interfacing
    22. Merging brain-computer interface and functional electrical stimulation technologies for movement restoration
    23. General principles of machine learning for brain-computer interfacing
    24. Ethics and the emergence of brain-computer interface medicine
    25. Industrial perspectives on brain-computer interface technology
    26. Hearing the needs of clinical users.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Damien Coyle.
    Contents:
    Part I: User training. Advances in user-training for mental-imagery-based BCI control: Psychological and cognitive factors and their neural correlates / C. Jeunet, B. N?Kaoua, F. Lotte
    Part II: Non-invasive decoding of 3D hand and arm movements. From classic motor imagery to complex movement intention decoding: The noninvasive Graz-BCI approach / G.R. Müller-Putz, A. Schwarz, J. Pereira, P. Ofner
    3D hand motion trajectory prediction from EEG mu and beta bandpower / A. Korik, R. Sosnik, N. Siddique, D. Coyle
    Multisession, noninvasive closed-loop neuroprosthetic control of grasping by upper limb amputees / H.A. Agashe, A.Y. Paek, J.L. Contreras-Vidal
    Part III: Patients studies and clinical applications. Brain?computer interfaces in the completely locked-in state and chronic stroke / U. Chaudhary, N. Birbaumer, A. Ramos-Murguialday
    Brain?machine interfaces for rehabilitation of poststroke hemiplegia / J. Ushiba, S.R. Soekadar
    Neural and cortical analysis of swallowing and detection of motor imagery of swallow for dysphagia rehabilitation?A review / H. Yang, K.K. Ang, C. Wang, K.S. Phua, C. Guan
    A cognitive brain?computer interface for patients with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis / M.R. Hohmann, T. Fomina, V. Jayaram, N. Widmann, C. Förster, J. Just, M. Synofzik, B. Schölkopf, L. Schöls, M. Grosse-Wentrup
    Brain?computer interfaces for patients with disorders of consciousness / R.M. Gibson, A.M. Owen, D. Cruse
    Part IV: Non-medical applications. A passive brain?computer interface application for the mental workload assessment on professional air traffic controllers during realistic air traffic control tasks / P. Aricò, G. Borghini, G. Di Flumeri, A. Colosimo, S. Pozzi, F. Babiloni
    3D graphics, virtual reality, and motion-onset visual evoked potentials in neurogaming / R. Beveridge, S. Wilson, D. Coyle
    Part V: BCI in practice and usability considerations. Interfacing brain with computer to improve communication and rehabilitation after brain damage / A. Riccio, F. Pichiorri, F. Schettini, J. Toppi, M. Risetti, R. Formisano, M. Molinari, L. Astolfi, F. Cincotti, D. Mattia
    BCI in practice / D.J. McFarland, T.M. Vaughan.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Maureen Clerc, Laurent Bougrain, Fabien Lotte.
    Contents:
    Anatomy of the nervous system
    Functional neuroimaging
    Cerebral electrogenesis
    Physiological markers for controlling active and reactive BCIs
    Neurophysiological markers for passive brain-computer interfaces
    Electroencephalography data preprocessing
    EEG feature extraction
    Analysis of extracellular recordings
    Statistical learning for BCIs
    Adaptive methods in machine learning
    Human learning for brain-computer interfaces
    Brain-computer interfaces for human-computer interaction
    Brain training with neurofeedback.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Gerd Grübler, Elisabeth Hildt, editors.
    Summary: This volume summarizes the ethical, social and cultural contexts of interfacing brains and computers. It is intended for the interdisciplinary community of BCI stakeholders. Insofar, engineers, neuroscientists, psychologists, physicians, care-givers and also users and their relatives are concerned. For about the last twenty years brain-computer-interfaces (BCIs) have been investigated with increasing intensity and have in principle shown their potential to be useful tools in diagnostics, rehabilitation and assistive technology. The central promise of BCI technology is enabling severely impaired people in mobility, grasping, communication, and entertainment. Successful applications are for instance communication devices enabling locked-in patients in staying in contact with their environment, or prostheses enabling paralysed people in reaching and grasping. In addition to this, it serves as an introduction to the whole field of BCI for any interested reader. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Usiakimi Igbaseimokumo.
    Summary: This book is intended for frontline doctors the world over to take away the myth surrounding the emergency CT brain scan and to empower them to serve their patients better. It presents and elucidates the basic, almost foolproof steps in their interpretation.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the basics of brain CT scan
    Head injury
    Brain haemorrhage and infarction : stroke
    Hydrocephalus
    Tumours and infections (SOL)
    Advanced uses of brain CT scan.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    by Eelco F.M. Wijdicks.
    Contents:
    History of brain death
    Neurology of brain death
    International criteria of brain death
    Beliefs about brain death
    Critics and brain death
    Procurement after brain death
    Clinical problems in brain death and organ donation.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Simon G. Sprecher.
    Contents:
    Immunostaining of the Developing Embryonic and Larval Drosophila Brain
    Non-Fluorescent RNA In Situ-Hybridization Combined with Antibody Staining to Visualize Multiple Gene Expression Patterns in the Embryonic Brain of Drosophila
    Analysis of Complete Neuroblast Cell Lineages in the Drosophila Embryonic Brain via DiI-Labeling
    Flybow to Dissect Circuit Assembly in the Drosophila Brain
    Immunofluorescent Labeling of Neural Stem Cells in the Drosophila Optic Lobe
    Using MARCM to Study Drosophila Brain Development
    Dye Coupling and Immunostaining of Astrocyte-Like Glia Following Intracellular Injection of Fluorochromes in Brain Slices of the Grasshopper, Schistocerca gregaria
    Methods in Brain Development of Molluscs
    In Situ Hybridization and Immunostaining of Xenopus Brain
    Microinjection Manipulations in the Elucidation of Xenopus Brain Development
    Morpholino Studies in Xenopus Brain Development
    Sensitive Whole-Mount Fluorescent In Situ Hybridization in Zebrafish Using Enhanced Tyramide Signal Amplification
    Dynamic Neuroanatomy at Subcellular Resolution in the Zebrafish
    Anatomical Dissection of Zebrafish Brain Development
    Immunohistochemistry and In Situ Hybridization in the Developing Chicken Brain
    Transplantation of Neural Tissue: Quail-Chick Chimeras
    RNAi-Based Gene Silencing in Chicken Brain Development
    Immunohistochemistry and RNA In Situ Hybridization in Mouse Brain Development
    In Utero Electroporation to Study Mouse Brain Development
    The Cre/Lox System to Assess the Development of the Mouse Brain.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    edited by Jérôme Badaut, Nikolaus Plesnila.
    Contents:
    Physiology of cerebral blood vessels / Ute Lindauer
    Blood-brain interfaces organization in relation to inorganic ion transport, CDF secretion, and circulation / Jean-Franc̦ois Chersi-Egea and Helle Damkier
    Noninvasive imaging techniques for brain edema / Andre Obenaus and Jérôme Badaut
    Experiemental techniques to investigate the formation of brain edema in vivo / Nikolaus Plesnila
    In vitro models of the blood-brain barrier to better understand the pathophysiology of brain edema / Abraham J. Al-Ahmad
    The extracellular and perivascular spaces of the brain / Mchelle E. Pizzo and Robert G. Thorne
    Blood-brain barrier mechanisms of edema formation / Martha E. O'Donnell, Heike Wulff and Yi-Je Chen
    Mechanisms of cell-volume regulation in the central nervous system / Nikolaus Plesnila and Oliver Kempski
    Role of aquaporins in the formation and resolution of brain edema / Beatriz Rodriguez-Grande, Jan-Pieter Konsman and Jérôme Badaut
    Sur1-Tirpm4-promising target for brain edema treatment in brain edema / Sebastian Urday, Kevin N. Sheth and J. Marc Simard
    Role of matrix metalloproteinsases in brain edema / Changjun Yang an Eduardo Candelario-Jalil
    Edema and BBB beakdown in stroke / Kathleen E. Salmeron, Danielle N. Edwards, Justin F. Fraser and Gregory J. Bix
    Brain edema formation in traumatic brain injury / Sighild Lemarchant and Jérôme Badaut
    Spinal cord edema after spinal cord injury / Newton Cho, Laureen D. Hachem and Michael G. Fehlings
    Brain edema in acute liver failure / Roger F. Butterworth
    Blood-brain barrier and edema in brain tumors / Andreas F. Mack, Hartwig Wolburg and Petra Fallier-Becker
    Water homeostasis dysfunction in epilepsy / Devin K. Binder
    Water homeostasis dysfunctions and edema in neuroinflammatory disease / Klaus G. Petry and Andreas Bikfalvi
    Experimental therapies for brain edema and intracranial hypertension / Katrin Rauen and Nikolaus Plesnila
    Clinical monitoring of brain edema / Sandro M. Krieg and Sebastian Ille
    Brain edema in developing brain diseases / Raffaella Moretti, Vibol Chhor, Luigi Titomanlio, Bobbi Fleiss
    Cerebral edema in cerebrovascular diseases / Stephane Olindo and Igor Sibon
    Traumatic brain injury and edema treatment / Klaus Zweckberger
    Treatment of edema formation in oncology / Oliver Schnell and Jörg-Christian Tonn
    Perspectives on future translational research on brain edema / J. Marc Simard, Jérôme Badaut and Nikolaus Plesnila.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Richard L. Applegate, Gang Chen, Hua Feng, John H. Zhang, editors.
    Contents:
    Brain Edema and Anesthesia
    Clinical Management of brain edema
    Neural ICU and edema management updates
    Preconditioning symposium for edema and cellular injury
    Microglia in edema and cell death
    Opioid receptor and brain injury
    Energy metabolism after brain injury
    Metal ion in brain edema and tissue injury
    Vascular biology of brain edema
    Brain edema in pediatric neurological disorders
    Hemorrhage or stroke edema section
    CNS trauma section
    Neuroimaging of brain edema: advances and biomarkers
    Neurobehavioral testing for brain edema assessment
    Brain edema and cellular treatment
    HBO, NBO and other medical gas for edema and tissue protection
    New treatments and/or technologies for edema and cell death.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Johannes Hirrlinger, Helle S. Waagepetersen.
    Contents:
    Determination of CO2 Production in Subcellular Preparations like Synaptosomes and Isolated Mitochondria Using 14C-Labeled Substrates and Radioactive CO2 Measurements
    Transport of Lactate: Characterization of the Transporters Involved in Transport at the Plasma Membrane by Heterologous Protein Expression in Xenopus Oocytes
    Primary Cultures of Astrocytes and Neurons as Model Systems to Study the Metabolism and Metabolite Export from Brain Cells
    Metabolic Mapping of Astrocytes and Neurons in Culture Using Stable Isotopes and Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry (GC-MS)
    Metabolic Flux Analysis Tools to Investigate Brain Metabolism In Vitro
    Fluorescent Nanosensor Based Flux Analysis: Overview and the Example of Glucose
    Mitochondrial Bioenergetics Assessed by Functional Fluorescence Dyes
    RNA Interference as a Tool to Selectively Down-Modulate Protein Function
    Localizing and Quantifying Metabolites In Situ with Luminometry: Induced Metabolic Bioluminescence Imaging (imBI)
    A Chip Off the Old Block: The Brain Slice as a Model for Metabolic Studies of Brain Compartmentation and Neuropharmacology
    Integrated Measurements of Electrical Activity, Oxygen Tension, Blood Flow, and Ca2+-Signaling in Rodents In Vivo
    Measuring Cerebral Hemodynamics and Energy Metabolism by Near-Infrared Spectroscopy
    Compartmental Analysis of Metabolism by 13C Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy
    Positron Emission Tomography of Brain Glucose Metabolism with [18F]Fluorodeoxyglucose in Humans.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Alexander Dityatev, Bernhard Wehrle-Haller, Asla Pitkänen.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Alberto Espay, University of Cincinnati, Benjamin Stecher, Educational Consultant & Healthcare Advocate.
    Summary: "In Sapiens, Yuval Noah Harari argues that humankind's greatest invention is our ability to create and believe fictions. While all other animals communicate realities with which they interact, humans create a separate layer of subjective, interpretative realities. The fiction most universally embraced today is money. "Dollar bills have absolutely no value except in our collective imagination, but everybody believes in the dollar bill," says Harari. Harari goes on to state that humans have been living in a dual reality. "On the one hand, the objective reality of rivers, trees, and lions; and on the other hand, the imagined reality of gods, nations, and corporations." In medicine, humans have also created two realities. Clinicians describe what they see, an objective reality, but the medical community then tries to explain and give meaning to what they see, creating a second,"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Mauro DiNuzzo, Arne Schousboe, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide a state-of-the-art summary of what is currently known about brain glycogen metabolism, detailing the recent advances in our understanding of why glycogen is so critical for normal brain function. The role of glycogen in cellular neurophysiology remains largely unclear and its specific contribution to the energy demand of brain cells is still elusive. Glycogen is the sole cerebral glucose reserve and is emerging as a fundamental component of brain energy metabolism. Pharmacological or genetic manipulation of glycogen metabolism in the brain impairs memory formation and increases susceptibility to epileptic seizures and cortical spreading depression. Glycogen is also directly implicated in abnormal neuronal excitability and mental retardation that characterize brain disorders like Lafora disease and Pompe disease.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction or Preface
    2. Structure and regulation of glycogen synthase in the brain
    3. Structure and regulation of glycogen phosphorylase in the brain
    4. Regional distribution of glycogen in the brain
    5. Metabolism of glycogen in the brain white matter
    6. Metabolism of glycogen in the brain gray matter
    7. Contribution of glycogen to brain energy metabolism
    8. Brain glycogen, compartmentation and ion/transmitter homeostasis
    9. Role of brain glycogen in learning and memory
    10. Brain glycogen content and turnover during sleep-wake cycle
    11. Brain glycogen metabolism in response to exercise
    12. Brain glycogen metabolism in neuronal excitability and epilepsy
    13. Brain glycogen metabolism in hypoglycemia and diabetes.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Alisa D. Gean.
    Summary: This is a single-authored book written by a world-class neuroradiologist with extensive experience in traumatic brain injury (TBI). It features six graphic-intense chapters depicting and expounding upon the complexity of TBI. Culled from nearly three decades of studying civilian TBI and five years of intensive study of TBI sustained from combat, terrorism, and natural disasters, this work is an exhaustive and innovative authority on the current approaches and applications of civilian and combat TBI. The text is sectored into six chapters based on pathophysiology, each augmented with numerous images and illustrations. The book gives special attention to neuroimaging, but is reinforced with relevant clinical correlation. This monograph is unique because it is first in class as an omnibus for the radiologist, neurologist, neurosurgeon, maxillofacial surgeon, emergency physician, pediatrician, ophthalmologist, and the rehabilitation team.

    Contents:
    In comparison to prior wars, more troops are surviving
    Blast injury basics
    The weapons of war and terrorism
    How does combat TBI differ from civilian TBI? 12 lessons
    Transferring lessons to the home front.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Blessen C. Eapen, David X. Cifu,
    Summary: "The only review book currently available in this complex field, Brain Injury Medicine: Board Review focuses on the prevention, diagnosis, treatment, and management of individuals with varying severity levels of brain injury. Focused, high-yield content prepares you for success on exams and in practice, with up-to-date coverage of traumatic brain injury (TBI), stroke, CNS neoplasms, anoxic brain injury, and other brain disorders. This unique review tool is ideal for residents, fellows, and practitioners studying or working in the field and preparing to take the brain injury medicine exam"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Brain anatomy and physiology. Neuroanatomy correlates
    Pathophysiology and basic sciences
    Section 2: Traumatic brain injury severity & patterns. Mild TBI (concussion), moderate to severe TBI
    TBI by pattern: penetrating, non- penetrating, blast injury
    Brain death criteria
    Section 3: Epidemiology and risk factors. Epidemiology and public health & prevention
    Proteomic, genetic, and epigenetic biomarkers in TBI
    Prognosis and recovery patterns
    Section 4: Emergency Room and intensive care management. Prehospital care
    Acute emergency management (non-surgical care & surgical care)
    Critical care management
    Complications
    Section 5: Evaluation and diagnosis. Physical examination, signs and symptoms
    Diagnostic procedures and electrophysiology
    Neuroimaging (structural and functional)
    Functional evaluation
    Intensity of services, specialized rehabilitation therapies, interdisciplinary team management
    Section 6: Complications and management. Cardiovascular and pulmonary
    GI and nutrition
    Genitourinary
    Soft tissue and orthopedic condition
    Pain
    Neuroendocrine/ metabolic/ hormonal
    Paroxysmal sympathetic hyperactivity
    Spasticity & contractures
    Post-traumatic hydrocephalus
    Cranial nerve disorders
    Seizure disorder
    Movement disorder
    Pressure injuries, bed rest and deconditioning
    Dysphagia and aspiration
    Speech and language
    Cognitive dysfunction
    Neurosensory dysfunction
    Emotional dyscontrol
    Agitation and restlessness
    Sleep dysfunction and fatigue
    Mood disorders
    PTSD
    Suicide, personality d/o, anxiety
    Substance abuse
    Sexuality and intimacy
    Section 7: Rehabilitation concepts. Therapeutic exercise/rehabilitation
    Assistive technology
    Community re-entry
    Involving family in rehabilitation: role of physiatry
    Section 8: Special topics. Pediatric TBI
    Geriatric TBI
    Military TBI
    Sports concussion
    Gender specific issues in TBI
    Post-concussion syndrome assessment, management and Rx
    Nontraumatic brain injury
    Dual diagnosis: TBI and SCI
    Anoxic brain injury
    Doc and rehabilitation
    Complementary alternative therapies
    Neuromodulation & neuroprosthetics
    Neuropharmacology
    Neurodegeneration and dementia
    Basic statistics/research methods
    Ethics and law.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief: Arthur W. Toga.
    Summary: This work offers foundational information for students and researchers across neuroscience. With over 300 articles and a media rich environment, this resource provides exhaustive coverage of the methods and systems involved in brain mapping, fully links the data to disease (presenting side by side maps of healthy and diseased brains for direct comparisons), and offers data sets and fully annotated color images.

    Contents:
    Volume 1. Acquisition methods, methods and modeling
    Volume 2. Anatomy and physiology, systems
    Volume 3. Social cognitive neuroscience, cognitive neuroscience, clinical brain mapping.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Alfredo Quiñones-Hinojosa, Kaisorn L. Chaichana, Deependra Mahato.
    Summary: "Despite advances in imaging techniques to identify eloquent cortical brain regions and subcortical white matter, brain mapping is the only method for obtaining real-time information with high sensitivity and specificity. This groundbreaking technology greatly enhances the neurosurgeon's ability to safely resect challenging lesions located in eloquent areas of the brain. The book starts with discussion of preoperative aspects, including the history of brain mapping and anatomy of eloquent cortical and eloquent white matter tracts. Subsequent chapters cover perioperative aspects of brain mapping including indirect and direct functional mapping, the role of neurophysiology, awake craniotomy operating room set-up and surgical instruments, and anesthetic considerations. Diverse awake and asleep brain mapping techniques are described for various intracranial pathologies, as well as advances in postoperative recovery of neurological function including physical and speech therapy"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Early History of Intra-Operative Brain Mapping / Courtney Pendleton, Kaisorn L. Chaichana, and Alfredo Quinones-Hinojosa
    Anatomy of Eloquent Cortical Brain Regions / Antonio Cesar de Melo Mussi and Evandro Pinto da Luz de Oliveira
    Anatomy of Eloquent White Matter Tracts / Vicent Quilis-Quesada and Shao-Ching Chen
    Direct Functional Mapping Using Radiographic Methods (fMRI and DTI) / Erik H. Middlebrooks, Vivek Gupta, and Prasanna Vibhute
    Indirect Functional Mapping Using Radiographic Methods / Vivek Gupta, Erik H. Middlebrooks, and Prasanna Vibhute
    Neurophysiology of Identifying Eloquent Regions / Tasneem F. Hasan and William O. Tatum IV
    Extraoperative Mapping for Epilepsy Surgery : Epilepsy Monitoring, Wada, and Electrocorticography / Emily L. Johnson and Eva K. Ritzl
    Neuropsychologist's Role in the Management of Brain Tumor Patients / David S. Sabsevitz, Kathleen H. Elverman, Kyle Nol, and Jeffrey Wefel
    Awake Craniotomy Operating Room Setup and Surgical Instruments / Karim ReFaey, Shashwat Tripathi, Sanjeet S. Grewal, Kaisorn L. Chaichana, and Alfredo Quinones-Hinojosa
    Anesthetic Considerations for Intraoperative Cerebral Brain Mapping / Elird Bojaxhi and Perry Bechtle
    Speech Mapping / Shawn Hervey-Jumper and Mitchel Berger
    Motor Mapping (Rolandic, Pre-Rolandic, Insular Cortex) / N.U. Farrukh Hameed, Peng Wang, Geng Xu, Jie Zhang, and Jin-song Wu
    Awake Subcortical Mapping of the Ventral and Dorsal Streams for Language / Hugues Duffau Surgery Around the Command and Control Axis : The Default Mode, Control, and Frontal Aslant Systems / Michael E. Sughrue
    Mapping and Surgery of Insular Tumours / Matthew A. Kirkman and George Samandouras
    Mapping of the Visual Pathway / Lina Marenco-Hillembrand and Kaisorn L. Chaichana
    Seizure Mapping Surgery / TBD
    Asleep Motor Mapping / Deependra Mahato, Alison Ho, and Javed Siddiqi
    Brainstem and Spinal Cord Mapping Mohammad / Hassan A. Noureldine, Nir Shimony, Rechdi Ahdab, and George I. Jallo
    Importance of Rehabilitation After Eloquent Brain Surgery / Kenneth Ngo, Andrea Davis, Russell Addeo, Jodi Morgan, Jennifer Walworth, and Sarah Chamberlain
    Emergence of Deep Learning Methods for DBS-Evoked Functional Connectomics / Christine Edwards, Abbas Kouzani, Kendall Lee, and Erika Ross
    Neuroplasticity and Rewiring of the Brain / Juan A. Barcia, Maria Perez-Garoz, and Cristina Nombela
    Radiating in Eloquent Regions / Henry Ruiz-Garcia, Jennifer Peterson, and Daniel M. Trifiletti.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    edited by M.A. Hayat.
    Summary: With an annual rate of more than 12 million global diagnoses and 7.6 million deaths, the societal and economic burden of cancer cannot be overstated. Brain metastases are the most common malignant tumors of the central nervous system, yet their incidence appears to be increasing in spite of the advancement of cancer therapies. While much is known about primary cancers (including primary brain tumors), less work has been done to uncover the roots of metastatic disease. This volume fills that gap, serving as the first reference to focus primarily on the link between primary cancers and brain metastases. This link is explored for the most common cancer types -- lung, breast, and melanoma. Additionally, biological background as well as therapy for CNS metastases is addressed. Age and gender related trends are also discussed, as is the use of biomarkers for early detection.

    Contents:
    Brain metastases
    Epidemiology of central nervous system metastases
    Involvement of the CXCL12/CXCR4/CXCR7 axis in brain metastases
    Non-uniform distribution of metastatic intracranial tumors in cancer patients
    Targeting angiogenesis, enhancing radiosensitization and crossing the blood-brain barrier for brain metastases
    Second malignancies in children following treatment for neuroblastoma
    The role of chemotherapy in metastatic brain tumors
    Multiple metastases to the brain from primary cancers : whole brain radiotherapy
    Synovial sarcoma metastasized to the brain
    Multiple small brain metastases with limited focal brain edema from non-small cell lung cancer with epidermal growth factor receptor mutations
    Brain metastasis of patients with lung adenocarcinoma : epidermal growth factor receptor mutations and response to whole-brain radiation therapy
    Metastatic spread of lung cancer to brain and liver : role of CX3CR1
    Solitary brain metastasis from non-small cell lung cancer : treatment with linac-based stereotactic radiosurgery
    Brain metastases from non-small cell lung cancer : clinical benefits of erlotinib and gefitinib
    Bispecific targeted toxin DTATEGF against metastatic NSCLC brain tumors
    Intracranial disease in patients with non-small cell lung cancer : treatment with erlotinib
    Radiation management of synchronous brain metastases from non-small cell lung cancer
    Brain metastasis after prophylactic cranial irradiation in patients with small cell lung cancer
    Brain metastasis from small-cell lung cancer with high levels of placental growth factor
    Brain metastases from lung cancer
    Lambert-Eaton myesthenic syndrome and brain metastasis from occult small cell lung carcinoma : a clinician's perspective.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey v. 1, 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] M.A. Hayat.
    Summary: Brain metastases are the most common malignant tumors of the central nervous system, yet their incidence appears to be increasing in spite of the advancement of cancer therapies. While much is known about primary cancers (including primary brain tumors), less work has been done to uncover the roots of metastatic disease. Brain Metastases from Primary Tumors fills that gap, serving as the first two-part reference to focus primarily on the link between primary cancers and brain metastases. This link is explored for the most common cancer types - lung, breast, and melanoma. Additionally, biological background as well as therapy for CNS metastases is addressed. Age- and gender-related trends are also discussed, as is the use of biomarkers for early detection.

    Contents:
    Brain metastasis from solid tumors
    The role of surgical resection for metastatic brain tumors
    Whole-brain radiotherapy for brain metastases: is the therapeutic window enlarging?
    Brain metastasis in patients with non-small cell lung cancer: response to epidermal growth factor receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitors
    Brain metastasis from non-small cell lung cancer: use of epidermal growth factor receptor and HER2 status for targeted therapy
    Brain metastases from non-small cell lung cancer: current evidence in management using tyrosine kinase inhibitor and whole-brain radiation therapy
    Brain metastasis in patients with non-small cell lung cancer: immunohistochemical markers
    Brain metastasis from breast cancer: molecular mechanisms
    New targeted therapies for brain metastases from breast and lung cancer and melanoma
    Breast cancers with brain metastases
    Brain metastases in melanoma patients: treatment with adjuvant postoperative whole-brain radiotherapy
    Melanoma progression in the brain: role of pericytes, the basal lamina, and endothelial cells in tumor vascularization
    Brain metastases from esophageal cancer in the presence of HER-2 overexpression
    Brain metastasis from renal carcinoma: locoregional and systemic treatments
    Gastrointestinal cancer and brain metastasis outcomes and management
    Brain metastasis of colorectal cancer: microenvironment and molecular mechanism
    Brain metastasis from nasopharyngeal carcinoma.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey v.2, 2015
  • Digital
    edited by M.A. Hayat.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. The management and biology of metastatic cancers to the brain
    3. Melanoma metastases are underrepresented in cerebellum compared with metastases from colorectal cancers
    4. Risk reductions of recurrence and mortality in melanoma patients using IFN-α
    5. Brain metastases from melanoma
    6. Pathobiology of brain metastases: molecular mechanisms
    7. Role of CDKN₂A mutations and other relevant genes in melanoma predisposition
    8. The role of the receptor for advanced glycation end products in malignant melanoma
    9. Hydrogen sulfide pathway and cancer
    10. Brain metastasis from esophageal cancer
    11. Treatment of metastatic melanoma patients bearing c-kit mutation using imatinib mesylate
    12. Optimal selection of targeted therapies for melanoma patients: role of the mitogen-activated protein kinase pathway
    13. Patients with brain metastases from melanoma: treatment with surgery and radiotherapy
    14. The risks and advantages of whole brain radiation therapy in patients with brain metastases
    15. Gastrointestinal stromal tumors with intracranial metastasis: treatment strategy and review of the literature
    16. Brain metastases from breast cancer in patients receiving trastuzumab
    17. Brain metastases from cutaneous melanoma: biology and its implications for more rational therapeutic approaches
    18. Treatment of brain metastases from ovarian and endometrial carcinomas using stereotactic radiosurgery
    19. Prognostic factors for survival in melanoma patients with brain metastases
    20. Management of melanoma therapy-associated toxicities
    21. Brain metastases from breast cancer: focus on risk factors, treatment, and clinical outcome.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Hans-Georg Dederer, David Hamburger, editors.
    Summary: This volume elucidates the pivotal ethical and legal issues arising from the use of brain organoids for research, therapeutic and enhancement purposes. The function of the human brain is still a mystery. Until recently, only post-mortem tissue was available for a structural examination of the brain. Consequently, the examination results could only reflect the state at the end of life. However, in order to better understand the development and function of the human brain, dynamic and functional investigations of different human brain cells are necessary. This is where brain organoids, artificially grown in vitro miniature brains, provide the opportunity for more flexible research scenarios. At the same time, however, the use of brain organoids in research and therapy raises the question of how these new entities are to be treated from an ethical and legal point of view. Against this background, this volume aims at clarifying the normative implications of the use of brain organoids in research and therapy. The ethical reflections on the status of brain organoids, informed consent, human-to-animal chimeras and neuro-enhancement are mirrored by corresponding legal analyses. The ethical and legal assessments are preceded by an introduction to the scientific and medical background of the brain organoid technology. A final chapter will be devoted to the issue of whether international harmonization of normative standards for brain organoid research and therapy is feasible and advisable.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1) Introductory Remarks
    Part I) Scientific Background
    Chapter 2) Development of Brain Organoids on the Basis of Genome-Edited iPSC-Derived Brain Cells
    Chapter 3) Cell-Based Therapy and Genome Editing in Parkinson's Disease: Quo Vadis
    Part II) The Status Debate
    Chapter 4) Human Cerebral Organoids: Evolving Entities and Their Moral Status
    Chapter 5). Legal perspective: What is, or Should Be, the Legal Status of Brain Organoids?
    Part III) The Informed Consent Challenge
    Chapter 6) Ethical Perspective: Ethics Considerations Regarding Donors and Patients Consent
    Chapter 7) The Legal Perspective: The Legal Requirements forand Limits tothe Donors and the Patients Consent
    Part IV) The Chimera Issue
    Chapter 8) Moral Permissibility of Transplantation of Human Brain Organoids into Animals
    Chapter 9) Transplantation of Human Brain Organoids into Animals - The Legal Issues
    Part V) The Enhancement Conundrum
    Chapter 10) Building a Better Beast: Enhancing the Minds of Animals
    Chapter 11) Legal Arguments in Favour of and Against Neuroenhancement by Means of Brain Organoids
    Part VI) The Harmonization Problem
    Chapter 12) Legal Perspective: A Global Harmonisation of Legal Standards for Brain Organoid Research and Therapy?. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Hari Shanker Sharma, Aruna Sharma.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Progress in Brain Research
    Copyright
    Contributors
    Contents
    Acknowledgments
    Preface
    References
    Chapter 1: Histamine H3 and H4 receptors modulate Parkinson's disease induced brain pathology. Neuroprotective effects of ...
    1. Introduction
    1.1. Histaminergic system in the brain
    1.2. Histaminergic receptors in the brain
    1.3. Histamine in brain diseases
    1.3.1. Cognitive dysfunction and Alzheimer's disease
    1.3.2. Motor disorders and Parkinson's disease
    1.3.3. Schizophrenia
    1.3.4. Multiple sclerosis
    1.3.5. Sleep disorders 1.3.6. Addictive disorders
    2. Histaminergic system alterations in Parkinson's disease
    2.1. Histamine concentration in PD
    2.2. Histaminergic nerve fibers in PD
    2.3. Histaminergic gene and receptors in PD
    2.3.1. HMT and HDC gene expression are altered in PD brain
    2.3.2. Histamine H3 and H4 receptor expression are altered in PD brain
    3. Our own investigations on histamine modulation of Parkinson's disease
    3.1. Methodological consideration
    3.1.1. Animals
    3.2. Animal model of PD
    3.3. Modulation of histaminergic agents 3.3.1. Histamine H3 receptor inverse agonist BF2649
    3.3.2. Histamine H3 receptor antagonist and partial H4 receptor agonist clobenpropit
    3.3.3. Anti-histamine mouse monoclonal antibody
    3.3.4. TiO2 nanodelivery of pharmacological agents
    3.4. Parameters measured
    3.4.1. Physiological parameters
    3.4.2. Physiological variables
    3.4.3. Blood-brain barrier permeability
    3.4.3.1. Albumin immunohistochemistry
    3.4.4. Cerebral blood flow
    3.4.5. Brain edema formation
    3.5. Behavioral functions
    3.5.1. Rota Rod treadmill
    3.5.2. Immobility during forced swimming 4.1.2. Physiological variables in MPTP model of PD
    4.1.2.1. Mean arterial blood pressure
    4.1.2.2. Arterial pH
    4.1.2.3. Arterial PaCO2
    4.1.2.4. Arterial PaO2
    4.1.2.5. Heart rate
    4.1.2.6. Respiration rate
    4.1.3. Behavioral parameters in MPTP model of PD
    4.1.3.1. Rota-Rod performance
    4.1.3.2. Forced swimming immobility
    4.1.4. Biochemical parameters of MPTP model of PD
    4.1.4.1. Tyrosine hydroxylase enzyme
    4.1.4.2. Dopamine
    4.1.4.3. DOPAC
    4.1.5. Hallmarks of biomarkers in MPTP model of PD
    4.1.5.1. ASNC
    4.1.5.2. p-tau
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Tanya Calvey, William M.U. Daniels.
    Contents:
    1. The extended evolutionary synthesis and addiction: the price we pay for adaptability
    2. Cross-talk between the epigenome and neural circuits in drug addiction
    3. Addiction: a dysregulation of satiety and inflammatory processes
    4. Corticostriatal plasticity, neuronal ensembles, and regulation of drug-seeking behavior
    5. Paraventricular thalamus: gateway to feeding, appetitive motivation, and drug addiction
    6. Functional roles of orexin/hypocretin receptors in reward circuit
    7. Differential modularity effects of cocaine on marmoset monkey recognition memory
    8. Using the research domain criteria (RDoC) to conceptualize impulsivity and compulsivity in relation to addiction
    9. Addictive behaviors: why and how impaired mental time matters?
    10. Neuroscience-informed psychoeducation for addiction medicine: a neurocognitive perspective
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Rajan Jain, Marco Essig.
    Contents:
    Conventional morphologic imaging : MRI remains the workhorse
    Benjamin Cohen, Inna Nutanson, and Girish M. Fatterpekar
    Response assessment in neuro-oncology / Tom Mikkelsen and Tobias Walbert
    Going beyond the conventional morphologic imaging : an overview of functional imaging techniques / Marco Essig and Cem Calli
    Perfusion imaging : DSC MR perfusion / Marco Essig, Joseph Puig Alcantara, and Cem Cali
    Perfusion imaging : dynamic contrast enhanced T1-weighted MRI (DCE-MRI) perfusion / David Fussell and Robert J. Young
    Perfusion imaging : arterial spin labeling / S. Ali Nabavizadeh, Suyash Mohan, Jeffrey M. Pollock
    Perfusion imaging : CT perfusion / Brent Griffith and Rajan Jain
    Diffusion weighted imaging for gliomas / Benjamin M. Ellingson, Bryan Yoo, and Whitney B. Pope
    Diffusion tensor imaging / Bram Stieltjes and Peter Neher
    Functional MRI and diffusion tensor imaging with tractography / Anna Knobel and Robert J. Young
    Metabolic imaging : MR spectroscopy / Isabella Björkman-Burtscher and Pia C. Sundgren
    Molecular imaging : PET and SPECT / Asim K. Bag and Samuel E. Almodóvar
    It's not just the tumor : treatment effects / Brent Griffith and Rajan Jain
    It's not just the tumor : CNS paraneoplastic syndromes and cerebrovascular complications of cancers / Prashant Nagpal and Rajan Jain
    Image guided neurosurgery : intraoperative MRI / Ian Y. Lee
    On the horizon : ultra-high-field MR / Steffen Sammet and Alexander Radbruch
    On the horizon : tumor genomics / Rivka R. Colen, Faisal Tai, and Pascal O. Zinn
    On the horizon : going beyond the conventional MR contrast agents / Josep Puig and Wilson B. Chwang
    On the horizon : molecular imaging / Sanath Kumar, Meser M. Ali, and Ali Syed Arbab.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Neurosurgery
  • Digital
    Elke Hattingen, Ulrich Pilatus, editors.
    Contents:
    Brain tumor imaging
    MR imaging of brain tumors
    MR spectroscopic imaging
    MR perfusion imaging
    Diffusion-weighted methods
    Advanced MR methods in differential diagnosis of brain tumors
    PET imaging of brain tumors
    Advanced imaging modalities and treatment of gliomas: radiation therapy
    Advanced imaging modalities and treatment of gliomas: neurosurgery
    Future methods in tumor imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Amar Gajjar, Gregory H. Reaman, Judy M. Racadio, Franklin O. Smith, editors.
    Summary: This book is a comprehensive and up-to-date compendium of all aspects of brain tumors in children. After introductory chapters on the epidemiology of brain tumors, the book will provide readers with state-of-the art chapters on the principals of radiation therapy, neurosurgery and neuroimaging. Subsequent chapters discuss the biology and treatment of specific types of brain tumors. The concluding chapters present critical information relevant to survivorship, neurocognitive and other late effects, and the global challenges to better diagnosis and treatment of brain tumors in children. This book is co-authored by experts in the treatment of pediatric brain tumors. All of the authors are internationally recognized authorities and they offer an evidence-based consensus on the biology and treatment of brain tumors. This handbook has far-reaching applicability to the clinical diagnosis and management of brain tumors in children and will prove valuable to specialists, generalists and trainees alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Summary: "Topics addressed at the Symposium included the cellular basis of neurodegeneration, memory systems and aging, neural circuits of anxiety, addiction circuits and treatment frontiers, sleep and sleep disorders,hormonal regulation and mood disorders, cortico-striatal circuits in perception and action, deep brain stimulation for psychiatry, computational psychiatry, development of social cognition, restoration of vision, brainmachine interfaces, and new techniques for human brain manipulation."--Foreword.
  • Digital
    George I. Jallo, Mohammad Hassan A. Noureldine, Nir Shimony, editors.
    Summary: This illuminating and comprehensive work offers readers a thorough and detailed perspective of brainstem surgery as well as state-of-the-art discussion on the diagnosis and management of related pathologies. Hailing from around the globe and currently practicing in various countries in Asia, Europe, and North America, the expert authors of this work represent a wide range of disciplines and experiences, providing a comprehensive, interdisciplinary overview of brainstem surgery. Indeed, brainstem pathologies remain the most challenging to manage surgically due to the high eloquence and the deep and hidden location of the brainstem, turning surgical treatment of brainstem pathologies into one of the most complex and demanding fields in neurosurgery. This vital book guides readers through this very complex anatomical territory in which any pathology leads to grave consequences. Taking readers through the depth of the complex architecture of the brainstem in the clinical context, and emphasizing the evidence-based treatment of different brainstem pathologies while also reviewing what the future holds for the management of these pathologies, the book presents a review of state-of-the-art preoperative assessment modalities and surgical. The book covers brainstem-related pathologies from infancy to adulthood, and the text is enriched with diagnostic and surgical images that cover almost all types of brainstem lesions. The book is written in a way that neurosurgery specialists and fellows will feel comfortable navigating throughout its contents, and the enthusiastic neurosurgery resident will find this book to be a valuable guide. A major contribution to the clinical literature, Brainstem Tumors: Diagnosis and Management will also serve as a reference for anyone involved in the treatment of patients suffering from brainstem pathologies, including medical team members such as adult and pediatric neurosurgeons, neurologists, neurooncologists, residents and fellows, clinical neuropsychologists, electrophysiologists, neuroradiologists, and medical students who have a passion to learn about the assessment and surgical management of patients with brainstem diseases.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: History of Brainstem Glioma Surgery
    Chapter 2: Anatomy of the Brainstem
    Chapter 3: Imaging for Brainstem Lesions
    Chapter 4: Clinical Presentation and Assessment for Brainstem Tumors
    Chapter 5: Intraoperative Neurophysiological Monitoring during Brainstem Surgery
    Chapter 6: Low-grade Pediatric Brainstem Gliomas
    Chapter 7: High-grade Tumors of the Brainstem (Except DIPG)
    Chapter 8: Diffuse Midline Gliomas
    Diffuse Intrinsic Pontine Glioma
    Chapter 9: Surgery for Vascular Lesions of the Brainstem
    Chapter 10: Inflammatory and Infectious Lesions of the Brainstem
    Chapter 11: Surgical Approach to Mesencephalic (Midbrain) Tumors
    Chapter 12: Surgical Approach to Pontine Tumors
    Chapter 13: Surgical Approach to Medullary Tumors
    Chapter 14: Radiation and Chemotherapy for Brainstem Tumors
    Chapter 15: Future Therapies for Malignant Brainstem Tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Rajkumar Rajendram, Victor R. Preedy, Vinood B. Patel, editors.
    Summary: This is the first volume in a 2-volume compendium that is the go-to source for both research- and practice-oriented information on the importance of branched chain amino acids in maintaining the nutritional status and overall health of individuals, especially those with certain disease conditions. Over 150 well recognized and respected contributors have come together to compile these up-to-date and well-referenced works. The volumes will serve the reader as the benchmarks in this complex area of interrelationships between dietary protein intakes and individual amino acid supplementation, the unique role of the branched chain amino acids in the synthesis of brain neurotransmitters, collagen formation, insulin and glucose modulation and the functioning of all organ systems that are involved in the maintenance of the body's metabolic integrity. Moreover, the physiological, genetic and pathological interactions between plasma levels of branched chain amino acids and aromatic amino acids are clearly delineated so that students as well as practitioners can better understand the complexities of these interactions. Branched Chain Amino Acids in Clinical Nutrition: Volume 1 covers basic processes at the cellular level, inherited defects in branched chain amino acid metabolism, and experimental models of growth and disease states.

    Contents:
    Part I. Basic Processes at the Cellular Level
    1. Impact of dietary essential amino acids in man
    2. Metabolism of BCAAs
    3. The cytosolic and mitochondrial branched chain aminotransferase
    4. Isoleucine, PPAR and uncoupling proteins
    5. Leucine as a stimulant of insulin
    6. Effects of leucine and isoleucine on glucose metabolism
    7. Hypothalamic leucine metabolism in the regulation of liver glucose metabolism
    8. Leucine and resveratrol: experimental model of sirtuin pathway activation
    9. Branched chain amino acids and blood ammonia
    10. Use of 2H3-leucine to monitor apoproteins
    Part II. Inherited Defects in Branched Chain Amino Acid Metabolism
    11. Branched chain amino acid oxidation disorders
    12. Branched chain amino acids and maple syrup urine disease
    13. Mental retardation and isoleucine metabolism
    14. Anorexia and valine-deficient diets
    Part III. Experimental models of growth and disease states: Role of Branched Chain Amino Acids
    15. Leucine and fetal growth
    16. Enteral leucine and protein synthesis in skeletal and cardiac muscles
    17. Use of branched chain amino acids granules in experimental models of diet-induced obesity
    18. Experimental models of high fat obesity and leucine supplementation
    19. Branched chain amino acids in experimental models of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
    20. Leucine and ethanol oxidation
    21. Isoleucine, leucine and their role in experimental models of bladder carcinogenesis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Rajkumar Rajendram, Victor R. Preedy, Vinood B. Patel, editors.
    Summary: This is the second volume in a 2-volume compendium that is the go-to source for both research- and practice-oriented information on the importance of branched chain amino acids in maintaining the nutritional status and overall health of individuals, especially those with certain disease conditions. Over 150 well recognized and respected contributors have come together to compile these up-to-date and well-referenced works. The volumes will serve the reader as the benchmarks in this complex area of interrelationships between dietary protein intakes and individual amino acid supplementation, the unique role of the branched chain amino acids in the synthesis of brain neurotransmitters, collagen formation, insulin and glucose modulation and the functioning of all organ systems that are involved in the maintenance of the body?s metabolic integrity. Moreover, the physiological, genetic and pathological interactions between plasma levels of branched chain amino acids and aromatic amino acids are clearly delineated so that students as well as practitioners can better understand the complexities of these interactions. Branched Chain Amino Acids in Clinical Nutrition: Volume 2 covers the role of branched chain amino acids in healthy individuals, and branched chain amino acid status in disease states, liver diseases, and supplementation studies in certain patient populations.

    Contents:
    Part I. Role of Branched Chain Amino Acids in Healthy Individuals
    1. Tolerability of leucine
    2. Leucine-protein supplemented recovery and exercise
    3. Use of whey and leucine on muscle
    4. Branched chain amino acids and muscle atrophy protection
    5. Role of branched chain amino acids in cellular and organ damage: the prognostic significance of the preoperative branched chain amino acid to tyrosine ratio
    Part II. Branched Chain Amino Acids: Status in Disease States
    6. Branched chain amino acids in heart failure
    7. Mitochondrial tRNA valine in cardiomyopathies
    8. Branched chain amino acids on psychomotor performance
    9. The branch chain amino acids in the context of other amino acids in traumatic brain injury
    10. Branched chain amino acids in chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Part III. Branched Chain Amino Acids and Liver Diseases
    11. Identification of branched chain amino acids; underlying molecular pathways using transcriptomic analysis: application to cirrhosis
    12. Branched chain amino acids supplementation and plasma albumin
    13. Late evening snack, branched chain amino acids and cirrhosis
    14. Branched chain amino acids and organ transplantation
    15. Basic aspects in prevention of post-transplant bacteremia by branched chain amino acids
    16. Branched chain amino acids and postoperative quality of life
    Part IV. Branched Chain Amino Acid Supplementation Studies in Certain Patient Populations
    17. Leucine-protein functional adaptation in the clinical setting
    18. Branched chain amino acids supplementation and glycemic control
    19. Leucine supplementation and insulin resistance
    20. Weight loss and branched chain amino acids and their metabolites
    21. Branched chain amino acid cocktails and skin
    22. Branched chain amino acids in inherited muscle disease: the case of Duchhene muscular dystrophy
    23. Use of branched chain amino acids (BCAA) during radiotherapy
    24. Oral branch chain amino acids and encephalopathy
    25. Web based resources, and suggested readings.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Jeffrey S. Klein, William E. Brant, Clyde Helms, Emily N. Vinson.
    Summary: "Those familiar with previous editions will recognize editors and authors Drs. William Brant and Clyde Helms, who developed the concept of Fundamentals of Diagnostic Radiology 30 years ago. For this fifth edition, Bill has updated his introductory chapter on diagnostic imaging methods and contributed updated material on gastrointestinal and genitourinary radiology and ultrasound. Clyde has updated his section on Musculoskeletal Imaging along with Dr. Emily Vinson, Division Chief of Musculoskeletal Imaging at Duke University Medical Center, who now joins as an editor of Fundamentals. Drs. Erik Gaensler and Jerome Barakos have returned to edit the revised Neuroradiology section. Dr. Jeffrey Klein, along with colleagues from the University of Vermont Medical Center, provides an updated section on Chest Radiology and is now a senior editor of Fundamentals of Diagnostic Radiology"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Sect. I: Basic principles
    Sect. II: Neuroradiology
    Sect. III: Chest
    Sect. IV: Breast radiology
    Sect. V: Cardiac radiology
    Sect. Vi: Vascular and interventional radiology
    Sect. VII: Gastrointestinal tract
    Sect. VIII: Genitourinary tract
    Sect. IX: Ultrasonograpy
    Sect. X: Musculoskeletal radiology
    Sect. XI: Pediatric radiology
    Sec.t XII: Nuclear radiology.
    Digital Access Ovid 2019
  • Digital
    Shabir Hussain Wani, Ajay Kumar Thakur, Yasin Jeshima Khan, editors.
    Summary: Global population is mounting at an alarming stride to surpass 9.3 billion by 2050, whereas simultaneously the agricultural productivity is gravely affected by climate changes resulting in increased biotic and abiotic stresses. The genus Brassica belongs to the mustard family whose members are known as cruciferous vegetables, cabbages or mustard plants. Rapeseed-mustard is world's third most important source of edible oil after soybean and oil palm. It has worldwide acceptance owing to its rare combination of health promoting factors. It has very low levels of saturated fatty acids which make it the healthiest edible oil that is commonly available. Apart from this, it is rich in antioxidants by virtue of tocopherols and phytosterols presence in the oil. The high omega 3 content reduces the risk of atherosclerosis/heart attack. Conventional breeding methods have met with limited success in Brassica because yield and stress resilience are polygenic traits and are greatly influenced by environment. Therefore, it is imperative to accelerate the efforts to unravel the biochemical, physiological and molecular mechanisms underlying yield, quality and tolerance towards biotic and abiotic stresses in Brassica. To exploit its fullest potential, systematic efforts are needed to unlock the genetic information for new germplasms that tolerate initial and terminal state heat coupled with moisture stress. For instance, wild relatives may be exploited in developing introgressed and resynthesized lines with desirable attributes. Exploitation of heterosis is another important area which can be achieved by introducing transgenics to raise stable CMS lines. Doubled haploid breeding and marker assisted selection should be employed along with conventional breeding. Breeding programmes aim at enhancing resource use efficiency, especially nutrient and water as well as adoption to aberrant environmental changes should also be considered. Biotechnological interventions are essential for altering the biosynthetic pathways for developing high oleic and low linolenic lines. Accordingly, tools such as microspore and ovule culture, embryo rescue, isolation of trait specific genes especially for aphid, Sclerotinia and alternaria blight resistance, etc. along with identification of potential lines based on genetic diversity can assist ongoing breeding programmes. In this book, we highlight the recent molecular, genetic and genomic interventions made to achieve crop improvement in terms of yield increase, quality and stress tolerance in Brassica, with a special emphasis in Rapeseed-mustard.

    Contents:
    1 Utilization of rapeseed-mustard genetic resources for Brassica improvement
    2 Recent advances in cytoplasmic male sterility (CMS) in crop Brassicas
    3 Ancient and recent Polyploid evolution in Brassicas
    4 Production and application of doubled haploid in Brassica improvement.-5 Tissue culture-mediated biotechnological advancements in genus Brassica
    6 Genomics for Brassica quality improvement
    7 Biofortification of Brassica for quality improvement.-8 Genetics and Genomic Approaches for Disease Resistance in Brassicas
    9 Arsenic toxicity and molecular mechanism of arsenic tolerance in different members of Brassicaceae
    10 Transgenic approaches for Brassica improvement
    11 Genetic diversity studies in Indian mustard using molecular markers.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Shengyi Liu, Rod Snowdon, Chittaranjan Kole, editors.
    Summary: This book presents comprehensive information on genetics, genomics and breeding in Brassica oleracea, an agriculturally important species that includes popular vegetable crops such as cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, Brussels sprouts, kale, collard greens, savoy, kohlrabi, and gai lan. The content spans whole genome sequencing, assembly and gene annotation for this global vegetable species, along with molecular mapping and cloning of genes, physical genome mapping and analyses of the structure and composition of centromeres in the B. oleracea genome. The book also elaborates on asymmetrical genome evolution and transposable elements in the B. oleracea describes gene family differentiation in comparison to other Brassica species and structural and functional genomic resources and data bases developed for B. oleracea. Useful discussions on the impact of genome sequencing on genetic improvement in the species are also included.

    Contents:
    Economic/Academic importance
    Background of the sequencing initiatives
    Molecular mapping and cloning of genes and QTLs
    Physical mapping of the genome
    Whole genome sequencing and assembling
    Structure and composition of centromere in Brassica genome
    Genome annotation
    Gene loss
    Alternative splicing
    Gene conversion
    Gene family differentiation in Brassica species
    Glucosinates
    R genes variations after triplication
    Structural & functional genomic resources developed
    Impact on plant breeding and crop improvement
    Data bases
    Future prospects.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Shamsul Hayat, Mohammad Yusuf, Renu Bhardwaj, Andrzej Bajguz, editors.
    Summary: The entire range of the developmental process in plants is regulated by a shift in the hormonal concentration, tissue sensitivity and their interaction with the factors operating around the plants. Phytohormones play a crucial role in regulating the direction of plant in a coordinated fashion in association with metabolism that provides energy and the building blocks to generate the form that we recognize as a plant. Out of the recognized hormones, attention has largely been focused on Auxins, Gibberellins, Cytokinins, Abscisic acid, Ethylene and more recently on Brassinosteroids. In this book we are providing the information about a brassinosteroids that again confirm its status as phytohormones because it has significant impact on various aspects of the plant life and its ubiquitous distribution throughout the plant kingdom. Brassinosteroids are generating a significant impact on plant growth and development, photosynthesis, transpiration, ion uptake and transport, induces specific changes in leaf anatomy and chloroplast structure. This book is not an encyclopedia of reviews but includes a selected collection of newly written, integrated, illustrated reviews describing our knowledge of brassinosteroids. The aim of this book is to tell all about brassinosteroids, by the present time. The various chapters incorporate both theoretical and practical aspects and may serve as baseline information for future researches through which significant development is possible. It is intended that this book will be useful to the students, teachers and researchers, both in universities and research institutes, especially in relation to biological and agricultural sciences.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Robert A. Baldor ; section editors, Margarita C. Castro-Zarraga, Anita Kostecki, Christine Runyan, Felix B. Chang, Frank J. Domino.
    Summary: Prepare for your ABFM boards - find your weak spots and eliminate them now! Handy in print and as an eBook, Bratton's Family Medicine Board Review is the essential practice test for those facing the ABFM exams. Opening with the basic requirements of the ABFM Board certification process, it provides crucial background information on all three AFBM exams and their formats, describes a typical exam day, and offers excellent test-taking advice{u2014}taking the mystery out of the exam process.

    Contents:
    Care of the adult patient
    Care of children & adolescents
    Care of the female patient (including maternity care)
    Mental health/community health
    Emergent and surgical care
    Care of the elderly patient
    Pictorial atlas.
    Digital Access Ovid 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Gerd Plewig, Lars French, Thomas Ruzicka, Roland Kaufmann, Michael Hertl.
    Summary: The "skin" classic in a completely updated new edition. "Braun-Falco's Dermatology " has been extensively revised for the 4th edition and offers an impressive overview of the complete specialist field for the clinically active dermatologist . With an internationally renowned team of authors, the editors have succeeded in presenting dermatology in its clinical breadth and groundbreaking further developments in a comprehensive, precise and practical manner. The unique wealth of excellent illustrations and the clear, concise structure of the chapters are particularly noteworthy. In addition to the printed version, the new edition is also available for the first time in an electronic, continuously updated version. New in the 4th edition: - Current clinical classifications, guidelines and therapeutic concepts for inflammatory dermatoses and skin tumours This book is a must-read for dermatologists, doctors in continuing education and clinicians in general.

    Contents:
    Basic Principles
    Diagnostic Tools
    Infectious Diseases: Viruses
    Infectious Diseases: Bacteria
    Infectious Diseases: Fungi
    Infectious Diseases: Sexually Transmitted Diseases
    Infectious Diseases: Parasitic Infections
    Allergy and Intolerance Reactions
    Drug Hypersensitivity
    Inflammatory Diseases
    Environmental Diseases
    Bullous Disorders
    Connective Tissue Diseases
    Hereditary Disorders
    Vascular Diseases
    Pigmentary Diseases
    Diseases of Adnexal Structures
    Regional and Special Disorders
    Metabolic Diseases
    Tumors
    Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer Live 2019-
    Continuously updated edition
  • Digital
    edited by Gerd Plewig, Lars French, Thomas Ruzicka, Roland Kaufmann, Michael Hertl.
    Springer Nature eReference..
    Summary: The standard textbook of Dermatology and Allergy in new edition! The 4th edition of the "Braun-Falco Textbook", an international standard text of dermatology, allergy and sexually transmitted disorders has been thoroughly rewritten and reedited and offers a comprehensive state-of-the-art review of the entire field for clinicians in hospital and private practice. The editors assembled an expert team of authors with outstanding international reputation who present a concise overview of the complete spectrum of dermatology and its groundbreaking progress with particular emphasis on aspects of practical care within the specialty. The treatment recommendations are based on current international guidelines and standards of care, and pay special attention to latest therapeutic progress as well as recent pathophysiological concepts. A special emphasis has been put on a unique array of high quality figures and a clear, easily understandable structure of the respective chapters. Besides the printed version, the new edition is available as a digital version. New aspects of the 4th edition that reflect the tremendous and rapid progress of dermatology include an up to date clinical classification of dermatoses, current guidelines and therapeutic concepts in inflammatory and neoplastic diseases, and dermatological aspects of the new Covid-19 infection. "Braun-Falcos̀ Dermatology" is a must for specialists and trainees in dermatology, and of great value for all physicians who encounter skin diseases in general.

    Contents:
    Basic Principles
    Diagnostic Tools
    Infectious Diseases: Viruses
    Infectious Diseases: Bacteria
    Infectious Diseases: Fungi
    Infectious Diseases: Sexually Transmitted Diseases
    Infectious Diseases: Parasitic Infections
    Allergy and Intolerance Reactions
    Drug Hypersensitivity
    Inflammatory Diseases
    Environmental Diseases
    Bullous Disorders
    Connective Tissue Diseases
    Hereditary Disorders
    Vascular Diseases
    Pigmentary Diseases
    Diseases of Adnexal Structures
    Regional and Special Disorders
    Metabolic Diseases
    Tumors
    Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Peter Libby, Robert O. Bonow, Douglas L. Mann, Gordon F. Tomaselli, Deepak L. Bhatt, Scott D. Solomon ; founding editor and online editor, Eugene Braunwald.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2022
  • Print
    [edited by] Leonard S. Lilly.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Fundamentals of Cardiovascular Disease : Genetics and Personalized Medicine : Evaluation of the Patient.
    Section 2. Heart Failure Arrhythmias, Sudden Death, and Syncope.
    Section 3. Preventive Cardiology Atherosclerotic Cardiovascular Disease.
    Section 4. Diseases of the Heart, Pericardium, and Pulmonary Vascular Bed.
    Section 5. Cardiovascular Disease in Special Populations Cardiovascular Disease and Disorders of Other Organs.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC681 .H3621 2016
    1
  • Print
    Kimberly Davis.
    Summary: Brave leadership is the essential guide for leaders in today's ever-shifting world. Wherever you are in your leadership journey or if you aspire to be the best leader you can be , then this book is for you. It will help you uncover your barriers to brave, escape overwhelm and frustration and learn to manage stress and anxiety, prepare for high-stakes meetings and conversations, have the influence you want to have, set the direction of your career, connect powerfully, feel more confident, courageous, satisfied, and purposeful, and tap into the want of the people you lead to get the results you need.

    Contents:
    Part I: What is brave? Who are you as a leader?
    A whole new world
    Dealing with real
    Redefining leadership
    Unlocking the want
    Barriers to brave. Disappearing genius
    What do you see?
    Step out of the box
    Where are you...really?
    Part III. Pushing through to brave. A matter of focus
    Bull's eye
    Goals are not enough
    Action from the inside out
    For the sake of what?-- What's your intention?
    The magic if
    Own your power
    Connection is the game
    Six steps to prepare for impact
    Presenting bravely
    Part IV: A brave new world. Own your mess
    Cultivating brave
    A brave legacy
    The brave leadership manifesto
    Be a work in progress.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    BioSciences Career Center Collection (Duck Room)
    Bus & Mgt 102
    1
  • Digital
    Elizabeth F. Rangel, Jeffrey J. Shaw, editors.
    Summary: This is the first English-language book dedicated to Brazilian sand flies and their medical importance. No other country has so many species of these haematophagous insects as Brazil and their diversity has reached an astonishing level. The book contains comprehensive chapters, written by Brazilian experts on their regional distribution, their ecology and their importance as vectors of pathogens and parasites. Methods for sampling, processing and preserving phlebotomines are reviewed as are perspectives on surveillance and leishmaniasis vector control. A novel classification is presented whose aim is to help investigators identify the species that they are working with more efficiently.

    Contents:
    Sand flies : medical importance / Wagner Alexandre Costa and Nataly A. Souza
    Phlebotominae (Diptera, Psychodidae) : classification, morphology and terminology of adults and identification of American taxa / Eunice A.B. Galati
    Molecular and biochemical markers for investigating the vectorial roles of Brazilian sand flies / Paul D. Ready, Felipe M. Vigoder, and Elizabeth F. Rangel
    Regional distribution and habitats of Brazilian phlebotomine species / Gustavo M. de Aguiar and Vanessa R. Vieira
    Bionomy : biology of neotropical phlebotomine sand flies / Reginaldo P. Brazil and Beatriz G. Brazil
    Biology of the Leishmania-sand fly interaction / Paulo F.P. Pimenta, Vanessa C. de Freitas, Carolina C. Monteiro, Ana Clara M.A. Pires, and Nágila Francinete C. Secundino
    Sand fly vectors of American cutaneous leishmaniasis in Brazil / Elizabeth F. Rangel, Ralph Lainson, Bruno M. Carvalho, Simone M. Costa, and Jeffrey J. Shaw
    Eco-epidemiology of American visceral leishmaniasis with particular reference to Brazil / Elizabeth F. Rangel, Ralph Lainson, Margarete M.S. Afonso, and Jeffrey J. Shaw
    Brazilian phlebotomines as hosts and vectors of viruses, bacteria, fungi, protozoa (excluding those belonging to the genus Leishmania) and nematodes / Jeffrey J. Shaw, Amélia T. de Rosa, Ana Cecilia Cruz, and Pedro Fernando da C. Vasconcelos
    Methods for capturing, processing and preserving Phlebotominae / Mauricio Luiz Vilela, Adriana Zwetsch, and Júlia dos S. Silva
    Leishmaniasis-vector surveillance and control in Brazil : a challenge to control programs / Ana Nilce S. Maia-Elkhoury, Rafaella Albuquerque, and Oscar D. Salomón.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Bruce A. Stevens and Eckhard Roediger.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Schema therapy: toward a science of relationships
    Past tense, present tense: understanding family patterns
    Attractions, romance, and schema chemistry
    Back to the future
    Modes: in the present tense
    Mode awareness
    Managing the modes
    Past tense: managing the parent modes
    The "great escape": understanding the coping modes
    Meeting the needs of your "inner child"
    Mode change
    Putting "healthy" back in your adult
    A clear path: dealing with conflicts, communication, and decision making
    Looking at sex through the eyes of the modes
    Affairs
    Emotional learning
    Epilogue.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Print
    Charles Graeber.
    Summary: "For decades, scientists have puzzled over one of medicine's most confounding mysteries: Why doesn't our immune system recognize and fight cancer the way it does other diseases, like the common cold? As it turns out, the answer to that question can be traced to a series of tricks that cancer has developed to turn off normal immune responses--tricks that scientists have only recently discovered and learned to defeat. The result is what many are calling cancer's "penicillin moment," a revolutionary discovery in our understanding of cancer and how to beat it. In THE BREAKTHROUGH, Graeber guides readers through the revolutionary scientific research bringing immunotherapy out of the realm of the miraculous and into the forefront of twenty-first-century medical science. As advances in the fields of cancer research and the human immune system continue to fuel a therapeutic arms race among biotech and pharmaceutical research centers around the world, the next step--harnessing the wealth of new information to create modern and more effective patient therapies--is unfolding at an unprecedented pace, rapidly redefining our relationship with this all-too-human disease. Groundbreaking, riveting, and expertly told, THE BREAKTHROUGH is the story of the game-changing scientific discoveries that unleash our natural ability to recognize and defeat cancer, as told through the experiences of the patients, physicians, and cancer immunotherapy researchers who are on the front lines. This is the incredible true story of the race to find a cure, a dispatch from the life-changing world of modern oncological science, and a brave new chapter in medical history"--Jacket.

    Contents:
    Patient 101006 JDS
    A simple idea
    Glimmers in the darkness
    Eureka, Texas
    The three E's
    Tempting fate
    The chimera
    After the gold rush
    It's time
    Appendix A: Types of immunotherapies now and upcoming
    Appendix B: The breakthrough, in brief
    Appendix C: A brief anecdotal history of disease, civilization, and the quest for immunity.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC271.I45 G73 2018
    1
  • Digital
    senior editors, Kirby I. Bland, V. Suzanne Klimberg, Edward M. Copeland III, William J. Gradishar ; associate editors, Julia White, Soheila Korourian.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    Mahesh K. Shetty, editor.
    Contents:
    Imaging the Symptomatic Breast in the Pediatric, Young, Pregnant, Lactating, and transgender patient
    Imaging of the symptomatic breast
    Imaging of the symptomatic Male breast
    Imaging in the management of women with an elevated risk for Breast cancer
    Multidisciplinary approach in the management of a breast cancer patient
    Screening for Breast cancer
    Emerging Technologies in Breast cancer screening and Diagnosis
    Non-Obstetric Complications in Pregnancy: Role of Imaging
    Pelvic Mass: Role of Imaging in the diagnosis and Management
    Post-menopausal bleeding: Role of Imaging in the diagnosis and Management
    Pelvic Floor Dysfunction: Role of imaging in diagnosis and management
    Female Infertility: Role of Imaging in the diagnosis and Management
    Recurrent Urinary Tract infections: Role of Imaging
    Health Economics in Women's Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Brendon J. Coventry, editor.
    Summary: Written by internationally acclaimed specialists, Breast, Endocrine and Surgical Oncology provides pertinent and concise procedure descriptions spanning benign and malignant problems and minimally invasive procedures. Complications are reviewed when appropriate for the organ system and problem, creating a book that is both comprehensive and accessible. Stages of operative approaches with relevant technical considerations are outlined in an easily understandable manner. The text is illustrated throughout by photographs that depict anatomic or technical principles. Forming part of the series, Surgery: Complications, Risks and Consequences, this volume Breast, Endocrine and Surgical Oncology provides a valuable resource for all general surgeons and residents in training. Other healthcare providers will also find this a useful resource.

    Contents:
    Breast Surgery
    Thyroid and Parathyroid Surgery
    Adrenal Gland Surgery
    Lymphatic Surgery
    Splenic Surgery
    Specialised Cancer Procedures and Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] William P. Adams, Jr.
    Contents:
    The process of breast augmentation / William P. Adams Jr
    Patient education / William P. Adams Jr. and Christy Aguilar
    Tissue-based planning / William P. Adams Jr
    Three-dimensional imaging / Kevin H. Small and Jason Roostaeian
    Shaped versus round implants / Patrick Mallucci and Paulo Montemurro
    Biofilms and breast implants : how science guides us to do the best for our patients / W. Louis F. Wessels, Karen Vickery, and Anand K. Deva
    Dual-plane breast augmentation / William P. Adams Jr
    The inframammary approach and the dual-plane pocket / William P. Adams Jr
    The transaxillary approach / Louis L. Strock
    Periareolar mastopexy augmentation / Ruth Graf, Maria Cecília Closs Ono, and Priscilla Balbinot
    Infra-areolar zigzag augmentation mammaplasty / Ruth Graf, Priscilla Balbinot, and Daniele Tanuri Pace
    Breast augmentation with large volume fat grafting / Ran Y. Stark, Louis P. Bucky, and Daniel A. Del Vecchio
    Revision breast augmentation / Bradley P. Bengtson and Steven Teitelbaum
    Postoperative management / William P. Adams Jr. and Louis L. Strock.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    Darius S. Francescatti, Melvin J. Silverstein, editors.
    Summary: Breast Cancer: A New Era in Management provides a compendium of succinct analysis of the many facets involved in the present day management of the breast cancer patient. The text provides the clinician or student with basic foundational knowledge in the rapidly expanding areas of expertise that are required for both the diagnosis and treatment of the breast cancer patient. Each topic, whether diagnostic or therapeutic, is presented in a straightforward fashion incorporating as part of each topic a description of the historical clinical landmarks leading to the present day, their present day position in the care of the breast patient, and finally, an assessment of possible future application and adaptation in clinical practice. Emphasis is placed on clear and concise explanations of each topic presented in stepwise fashion from fundamental elements to the more complex. Breast Cancer: A New Era in Management will act as a ready reference for the practicing surgeon and students seeking practical information on a particular clinical topic or scenario.

    Contents:
    Risk Assessment
    The impact of mammography screening on the diagnosis and management of early phase breast cancer
    The Sick Lobe Syndrome
    Lobar Ultrasonic Breast Anatomy
    The Surgical Approach to the Sick Lobe
    Ultrasound Guided Breast Biopsy Tissue Sampling: Technique And Breast Ultrasound Characteristics Of Benign And Malignant Lesions
    Role of Stereotaxis in Diagnosis and Treatment of Breast Tumors
    Breast MR for Treatment Planning
    Digital Breast Tomosynthesis
    Interstitial Laser Therapy (Ilt) Of Breast Tumors
    Cryoablation For Breast Cancer
    RF Therapy
    HiFrequency Ultrasound
    High Risk Lesions
    Ductal Carcinoma In Situ of the Breast
    The Surgical Management of Invasive Breast Cancer
    Surgical Management of the Axilla
    Radiotherapy of the Breast
    Systemic Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Print
    Wende Logan-Young and Nancy Yanes Hoffman.
    Contents:

    v. 1. Procedures.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: Oversize (Downstairs)
    RC280.B8 L56 1994
    1
  • Digital
    Shashanka Mohan Bose, editor-in-chief ; Suresh Chander Sharma, Alok Mazumdar, Robin Kaushik, editors.
    Summary: The book provides detailed information on breast cancer and covers all the aspects of this rapidly spreading disease, such as applied anatomy and physiology, causative factors, various Investigations to reach a concise, definitive and complete diagnosis. The management of breast cancer involves multi-modality treatment and the book describes all the modalities in a very clear manner. It also discusses in a very lucid and practical way. the multi-prong treatment that the patient requires. Additionally, the book covers lesser-known areas of the subject like rehabilitation, management of lymphoedema, Extravasation of chemo-Infusion, organization of breast cancer management group, breast cancer awareness and patient education, follow up of the patient, and psychological support to these patients who have undergone mutilation of their organ. Edited by experts the chapters are contributed by renowned onco-sugeons from high volume and reputed centers in India such as, PGIMER, Chandigarh, AIIMS, New Delhi, and TMH, Mumbai among others. The book serves as a useful resource for surgeons, medical oncologists, radiotherapists, pathologists, radiologists and many other specialists interested in the field of breast cancer and actively working in this area. It is useful for practitioners and residents as well as for those who want to learn the different aspects of this disease.

    Contents:
    Current scenario of breast cancer in India
    Applied anatomy for breast cancer
    Applied physiology for breast cancer
    Aetiopathogenesis and prevention of breast cancer
    Classification of breast cancer
    Approach to a new suspected patient of of breast cancer, including diagnostic evaluation and staging work up
    Cytology for breast cancer
    Pathological evaluation of breast cancer
    Radiological imaging for breast cancer
    PET-CT and total body bone scan for breast cancer
    Tumour markers, prognostic factors and their interpretation in breast cancer
    Management of early breast cancer surgical aspect
    Breast cancer surgery under local anaesthesia
    Management of locally advanced breast cancer - surgical aspect
    Management of late breast cancer (metastatic and recurrent - surgery)
    Management of hereditary breast cancer
    Role of radiotherapy in breast cancer
    Role of chemotherapy in breast cancer
    Hormonal and target therapy for breast cancer
    Oncoplastic and reconstruction for breast cancer
    Management of metastatic breast cancer and palliative care
    Management of breast cancer with associated problems
    Management of lymphoedema in breast cancer
    Management of chemotherapy infusion extravasation in breast cancer
    Psychological and psychiatric support to breast cancer patients
    Follow up and rehabilitation in breast cancer
    Screening, self-examination and awareness in breast cancer
    Organization of breast cancer management group.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Uwe Fischer, MD, Friedemann Baum, MD, Susanne Luftner-Nagel, MD.
    Contents:
    Development, anatomy and physiology of the mammary gland / F. Baum
    Tumor formation / F. Baum
    Pathology of benign and malignant changes in the breast / J. R'schoff
    Non-imaging diagnostics / U. Fischer
    Mammography / U. Fischer
    Breast ultrasonography / S. Luftner-Nagel
    Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) of the breast / U. Fischer
    Imaging of breast lesions / U. Fischer, S. Luftner-Nagel
    Breast intervention / F. Baum
    Examination concepts / U. Fischer
    Surgical treatment of breast cancer / Th. Kahn
    Medical treatment of breast cancer / M. Hellriegel, G. Emons
    Radiotherapy of breast cancer / C.F. Hess
    Management of a diagnostic breast center / F. Baum
    Logistics in an interdisciplinary breast center / G. Emons
    Counselling techniques and psychosocial support / H. Lorch, A. K'chemann, J. R'schoff.
  • Digital
    Umberto Veronesi, Aron Goldhirsch, editors-in-chief ; Paolo Veronesi, Oreste Davide Gentilini, Maria Cristina Leonardi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides the reader with up-to-date information on important advances in the understanding of breast cancer and innovative approaches to its management. Current and emerging perspectives on genetics, biology, and prevention are first discussed in depth, and individual sections are then devoted to pathology, imaging, oncological surgery, plastic and reconstructive surgery, medical oncology, and radiotherapy. In each case the focus is on the most recent progress and/or state of the art therapies and techniques. Further topics to receive detailed consideration include particular conditions requiring multidisciplinary approaches, the investigation of new drugs and immunological agents, lifestyle and psychological aspects, and biostatistics and informatics. The book will be an excellent reference for practitioners, interns and residents in medical oncology, oncologic surgery, radiotherapy, pathology, and human genetics, researchers, and advanced medical students.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Nicoletta Biglia, Fedro Alessandro Peccatori, editors.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology.- Managing breast cancer in young women
    Impact of breast cancer treatment on fertility.- Fertility preservation and ART
    Breast cancer during pregnancy.- Pregnancy after breast cancer
    Reproductive issues in BRCA mutation carriers.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Adrian Cristian.
    Contents:
    Cascade of disability in breast and gynecologic cancer
    Practice implementation, clinical assessment, and outcomes measurement
    Exercise while living with breast and gynecological cancers
    Cancer-related fatigue in breast and gynecologic cancers
    Nutritional rehabilitation of breast and gynecologic cancer patients
    A comprehensive approach to psychosocial distress and anxiety in breast and gynecological cancers
    Prehabilitation in breast and gynecologic oncology
    Systemic therapy for the treatment of breast cancer
    Principles of radiation therapy in breast cancer
    Breast cancer surgery
    Reconstructive surgery and postoperative care for breast cancer
    Rehabilitation of the cancer patient with skeletal metastasis
    Shoulder dysfunction in breast cancer
    Role of interventional pain management in breast cancer
    Aromatase inhibitor musculoskeletal syndrome
    Systemic therapy for gynecologic malignancies
    Principles of radiation therapy in gynecologic cancer
    Surgical gynecologic oncology
    Pelvic floor dysfunction in gynecologic cancer
    Cancer-related cognitive impairment: diagnosis, pathogenesis, and management
    Lymphedema in breast and gynecologic oncology
    Peripheral nervous system involvement in breast and gynecologic cancers
    Inpatient rehabilitation for breast and gynecologic cancer patients
    Palliative care and symptom management in breast and gynecological cancers
    Fertility preservation in the setting of breast and gynecologic cancers and cancer treatment
    Oncology massage therapy in breast and gynecologic cancers.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Jonathan Strauss, William Small, Gayle E. Woloschak, editors.
    Summary: Breast Cancer Biology for the Radiation Oncologist is the first textbook of its kind devoted to describing the biological complexities of breast cancer in a way that is relevant to the radiation oncologist. Radiation Oncology has long treated breast cancer as a single biological entity, with all treatment decisions being based on clinical and pathologic risk factors. We are now beginning to understand that biological subtypes of breast cancer may have different risks of recurrence as well as different intrinsic sensitivity to radiotherapy. Multi-gene arrays that have for years been used to predict the risk of distant recurrence and the value of systemic chemotherapy may also have utility in predicting the risk of local recurrence. Additionally, the targeted agents used to treat breast cancer may interact with radiotherapy in ways that can be beneficial or undesirable. All of these emerging issues of central importance to radiation oncologists are extensively discussed in this book, and practical treatment recommendations based on available clinical evidence are presented whenever possible.

    Contents:
    Biological subtypes of breast cancer
    Oncogene amplification and Herceptin
    Current clinical use of genetic profiling
    Biology of DCIS and progression to invasive disease
    Cancer Stem Cells and Radiotherapy
    Genetic basis of normal tissue radiosensitivity and late toxicity
    Genetic syndromes and radiotherapy in breast cancer
    Experimental therapies in breast cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Mahdi Rezai, Mehmet Ali Kocdor, Nuh Zafer Canturk, editors.
    Summary: Breast cancer is a disease requiring multidisciplinary management including surgery, medical and radiation oncology, radiology, pathology, nuclear medicine, genetic counseling, and psychological support. Each member of the team needs to be updated continuously on breast cancer treatment because of its rapidly changing nature. From the diagnostic procedures to operations and even in metastatic stages of breast cancer, surgeons play an essential part in multidisciplinary teams. After standard surgical options, oncoplastic breast surgery is rapidly becoming one of the most important surgical topics that should be learned by attending surgeons. The idea of writing this book stemmed from a collaboration between the European Academy of Senology (EAoS), European Institute of Oncology (IEO), Euro-Asian Society of Mastology (ESOMA), and SENATURK (Turkish Academy of Senology), which have been working together to promote better training in breast care for professionals. The book offers invaluable support for breast surgeons by covering critical and essential information in senology. It will also greatly benefit the other members of multidisciplinary teams, surgery residents, gynecologists, and plastic and reconstructive surgeons.

    Contents:
    I INTRODUCTION
    1 History of the Breast Surgery
    2 Milestone Studies in the Breast Surgery
    3 Essential Anatomy
    4 Breast Cancer Genetics
    5 Molecular Classification of the Breast Cancer
    6 Basic Pathology
    7 Risk & Management Strategies
    8 Quality Issues & Physician Awareness
    II BEFORE SURGERy
    9 Patient Assessment, Documentation and Clinical Staging
    10 Imaging
    11 Interventional Radiology
    12 Treatment-Directive Pathology
    13 Multidisciplinary Meeting
    14 Primary / Neoadjuvant Treatments
    15 Decision-Making / Operative Planning
    16 Breast
    17 Axilla
    18 Loco-Regional Recurrences.-19 Distant metastases
    III OPERATING ROOM & SURGERY
    20 Situation awareness, communication and teamwork in the Operating Room
    21 Breast conserving and oncoplastic surgery targeting oncoplastic in breast cancer
    22 Standard breast conserving surgery
    23 Level I therapeutic mammoplasty
    24 Level II therapeutic mammoplasty: Round block, Batwing (Omega), Racquet techniques
    25 Inferior pedicle mammoplasty
    26 Superior pedicle mammoplasty
    27 Le-Jour, Vertical Scar & Grisotti techniques
    28 L-plasty, J-plasty, V-mammoplasty
    29 Latissimus dorsi flap reconstruction
    30 Mastectomy-Standard/Skin Sparing/Smiley type
    31 Whole breast reconstruction
    32 Implant-based reconstruction
    33 Autologous tissue-based
    34 Symmetrisation
    35 Augmentation Mastopexy
    36 Reduction mammoplasty
    37 Fat grafting in breast reconstruction
    38 Technical details, purification, the contraindications, complications and cosmetic results of the technique
    39 Nipple-areola reconstruction
    40 Lymphatic surgery
    41 Level I-II (+) III axillary dissection
    42 Sentinel lymph node biopsy
    43 Sentinel lymph node biopsy in special conditions
    44 Lympho-venous bypass & Lymphoid tissue transfer
    IV AFTER SURGERY
    45 Immediate Patient Care
    46 Short-Term Complications & Management
    47 Planning Adjuvant Treatment
    48 Radiation Treatment
    49 Systemic Treatments
    50 Follow-up & Long-Term Patient Care
    51 Long-Term Complications & Management
    52 Judicial Issues
    V ORPHAN ISSUES
    53 Inflammatory breast cancer
    54 Male breast cancer
    55 Occult Breast Cancer
    56 Breast Cancer in older women.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Oreste Gentilini, Ann H. Partridge, Olivia Pagani.
    Summary: This contributed book covers all aspects concerning the clinical scenario of breast cancer in young women, providing physicians with the latest information on the topic. Young women are a special subset of patients whose care requires dedicated expertise. The book, written and edited by internationally recognized experts who have been directly involved in the international consensus guidelines for breast cancer in young women, pays particular attention to how the disease and its planned treatment can be effectively communicated to young patients. Highly informative and carefully structured, it provides both theoretical and practice-oriented insight for practitioners and professionals involved in the different phases of treatment, from diagnosis to intervention, to follow-up - without neglecting the important role played by prevention.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology
    Age and tumour biology
    Imaging to improve diagnosis of breast cancer in young women
    Establishing a program for young women at high risk for breast cancer
    Loco-regional management of hereditary breast cancer
    Systemic therapies of young breast cancer patients at high genetic risk
    SURGICAL MANAGEMENT OF BREAST CANCER IN YOUNG WOMEN
    Radiation therapy: special issues when treating young women with breast cancer
    Timing and type of breast reconstruction in young breast cancer patients
    Tailoring chemotherapy and biological treatment in young patients with EBC
    Endocrine treatment of young patients with EBC
    Management of ABC in young women: what's new on endocrine treatment
    Breast cancer during pregnancy
    Sexual Health & Body Image after Breast Cancer
    Fertility preservation and pregnancy after breast cancer
    Lifestyle changes and prevention- unique issues for young women
    Supportive care and Psycho-oncology issues during and beyond diagnosis and treatment.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Aamir Ahmad, editor.
    Summary: ​This volume covers recent progress in breast cancer research. It explores breast cancer, the factors that make it lethal and current research progress, including stem cells, microRNAs, epigenetics, genomics and some novel signaling pathways​.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Lida Mina, Anna Maria Storniolo, Hal Douglas Kipfer, Cindy Hunter, Kandice Ludwig.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction to breast cancer: The Magnitude of the problem
    2. Risk Factors for Breast Cancer
    3. Defining the population at elevated risk for Breast Cancer: Risk Models
    4. Genetic predisposition and Genetic screening
    5. The BRCA patient population
    6. Women with benign proliferative breast disease
    7. Approach to Imaging
    8. Chemoprevention
    9. Lifestyle and Breast Cancer
    10. Obesity and Inflammation
    11. Conclusion/the Future/ Komen Tissue Bank/Clinical Trials.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Orit Kaidar-Person, Icro Meattini, Philip Poortmans, editors.
    Summary: The book provides, in a comprehensive yet concise way, essential information to improve the knowledge and skills of all healthcare providers involved in the treatment of patients with breast cancer. The content does not focus on general information that is widely available via different sources, but on technical aspects "hands-on" daily practices and principles of radiation oncology that are not included in other books. Drawing on information taught in courses at e.g. the ESTRO School, as well as the authors broad clinical experience, the respective contributions reflect and share the expertise of leading experts in breast cancer radiation therapy, supported by sound data and evidence. Each chapter includes a short introduction summarizing the evidence in the literature and "pearls" (a short bullet-point summary), and is enriched by tables, figures and illustrations to provide a concise, easy-to-follow and appealing overview. The book, containing also useful electronic supplementary material, will be of interest to a wide range of readers, including radiation oncologists, radiation technicians, medical physicists, and others involved in breast cancer care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Quality Management
    Management and workflow
    Part 1 general
    Part 2 radiation therapy preparation
    Part 3 radiation therapy delivery
    Part 4 after completion of radiation therapy
    Part 5 specific technical topics
    Part 6 specific disease topics
    Part 7 risk assessment and radiation quality assurance.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Nehmat Houssami, Professor of Public Health, and National Breast Cancer Foundation (NBCF Australia) Breast Cancer Research Leader Fellow, School of Public Health, Sydney Medical School, University of Sydney, Australia, Diana Miglioretti, Dean's Professor in Biostatistics, UC Davis School of Medicine, Department of Public Health Sciences, University of California, Davis, CA, United States, and Senior Investigator, Group Health Reseach Institute, Group Health Cooperative, Seattle, WA, United States.
    Contents:
    Breast cancer screening : balancing evidence with culture, politics, money, and media
    Estimates of screening benefit : the randomized trials of breast cancer screening
    Weighing the benefits and harms : screening mammography in the balance
    The importance of observational evidence to estimate and monitor mortality reduction from current breast cancer screening
    The role of microsimulation modeling in evaluating the outcomes and effect of screening
    Challenges in understanding and quantifying overdiagnosis and overtreatment
    Challenges and opportunities in the implementation of risk-based screening for breast cancer
    Breast cancer screening in the older woman
    Screening women in their 40s
    Screening for breast cancer in women with dense breasts
    Screening women with known or suspected cancer gene mutations
    Imaging surveillance of women with a personal history of breast cancer
    Evolution of mammography screening : from film screen to digital breast tomosynthesis
    Ethical and societal considerations in breast cancer screening
    Treatment of screen-detected breast cancer: can we avoid or minimize overtreatment?
    Informed and shared decision making in breast screening.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2016
  • Digital
    Mahesh K Shetty, editor.
    Summary: This book presents the current trends and practices in breast imaging. Topics include mammographic interpretation; breast ultrasound; breast MRI; management of the symptomatic breast in young, pregnant, and lactating women; breast intervention with imaging pathological correlation; the postoperative breast; and current and emerging technologies in breast imaging. It emphasizes the importance of fostering a multidisciplinary approach in the diagnosis and treatment of breast diseases. Featuring more than 800 high-resolution images and showcasing contributions from leading authorities in the screening, diagnosis, and management of the breast cancer patient, Breast Cancer Screening and Diagnosis is a valuable resource for radiologists, oncologists, and surgeons. Mahesh K. Shetty is a Clinical Professor of Radiology at Baylor College of Medicine and the chief physician at the Woman?s Center for Breast Care & MRI at The Woman?s Hospital of Texas.

    Contents:
    Breast Cancer Genetics and Risk Assessment
    Screening for Breast Cancer
    Mammography Techniques, Positioning, and Optimizing Image Quality
    Digital Mammography and Digital Breast Tomosynthesis
    Mammographic Signs of Breast Cancer
    Probably Benign Abnormalities of the Breast
    Breast Ultrasound
    The Basics of Breast MRI
    Breast MRI for Diagnosis and Staging of Breast Cancer
    Optimizing Mammographic Screening and Diagnosis of Breast Cancer
    Imaging of the Symptomatic Breast in the Young, Pregnant, or Lactating Woman
    Breast Intervention
    Imaging Pathologic Correlation in Breast Imaging
    Challenges in Breast Imaging
    Staging of Breast Cancer
    The Post-Operative Breast
    The Multidisciplinary Approach to Breast Cancer Management
    Design and Operation of a Comprehensive Breast Care Center
    Emerging Technologies in Breast Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Alistair Ring, Marina Parton, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Predicting risk of disease recurrence
    3. Detection of recurrence: clinical follow-up
    4. Detection of recurrence: imaging strategies
    5. Follow up of patients with germline mutations in high risk predisposition genes
    6. Endocrine therapy
    7. Systemic therapies to reduce the risk of recurrence in early breast cancer: new strategies
    8. Exercise in breast cancer survivors
    9. Dietary components and breast cancer survivorship
    10. Identifiying and managing the consequences of treatment for early breast cancer
    11. Managing loco-regional complications of breast cancer
    12. The role of surgery in breast cancer survivors
    13. Management of menopausal symptoms in breast cancer survivors
    14. Bone health
    15. Fertility
    16. Cardiotoxicity in breast cancer survivors
    17. Second primary neoplasms following a diagnosis of breast cancer
    18. The effects of breast cancer treatments on cognition
    19. Psychological issues in breast cancer survivorship
    20. Fatigue in breast cancer survivors
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Connie Henke Yarbro, Debra Wujcik, Barbara Holmes Gobel.
    Summary: "Breast Care Certification Review, Second Edition is the ultimate learning package designed to help prepare oncology nurses to become certified in caring for patients with breast cancer. Thoroughly updated to address the 2018 updates to the Certified Breast Care Nurse (CBCN) examination, it provides numerous practice questions with comprehensive answer rationales making it the essential guide for nurses planning to sit for the CBCN examination"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Coordination of care
    Diagnosis and staging
    Treatment modalities : local and systemic
    Nursing practice
    Psychosocial and spiritual.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Maurizio Pinamonti, Fabrizio Zanconati.
    Contents:
    Fine-needle aspiration cytology : sampling and preparation technique, fixation, and staining
    Principles of interpretation
    Normal breast
    Cytology of inflammatory and reactive changes
    Cystic lesions
    Epithelial proliferative lesions
    Fibroepithelial lesions
    Invasive carcinoma
    Other breast neoplasms
    Assessment of the lymph node status
    Ancillary techniques.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Adam I. Riker, editor.
    Summary: Breast Disease: Comprehensive Management provides a clear, concise source of information in order to make real-life, evidence-based decisions for all aspects of breast disease, both benign and malignant. The volume provides the latest breakthroughs in breast cancer research, ranging from paradigm shifts in the surgical management of the axilla, the changing role of adjuvant and neoadjuvant chemotherapy, the impact of molecular medicine in decision-making and the controversial role of prophylactic mastectomy in our era. Within select chapters, ℓ́ℓHow I do itℓ́ℓ clinical scenarios are supplied and described in very practical terms. Also included at the end of each chapter are synoptic questions with detailed answers, akin to the self-assessment (SESAP) format questions and answers. These questions provide a basis for continuous medical education (CME) for the practicing physician and surgeon, further in surgical oncology and breast surgery, medical oncologists, radiation oncologists, and breast radiologists enhancing a focused approach to the management of breast disease in preparation for the American Board of Surgery certification and re-certification for the general surgeon. This title is of great value to general surgeons, breast surgeons, surgical oncologists, general surgery residents, and fellows
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Adnan Aydiner, Abdullah Igci, Atilla Soran, editors.
    Summary: This first of two fully updated volumes provides an in-depth account of breast disease characteristics, imaging and diagnosis. Covering from breast anatomy and tumor biology to benign and malignant lesions this is an indispensable companion for breast specialists, medical oncologists, radiologists and pathologists. The new edition contains chapters covering nuclear medicine and a chapter explaining biostatistical and epidemiological terms and has been updated to reflect the latest changes in biomarkers and cancer staging. The book explores topics such as epidemiology, risk factors, pathological evaluation of tumors and biopsy techniques. With a high number of colored illustrations and edited by highly experienced clinicians, this work enables readers to gain an interdisciplinary perspective on breast diseases. Contributions from an international team of experts present invaluable insight into pathological and epidemiological aspects of breast disease. Covering both theoretical and practical aspects of breast cancer this is a highly informative and carefully presented book which will appeal to an international audience of breast cancer practitioners.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Adnan Aydiner, Abdullah İğci, Atilla Soran, editors.
    Contents:
    Breast anatomy and physiology
    2. Benign diseases of the breast
    3. Benign breast tumors
    4. Epidemiology, risk factors, and prevention
    5. Breast imaging and image-guided biopsy techniques
    6. Lobular carcinoma in situ
    8. Biology and genetics of breast cancer
    9. Clinical aspects of estrogen and progesterone receptros and ERBB2 testing
    10. Prognostic and predictive factors of invasive breast cancer
    11. Gene arrays, prognosis, and therapeutic interventions
    12. Bone marrow micrometastases and circulating tumor cells
    13. Pathology of breast cancer
    14. Intraoperative pathological examination of breast lesions
    15. Fibroepithelial tumors of the breast
    16. Mesenchymal tumors of the breast
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Adnan Aydiner, Abdullah İgci, Atilla Soran, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Biopsy techniques in non-palpable or palpable breast lesions
    2. Evaluation of patients for metastases prior to primary therapy
    3. Staging of breast cancer
    4. Surgical treatment of early-stage breast cancer
    5. Evaluation of axillary nodes
    6. Breast reconstruction
    7. Adjuvant systemic therapy: endocrine therapy
    8. Adjuvant systemic chemotherapy for HER2-negative disease
    9. Adjuvant therapy for HER2-positive early breast cancer
    10. Post-mastectomy adjuvant radiotherapy (PMRT)
    11. Adjuvant radiation therapy after peroperative chemotherapy
    12. Breast-conserving therapy: hypofractionated and conventional whole-breast irradiation and accelerated partial-breast irradiation
    13. Preoperative therapy for operable breast cancer
    14. Neoadjuvant hormonal therapy in breast cancer
    15. Systermic therapy for locally advanced breast cancer
    16. Systemic therapy for inflammatory breast cancer
    17. Surgical management of operable breast cancer after neoadjuvant systemic therapy
    18. Surgical management of locally advanced breast cancer
    19. Surgical management of inflammatory breast cancer
    20. Occult primary breast cancer with axillary metastases
    21. Breast cancer in older women
    22. Breast cancer in young women (premenopausal breast cacner)
    23. Male breast cancer
    24. Breast cancer in pregnancy
    25. Paget's disease of the breast
    26. Phyllodes tumors of the breast
    27. Nonepithelial malignancies of the breast
    28. Surveillance of patients following primary therapy
    29. Surgery for the primary tumor in patients with de novo stage IV breast cancer
    30. Local-regional recurrence after breast-conservation treatment or mastectomy
    31. Treatment of metastic breast cancer: chemotherapy
    32. Treatment of metastatic breast cancer: chemotherapy
    33. Treatment of HER2-overexpressing metastatic breast cancer
    34. End-of-life considerations in patients with breast cancer
    35. Angiogenesis inhibition in breast cancer
    36. Tyrosine kinase inhibitors
    37. Neurological metastases
    38. Ocular metastases
    39. Management of malignant pleural effusions in breast cancer
    40. Management of discrete pulmonary nodules
    41. Management of isolated liver metastasis
    42. Bone-directed therapy and breast cancer: bisphosphonates, monoclonal antibodies, and radionuclides
    43. The local management of bone metastases
    44. A review of local and systemic therapy in breast cancer
    45. Decision pathways in breast cancer management
    46. Nursing care and management
    47. Psychosocial adaptation during and after breast cancer
    48. Breast cancer-related lymphedema (BCRL)
    49. Reproductive issues in breast cancer
    50. Onco-cardiology for breast cancer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Adnan Aydiner, Abdullah Igci, Atilla Soran, editors.
    Summary: This second updated volume on breast cancer provides a comprehensive overview of its clinical management and current therapies. Updated to reflect the changes in breast cancer staging, the progress in immunotherapy approaches, as well as the latest guidelines for therapies, this book brings readers up to speed with the latest therapeutic regimens in breast cancer and provides an in-depth account of current and new therapeutic approaches. The most important phase III trials, high quality meta-analysis, consensus reports and guidelines are extensively discussed in this new edition and provide the reader with the most up-to-date information. Divided in themed parts, the book examines invasive breast cancer, pre-operative systemic therapy surgical management and recurrence among others, thus providing an in-depth account of breast cancer at the clinical stage. Among the themed parts are a section dedicated to special therapeutic problems, such as breast cancer in older women, Paget's disease and phyllodes tumors and a section on supportive and follow-up care. By adopting a multidisciplinary approach to breast cancer, this book is a must-have for breast cancer practitioners. With a high number of colored illustrations and edited by highly experienced clinicians, this work enables readers to gain an interdisciplinary perspective on breast diseases. Contributions from an international team of experts present invaluable insight into clinical practice across different settings. Covering both theoretical and practical aspects of breast cancer, this is a highly informative and carefully presented book which will appeal to an international audience of medical, radiation and surgical oncologists.

    Contents:
    Part I Invasive Breast Cancer- 1. Biopsy Techniques in Non- palpable or Palpable Breast Lesions
    2. Evaluations of Patients for Metastases Prior to Primary Therapy
    3. Staging of Breast Cancer
    4. Surgical Treatment of Early-Stage Breast Cancer
    5. Evaluations of Axillary Nodes
    6. Breast Reconstruction
    7. Adjuvant Systemic Therapy: Endocrine Therapy
    8. Adjuvant Systemic Chemotherapy for HER2-Negative Disease
    9. Adjuvant Therapy for HER2-Positive Early Breast Cancer
    10. Post-mastectomy Adjuvant Radiotherapy (PMRT)
    11. Adjuvant Radiation Therapy After Preoperative Chemotherapy
    12. Breast-Conserving Therapy: Hypo fractionated and Conventional Whole-Breast Irradiation and Accelerated Partial-Breast Irradiation
    Part II Preoperative Systemic Therapy
    13 Preoperative Therapies for Operable Breast Cancer
    14 Neoadjuvant Hormonal Therapies in Breast Cancer
    15 Systemic Therapies for Locally Advanced Breast Cancer
    16 Systemic Therapies for Inflammatory Breast Cancer
    Part III Surgical Management of Patient with Preoperative Systemic Therapy- 17 Surgical Management of Operable Breast Cancer After Neoadjuvant Systemic Therapy
    18 Surgical Management of Locally Advanced Breast Cancer
    19 Surgical Management of Inflammatory Breast Cancer
    Part IV Special Therapeutic Problems- 20 Occult Primary Breast Cancer with Axillary Metastases
    21 Breast Cancer in Older Women
    22 Breast Cancer in Young Women (Premenopausal Breast Cancer)
    23 Male Breast Cancer
    24 Breast Cancer in Pregnancy
    25 Paget's disease of the Breast
    26 Phyllodes Tumors of the Breast
    27 Nonepithelial Malignancies of the Breast
    Part V Evaluation After Primary Therapy and Management of Recurrent Breast Cancer
    28 Surveillance of Patients Following Primary Therapy
    29 Surgeries for the Primary Tumor in Patients with De Novo Stage IV Breast Cancer
    30 Local-Regional Recurrences After Breast-Conservation Treatment or Mastectomy
    31 Treatment of Metastatic Breast Cancer: Endocrine Therapy
    32 Treatment of Metastatic Breast Cancer: Chemotherapy
    33 Treatment of HER2- Overexpressing Metastatic Breast Cancer
    34 End-of-Life Considerations in Patients with Breast Cancer
    Part VI New Breast Cancer Therapeutic Approaches
    35 Angiogenesis Inhibition in Breast Cancer
    36 Tyrosine Kinase Inhibitors
    37 Immunotherapy
    Part VII Site-Specific Therapy of Metastatic Breast Cancer
    38 Neurological Metastases
    39 Ocular Metastases. Nergiz Dagoglu and Anand Mahadevan
    40 Management of Malignant Pleural Effusions in Breast Cancer
    41 Management of Discrete Pulmonary Nodules
    42 Management of Isolated Liver Metastasis. Abdullah çIægci and Enver èOzkurt
    43 Bone-Directed Therapy and Breast Cancer: Bisphosphonates, Monoclonal Antibodies, and Radionuclides Bulent Erdogan and Irfan Cicin
    44 The Local Management of Bone Metastases. Levent Eralp and Halil Buldu
    Part VIII Review of the Breast Cancer Management
    45 A Review of Local and Systemic Therapy in Breast Cancer
    46 Decision Pathways in Breast Cancer Management
    Part IX Supportive Care in Breast Cancer
    47 Nursing Care and Management
    48 Psychosocial Adaptation During and After Breast Cancer
    49 Breast Cancer-Related Lymphedema (BCRL)
    50 Reproductive Issues in Breast Cancer
    51 Onco-cardiology for Breast Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Guilherme Novita. Antônio Luiz Frasson. Eduardo Camargo Millen, Felipe Zerwes, Francisco Pimentel Cavalcante, editors.
    Summary: Designed in a small-format for practical reading and point-of-care setting use, this work presents the most up-to-date concepts on breast diseases. The main objective of this book is to propagate current knowledge of the most frequent breast diseases, being a quick reference, evidence-based manual covering the major clinical scenarios in mastology. The essence of the work can be summarized in the following sentence: "access to maximum content in the least amount of time." The book contains data that will allow readers to understand and treat patients with different complaints and diseases. Each chapter presents a flow chart and a summary of the five major publications on the subject. This is unique in comparison with other books in this medical specialty. Developed by a team of international expert specialists who deal with breast pathologies on a daily basis, the book also includes additional contributions from experienced, renowned professionals in interdisciplinary specialties related to the main area. This book will be of interest to physicians who deal with breast diseases and wish to improve their knowledge through exposure to state-of-the-art data and best practices advice. It is also directed to medical students and residents in training within mastology. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    BI-RADS® Classification
    Mammography
    Ultrasound
    Magnetic Resonance Scanning
    Nuclear Medicine: PET Scan, Breast Scintigraphy and MBI
    Other Imaging Methods
    Mammographic Screening
    Special Screening Situations
    Percutaneous Biopsies
    Clinical and Radiological Aspects
    Percutaneous Biopsies
    Histopathological Aspects
    Histopathological Classification of Benign Lesions
    Breast Lump
    Mastalgia
    Nipple Discharge
    Gynecomastia
    Infectious Breast Diseases
    Classification of Proliferative Breast Lesions
    Treatment of Proliferative Breast Lesions
    Ductal Carcinoma in situ
    Identifying High-Risk Patients
    Practical Aspects of Genetic Counselling
    Prevention: Habits and Behavior
    Chemoprevention
    Risk Reducing Surgeries
    Carcinogenesis and Natural History of Breast Cancer
    Histopathological and Immunohistochemical Classification of Breast Cancer
    Staging and Prognostic Factors
    Epidemiology of Breast Cancer
    ^Predictive and Prognostic Factors: Genetic Signatures, Adjuvant! and PREDICT
    Mastectomy
    Conservative Breast Surgery
    Surgery of Axillary and Regional Lymph Nodes
    Surgery of Non-Palpable Breast Lesions
    Handling the Surgical Specimen
    Principles of Oncoplastic Breast Surgery
    Partial Breast Reconstruction
    Pedicles
    Breast Reconstruction with Implants
    Breast Reconstruction with Myocutaneous Flaps
    Lipofilling
    Aesthetic Breast Surgery
    Early Breast Cancer
    Locally Advanced Breast Surgery
    Influence of Histologic, Immunohistochemical and Molecular Types on Therapeutics
    Inflammatory Carcinoma
    Invasive Lobular Carcinoma
    Occult Breast Cancer
    Paget's Disease
    Nonepithelial Breast Cancer
    Pregnancy-Associated Breast Cancer
    Breast Cancer in Young Patients
    Breast Cancer in Elderly Patients
    Multifocal, Multicentric and Bilateral Carcinoma
    Breast Cancer in Men
    Local Relapses
    ^Breast Cancer in Patients with Previous Aesthetic Surgery
    Radiotherapy
    Hormonal Therapy
    Adjuvant Chemotherapy
    Therapy Anti-Her-2
    Neoadjuvant Therapy
    Other Systemic Treatments
    Follow-up
    Survivorship
    Physical Rehabilitation after Breast Cancer Treatment
    Contraception and Infertility
    Climateric Treatment after Breast Cancer
    Metastatic Breast Cancer
    Therapies and Palliative Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Radhakrishna Selvi.
    Summary: It is challenging enough to be able to make a diagnosis in mammography, but the newer standards of care demand more than just providing a diagnosis. This book is an excellent resource to improve the understanding of breast diseases, recognize and manage problems encountered in breast imaging and clinical management of the breast diseases. With forty four chapters, this volume is divided into six sections on screening of breast cancer, imaging modalities, benign breast disorders, interventional procedures, pathological considerations and breast cancer. Breast Diseases: Imaging and Clinical Management is a crisp volume on clinical and multimodality breast imaging with emphasis on interventional procedures, pathology and the entire spectrum of breast cancers.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Richard G. Barr.
    Summary: "Elastography is a noninvasive imaging technique that detects tumors based on their stiffness compared to normal tissue. It uses ultrasound technology and can be performed during an ultrasound examination of the breast. It can dramatically reduce the number of breast biopsies performed. This book introduces the techniques of breast elastography followed by a detailed description for each of the techniques, highlighting their pros and cons. This is followed by a section on how to perform each of the techniques. The third section discusses the methods of interpretation for each technique, and the final section presents cases studies highlighting the pros and cons of each technique and how to avoid pitfalls in interpretation. It is written to appeal to the beginner as well as the experienced user"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to breast elastography
    Principles of elastography
    Strain elastography
    Shear wave elastography
    Combination of shear wave and strain elastography
    Clinical cases : benign lesions
    Clinical cases : malignant lesions
    Clinical cases : other lesions
    Future perspective and conclusions.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    editors, Biren A. Shah, Sabala R. Mandava.
    Contents:
    Regulatory/standards of care
    Breast cancer screening
    Diagnostic breast imaging, breast pathology, and breast imaging findings
    Breast intervention
    Breast imaging physics and safety.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Digital
    Michael Fuchsjäger, Elizabeth Morris, Thomas Helbich, editors.
    Summary: This superbly illustrated book provides a thorough, up-to-date overview of diagnostic breast imaging and therapy. Drs. Elizabeth Morris, Michael Fuchsjäger, and Thomas Helbich, three experts in the field, have collaborated with colleagues from their institutions and selected medical centers to share their expertise. The coverage ranges from basic information on imaging technologies and interventional equipment and how to use them optimally to the application of advanced high-end techniques for screening and assessment in any given professional environment. Readers will find clear instruction on the various breast interventional procedures guided by stereotaxis, ultrasound, and magnetic resonance imaging in wide clinical use. The management of patients with ductal carcinoma in situ and high-risk breast cancer is considered separately. Furthermore, the role of minimally invasive therapy is examined, and advice is provided on post-therapy evaluation, including breast implants. A comprehensive diagnostic atlas with hundreds of images completes this volume and addresses the spectrum of various clinical situations.

    Contents:
    Mammography and Digital Breast Tomosynthesis:Technique
    Contrast Enhanced Mammography
    Mammography Screening
    Stereotactic Guided Breast Interventions
    How to Use Breast Ultrasound
    Breast Ultrasound: Advanced Techniques
    Automated Breast Ultrasound
    Ultrasound-Guided Interventions
    Breast MRI: Techniques and Indications
    Abbreviated Breast MRI: Short and Sweet?
    Breast MRI: Multiparametric and Advanced Techniques
    MRI-Guided Breast Interventions
    Imaging the Axilla
    Imaging of Ductal Carcinoma In Situ (DCIS)
    Cystic and Complex Cystic and Solid Lesions
    High-Risk Lesions of the Breast - Diagnosis and Management
    Minimal Invasive Therapy
    Post Therapy Evaluation (Including Breast Implants)
    Impact and Assessment of Breast Density
    Artificial Intelligence in Breast Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Gilda Cardeñosa.
    Contents:
    Screening mammography
    Diagnostic mammography and problem solving
    Breast ultrasound
    Magnetic resonance imaging of the breast
    Skin
    Nipple-areolar complex
    Major subareolar ducts
    Terminal ducts
    Lobules
    Stroma
    The altered breast
    The breast in men
    Interventional procedures.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    Niketa Chotai, Supriya Kulkarni.
    Summary: This book covers all the essential aspects of breast imaging necessary for the preparation of MMed, MD, FRCR and FRANZCR exams. The main focus is on mammogram and breast ultrasound along with basics of breast MRI and breast interventions. With the increasing popularity of these qualifying exams among radiology residents in Asia, Great Britain as well as Australia and dearth of relevant resources on the topic, this book will serve as a valuable resource for the candidates. The book is also aligned with preparations required for the FRCPC (Canada) and the American Board of Radiology. The book is divided into two sections - first section includes chapters on basics of breast imaging along with a chapter on emerging technologies while the second section includes 50 exam-relevant cases covering imaging findings utilizing appropriate BI-RADS lexicon, possible differentials, next recommended investigation and appropriate management in accordance with American College of Radiology lexicon, BI-RADS system and MRI correlation, whenever available. Readers also get familiar with the indications for breast MRI. The book is written by experts in breast imaging with relevant teaching experience. Written by an experts with strong teaching experience, this book is not only suitable for exams but is also useful for practicing breast and non-breast radiologists as well as breast care clinicians, keen to learn fundamentals of breast imaging.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Abbreviations
    Part I: Basics of Breast Imaging
    1: General Considerations in Breast Imaging
    1.1 Anatomy
    1.2 Anatomy of Axillary Nodes (Figs. 1.2 and 1.3)
    1.3 Scheduling
    1.4 Patient History and Clinical Details
    Suggested Readings
    2: Mammography
    2.1 Mammographicy Technique
    2.2 Quality Assurance in Mammography
    2.3 Positioning
    2.4 Breast Compression
    2.5 Labeling
    2.6 Breast Composition
    2.7 Assessing the Adequacy of Mammographic Views
    2.8 Approach to Reading a Mammogram Suggested Readings
    3: Additional Views
    Suggested Readings
    4: Breast Ultrasound
    Suggested Readings
    5: Breast MRI
    5.1 Screening
    High-Risk Screening
    Foreign Body Injections
    Surveillance
    5.2 Diagnostic
    Suggested Readings
    6: Screening
    6.1 Average-Risk Population Screening Guidelines
    6.2 High-Risk Population Screening Guidelines
    Suggested Readings
    7: Digital Breast Tomosynthesis
    7.1 Performance of DBT for Screening
    7.2 DBT and Calcifications
    7.3 DBT and Radiation Dose
    7.4 DBT and Synthetic View
    7.5 DBT and Time 7.6 DBT for Diagnostic Workup
    7.7 DBT Biopsy and Contrast-Enhanced DBT
    Suggested Readings
    8: BI-RADS Lexicon
    Suggested Reading
    9: Organization of Breast Imaging Reports
    9.1 Indication for Examination
    9.2 Breast Composition Description
    9.3 Clear Description of any Important Findings
    Mammograms
    Ultrasound
    MRI
    9.4 Comparison with Prior Study
    9.5 Assessment Category
    9.6 Management
    Suggested Reading
    10: Emerging Technologies
    10.1 Contrast Enhanced Mammogram (Fig. 10.1)
    10.2 Elastography (Fig. 10.2) Static Ultrasound Elastography: Strain Imaging
    Dynamic Ultrasound Elastography: Shear Wave Imaging
    Automated Breast Ultrasound (ABUS) (Fig. 10.3)
    Suggested Readings
    Part II: Case Based Review
    11: Calcifications
    11.1 Case 11.1
    Questions
    Answers
    Notes
    Breast Calcifications
    Morphology
    Distribution
    11.2 Case 11.2
    Questions
    Answers
    Notes
    Ductal and Lobular Proliferations
    Atypical Ductal Hyperplasia (ADH)
    Lobular Neoplasia (LN)
    Management
    11.3 Case 11.3
    Questions
    Answers
    Notes
    Fibrocystic Change (FCC)
    11.4 Case 11.4 Questions
    Answers
    Notes
    Secretory Calcifications (Plasma Cell Mastitis)
    11.5 Case 11.5
    Questions
    Answers
    Notes
    Ductal Carcinoma In Situ (DCIS)
    Management
    11.6 Case 11.6
    Questions
    Answers
    Notes
    Paget's Disease
    11.7 Case 11.7
    Questions
    Answers
    Notes
    Recurrent DCIS
    Radiological-Pathological (Rad-Path) Concordance
    Category 1: Concordant Malignancy
    Category 2: Discordant Malignancy
    Category 3: Concordant Benign
    Category 4: Discordant Benign
    Category 5: Borderline or High Risk
    Suggested Readings
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Biren A. Shah, Gina M. Fundaro, Sabala Mandava.
    Summary: This book provides a concise review of essential radiology findings for interpreting multimodality images of the breast. It includes over 90 cases that present patient history, radiologic findings, common diagnoses, and discussion points, accompanied by over 360 high-quality digital images derived from mammography, ultrasound, MRI, and PET modalities. It also presents concise pearls covering the basics of interventional breast procedures; high-yield facts vital to the practice of breast imaging; and a quick reference to the fifth edition of the American College of Radiology Breast Imaging-Reporting and Data System (BI-RADS) Atlas for mammography, ultrasound, and breast MRI. Breast Imaging Review: A Quick Guide to Essential Diagnoses, 2nd Edition, is a valuable resource for radiology residents preparing to take the core and certifying exams as well as for fellows and practicing radiologists interested in reviewing the basics of breast imaging interpretation and interventional procedures.

    Contents:
    Mammography and Ultrasound Review
    MRI Case Review
    Interventional Breast Procedures
    High-Yield Facts. BI-RADS Key Facts.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Francesco Sardanelli, Franca Podo, editors.
    Summary: This book offers a comprehensive overview of the use of breast MRI for screening high-risk women, including those with familial-genetic hereditary predisposition and previous chest radiation therapy, typically lymphoma survivors. It discusses the historical background of studies and research that provided the body of evidence in favor of MRI screening of these women. Technical and clinical topics are treated in dedicated chapters, including models for individualized risk estimation, radiogenomics of breast cancer in high-risk women, computer-aided detection/diagnosis and machine learning systems applied to breast MRI, and psycho-oncology issues. Alternatives to breast MRI screening such as pharmaco-prevention and prophylactic mastectomy are also discussed, taking into account the public debate on the "Angelina Jolie" effect. The high breast cancer risk model is proposed as a paradigm for personalized medicine. This book will be of interest to radiologists, surgeons, oncologists and to all professionals devoted to female healthcare.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Thirty years of contrast enhanced breast MRI
    The mantra about low specificity breast MRI
    BRCA and other genes conferring hereditary breast cancer predisposition
    Screening mammography: One size fits all?
    MRI protocols for breast cancer screening
    Contrast materials for screening MRI and concerns about tissue deposition
    Applying MRI BI-RADS in a high-risk population
    CAD systems for breast MRI screening
    Phenotype presentation and radiogenomics of breast cancer with special focus on high-risk women
    The body of primary evidence about MRI for high risk screening: retrospective and prospective studies
    High-risk screening: MRI alone?
    Secondary evidence from systematic reviews and meta-analyses
    Radioprotection issues for women with hereditary predisposition for breast cancer
    Impact of MRI screening on high-risk patient outcome
    The special case of previous chest radiation therapy
    IT infrastructure for data managing in multicenter high-risk screening
    Guidelines and recommendations all over the world: agreements and differences
    Medical options: Pharmacopreventio- Surgical options: Prophylactic mastectomy and oophorectomy
    Psychosocial aspects of high-risk of breast cancer
    Calculating, using and improving individual breast cancer risk estimates
    MRI for screening women with a personal history of breast cancer
    Screening MRI for the intermediate risk: an open issue
    Looking at the future: Personalized breast cancer screening
    Acknowledgments. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editor, Gillian M. Newstead.
    Contents:
    Overview of breast MRI / Gillian M. Newstead
    Who should be screened? / Gillian M. Newstead
    Screening MRI : DCE-MRI methods / Gregory S. Karczmar, Frederico D. Pinedo, and Naoko Mori
    Screening MRI : clinical implementation / Gillian M. Newstead
    Diagnostic MRI : imaging protocols and technical considerations / Gillian M. Newstead
    Diagnostic MRI interpretation / Gillian M. Newstead and Michael Middleton
    Image interpretation : non-invasive cancer / Gillian M. Newstead
    Image interpretation : invasive cancer / Gillian M. Newstead
    Management of findings initially detected at MRI / Hiroyuki Abe
    Diagnostic MRI : breast cancer applications / Gillian M. Newstead
    Advanced breast MRI techniques / Milicia Medved
    Semi-quantitative and quantitative analysis of breast DCE-MRI / Gregory S. Karczmar and Frederico D. Pineda
    Future applications : radiomics and deep learning on breast MRI / Maryellen L. Giger.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
  • Digital
    Richard Ha, Christopher E. Comstock, Elizabeth A. Morris, editors.
    Summary: This atlas serves as a basic introduction to breast MRI. Organized by case, it emphasizes pertinent breast MRI findings and common indications for breast MRI. Topics include breast MRI basics, benign findings, breast malignancy, high-risk conditions, interesting cases, and breast implants. Brief teaching points accompany each case and highlight the importance of the findings. Breast MRI Teaching Atlas is an ideal resource for diagnostic radiologists, residents, fellows, and clinicians involved in the care of breast cancer patients, including surgeons, oncologists, and obstetricians/gynecologists.

    Contents:
    Breast MRI basics
    Benign findings
    Breast malignancy
    High risk
    Interesting cases
    Breast implants.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Samantha L. Heller, Linda Moy, editors.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Techniques
    1. Breast MRI Technique
    2. Breast MRI: Standing Terminologies and Reporting
    Section 2. Indications
    3. MRI and Screening
    4. MRI and Preoperative Staging in Women Newly Diagnosed with Breast Cancer
    5. Magnetic Resonance Imaging and Noeadjuvent Chemotherapy
    6. Breast MRI and Implants
    7. Problem Solving Breast MRI for Mammographic, Sonographic, or Clinical Findings
    8. Post-Operative findings/recurrent disease
    Section 3. MRI Findings, Interpretation and Management
    9. In Situ Disease on Breast MRI
    10. MRI appearance of Invasive Breast Cancer
    11. Targeted Ultrasound after MRI
    12. Breast Biopsy and Breast MRI Wire Localization
    13. Breast MRI and the Benign Breast Biopsy
    14. BI-RADS 3 Lesions on MRI
    15. Multiparametric Imaging: Cutting-Edge Sequences and Techniques including Diffusion-Weighted Imaging, Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy, and PET/CT or PET/MRI
    16. Abbreviated Breast MRI
    17. Personalized Medicine, Biomarkers of Risk and Breast MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] David J. Dabbs.
    Contents:
    1. Normal breast and developmental disorders
    2. Reactive and inflammatory conditions of the breast
    3. Infections of the breast
    4. Epidemiology of breast cancer and pathology of heritable breast cancer
    5. Patient safety in breast pathology
    6. Gross examination of breast pathology
    7. Sentinel lymph node biopsy
    8. Breast imaging modalities for pathologists
    9. Predictive and prognostic marker testing in breast pathology: immunophenotypic subclasses of disease
    10. Molecular-based testing in breast disease for therapeutic decisions
    11. Diagnostic immunohistology of the breast
    12. Fibroepithelial lesions
    13. Papilloma and papillary lesions
    14. Adenosis and microglandular adenosis
    15. Nipple adenoma (florid papillomatosis of the nipple)
    16. Radial scar
    17. Myoepithelial lesions of the breast
    18. Fibrocystic change and usual epithelial hyperplasia of ductal type
    19. Columnar cell alterations, flat epithelial atypia, and atypical ductal epithelial hyperplasia
    20. Molecular classification of breast carcinoma
    21. Lobular neoplasia and invasive lobular carcinoma
    22. Ductal carcinoma in situ
    23. Invasive ductal carcinoma of no special type and histologic grade
    24. Triple-negative and basal-like carcinoma
    25. Metaplastic breast carcinoma
    26. Apocrine carcinoma of the breast
    27. Paget disease of the breast
    28. Pathology of neoadjuvant therapeutic response of breast carcinoma
    29. Special types of invasive breast: tubular carcinoma, mucinous carcinoma, cribriform carcinoma, micropapillary carcinoma, carcinoma with medullary features
    30. Rare breast carcinomas: adenoid cystic carcinoma, neuroendocrine carcinoma, secretory carcinoma, carcinoma with osteoclast-like giant cells, lipid-rich carcinoma, and glycogen-rich clear cell carcinoma
    31. Mesenchymal neoplasms of the breast
    32. Neoplasia of the male breast
    33. Breast tumors in children and adolescents
    34. Tumors of the mammary skin
    35. Hematopoietic tumors of the breast
    36. Metastatic tumors in the breast
    37. Next-generation DNA sequencing and the management of patients with clinically advanced breast cancer.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    editors: Anna Sapino, Janina Kulka.
    Springer Nature eReference.
    Summary: This book covers the complete field of breast pathology - from Acinic cell carcinoma to Usual Epithelial Hyperplasia. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need.

    Contents:
    Abscess
    Acinic cell carcinoma
    Adenoid cystic carcinoma
    Adenomyoepithelioma
    Adenomyoepithelioma with carcinom
    Adenosis
    Angiomatosis
    Angiosarcoma of the breast
    Apocrine adenoma
    Apocrine adenosis
    Apocrine Carcinoma
    Atypical Ductal Hyperplasia
    Atypical vascular proliferations
    Benign peripheral nerve sheath tumor
    Breast implant associated malignant lymphoma
    Collageous spherulosis
    Atypical Ductal Hyperplasia
    Columnar cell lesions
    Complex Sclerosing Lesion
    Congenital abnormalities
    Diabetic Fibrous Mastopathy
    Duct ectasia and periductal mastitis
    Ductal adenoma
    Ductal carcinoma in situ
    Encapsulated papillary carcinoma
    Fat necrosis
    Fibrocystic Changes
    Fibroadenoma
    Glycogen rich clear cell carcinoma
    Granulomatous mastitits
    Gynecomastia
    Hamatoma
    Hemangioma
    Hormone receptors in breast cancer
    Granular Cell Tumor
    HER2 in breast cancer
    Infarct
    Inflammatory myofibroblastic tumor
    Intraductal papilloma
    Intraductal papillary carcinoma
    Invasive adenosquamous carcinoma
    Invasive Cririform Carcinoma
    Invasive Carcinoma NST
    Invasive Carcinoma with medullary features
    Invasive lipid-rich carcinoma
    Invasive Carcinoma with neuroendocrine features
    Invasive Lobular Carcinoma
    Invasive Metaplastic carcinoma
    Invasive Micropapillary carcinoma
    Invasive Mucinous carcinoma
    Invasive oncocytic carcinoma
    Invasive papillary carcinoma
    Invasive Tubular Carcinoma
    Invasive sebaceous carcinoma
    Invasive Secretory carcinoma
    Invasive carcinoma with signet ring cell differentiation
    Juvenile papillomatosis
    Lipoma
    Liposarcoma
    Lobular in situ neoplasia
    Male breast cancer
    Microglandular adenosis
    Microinvasive carcinoma
    Mucoepidemoid carcinoma
    Mucocele-like lesion
    Myoepithelial carcinoma
    Myoepithelial hyperplasia
    Myofibroblastoma
    Paget disease of the nipple
    Pleomorphic adenoma
    Pleomorphic lobular carcinoma
    Phyllodes tumor
    Polymorphous Carcinoma
    Pseudoangiomatous Stromal Hyperplasia
    Radial Scar
    Sentinel node
    Sclerosing Adenosis
    Syringomatous adenoma of the nipple
    Tall cell variant of papillary breast carcinoma
    Tubular adenoma
    Usual Epithelial Hyperplasia.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Sami Shousha, editor.
    Summary: This book covers practical diagnostic issues in breast pathology, with special emphasis on areas which pose diagnostic difficulties. These include dealing with the gross specimens derived from patients treated with conservative surgery and those who had neo-adjuvant therapy before surgery. It also discusses how to deal with axillary lymph nodes, proliferative breast lesions, including DCIS, and problematic core biopsies, as well as fibro-epithelial, spindle cell, lobular, mucinous, metaplastic and papillary lesions, molecular classification of breast cancers, breast lesions in male patients and breast immunohistochemistry. There is a focus on unusual benign and malignant breast lesions and a large number of high-quality images help the reader diagnose difficult cases. Breast Pathology: Problematic Issues is aimed at histopathology consultants and senior trainees who deal with breast pathology.

    Contents:
    Dealing with the gross specimen
    Handling Neo-Adjuvant therapy Specimens
    Proliferative Breast Lesions
    Problematic Core Biopsies
    Ductal Carcinoma in Situ
    Lobular neoplasia
    Grading of invasive carcinoma
    Fibroepithelial Lesions
    Mucinous Lesions of the breast and expression of WT1
    Spindle cell lesions
    Papillary carcinomas
    Metaplastic breast carcinomas
    Metastatic lesions in the breast
    Axillary Lymph node biopsies
    A Practical Approach to the use of Immunohistochemistry in the Diagnosis and Management of Breast Disease
    Molecular classification and testing of breast carcinoma
    Uncommon benign breast lesions
    Uncommon malignant lesions
    Male breast lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sami Shousha.
    Summary: This book provides a concise, step-by-step guide to accurate microscopic diagnosis for clinicians who deal with patients with breast lesions. The emphasis is on a practical approach to dealing with breast biopsies and reaching a diagnosis. It outlines the procedures used for the microscopic diagnosis of various breast lesions and the significance of the nomenclature and terms used in pathology reports, including those dealing with uncommon or rare lesions. Ample illustrations of the lesions discussed are included, particularly those dealing with uncommon and border-line lesions. There is a special emphasis on breast cancer and on the fact that not all breast cancers are the same. The different ways by which breast cancers are classified are discussed including recent classifications which lead to personalized therapy. The book is aimed at pathologists of all grades who deal with breast biopsies including those in training. It would be also useful for practicing and trainee surgeons and oncologists as well as other health professionals dealing with patients with breast diseases and scientists carrying out research on breast problems.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1: Introduction
    References
    2: Core Biopsy
    The Patient
    The Lesion
    The Doctor
    The Needle
    Type of Biopsies
    The Sample
    The Request Form
    The Laboratory
    The Pathologist
    The Multi-disciplinary Team Meeting (MDT)
    References
    3: Reporting Core Biopsies: Benign (B2) Lesions
    Introduction: Is the Lesion Benign or Malignant?
    Benign Lesions That Do Not Usually Need Further Intervention (B2 Lesions)
    Fibroadenoma
    Special Types of Fibroadenomas
    Hamartoma
    Fibrocystic Change
    Ductal Hyperplasia Differentiating Regular Hyperplasia (B2) from Atypical Hyperplasia (B3) and Low Grade DCIS (B5a)
    Columnar Cell Change and Columnar Cell Hyperplasia
    Sclerosing Adenosis and Apocrine Adenosis
    Duct Ectasia
    Granulomatous Mastitis
    Other Inflammatory Conditions
    Other Less Common Benign Conditions
    References
    4: Reporting Core Biopsies: Benign Lesions That Usually Need Further Intervention (B3 Lesions)
    Introduction
    Atypical Epithelial Hyperplasia (ADH)
    Flat Epithelial Atypia (FEA)
    In Situ Lobular Neoplasia
    Radial Scar/Complex Sclerosing Lesions Intraduct Papillomas
    Cellular Fibro-Epithelial Lesions
    Spindle Cell Lesions
    Mucocele Like Lesions
    Microglandular Adenosis
    Benign and Atypical Vascular Lesions
    Granular Cell Tumour
    Collagenous Spherulosis
    Epithelial Myoepithelial Benign Lesions
    General Remark: Risk of Malignancy in Benign Breast Lesions Discovered During Mammography
    References
    5: Reporting Core Biopsies: Lesions That Are Highly Suspicious of Malignancy (B4) or Definitely Malignant (B5)
    B4 Lesions
    B5 Lesions
    B5a (Non-invasive Lesions)
    In Situ Carcinoma
    Ductal Carcinoma In Situ (DCIS) Incidence of Metastasis and Death After Diagnosing DCIS
    Lobular Carcinoma In Situ (LCIS)
    Paget's Disease of the Nipple
    Intracystic and Solid Papillary Carcinomas
    Invasive Lesions (B5b)
    Primary Invasive Breast Carcinoma
    Morphological Types
    Invasive Ductal Carcinoma
    Pleomorphic Invasive Ductal Carcinoma
    Invasive Lobular Carcinoma
    Invasive Tubular Carcinoma
    Invasive Cribriform Carcinoma
    Invasive Mucinous Carcinoma
    Lympho-Epithelioma-Like Carcinoma
    Invasive Apocrine Carcinoma
    Invasive Papillary Carcinoma
    Invasive Micropapillary Carcinoma Neuroendocrine Tumours of the Breast
    Glycogen-Rich Clear Cell Carcinoma
    Lipid-Rich Carcinoma
    Triple Negative Invasive Breast Carcinoma
    Grading of Primary Invasive Breast Carcinoma
    Other Additional Features That Should Be Mentioned in the Core Biopsy Report
    ER and PR Assessment
    HER2 Assessment [75]
    Other Immunohistological Studies
    Molecular Classification of Breast Carcinoma
    Complete Removal of Lesions
    Primary Sarcomas of the Breast
    Angiosarcoma
    Mammary Sarcoma with CD10 Expression (Fig. 5.60)
    Stromal Sarcoma
    Primary Osteogenic Sarcoma
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Horacio F. Mayer, editor.
    Summary: This book examines distinct innovative and modern techniques for breast reconstruction after a mastectomy necessitated by breast cancer. It serves as not only an entry point in learning about the most modern and promising surgical techniques available, but as a pragmatic guide as well. Beginning with an introduction to the history of the subject, the opening chapter offers a lesson in the evolution of the development and improvement of breast reconstruction techniques. Following this, chapters examine anatomic landmarks, including vascular anatomy, design and markings and best indications depending on the type of breast to be reconstructed. Subsequent chapters then present a multitude of surgery methods, including the progression from large open surgical procedures, to endoscopic approaches, and robotic assisted minimally invasive surgery. Finally, scaffold-based tissue engineering that offers a promising future for breast reconstruction surgeries without donor site morbidity is also reviewed. Additionally, the book's expertly written text is supplemented by high-quality illustrations and videos that provide vital surgical guidance for improved surgical outcomes. Comprised of contributions from world-renowned plastic surgeons, Breast Reconstruction: Modern and Promising Surgical Techniques is an invaluable reference for residents, fellows, practicing and highly experienced plastic surgeons, breast surgeons, and those in surgical sub-specialties.

    Contents:
    1. History of Breast Reconstruction
    2. Partial breast reconstruction
    3. Breast reconstruction with the permanent tissue expander
    4. Synthetic meshes in breast reconstruction
    5. Biologic meshes in breast reconstruction
    6. Prepectoral breast reconstruction
    7. Breast reconstruction with fat grafting alone
    8. Hybrid Breast Reconstruction
    9. Breast Reconstruction with intratissular expansion and fat grafting
    10. Breast Reconstruction with external expansion and fat grafting
    11. Breast Reconstruction with the latissimus dorsi flap and fat grafting
    12. Breast Reconstruction with the endoscopically harvested latissimus dorsi flap
    13. Breast Reconstruction with the robotic-assisted latissimus dorsi harvest
    14. Total breast reconstruction using the thoracodorsal artery perforator flap TDAP
    15. Breast reconstruction using the muscle sparing lattisimus dorsi flap with alloplastic devices
    16. Free and Muscle Sparing TRAM flap in breast reconstruction
    17. DIEP flap in breast reconstruction
    18. Breast Reconstruction with the neurotized Deep Inferior Epigastric Perforator Flap
    19. Breast Reconstruction with Simultaneous Lymphatic Transfers
    20. SIEA flap in breast reconstruction
    21. Breast Reconstruction with the laparoscopically harvested Omental Free Flap
    22. Lumbar artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction
    23. Superior Gluteal Artery Perforator flap in breast reconstruction
    24. Inferior Gluteal Artery Perforator flap in breast reconstruction
    25. Lateral thigh flap in breast reconstruction
    26. Transverse upper gracilis flap in breast reconstruction
    27. Profunda artery perforator flaps for breast reconstruction
    28. Breast reconstruction with perforator flap transplants from identical twins
    29. Breast reconstruction using scaffold-based tissue engineering.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hisham Fansa, Christoph Heitmann.
    Summary: This book describes the various techniques available for autologous breast reconstruction, be it breast conserving therapy (BCT) or reconstruction following total mastectomy with local and distant flaps. Divided into two parts, the first presents the anatomy of the breast and the general requirements with regard to this kind of surgery. In turn, the second addresses reconstructive breast surgery management. The authors present oncoplastic procedures for reconstructing the breast following small defects due to cancer or other conditions (BCT), as well as the use of microvascular free flaps, such as abdominal, thigh or gluteal-based flaps, for a complete reconstruction. Preventive reconstructive surgery and cutting-edge techniques, such as lipofilling or breast reconstruction together with lymph node transplantation, are also included. Written by leading international plastic surgeons and combining step-by-step explanations and detailed illustrations, this book clearly demonstrates that reconstructive procedures can have aesthetic outcomes.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Breast Anatomy
    General. Reconstructive Surgery: General Remarks on Breast Cancer
    Tumor Excision
    Breast Conserving Therapy (BCT)
    Oncoloplastc Surgery
    Mastectomy
    Autologous Reconstruction
    Lipofilling
    Reconstruction of nipple and Areola
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by J. Michael Dixon, Matthew D. Barber.
    Summary: "Breast Surgery meets the needs of surgeons in higher training and practising consultants for a contemporary and evidence-based account of this sub-specialty that is relevant to their general surgical practice. It is a practical reference source incorporating the most current information on recent developments, management issues and operative procedures. The text is thoroughly referenced and supported by evidence-based recommendations wherever possible, distinguishing between strong evidence to support a conclusion, and evidence suggesting that a recommendation can be reached on the balance of probabilities"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Anatomy and physiology of the breast
    Assessment of patient, breast and common clinical presentations including image guided intervention
    Benign breast disease
    Breast pathology
    Epidemiology, Risk Factors, and Prevention Strategies
    Breast screening
    Breast-conserving surgery: the balance between good cosmesis and local control
    Oncoplastic Breast Conserving Surgery
    Mastectomy
    Management of the axilla
    Uncommon presentations of cancer affecting the breast
    The genetics of breast cancer, risk reducing surgery and prevention
    Breast reconstruction
    Treatment of ductal carcinoma in situ
    The role of adjuvant systemic therapy in patients with operable breast cancer
    Neoadjuvant therapy for breast cancer including surgical considerations
    Adjuvant radiotherapy for breast cancer
    Locally advanced breast cancer
    Metastatic breast cancer and palliative care
    Psychosocial issues in breast cancer
    Management of common breast emergencies and complications.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Kirby I. Bland, V. Suzanne Klimberg.
    Summary: "Breast cancer represents the most common cancer that affects women of the industrial and impoverished nations of the world; this neoplasm has a lifetime risk to affect one in every eight women of the industrialized countries with various presentations and stages of disease. Surgical therapy remains one of the principal modalities utilized to treat this organ -centric cancer. Surgical treatment of breast cancer has evolved over the past century from radical debilitating surgeries to minimally- invasive approaches that have advanced with earlier diagnosis and highly- effective neoadjuvant therapies. These more plausible and highly acceptable minimally -invasive techniques have progressed from disfiguring procedures to reconstruction excellence. Moreover, the entire field of breast cancer surgery is advancing very rapidly globally, thus, many of the procedures illustrated in this text are not readily applied in community surgical practice and certainly not in such an eclectic textural format"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: pt. I Breast and Axillary Imaging
    ch. 1 Topographical Surgical Anatomy of the Breast, Axilla, Chest Wall, and Metastatic Sites / Kirby I. Bland
    ch. 2 Breast and Axillary Imaging for the Surgeon / Edgar D. Staren
    pt. II Breast Biopsy
    ch. 3 Drainage of Breast Cysts and Abscesses / Amy C. Degnim
    ch. 4 Ultrasound-Cuided Breast Percutaneous Needle Biopsy / V. Suzanne Klimberg
    ch. 5 Stereotactically Guided Breast Percutaneous Needle Biopsy / Arthur G. Lerner
    ch. 6 Breast Ductoscopy / William C. Dooley
    ch. 7 Excisional Breast Biopsy of Palpable Lesions / Edward M. Copeland
    ch. 8 Needle Localization Biopsy of Nonpalpable Breast Lesions / Virginia M. Herrmann
    ch. 9 Intraoperative Ultrasound-Guided Excision of Nonpalpable Lesions / Amy E. Rivere
    ch. 10 Breast Surgery After Radioactive Seed Localization / Barbara A. Pockaj Note continued: ch. 11 Fluoroscopic Intraoperative Node or Neoplasia Detection (FIND) Procedure / V. Suzanne Klimberg
    pt. III Lymph Node Mapping, Dissection and Reconstruction
    ch. 12 Axillary Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy / Julie A. Margenthaler
    ch. 13 Internal Mammary Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy / Virgilio Sacchini
    ch. 14 Axillary Lymph Node Dissection / Kirby I. Bland
    ch. 15 Axillary Reverse Mapping / H. Colleen Silva
    ch. 16 Surgical Techniques for Prevention and Treatment of Breast Cancer Related Lymphedema; Multiple Lymphatic Venous Anastomoses (MLVAs)
    Including LYMPHA / Sheldon Marc Feldman
    ch. 17 Lymphatic Reconstruction With Vascularized Lymph Node Transfer / Cristiano Boneti
    pt. IV Partial Mastectomy
    ch. 18 Partial Mastectomy / Sarah P. Cate
    ch. 19 Excision Followed by Radiofrequency Ablation / Amy E. Rivere
    ch. 20 Breast Brachytherapy Device Placement / Peter D. Beitsch
    ch. 21 Intraoperative Radiotherapy / Stephen R. Grobmyer Note continued: pt. V Mastectomy
    ch. 22 Simple Mastectomy / Kirby I. Bland
    ch. 23 Modified Radical Mastectomy and Total (Simple) Mastectomy / Kirby I. Bland
    ch. 24 Radical Mastectomy / Kirby I. Bland
    pt. VI Oncoplastic Breast Surgery
    ch. 25 Oncoplastic Breast Conservation Techniques in Upper Pole Lesions / Russell J. Bramhall
    ch. 26 Oncoplastic Breast Conservation Techniques in Lower-Pole Lesions / Abby K. Geletzke
    ch. 27 Oncoplastic Breast Conservation Techniques in Subareolar Lesions / Nicolas Ajkay
    ch. 28 Reduction Mammaplasty/Mastopexy and Therapeutic Mammaplasty (Oncoplastic Mammaplasty): Principles and Mark Up / Shadi Ghali
    ch. 29 Oncoplastic Breast Reconstruction: Extreme Oncoplasty and Split Reduction Techniques / Melvin J. Silverstein
    ch. 30 Total Skin-Sparing Mastectomy/Nipple Skin-Sparing Mastectomy / Linda Philips
    ch. 31 Skin-Sparing Mastectomy for the Pendulous Breast / Jill R. Dietz Note continued: ch. 32 The Goldilocks Mastectomy / Grace Y. Ma
    ch. 33 Alternatives to Tissue Rearrangement: Suture Lattice Technique Combined With Absorbable Radiographic 3D Tissue Marker for Cavity Marking and Cosmesis / Anthony Lucci
    pt. VII Extensive Resections
    ch. 34 Chest Wall Resection and Reconstruction for Advanced/Recurrent Carcinoma of the Breast / Robert J. Cerfolio
    ch. 35 Skin Flaps for Extensive Soft Tissue and Skin Resection / Luis O. Vasconez
    ch. 36 Forequarter Amputation / Keila E. Torres
    pt. VIII Breast Reconstruction
    ch. 37 Implant-Based Reconstruction / James C. Yuen
    ch. 38 Autologous Fat Grafting for Correction of Residual Contour Deformities After Breast Reconstruction / Lee L.Q. Pu
    ch. 39 Autologous Reconstruction: TRAM Flap / Luis O. Vasconez
    ch. 40 Autologous Reconstruction: Microvascular MS-TRAM and DIEP Flaps / David W. Chang
    ch. 41 Autologous Reconstruction: Latissimus Dorsi Flap / Steven J. Kronowitz Note continued: ch. 42 Autologous Reconstruction: Gluteal Flap Breast Reconstruction / Michael R. Zenn
    ch. 43 Secondary Reconstruction: Reduction Mammoplasty, Mastopexy, and Breast Augmentation / Nolan S. Karp
    ch. 44 Secondary Reconstruction: Nipple-Areolar Reconstruction / Victor Chien.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2019
  • Digital
    edited by J. Michael Dixon
    Summary: Breast Surgery meets the needs of surgeons in higher training and practising consultants for a contemporary and evidence-based account of this sub-specialty that is relevant to their general surgical practice. It is a practical reference source incorporating the most current information on recent developments, management issues and operative procedures. The text is thoroughly referenced and supported by evidence-based recommendations wherever possible, distinguishing between strong evidence to support a conclusion, and evidence suggesting that a recommendation can be reached on the balance.

    Contents:
    The role of imaging in breast diagnosis including screening and excision of impalpable lesions / A. Robin M. Wilson and R. Douglas Macmillan
    Pathology and biology of breast cancer / Rajendra S. Rampaul [and others]
    Nipple discharge and the role of ductoscopy in breast diseases / Sarah Tang and Gerald Gui
    Breast-conserving surgery : the balance between good cosmesis and local control / J. Michael Dixon
    Techniques of mastectomy : tips and pitfalls / R. Douglas Macmillan
    Oncoplastic procedures to allow breast conservation and a satisfactory cosmetic outcome / Richard M. Rainsbury [and others]
    The axilla : current management including sentinel node and lymphedema / Anees B. Chagpar
    The genetics of breast cancer, risk-reducing surgery, and prevention / D. Gareth, R. Evans and Ava Kwong
    Breast reconstruction / Mark Schaverien and Cameron Raine
    Breast cancer treatments of uncommon diseases / Daniel Xavier Choi and Monica Morrow
    Treatment of ductal carcinoma in situ / Nicola L.P. Barnes and Nigel J. Bundred
    The role of adjuvant systemic therapy in patients with operable breast cancer / Rosalie Fisher and Ian Smith
    Locally advanced breast cancer / Douglas J.A. Adamson and Alastair M. Thompson
    Metastatic disease and palliative care / John Dewar and Pamela Levack
    The role of adjuvant radiotherapy in the management of breast cancer / Ian Kunkler
    Psychosocial issues in breast cancer / Lesley Fallowfield and Valerie Jenkins
    Benign breast disease / Steven Thrush and J. Michael Dixon
    Litigation in breast surgery / Tim Davidson and Tom Bates.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    [edited by] Liane E. Philpotts, Regina J. Hooley.
    Contents:
    Physics and development of breast tomosynthesis / Loren Niklason
    The technologist's perspective / Regina J. Hooley, Amanda Albarella, Liane E. Philpotts
    Implementation of digital breast tomosynthesis into clinical practice / Stamatia Destounis, Andrea Arieno, Renee Morgan, Liane E. Philpotts
    Tomosynthesis in screening mammography / Melissa Durand, Liane E. Philpotts
    Tomosynthesis in diagnostic mammography / Reni Butler, Regina J. Hooley
    Tomosynthesis interpretation tips and pitfalls / Liane E. Philpotts, Regina J. Hooley
    Benign findings / Laura Sheiman, Liane E. Philpotts
    Malignant findings / Paul H. Levesque, Regina J. Hooley
    Architectural distortion / Madhavi Raghu, Regina J. Hooley
    Integrating tomosynthesis with multimodality imaging / Liva Andrejeva, Jaime Geisel, Liane E. Philpotts
    The postoperative breast / Laura J. Horvath, Liane E. Philpotts
    Tomosynthesis in the male breast / Liane E. Philpotts
    Interventional procedures / Margarita Zuley, Ernestine Thomas, Jules H. Sumkin.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Ruth A. Lawrence, Robert M. Lawrence ; associate editors, Lawrence Noble, Casey Rosen-Carole, Alison M. Stuebe.
    Contents:
    Breastfeeding, ninth edition
    previous version available until may previous version
    -- Breastfeeding in a new era
    Anatomy of the breast
    Physiology of lactation
    Biochemistry of human milk
    Host-resistance factors and immunologic significance of human milk
    Population health and informed feeding decisions
    Practical management of the nursing “dyad”
    Maternal nutrition and supplements for mother and infant
    Weaning
    Normal growth, growth faltering, and obesity in breastfed infants
    Medications, herbal preparations, and natural products in breast milk
    Transmission of infectious diseases through breast milk and breastfeeding
    Breastfeeding infants with problems
    Premature infants and breastfeeding
    Medical complications of mothers
    Breast conditions in the breastfeeding mother
    Human milk and atopic disease
    Breastfeeding and return to work or school
    Induced lactation and relactation (including nursing an adopted baby) and cross-nursing
    Chestfeeding and lactation care for LGBTQ+ families (lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender, queer, plus)
    Reproductive function during lactation
    The collection and storage of human milk and human milk banking
    Infant feeding after a disaster
    Establishing a breastfeeding medicine practice or academic department
    Breastfeeding support groups and community resources
    Educating and training medical professionals
    Appendices.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    ScienceDirect
    ClinicalKey Nursing
    ClinicalKey
  • Digital
    [edited by] Karen Wambach, Becky Spencer.
    Summary: "Breastfeeding and Human Lactation, Sixth Edition is the ultimate reference for the latest clinical techniques and research findings that direct evidence-based clinical practice for lactation consultants and specialists. Topics include placing breastfeeding in its historical context, workplace-related issues, anatomical and biological imperatives of lactation, the prenatal and perinatal periods and concerns during the postpartum period, the mother's health, and sociocultural issues.Completely updated and revised, the new edition includes new case studies, expanded cultural content, new regulations and guidelines, more information on alternative medicine, and gender inclusive language"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    by Barbara Wilson-Clay and Kay Hoover.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Infant states and infant assessment
    Infant orofacial assessment and feeding reflexes
    Infant stools, urine, and vaginal discharge
    Appearances of human milk
    Positioning and latch
    Flat and inverted nipples
    Sore nipples
    Unusual presentations of the breast and nipple
    Anatomic variability
    Engorgement, oversupply, and mastitis
    Breast cancer: issues for lactation
    Twins, triplets, and tandem nursing
    Alternative feeding methods
    Breastfeeding in emergencies
    Breastfeeding in special circumstances
    Ankyloglossia (tongue-tie)
    Cleft lip and cleft palate.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    editor in chief, Richard J. Schanler, MD, FAAP, FABM ; coeditors, Nancy F. Krebs, MD, MS, FAAP; Sharon B. Mass, MD, FACOG, FABM.
    Contents:
    The scope of breastfeeding
    Rationale for breastfeeding : benefits to infants, mothers, and society
    Composition of human milk
    Anatomy and physiology of lactation
    Breastfeeding : management before and after conception
    Peripartum care : the transition to lactation
    Breastfeeding in the hospital : the postpartum period
    Maintenance of breastfeeding-the infant
    Maintenance of breastfeeding-the mother
    Supporting breastfeeding during mother-infant separation
    Lactation support technology
    Medications and breastfeeding
    Contraception and the breastfeeding mother
    Breastfeeding and human milk for preterm infants
    Breastfeeding in special circumstances
    Who can and who cannot breastfeed?
    The breastfeeding-friendly medical office
    Breastfeeding issues during disasters
    Appendix A. Breastfeeding resources
    Appendix B. American Academy of Pediatrics policy statement : breastfeeding and the use of human milk
    Appendix C. American Academy of Pediatrics : the transfer of drugs and therapeutics into human breast milk
    Appendix D. ACOG committee opinion #361 : breastfeeding : material
    Appendix E. ACOG clinical review : breastfeeding : material and infant aspects
    Appendix F. ACOG committee opinion # 570 : breastfeeding in underserved women : increasing initiation and continuation of breastfeeding.
    Digital Access eBook Comp Acad 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Richard Schanler, Lori Feldman-Winter, Joan Younger Meek, Sharon B Mass, Lawrence Noble.
    Summary: The definitive resource for physicians and other health care professionals to be able to counsel expectant and nursing mothers and other caregivers on the most up-do-date developments in breastfeeding practice, research, policies, and outreach. Contains a wealth of information on supporting breastfeeding mothers and infants and meeting their unique physical and emotional needs.

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    1. Evidence for Breastfeeding: Importance for Newborns and Infants, Mothers, and Society
    2. The Scope of Breastfeeding
    3. Composition of Human Milk
    4. Nonnutritive Components in Human Milk
    5. Anatomy and Physiology of Lactation
    6. Breastfeeding: Management Before and After Conception
    7. Breastfeeding Initiation
    8. Breastfeeding in the Hospital
    9. Maintenance of Breastfeeding: The Newborn and Infant
    10. Maintenance of Breastfeeding: The Mother
    11. The Breastfeeding-Friendly Medical Office 12. Breastfeeding and Human Milk for Preterm Newborns and Infants
    13. Breastfeeding in Special Circumstances
    14. Lactation Support Technology
    15. Supporting Breastfeeding During Mother-Infant Separation
    16. Medications and Breastfeeding
    17. Contraception and the Breastfeeding Mother
    18. Contraception and the Breastfeeding Mother
    19. Breastfeeding Issues During Disasters
    Appendix A
    Appendix B
    Appendix C
    Appendix D
    Appendix E
    Appendix F
    Appendix G
    Appendix H
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Digital
    Marsha Walker, RN, IBCLC, Independent Lactation Consultant, Weston, Massachusetts.
    Contents:
    Influence of the biospecificity of human milk
    Influence of the maternal anatomy and physiology on lactation
    Influence of the infant's anatomy and physiology
    Influence of peripartum factors, birthing practices, and early caretaking behaviors
    First 24-48 hours : common challenges
    Beyond the initial 48-72 hours : infant challenges
    Physical, medical, and environmental problems and issues
    Maternal pathology : breast and nipple issues
    Physical, medical, emotional, and environmental challenges to the breastfeeding mother.
    Digital Access R2Library 2017
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Maya Bunik.
    Summary: "Created by a leading breastfeeding and phone care practitioner, this newly revised problem-solver helps nurses, lactation professionals, and other medical staff confidently advise breastfeeding mothers"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Maya Bunik
    Summary: Created by a leading breastfeeding and phone care practitioner, this newly revised 4th edition is a problem-solver that helps nurses, lactation professionals, and other medical staff confidently advise breastfeeding mothers. It is ideal for use with the acclaimed Pediatric Telephone Protocols. -- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Digital
    Nir Sterer, Mel Rosenberg.
    Summary: One-fifth of adults suffer from bad breath, and it can be a tell-tale disease indicator. Yet most health professionals remain ill-informed about the condition. This illustrated text combines basic research with clinical approaches to diagnosis and treatment.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1: Introduction
    2: Breath Odors of Oral Origin (Oral Malodor)
    2.1 Oral Malodor and the Tongue
    2.2 Oral Malodor, Gingival Health, and Periodontal Disease
    2.3 Oral Malodor and Dental Restorations
    2.4 Oral Malodor and Oral Dryness
    References
    3: Biochemical and Microbial Aspects of Oral Malodor Production
    3.1 The General Role of Bacteria in Breath Odors
    3.2 The Bacterial Origin of Oral Odors
    3.3 Metabolic Factors Affecting Malodor Production
    3.4 Biochemical Aspects
    3.4.1 Metabolism 3.4.2 Malodorous Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) in the Oral Cavity
    3.5 Microbial Aspects
    3.5.1 Malodor-Producing Microorganisms
    References
    4: Odor Perception
    4.1 Olfactory Psychophysics
    4.2 Odor Mixtures
    4.3 Odor Perception and Odor Evaluation Panels
    References
    5: Breath Odors of Nasal and Pharyngeal Origin
    5.1 Chronic Sinusitis
    5.2 Chronic Caseous Tonsillitis
    5.3 Foreign Bodies
    5.4 Craniofacial Anomalies
    References
    6: Breath Odors and the Gastrointestinal Tract
    6.1 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD) 9.1 Pre-appointment Instructions
    9.2 Patient Interview
    9.3 Examination
    9.3.1 Organoleptic Measurements
    9.3.2 Oral VSC Quantification
    9.3.3 Examination of the Oral Cavity
    9.3.4 Biochemical and Microbial Assays
    References
    10: Self-Assessment of Breath Odors
    References
    11: Breath Odors, Prevalence, Gender, and Age
    11.1 Prevalence
    11.2 Gender
    11.3 Age
    References
    12: Psychological Aspects of Breath Odors
    12.1 Halitophobia
    12.2 Olfactory Reference Syndrome (ORS)
    12.3 Back to Halitophobia
    References
    13: Oral Malodor Management 13.1 Mechanical Therapy
    13.2 Chemical Therapy
    13.3 Professional Treatment
    References
    14: History of Breath Odors
    14.1 Culture and Folklore
    14.2 Early Scientific and Medical Literature
    14.3 Modern History
    References
    15: Future Prospects
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kostas N. Priftis, Leontios J. Hadjileontiadis, Mark L. Everard, editors.
    Summary: This book offers up-to-date information on the recording and analysis of respiratory sounds that will assist in clinical routine. The opening sections deliver basic knowledge on aspects such as the physics of sound and sound transmission in the body, a clear understanding of which is key to good clinical practice. Current techniques of breath sound analysis are described, and the diagnostic impact of advances in the processing of lung sound signals is carefully explained. With the aid of audio files that are available online, detailed guidance is then provided on differentiation of normal and abnormal breath sounds and identification of the various sounds, including crackles, wheezes, other lung sounds, cough sounds, and sounds of extrathoracic origin. The book is of high educational value and represents an excellent learning tool at pre- and postgraduate levels. It will also appeal to researchers as it provides comprehensive summaries of knowledge in particular research fields. The editors bring high-level expertise to the subject, including membership of the European Respiratory Society Task Force on the standardization of categories and nomenclature for breath sounds.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Gert Holstege, Caroline M. Beers, Hari H. Subramanian.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Michele Emdin, Alberto Giannoni, Claudio Passino, editors.
    Summary: This book systematically focuses on central sleep apneas, analyzing their relationship especially with heart failure and discussing recent research results and emerging treatment strategies based on feedback modulation. The opening chapters present historical background information on Cheyne-Stokes respiration (CSR), clarify terminology, and explain the mechanics and chemistry of respiration. Following a description of the physiology of respiration, the pathophysiology underlying central apneas in different disorders and particularly in heart failure is discussed. The similarities and differences of obstructive and central apneas are then considered. The book looks beyond the concept of sleep apnea to daytime CSR and periodic breathing during effort and contrasts the opposing views of CSR as a compensatory phenomenon or as detrimental to the failing heart. The diagnostic tools currently in use for the detection of CSR are thoroughly reviewed, with guidance on interpretation of findings. The book concludes by describing the various forms of treatment that are available for CSR and by explaining how to select patients for treatment.

    Contents:
    1. Historical background and glossary of the apnea phenomenon.-- 2. Mechanics and chemistry of respiration in health
    3. Hypopneas and apneas as physiological and pathological phenomena throughout life
    4. Pathophysiology of central apneas in heart failure
    5. The importance of visceral feedbacks: focus on chemoreceptors
    6. The apneas before and after heart failure
    7. Not only sleep apnea: the "awake" apneas of the failing heart
    8. Periodic breathing during effort and central apneas in heart failure: siblings, cousins or what else?
    9. To breath or not to breath- that is the question
    10. Diagnostic tools: the easier, the better
    11. Diagnostic tools: messages from implanted devices
    12. Targeting and treating apneas
    13. Final remarks.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Debjyoti Sen Gupta, Sanjeev Gupta, Jitendra Kumar, editors.
    Summary: More than 20 million childhood deaths occur every year due to the micronutrient deficiency and diet-related non-communicable diseases (cardiovascular diseases, cancers, chronic respiratory diseases and diabetes). The United Nations (UN) recently announced that the increase in chronic, non-communicable diseases has resulted in 36 million deaths around the world annually, claiming more lives than all other causes combined. These chronic diseases are not isolated to developed countries and are even more pronounced in the developing world. Such chronic illnesses have caused far more deaths than infectious diseases throughout the world (except Africa) in recent years. Therefore, enrichment of micronutrients in staple food crops is of paramount importance for the nutritional security in our world. Biofortification is the development of micronutrient- and/or vitamin-rich crops using traditional crop improvement practices as well as modern biotechnology tools. It is a more sustainable and cost effective method than food supplementation, fortification and diet diversification. This work consolidates available information on the different aspects of breeding for improved nutrition of pulses. An overview of entire pulses based on their nutritional profile is given so that audience can find the desired information easily. Food legumes are the active ingredients in many gluten-free food products and there is a continuous rise of the use of pulses flour in milling and baking processes. Our book sheds light on recent efforts and the underlying constraints of meeting the public demand. We believe this work provides the basic information for anyone interested in biofortification and stimulate further research to meet this unique challenge.

    Contents:
    Breeding for enhanced nutritional status: Retrospect and Prospect
    Quality improvement in chickpea
    Breeding for quality improvement in pigeon pea
    Bio-fortification in lentil
    Breeding for low phytates and oligosaccharides in mung bean and black gram
    Common bean quality improvement
    Breeding for reduced trypsin inhibitor in peas
    Breeding for low ODAP content in Lathyrus
    Breeding for high protein content in cowpea
    Role of animal models in nutrition resource in food legumes
    Pulses for improved milling and baking
    Bio-actives and nutraceuticals in lentil.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gintaras Brazauskas, Gražina Statkevičiūtė, Kristina Jonavičienė, editors.
    Summary: The genomic revolution has opened many opportunities to explore relationships between genetic and phenotypic diversity of plants as never before. The joint meeting addresses challenges of combining genetic resources and advanced omics technologies for enhancing development of next generation breeding strategies that will move plant breeding a step forward. Selection based on genomic technologies allows simultaneous marker discovery and validation, however high- throughput and precise phenotyping remains a major bottleneck limiting the power and resolution of genetic analysis. Additionally, novel sequencing technologies and automated phenotyping approaches generate big data sets requiring efficient data analysis and decision support tools that help breeders to select the superior material for their breeding programs.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Utilization of Genetic Resources and Pre-breeding; Utilization of Genebank Accessions to Improve Northern Adaptation of Perennial Ryegrass (Lolium perenne L.); Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 2.1 Plant Material, Phenotyping and Pre-breeding; 2.2 Genotyping, Ploidy Testing; 3 Results and Discussion; Acknowledgements; References; Wild and Primitive Common Bean Populations in the Germplasm Collection at the MBG-CSIC; Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Material and Methods; 3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusions; Acknowledgments; References. 4 Conclusion Acknowledgments; References; Domesticating Shrubby Native Legumes for Pastures and Natural Grasslands; Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 2.1 Plant Material Collection and Phenotyping; 2.2 Agronomic Characterization; 2.3 Commercialization; 3 Conclusion; References; Effects of Temperature on Growth During in vitro Embryo Culture of Field Bean (Vicia faba var. minor L.); Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusions; Acknowledgements; References; Ecological and Agronomic Evaluation of Dactylis glomerata subsp. lobata. Abstract1 Introduction; 2 Material and Methods; 3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusion; Acknowledgements; References; Tetraploid Festuca apennina is Prone to Produce Triploid Hybrid Progeny When Crossed with Diploid Festuca pratensis; Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Material and Methods; 2.1 Plant material; 2.2 Cross pollination; 2.3 Germination trials and ploidy determination of progeny; 3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusion; References; Comparing Mitotic and Meiotic Tetraploid Red Clover Plants for Seed Yield; Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 3 Results and Discussion. Abstract1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 3 Results and Discussion; 3.1 Geographical and Ecological Characteristics of Dactylis glomerata subsp. lobata; 3.2 Agronomic Characteristics of Dactylis glomerata subsp. lobata; 4 Conclusion; Acknowledgments; References; Yield and Genetic Composition of Latvian Festulolium Cultivars and Breeding Material; Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusion; References; Genetic Variability of the Most Important Traits in Alfalfa Cultivars Under Lithuanian Conditions; Abstract; 1 Introduction. Patterns of Spring Growth and Phenology in Natural Populations of Lolium perenne Under Contrasting Field ConditionsAbstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Material and Methods; 2.1 Plant Material and Phenotyping; 2.2 Data Analysis; 3 Results; 4 Discussion and Conclusion; Acknowledgments; References; Population Structure of Red Clover Ecotypes Collected from Europe and Asia; Abstract; 1 Introduction; 2 Materials and Methods; 3 Results and Discussion; 4 Conclusion; Acknowledgements; References; Enhancing the Sustainable Use of Lolium perenne Genetic Resources from Genebanks in Plant Breeding and Research.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Alan S. L. Yu, Glenn M. Chertow, Valérie A. Luyckx, Philip A. Marsden, Karl Skorecki, Maarten W. Taal.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Craig W. Stevens.
    Summary: "This highly illustrated introductory text helps you learn and retain key information in pharmacology--taking you from course exams and the USMLE Step 1 right through to clinical practice"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Georg F. Bauer, Oliver Hämmig.
    Summary: In our complex, fast changing society, health is strongly influenced by the continuously changing interactions between organisations and their employees. Three major fields contribute to health-oriented improvements of these interactions: occupational health, organizational health and public health. As currently only partial links exist amongst these fields, the book aims to explore potential synergies more systematically. Considering the high mental and social demands in a service and knowledge sector economy, the first part of the book focuses on work-related psychosocial factors. As a large proportion of inequalities in health in developed countries can be explained by inequalities in working conditions, those psychosocial factors with a particularly high public health impact are highlighted. As addressing these psychosocial factors requires to involve the organization as the key change agent, the second part covers approaches to improve public health through organizational level health interventions. The last section takes a look into the future of occupational, organizational and public health: what are the future challenges regarding occupational health and how can they be tackled within and beyond the organizational level. Overall, this integrating book will help to broaden the evidence-base, legitimacy and efficacy of occupational- and organizational-level health interventions and thus increase their public health impact.

    Contents:
    Part I: Psychosocial Factors in Occupational and Organizational Health: A Key Public Health Issue
    Social Inequalities in Work and Health in a Globalized Economy
    Towards Organizational Health: Stress, Positive Organizational Behavior, and Employee Well-Being
    A Critical Review of the Job Demands-Resources Model: Implications for Improving Work and Health
    The Role of Psychosocial Factors in Musculoskeletal Disorders
    The Impact of Social Capital on the Health and Performance of Organizations
    Part II: Improving Public and Organizational Health
    Capacity Building as a Key Mechanism of Organizational Health Development
    Systemic Consulting for Organizational Health Development: Theory and Practice
    Improving Organizational Health: The Case of Health Promoting Hospitals
    Integration of Work and Personal Life as a Key Factor for Individual, Organizational and Public Health
    Part III: Beyond Organizational Health: Social and Political Issues
    Mental Health as a Complete State: How the Salutogenic Perspective Completes the Picture
    Recovery from Work During Off-Job Time
    Beyond Paid Work: Voluntary Work and its Salutogenic Implications for Society
    Policy Approaches to Occupational and Organizational Health.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Hanna Levenson.
    Summary: "Brief dynamic therapy is a time-efficient treatment in which the therapist maintains a focus on specific client issues and goals, all within a basic psychodynamic framework. Common characteristics of these approaches include time management, defined focus, circumscribed goals, active therapist participation, rapid assessment, prompt intervention, an awareness of unconscious processes, and techniques that quickly foster a strong alliance with the client. This concise volume focuses largely on one popular model in particular: time-limited dynamic psychotherapy (TLDP). TLDP is an integrative approach that uses techniques from attachment theory, interpersonal neurobiology, affective-experiential learning, and systems orientations to help clients with long-standing, dysfunctional ways of relating to others. The author explores this integrative, culturally-sensitive approach, its theory, history, the therapy process, primary change mechanisms, empirical basis, and future developments. This revised edition includes updated case examples, as well as a wealth of new research findings -- including process-outcome studies -- that affirm treatment effectiveness, explain how alliance ruptures are repaired, and new research on the "reconsolidation process" that demonstrates how sudden, dramatic change happens in brief dynamic therapy"--The publisher.

    Contents:
    History
    Theory
    The therapy process
    Evaluation
    Future developments.
  • Digital
    Hermine L. Graham, Alex Copello, Max Birchwood, Emma Griffith.
    Summary: Brief Integrated Motivational Intervention provides clinicians and specialist practitioners with a brief, evidence-based treatment approach for motivating clients, who have comorbid mental health and alcohol and drug misuse. -Combines CBT, motivational interviewing, and the authors' own cognitive- behavioural integrated treatment (C-BIT) to engage clients in meaningful dialogue for change -Utilizes the short 'window of opportunity' when clients are admitted to psychiatric hospital or have recently relapsed, and helps clinicians to maximize the potential of this 'teachable moment' -Helpful tools such as session-specific content, illustrative case material and easy-to-use worksheets facilitate implementation of the approach across a range of settings including inpatient, community, and residential -Developed by an expert team with many years of experience in both research and practice in the fields of psychosis and addiction.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Basant Pradhan, Narsimha Pinninti, Shanaya Rathod, editors.
    Contents:
    Brief Interventions for Psychosis: Overview and Future Directions
    Integrated Pathways of Care for Psychosis: An Overview
    Brief Cognitive Behavior Therapy for Psychosis
    Avatar Therapy for Rrefractory Auditory Hallucinations
    Yoga and Mindfulness Based Cognitive Therapy for Psychosis (Y- MBCTp©): A Pilot Study on its Efficacy as Brief Therapy
    Brief Treatment of Psychosis from a Developmentally Informed Psychoanalytic Perspective
    Application of Motivational Interviewing in Working with Psychotic Disorders
    Brief Family nterventions in Psychosis: A Collaborative, Resource-Oriented Approach to Working with Families and Wider Support Networks
    Recovery Related Brief Interventions for Psychosis
    Employment support for people with psychosis
    Cultural Factors in the Treatment of Psychosis
    Brief Intervention Models in Psychosis for Developing Countries (Asia & Africa)
    Policy Implications in Psychosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Xinjun Chen, Yingqi Zhou, editors.
    Summary: This book offers an introduction to aquaculture sciences and fisheries, discussing the concepts and basic characteristics of fisheries, fishery resources and the related industries, as well as the status of fisheries in various countries around the globe. The book also examines aquaculture, aquatic product processing and utilization, fishery information technology, and fishery economics and management, in addition to hot topics such as blue growth in fisheries, carbon sink fisheries, and global environmental changes in the context of fisheries. Given its scope, it is a valuable resource for undergraduate students in the field as well professional requiring a basic understanding of fisheries.

    Contents:
    Chapter I Preface
    Section 1 Definition and Characteristics of Fisheries
    1,Definition and classification of fisheries
    2,Characteristics of fishery resources
    3,Characteristics of the fisheries industry
    Section 2 About this book
    1,Aim and scope
    2,Research content of this book
    3, Curriculum and Related Contents
    Section 3 Purpose of Introduction to Fisheries and its Role in Fisheries
    1,Purpose and Significance of Learning Introduction to Fisheries 2,Role and position of fisheries in the national economy and society
    Section 4 The Role of Fisheries in the National Economy and Society
    1,Fisheries provide people with a rich source of protein
    2,Direct contribution of fisheries to national economic development
    3,Increasing National Fiscal and Foreign Exchange Income from Fisheries
    4,Fisheries are conducive to arranging the rural labour force and providing social employment rate
    5,Contribution of fisheries to global sustainable development and aquatic ecosystems
    6,Contribution of fisheries to the development of other industries
    Chapter II World Fisheries
    Section 1 Overview of the State of World Fisheries Development
    1, Overview of World Fisheries
    2, Overview of the world fishing industry
    3, Overview of the world aquaculture industry
    4, Overview of world fisheries employment and fleets
    5, State of the world's marine fishery resources
    6, Overview of World Processing and Utilization of Aquatic Products
    7, Overview of World Trade in aquatic products
    8, Overview of world fisheries management
    Section 2 Distribution of Major Fishery Resources and Fishery Areas in the World
    1, Classification of major habitats of fishery resources such as fish
    2, Division of the world's fishing areas
    3, Resources of the world's inland waters and types of fisheries
    Section 3 Evolution and Structural Changes in World Fisheries Production
    1, Evolution of world fisheries production
    2, Changes in the production structure of the world's fisheries
    Section 4 World Ocean Fishing
    1, Main target groups of the world's marine fisheries
    2, Development and utilization of fishery resources in various sea areas of the world
    Section 5 World Aquaculture
    1, Main target groups for world aquaculture 2, World Aquaculture Development
    Section 6 World Aquatic Processing and Utilization Industry
    1, World Status of Aquatic Products Processing and Utilization
    2, Status of by-product use of fisheries
    3, World Trends in the Processing and Utilization of Aquatic Products
    Section 7 Modern Leisure Fisheries
    1, Concepts and Forms of Leisure Fisheries
    2, Overview of leisure fisheries development
    3, International Management and Development of Leisure Fisheries
    Section 8 World Trade in Fishery Products
    1, Status and status of World Trade in fishery products in international trade
    2, Countries that trade in the world's major fish products
    3, World consumption of fish products
    4, Major fisheries products in world trade
    5, Trends in world trade in fish products
    Section 9 Status and trends in international fisheries management
    1, Overview of the international fisheries management development process
    2, Analysis of trends in international fisheries management
    3, Nature, categories and functions of major international fisheries organizations
    Section 10 Major problems and trends in world fisheries
    1, Main Problems in the World's Fisheries
    2, Future trends in international fisheries
    Chapter III Overview of the world's major fishing nations
    Section 1 China Fisheries and
    Section 2 Japan Fisheries
    Section 3 The United States Fisheries
    Section 4 Indonesia Fisheries
    Section 5 India Fisheries
    Chapter V Overview of Major Fisheries Studies
    Section 1 Overview of Fishing Science
    1, The concept and research content of fishing science
    2, Research Status and Development Trend of Fishing Science
    Section 2 Overview of Fisheries Resources
    1, The Concept and Research Content of Fisheries Resources
    2, Research Status and Development Trend of Fisheries Resources
    Section 3 Aquatic Growth and Culture
    1, The Concept and Research Content of Aquatic Cultivation 2, Research Status and Development Trend of Aquatic Growth and Breeding
    Section 4 An Overview of the Processing and Utilization of Aquatic Products
    1, The concept of processing and utilization of aquatic products and its research content
    2, Research status and development trend of aquatic products processing and utilization
    Section 5 Overview of Fisheries Information Technology
    1, The Concept of Fisheries Information Technology and its Research Contents
    2, Research Status and Development Trend of Fisheries Information Technology
    Section 6 Overview of fisheries economics
    1, The Concept of Fisheries Economics and Its Research Contents 2, Research Status and Development Trend of Fisheries Economics
    Section 7 Overview of Fisheries Resources Economics
    1, The Concept of the Economics of Fishery Resources and Its Research Contents
    2, Research Status and Development Trend of Fisheries Resources Economics
    Chapter VI Sustainable Development of Fisheries
    Section 1 Overview of Sustainable Development Theory
    1, From economic growth to sustainable development
    2, The concept of sustainable development
    Section 2 The Sustainable Use of Fishery Resources
    1, The basic reason and model of change of fishery resources
    2, The general process of exploitation and utilization of fishery resources and the reason of decline based on economics
    3, The concept and connotation of sustainable utilization of fishery resources
    Section 3 International Action for Sustainable Development of Fisheries- Blue Growth
    1, Overview of the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development
    2, Agenda 2030 and sustainable fisheries development
    3, Progress in international action for the sustainable development of fisheries
    4, Blue Growth
    Section 4 Assessment of the sustainable use of fishery resources in global marine areas
    1, Changes in the average trophic level of global catches
    2, Potential change mechanisms of MTL
    3, Impact of Fisheries Development Process on the Effectiveness of 3.25 MTL Indicators
    Section 5 Carbon Sink Fisheries
    1, The concept of carbon sink fisheries and its role
    2, Carbon sinks in marine fisheries and their development strategies
    Chapter VII Global environmental change and fisheries
    Section 1 Overview of Global Environmental Change
    1, Eutrophication
    2. Global warming
    3, Destruction of the ozone layer
    4, Ocean acidification
    Section 2 Impact of major global environmental change events on fisheries
    1, the effects of eutrophication on fisheries
    2, Impact of global warming on fisheries
    3, Effects of ozone layer destruction on fisheries
    4, Ocean acidification and its impacts on fisheries
    Section 3 Global Climate Change and Marine Ecosystems
    1, Changes in fisheries in different marine ecosystems
    2, High latitude spring water bloom system
    3, Coastal boundary systems
    4, Upstream System on the Western Boundary
    5, Equatorial upwelling system
    6, semi-enclosed sea
    7, Sub-tropical circulation
    Section 4 Impact of Global Climate Change on Aquaculture
    1, Overview of global climate change impacts on aquaculture
    2, Vulnerability of climate change to aquaculture by region, country and species
    3, International actions to reduce the impact of climate change on aquaculture
    Section 5 Vulnerability assessment of food security under the impacts of climate change on marine fisheries
    References.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    R. Peter Hobson.
    Contents:
    1. The psychoanalytic background
    2. Themes and variations in brief psychodynamic psychotherapy
    3. A first case history
    4. A second case history
    5. The Treatment Manual
    6. Therapeutic dialogues I
    7. The Adherence Manual
    8. Therapeutic dialogues II
    9. Is Brief Psychoanalytic Therapy distinctive? A research study
    10. The course of treatment
    11. The place of Brief Psychoanalytic Therapy.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Gerald G. Briggs, Craig V. Towers, Alicia B. Forinash.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    editors, Joseph F. Hagan, Jr., Judith S. Shaw, Paula M. Duncan.
    Summary: Bright Futures is a set of principles, strategies, and tools for use in improving the health and well-being of all children (newborn-21) through culturally appropriate interventions addressing current and emerging health promotion needs.

    Contents:
    What is Bright Futures? An introduction to the fourth edition of Bright Futures: guidelines for health supervision of infants, children, and adolescents
    Who can use Bright Futures?
    How is Bright Futures organized?
    Implementing Bright Futures
    Using Bright Futures to improve the quality of care
    Bright futures health promotion themes
    An introduction to the Bright Futures health promotion themes
    Promoting lifelong health for families and communities
    Promoting family support
    Promoting health for children and youth with special health care needs
    Promoting healthy development
    Promoting mental health
    Promoting healthy weight
    Promoting healthy nutrition
    Promoting physical activity
    Promoting oral health
    Promoting healthy sexual development and sexuality
    Promoting the healthy and safe use of social media
    Promoting safety and injury prevention
    Bright futures health supervision visits
    Introduction to the Bright Futures health supervision visits
    Evidence and rationale
    Infancy visits (prenatal through 11 months)
    Early childhood visits (1 through 4 years)
    Middle childhood visits (5 through 10 years)
    Adolescence visits (11 through 21 years)
    Appendix A: World Health Organization growth charts
    Appendix B: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention growth charts
    Appendix C: Bright Futures/American Academy of Pediatrics recommendations for preventive pediatric health care (periodicity schedule).
  • Digital
    editors, Joseph F. Hagan, Jr., MD, FAAP, Judith S. Shaw, MPH, RN, FAAP, Paula M. Duncan, MD, FAAP.
    Summary: This essential resource developed by multidisciplinary panels of experts in infancy, early childhood, middle childhood, and adolescent health (i.e., pediatricians, family physicians, nurse practitioners, nutritionists, mental health specialists, pediatric dentists and families), covers 12 health promotion themes including: Promoting Family Support, Promoting Healthy Weight, and more! The guidelines reflect updated AAP Recommendations for Preventive Pediatric Health Care, updates to content reflected in the 32 health supervision visits (prenatal and 31 well-child care visits). New themes include: Promoting Lifelong Health for Families and Communities; Promoting Health for Children and Youth with Special Health Care Needs; Promoting the Healthy and Safe Use of Social Media. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    How to use this guide
    Supporting families successfully
    Bright futures health promotion themes
    Bright futures health supervision visits
    Introduction to the bright futures health supervision visits
    Prenatal visit
    Newborn visit
    First week visit (3 to 5 days)
    1 month visit
    2 month visit
    4 month visit
    6 month visit
    9 month visit
    12 month visit
    15 month visit
    18 month visit
    2 year visit
    2½ year visit
    3 year visit
    4 year visit
    5 and 6 year visits
    7 and 8 year visits
    9 and 10 year visits
    Early adolescence visits (11 through 14 year visits)
    Middle adolescence visits (15 through 17 year visits)
    Late adolescence visits (18 through 21 year visits)
    Appendices. List of abbreviations
    Developmental milestones for developmental surveillance at preventive care visits
    Social and emotional development in middle childhood
    Domains of adolescent development
    Tooth eruption chart
    Sexual maturity ratings.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Pediatric Care Online
    AAP ebooks
  • Digital
    editors: Judith S. Shaw, Joseph F. Hagan Jr, Michelle T. Shepard, Edward S. Curry, Jack T. Swanson, Kathryn M. Janies.
    Summary: The indispensable companion to the most current edition of the Bright Futures Guidelines for Health Supervision of Infants, Children and Adolescents, the national standard for well-child care. These updated forms and materials relate to preventive health supervision and health screening for infants, children, and adolescents.
  • Digital
    Rocco Palumbo.
    Summary: Patient empowerment as a key component in the future of healthcare systems is the focus of this concise in-depth analysis. It begins by defining patient empowerment as a collaborative partnership linking patients, providers, and systems, and examines the roles of health literacy, provider-patient and system-patient communication, and patient-centered care in the empowerment process. Models of positive and negative empowerment identify optimum conditions when patient and provider participate in service design and delivery as well as pitfalls and risks to patient and system when goals and input are mismatched. The book also translates concepts into practice with guidelines for empowerment strategies at the provider and organization levels to improve patient outcomes and system sustainability. Included in the coverage: · Empowering healthcare organizations to empower patients · A re-design of the patient-provider partnership · Patient empowerment: a requisite for sustainability · The risks of value co-destruction in service systems · The need for enlightening and managing the dark side of patient empowerment · Disentangling the relationship between individual health literacy and patient empowerment Straightforwardly written as a call for proactive change, The Bright Side and the Dark Side of Patient Empowerment is an illuminating text for scholars interested in patient empowerment and patient engagement, policymakers and managers operating in the healthcare field, and healthcare and social care providers.

    Contents:
    Contextualizing Patient Empowerment
    The Bright Side of Patient Empowerment
    The Dark Side of Patient Empowerment.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Graham Dickson, Bill Tholl.
    Summary: Like other international jurisdictions, the Canadian health sector faces significant demands for change and improvement to meet the needs of the 21st Century. To achieve that goal, highly sophisticated and capable leaders are required across all dimensions of the health system. Bringing Leadership to Life in Health: LEADS in a Caring Environment examines the essence of leadership itself and what it means to be a leader in today's world. The authors describe key challenges that demand reform in the health sector, examine why better leadership is the source code for better system performance, and look at the issues that stand in the way of getting that leadership. This book describes the five domains of the Caring Environment capabilities framework: Lead Self, Engage Others, Achieve Results, Develop Coalitions, and Systems Transformation. Bringing Leadership to Life in Health: LEADS in a Caring Environment is a simple, easily accessible, and research informed book which will explain the LEADS in a Caring Environment capabilities framework that has been adopted across Canada as the foundation for health leadership talent management. This book will illustrate this framework through supportive research, relevant stories solicited from health leaders at all levels as well as the inclusion of "learning moments" to help the readers reflect on their own experiences.

    Contents:
    1. LEADS: A New Perspective on Leadership in Health
    2. Putting LEADS in Context
    3. The LEADS in a Caring Environment Capabilities Framework: The Source Code for Health Leadership
    4. Learning LEADS: A Lifelong Journey
    5. The LEADS in a Caring Environment framework: Lead Self
    6. The LEADS in a Caring Environment framework: Engage Others
    7. The LEADS in a Caring Environment framework :Achieve Results
    8. The LEADS in a Caring Environment framework: Develop Coalitions
    9. The LEADS in a Caring Environment framework: Systems Transformation
    10. The LEADS in a Caring Environment framework as an operating system for change
    11. LEADS Learning: Epilogue.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Graham Dickson, Bill Tholl, editors.
    Summary: This book shows why better leadership helps meet the challenges facing health care. The focus is on the Canadian-developed LEADS in a Caring Environment framework: what it does, how it was developed and how LEADS can be a model to envision and plan change.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    1: From Concept to Reality: Putting LEADS to Work
    Introduction
    Bringing Leadership to Life in Health: A Primer on LEADS
    Putting LEADS to Work: A Retrospective on a New Perspective
    What has Changed: Key Ideas
    What Hasn't Changed: Enduring Ideas
    Summary
    References
    2: Illuminating Leadership and LEADS
    The Foundations of Modern Leadership
    The Foundations of Leadership
    Leadership and Context
    The Democratic Context
    The Organizational Context: Leadership and Culture
    The Need for More Courage Defining Leadership in Health
    What Leadership Isn't
    Self, Interpersonal and Strategic Leadership
    Distributed Leadership
    Summary
    Appendix: Leadership Theories
    Category: Established Leadership Theories
    Category: Emerging Leadership Theories
    References
    3: The LEADS in a Caring Environment Capabilities Framework: The Source Code for Health Leadership
    LEADS in a Caring Environment
    Caring
    Environment
    Capabilities
    Framework
    The Validity of LEADS: Can You Depend on It?
    Construct Validity of LEADS
    Face Validity of LEADS
    The Ongoing Appeal of LEADS LEADS and Other National Frameworks
    The United Kingdom (England)
    Australia
    Summary
    References
    4: Learning LEADS: Developing Leadership in Individuals and Organizations
    Learning Leadership: Why It's Different from Learning Anything Else
    Learning Leadership Means Learning Followership
    Leaders Learn from Emotional Experience as Well as Practical Experience
    Learning Includes Unlearning
    Leadership and Learning are Indispensable to Each Other
    Learning Individual Leadership: The Hero's Journey
    The Hero's Journey and Experiential Learning The Ten Commandments of Individual Leadership Learning
    A Disciplined Approach to Learning Organizational Leadership
    Leading Practices for Developing Leadership in Organizations
    Effective Features for Maximum Leadership Program Impact
    Summary
    References
    5: The LEADS in a Caring Environment Framework: Lead Self
    Introduction
    Are-Self-Aware
    Components of Self-Awareness
    Manage Themselves
    Demonstrating Emotional Intelligence
    Build a Productive Leadership Mindset
    Productively Balance the Demands of Personal Responsibility and Accountability
    Develop Themselves Personal Mastery: A Discipline for Self-Development
    A Strengths-Based Approach
    Demonstrates Character
    Building Character, Building Resilience
    Summary
    Lead Self Self-Assessment (For on-line access to self assessment tool, please visit www.LEADSglobal.ca.)
    References
    6: The LEADS in a Caring Environment Framework: Engage Others
    Engagement in Context
    Engagement and Diversity
    Foster the Development of Others
    Contribute to the Creation of Healthy Organizations
    Health Workplaces Demand Equity, Diversity and Inclusion (Dr. Ivy Bourgeault)
    Communicate Effectively
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    published by the British Herbal Medicine Association and produced by the Association's Scientific Committee.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RS164 .B7 2015
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    7
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access Br Inst Radiol 1989-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    v. 23-25, 28, 1989-96, 2005.
    SHELVED UNDER: British journal of radiology. Supplement.
    2
  • Digital
    Geert-Jan Rutten.
    Summary: This book discusses theories that link functions to specific anatomical brain regions. The best known of these are the Broca and Wernicke regions, and these have become synonyms for the location of productive and receptive language functions respectively. This Broca-Wernicke model has proved to be such a powerful concept that is remains the predominant view in modern clinical practice. What is fascinating, however, is that there is little evidence for this strictly localist view on language functions. Modern neuroscience and numerous clinical observations in individual patients show that language functions are represented in complex and ever-changing neural networks. It is fair to say that the model is wrong, and that Broca's and Wernicke's areas in their classic forms do not exist. This is a fascinating paradox: why do neurologists and neurosurgeons continue to use these iconic language models in everyday decision-making? In this book, the author uses his background as a neurosurgeon and a neuroscientist to provide some answers to this question. The book acquaints clinicians and researchers with the many different aspects of language representation in the brain. It provides a historical overview of functional localisation, as well as insights into the misjudgements that have kept the localist doctrine alive. It creates an awareness of the need to integrate clinical observations and neuroscientific theories if we want to progress further in clinical language research and patient care.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Lynn Wecker ; with David A. Taylor, Robert James Theobald, Jr.
    Summary: "Focusing on the essential aspects of pharmacology you need to know, Brody‘s Human Pharmacology, 6th Edition, keeps you fully up to date with all that’s new in the field. Streamlined content, a new organizational approach, enhanced online components, and thoroughly updated information ensure your grasp of key concepts and prepare you for exams. Nearly 500 full-color illustrations explain important processes, while color-coded boxes for major drugs, therapeutic overviews, clinical problems, and trade names reinforce your mastery of the information"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Mechanisms of drug action and therapeutic principles.
    Introduction, terminology
    Pharmacodynamics: drug targets (receptors, enzymes, DNA, etc)
    Pharmacokinetics
    Pharmacogenomics
    Drug discovery, development, and regulation
    Section 2: Chemical mediators and drugs affecting autonomic and neuromuscular synapses.
    Introduction to the peripheral nervous systems and drugs for peripheral disorders
    Cholinergic drugs
    Muscarinic agonists and their clinical uses
    Muscarinic antagonists and their clinical uses
    Nicotinic agonists and their clinical uses
    Nicotinic antagonists and neuromuscular blocking drugs
    Adrenergic drugs
    Adrenergic agonists and their clinical uses
    Adrenergic antagonists and their clinical uses
    Section 3: Drug treatment for disorders affecting the central nervous system. Introduction to the CNS and drugs affecting the brain
    Neurodegenerative disorders
    Drug therapy for Alzheimer's disease and other cognitive disorders/dementias
    Pharmacotherapy of basal ganglia disorders: Parkinson's disease and Huntington's disease
    Drug therapy for psychoses and bipolar disorder
    Drug therapy for depression and anxiety
    Drug therapy for the management of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder
    Drug therapy for insomnia and the hypersomnias
    Drug therapy for managing obesity and eating disorders
    Treatment of seizure disorders
    Drug therapy to control spasticity disorders
    Ethanol, other alcohols, and drugs for alcohol use disorder
    Illicit psychoactive compounds and substance use disorder
    Section 4: Drug therapy for pain management. Introduction
    General anesthetics
    Local anesthetics
    Opioid analgesics
    Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents and acetaminophen
    Cannabinoids
    Section 5: Treatment of inflammatory, allergic and immunologic disorders. Drug therapy for migraine headache
    Drug therapy for gout and hyperuricemia
    Drug treatment for allergic reactions
    Immunosuppressants for autoimmune disorders and organ transplantation
    Drug therapy for rheumatoid arthritis
    Section 6: Drug treatment for cardiovascular diseases. Introduction to the cardiovascular system and the regulation of blood pressure and heart rate
    Overview of hypertension management and drugs that decrease sympathetic tone
    Diuretics and drugs that affect volume and electrolyte content
    Drugs affecting the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system
    Calcium channel blockers
    Vasodilators
    Drug therapy for hyperlipidemias and atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease
    Drug therapy for myocardial ischemia and angina pectoris
    Treatment of heart failure: cardiac glycosides, phosphodiesterase inhibitors and other agents
    Antiarrhythmic drugs
    Anticoagulant, antiplatelet and thrombolytic agents
    Drug therapy for hemophilia and the anemias
    Section 7: Treatment of endocrine disorders. Introduction to endocrine pharmacology
    Treatment of hypothalamic and pituitary disorders
    Treatment of adrenalcorticosteroid disorders
    Female hormone regulation
    Androgens, antiandrogens and their clinical uses
    Drug therapy for the management of diabetes
    Drug therapy for the management of thyroid disorders
    Calcium regulating hormones and agents affecting bone
    Section 8: Chemotherapy. Infectious diseases
    Principles of antimicrobial use
    Bacterial cell wall synthesis inhibitors
    Inhibitors of protein synthesis
    Drugs that target DNA
    Antimycobacterial drugs and the treatment of tuberculosis and leprosy
    Drug therapy for resistant organisms
    Parasitic diseases
    Antifungal agents
    Antimalarial and other antiprotozoal agents
    Antihelmintics
    Viruses
    Drug therapy for non-HIV viral infections
    Drugs for HIV and related opportunistic infections
    Cancer
    Introduction and therapeutic principles
    Cytotoxic agents
    Targeted agents
    Section 9: Special considerations. Therapeutic use of hematopoietic growth factors, vitamins and minerals
    Gastrointestinal disorders and their treatment
    Pharmacological treatment of asthma and COPD
    The role of neutraceuticals and natural products
    Essentials of toxicology
    Therapeutic considerations for pregnant, pediatric, geriatric and obese individuals.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Noriaki Kurimoto, Katsuhiko Morita.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Charlotte C. Teneback, Bryan Garcia, editors.
    Summary: This book offers an in-depth and up-to-date review of bronchiectasis. Bronchiectasis is a broadly heterogenous disease with a variety of etiologies and disease phenotypes and endotypes. To comprehensively and adequately address bronchiectasis, all these aspects need to be considered, which is not always the case in the current literature. Throughout this book, expert authors discuss the epidemiology, etiology, clinical management and clinical trials to give the reader greater context and tools to care for their patients. Chapters include coverage of environmental and infectious causes of bronchiectasis, radiographic phenotyping, diagnosing, and monitoring of bronchiectatic diseases, and host directed therapy. This is an ideal guide for pulmonologists and trainees caring for patients with bronchiectasis.

    Contents:
    Bronchiectasis: An Introduction to the Patient from the Clinician's Perspective
    Global epidemiology and impact of bronchiectasis in adults without cystic fibrosis
    Systemic diseases associated with Bronchiectasis
    Environmental and Infectious causes of Bronchiectasis
    Approach to Etiological Diagnosis and Initial Management
    Radiographic Phenotyping, Diagnosing, and Monitoring of Bronchiectatic Diseases
    Acute Exacerbations of Bronchiectasis and the Airway Microbiology
    Host-Directed Therapy
    Challenges and Considerations for Clinical Trials Design in Bronchiectasis
    Non-CF Bronchiectasis and Nontuberculous Mycobacteria: Integration of Mental Health and Quality of Life into Patient Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    James Chalmers, Eva Polverino, Stefano Aliberti, editors.
    Summary: This book presents state of the art knowledge and practice in the rapidly developing field of bronchiectasis not due to cystic fibrosis (referred to below simply as bronchiectasis). The focus is especially on diagnosis and existing and emerging therapies, but the book also covers a wide range of other key topics, from pathophysiology, histopathology, and immunology through to pulmonary rehabilitation, nursing care, and management in primary care and pediatric settings. While bronchiectasis was formerly regarded as an "orphan" disease, international data reveal an increase in its prevalence in recent years. Accordingly, there has been renewed interest in the disease, resulting in more clinical research and the development of new treatments. The impact of bronchiectasis on healthcare systems is substantial and it has a clear attributable mortality. In covering all aspects of the disease, this book will be of interest to respiratory, internal medicine, and infectious disease fellows and specialists, final-year medical students, and nurses and physiotherapists. The authors are leading experts and chairs of the steering committee of EMBARC, the first truly international bronchiectasis network.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    1 Radiological diagnosis of bronchiectasis
    2 Epidemiology and clinical aspects
    3 Pathophysiology and histopathology of bronchiectasis
    4 Immunology of bronchiectasis
    5 How to identify treatable causes and other predisposing factors in bronchiectasis
    6 Immunodeficit in bronchiectasis
    7 ENT diseases and bronchiectasis
    8 Bronchiectasis and ABPA
    9 COPD and bronchiectasis
    10 Other predisposing factors for bronchiectasis
    11 Channelopathies in bronchiectasis
    12 The severity of the disease and multidisciplinary management
    13 Pseudomonas aeruginosa in bronchiectasis
    14 The role of other bacteria, fungi and viruses in bronchiectasis
    15 NTM in bronchiectasis
    16 Exacerbation of bronchiectasis
    17 Long-tern inhaled antibiotic treatment
    18 Long-term oral antibiotic / anti-inflammatory treatment
    19 Airway clearance
    20 Pulmonary rehabilitation
    21 Nursing management
    22 Surgery and transplantation in bronchiectasis
    23 How to manage bronchiectasis in primary care
    24 An overview of bronchiectasis in children
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Vineet Bhandari, editor.
    Contents:
    Hyperoxia in the pathogenesis of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Invasive mechanical ventilation in the pathogenesis of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Pre- and post-natal inflammation in the pathogenesis of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Mycoplasma in Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease following Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Genetics of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Biomarkers of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Pathology of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia: Definitions and Epidemiology
    Oxygen modulation and Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia: Delivery Room and Beyond
    Non-invasive ventilation for the prevention of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Nutrition in Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia: In the NICU and Beyond
    Radiology of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia: from preterm birth to adulthood
    Pulmonary Hypertension in Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Pulmonary Function in Survivors of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Stem cells for the prevention of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Less invasive surfactant administration (LISA) for the prevention of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia
    Anti-Inflammatory Agents for the Prevention of Bronchopulmonary Dysplasia.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Brookhaven symposia in biology to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    Alexander Pfeifer, Martin Klingenspor, Stephan Herzig, editors.
    Summary: The main focus of this book is on brown adipose tissue and its metabolic function. The book provides a timely update on the latest research and shows where the field is heading. Brown adipose tissue (BAT) dissipates energy and has received considerable attention in the last few years, having been re-discovered in adult humans in 2007/9. Moreover, BAT might offer a target for novel therapies to address obesity, a health condition that has reached pandemic dimensions.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Brown Adipose Tissue Development and Metabolism; 1 Introduction and Background; 1.1 Overview; 1.2 Basics of Non-shivering Thermogenesis; 1.3 Brown Fat Anatomy and Morphology; 1.4 BAT Vascularization and Innervation; 1.5 Transcriptional Control of Brown Adipocyte Differentiation; 2 Brown Fat Growth; 2.1 Techniques for Studying BAT Development; 2.1.1 FACS; 2.1.2 Lineage Tracing; 2.2 Brown Adipocyte Origins; 2.3 Postnatal and Adult Brown Fat Growth and Metabolism; 3 Other Thermogenic Adipocytes; 3.1 Brite/Beige Adipocytes; 3.2 Brite/Beige Adipocyte Origins 3.2 Flow Cytometry for Evaluation of Cell Culture Purity4 Confluence; 5 Initiation of Differentiation; 6 Differentiation; 7 Validation of Cell Cultures; 8 Considerations; 8.1 Cell Passaging; 8.2 Differentiation With or Without Serum; 8.3 Inducing Brown Adipogenesis with External Factors; References; In Vitro Models for Study of Brown Adipocyte Biology; 1 Introduction; 2 In Vitro Adipocyte Research Tools; 3 Commonly Used In Vitro Models for Studying Brown Adipocyte Biology; 3.1 Characteristics of Brown Adipocytes; 3.2 Brown Adipose Tissue Explant Culture; 3.3 Primary Culture 3.4 Brown Adipocyte Cell Lines 3.4.1 T37i; 3.4.2 WT-1; 3.4.3 HIB 1B; 3.4.4 PAZ6; 4 Conditionally Immortalised Brown Adipocyte Cell Lines; 5 Self-Immortalised Adipocyte Cell Lines; 6 Mouse Embryo Fibroblasts; 7 Human Multipotent Adipose-Derived Stem Cells; 8 Pluripotent Stem Cells; 9 Conclusion; References; Brown-Like Adipocyte Progenitors Derived from Human iPS Cells: A New Tool for Anti-obesity Drug Discovery and Cell-Based Thera ... ; 1 Introduction; 2 Capacity of Human-Induced Pluripotent Stem Cells to Generate BAs; 3 Pathways Governing hiPSC-BAP Adipogenic Capacity 4 Going Forward4.1 Unanswered Questions and Future Goals; 4.2 Prospects for BAT-Based Therapeutics; References; Lessons from Cre-Mice and Indicator Mice; 1 Introduction; 2 Techniques to Create Transgenic Mouse Lines; 3 Tamoxifen Inducible vs. Dox-Inducible Recombinase Systems; 4 The ap2 Promoter; 5 The Adiponectin Promoter; 6 The Ucp1 Promoter; 7 Genetic Mouse Models to Disrupt Mature Brown Adipocyte Function; 8 Lessons from Fat but Non-brown Fat-Specific Gene Targeting and Tracing; 9 Indicator Mice of Brown Fat Function; 10 White/Brown/Brite Adipocyte-Specific Labeling; References Aging of Brown and Beige/Brite Adipose Tissue1 Introduction; 2 General Aspects of White and Brown Adipose Tissue Aging; 3 Molecular Characteristics of Brown Adipose Tissue Aging; 4 Cellular Senescence: Stem Cell Dysfunction; 5 Extracellular Matrix and Adipose Tissue Aging; 6 Neuronal Regulation of Aging Brown Adipocytes; 7 Age-Related Changes to the Endocrine Regulation of Brown Adipocytes; 8 Contribution of Inflammatory Processes to BAT Atrophy; 9 Conclusion; References; Adipogenesis in Primary Cell Culture; 1 Introduction; 2 Biopsy; 3 Proliferation; 3.1 Priming/Adipocyte Commitment
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Ehab Farag, Loran Mounir-Soliman.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Print
    Emily W. Nowak, Renee Colsch.
    Summary: "Brown's Evidence-Based Nursing: The Research-Practice Connection, Fifth Edition introduces students to research methods and evidence-based practice. Evidence-based practice is a multi-step approach to healthcare delivery. It requires the ability to assess, interpret, and integrate current research to apply to day-to-day clinical problems"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    The Research-Practice Connection
    Research Evidence
    Reading Research Articles
    Qualitative Research
    Quantitative Descriptive Research
    Correlational Research
    Experimental Research
    Cohort Research
    Systematic Reviews
    Evidence-Based Clinical Practice Guidelines
    Asking Clinical Questions
    Searching for Research Evidence
    Appraising Research Evidence
    Appraising Recommendations of Clinical Practice Guidelines
    Appraising Conclusions of Systematic Reviews with Narrative Synthesis
    Appraising Findings of Original Studies
    Evidence-Based Practice Strategies
    Evidence-Based Practice Participation
    Point-of-Care Adaptations.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024], ©2024
  • Digital
    Adrian Baranchuk.
    Contents:
    1. The History of the Brugada Phenocopy concept
    2. Brugada Phenocopy: Definition, systematic approach to its diagnosis, how to differentiate it from true Brugada Syndrome
    3. The value of the sodium channel blocker test in Brugada syndrome and Brugada Phenocopy: Pieter Postema (The Netherlands)
    4. How to recognize a Brugada ECG pattern: The beta angle
    5. How to recognize a Brugada ECG pattern: The base of the triangle
    6. The Rsr' pattern in leads V1-V2: algorithm and differential diagnosis
    7. International Registry & Educational Portal on Brugada Phenocopies
    8. Specific Brugada Phenocopies: Ischemia
    9. Specific Brugada Phenocopies: Acute pulmonary embolism
    10. Specific Brugada Phenocopies: Electrolyte disorders
    11. The ECG of the athlete & the differential diagnosis with the Brugada ECG pattern
    12. The value of the Vectorcardiogram in Brugada syndrome
    13. How to apply the beta angle and base of the triangle in real cases
    14. Exceptional Brugada Phenocopies
    15. The importance of Brugada Phenocopy
    16. The importance of risk stratifying in Brugada syndrome
    17. Differentiation between BrS ECG pattern and BrP ECG pattern: Is this possible?
    18. The Journey of describing a new ECG phenomenon.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Peter Brukner, Karim Khan.
    Contents:
    PART A: EXERCISE AND HEALTH
    Chapter 1: Physical inactivity: a global public health problem
    Chapter 2: Benefits and risks of physical activity
    Chapter 3: Prescribing physical activity: the clinical assessment
    Chapter 4: Prescribing physical activity: the written prescription
    Chapter 5: Prescribing physical activity: motivational interviewing
    Chapter 6: Nutrition for health
    PART B: MANAGING MEDICAL PROBLEMS
    Chapter 7: Obesity
    Chapter 8: Diabetes mellitus
    Chapter 9: Sudden cardiac death in sport
    Chapter 10: Cardiovascular symptoms
    Chapter 11: Respiratory symptoms during exercise
    Chapter 12: Gastrointestinal symptoms
    Chapter 13: Haematuria and other urinary symptoms
    Chapter 14: Neurological conditions
    Chapter 15: Rheumatological conditions
    Chapter 16: Osteoarthritis
    Chapter 17: Osteoporosis--physical activity for bone health
    Chapter 18: Infections
    Chapter 19: The tired athlete
    Chapter 20: Cancer
    Chapter 21: Physical activity in the prevention and treatment of depression
    Chapter 22: Anxiety disorders
    PART C: ENVIRONMENT
    Chapter 23: Heat
    Chapter 24: Cold
    Chapter 25: Altitude
    Chapter 26: Underwater
    Chapter 27: Physical activity and the built environment
    PART D: SPECIFIC GROUPS
    Chapter 28: Childhood and adolescence
    Chapter 29: Female-specific considerations: anatomy, physiology, injuries and performance
    Chapter 30: Transgender and intersex
    Chapter 31: Older people#
    Chapter 32: The person with disability
    PART E: PERFORMANCE AND ETHICS
    Chapter 33: Nutrition for performance
    Chapter 34: Drugs and the athlete
    Chapter 35: Genetics in exercise and sport
    Chapter 36: Medico-legal issues
    Chapter 37: Harassment and abuse
    PART F: PRACTICAL SPORTS MEDICINE
    Chapter 38: Emergencies
    Chapter 39: Medical coverage of endurance events
    Chapter 40: Multisport endurance events.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2019
  • Digital
    Brukner, Peter; Bahr, Roald; Clarsen, Ben; Cook, Jill; Cools, Ann; Crossley, Kay; Hutchinson, Mark R.; Khan, Karim; McCrory, Paul.
    Contents:
    Part A. Fundamental principles
    Sports and exercise medicine: the team approach
    Integrating evidence into shared decision making with patients
    Sports injuries: acute
    Sports injuries: overuse
    Pain: why and how does it hurt?
    Pain: the clinical aspects
    Beware: conditions that masquerade as sports injuries
    Introduction to clinical biomechanics
    Biomechanical aspects of injury in specific sports
    Training programming and prescription
    Core stability
    Preventing injury
    Recovery: the science and the art
    Clinical assessment: moving from rote to rational and rigorous
    How to make the diagnosis: tips for better history taking, physical examination and investigation
    Patient-reported outcome measures in sports medicine
    Treatments for musculoskeletal conditions
    Principles of sports injury rehabilitation
    Return to play
    Part B. Regional problems
    Sports concussion - Headache
    Face, eye and teeth
    Neck pain
    Shoulder pain
    Elbow and arm pain
    Wrist pain
    Hand and finger injuries
    Thoracic and chest pain
    Low back pain
    Buttock pain
    Hip-related pain
    Groin pain
    Anterior thigh pain
    Posterior thigh pain
    Acute ankle injuries
    Anterior knee pain
    Lateral, medial and posterior knee pain
    Leg pain
    Calf pain
    Pain in the Achilles region
    Acute ankle injuries
    Ankle pain
    Part C. Special groups of participants
    Younger athlete
    Military personnel
    Periodic medical assessment of athletes
    Working and travelling with teams
    Career development.
    Digital Access AccessPhysiotherapy 2017
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    Call number varies. Search for Brunner/Mazel basic principles into practice series to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Print
    Schwarz, Ignaz.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: History - LC Classification (Downstairs)
    R134.Z9 S4
    1
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    44
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    v. 1, 3-56, [1969], 1970-90.
    Vol. 1, 3, 6, 7, BOUND WITH: Zeitschrift für Orthopädie und ihre Grenzgebiete, v. 105-106, 108, 109.
    11
  • Digital
    Xingshun Qi, editor.
    Summary: This book offers a systematic introduction to Budd-Chiari syndrome, a rare but life-threatening vascular disorder of the liver, which refers to obstructions at any site from the hepatic veins to the suprahepatic inferior vena cava. The book mainly covers the history, epidemiology, etiology and risk factors, pathology, diagnosis, pharmacological and interventional aspects, surgical treatment, etiological treatment, and prognostic assessment of Budd-Chiari syndrome. Notably, it also presents cutting-edge research findings in this field. The early diagnosis of Budd-Chiari syndrome is vital, as it allows clinicians to pursue more targeted and effective treatment strategies, thus improving patient outcomes. However, much information, including the latest advances, has not yet been fully disseminated in current clinical practice. This book addresses that gap, helping physicians to improve diagnosis and establish standard treatment strategies, helping researchers conduct clinical and experimental studies, and even helping patients and their relatives to recognize this disease.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgment; Contents;
    1: History of Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 1.1 The Obstruction of the Hepatic Veins: A Historic Journey from the First Reports to the Modern Concept of Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 1.2 History of Treatment and Current Management in BCS; References;
    2: Epidemiology of Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 2.1 Incidence of Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 2.2 Prevalence of Budd-Chiari Syndrome in the General Population; 2.3 Sex Distribution of Patients with Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 2.4 Age Distribution of Patients with Budd-Chiari Syndrome 2.5 Prevalence of Budd-Chiari Syndrome in Particular Categories of Patients2.6 Conclusion; References;
    3: Pathology of Budd-Chiari Syndrome and Hepatic Vein Obstruction; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Pathology; 3.2.1 Distribution of Hepatic Outflow Obstruction; 3.2.2 Vena Cava Lesions; 3.2.3 Intrahepatic Hepatic Vein Obstruction; 3.2.4 Portal Vein Involvement; 3.2.5 Patterns of Parenchymal Extinction, Atrophy, and Regeneration; 3.2.6 Small Duct Changes Including Regeneration (Progenitor Reaction); 3.2.7 Large Regenerative Nodules and Adenoma; 3.2.8 Hepatocellular Adenoma and Carcinoma 3.3 Pathogenesis of Budd-Chiari Syndrome3.4 Clinical Use of Biopsy; 3.4.1 Differential Diagnosis; 3.4.2 Assessment of Duration and Severity of Disease; References;
    4: Imaging of Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 4.1 Direct Signs: Depicting the Vascular Anomalies; 4.2 Indirect Signs: Depicting the Consequences of Venous Anomalies; 4.3 Diagnostic Imaging; 4.3.1 Ultrasound Examination with Doppler Analysis; 4.3.2 Computed Tomography; 4.3.3 Magnetic Resonance Imaging; 4.3.4 Venography; 4.4 Treatment Planning; 4.5 Focal Liver Lesions and Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 4.6 Conclusion; References
    5: Thrombophilia and Primary Budd-Chiari Syndrome5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Thrombophilia and Hypercoagulability; 5.3 Budd-Chiari Syndrome As a Multifactorial Disease; 5.4 Inherited Thrombophilia in Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 5.4.1 Thrombophilia Due to Loss of Anticoagulation Function; 5.4.2 Inherited Thrombophilia Due to Gain of Procoagulant Function; 5.4.2.1 Factor V Leiden; 5.4.2.2 Prothrombin Gene Mutation; 5.4.2.3 Hyperhomocysteinemia; 5.4.2.4 Factor VIII; 5.4.2.5 Other Risk Factors; 5.5 Acquired Thrombophilia in Budd-Chiari Syndrome 5.5.1 Philadelphia-Chromosome Negative Chronic Myeloproliferative Neoplasms (MPN)5.5.2 Antiphospholipid Syndrome; 5.5.3 Paroxysmal Nocturnal Haemoglobinuria (PNH); 5.5.4 Behçet's Disease and Other Acquired Disorders; 5.6 Thrombophilia Screening; 5.7 Concluding Remarks; References;
    6: Budd-Chiari Syndrome and Myeloproliferative Neoplasms; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Budd-Chiari Syndrome and Myeloproliferative Neoplasms; 6.3 Molecular Diagnosis of MPN-Related Budd-Chiari Syndrome; 6.3.1 JAK2 V617F Mutation; 6.3.2 CALR Mutations; 6.3.3 MPL Exon 10 and JAK2 Exon 12 Mutations
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Josephine Mauskopf, Stephanie R. Earnshaw, Anita Brogan, Sorrel Wolowacz, Thor-Henrik Brodtkorb.
    Summary: The first of its kind for budget-impact analysis, this comprehensive guide provides clear and concise instructions for evaluating the impact that new pharmaceuticals will have on the budget for a specific jurisdiction. The book demonstrates how to create a budget-impact analysis using a simple six-step process that is consistent with current guidelines for these analyses. Examples and exercises for each chapter afford an opportunity to practice the six-step process in practical applications. The book progresses from a framework for budget impact analyses to an in-depth review of components and how to develop and present these in software applications and reports. Critical considerations such as uncertainty analysis and validation, and considerations for alternate interventions, such as vaccines and diagnostics, are also covered. This book is a "must have" for the builder and budget holder, with builders benefiting from instructions to identify and estimate all necessary variables and budget holders receiving a guide to what should be included in the analyses they assess.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Robert A. Britton, Baylor College of Medicine, Molecular Virology and Microbiology, Houston, Texas, Patrice D. Cani, Université catholique de Louvain, Louvain Drug Research Institute, WELBIO-Walloon Excellence in Life Sciences, Brussels, Belgium.
    Summary: Examining the enormous potential of microbiome manipulation to improve health.

    Contents:
    A. TRADITIONAL PROBIOTIC APPROACHES. Chapter 1. Biochemical features of beneficial microbes : foundations for therapeutic microbiology / Melinda A. Engevik, James Versalovic
    Chapter 2. The genomic basis of lactobacilli as health-promoting organisms / Elisa Salvetti, Paul W. O'Toole
    Chapter 3. Bifidobacteria and their health-promoting effects / Claudio Hidalgo-Cantabrana, Susana Delgado, Lorena Ruiz, Patricia Ruas-Madiedo, Borja Sánchez, Abelardo Margolles
    B. NEXT-GENERATION BACTERIOTHERAPY: OPPORTUNITIES IN CHRONIC DISEASES. Chapter 4. Microbial interactions and interventions in colorectal cancer / Terence van Raay, Emma Allen-Vercoe
    Chapter 5. Microbial impact on host metabolism: opportunities for novel treatments of nutritional disorders? / Hubert Plovier, Patrice D. Cani
    Chapter 6. Therapeutic opportunities in the vaginal microbiome / Gregor Reid
    Chapter 7. Lung microbiota and its impact on the mucosal immune phenotype / Benjamin G. Wu, Leopoldo N. Segal
    Chapter 8. Microbiota, liver diseases, and alcohol / Anne-Marie Cassard, Philippe Gérard, Gabriel Perlemuter
    Chapter 9. The potential of probiotics as a therapy for osteoporosis / Fraser L. Collins, Naiomy D. Rios-Arce, Jonathan D. Schepper, Narayanan Parameswaran, Laura R. McCabe
    Chapter 10. Ecological therapeutic opportunities for oral diseases / Anilei Hoare, Philip D. Marsh, Patricia I. Diaz
    C. CONTROL OF INFECTIOUS DISEASE BY MICROBES. Chapter 11. Control of Clostridium difficile infection by defined microbial communities / James Collins, Jennifer M. Auchtung
    Chapter 12. Fecal microbiota transplantation : therapeutic potential for a multitude of diseases beyond Clostridium difficile / Guido J. Bakker, Max Nieuwdorp
    Chapter 13. Enterococci and their interactions with the intestinal microbiome / Krista Dubin, Eric G. Palmer
    D. NEXT-GENERATION MICROBIAL THERAPEUTICS: TOOLS AND REGULATION. Chapter 14. Engineering diagnostic and therapeutic gut bacteria / Brian P. Landry, Jeffrey J. Tabor
    Chapter 15. Use of traditional and genetically modified probiotics in human health : what does the future hold? / Luis G. Bermúdez-Humarán, Philippe Langella
    Chapter 16. Genetic tools for the enhancement of probiotic properties / Laura Ortiz-Velez, Robert Britton
    Chapter 17. Genome editing of food-grade lactobacilli to develop therapeutic probiotics / Jan-Peter van Pijkeren, Rodolphe Barrangou
    Chapter 18. United States regulatory considerations for development of live biotherapeutic products as drugs / Sheila M. Dreher-Lesnick, Scott Stibitz, Paul E. Carlson, Jr.
    E. INDIRECT STRATEGIES TO TARGET MICROBIOME FUNCTION FOR HEALTH. Chapter 19. Bacteriophage clinical use as antibacterial “drugs” : utility and precedent / Stephen T. Abedon
    Chapter 20. Modulation of the gastrointestinal microbiome with nondigestable fermentable carbohydrates to improve human health / Edward C. Deehan, Rebbeca M. Duar, Anissa M. Armet, Maria Elisa Perez-Muñoz, Mingliang Jin, Jens Walter.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Jennifer Ross, Wallace F. Marshall.
    Contents:
    Chapter 1. In vitro systems for the study of microtubule-based cell polarity in fission yeast
    Chapter 2. Microtubules, MAPs, and motor patterns
    Chapter 3. Self-organization of motors and microtubules in lipid-monolayered droplets
    Chapter 4. Reconstitution of microtubule-based motility using cell extracts
    Chapter 5. Building cells for quantitative, live-cell analyses of collective motor protein functions
    Chapter 6. Reconstituting cytoskeletal contraction events with biomimetic actin-myosin active gels
    Chapter 7. Building an artificial actin cortex on microscopic pillar arrays
    Chapter 8. Triggering actin polymerization in Xenopus egg extracts from phosphoinositide-containing lipid bilayers
    Chapter 9. Reconstituting geometry-modulated protein patterns in membrane compartments
    Chapter 10. Structural and functional studies of membrane remodeling machines
    Chapter 11. Building interconnected membrane networks
    Chapter 12. Using supported bilayers to study the spatiotemporal organization of membrane-bound proteins
    Chapter 13. Reconstituting ParA/ParB-mediated transport of DNA cargo
    Chapter 14. Cell-sized liposomes that mimic cell motility and the cell cortex
    Chapter 15. Reconstitution of cortical actin networks within water-in-oil emulsions
    Chapter 16. Engineering artificial cells by combining HeLa-based cell-free expression and ultrathin double emulsion template
    Chapter 17. Reconstitution of proteins on electroformed giant unilamellar vesicles
    Chapter 18. Reconstituting SNARE-mediated membrane fusion at the single liposome level.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2015
  • Digital
    Tracy S. Wang, Adam W. Beck, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    John A. Quelch, Emily C. Boudreau.
    Contents:
    1. Building a culture of health
    2. Consumer health
    3. Employee health
    4. Community health
    5. Environmental health
    6. Implementing a culture of health
    About the authors
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Joe Tye, Bob Dent.
    Summary: "Using construction as their metaphor, authors Joe Tye and Bob Dent make a compelling case that a healthcare organization's invisible architecture-a foundation of core values, a superstructure of organizational culture, and the interior finish of workplace attitude-is no less important than its visible architecture. Further, they assert that culture will not change unless people change, and people will not change unless they are inspired to do so and given the right tools. The fully updated second edition of Building a Culture of Ownership in Healthcare takes readers on a journey from accountability to ownership-providing a proven model, strategies, and practical solutions to help improve organizational culture in the healthcare setting. Learn how investing in your organization and your people can enable a significant, successful change in productivity; employee engagement; nurse satisfaction, recruitment, and retention; quality of care; patient satisfaction; and financial outcomes"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Invisible architecture
    From accountability to ownership
    The foundation of core values
    The superstructure of organizational culture
    The interior finish of workplace attitude
    Blueprinting a culture of ownership
    Three essential elements of a culture of ownership
    Personal values and organizational values
    The four dimensions of transformational leadership
    Anatomy of a change movement : what the movement to ban public smoking has to teach healthcare leaders about culture change.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Maureen M. Black, Atul Singhal, Charles H. Hillman.
    Summary: "This book covers the content of the 95th Nestle Nutrition Institute Workshop (held in Brazil, 2020), which explored the current scientific research, challenges, and opportunities of cementing a healthy foundation for life in toddlers and young children. The key issues presented offer valuable insights for health care providers, policy makers, and researchers on how appropriate nutrition, nurturing caregiving, and environment can influence the development and health of children up to five years of age"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Toddler development and autonomy : baby-led weaning, neophobia and responsive parenting / Black, M.M.
    Global landscape of nutrient inadequacies in toddlers and young children / Eldridge, A.L.; Offord, E.A.
    Toddlers in Brazil : challenges and opportunities / Fisberg, M.; Duarte Batista, L.
    Growth faltering : underweight and stunting / Prentice, A.M.
    Obesity in toddlers and young children : causes and consequences / Singhal, A.
    Summary on optimising nutrition in toddlers and young children / Singhal, A.
    Transition from breastfeeding and complementary feeding to toddler nutrition in childcare settings / Ritchie, L.D.; Lee, D.L.; Vitale, E.H.; Au, L.E.
    Selected micronutrient needs of children 1 to 3 years of age / Abrams, S.A.
    You are what your parents eat : parental influences on early flavor preference development / Forestell, C.A.
    Introducing hard-to-like foods to infants and toddlers : mothers' perspectives and children's experiences about learning to accept novel foods / Johnson, S.L.; Moding, K.J.
    Dietary sugars : not as sour as they are made out to be / Bier, D.M.
    Summary on advancing from infancy to toddlerhood through food / Black, M.M.
    A review of the effects of physical activity on cognition and brain health across children and adolescence / Hillman, C.H.; McDonald, K.M.; Logan, N.E.
    Nutrition effects on childhood executive control / Willis, N.; Khan, N.A.
    The importance of motor skills for development / Adolph, K.E.; Hoch, J.E.
    The importance of providing opportunities for health behaviors during the school day / Castelli, D.M.; Barcelona, J.M.; Crim, B.; Burson, S.L.
    Summary on health behaviors and the developing brain / Hillman, C.H.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Digital
    Hansa Bhargava, MD, FAAP
    Summary: In Building Happier Kids, Dr Bhargava helps parents understand the impact of stress and shares concrete steps parents can take to reduce the pressure on their children and teens and increase their health and happiness.

    Contents:
    Front Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Contents
    Acknowledgments
    Introduction
    Quiz: How Strong Is Your Child's Emotional Well-being?
    Chapter 1: Building Your Mental Health Toolbox
    Quiz: Is Your Family Embracing the Basics?
    Chapter 2: Finding Your Way Back to the 4 Fundamentals
    Quiz: Is Your Family Overscheduled?
    Chapter 3: The Loss of Unscheduled Time
    Quiz: Is Your Child's Digital Media Use Excessive?
    Chapter 4: The Rise of Digital Media and the Battle for Screen-free Time
    Quiz: Is Your Child at Risk for Toxic Stress? Chapter 5: Understanding the Effects of Toxic Stress
    Quiz: Does Your Family Prioritize Sleep?
    Chapter 6: Choosing Sleep as a Priority
    Quiz: Parents: Do You Have a Handle on Your Stress?
    Chapter 7: Replenishing the Cup for the Stressed-out, Overwhelmed Parent
    Quiz: Does Your Family Have a Plan in Place for Crises?
    Chapter 8: Your Child's Mental Health: What to Do During a Crisis
    Quiz: Does Your Child Have Tools to Find Their Purpose?
    Chapter 9: Giving Our Children Tools for Success and Happiness
    Chapter 10: Final Tools to Build Happy and Healthy Kids
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2022
  • Digital
    Kenneth R. Ginsburg with Martha M. Jablow
    Contents:
    Front Cover
    Title Page
    Copyright
    Dedication
    Contents
    Acknowledgments
    Introduction
    Part 1: Be the Kind of Parent With Long-standing Influence
    Chapter 1: The Power of Loving Relationships
    Chapter 2: Parenting the 35-Year-Old
    Chapter 3: The Right Balance Tips the Scales Toward a Positive Future
    Part 2: Resilience and Stress
    Chapter 4: Why Resilience?
    Chapter 5: Stress and Its Effects
    Chapter 6: Ingredients of Resilience: 7 Crucial Cs
    Chapter 7: The Language of Resilience Chapter 8: Not Letting Others Undermine Your Child's Resilience (or Psych You Out!)
    Part 3: Competence and Confidence
    Chapter 9: The Amazing Developing Brain
    Chapter 10: Getting Out of the Way
    Chapter 11: The Value of Play, Reflection, and Downtime
    Chapter 12: Noticing, Praising, and Criticizing
    Chapter 13: Authentic Success (This Includes Making the Most of Failure)
    Chapter 14: Thinking Clearly
    Chapter 15: No More Lectures
    Chapter 16: "I Get It!"
    Chapter 17: Changing Behavior Step-by-step
    Chapter 18: Shifting the Blame to Save Face Chapter 19: (Social) Media Literacy
    Chapter 20: Not Being Broken
    Chapter 21: Building Confidence
    Chapter 22: Raising Youth of Color in a Complex World
    Part 4: Connection
    Chapter 23: Protective Connections
    Chapter 24: Take a Breath, You're Co-regulating
    Chapter 25: The Art and Importance of Listening
    Chapter 26: Strengthening Family Ties
    Chapter 27: Widening the Circle
    Chapter 28: Having Their Back, True Unconditional Love
    Chapter 29: Preparing Our Families for Lifelong Interdependence
    Chapter 30: Some Cautions About Connection Chapter 31: Supporting Resilience in Military Families
    Chapter 32: Nurturant Connections Protect Against Toxic Stress
    Part 5: Character and Contribution
    Chapter 33: Character
    Chapter 34: Grit: A Character Trait That Drives Performance
    Chapter 35: Contribution
    Part 6: Coping
    Chapter 36: Getting a Grip on Stress
    Chapter 37: Taking Action
    Chapter 38: Taking Care of Your Body
    Chapter 39: Taking Care of Your Emotions
    Part 7: Control
    Chapter 40: Styles of Discipline
    Chapter 41: Positive Discipline Strategies
    Chapter 42: Increasing Kids' Control Chapter 43: Delaying Gratification
    Chapter 44: One Rung at a Time
    Chapter 45: Not Everything Is Within Our Control
    Part 8: When Resilience Is Challenged
    Chapter 46: Extreme Circumstances
    Chapter 47: Bringing Our Children Back
    Chapter 48: Turning for Help
    Chapter 49: When Your Own Resilience Reaches Its Limits
    Part 9: Especially for Communities
    Chapter 50: Community-Based Resilience-Building Strategies
    Parting Thoughts
    Index
    Back Cover
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2020
  • Digital
    Joseph Sabbagh, Robert McConnell, editors.
    Summary: This book is dedicated to all relevant aspects of bulk fill materials and their uses in clinical practice. Today, we count over 30 different bulk fill materials, which can be used in the dental clinic. The composition of bulk fill materials and their different modes of application for moderate to large direct resin restorations placement are explained in this book. It is written by a group of international specialists and allows the reader to evaluate available materials, learn predictable techniques and evaluate long term survival as well as future developments. The book covers all fields related to the history of bulk fill composites, their composition and physical properties, and a step by step guide to their successful clinical applications. Practitioners will find it invaluable as a clinical manual and a good reference book.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    1: General Introduction
    1.1 Dental Resin Composites
    1.2 Cavity Design for Posterior Composite Restorations
    1.3 Composite Placement
    1.4 Bulk Fill Resin Composites
    References
    2: What Are Bulk Fill (BF) Composites and How Do They Differ from Non-BF Composites?
    2.1 What Are Bulk Fill Composites?
    2.2 Composition and Microstructure
    2.2.1 Organic Phase (Resin Matrix)
    2.2.1.1 Conventional Composite Monomer
    2.2.1.2 Bulk Fill Monomer Modifications
    2.2.2 Inorganic Phase (Fillers)
    2.2.2.1 Conventional Composite Fillers 2.2.2.2 Bulk Fill Filler Modifications
    2.2.3 Microstructure
    2.2.4 Coupling Agent (Silanes)
    2.2.4.1 Polymerization Initiation System of Bulk Fill
    2.3 Classification of Bulk Fill Composite
    2.3.1 According to Viscosity
    2.3.1.1 Low Viscosity Bulk Fill
    2.3.1.2 High Viscosity Bulk Fill
    2.3.2 Modified High Viscosity Bulk Fill
    2.3.2.1 Sonically Activated Bulk Fill
    2.3.2.2 Thermo-Viscous Bulk Fill
    2.3.2.3 Fibre-Reinforced Bulk Fill
    2.3.3 Dual Cured Bulk Fill Composite Resin
    2.3.4 Clinical Relevance
    2.4 Bulk Fill Shades and Depth of Cure 4.1 Formulation of RBCs
    4.1.1 Q1. Photon Penetration into RBCs
    4.1.2 Q2. Photons Encounter PI Molecules
    4.2 Degree of Conversion
    4.3 "Bleaching" of Photo-Initiators and Colour Stability of BF-RBCs
    4.4 The Reciprocity Hypothesis
    4.5 Shrinkage Phenomena
    4.6 Photo-Curing of Highly Filled Systems Following Pre-Heating or Sonication
    4.7 Depth of Cure
    References
    5: How Do I Select and Deploy Light Curing Units for BFC?
    5.1 What Are the Older LCU Technologies?
    5.2 Selection Principles
    5.3 Before Deploying Light 5.3.1 Consider the Diameter of the LCU Tip
    5.3.2 Consider the Distance/Angulation of the LCU Tip
    5.3.3 Consider Thermal Energy from the LCU and the Polymerization Kinetics
    5.4 How Can LCU Performance Be Validated?
    5.4.1 Precision Laboratory Methods
    5.4.1.1 Top and Bottom Hardness
    5.4.1.2 Slotted Moulds to Measure Hardness/Depth Profiles
    5.4.2 Simpler Measurements in the Dental Clinic
    5.4.3 Developing Photocuring Skills and Good Working Practice
    References
    6: Physical and Mechanical Properties of BFC's
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Flexural Strength
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    Carl Philpott, MB ChB, DLO, FRCS (ORL-HNS), MD, PGCME, Anthony Long Senior Lecturer in Otorhinolaryngology, Division of Medicine, Norwich Medical School, University of East Anglia, Norwich, United Kingdom, Peter Tassone, MB ChB, FRCSGlasg (ORI-HNS), Consultant ENT, Thyroid, and Head and Neck Surgeon, James Paget, Norfolk and Norwich University Hospitals, Norfolk, United Kingdom, Matthew Clark, BSc, MBBS, FRC (ORL-HNS), Consultant Otologist and ENT Surgeon, Gloucestershire Royal Hospital, Gloucester, United Kingdom.
    Summary: "Concise and to-the-point, this book provides a highly effective review and study aid for postgraduate and exit exam candidates in otolaryngology-head and neck surgery. It covers the full breadth of the field in manageable nuggets of information that are easily learned and retained, and ensures that trainees are prepared for all frequently asked exam questions. Special Features: Distills key facts into bullet points for rapid access to essential information, without the need to wade through lengthy, extraneous material, Covers the full range of topics in the modern ENT syllabus, as well as other important areas (e.g., imaging techniques, pharmacology, medical statistics) that are encountered in todays exams, Organized by subspecialty for quick, convenient review of selected topics, Serves equally well as a compact reference and refresher in the clinic, hospital or operating theatre, Offers a valuable overview of otolaryngology for trainees in allied specialties, such as maxillofacial and plastic surgery, audiology and speech-language pathology. Primarily geared to the Diploma of Otolaryngology-Head Neck Surgery (DOHNS) and Fellowship Intercollegiate (FRCS-ORL HNS) exams in the UK, Bullet points in ENT is also an excellent learning resource for similar tests in Europe, India, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, South Africa and other countries. It is ideal as a current, comprehensive, study and revision aid in this rapidly expanding specialty"--Provided by publisher.
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    12
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    W171 .Y18
    3
  • Digital
    Stefano Pallanti, Luana Salerno.
    Summary: This book highlights the importance of investigating for ADHD in adults with attention difficulties, poor memory and executive function impairments. The authors advocate a neurodevelopmental assessment approach in all phases of life, and explain how to perform such assessments. The identification of ADHD in adults with other psychiatric and neurological disorders will lead to a better response to treatments, and as a result reduce its social, economic and personal burden. ADHD can no longer be considered solely a pediatric condition, as it occurs in a significant proportion of adults worldwide. However, ADHD in adults is often unrecognized and untreated. Diagnosing the disorder in adulthood is a challenge, due not only to the different clinical presentation in this phase of life, but also to the fact that other conditions may mask the symptoms. ADHD constitutes a hidden comorbidity with a detrimental impact of those affected, and a poor response (or even non-response) to several treatments. Intended for psychiatrists, neurologists, specialists in gerontology and neuropsychology, this book is an indispensable resource for all mental health practitioners who want to optimize the treatment of patients affected by psychiatric and neurological disorders who respond poorly to standard treatments.

    Contents:
    Foreword
    The socio-economic burden of adult ADHD
    The phenotypic expression of ADHD in adulthood
    ADHD circuitries and the R-Do-C perspective
    The diagnosis of adult ADHD using a precision psychiatry approach: clinical aspects. Neuropsychological and neurophysiological aspects. Psychopathological experiences. The case of Adult Onset ADHD.
    Adult ADHD in psychiatric conditions
    Adult ADHD in other neurodevelopmental disorders
    Adult ADHD in Schizophrenia Spectrum and Other Psychotic Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Bipolar and Related Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Depressive Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Anxiety Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Obsessive-Compulsive and Related Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Trauma- and Stressor-Related Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Feeding and Eating Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Sleep-Wake Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Disruptive, Impulse-Control, and Conduct Disorders
    Adult ADHD in Substance-Related and Addictive Disorders
    Adult ADHD and Non-Substance-Related Disorders (Gambling)
    Adult ADHD in Neurocognitive Disorders
    Future directions for practice and research.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Michael Glick, Martin S. Greenberg, Peter B. Lockhart, Stephen J. Challacombe.
    Summary: "This thoroughly revised Thirteenth Edition of Burket's Oral Medicine reflects the scope of modern Oral Medicine with updated content written by 80 contributing oral medicine and medical experts from across the globe. The text emphasizes the diagnosis and management of diseases of the mouth and maxillofacial region as well as safe dental management for patients with complex medical disorders such as cardiovascular disease, cancer, infectious diseases, bleeding disorders, renal diseases, and many more"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to Oral Medicine and Oral Diagnosis / Michael Glick, Martin S Greenberg, Peter B Lockhart, Stephen J Challacombe
    Overview of Clinical Research / Dena J Fischer, Darien Weatherspoon, Mary A Cutting
    Ulcerative, Vesicular, and Bullous Lesions / Sook Bin Woo, Jane F Setterfield, Martin S Greenberg
    Red and White Lesions of the Oral Mucosa / Ivan Alajbeg, Stephen J Challacombe, Palle Holmstrup, Mats Jontell
    Pigmented Lesions of the Oral Mucosa / Alfredo Aguirre, Faizan Alawi, Jose Luis Tapia
    Benign Lesions of the Oral Cavity and the Jaws / A Ross Kerr, Denise A Trochesset
    Head and Neck Cancer / Amber L Watters, Heidi J Hansen, Ashish A Patel, Joel Epstein
    Oral Complications of Nonsurgical Cancer Therapies / Siri Beier Jensen, Douglas E Peterson
    Salivary Gland Diseases / Leah M Bowers, Arjan Vissink, Michael T Brennan
    Temporomandibular Disorders / Richard Ohrbach, Thomas Sollecito, Temitope Omolehinwa, Martin S Greenberg
    Neuropathic Orofacial Pain / Olga A Korczeniewska, Katherine France, Junad Khan, Martin S Greenberg, Rafael Benoliel, Eliav Eli
    Common Headache Disorders / Pei Feng Lim, Scott De Rossi, Massimiliano Di Giosia
    Diseases of the Respiratory Tract / Lyvia Y Leigh, Patrick Vannelli, Heidi C Crow, Sandhya Desai, Mark Lepore, Robert Anolik, Michael Glick
    Diseases of the Cardiovascular System / Peter B Lockhart, Yee-Ping Sun
    Diseases of the Gastrointestinal Tract / Jeremy Sanderson, Michael Paul Escudier
    Renal Diseases / Karo Parsegian, Ruchir Trivedi, Effie Ioannidou
    Hematologic Diseases / Vidya Sankar, Alessandro Villa
    Bleeding and Clotting Disorders / Joel J Nape©łas, Lauren L Patton
    Immunologic Diseases / Vasileios Ionas Theofilou, Joanne Konkel, Nikolaos G Nikitakis, Niki Moutsopoulos
    Transplantation Medicine / Sharon Elad, Marie Laryea, Noam Yarom
    Infectious Diseases / Michael J Durkin, Noha Seoudi, Raj Nair
    Disorders of the Endocrine System and of Metabolism / Mark Schifter, Mark McLean, Suma Sukumar
    Neurologic Diseases / Eric T Stoopler, Michael L McGarvey
    Psychological and Psychiatric Aspects of Oral Health / J Tim Newton, Beth J Guildford
    Pediatric Oral Medicine / Catherine Hong, Christel M Haberland
    Geriatric Oral Medicine / Katharine Ciarrocca, Christine Downey
    The Role of Genetics in Oral Medicine / Olga A Korczeniewska, Thomas C Hart, Scott R Diehl
    Laboratory Medicine and Diagnostic Pathology / Brian C Muzyka, John Christie, Bobby Collins
    How to Identify, Interpret and Apply the Scientific Literature to Practice / Alonso Carrasco-Labra, Malavika Tampi, Olivia Urquhart, Scott Howell, Austin Booth, Michael Glick.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Zhao-fan Xia, Feng Zhu, Yu Sun.
    Summary: This book provides in-depth analysis and guidance in the clinical diagnosis and treatment, and development of new treatments with clinical applied prospect of burn and trauma associated lung injury, and does further study on the pathological change of burn and trauma associated lung injury such as inhalation injury, lung blast injury, pulmonary barotrauma, delayed hemopneumothorax, lung injury associated sepsis, ventilator-induced lung injury and ischemia-reperfusion lung injury. It is also compiled with many clinical typical cases, full data and series of pictures. It persists in combining theory and practice, and highlights practical application to reflect the theoretical value. It is very suitable for the medical teaching and can also be used as a reference book for medical doctoral students, postgraduates, and medical trainees receiving continuing education from critical care medicine, burn & trauma surgery, and emergency medicine. It also aims at bringing more clinicians' attention to burn-/trauma-induced lung injury, making them familiar with the relevant theories and clinical diagnose; guiding the treatment of burn and trauma associated lung injury and improving the prognosis and life quality of patients; stimulating more clinicians and researchers to further explore the pathological mechanism and new treatments of burn and trauma associated lung injury. Editor Zhao-fan Xia is a Professor and Director Department of Burn Surgery, Changhai Hospital, Shanghai, China. Professor Xia is the Academician of Chinese Academy of Engineering.

    Contents:
    Inhalation injury
    Primary Blast Lung injury
    Pulmonary barotrauma
    Delayed Hemopneumothorax
    Sepsis Related Lung Injury (SRLI)
    Ventilator-Associated Lung Injury (VALI)
    Ischemia-reperfusion and Oxidative Stress Induced Lung Injury
    Pulmonary Enbolism
    Pulmonary Infection
    Modes and Strategies of Mechanical Ventilation for burn and trauma associated lung injury
    Potential Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marc G. Jeschke, Lars-Peter Kamolz, Shahriar Shahrokhi, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Isaäc van der Waal.
    Summary: This book is prepared for patients who suffer from 'Burning mouth disease', also referred to as 'Burning mouth syndrome'. It gives a comprehensive overview of the disease, its symptoms and management. Readers will learn about the terminology and definition of 'Burning mouth disease', and its suggested causes. Attention is paid to symptoms of various diseases that may mimic those of burning mouth disease. Neurological and psychogenic aspects are well covered, as are the many reported pharmacological and non-pharmacological treatment modalities. The combined training of the author in oral surgery, oral pathology and oral medicine has provided him with exceptional expertise in both the diagnosis and the management of patients with burning mouth disease. This book is a must have for everyone who is interested in this enigmatic disease.

    Contents:
    Introduction: Introduction
    Terminology and Definition
    Classification
    Epidemiology. Symptoms of Burning Mouth Disease: Introduction
    Burning Sensation and Other Dysaesthesias of the Oral Mucosa
    Dry Mouth
    Taste Disturbance
    Smell Disorder
    Association with other Orofacial Pain Disorders
    Complaints Elsewhere in the Body. Suggested Causes of Burning-Mouth-Disease-Like Symptoms:
    Introduction
    Allergy to Food Substances
    Anaemia
    Blood Disorders
    Dentures or Teeth Related Causes of Burning-Mouth-Disease-Like Symptoms
    Gastrointestinal Inflammation ('Gastritis')
    Hormonal Disorders
    Medication, Side Effects
    Mucosal Diseases
    Neurological Diseases
    Parafunctional Habits
    Smoking and the Use of Alcohol
    Vitmain Deficiencies. Reported Treatment of Burning Mouth Disease: Introduction
    Treatment with Drugs
    Alternative Treatments
    Treatment without Drugs
    Psychosocial Intervention; Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
    Summarizing Conclusion. Management of Burning Mouth Disease: Introduction
    Oral Examination
    Laboratory Investigations
    Dental Treatment
    The Importance of Proper Communication
    Proper Information
    Various Treatment Modalities
    Self-Care
    Psychosocial Intervention; Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
    Referral to a Specialist or a Multidisciplinary Pain Clinic
    Postscriptum.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Isaäc van der Waal.
    Summary: This book gives a comprehensive overview of the symptoms, causes and treatment of Burning Mouth disease and Burning Mouth-like diseases. Burning mouth disease (BMD), also referred to as burning mouth syndrome, is an enigmatic disease for both the patient and the clinician. When the disease is not recognized as such, the patient may become exposed to a wide variety of redundant treatments, including dental and surgical procedures. The text is science-based including literature from the past decades as well as practice-oriented containing treatment guidelines established on personal experience from the author. Much attention is paid to the symptoms of various diseases that may mimic those of BMD. Neurologic and psychogenic aspects are well covered, as are the many treatment modalities, such as pharmacological and nonpharmacological ones. Step-by-step approaches are outlined in this book to help make an apparently unbearable disease more or less acceptable to live with. This monograph will be of help for all dental and medical healthcare providers who are involved in the diagnosis and management of patients suffering from BMD and BMD-like symptoms.

    Contents:
    Introduction, Terminology and Definition, Classification
    Epidemiology of Burning Mouth Disease
    Symptomatology of Burning Mouth Disease
    Local Causes of Burning-Mouth-Disease-Like Symptoms
    Non-local Diseases that May Be Associated with Burning-mouth-disease-like Symptoms
    Neurological Aspects of Burning Mouth Disease
    Psychogenic Aspects of Burning Mouth Disease
    Treatment Modalities of Burning Mouth Disease
    Management of Burning Mouth Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Cynthia M. Stonnington, Julia A. Files, editors.
    Summary: This book is the first to dissect the factors contributing to burnout that impact women physicians and seeks to appropriately address these issues. The book begins by establishing the differences in epidemiology between female physicians and their male counterparts, including rates of burnout, depression and suicide, chosen fields, caregiving responsibilities at home, career tradeoffs in dual physician marriages, patient satisfaction and outcomes, academic rank, leadership positions, salary, and turnover. The second part of the book explores the drivers of physician burnout that disproportionately affect women, each chapter beginning with a case vignette. This section covers many issues that often go unrecognized including unconscious bias, sexual harassment, gender role conflicts, domestic responsibilities, depression, addiction, financial stress, and the impact related to reproductive health such as pregnancy and breastfeeding. The book concludes by focusing on strategies to prevent and/or mitigate burnout among individual women physicians across the career lifespan. This section also includes recommendations to change the culture of medicine and the systems that contribute to burnout. Burnout in Women Physicians is an excellent resource for physicians across all specialties who are concerned with physician wellness and burnout, including students, residents, fellows, and attending physicians.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Sex as a Biological Variable
    Preface
    A Commentary on Gender and Nomenclature
    Contents
    Contributors
    Introduction
    Editors' Commentary: Future Directions and Opportunities for Further Research
    References
    Part I: How Do Women Physicians Differ from Their Male Counterparts?
    1: Sex, Gender, and Medicine
    References
    2: Patient Satisfaction and Outcomes
    Patient Satisfaction Scores, Patient Outcomes, and Burnout
    Patient Satisfaction Scores
    Physician-Patient Communication
    Gender Concordance and Patient Satisfaction Scores
    Outcomes of Female Physicians
    References
    3: Rates of Burnout, Depression, Suicide, and Substance Use Disorders
    Vignette
    Introduction
    Definition
    Importance of Epidemiological Data
    Correlations of Burnout with Depression, Substance Use Disorders, and Suicide
    Epidemiology of Burnout in Women Physicians
    Understanding Variability in the Data
    The Maslach Burnout Inventory
    Systems of Care and Personal Factors That Contribute to Burnout
    Physicians Versus Other Professionals
    Risk Factors for Physician Burnout
    Roles and Responsibilities
    Learner and Early Career Physicians
    Work Satisfaction
    Epidemiology of Depression in Women Physicians
    Relationship of Burnout and Depression
    Rates of Physician Depression
    Epidemiology of Suicide in Women Physicians
    Physician Death via Suicide
    Suicide Rates Among Physicians
    Suicide Rates Among Medical Trainees
    Suicide Rates Among Women Physicians
    Epidemiology of Substance Use Disorders in Women Physicians
    Relationship of Burnout, to Substance Use and Suicide
    Rates of Substance Use Disorders
    Barriers to Care
    References
    4: Domestic Responsibilities and Career Advancement
    An Exploration of the Influence of Gender and Domestic Responsibilities on the Trajectory of One's Career
    Why the Gender Disparity?
    Future Direction
    References
    Part II: Drivers of Burnout That Disproportionately Affect Women and Their Potential Solutions
    5: Gender Stereotypes
    Bias at the Table: Trapped Between a Sticky Floor and a Glass Ceiling
    Bias at the Bedside: "Lady Doctors" Face Gendered Expectations with Staff and Patients
    Panel Composition
    Gender Bias and Satisfaction Surveys
    Gender Bias, Occupational Segregation, and Stereotype Threat
    Bias at Home: Parental Leave Is Leaving Both Men and Women Behind
    Bias and Burnout: Putting It Together
    References
    6: Sexual Harassment
    Introduction
    How Common Is Sexual Harassment Toward Women Physicians?
    When Patients Sexually Harass Their Physician
    Sexual Harassment as It Relates to Trainees
    How Do Women Physicians Respond to Sexual Harassment?
    How Does Sexual Harassment Affect Women Physicians?
    Legal Aspects of Sexual Harassment in Medicine
    Solutions to Sexual Harassment in Medicine
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Melvin A. Shiffman, Mervin Low, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a comprehensive overview of recent clinical techniques and findings regarding wounds in burns, infections of wounds, and wound management in general. With the help of numerous high-quality illustrations, the first part of the book describes various approaches to treating patients with burn wounds. In turn, the second part focuses on infections of wounds. Here, the chapter authors summarize the most recent treatment options for wound infection in both children and adults. The third and last part addresses wound management in general, rounding out the content. Given the breadth of its coverage, the book offers a valuable resource for beginners and experienced plastic surgeons alike.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Burns
    Overview of Burns
    Care and (First) Aid of Children with Burns
    Learning from the Management of Carbapenemase Producing Organisms at a Regional Burns Centre
    A Hemostatic Technique Using Silicone Gel Dressing for Burn Surgery
    Skin Graft Fixation in Severe Burns: Use of Topical Negative Pressure
    Tissue Expanders in Post-Burn Alopecia: With or Without Galeotomies
    Autologous Skin Cell Transplantation and Medical Needling for Repigmentation of Depigmented Burn Scars on UV-Protected and UV-Exposed Skin
    A novel Chitosan Based Gel for Burn Wounds
    Treatment of Partial-thickness Scalds by Skin Xenografts
    The MEEK Technique in the Treatment of Burns
    Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome in the Burn Patient
    Chemical Burns to the Eye
    Severe Burns: Pathogenesis and Prevention of Infection
    Comparison of antemortem clinical diagnosis and postmortem findings in burn-related deaths
    The effect of natural extracts on laser burn wound healing
    Part 2: Infections
    Malnutrition Predicts Infectious and Wound Complications Following Posterior Lumbar Spinal Fusion
    Deep-Wound and Organ-Space Infection after Surgery for Degenerative Spine Disease
    Wound Infection following Stoma Reversal: A Prospective Comparative Study
    Primary Necrotizing Fasciitis of the Breast: Combined use of Hyperbaric Oxygen and Negative Pressure Wound Therapy to Conserve the Breast
    Novel Antimicrobial Peptides: Targeting Wound Infections Caused by 'Superbugs' Resistant to all Current Antibiotics
    Novel use of a biologically-active-prefaabricated- random-3-dimensional-polymer scaffold of hyaluronic acid (hyaff) to facilitate complicated wound closure
    Part 3: Wound Management
    Negative-Pressure Wound Therapy for Large Burn Wounds
    Negative pressure wound therapy for the treatment of complex spinal wounds
    Potential mechanisms and application of honeybee products in wound management: wound healing by apitherapy
    Reactive oxygen species treat ment in the management of wounds.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Dawn Lee Garzon Maaks, Nancy Barber Starr, Margaret A. Brady, Nan M. Gaylord, Martha Driessnack, Karen G. Duderstadt.
    Summary: "Get a comprehensive foundation in children's primary care! Burns' Pediatric Primary Care, 7th Edition covers the full spectrum of health conditions seen in primary care pediatrics, emphasizing both prevention and management. This in-depth, evidence-based textbook is the only one on the market written from the unique perspective of the Nurse Practitioner. It easily guides you through assessing, managing, and preventing health problems in children from infancy through adolescence. Key topics include developmental theory, issues of daily living, the health status of children today, and diversity and cultural considerations. Updated content throughout reflects the latest research evidence, national and international protocols and standardized guidelines. Additionally, this 7th edition been reorganized to better reflect contemporary clinical practice and includes nine new chapters, revised units on health promotion, health protection, disease management, and much, much more!" -- Publisher description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2020
  • Digital
    Gerd Pluschke, Katharina Röltgen, editors.
    Summary: A major objective of this open access book is to summarize the current status of Buruli Ulcer (BU) research for the first time. It will identify gaps in our knowledge, stimulate research and support control of the disease by providing insight into approaches for surveillance, diagnosis, and treatment of Buruli Ulcer. Book chapters will cover the history, epidemiology diagnosis, treatment and disease burden of BU and provide insight into the microbiology, genomics, transmission and virulence of Mycobacterium ulcerans.

    Contents:
    Buruli Ulcer: History and Disease Burden
    Buruli Ulcer in Africa
    Buruli Ulcer in Australia
    Mycobacterium Ulcerans Infection in French Guiana; Current State of Knowledge
    Buruli Ulcer in Japan
    Population Genomics and Molecular Epidemiology of Mycobacterium Ulcerans
    Mycolactone: More Than Just a Cytotoxin
    The Immunology of Buruli Ulcer
    Buruli Ulcer in Animals and Experimental Infection Models
    Laboratory Diagnosis of Buruli Ulcer: Challenges and Future Perspectives
    Antimicrobial Treatment of Mycobacterium Ulcerans Infection
    Thermotherapy of Buruli Ulcer
    Secondary Infection of Buruli Ulcer Lesions
    Management of BU-HIV Co-infection
    Social Science Contributions to BU Focused Health Service Research in West-Africa
    Transdisciplinary Research and Action to Stop Buruli Ulcer- A Case Study from Philanthropy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    R. Jennifer Cavalieri, Mark E. Rupp.
    Summary: This guidebook provides research professionals with a deeper understanding of strategic planning, financial management, and regulatory implementation. This book demonstrates a strategy for managing your portfolio of clinical trials, provides tactics and real-world examples, and helps the reader adapt them to their own research site.

    Contents:
    The business of research
    Managing administrative information
    Managing workplace responsibilities
    Fostering professional relationships and a productive workplace
    Environment
    Managing financial performance
    Putting regulations into everyday practice.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2014
  • Digital
    Suzanne Waddill-Goad.
    Contents:
    Business basics : the big picture in healthcare
    Business infrastructure
    Finance 101
    Competency in business
    Marketing
    Launching a private APN practice
    Working in a non-clinical nursing job
    Innovation in nursing.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2017
  • Digital
    Neil Baum, Marc J. Kahn, editors.
    Summary: This book is intended to be a roadmap towards a successful practice for medical students, residents, fellows, and doctors. This roadmap focuses on how to build and manage a medical practice, and can be applied regardless if the reader is employed, joins a small group, or if they are a doctor who decides to start their own practice. Part I covers the basic business concepts that every physician needs to know. Chapters emphasize the benefits that accrue to a physician who understands the basics of business. Part II provides a guide for doctors who are beginning a medical practice. The chapters define the various options for doctors' employment such as solo practice, group practice, and academic medicine. The section also includes the process of negotiating contracts, identifying the advisers who help physicians become successful, and secure within their field and practice. The final part emphasizes strategies on how to build and grow a successful practice by covering topics such as hiring staff, employee motivation, creating a brand, gaining recognition, online reputation and presence, crisis management, integrating new technology, and work/life balance. The Business Basics of Building and Managing a Healthcare Practice serves as a valuable resource that helps doctors make a difference in the lives of their patients, as well as help them make good financial decisions.

    Contents:
    Why Doctors Need to Consider Medicine a Business
    Time-Value of Money, or What Is the Real Financial Value of an Opportunity?
    Basic Accounting and Interpretation of Financial Statements
    Revenue Cycle Management
    Contracts and Negotiation
    Entrepreneurship and Formulating Business Plans
    Managing People
    Basic Personal Finance and Investing
    Organized Medicine
    Transition From Training to Practice
    Managing Student Debt
    MIPS MACRA and Payment Models
    Obtaining and Maintaining Referrals from Other Physicians
    Branding Your Medical Practice-How to Make Your Practice Distinctive and Unique
    Legal Considerations in Hiring and Firing of Non-Physician Staff
    Malpractice
    Midlevel Providers (Notes)
    Use of Technology
    Academic Practice
    Gaining Recognition in the Community
    Internet and Social Media Marketing
    Crisis Management
    Physician Burnout-Don't Get Caught in the Flame
    "Divorcing" Your Business Partners
    Life-Work Equilibrium
    Future of Medicine-The Past Cannot Be Changed. The Future is in Your Power
    Conclusion and Five Essential Metrics You Need to Know.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    [edited by] Jeffrey S. Dover, Kavita Mariwalla.
    Summary: "Although board-certified dermatologists provide the best care for their patients, managing a practice and optimizing every facet of the business is a daunting endeavor. Business acumen is not taught in residency and is the most overlooked aspect of any given practice. The Business of Dermatology, written by esteemed dermatologists Jeffrey S. Dover, Kavita Mariwalla, and an impressive group of experts, provides a rare opportunity to learn about the operations side of practices across the country. Written in an informal tone, this unique book enables readers to be privy to a "40-way chat" with dermatologists whose practices are flourishing. With a vast wealth of information relevant to the business side of a dermatology practice, this remarkable resource fills the gap between the training phase and acquisition of professional confidence. Fiftyfive chapters offer insightful, highly practical pearls for everyone-from early-career dermatologists and those in solo-practice to employed physicians in large groups. Even the most seasoned practitioners will benefit from firsthand knowledge and real-world tips shared by physicians who have made their own mistakes trying to get practices off the ground and maintain them. The Business of Dermatology is an indispensable, one-stop source for all trainee and practicing dermatologists who need insightful guidance on setting up, organizing, managing, or optimizing their practice"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Michael Wasserman.
    Contents:
    1. A geriatrician's success story
    2. Why geriatric medicine matters
    3. Matching clinical strengths to revenue
    4. Taking full risk
    5. The psychology of geriatricians
    6. Going to battle and standing your ground
    7. By the numbers
    8. Swimming with the sharks
    9. me and the OIG
    10. Nursing homes: survival of the fittest
    11. Assisted living: healthcare or real estate?
    12. House calls: a "new" old-fashioned approach
    13. Care coordination
    14. Medicare advantage: past, present, and future
    15. Business planning for geriatrics success
    16. They don't call it risk for nothing
    17. ACOs: days of future past
    18. Bundling and alternate payment models
    19. MIPS and geriatrics
    20. Fee for service: will it ever die?
    21. Competition: not an effective strategy
    22. Getting the most out of providers
    23. Electronic health records
    24. Opportunities in today's healthcare marketplace
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editors, Joshua M. Korman, Heather J. Furnas
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme-Connect
    Thieme MedOne Plastic Surgery
  • Digital
    volume editors, Madhukar Misra, Shigeki Toma, Takahiro Shinzato.
    Contents:
    History of the buttonhole technique / Misra, M
    The impact of buttonhole cannulation on patients and staff in hemodialysis facilities / Ogawa, T., Harada, E., Kanayama, Y., Tanabe, A., Inamura, M., Kiba, T., Shimizu, T., Iwashita, T., Tayama, Y., Matsuda, A., Hasegawa, H
    Buttonhole tunnel tract creation with the bioholer buttonhole device / King, J.
    Causes and solutions of the trampoline effect / Miwa, M., Ota, N., Ando, C., Miyazaki, Y
    A new method that enables complete removal of scabs at buttonhole entry sites / Shinzato, T., Sasaki, M., Ota, N., Shibata, K., Fukui, H.,Toma, S., Maeda, K.
    Deformity of buttonhole entry site causes higher frequency of vascular access-related infection / Sato, S., Sakai, N., Ohkuri, K., Shinzato, T., Sasaki, M., Nakai, S., Toma, S
    Relationship between years elapsed after initial buttonhole cannulation and frequency of vascular access-related infections / Toma, S
    Long-term safety of buttonhole cannulation and efficacy of mupirocin prophylaxis / Agarwal, A., Nesrallah, G
    Application of buttonhole cannulation technique to surgically superficialized arteries / Hayakawa, K., Sugiyama, D., Tanaka, H., Shinohara, S., Ohki, T., Muraoka, A., Miwa, M.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
all 829 "B" titles

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Lane Library Bookmarklet

To install, drag this button to your browser bookmarks or tools bar.

What is it?

Lane Library Bookmarklet

Bookmark on Other Websites

Bookmark on Lane

  • To Install, Right Click this Button.
  • Select "Add to Favorites" (click “Continue” if you see a security alert)
  • From the "Create in" menu, select “Favorites Bar” (IE8, IE9) to install
  • Once installed it will look like this
  • Click "Bookmark on Lane" to bookmark any webpage
  • Your saved bookmark will appear on this page
To Install, Right Click this Button.

What is it?

Beyond Stanford

Derived from Current Medical Diagnosis & Treatment, AccessMedicine's Quick Medical Diagnosis & Treatment provides topic reviews with key diagnostic and treatment features for more than 500 diseases.

A repository of medical knowledge from internal medicine, cardiology, genetics, pharmacy, diagnosis and management, basic sciences, patient care, and more.

Continuously expanding, all databases in the repository contain the latest editions of selected medical titles.

MicroMedex: Premier pharmaceutical information source containing multiple databases and drug reference tools. Of particular value is DRUGDEX Evaluations, one of the most comprehensive drug sources available. DynaMed is a clinical information resource used to answer questions quickly at the point-of-care. Easy-to-interpret Levels of Evidence help clinicians rapidly determine the quality of the available evidence.

Biomedical and pharmacological abstracting and indexing database of published literature, by Elsevier. Embase® contains over 32 million records from over 8,500 currently published journals (1947-present) and is noteworthy for its extensive coverage of the international pharmaceutical and alternative/complementary medicine literature.

Scopus is the largest abstract and citation database of peer-reviewed literature: scientific journals, books and conference proceedings. A drug information resource containing: American Hospital Formulary System (AHFS), drug formulary for Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH) and Stanford Hospital & Clinics (SHC), Lexi-Drugs (adverse reactions, dosage and administration, mechanism of action, storage, use, and administration information), Lexi-Calc, Lexi-ID, Lexi-I.V. Compatibility (King Guide), Lexi-Interact, and Lexi-PALS. Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature (CINAHL) contains coverage of nursing and allied health literature. A knowledge database that provides access to topic reviews based on over 6000 clinically relevant articles. The evidence-based content, updated regularly, provides the latest practice guidelines in 59 medical specialties. Provides critical assessments of systematic reviews compiled from a variety of medical journals. Selects from the biomedical literature original studies and systematic reviews that are immediately clinically relevant and then summarizes these articles in an enhanced abstract with expert commentary.

Multidisciplinary coverage of over 10,000 high-impact journals in the sciences, social sciences, and arts and humanities, as well as international proceedings coverage for over 120,000 conferences.

Includes cited reference searching, citation maps, and an analyze tool.

Features systematic reviews that summarize the effects of interventions and makes a determination whether the intervention is efficacious or not.

Cochrane reviews are created through a strict process of compiling and analyzing data from multiple randomized control trials to ensure comprehensiveness and reliability.

Provides systematic coverage of the psychological literature from the 1800s to the present through articles, book chapters and dissertations. PIER (Physicians' Information and Education Resource) is a Web-based decision-support tool designed for rapid point-of-care delivery of up-to-date, evidence-based guidance for primary care physicians. Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) provides access to 300,000 controlled trials that have been identified the Cochrane Collaboration. Provides drug information targeted for patients. A continually updating drug monograph. ECRI Guidelines Trust: A comprehensive database of evidence-based clinical practice guidelines and related documents. MedlinePlus: A repository of health information from the National Library of Medicine. Links are from trusted sites. No advertising, no endorsement of commercial companies or products LPCH CareNotes via MicroMedex: Patient education handouts customized by LPCH clinical staff Micromedex Lab Advisor: Evidence based laboratory test information Provides patient handouts from the American Academy of Family Physician.

Largest, broadest eBook package; covers all sciences, as well as technology (including software), medicine, and humanities.

In addition to covering Wiley and Springer, MyiLibrary is also the only provider for Oxford and Cambridge University Press titles. No seat restrictions.

A collection of biomedical books that can be searched directly by concept, and linked to terms in PubMed abstracts.

A web-based, decision support system for infectious diseases, epidemiology, microbiology and antimicrobial chemotherapy. The database, updated weekly, currently includes 337 diseases, 224 countries, 1,147 microbial taxa and 306 antibacterial (-fungal, -parasitic, -viral) agents and vaccines.

Over 10,000 notes outline the status of specific infections within each country.

Large number of high quality software and database programming titles from O'Reilly. Other software titles are also available from Sams and Prentice Hall. Limited to 7 concurrent users. Includes peer-reviewed life science and biomedical research protocols compiled from Methods in Molecular Biology, Methods in Molecular Medicine, Methods in Biotechnology, Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology, Neuromethods, the Biomethods Handbook, the Proteomics Handbook, and Springer Laboratory Manuals. Contains full text access to selected biomedical and nursing books.

Provides online, full-text access to Springer's journal titles as well as journals from other publishers.

Subjects include: life sciences, chemical sciences, environmental sciences, geosciences, computer science, mathematics, medicine, physics and astronomy, engineering and economics. Also includes eBooks.

Collection of over 8 thousand fulltext titles in engineering, math, and basic and applied biomedical research. Coverage is from 1967 to the present. A library of ebooks on a wide array of topics, digitized and made available online in conjunction with the original publishers.